Blood Ties - Igornerd - Elder Scrolls V: Skyrim [Archive of Our Own] (2024)

Table of Contents
Chapter 1: A Child Is Chosen, A Child is Found Notes: Chapter Text Notes: Chapter 2: Where A Last Stand Is Held Chapter Text Chapter 3: Regrets, Hopes and a Dragon Chapter Text Chapter 4: Simpler in Hindsight Notes: Chapter Text Notes: Chapter 5: Ships, Gold and Journeys Notes: Chapter Text Notes: Chapter 6: Seas, Waves and Journals Chapter Text Chapter 7: Silver, Stone and Steel Notes: Chapter Text Notes: Chapter 8: Photos, Drawings and Memories Chapter Text Chapter 9: Of Dragons, Meetings and Reunions Chapter Text Chapter 10: Lessons And Even More Meetings Chapter Text Chapter 11: Discussions and Sour Truths Chapter Text Chapter 12: Of Awkward Family Dinners and Inquire Chapter Text Chapter 13: Misunderstandings, Doubts and an Arena Chapter Text Chapter 14: In Which Shinobi Meet The Dragonborn Chapter Text Chapter 15: Aftermaths and After That Chapter Text Chapter 16: Moving On and Moving Out Chapter Text Chapter 17: Unpleasant and Uncomfortable Truths Notes: Chapter Text Notes: Chapter 18: Of Gods, Men and Booze Chapter Text Chapter 19: Family Matters and Cultural Differences Chapter Text Chapter 20: Of Armor and Rubber Balls Notes: Chapter Text Chapter 21: Deepening Bonds and Consequences Chapter Text Chapter 22: Learning the Family Business Notes: Chapter Text Chapter 23: All the S-Rank Secrets Notes: Chapter Text Notes: Chapter 24: The Joys of Teaching and Learning. Notes: Chapter Text Chapter 25: Conrad Harissen Does Something Rash Notes: Chapter Text Chapter 26: The Toad, the Snake and the Dragon Chapter Text References

Chapter 1: A Child Is Chosen, A Child is Found

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

It was a cold winter, this one. Even for Skyrim, a land known for its rigid climate, it was a difficult one for its inhabitants.

The denizens of the village of Helgen were all barricaded inside their homes, away from the biting cold. Laughs could be heard coming from the inside of the local inn, and sounds of music and songs.

But no laughs or songs were heating the Harissen household. Husband and wife were sitting quietly on different sides of the common room, ignoring each other in an almost embarrassing way.

After all, this was the last night they would spend under the same roof.

They already stopped sleeping in the same bed. It wasn't like they hated each other, or one of them had an affair. They had married too quickly and realized too late that they just didn't work as a couple. It happened every day, in every part of Tamriel, after all.

So they had decided, in common agreement, to divorce. They brought their case to the jarl and the priest of Falkenrath and asked for the annulment of the marriage. But it was more difficult that they would have believed it to be.

A wailing came from upstairs. Soon, another cry could be heard.

The soon-to-be-former couple met each other's eyes. That was the sound of the only reason why they hadn’t already said their goodbyes to each other a week ago.

The woman nodded and rose, moving towards the stair that took to the house's upper floor. Following the noise, she arrived in the main bedroom where a crib was placed beside the bed she had shared with her husband.

Inside the cradle a pair of toddlers, not even nine months old, were crying. One of the twins had probably woken up and his noise disturbed his brother's sleep. Sitting herself on the border of the bed, the young mother started to swing slowly the cradle and singing a lullaby. She hoped that they would go back to sleep, the last nights had been almost deprived of rest, between the twins waking up and the tension between her and her husband.


They had tried to stay together, for their sons' sakes, they really did. But it wasn't fated to be, it seemed. The worse part was that by decree of the jarl, they would have to split the children. It was a compromise of sorts. None of the parents wanted to lose their offspring. And she had been given the right to choose, by the jarl and the priest alike.

She tried to talk about it with her former husband, but he just washed his hands about the whole thing. The choice was hers, and only hers. Nobody had objected at that, not even the jar. May the Nine—may the Eight damn these men, torturing a mother with such a decision!

The children were asleep again, or so she thought, since they were no longer crying. She gazed at the fruits of her womb with sorrow in her eyes. They were so small, so fragile. They both had her blond hair, but inherited their father's blue eyes.

But who to choose?

She and the twins’ father were both Nords, but she wasn't a Skyrim native like the man she had loved. One of them — the firstborn — was stronger and healthier than his brother. The second twin instead was more frail, and more prone to coughs attack and cold in this season.

She was born in Cyrodiil, and had no family that she knew of in her cold and ancestral land. No bonds to let her stay. Her relatives were living in Leyawiin, half a continent away from Helgen. She wanted to go there, away from Skyrim and all the good and bad memories and regrets.

But it was an hard and dangerous journey, especially for a lone woman with an infant.

She was not a defenceless maiden, having done her share of fights and killing during her days as an adventurer. Ironically, it was during one of her travels she met the father of her sons, a fellow traveller and mercenary. But traveling to Leyawiin, on foot, with a toddler on her back… that was just inviting death by the hands of the bandits that infested the major roadways in these troubled times.

Also it was winter, it was probable that all the passes had been covered in snow by now and become impenetrable.

The alternative would be a ship, but that would be an even longer journey. And more expensive, too. Fewer bandits, but not fewer dangers. Also, there were no ships that sailed from Skyrim to Cyrodiil. Not directly. She would have to change ships at least half a dozen times while traveling along the coast of continent, stopping to resupply in at least two of Tamriel's provinces.

If she was lucky.

High Rock could been safe enough, but then she would have to journey either to the Aldmeri Dominion or Hammerfell.

The Aldmeri Dominion was out of question. That meant no docks at the Summerset Isle, Valenwood or their client-state, Elsweyr. Better to avoid the Thalmor if at all possible.

Hammerfell was independent and devastated since the end of the war. Very few travellers and merchant ships went there. But should she have succeed in finding a passage through it, she could arrive in Cyrodiil, either with a caravan or by docking at the city of Anvil

On the other route, the eastern one, her first stop would logically be Morrowind, but that unfortunate land was in a chaotic situation since the explosion of the Red Mountain in Vvarderfell and all the invasions it had suffered.

Black Marsh had always been hostile to travellers and seceded from the Empire almost two centuries ago and after Umbriel appeared in the skies above Lilmoth...No. She would skip Black Marsh altogether. It wasn't a difficult choice.

But back to the children. She would think about how to travel later.

Who to choose? She knew her former husband loved them, otherwise she would have escaped in the night with both of them, jarl and priest be damned!

Should she take with her the healthier and stronger twin, more likely to survive the travel to her home? Or the frail one, hoping that his health would fare better in the warmer Cyrodill?

“Nines, forgive me,” she murmured.

She made her choice.

Two days later, she was on a carriage that would have taken her to the city of Solitude, the biggest commercial dock of the entire province. In her arms, sheltered from the cold by a layer of blankets and furs, was one of her sons.

From the doorstep of the house where she had lived for two years, her former husband was watching her departing with their other child in his arms.

As the carriage started to move, the two toddlers eyes met, just for a moment.

The twins would never see each other again.

At least, not while alive.


3 months later...

In his long career as a shinobi, Sarutobi Hiruzen had seen a lot of things.

Most of them involved blood, pain, and mortal peril. He had fought in the first Shinobi World War, became Hokage before reaching twenty, led his village in the other two wars and thanks to the assistance some of the greatest, more powerful jutsu known from the times of his generation, he was still alive to tell the tale.

So he should have been prepared for everything when his students finally come back from their first unsupervised, outside of Fire Country no less.

He had felt a sense of relief when he was told by an ANBU that his former genin team had returned to the village, weeks later than expected, but still unharmed.

He couldn’t avoid to feeling a little proud. After all, his students had returned from their first mission in a foreign country, the Land of Tea, without any support from other allied forces.

That was a true testament to their potential and talent, and they were just twelve.

But nothing could prepare the Sandaime for what they carried inside his office to submit their mission report. Such a thing had never been rarely seen in the office of a Kage, and probably never in the hands of a twelve-years old girl.

In Tsunade’s arms, covered by a small bundle of cloth, was a sleeping baby. And a very young one, too, if he could see correctly. Probably only a few months old.

He was slightly baffled by this. Even if he was sure that there was an explanation, it was really something he had never seen before.

His musings where interrupted by a soft cough from Jiraiya and the Hokage realized that he had tuned everything out for minutes out of shock.

“Welcome back,” he said, hiding his embarrassment. “Report.”

“Our mission in the Land of Tea was completed successfully and under the expected time, Sarutobi-sensei,” Orochimaru said, coming closer to the desk and pulling out a scroll out of his backpack.

He accepted the scroll, but instead of opening it, he stared idly at his students, silently demanding an explanation.

“We are sorry for our tardiness,” his pale student added hastily.

“You were supposed to arrive two weeks ago. I was almost at the point of sending a search party after you. What happened?” he asked, sparing a glance to the sleeping infant.

“The day before our departure, a violent storm hit the western coast of the Land of Tea,” Tsunade answered. “It was very strong, and it lasted for days. Even for a shinobi, travelling in that climate would have been dangerous, so we decided to wait until it was over.”

Sarutobi nodded. True, rumors of the massive storms coming from the ocean had reached even Konoha, but not one of those had mentioned how much damage they could cause.

“There was water everywhere!” Jiraiya complained. “A real flood! And we had to save everyone! That’ll show them what an awesome ninja the Great Jiraiya is!”

There was quite a bit of pride in his loudest student's voice.

“We helped because we were paid to, Jiraiya,” Orochimaru sneered. “After we checked into an inn, word spread around and the local lord summoned us. He offered a substantial sum in exchange for our services in helping his people.”

The boy rummaged a while into his rucksack and took out of it two items, a scroll and a large pouch.

“Here’s the contract we arranged with him, and the money we gained.”

“I would’ve helped even if that guy didn’t ask us to,” Jiraiya pouted.

Sarutobi wanted to approve of his white-haired student’s altruism, but he decided to refrain. After that contract signed on the field would give an advantage in the region to Konoha, giving to the village a better reputation and as such, more potential clients.

And the unexpected money was good, too.

But he was reminded of the other matter at hand when the baby woke up and started to cry.

“And what about him? Or it is a her?” he asked, smirking a little at seeing not only Tsunade, but also Jiraiya trying to calm down the screaming little bundle of joy.

With little success. The Hokage noted how Orochimaru’s left eyebrow had developed a small tick. Their trip back home must have been… interesting.

“It’s a he , sensei,” Tsunade clarified, as she slowly lulled the baby.

“When we finally started our journey,” Orochimaru started explaining, “we decided to pass by the coast. The whole region had been devastated by tidal waves. We navigated through it with ease, but five days ago we spotted the ruins of a village on the coast. We would have just carried on, but…”

“But Jiraiya started running towards the ruined village, screaming that he saw something,” Tsunade muttered, after having finally been able to stop the child’s screaming.

“Well, there was something! That’s why I wanted to check!” Jiraiya whined loudly.

“You could have just said that instead of rushing in there! What if it was a trap?!” Tsunade yelled.

They all flinched when a loud wail erupted from the baby. All Sarutobi could do was sigh in frustration.

“There! Look! You made him cry again!” Jiraiya pointed out.

“It was your whining that made him sad, idiot!” Tsunade accused, throwing a jab at Jiraiya’s head.

The crying only grew louder.

“Let’s put him under a genjutsu!” Jiraiya said. “Something that will make him sleep.”

“You can’t use a genjutsu against someone this young, idiot! It could harm him!” Tsunade hissed, trying to calm the baby once again.

“And I didn’t bear his and your wails all the way back to the village to see such an idiotic thing happening,” Orochimaru said, frowning to his white-haired teammate.

“I presume,” the Hokage said, interrupting his students’ antics, “that the ‘interesting thing’ Jiraiya saw was the baby?”

“No, sensei. It was a ship wreck,” the white-haired boy stated matter-of-factly, like it was perfectly normal.

“Oh, well, of course,” Sarutobi indulged. After all, the boy was still a twelve years old. “Would you tell me about this… ship?”

“It was huge ! And it didn’t look like any other ship I saw before! And, and―”

“The ship had obviously been slammed against the shoreline by the storm,” Orochimaru interrupted. “And somehow it wrecked exactly in the ruins of the village’s dock.”

“Hey! I was gonna tell him that!”

“Jiraiya, don’t yell!” Tsunade hushed him, whispering. “I finally managed to calm him down!”

“As Jiraiya said,” Orochimaru continued, ignoring his two teammates, “the ship had a design unlike anything we ever saw before. And…”

After trailing off, the pale boy seemed to hesitate.

Orochimaru hesitating when giving him a mission report? Unheard of!

“Sensei, it was made of a wood I wasn’t able to identify,” his student admitted finally, looking ashamed for his ignorance.

Now, that was really unusual.

“Really now? Could you please describe the design of this ship?” he asked.

“It was long! Really long!” Jiraiya started, enthusiastically. “And there was a wooden animal at the… What’s it called? Prow! There was this wooden horse at the prow of the ship!”

“It was a wooden snake , idiot,” Orochimaru said, rolling his eyes.

“Nooo,” the other boy denied. “You’re saying that just because you’re obsessed with those things.”

“The ship had a single mast, sensei,” Tsunade interrupted, before her teammates started a brawl in the middle of the Hokage’s office. “And the sail probably had to be really big. But the storm damaged it. There were also some shields along its sides, really big round shields.”

“Yeah, they were awesome!” Jiraiya said, pumping his fist in the air. “They were taller than me!”

“Also, the entire ship was clearly heavily damaged by the storm and the impact with the dock,” Orochimaru added.

Sarutobi remained silent for a few seconds, frowning because of his confusion. That didn’t sound like any kind of ship he’d seen, or even heard of.

Had it not been for the baby, he would have already lit his pipe.

“So, you just saw this unusual ship? What happened after that?”

“We arrived besides Jiraiya, who was just looking at the ship wreck with wide eyes, standing right there in the open,” Tsunade said, giving a poignant glance at her teammate, who was now massaging his head.

No doubt Tsunade had clobbered the boy when they had reached him. That would have been typical.

“As they started to argue, we heard a waling cry from above the ship,” Orochimaru said. He launched a brief look at the baby.

“I see,” Sarutobi said. He had already figured out that much. “And what happened after that?”

“I jumped on the ship!” Jiraiya proclaimed co*ckily.

Of course he did. Always so brash and impulsive...

“Even though we told him not to,” Tsunade muttered.

“Hey, there was nobody around!”

“It could have been a trap,” Orochimaru pointed out.

“But it wasn’t!”

“We could have all died, had that be the case,” the pale boy replied.

“But we didn’t!” Jiraiya insisted, defending his case no matter what.

“And what was on that ship?” Sarutobi asked, giving his students a disapproving frown to stop the bickering. “Besides your new… responsibility , of course.”

“Our what? ” the children cried in unison.

“Kidding, kidding,” he said with a mirthful tone. Children these days would believe everything. “But now stop bickering and tell me what did you find on that ship.”

Jiraiya and Tsunade exchanged glances. Apparently they didn’t know how to explain what they had seen.

“Bodies, sensei,” Orochimaru said. Trust him, to be so blunt. “The ship’s bridge was littered with bodies.”

“Mmh, I see,” he muttered. He really wished he could smoke a little. “I suppose they died because of the storm?”

“No, sensei,” Tsunade replied. “There were… significant signs of combat. Most of the bodies showed multiple lacerations, and there were various weapons laying around.”

“There was blood everywhere!” Jiraiya said dramatically.

Most of them?” Hiruzen asked, ignoring the boy’s outburst.

“There were signs of jutsu being used, too!” Jiraiya proclaimed.

Well, that changed everything. Were the other villages planning something?


His eyes narrowed.

“Were any shinobi among the dead?”

“No, sensei. We didn’t find any ninja equipment, not even a kunai or hitai-ate,” Orochimaru replied promptly. His student reached for another scroll inside his backpack. “We have stored the items of interest we’ve found on the ship here. I thought you would have wanted to examine them, they’re quite… unusual.”

Sarutobi accepted that scroll, too. Sparing a single glance at his students whose faces were full of expectation, he opened it.

The stored contents cluttered in a cacophony of metal all over his desk. Swords shaped unlike any katana he had ever seen composed the majority of the metallic mess that was covering his precious paperwork. There were also axes, maces, and other offensive tools scattered among the blades.

He reached for one of the weapons, and unsheathed it, examining the double-edged blade that departed from the vaguely cross-like guard. The metal showed some sign of rust, probably due to having been left uncared on the sea for days. The hilt’s leather felt rough under his hands, and the weapon, even if heavy, looked well balanced.

“Sensei, look at this one! The steel is really hard!” Tsunade said enthusiastically, indicating one that was almost on the end of the pile.

“Steel tends to be hard, Tsunade-chan,” he said as he felt the blade’s edge with his finger.

“Senseeeiii! I mean that its steel is harder ! And it doesn’t even rust!”

Frowning in confusion, the Hokage put the exotic-looking sword in place, deciding to examine this ‘harder steel’ her student was talking about.

Shuffling around the various metal objects, he noted that among them there were also small jewels, pieces of armour, books and other mundane items, and under the whole mass, one of those round shields the kids had told him about. It was made of wood, with a metal border, and it looked really thick. A strangely painted animal was sported on it.

On the top of the shield, was laying the strangest sword he had ever seen, besides the Raijin no Ken that used to belong to the Nidaime Hokage.

The sword didn’t have a scabbard, so he could see the exposed blade. The weapon was a beautiful black color, like a sliver of midnight.

The blade, the guard, and the hilt seemed to have been forged from a single metal piece. If he had thought that the other sword was exotic, this one looked utterly alien.

He grasped the sword and slowly lifted it, surprised by how heavy it was. The metal was cold, and looking at it from a closer distance, he realized that it was not steel. It was a metal unknown to him.

He had never seen anything like this before, indeed .

Where was the ship from? And the child, of course. There was also the matter of the child. Speaking of which...

“Where did you find him?” he asked, carefully lowering the weapon on the rest of the pile.

“We didn’t find him immediately, it took us a few minutes,” Jiraiya started, with a sad tone. “He was bound in a blanket, besides the body of a woman. We think… that she was the baby’s mother.”

“They had the same hair,” Tsunade confirmed. “And she was embracing him, when she died.”

“There were a dozen of bodies around her, too,” Jiraiya continued. “She had killed all of them, using only a sword—”

“What sword was that?” the Hokage asked. He had a strange forebonding feeling.

“The cool black one, sensei. Oh, and she had used at least a fire jutsu.”

Sarutobi eyes widened, and his gazed posed on the child.

Was the little boy the spawn of a shinobi? But if his students hadn’t find any identification symbol or equipment… maybe the woman was a missing-nin that had decided to not show her status using a scratched hitai-ate?

But she couldn’t have been one of the attackers, otherwise why would she have taken with her a baby, one that seemed almost a newborn?

What village could have she come from, to find herself on a ship of unknown origin that crashed on the western coast of the Land of Tea? Who had attacked them? It couldn’t be a hunter-nin’s doing, because the body of the woman hadn’t been destroyed to preserve her village’s secrets.

Pirates, maybe? Pirates with a missing-nin among their midst, that attacked the ship before, or even during the storm?

“Sensei?” his students said, trying to gain his attention.

Blinking his eyes, Sarutobi realized that he had doze off again, lost in his thoughts. He glanced at his students, and saw that another scroll was offered to him, this time by Tsunade.

“We have stored the remains of his mother too, sensei,” said the girl, gesturing with her head towards the baby. “We thought that our medics could have examined her, to see if they could understand something about her.”

Sarutobi knew that Tsunade was referring to the potential secrets that the body could hide within it. He nodded grimly. An autopsy would have probably revealed something about the origin of their mysterious woman.

“How long ago do you think the ship’s crew died?” he asked.

“Difficult to say,” she said, biting her lips. “It was pretty cold, so that may have slowed down the decaying process of the bodies, but I would say… at least two days. No more than three, judging by his state when we found the baby.”

“Thank you Tsunade, now let’s focus again on the child… how was he when did you find him?”

“On the brink of death,” she said. “He had spent spent all that time in the cold, without food. I immediately started an emergency treatment, but to save him I almost suffered from chakra exhaustion.”

“Once the child was no longer in danger of death, we had to stop her,” Orochimaru clarified, causing Tsunade to be a little embarrassed.

“And she fell asleep soon,” Jiraiya added, adding more reasons to Tsunade’s chagrin. “The baby, too.”

“And what happened next?” Sarutobi asked.

“We… disposed of the other bodies,” the white-haired boy said sadly.

“Only because you were so damn stubborn about it,” Orochimaru said, crossing his arms.

“Hey, snake bastard! We couldn’t leave them to the animals!”

“Yes, we could. We lost time with that stupid task,” the pale boy replied.

“But Tsunade was unconscious, we would have lost time anyway!” Jiraiya insisted.

“Hey!” the girl protested, offended by that remark.

“How did you dispose of them?” Sarutobi asked, wondering how his two pupils had managed such a grim duty.

To his surprise, the two boys, instead of answering immediately, looked at each other’s eyes, hesitating.

“We burned them with the ship,” they said in unison.

Sarutobi remained silent for a moment, before finally nodded approvignly. Destroying the remains had probably eliminated all the evidence of its presence, and probably left Konoha as the only Hidden Village that knew of its existence. That way, only Konoha would have gained from this strange encounter.

“After a few hours once Tsunade was able to travel, we departed immediately for Konoha,” Orochimaru continued.

“Which I think was a bad idea,” Jiraiya murmured. “We could have found a place to leave the baby, further inland. Instead, we had to take him all the way back to the Fire Country.”

“I was the team leader, Jiraiya. It was not your decision to make. We’ve already talked about this.”

“And what decision would this be?” Sarutobi asked, smothering another argument between the boys before it could start.

Jiraiya looked away, apparently disapproving Orochimaru’s call.

“The baby is obviously an orphan with no ties that we know of, sensei. Searching and finding a family that would adopt him would have taken time. And since the region had just been flooded—”

“The research for such a family would have probably been unsuccessful, yes,” he interrupted. “But why take him here to Konoha, Orochimaru? You could have just found a family or an orphanage… even a temple, here in Fire Country.”

“Because Konoha needs more shinobi, sensei,” the boy answered.

He nodded, understanding what his student meant. It was not exactly an orthodox recruiting method, but it had already happened in the past.

And the mother of the baby had been obviously some kind of shinobi, even if her origins were unknown. They probably would never know.

And if the boy had inherited some talent from her mother…

“So be it,” he proclaimed. “The child will be placed under the care of our orphanage, and when he will be old enough, he will enter the Academy. It will be then, that we will see if your decision was a good one, Orochimaru.”

“Thanks, sensei,” his student said, bowing slightly.

Jiraiya, instead, pouted.

“Now, what is his name?” he asked, smiling.

There was a long silence, as his students looked at each other’s eyes, their expressions a mix of embarrassment and realization.

“We… we didn’t think of giving him one, sensei,” Tsunade admitted with embarrassment.

“What? You’ve travelled with him for days. Surely you should have given a name to him? After all, you had to call him something when you spoke about him, right?” he asked, hiding his puzzlement.

“We called him ‘baby’... Wasn’t that enough?” Jiraiya asked, honestly confused.

For being so talented shinobi, his students were so clueless about some things. Once again, he had to remind himself that they were only twelve years old.

“Give him to me, Tsunade,” he said, sighing softly as he spread his arms towards her.

The girl came closer to him, passing around the desk, and Sarutobi accepted the infant with a sense of caring that seemed completely out of place with an experienced killer sitting besides a pile of sharp weapons.

The baby didn’t protest as he was gently lulled by the Sandaime’s arms.

Jiraiya tried to suppress a snicker, and failed miserably.

“Something on your mind, Jiraiya?” the older man asked, caressing the child’s spiky blond hair.

“No, sensei,” his student replied quickly. “Sorry sensei.”

“Good. Now, let’s see…” he said, examining the child’s features. “He was taken to us by the storm that hit the coast of the continent, mmh… waves and winds.”

“He was taken here by us , sensei,” Jiraiya muttered. That earned him a slap on the head, courtesy of Tsunade.

“And you said that you found him in the ruins of a dock, right?” Sarutobi asked, without reprimanding the girl’s action.

“Yeah! You could say that the ship managed to dock, no matter what!” the white-haired boy laughed, amused by his own terrible joke.

Nobody else was laughing. Tsunade gave him another slap, and Jiraiya stopped laughing.

“I’ve got it,” Sarutobi announced, grinning. “You will be known as Namikaze Minato.”

“That’s a dumb name, sensei,” Jiraiya whined. Tsunade slapped him one more time.

The now named Namikaze Minato giggled in the Sandaime Hokage’s arms.

Notes:

Omake:

“And what was on that ship?” Sarutobi asked, giving his students a disapproving frown to stop the bickering. “Besides your new… responsibility , of course.”

“Our what ?” the children cried in unison.

Sarutobi nodded. “You found him, you brought him here. Now he’s yours to look after.”

“But sensei, we’re just kids!” Tsunade’s pout could have melted stone.

The Sandaime would not be denied, however.

“You took on the burden of adulthood the day you accepted your hitai-ate. Age is irrelevant.”

“But sensei! I’m too young to have a son!”

“Shut up, Jiraiya! This is your fault!”

As his three new parents started bickering, the baby exploded once again in a loud cry.

Chapter 2: Where A Last Stand Is Held

Chapter Text

The door opened slowly, letting the freezing air from outside enter in the inn's common room.
A tall figure donning a hooded cape and sporting a long walking staff entered, and closed the door behind him, shivering for the cold.

It was a small building, this inn. Little more than a house turned rest stop for any travellers who crossed the road that cut through the Hjaalmarch.


The man
he was clearly a man since there was a beard attached to the chin that peeked through the hoodknew he could have travelled further before the sun set, but he was tired. He was still a day from crossing the Karth River and arriving at Solitude, and he wanted to rest on a warm bed for once.


He quickly scanned the inn, and was surprised to see that he was the only customer there.

The innkeeper was a woman in her thirties, probably the late half. Pretty, but he was not in the mood.


He saluted her with a gesture of his hand and she seemed to relax a bit. She had actually seemed afraid of his presence.

It was only expected, given the tattered weapons and armour dangling from his belt were visible from under his half-cape: a simple dagger that he carried as a last resort weapon and as a tool, and his trusted axe.


Not exactly a visitor that inspired tranquillity in a lone woman.

He decided to ignore her. Maybe that would calm her down. With long strides, he reached the burning hearth placed in the middle of the room. He left his backpack fall on the floor, placed his staff besides it and pulled a seat closer to him and sat there, enjoying the warm fire. After a few minutes, he started feeling much better.

A Nord that hated the cold. Funny.


He finally spoke to the woman, lowering his hood. She gazed for just a second on his blue eyes, her gaze roaming across the scars that ran over his right cheek, starting from his cheekbone.

A little souvenir left to him by a close encounter with a hagraven.


“Something hot, please. And mead,” he added. “I can pay.”

The woman nodded hesitantly and went into the kitchen to fetch a meal for her customer. Why was she so nervous? He hadn’t threatened her, right?

She returned soon, carrying a tray with a full mug, a loaf of bread and a steaming bowl of soup. Apple and cabbage, by the smell.

Why did she look so afraid?

He thanked her and took the tray from her hands. She returned behind the counter and observed him from time to time.

He still hadn't touched his meal.

Why did she seem so afraid?

He took the mead. The sweet alcohol was erupting from it. He lifted the mug, foretasting it. It was his favourite beverage, after all.


He stopped when he saw the woman expression.
Why was she so afraid?


Wait.

What was this smell?

He putted down the mug, looking at it.

Yes, she was very afraid, now.

“This is a trap, isn't it?” he sighed.

The innkeeper's eyes widened. It that was all he needed.


He rose from his seat. The mug fell down.

The woman escaped to the kitchen, screaming for help.

He ran after her. She was reaching for a knife. He didn't give her a chance.

With a jump, he grabbed her and pinned her on the wall, keeping her firm in place with his arms.

“Poison. Deadly. Rare. Not your idea,” he hissed. It wasn't a question.

The woman seemed on the point of pissing herself. She managed to nod.

“Who did this?”

“You know who,” she said, starting to cry.

Yes, he knew who. But if they were able to plan something like this, in a random tavern he was just passing through, that would mean...


That would mean that they had been following him for days. Weeks, even.

But that was not possible. His journey to Solitude had been a secret, and he had travelled for days in the wilderness, avoiding villages and cities and stopping only in their hideouts.

How could it be

He widened his eyes in realization. Someone had betrayed them. Someone had betrayed the Blades.

Faint noises of metal rustling could be heard, coming from somewhere outside of the inn.

He sighed again, closing his eyes. Then slowly, gently, he let go of the woman.

She immediately fell on the ground, sobbing, her head lowered.

“How many?”

“Too many,” replied the innkeeper quickly. “Even for you.”

He undid the lace of his mantle. It would hinder him in the impending fight.

“We'll see. Hide,” he said to the sobbing woman, leaving the kitchen. He left his mantle on the counter, and paid for his uneaten meal.

What a waste of mead.

The blond man grabbed his staff, and extracted a colored vial from one of his pouches. Opening it with only one hand, he swallowed the foul liquid in a single gulp.

As he tossed the empty phial away, he could already feel the fortifying effect of the potion in his body.

He opened the door and left the inn.

Thalmor.

Dozens of them.


Our Hero, our Hero, claims a warrior's heart...

As he ordered to his mer to surround the entrance of the inn, Ederion knew something had gone wrong.

If the stupid woman who they had coerced into playing the role of the innkeeper hadn't called them yet, then their target had suspected something. Probably he had killed her; she was expendable after all.

That's what Ederion would have done, in his target's place.

Ederion counted among the younger Justiciar present in Skyrim, but he was one of the more cunning and dangerous. When he was offered this mission, he accepted without a second thought.

Should he complete it successfully, it would be a great boost to his career.

Following their target in the wilderness without being detected while leading so many soldiers had been a difficult task, but he had been able to do it.

He was the best of the best, after all.

The various elves had barely finished to get in position, that the door to the wooden shed opened.

His soldiers tensed immediately. A shield wall was raised, spears were pointed towards the entrance, and arrows were nocked.

A man left the building, walking like he was just going for a stroll.

Whispers started among the ranks. Even if the soldiers under his command were not all veterans, they weren’t green either. But they all had heard the stories of the Dragonborn.

The sworn enemy of the Aldmeri Dominion, and of the Thalmor especially.

The warrior who had slain dragons, men and mer alike during Skyrim’s Civil War.

The right hand of the gods-damned Blades’ leader.

The boogieman that the elven mothers had started using for scaring their children, so that they would eat all the soup at dinner.

In the eyes of his mer, the man out there was a legend.

Ederion was just looking at the man, instead. A fool, weak man that looked a little more than a tattered vagrant, with a scarred face, an old armour and a walking stick.

True, he was the Dovahkiin, but he was getting older now. The man had passed his physical peak at least ten years ago, and with time he would just grow weaker and die.

But still, it was always best to tie up loose ends. After all, he had proven quite a threat in the past, and he could possibly keep being one for decades.

The Justiciar was sure that almost all the man’s biggest achievement were just exaggerations. Tales overstated by the bards that seemed to infest this forsaken barbarian country, the most dangerous thing about the man standing before them wasn’t his battle prowess: it was his reputation.

He and his few companions represented the single greatest resistance the Aldmeri Dominion had to face since before the Great War, and that would not be tolerated anymore.

He raised his hand, ready to give the signal for the archers. Today, the Dragonborn’s legend would come to an end.

But as he was savoring the idea of turning the man to a pincushion with only a gesture of his hand, when something that he had never expected happened, which made him hesitate.

The man let go of his staff, who fell on the frozen ground. He remained there, unmoving, looking at the company of soldiers in front of him.

Then, slowly, he raised his open palms and placed them behind his head.

Murmurs could be heard among the mer once again, but this time they were caused by shock and surprise.

The Dragonborn was surrendering.

Ederion smirked, signaling to the archers to stand down.

The man knew he could not win here. Not against this many trained soldiers.

Ederion’s mind was abuzz. If he could manage to take that man alive… as his prisoner and back to Alinor in chains…

The glory… he could already feel it.

No.

No, the Dragonborn was too dangerous to be just kept prisoner, and executed into the capital's main plaza.

But the glory could still be his.

After all, what was the difference between taking prisoner one of the greatest enemies of the Dominion, and bringing back his head instead?

He advanced towards the surrendering man, slowly extracting the sword. The man was just standing there, looking at the ground. Ederion came closer.

He was going to be the one who did it, he was going to be the slayer of the Dragonborn!

“Conrad Harissen,” he spoke, full of righteous glee. “By the authority given to me from the Thalmor, for the crime of being a Talos worshipper, and for your multiple aggressions against the Aldmeri Dominion, I condemn you to—”

“FUS—”

I tell you, I tell you, the Dragonborn comes...

With a voice wielding power of the ancient nord art

Believe, believe the Dragonborn comes...

—RO DAH!” he shouted, watching the Justiciar soar through the air and finally slam against the shields of the Thalmor soldiers with a stupefied expression plastered on his face.

Sucker.

Too bad the elf hadn’t hit one of those spears.

Conrad quickly knelt, grabbing his fallen staff and avoiding the few arrows that the archers who weren’t completely shocked had managed to shoot.

He’d better find a solution for them. Fast.

Raising his right hand, he quickly channelled his power, moving his fingers through the necessary phases. Flames flickered between them, caressing his palm.

Various fireballs departed from his extended hand, exploding on the Thalmor’s shield wall. This resulted in dozens of pained screams, a few dead soldiers, and smoke.

Lots and lots of smoke which blocked the archers’ line of fire, giving him a few seconds to formulate a strategy.

Running away was not an option. The terrain around the inn was almost completely composed of snowed plains. The salt marshes of the region were too far, and he would have an hard time losing such a force among them. If he wasn’t killed by the archers while he made a run for it.

Levitation was not an option either because he would have just made himself a flying target, instead of a running one.

To fight was the only choice he had.

To annihilate was his only option.

As arrows sailed over his head, he kept moving, still half-crouched.

With precise movements of his free hand, he twisted the very fabric of reality for a brief moment, summoning an ally from a different plane of existence. A being made of flames, its form vaguely feminine, materialized besides him. It was hovering a foot above the ground, looking at Conrad with anticipation, waiting for its master’s instructions.

“Kill the archers!” Conrad yelled. The atronach departed immediately, unleashing a jet of flaming fury against the soldiers.

Conjuring the daedra after that volley of fireballs had taken its toll on his magicka reserves,he could already feel the effects of the potion, refilling his spent mystical energy steadily.

Getting up, he used the few recuperated energies to weave a defensive barrier around his body. Once the protection was set, he sprinted towards the Thalmor’s barely-visible lines, taking his axe from his belt.

He emerged from the smoke, right in front of an Altmer who clumsy attempted to stab him with his spear. A simple spin, and the charging Dragonborn knocked the weapon away with his staff, driving the blade of his axe deep inside the elf’s unprotected neck.

The soldier died almost instantly, and with a twist of his right hand he freed the weapon, sending the corpse slamming into his comrades’ ranks.

He pressed on, breaking the skull of a shocked Thalmor with another swing, splitting his helm in two. He did a hastened pirouette to side-step the lunge of his enraged companion, while channelling his power into his staff, shooting an hail of lighting into the spearmen—err, spearmer.

They fell, fuming from the joints of their armours, still twitching even after their death by electrocution.

The confusion among the Thalmor soldiers was bloody hilarious.

Too bad it didn’t last for long.

Conrad ducked, feeling a broadsword cutting the air above him, where his head had been a split-second ago. He lunged the sturdy oaken staff in the middle of the warrior’s legs, and twisted, tripping him and making him fall on the ground on his back.

Before the elf could even try to get up, Conrad had already brutally struck his chest with his axe three times.

“Is this all you've got?!” he questioned as he dislodged the weapon from the fallen’s rib cage, grinning at the golden-plated soldiers that were surrounding him.

The response he received was an arrow that would have hit him in the chest, hadn’t it been stopped by the magical protection around him. A faint flash of light, and the projectile bounced harmlessly on the ground.

Apparently, the flame atronach was not doing such a great job at distracting the lot of them, since there were so many.

He couldn't afford to stay in the open, but the middle of a melee, even the Thalmor would not risk to hit one of their own.

With a mighty battle cry, he charged his enemies, that were waiting for him not far away, spears raised.

He waited until the last instant, then he shouted again. The blast of the Unrelenting Force opened a wide hole in the middle of their ranks, sending the soldiers in the front flying backwards as the others staggered to maintain their footing.

Running directly among the prone Thalmor, stepping on them, he quickly hit the dirt with his staff one, two, three, four times.

Each time the end of the staff struck the ground, a different elemental rune was created on the spot. He had barely the time to outrun them as they exploded one after another, triggered by the movements of the dazed warriors.

As flames, bursts of cold, discharges of electricity and rocks blasted out of the very ground beneath him, he lunged forward, without looking back.

It's an end to the evil of all Skyrim's foes

Beware, beware the Dragonborn comes...

A loud explosion, or maybe a series of explosion in close succession, was the first thing he heard clearly when he was able to breathe normally again.

Ederion had been almost knocked out from the impact against the soldiers under his command, and was suffering from aches on his whole back.

Groaning in pain—something that ashamed him greatly—he rolled on his flank, trying to get a better footing.

He looked around. He had lost his sword during his unexpected flight, and he hated being unarmed in a dangerous situation.

But his blade was not what he found, searching around from where he was laying.

What he saw instead was a man that had just slaughtered a good third of his soldiers.

How was this possible? Was it that difficult for those incompetents fools to kill a simple human?!

He should have ordered to bring him down with multiple volleys of arrows.

The Justiciar felt someone grabbing his arm, and pulling him up. Sparing it a glance, he recognized one of his trusted battlemages.

“Don’t touch me!” he shouted as he slapped away the armored hand. “And go to kill that lowborn bastard!”

Instead of joining the melee, setting him on fire or wasting him with bolts of lighting, the battlemages looked at each other, hesitantly.

“Forgive me, my lord. But shouldn’t we try to eliminate the target w—”

“Just DO IT!” he snapped, almost frothing in his frustration. “DO IT, DO IT DO IT!”

Intimidated by his sudden explosion, the elite spellcasters unsheathed their weapons and jogged towards the battle, spilling out in a fan formation. Their march was a solid line of metal and magic, ready to destroy the enemy.

“AND SOMEBODY DESTROY THAT DAEDRA,” Ederion ordered, not really caring about them anymore. “I WANT THOSE ARCHERS READY!”

He was on the point of ordering someone, no matter who, to fetch his weapon, when he heard it.

A cry of pain, from the fight. And not an elven one.

Snapping his head in the direction of the combat, he saw that the Dragonborn had been wounded, a slash had struck true in his arm, in spite of the armour the man was wearing.

Now he was staggering, his staff lost, swinging his axe to keep the lancers at bay while walking backwards. Crimson rivulets were clearly visible on his wounded limb.

Ederion smiled.

No matter how formidable the man was, he was still just a man, a man fighting a great number of trained soldiers.

Victory would be his.

For the darkness has passed

And the legend yet grows

“f*ck off, you murdering BASTARDS!” Conrad yelled, as he killed another Thalmor with a crude blow of his weapon.

The last jab had shattered his magical protection, and the spear’s sharp end had left a deep gash on his forearm, causing him to let go of his staff. The limb felt so heavy, after the wound he had received, but he was still able to move it, and clench a fist.

Which was good.

The fact that he was surrounded, and he had lost momentum… that was not good. The trick with the four runes had cost him almost all his magicka reserves, so frying the pansy elves was out of question.

The effect of the potion he had he had drunk before leaving the inn was almost due, and it wasn’t replenishing his magical energies like before.

He fumbled on his pouches, the blood on his palm rendering the leather slippery.

An elven warrior, noticing his lapse of concentration, lunged towards him, spear pointed at Conrad’s belly.

He side-stepped, batting the polearm away with the blunt part of the axe. The spear’s point hit the ground, piercing it, and he kicked the Altmer with all his strength in the groin.

As the elf’s face contorted in a pained expression, as knelt, gasping for air. Conrad finished him with an horizontal slash aimed to the mer’s cheek, and finally retrieved another vial from his pouch.

It was one of his weakest potions, though. In his haste, as he stumbled with his pouches, he had opened the wrong one.

Well, beggars couldn’t be choosers.

He swallowed the potion in a single, short swill, just in time to notice another incoming attacker, charging at him and yelling like a madman.

He wouldn’t be able to dodge, this time, so he reacted reflexively.

He threw his axe, that plunged its head completely into the elf’s chest, breaking the armour. The Altmer just stared at it with a stupefied expression, before finally collapsing.

“Come on, let’s rush him now!” someone among the Thalmor lines said. “He’s unarmed!”

“Unarmed my ASS!” he cussed at them, gnashing his teeth while unsheathing his dagger with his left hand.

Seeing that his defense was only a glorified steel knife, they charged in unison.

Idiots.

Conrad went to meet their assault, dagger ready while he raised his free hand in the air. He could feel his inner power, feeble as it was after too much usage.

He called upon it, and a sword appeared in his hand, conjured in the same way he had summoned the atronach. The newly created blade descended, and daedric metal met moonstone.

Moonstone lost, and elven blood splattered on Conrad’s metal breastplate.

The retribution for this latest kill was not late to come.

He tightened his grip on the two weapons, and he moved, like a whirlwind, dodging, parrying and redirecting the incoming strikes. The few ones he couldn't, he had to count on his armour to protect him.


Conrad didn’t restrict himself to idle defense. He moved the sword in wide, powerful swings, while stabbing quickly with the shorter blade every time he saw an opening.

More and more Thalmor fell under them.

Two spearmer tried to attack him from both sides at the same time, but he just averted their thrusts with a simple turn of his body and rotating his sword.

They collided with each other, losing balance. The daedric blade beheaded the first, while the dagger punctured the second's lungs.

He freed the shorter blade with a strong pull, doing a low sweep with the conjured weapon at the height of another elf’s legs, cutting deep. The warrior fell, wailing in pain.

Conrad helped ease his pain, with the courtesy of a a dagger in his eye socket. As he wrested the weapon from there, he could hear a squelching noise.

“Come on now!” he taunted. “Who’s ne—”

He wasn’t able to finish his question, since a fire bolt exploded on his torso, sending him back, sprayed on the ground. The center of his breastplate had become almost red-hot, and his beard had been singed.

It hurt like Oblivion.

Who was the asshole he had to kill, now?

He forced himself to stand, and saw the asshole, and his battle brethren.

An entire squadron of battlemages.

It had been years since the last time he had fought a squadron of battlemages.

He grinned, finally on his feet.

“TIID KLO UL!”

You'll know, you'll know the Dragonborn's come...

Ederion could barely believe his own eyes.

A part of him started to realize why the songs portrayed the Dragonborn as someone able to do such amazing feats, and he had to see on his own the human’s battle prowess.

The Nord had made short work of everyone who had tried to bring him down so far.

But now...now it looked like he was not even trying, and he was cutting them down like a sickle through weed.

He moved at an unnatural speed, none of his movements seemed to be wasted, and each swing of his weapons slayed a elf.

It was then, when the last of the spearmer fell and their single enemy started to kill the battlemages with ease, that Ederion understood.

That was not a man.

It was a monster.

And he had to be dealt as such.

He looked through the surviving archers. There were still quite a lot of them, but they weren’t able to deal with a simple fire atronach.

Pathetic.

Walking towards them, he snatched a bow from the hands of the first he reached. Without stopping, he took an arrow from the second.

In a single, fluid motion, he nocked the arrow and released the string.

The projectile pierced the flaming daedra’s neck, who shrieked in pain, losing quickly physical consistency and finally disappearing.

He tossed rudely the weapon to the archer he took it from, not really caring if the mer caught it or not.

He had to prepare his trap, and quickly.

“Listen to my orders now, and prepare, we’ll have only one chance!” Ederion yelled at the stupefied bowmer. “I don’t care how many of you have died! KILL the motherf*cker!”


Dovahkiin, Dovahkiin

Naal ok zin los vahriin

Parry, deflect, thrust in the stomach.

Slowing time itself with that dragon shout and exploiting the openings that normally he would not be able to see could be interpreted like cheating from others, or playing dirty.

Side-step, hack, stab in the neck.

Which was fine for Conrad. He had learned decades ago that there was no ‘honorable combat’, especially against an higher number of opponents.

Feint, slash, puncture liver.

And being able to dodge with ease the incoming spells of the battlemages he was butchering was a pretty nifty bonus. No matter how slow the time flowed, flames and ice shards still hurt if they touched you.

Slice, thrust, sink both blades into an armored chest, watch as it erupts with blood.

Turning slightly, Conrad saw one elf going for his head, warhammer raised and ready to strike.

At the worst possible moment, time chose to start flowing normally again.

Conrad swore.

He barely avoided having his head smashed in, but the weapon managed to impact with his shoulder instead.

The blow was enough to make him stagger, desperately grasping for some semblance of balance.

The battlemage didn’t lose the chance. Moving on his flank, he slammed a second blow, harder than the previous, straight into Conrad’s back.

Conrad fell to his knees, gasping for air and barely able to hold his weapons.

He felt the steps of the heavily-plated spellcasters behind him come to a stop. The Thalmor was probably raising the hammer again, this time for a finishing blow.

Was this the way all the dragons he had slain felt, before the end?

He felt despair claw at his soul.

Was this how his journey would come to an end? Killed by a no-name servant of his enemies, on a snowy field littered with bodies?

Well, this was a surefire way to the gates of Sovngarde. Again, and this time forever.

At least there would be mead there.

He heard a slight scrape on the snow behind him. The Thalmor had shifted his position to land better hit.

It was coming.

No.

No.

He wouldn’t die like this. He refused to die like this!

He stabbed blindly behind him, hoping for the best. A pained groan was his answer.

Conrad had no clue what he managed to hit, but he didn’t give a damn. He twisted the blade and pulled.

The action was rewarded by the sensation of warm blood spraying his hand, and by a loud, metallic thud.

Only two battlemages left, a few feet from him.

As he got on his feet, the two Altmer looked at each other. They nodded, and started to circle him from different directions, charging offensive spells

He would not be able to reach one of them without being hit by the other’s magic.

But he could try.

He lunged forward, running on the snow and reading his right arm for a killing swing.

That was the moment when the daedric sword dispelled, having reached the limit of its existence.

There was no time to conjure another weapon, so he had to improvise.

Closing his right hand in a fist, he punched the battlemage in the face. The opening in the helm was wide enough, but he had probably broke his pinkie because of the contact with the solid metal that framed the mer’s face.

It really hurt, and he cried in a mix of rage and pain. He was satisfied to have broken the Altmer’s nose, though.

The battlemage faltered, dazed by the blow.

Conrad could feel the other one, feel as the magic hummed in the air. He was a short distance away, finishing his spell.

Grabbing the dazed Altmer's neck, so hard that he was choking him, Conrad turned, pushing the elf into the path of the deadly magic.

Ice shards stabbed the mer, and he fell to the ground.

The last of the battlemages was not long in joining his bretheren past the void when Conrad's dagger soared into the air and buried itself in his eye.

Lucky shot.

Turning around, Conrad realized that he was standing alone in the middle of the bodies, in the open, with no weapons, and standing right in front of the remaining archers.

Almost twenty of them, and their arrows were already knocked and aimed at him.

Stupid daedra, it only had one job!

But there was no time for that.

The Justiciar gave an order.

The bows shot.

Conrad raised his left arm, once again calling upon his power.

He hadn’t enough magicka or time to create a protective barrier like before, so he opted for the next best thing.

A shield, a daedric one, appeared already strapped to his forearm.

He had no magicka left, and his mind was slightly foggy as a result. Still, he was able to raise the shield to protect his head and chest from the incoming arrows.

The projectiles bounced off the hard metal surface, becoming virtually useless as they lost their momentum.

Too bad the shield couldn’t protect his legs.

One hit his left leg, but it was the right that had it worse, and various arrows snaked their way into his muscle and bone.

Screaming in anguish, he fell on his side.

The Thalmor were cheering, especially the Justiciar

So, this was how he was going to die? What a joke! The great and almighty Dragonborn, slayer of Alduin World-Eater, brought down by an arrow to the knee.

Pathetic.

They were coming.

He had maybe one shout at disposal, two if he strained his throat.

Unable to move. No weapons. No magicka left. Bleeding from the wounds...

Aye, he was screwed.

Unless he used that shout.

The one he hated using. Mostly because the place from which he called that power from gave him the creeps.

But when the alternative was having your body paraded through the Aldmeri Dominion as some elf’s trophy...

He saw the Justiciar picking up a discared sword from the ground and looking at him like if his head was the best thing the he had ever seen.

Conrad’s rage erupted, and his dragon blood sang.

“DUR NEH VIIR!”

Wah dein vokul mahfaeraak ahst vaal

Ahrk fin norok paal graan

That morning, as he marched in the snowy region, at the head of his soldiers, Ederion was expecting an easy task.

Collect body of a deadly poisoned man, a criminal, bring him home, and claim the glory.

Then, said man had left the tavern, and started his single-handed slaughter.

And Ederion had got frustrated.

So he had sacrificed more and more soldiers, but nothing worked.

His frustration had deepened.

He had even been tossed away by one of those shouts! Humiliated in front of his own soldiers!

Screw that, he was FURIOUS!

And FINALLY, the Dragonborn was hit with a volley of arrows. As it should have been from the very beginning.

As he had saw the fallen warrior gasping on the ground, he had started to move closer, willing to give the final blow himself.

Then, there was another of those gods-damned shouts.

A black and purple sphere of ethereal flames swirled in front of the Dragonborn’s prone form.

Then, the stench of death and putrefaction.

And then, Ederion and his bowmer were staring at a dragon.

The Justiciar was speechless, shocked beyond belief.

The plan was f*cked.

Some of the archers screamed and made a run for it, mad with terror.

This, unfortunately for them, caught the dragon’s attention.

With a beat of leathery wings and a foul miasma, the massive creature was on them.

That was the last straw.

All the remaining elves, all but Ederion, started running, trying to escape the dragon’s wrath.

Ederion had failed.

He had put his reputation on the line with this mission, taking with him an entire company of trained soldiers and even a battlemage squadron.

And now none of them would make it back alive.

There was no way in Mundus that he would be able to survive to the thing that was soaring in the sky, freezing the fleeing soldiers with his breath, or assaulting them on the ground.

He heard the sound of bones breaking, of armour and organs squelching as a one thing under the creature’s jaws.

No way he would survive the summoned dragon.

Wait.

Summoned?

The dragon… it was a summoned creature!

Summoned creatures followed some rules, ways how the magic that conjured them worked.

For example, unless a ritual or something else was used, the summoning would not be permanent.

And if the summoner was killed, the conjuring spell would cease, and the creature would disappear.

He turned immediately to the still prone form of Conrad Harissen.

Tightening his grip on the sword, he charged.

He was going to survive this!

The glory could still be his!

“DIE!” he screamed at the top of his lungs, as his blade descended on the man.

There was a metal clang as the sword clashed against the daedric shield littered with arrows.

How dared the bastard defend himself?!

“DIE! DIE! DIE! DIEEE!” Ederion shouted like a madman, striking with all his strength each time he yelled the word.

And each time, the shield would save the Dragonborn’s worthless life.

Snarling, Ederion kicked the wounds on the man’s legs.

The pained howl that followed his action made him smile inwardly.

With a sweep of the sword, followed by another powerful kick, he was able to rip the shield out of the Dragonborn’s grasp.

The daedric item disappeared, having lost contact with its summoner’s body.

He raised the long blade, the tip pointed down, ready to descend on the man’s heart.

It was over.

His assurance was betrayed when the man punched him in the groin. Hard.

He fell down besides the man, moaning in pain.

His sword fell, and a pair of strong hands went for his neck.

Ederion struggled, escaping from the Nord’s attempted grab.

And received another punch, this time in the left kidney.


He retaliated with a kick on the man’s right leg.

They were now grappling, wrestling, punching, kicking and rolling over each other, screaming in pain, rage and frustration.

Finally, Ederion was able to overcome the wounded man, and reach for the sword.

Without getting up, he tried to slit the man’s throat with it, almost succeeding.

Almost.

The Nord was actually stopping the blade with his own hands!

Growling like a beast, Ederion applied all his weight on the sword. As the edge started to deeply cut his palms, the Dragonborn hissed.

Then his azure eyes met Ederion’s golden ones.

“Yol,” the man said, in a non-human voice. His eyes made something strange, and Ederion hesitated in front of the strange phenomenon.

“Toor,” the Dragonborn continued. Small embers left the man’s mouth.

The azure yes...Ederion could see it clearly now. They had become slitted.

Like those of a dragon.

The man’s mouth opened again. A bright similar to the one of a furnace was visible at the end of his throat.

“SHUL!”


Ederion’s head was lambed by flames hot as a dragon’s breath, his brain cooked almost instantly.

He never saw the human pushing his corpse away.

He never saw the Dragonborn reaching for the pained neck, strained because he had used too many shouts in quick succession. Or how he extracted a big, red vial out of one of those pouches and tried to drink it.

And he never saw the Dragonborn fall unconscious for the wounds he had suffered, potion still in hand, bleeding in the now red snow.


Fod nust hon zindro zaan

Dovahkiin, fah hin kogaan mu draal

In the world contained in the depths of the Shinigami’s stomach, a lonely white-cloaked figure stirred inside the ruined tower he used as a hiding place.

He could feel a new presence in this terrible realm, and it wasn’t one of its terrible denizens.

Who had just arrived in this wasteland dominated by the dead and lost souls?

Chapter 3: Regrets, Hopes and a Dragon

Chapter Text

Conrad slowly opened his eyes.

The first thing his mind registered was that he was not in pain.

The second was that he was not feeling cold.

That was a relief, actually.

The dark purple, constantly storming sky was not.

His nostrils were assaulted by how wrong the air felt, on an almost metaphysical level.

And by a foul stench.

“Qahnaarin, you’ve awakened,” a deep voice resounded behind him.

Durnehviir.

Turning his head, he saw the putrefied dragon sitting on the grey dirt, in the arena where he had fought him so many years ago.

He was in the Soul Cairn.

Why was he in the Soul Cairn?

“Am I dead?” the Nord asked, rising slowly on his feet. He didn’t try to hide the apprehension from his voice.

If it turned out that he had to pass the whole afterlife in such a terrible place, it would be a major case of rotten luck.

And something he would expect, given his lifetime’s experience with it.

“No, Dovah. You are only mostly dead.”

“And that’s better… how?” Conrad asked, voice rife with sarcasm. The dragon was unperturbed.

“Your body, back in the Mundus, is not dead, yet. Should it survive, you will be able to return to it.”

“My… body? You mean that I’m not here physically?” he asked, gesturing to their surroundings. “And now that I think about it, how did you manage to take me here? And why?”

“Our deal. When you summoned me for the first time, our contract was sealed. Since you are now very close to Dinok, to death, I was able to take your spirit here. Temporarily, of course. Unless you die.”

“Well, I thank you for informing me of this possible use of our agreement… a decade later,” he deadpanned, not pleased by this revelation at all.

“You’re welcome.”

Did the rotting flying lizard just snort at him?

It was difficult to tell between the deep voice and decaying flesh.

“Would you just tell me why you brought me back with you?”

“I was asked to.”

Now, that was not Conrad was expecting.

“You were asked?!” he asked, incredulous. “By who?”

“By him,” the dragon said, indicating with a single talon somewhere behind the Dovahkiin.

Conrad turned.


When Namikaze Minato sealed the Kyuubi into his newborn son so many years ago, sacrificing his own soul to the Shinigami, he was expecting to experience either an existence of unimaginable pain, his very soul slowly consumed by the death god’s stomach, or a complete, utter void with nothing for eternity.

Instead, it turned out that the bottom of the Shinigami’s stomach was the resting place of this weird dimension, filled with strange ruins, lost souls, terrible creatures that preyed on them, reigned by those malignant beings that referred to themselves as the “Ideal Masters”.

Masters who were apparently unaware of their being somehow similar to parasites, living in a god’s belly.


Minato was still wondering if being consumed or existing in a complete void wouldn’t have been a better option.

When he had gained awareness of his surroundings after his death, he was bewildered.

Not only was this strange world dark, dangerous, and terrible, it was also incredibly foreign. Alien, even.

Even in his dead and incorporeal state, he had to learn how to survive against the monsters that dwelled in the barren wastes.

Apparently, there were not a lot of souls that spoke his own tongue. He had actually met one once, but that shinobi had been in this place for so long that his sanity was in tatters.

Inwardly, Minato was utterly afraid of becoming like him with the passing of the decades.

But he would not surrender to his fate, waiting for that slow descent into madness, year after year, until there was just a husk with barely a mind inside.

He was, or had been during his life, the Yondaime Hokage of Konohagakure. He didn’t like to boast his title, but if the creatures of this place and their masters wanted to destroy either his soul or his sanity, they would have to fight him for it.

The first years had been pure hell: there was no other way to describe it.

Followed, stalked, chased, even hunted down. He lived months of continuous conflict.

But he was dead. Not having to deal with mortal necessities like sleep, thirst, or hunger had their own advantages.

Then one day, the creatures stopped coming.

They still attacked him if he came too close to them, but they stopped hunting him like they had before. Apparently, destroying legions of them had made them realize that it was a waste of time and resources.

Even if the Ideal Masters seemed to have a neverending supply of them.

Having more time to do something else beside fight, run, and hide, he was able to interact with the other less-aggressive denizens of his new world.

Slowly, he had learned the language spoken from the majority of the souls that filled this strange realm. Learning a language from scratch was not easy, but he had time, after all.

It had been a long and tedious task, mostly because a lot of the souls in this place were cursing their fate or generally being miserable about it.

As his mastery of the language improved, he learned more and more bits of pieces of cultures and histories of what seemed to be another world entirely.

Who would have guessed that a whole different continent existed on the other side of the great ocean? Filled with lands, nations, people, traditions…

There were even different species. Races that weren’t even human, with their own civilizations.

And nobody in Konoha… nobody in the Fire Country… no, scratch that. Nobody in the whole Elemental Nations knew about any of it.

He was eager to learn all he could, and speaking for a few days—or weeks—with the rare souls willingly to, helped him remain in good mental shape.

After all, he needed to think about something besides his family’s fate.

Kushina… what had been her soul’s fate? He prayed that she had gone to a better place. Surely, there had to be one.

And Naruto, his son…

Was he growing up well? Had he been taken care for? Was he fine? Was he safe?

Not knowing that, above all things...that hurt more than any torment he had suffered since he arrived in this forsaken place.

Being completely unable to change that, he had opted all the time his train of thoughts for a simple solution. Think about something else, because it hurt too much.

And for the longest time he had not strayed from that pattern.

It had continued that way, year after year, for the longest time, until a fortuitous encounter.


Since then, Minato had been given a ray of hope in this damned place.

He had formed a plan, and put it in motion. It had took a long time but now the older—who was not really older—man was standing in front of him.

It was a strange experience, like looking at a mirror that twisted the image reflected on it.

The older-looking blond had shorter hair, and broader shoulders, but that could have been an impression given from the armour he was wearing. A short beard covered his face and three long scars were etched into his right cheek.

And the eyes, even if they had the same shade of azure, were a little colder. And right now were completely widened.

But the resemblance was uncanny.

The only problem now, was how to tell him—

“Who the f*ck are you?” the man snarled, his expression morphing to a scowl.

Well. That was a good way to start, no matter how blunt.

He scratched his head, thinking how to reply. Should he…?

Well, there were not a lot of ways to answer to that question.

I,” Minato said, pointing to his chest with his hand, “am your brother.”

The man in front of him—his brother, he had to remind himself—just stared at him, blinking for a few seconds.

“Say what?” was the question he received, a little more than a whisper.

The great undead dragon was looking at the whole scene, apparently amused.

“I said, I am your—”

“I heard that! I’m not deaf!” his brother snapped. “What are you blabbering about?!”

Minato sighed. He had been afraid of a similar reaction.

After all, they both hadn’t been aware of each other’s existence, and Minato had learned of Conrad’s only after his death.

In his brother’s eyes, he was probably just a random ghost that somehow resembled his appearance, claiming to have some blood ties with him.

“I understand that it’s difficult to believe, but—”

“f*ck OFF!” his twin snarled, interrupting him again. “If you think you can just tell me something like that and—”

“Vazah, Dovahkiin,” the dragon Durnehviir said, with his deep voice. “It’s true.”

That stopped the outburst, and the man turned towards the great dragon, slowly, an accusing finger still pointed towards Minato.

“What? Durnehviir, don’t tell me that you believe this—”

“I was the one who told your Zeymah, your brother’s soul, that you’re of the same Sos, the same blood.”

There was a moment of complete silence, disturbed only by the winds of the desolate place.

Then, slowly, Minato’s brother turned to face the dragon unable to die, his eyes slitted.

“How can you be sure of this?” he hissed.

“I met your Zeymah when I came back in this Dur Lein, cursed world, after the last time you summoned me.”

“The last time, you said?” Minato’s brother asked, looking pensive. “But that was...five years ago.”

“Geh, yes. When you and your Aar attacked your enemy’s stronghold. It was a good fight.”

“The Blades are not my servants, dragon,” the man said, bitterly. “I’m not their master, and I don’t want to be.”

Minato was a little confused by his brother’s statement. From what he had learned in these years, he was supposed to be some kind of champion, a leader of men. And even some mer, too.


That was how he had been told about, at least. So why was he denying that?

“They follow you in battle, Dovahkiin. They follow your orders, that makes you their In.”

“Whatever. I don’t want to talk about my position in the resistance with you. I already have Delphine pressing me about it,” the not-yet-dead man said, sighing. “Just keep going with your tale, Durnehviir.”

“As I came back to the Ideal Master’s dominion, I saw him. He soon proved to be a Bahlan Kendov. A worthy warrior. We fought quite often.”


“It was just a random encounter,” Minato said sheepishly, thinking that he should add his own account to the dragon’s tale. “I was just travelling on the plains, and Durnehviir appeared from nowhere, and attacked me immediately.”

“We fought and fought for months, because he was a good adversary. He met me blow for blow. A distraction from my cursed existence.”

“Yeah, well… I was not really happy about it, actually,” the Yondaime said.

Durnehviir ignored him.

“Grah Pruzah, we had. I usually won.”

Minato rolled his eyes, resisting the urge to reveal the real wins and defeats ratio. He had learned that the dragon had an ego bigger than his body, and often liked to boast his power.

He suspected that the same could be said for all the others of his kin.

“But as time went on… I started to have my suspicions,” the dragon continued. “Even if he was a just a Sillesejoor, the soul of a mortal, he was able to resist me. Even beat me, a few times.”

“You know, you’re still not telling me why—” the Dragonborn tried to say.

“He resembles you very much, Dovah—”

“A lot of Nords resemble me! We’ve all blond hair and beards, or so the stereotype says. Get to the point!”

“And his Sil, his soul… even if it is a human one… he smells like a Dovah.”

For the second time, silence filled the great arena before Minato’s brother interrupted it.

“Are you saying… that he was Dragonborn, too?!”

“No. His soul is a Joor’s, a mortal’s, of the Jul, a human soul…” Durnehviir spoke, slowly. “But he had been close to a Dovah when the souls entered both of your bodies. In his… and yours… Monah. When both of you were in your mother’s womb.”

“You think that he is my brother because… his soul… smells funny,” the other man deadpanned.

“Actually—”

“You, shut up. Dragons are speaking here,” his brother said, waving his hand at Minato dismissively. The Yondaime was taken aback. This was not going how he had planned. “Are you sure that you’re not just bored and making stuff up to entertain your—”

“I AM SURE!” Durnehviir thundered, causing the ground to shake in the face of his fury. “I HAVE LIVED FOR MILLENNIA, DOVAHKIIN! I SPENT MY CURSED EXISTENCE HERE, SURROUNDED BY SOULS. I RECOGNIZED YOUR DOVAH ZIIL WHEN I LAID MY EYES ON YOU FOR THE FIRST TIME! IF I SAY, THAT THE SIL OF A JUR SMELLS LIKE A DOVAH FRON, THEN I AM SURE!”

"You… have a point. And the only way for his soul to 'smell' like a dragon's one would be..." the Dragonborn said slowly, turning towards Minato.

The blond Hokage tried to offer a reassuring smile.

"Aaah, I can't deal with this!" his brother yelled, throwing his hands in the air. "I find out from and undead dragon that I've a brother… and he's dead! Oh, and I'm dying too!"

Apparently, his smile had not been as reassuring as he had hoped.

“Look, I know it’s not exactly something you find out every day, but—”

“Wait a moment,” his brother interrupted him. Again. Seriously, it was becoming a habit and they had met just ten minutes ago. “If you’re here… that means…”

“That my soul is trapped here?” Minato asked rhetorically, shrugging. “Yes.”

“Who did this to you?” the older-looking blond asked, growling.

That was another question that Minato was expecting. And once again, there was no other way to explain it without being blunt.

I did,” he stated.

Minato had expected the silence, the visible shock, and the open wide mouth.

He hadn’t expected the punch sailing towards his face. Which he easily dodged anyway.

“You idiotic, imbecile, moronic, stupid FOOL!” his twin snarled, without stopping to try to hit him.

His movements were not sloppy, and far above the level of a civilian, but they were not what had been expecting when he’d heard of his brother, the great warrior of an unknown land.

Even a genin would have a fair chance against him, if the fight was a only-taijutsu—

“FUS!”

Minato felt the violent push, and used it to put some distance between himself and his enraged brother, landing gracefully.

So this was the power of the Voice of which Durnehviir had spoke. Impressive, and even faster than a jutsu.

His brother had started to slowly advance towards him, cracking his knuckles.

“Please, nii—Please, brother! Calm yourself! I had good reason to—”

“WULD NAH KEST!” and the enraged Dragonborn was right in front of him, snarling, a fist raised.

Minato barely dodged it. Whatever that shout was, it was more or less on the level of a shunshin.

Reason?! What reason could you possibly have? POWER?!” the fuming blond hissed, still pressing his attack. “Did you hope that making a deal with the Ideal Masters would increase your magical might?!”

Alright, that was enough.

Minato punched his still-living brother in the gut, knocking the breath out of him.

The Yondaime didn’t know how that was possible, since the man was not physically present inside the Shinigami’s stomach, but he didn’t care.

“I did what I did because I had no choice. There was no option left,” he said coldly, with just enough remorse in his voice.

His brother just growled quietly as he gasped for air.

“No choice? No other option but to condemn yourself to this?!”

There was a flicker around the man’s hands, and a spray of lightning was aimed towards Minato.

But the Yondaime was not in front of the Dragonborn anymore. Tendrils of electricity zapped at the ground, throwing up sand wherever they hit.

“Calm down,” Minato said, putting a hand on his brother’s shoulder. He had shunshined behind him as he had started to prepare that jutsu—no, not jutsu. Spell. He had to remember the difference. Spells were much faster to use, not requiring the more complex handsigns that jutsu did.

There was also the difference between chakra and magicka, but this wasn’t the time to delve into that.

“It’s true, I condemned myself to pass all my afterlife in this place,” Minato said in a gentle but firm tone, hoping to finally tranquilize his long-lost sibling. “But in doing so … I saved thousands of lives, who otherwise would surely be lost.”

For a moment, his twin’s stance became more tense. Minato wondered if it was because of his explanation or a reaction to his speed.

“That,” the man said, turning his head towards him, “is a good enough reason. But what happened to force you to such a choice? A siege?”

“Not exactly… you see—”

“Oblaan? It’s over already?” the dragon demanded, with a bored tone. “I was enjoying seeing the Dovahkiin beaten.”

“Beaten my ass,” the man said, turning to face Minato with a slight grin. “So… you are my brother?”

“Yes, I am,” Minato said, happy that the hostility was now gone.

“I’m Conrad, by the way,” his brother said, offering his hand.

“Yeah, I know that,” Minato replied, shaking his sibling’s hand. “Durnehviir and some other souls told me that. I am Namikaze Minato.”

“Na-mika-ze?” Conrad said, slowly, trying the unfamiliar sounds. “Well, Namikaze, why have you asked our rotting friend to take me here at the first chance he could?”

“I am here, Dovah,” the dragon said, not liking being ignored.

“Err, Namikaze is not my name, it’s the surname,” minato said sheepishly.

“What? Why did you introduce yourself like that, then?” his brother asked, confused.

Right. There were various cultural differences between them… how to explain this…

“You see, in the place where I grew up, it’s customary to introduce yourself using the surname first.”

“That’s… a strange tradition, you know,” Conrad said, blinking. “Where did you grow up? Who gave you that name? I’ve never heard of such a thing, and I’ve travelled a lot.”

“A land far away from Skyrim. Actually, far away from Tamriel.”

“What?” Conrad asked, flatly. He seemed torn between incredulity and confusion.

“I’m not sure how, exactly, but I was found in a shipwreck that washed up on the shores of the Elemental Nations.”

“Never heard of them,” his brother said. The confusion had won and was clearly visible on his face.

“They’re very far, far across the ocean. Don’t ask me which ocean because I haven’t figured that out yet. As for my name, well… it was given to me at the orphanage, I presume.”

“Orphanage?” Conrad asked, his face falling.

“Well, yes. I passed my childhood in one and… wait,” Minato trailed off, realizing that something was wrong from his brother’s eyes. “You too…?”

“No, no… I lived with Father until I was… seventeen or something. But he never talked about our mother, he refused to,” Conrad said, with a mournful tone.

“How is our father?” Minato asked, with a pang of jealousy. True, he could feel that Conrad had hoped to know about their mother, but at least he had known one of their parents.

“I don’t know,” Conrad whispered.

“What?”

“I don’t know! When I came back to Skyrim, two years after I left, Helgen...that was the village where we lived...was burned down,” Conrad replied, hastily. “I’ve met only three other survivors from that day. I have no idea if Father is still alive.”

“I’m sorry,” he said, sincerely. “How was he? Was he… a good father?”

“Yes,” his brother replied, after almost a full minute of silence. “Yes he was. Is. Whatever. He’s just… not an easy man to live with.”

Minato wanted to ask more questions, so much more, but the pain in his brother’s eyes made him hold his tongue.

“What kind of spell did you use to get behind me that fast?” Conrad asked, probably to change the subject. “I’ve never seen anything like it.”

“Oh, that was not a spell. It was just a shunshin, a jutsu—”


“A what?” his brother asked, confused once again.

“Please Conrad, stop interrupting me. It’s a… look, it’s complicated to explain, but you basically you pump your chakra into—right, you don’t know what chakra is… it’s like magicka… only it’s not. You don’t die when you run out of magicka right? And you can’t restore chakra with a potion,” Minato rambled “But now that I think about it, shinobi never tried to create potions. Only poisons. And antidotes for the poisons. We got only those soldier pills, and they’re dangerous—”

“I have no idea what the f*ck you’re talking about.”

“Are you always that vulgar?”

“You should see me when I drink.”

“You should avoid doing that, you know. It’s not good for you,” Minato scolded.

“Great. I get a dead brother, and not even half an hour later I’m already receiving a lecture about—” Conrad started, before trailing off, looking at his hands, freezing with widened eyes.

They were fading.

“Durnehviir!” the Nord called. “What’s going on?!”

“You’re waking,” the dragon said, apparently not really interested. “Your Kopraan, your body is not dead. Your Zii is going back to it.”

“What?!” Minato shouted, panicking. “Already?”

Conrad was now fading quickly, he was little more than a floating torso, but that didn’t seem to cause him physical pain.

The brothers met each other’s eyes, knowing that they would probably never see each other again.

There were so many things Minato would have wanted tell his brother, so many things that he wished to learn, but he knew there was no more time.

He flashed through a quick combination of handsigns, required for the jutsu he had prepared especially for the occasion, and slammed his right hand on Conrad’s face.

There was a burst of energy, and Conrad screamed as the tendrils of chakra burned a picture inside his mind.

“What the f*ck?! Why did you—”

“There is no time!” Minato interrupted him. “It will help you find the place I’m from. You must go there! Tell them about the masked man that attacked the village twelve years ago! Help them! Help Konoha! Help—”

Before he could finish his request, there was a blinding light, and what was left of Conrad’s spiritual form soared to the sky, like fireworks in a summer festival.

“—my son…” Minato whispered, fully knowing that his brother had not heard it.

Silence descended once again on the arena, now occupied only by a dragon unable to die and the lost soul of the Yondaime Hokage.

f*ck!” Minato’s voice thundered in frustration, at such volumes that even the spirits far away from the place heard its echo.

“You should have asked your request at the very beginning, Joor,” Durnehviir remarked after a few of minutes of silence where the Yondaime had just sat in the grey sand.

Minato looked at the dragon straight in the eyes, flooding the area with killing intent.

All those years… for probably nothing. There was no guarantee with his brother would follow his request, after all. He had not given him enough details, or reasons to.

“Do not direct your Rahgot, your rage towards me, shinobi. It was your own fault.”

Yes, it was. The dragon was right.

Such an opportunity, wasted, and all because he had to get so emotive instead of—

“No Paak, don’t feel shame. Every Joor would have done the same. The Dovahkiin will grant your Waan, I know this.”

“How can you be so sure?” he asked, staring into the dragon’s general direction.

“He had always been… curious. Vomindok, the unknown, had always fascinated him. It still does. It is because of his curiosity that his Laas has been so… interesting.”

Minato said nothing as the dragon slowly got up, but inwardly he was relieved.

For the first time after his death, he had hope for his son and for his village.

“Now, the pact among us is over. I granted your request, and now I demand my payment.”

“That would be… what? Six months of battle, without stopping?” he smiled bitterly.

Eight,” Durnehviir corrected. “Come now, Yondaime Hokage. Show me what you can do when your fury is unleashed!”

Minato’s grin was pure evil. If the dragon wanted a real fight, he would give him a real fight.

He needed to vent, after all.

Conrad woke up.

This time, he was hurting over his whole body, and and he was feeling cold too.

Even under the thick layer of furs.

Wait. Furs?

He moved groggily his head, disturbed by the loud, constant noise of something moving. The ground itself felt like it was bouncing and rolling, sending flashes of pain all over his back, irritating the bruises where the warhammer had hit him.

He opened his eyes and saw the sky moving in front of him. The sudden light and the ache of whatever Minato had done were doing a mess of his head—

Wait!

Minato!

Was that just a dream? Could it have been true?

Or had it been just a weird, really weird near-death experience?

… Maybe he could summon Durnehviir again and ask him, just to be sure.

“He’s awake!” someone shouted. He didn’t recognize the voice, but from the tone he could tell that they were actually happy he wasn’t dead.

“What? Now?” another voice said. This one was familiar, but he couldn’t put a face to it.

“There’s a patrol coming from behind the hill. Cover him!”

He felt something heavy being pulled over his body and his head. Darkness.

“Now be quiet,” the familiar voice hissed.

Conrad had no idea what was going on, but he realized something when he heard the sound of the horses being forced to slow down.

He was on a wagon. Someone had found him and saved him.

He wondered if, had he died, he would have remained in the Soul Cairn.

If he hadn’t hallucinated the whole thing.

He heard someone ordering to the wagon to halt, and once they stopped, someone started to ask questions.

“Who are you? What business to you have on the roads of the Whiterun hold?” a gruff voice said.

Whiterun hold? But he had lost consciousness in the Hjalmarch. How much time had he been knocked out?

“Me and my wife are trappers, good sir,” the familiar voice said, changing his voice to sound the most uneducated as possible. “We’re going to sell our pelts to Whiterun. See? They’re good pelts. I can’t make a lot for them in Rorickstead.”

“And why are you escorted by four armed mercenaries?” the gruff voice asked, suspiciously.

“Well, sir, it’s a lot of pelts. Bandits could try to steal them, yessir. And kill us, too.”

Other questions followed, but Conrad could feel his mind getting foggy again.

He tried to focus, but his body was really in bad shape, he was tired, and he was hungry.

The Dragonborn slowly but surely swept back to into the blissful unconsciousness.

He woke up to the smell of stew and sweetrolls.

“Hey! Give it back!” someone shouted.


Conrad opened slowly his eyes, and noticed that it was night, the stars were greeting him. He felt the heat of a campfire in his proximity.

Somewhere, someone snorted.


“What? Are you really going to say that someone stole your sweetroll?”

There was a collective laugh at that. Not too loud, but it was clear that the joke had eased the tension of the people in the camp.

Now, where in Oblivion was he? And who saved him?

He rolled onto his side. His legs hurt like two Riften bitches, and he grunted in pain. He had forgotten about that wound.

“Oh, welcome back, boss,” the familiar voice said. “How sweet of you to join us.”

Conrad’s head snapped in the direction of the speaker. He immediately recognized him.

“Haming. I’m not your boss,” he said, nodding towards the young hunter.

The young man shrugged, and Conrad knew that he would just ignore his protest. Again. Haming was one of the few survivors of Alduin’s attack at Helgen, along with Conrad and other two people that they knew off. Maybe that, and the idea that the Dragonborn was from his own, now destroyed and almost forgotten village, had sealed the archer’s loyalty towards the older Nord.

After all, people tended to be loyal towards those that killed the dragon that had killed their parents.

“Where are we?”

“An old bandit lair, between Whiterun’s and Falkreath’s holds,” Haming replied, filling a plate with steaming stew. “Not exactly one of our most fancy hideouts, boss. But it’s safe.”

Cornad grunted, and looked around.

They were in a cave, one wide enough to have a nice living space for all of them.

The air was cool, and even the faintest sounds echoed through the place’s walls.

Conrad hoped that they had chosen a good point to hide the wagon and the beasts they were using to drag it, otherwise their presence would have been much less discrete.

Besides him and Haming, there were other five people.

One of them, to his surprise, was the innkeeper that had tried to poison him. The woman was sitting in an angle of the cave, eating alone.

He had no problems with that.

The other four, though…

They were looking at him with those eyes.

Those eyes, almost bulged out, that were looking at him like he was some kind of f*cking god descended on the Mundus to save them all.

And he had saved them all.

The problem was that now they were expecting to be saved again, and had chosen to fight at his side.


Unlike most of the continent, actually. Poor bastards.

That didn’t ease the Dragonborn’s worries. The resistance against the Thalmor didn’t need fanatics ready to rally behind his shadow.

No matter what Delphine said.

Haming passed a portion of stew towards him, and Conrad accepted it with a nod, before starting to practically devour the dish.

“Our… partners discovered the mole, and dealt with him,” the archer started.

Conrad nodded. Among the group inside the cave, only him and Conrad were aware of the Blade’s existence, with Conrad being actually a member of the order.

The others were instead ‘resistance fighters’, which was a term used by the Blades to describe their allies in the fight against the Thalmor. Organized a little better than bandits’ bands, and sometime with a little more morality than the raiders.

It was necessary, because their struggle against the Thalmor and the Aldmeri Dominion had to be fought with guerrilla tactics, on all the provinces.

So the fighters could not know about the Blades’ existence. It could have been a disaster. Every group of fighters was not aware of the other groups, for security reasons.

Every Blade agent supervised a bunch of this parties, coordinating their effort in the territory.

Haming was one of those agents, Conrad himself had recruited him.

“So, we were sent to fetch you before the Thalmor got you, but they had days of advantage,” the hunter kept explaining. “The Thalmor won our race.”

Conrad snorted at that, watching the bandages wrapping his palms, where the Justiciar’s blade had cut deep.

“By the way, boss. Nice work with that,” the young man smirked “News about how an entire company of Thalmor soldiers disappeared spread fast. There are patrols everywhere, scaring the jarls sh*tless.”

Great. Just great.

He had given the Thalmor an excuse to put more troops into the Imperial Province.

Maybe in the other ones, too.

The archer kept talking, pointing towards the woman sitting alone at a brief distance away..

“It was her, Feida, that saved you, you know.”

Conrad turned towards the woman, arching an eyebrow curiously.

“I waited, and waited,” she started, “until the battle outside was over. And after that...I waited more. Once I was sure that nothing was moving out there...I peeked through the door. There were so many bodies…”

For a few minutes the only sound in the cave was the cracking of the flames. It was clear that the woman was not used to violence.

One of the armed men placed a log into the fire.

“I found you, barely alive,” the woman continued. “You were laying in a pool of your frozen blood… your legs were a mess. I gave you one of your potions, and dragged you inside the inn. It wasn’t easy. You’re quite heavy.”

“We arrived a few hours later,” Haming started again. “We loaded you on a wagon we stole and took you away from there, the fastest we could.”

Conrad massaged his temples, having finished his stew.

“What about her?” he asked, motioning towards (what was her name?) Feida.

“She saw you, and us, so… we gave her the ‘join or die’ option,” the archer said sheepishly.

“We don’t have a ‘join or die’ option, kid.”

“She didn’t know that,” Haming replied, smirking.

“It’s fine,” Feida interrupted. “After that fiasco, the Thalmor would have hunted me down anyway. Either I stay with you guys, or I’m dead.”

“Whatever,” Conrad snorted. Only to add something quickly when he saw the annoyed look Haming gave him. “We’ll find a use for you, I suppose.”

“I’m a good cook, and—”

“Stop it. It’s not my job to find what you can do,” he interrupted, ignoring the woman’s offended expression and turning towards the young archer. “Where is my stuff?”

“We hid your bags and your metallic junk under the pelts and—”

Junk?!” Conrad exclaimed, indignant. “My nordic carved armour is not junk!”

“With all those scratches and dents, it looks like a piece of junk, boss,” the archer smirked. “Oh, and I’ve managed to save your axe, too. And your walking stick.”

“It’s not a walking stick, it’s a mage’s staff! A mage staff carved to look like a walking stick, to not be recognized for what it is!” Conrad seethed, tired of having to correct his self-proclaimed minion about the nature of the totem pole. Again.

He winced, his head was throbbing now. At first, when he had woken up, he had thought it was because of the exhaustion, his wounds or both.

But when he closed his eyes, he could vividly see… something.

Four symbols, exotic-looking and with an unknown meaning, gleaming in the dark of his closed eyelids.

The encounter in the Soul Cairn had really happened. And Minato had done, or given, something to him.

“Just admit it, boss. Sooner or later, you’ll have to—”

“Paper,” he interrupted harshly. “And ink. Now.”

Haming looked at him for a few seconds, confused from this unusual reaction during their traditional banter, but gestured towards his subordinates neverless.

He heard someone rummage somewhere as he kept massaging his temples.

“Here it is, boss. Do you have to write a message or—”

“Later,” Conrad hissed, snatching the pen and paper sheet. He started scribbling furiously, slightly put off by the unfamiliar symbols.

“Whatever you say, boss,” Haming sighed, before getting closer to him and starting to whisper. “Look, I’ve received orders from Delphine. I’m to take you to the ruins of the Cloud Ruler Temple, in Cyrodiil, before the borders will become impassable because of the checkpoints—”

“Shush, Haming. You’re distracting me,” Conrad said, discarding the paper sheet, unsatisfied with the result.

“But—”

“I said, shut up, Haming!”

Haming fell silent, knowing that whatever he was doing, was somehow important.

Once Conrad was finished, he examined his handiwork. Scribbled on the parchment, the four symbols were almost gleaming, the light of the fire reflected off the fresh ink.

He had no idea what he was supposed to do with this. But he would find out, with time.

“I won’t go there, no matter what Delphine says.”

“But… they’re looking for you everywhere! You’re gravely wounded, you have to hide—”

“I will hide, but I have stuff to do, and I know where I have to go to do the necessary research. And you’ll take me there.”

“Delphine won’t be happy about this, boss.”

“Like I care about what the old hag thinks—” he said, only to drift when he saw Haming’s worried face.

“Alright, alright! I’ll write a letter to her and tell her that it’s not your fault, boy. Happy?! Now gather your things and give the orders to your men, and whatever her name is. We’re moving.”

“Moving? To where?”

“To Winterhold.”

Chapter 4: Simpler in Hindsight

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text


Winterhold was almost exactly as he remembered it.

Cold, freezing, and ugly.

At least it wasn’t snowing. Yet.

But there were differences, which was expected after all the time he had not visited. It was the kind of differences that was surprising him.

New buildings had been erected, mostly small wooden houses, and even a few shops. There were more people around, and the whole settlement seemed to be booming.

“What happened here? The jarl ban all the taxes?” he asked as Haming helped him get down from the wagon.

“Why don’t you ask him? I’m sure he’d be happy to see you.”

“I have other things to do,” he said, hobbling over with his crutch. The wounds on the legs were not healed yet, even with the use of magic.

“Yes, you told us this. But what are we supposed to do?” the young archer asked, gesturing to his fighters and what-was-her-name… Feida, or something like that.

“Drink something in the inn. Find out about what’s going on in the region. Don’t draw attention to yourself. The usual.”

“What about your stuff? The junk and the—”

“I will send someone to take my belongings, among which the ancient armour stands out,” he said drily.

“Whatever you say, boss. Are you sure you don’t want a hand with—”

“I bet that the place has still a policy about ‘mages only’, even if the town has changed. I’ll go alone.”

“Suit yourself, boss. Join us at the inn later?”

“I’ll try,” Conrad said, as he started to limp towards the College, at an extremely slow pace.

As he proceeded on the well-worn road, he absorbed all the sounds he had never heard here, before.

A cacophony of hooves and rusty spokes, of hammers on hot metal, and loud, brash voices that filled the air.

All things that were found in other settlements.

But there was one thing that was missing. There were no childish laughs.

There were no children.

How was it possible for a city that had gained so many inhabitants and seemed to be in an expanding stage to have no children?

As he struggled to think of a good reason for this, Conrad suddenly stopped.

He felt his honed instincts kicking in, and his free hand went to the handle of his axe, concealed under the heavy fur mantle he had been given by Haming.

He had found himself under the scrutiny of a small number of onlookers who were lingering around the entrance of a tavern, mugs and flagons in hand.

And weapons on their belts.

Since when had Winterhold had more than one inn, anyway?

They looked like seasoned fighters, their eyes were too shifty for Conrad’s tastes, and they were interested in him.

That was never good.

Was it because he was a ‘new’ arrival in town, or for other reasons?

Conrad was suddenly happy that his cowl was concealing the scarred side of his face from their view.

Now that he thought about it, something seemed off ever since they had arrived, and now he realized what it was.

Everyone was carrying a weapon. Everyone.

What had happened to the dying town?

“What are you looking at?” he growled, giving his best angry Nord performance. He was sure that he could beat them if they tried anything funny.

But without his armour on, he felt so exposed. Walking with it on would have been asking for trouble for his wounded legs.

“Heh, another ‘tough guy’,” one of the group snarked, derision dripping from his words.

Conrad blinked at him, stupefied. Had this tavern trash just—

“Look at him. He can barely stand!” another laughed, to be quickly joined by his companions.

The tension seemed to evaporate completely as they forgot about him and turned back to their drinks.

On any other day, Conrad would have taught them a lesson. In his younger days, he would have crushed them. He could feel his soul, his dragon soul, screaming in outrage, eager to rain down his righteous fury on these weaklings who dared to insult him.

But he couldn’t risk being arrested or kicked out of the town.


He had things to do, and this was not worth it.

Grumbling, he swallowed his pride and resumed his walk towards the College.

At least Haming and the others would pass unnoticed around here.

A pair of hooded figures were walking along the arcade that surrounded the College’s courtyard. They were both wearing the clothes associated with the apprentices of the school, but while one of them was walking in long, elegant strides, the other did so in an undignified manner, nervousness showing with each of her steps.

“I tell you, Beta, you worry too much,” the controlled one said.

“But what if they expel me because I can’t do it?!” his companion asked, panic in her voice.

“None have ever been expelled from the College because they were less than adequate in Restoration. Calm down!”

She went ahead and did the opposite.

“It could happen, Sven! I could be the first! I could—”

“What’s going on?” the young mage asked suddenly, looking ahead of his companion.

“I’m having a panic attack, that’s what’s going on!”

“No, not you,” Sven said, gesturing to the entry of the courtyard. “There.

Beta followed her friend’s line of sight and noticed the commotion at the entrance of the courtyard, right in front of the statue that greeted the newcomers to the College.

A group of students of various classes were staring too something, whispering to each other frantically.

They heard yelling, but the little flock of scholars were obstructing their view.

“What do you think has happened?” Beta asked. Her friend kept moving.

“Probably another sellsword that tried to sneak into the College while the bridge wasn’t being watched. Come on, let’s check.”

As they approached their fellow students, they could hear the voice of one of the senior students—for the good of her, Beta couldn’t remember his name—intimidating a stranger into leaving.

The stranger was a tall, blond-bearded Nord around his fortieth winter, leaning heavily on a crutch. A hooded fur mantle concealed his attire, but Beta saw an axe strapped to his belt.

“I insist that you, sir, evacuate the property,” the senior apprentice said, almost disdainfully.

“And I insist that you step aside, before I break your nose,” the stranger said in a gruff voice.

“Told you,” Sven whispered. “Typical sellsword.”

“That’s an axe, Sven,” she replied.

“So what? Axe, sword, same thing.”

“Access to the College of Winterhold is currently restricted to its members, sir. So if you will not leave, I will be forced to—”

“I would love to see you try… mageling,” the stranger snarled.

“I’m warning you! If you don’t vacate the College now, I’ll be forced to make you vacate it!”

“Come on, Beta. Let’s go,” Sven said, having lost interest just like a few other students.

Reluctantly, the Nord girl followed him.

“Are you sure it will be fine? That guy could attack them.”

“They can handle it. We have stuff to do, and it wouldn’t be the first time a nobody was kicked out of he—”

“FUS!”

The sound resounded along the arcade, alongside the startled yells of a few students.

Silence followed, quickly substituted by expressions of confusion and awe.

“Impossible,” Beta whispered. The only person still able to use the Thu’um, besides the Greybeards, was—

She turned, only to see that the stranger was plowing through her fellow students who were utterly still, their eyes widened in surprise. The senior apprentice was flat on the ground, slowly getting up, still in shock.

All of the novices were whispering like a bunch of gossipers, but a single word was on everyone’s lips.

“Dragonborn,” Beta said, never turning her sight from the living legend that was walking right in her direction.

Well, more like limping in her direction, but that didn’t matter in her opinion.

She was sure that she was going to have another panic attack.

“You!” the limping legend exclaimed, pointing in her general direction. Beta wasn’t sure if he was pointing at her or Sven, but she was too panicked to care. “Tell me where the Archmage is! And someone explain to me why the bridge hasn’t been repaired yet after all these years!”

“You have always known how to make grand entrances, Conrad. Tea?” Mirabelle Ervine asked, from the other side of her desk in her private quarters.

“Yes, please. I was freezing on that bridge,” he replied gratefully. The long trip on the snow hadn’t helped.

“I’ve never met a Nord that hates the cold like you do,” the Archmage said, as she poured a cup for Conrad and one for herself.

“I’m not a typical Nord,” he snorted.

“You use an axe, you’re proud of your beard, and you love mead so much that you’d like to swim into it,” the older woman said as she put down the kettle on a wooden coaster.

“Your point?” Conrad said, sniffing his cup’s content.

“Around here, that makes you a Nord. Especially in the eyes of the students used to dealing with the new… townsfolk.”

“Just because I’m not a skinny little sh*t doesn’t make me a barbarian! I mean, look at Urag gro-Shub. By the way, how is the old Orc?”

“Wait… you didn’t know?” Mirabelle asked, becoming really serious.

A long pause followed between the two long-time acquaintances.

“When?” Something in Conrad’s voice sounded a bit broken at that moment.

“He died two summers ago. Passed away in his sleep,” the Archmage replied sadly, lowering her gaze.

Mirabelle stared at him, as Conrad sipped silently from his cup.

He could feel moisture forming in his eyes.

"Sorry, something got in my eyes," he said, drying the unshed tears. Time to change subject. "What happened at the city?"

“It grew up,” the woman said, taking a sip of her own.

“... I can see that. Care to explain why? There was nothing around of interest here, aside from the College.”

“That’s simple, Conrad. It’s your fault.”

Conrad blinked, taken aback.

My fault?!”

“You’re the Dragonborn of legend, the man who slew Alduin, the hero of the Siege of Whiterun and of the Battle of Cold Rock Pass. And who knows how many other things you’ve done. Everyone knows you’re a Nord spellcaster, everyone knows that you were trained right here. Did you really think that people wouldn’t flock to your fame?”

“I think I need something stronger than this,” he muttered, placing the half-empty tea cup on the desk.

“Third drawer behind you,” Mirabelle said, taking a sip of tea.

“And they all want to come to the college?!" Conrad asked, as he retrieved a bottle of sujamma from the counter.

"At the start, yes. We gained quite a few students, we even had to build a few more rooms."

"I thought that magic was scorned in Skyrim. Even more than the other imperial provinces. Not even my fame justifies such a flow of new apprentices," Conrad said skeptically as he poured the liquor in his own cup.

"It's not. Magic is still distrusted in the holds, but lot of students came from the rest of the Empire, too. But we couldn't take all of them."

"So why’s the city full of armed thugs? I doubt they want to start using magic."

"They came with the mining company. A lot of new mines were opened along the Sea of Ghosts—"

"And they were paid to assure the mines’ safety, I get it. Wait... Who owns the mines?"

Mirabelle's face tightened in a grimace.

“The jarl does. It was his idea to revive the city, and convince all the families that followed to stay, since the College would not help. As if we could,” she snorted. “And when news spread, people with troubled pasts started showing up here to find a fresh start. When the new inhabitants are not working or guarding the mines, they usually laze around the town or in one of the inns. From what I gathered, it was difficult to keep order in the first months.”

“So what did our young jarl do?” he asked, tasting the sujamma in his mouth.

“He gave them a purpose. Now, they are useful for various things.”

“What things?”

“Fighting bandits, hunting down monsters, search for treasures in the ruins on the coast, or explore what remains of the old Winterhold.”

“Are you saying… that the jarl turned Winterhold in a city of adventurers?”

“Yes,” Mirabelle said, with a glum expression.

“That… that is hilarious,” he said, barely containing his laugh.

“I don’t find it entertaining at all. We get harassed from them every time we get in town, and—”

“Alright, alright. Having your isolated College sitting beside a town full of people that raid ruins for coin is bad for you, I get it. Let’s speak of more serious matters, now,” Conrad said, pouring again the sujamma. “The Thalmor.”

“Ah. Took you long enough,” Mirabelle stated, proffering her cup.

“Did they cause problems for the College?” he asked, serving the liquor to the Archmage.

The ‘because of me’ went unsaid.

“They tried, but not for long,” she said, savoring the exotic liquor. “We may be a little school of magic, but they know that is better to avoid the ire of mages. And you have been absent for… nine years?”

“Eight and a half,” Conrad corrected drily.

“Yes, well, with your long-term absence, we could avoid suspicion from the Justiciars, even with your… independent activities.”

“Independent activities? That’s the understatement of the year, Mirabelle.”

“Why did you come back, Conrad?” she sighed, knowing too well that this was no courtesy visit. “I suppose it’s not to finally accept the title of Arch-Mage, right?”

“You guessed right,” Conrad said with a small smirk.

“This is the fourth time it’s been offered to you, you know.”

“And for the fourth time, I refuse it. You know too well that I can’t manage this place, since I’m always on the move, and my name’s at the top of the Thalmor’s hit-list.”

“That’s a shame. But at least I get to keep the biggest room around here,” Mirabelle smirked while leaning back on her seat. “Now spit it out.”

“Did you heard of what happened in the Hjaalmarch?”

“Just that a few days ago, the Thalmor Embassy sent more patrols inland. And I think that it’s better if I don’t know anything else.”

“Good. Let’s just say that I need to stay in a quiet and cozy place for a while. And since I had some research to do, I decided to make a visit.”

“Research? What kind of research?” Mirabelle asked, arching an eyebrow.

“About these runes,” Conrad said, retrieving the parchment he had written in that cave in the middle of nowhere. He didn’t really need it anymore. He could clearly see the symbols every time he closed his eyes.

He silently observed as Mirabelle Ervine, the Archmage of Winterhold College, raised an eyebrow in confusion at the paper sheet spread on the desk.

“Conrad.”

“Yes?” he asked, distractedly pouring another serving of sujamma in his cup.

“What in Oblivion is this?”

“I have no idea,” the man responded. “But I want to find out.”

“Is that even writing? Even the dragon language looks decipherable,” the woman said, leaning over to take a closer look. “This is just… gibberish!”

“Pretty much, yes.”

“Where did you find it? Was it inscribed in a stone? A mural? In one of the ancient tombs where you like do dwell?”

“Do you really want to know?” he asked, smirking.

Mirabelle snorted.

“I think you know the answer to that.”

“Good, because I wouldn’t tell you anyway.”

He knew that Mirabelle had an open mind concerning the supernatural, being a mage and the Archmage to boot, but saying things about long-dead brothers’ lost souls and undead dragons didn’t sound very smart to him. Who would have believed it?

Even he was still trying to make up his mind about it.

“Still… are you sure you need the College resources for your research? I don’t think—”

“It has something to do with magic, or at least I think so.”

“Conrad, this looks like chicken-scratch.”

“... Yes. Your point?”

“Why would you even think it has something to do with magic?!”

“It has to do about how I found it, and I can’t—”

“You can’t tell me, I got it,” Mirabelle said, slightly exasperated.

“The library of the Arcaneum is my best shot at finding answers. Will I be able to access it?”

“Of course you will, Conrad. You are still part of this College, after all,” the Archmage smirked. “There will be some… conditions, of course.”

Conrad blinked, unsure if he had heard her right.

“Conditions?”

“It’s been quite a lot since you last came here in person, or even wrote to us for that matter. So, you’ll have to… make amends.”

“Come on, Mirabelle. You know I couldn’t—”

“Since your research will take some time, I have the perfect task for you in mind. As I said to you earlier, we now have an unprecedented number of students.”

“So?” he asked, even if he had a bad feeling about Mirabelle’s ramblings.

“Conrad, students outnumber teachers twenty to one. Our lessons are now not focused on small classes, and—”

“Am I dreaming? Mirabelle Ervine, lamenting about the number of new apprentices she has to manage?” he snickered.

Mirabelle was less than amused.

“Do you really think the quality of our education system hasn’t declined? Do you really think—”

“Alright, alright. I see your point, but what does that have to do with me?”

You are more than qualified to take a few of our classes, to make the lives of our regular instructors a little easier.”

There was a small pause as the two mages, Archmage and four-time candidate for the title, met each other’s eyes.

It should be noted that one of them looked distinctly panicked.

“No way in Oblivion, Mirabelle.”

“Oh, yes. You are going to take some apprentices, Conrad.”

“Give me one, valid reason why I should—”

“Welcome, apprentices. I am Conrad Harissen, and I’ll be your… mentor in this class,” Conrad growled, doing his best to ignore the youngsters’ wide eyes that were almost surrounding him.

There were so many of them, especially if he compared this lot with his own class when he’d joined the College. They looked so young… which make him feel older than he really was. And they were whispering and looking at him in awe.

He already hated them.

With the aid of his crutch, he started to pace in front of the students assembled in the Hall of Elements, the place traditionally used for the spellcasting classes and practice. Conrad wanted to look them right in the eyes, hoping they would get scared and never show up anymore.

“Today, I’ll show you the basic of the most known school of magic: Destruction,” he said, trying to ignore the pains coming from his right leg. He made a mental note to speak with Colette Marence later, the wound was healing too slowly for his liking.

“As you may know,” he said, “Destruction has only one use and purpose. To do harm to your enemies. Behind all the fancy words, all the theory, all the preparation… it’s a weapon that uses magicka to rain death upon your foes.”

To underline that last statement, he made some flames flicker in his free hand, so that all the apprentices could see. That ceased all the whispering at once.

“Since I can’t let you kill yourselves, we’ll start with the basics to protect yourselves. That would be the lesser wards to repel a magic attack,” he said, inwardly smiling at the memory of his own first lesson. Tolfdir had been a great teacher, and Conrad still thought fondly of the old man.

“If you have any questions, ask them now,” he said quickly, realizing that he had spaced off for a few seconds.

It was obvious that they were intimidated by him, because nobody was asking questions, and most of them were avoiding his gaze.

“Look,” he sighed, “I’m just a teacher here, alright? So, ask a question, I won’t burn you.”

Probably.

Slowly, a hand timidly raised among the flock of students. Maybe he could be able to start this, finally.

“Yes, you there. Ask away!”

“Could you tell us about the dragons, master?”

“Boss, over here!” Haming waved from his seat inside The Frozen Hearth, as Conrad made his way towards him.

“Two weeks without looking for me, boss. I’m wounded!” the younger man wailed as the blond sat at his table.

“I was busy. And don’t call me that!”

“Relax,” Haming said, passing him a mug of mead. “Nobody’s giving a damn about us. They just want to drink and forget their problems. So, what have you been busy with? Your research?”

“I wish, I wasn’t even able to start my research yet.” Conrad said, gritting his teeth. “I’ve been too busy with teaching a group of talentless rats how to not burn their own fingers with the excess magicka they put into the spell which would make them risk losing control of the power they’re waving around.”

“Wait, what?”

“Mirabelle made me a teacher for a bunch of brats who can’t even light a candle on their own.”

Haming blinked for a moment, before bursting out laughing.

“It’s not funny,” Conrad grunted.

“Yes it is! Just wait until I tell Feida and the others—”

“Who?” the blond asked, confused.

“Feida. You know, the woman who tried to poison you? Because the Thalmor forced her to? Nice curves?”

“Oh, her,” he muttered, tasting the mead. “Did you interrogate her? Are you sure her story is genuine and she’s not a double agent planted on us?”

“I’ve sent a few letters while you were playing with the mages. Her story is good, so she’s just another victim of the Thalmor—”

“—or she has a damn good cover. We have seen it happen before.”

“I’ll have to keep an eye on her, right?”

“Damn straight you’ll have to. Just don’t get distracted by those nice curves, kid.”

“Look who’s talking. Boss, if I remember correctly, a few years ago, with that brunette from Riften—”

Conrad frowned, looking Haming right in the eyes, not uttering a single word.

Whatever statement or joke the young archer wanted to make, it died in his throat as he slightly leaned away from his friend and mentor with widened, worried eyes.

“Er, what I meant to say is, yeah, good advice?” the younger man quickly back peddled, not looking him in the eyes.

“Yes, I thought so. Now, tell me what have you done in the last weeks, and what you’ve found out about the town.”

“Well… By the way, your eyes are slitted, boss. Let's start from the guys then… I found them a job!”

“What job? No, let me guess. Guards at one of the mines?”

Haming had the decency to look slightly offended.

“No boss! What do you take me for? I’m a freelancer!”

“Oh, it’s one of those jobs…”

“Hey! It’s a good deal! Me and the boys are paid to hunt down monsters around the city. And bandits, if they become too pesky, but it hasn’t happened so far.”

“I doubt the brigands would become too pesky around this town, between the mages and the biting cold. What can you tell me about those mines?”

“They’re scattered on the whole hold. But most of the ores are not close to the surface, so the miners must dig deep. And I mean, deep.”

“f*ck,” the older man said, gulping another sip from the mug. “How long, before the excavation catches the attention of the Falmer?”

“Worst or best chance?”

“Never been an optimist, Haming,” Conrad said, cleaning his beard from the remaining drops of mead.

“Less than one year. Then some miners will start to disappear.”

“It always starts that way,” he admitted, grimly.

“The jarl won’t listen to us, you know. The city is expanding, it’s growing, all thanks to those mines.”

“Then we do what we always do. We hope for the best, but prepare for the worst,” Conrad simply stated.

“How?” Haming asked after a small pause.

“You have already inserted your men here, their cover is solid for now. Form a cell, and recruit more.”

“Recruit—Boss, the people here are mostly mercenaries, sellswords...sh*t, I’m sure that some people were bandits, once! And when they’re not working, they’re either drunk or in a brothel!”

“I know. Can you blame them?”

Haming’s jaw went open wide, before he was able to formulate his next question.

“How can you think of recruiting them?”

“Not all of them, of course!”

“So we—”

“So you need to observe them. Look, see those two guys at the bar? The Orc and the Dunmer? What do you think of them?”

Haming followed his eyes, and looked at a pair of mercenaries who were enjoying their own drink without caring about the people around, not even each other.

“I don’t know,” the younger man admitted after a few seconds. “A green guy who loves heavy shields and a skilled archer?”

“The Orc is a former legionnaire. Do you see the tattoo on his left arm? It’s barely visible, but it’s there. He probably deserted during the Civil War, and now he’s hiding in this frozen hole,” Conrad said, not even looking away from his drink. “The Dunmer, however, has killed a lot of people with his bow. You can tell by the way he’s carrying it, and how he moves, like a predator. That guy kills for sport, Haming. Be careful around him.”

Haming looked at him, and then at the pair at the bar, speechless.

“How did you—”

“The eyes, Haming. Look how he watches everyone. He’s imagining how fun it would be to aim an arrow at them. His eyes are surprisingly honest.”

Then he took another sip, which by the counts of most other people was actually a very, very large gulp.

“Where’d you learn how to do it? This… looking at people and reading them.”

“Riften,” Conrad said drily, and his tone didn’t permit further questions about that.

“Alright. So, we prepare the city for the inevitable meeting with the Falmer, in secrecy?”

“People still think that the blind bastards are like goblin tribes, just an occasional nuisance. Or just a fable to scare the children. They won’t listen. But maybe establishing a group here is a good thing.“

“Really? How so, boss?”

“In the last few years, we’ve ignored the western holds, contentrating our efforts on the regions where the Thalmor are more influential. But we can’t keep going on like this forever. We need more people, weapons, food—”

“You’re starting to sound like Delphine, boss,” Haming smirked.

“I take offense to that.”

“Speaking of her, boss… I’ve received a letter from her. For you.”

“Great. Something about the fact that I’ve not gone to Cyrodiil to hide in the ruins of that temple?”

“Something like that. Do you want to see it now or…” Haming rambled, pointing towards the inn’s patrons.

“Just give it to me. I’ll surely need a drink after reading it,” Conrad said, urging the archer with a gesture of his hand.

As Haming extracted a parchment from his satchel, Conrad swiftly snatched it and began scanning the content.

After a few seconds of reading the letter, Conrad flinched.

“Yep,” Haming acknowledged.

“Well, at least she’s happy that I went to a place that the Thalmor avoid.”

That night, once he was back in his room inside the teachers’ quarters, Conrad dreamed of leaves.

“This, my unworthy students, is the College’s library, better known as the Arcanaeum. I suspect that a few of you could be already know this, but I wanted to be sure.”

Conrad ignored the students’ various expressions of curiosity and enthusiasm—or lack thereof—as he guided the brats into the room full of tomes and ancient texts.

His leg was still hurting, but at least he didn’t need a crutch anymore. The healing sessions with Colette were doing their job, along his own limited knowledge.

“You might be curious as to why I’ve decided to move our lesson on Alteration here, instead of meeting you in the usual place, the Hall of Elements. A mage should study not only how to cast his spells, but also the theory behind them. In addition, even knowledge of not-magical nature could be useful once you’ll leave the College. Trust me on this one,” he said, starting to take a few books from the shelves. “So, instead of exploring the great possible applications of the basic Alteration spells, we’ll do a session in the library.”

“Is this really necessary, master?” one of the students said. Sten, Sven, something like that. “I mean, we already know the theory, and it’s not that—”

“Tell me, whatever your name is, do you know how the Dragon Priests died out?”

“My name is Sven!” the youngster sputtered indignantly. “After months with us, you would think that—”

“The question, Sven. It’s ancient Skyrim history, you know.”

“I—I don’t know, master,” the apprentice admitted, blushing.

A few snickers could be heard around, but Conrad was sure that very few of them knew the answer.

“Right, so you can all see my point. You never know when this,” he said, gesturing to the bookshelves surrounding him and his class, “may become useful.”

“How could knowing how the Dragon Priests died out be useful?!”

“Various ways. It could save you from another humiliation from your teacher, for example,” Conrad said, as he placed the books he had gathered on a desk.

This time, the snickers were a little louder.

“Should we focus on something in particular, master?” a student asked.

What was his name? Not that Conrad cared.

“Choose on your own. I’m not here to tell you what you should read. Just don’t bother me too much.”

“Oh, I see now,” Sven said, smirking like he had resolved some kind of enigma. “You just want an excuse to do your own research, don’t you master?”

He knew? But how?

“What research?” one of the girls asked.

“Those runes that master Conrad has been researching since the day he came back to the College. With no result so far,” Sven explained smugly.

sh*t, the little twit was on to him.

“I have no idea what you’re talking about, student.”

“I’ve heard the other teachers—”

“The other teachers should teach, instead of chatting like midwives,” he growled, and a few of the students looked a little intimidated by him. But they were starting to get used to it. Conrad didn’t like that at all.

“I’m just saying that it’s something we could do on our own time, instead of not doing our usual lessons,” the young Imperial insisted. A few voices expressed their support for his statement.

“True,” Conrad conceded. “Too bad that your whole bunch is terribly lazy on your own time, just hanging around in the campus. Or going to the brothel. Yes, I’m speaking to you, third guy in the last row! I saw you sneaking out the other day! Who do you think you’re fooling?”

The apprentice in question looked like he wanted to die instantly. The girls around him shuffled away, a little disgusted.

“Alright class! Enough drama for today. Pick a book, or even better, a lot of books, and start studying! Except for you, Sven. You’re going to read this, and I’m expecting you to memorize its contents,” he said, taking a small volume from a shelf and placing it in the lad’s hands.

“‘Uncommon Tastes, by the Gourmet’?” Sven read from the cover, before realizing, “Master, this… this is a cookbook!”


“A fine guide to the Bretonian cuisine, actually,” Conrad deadpanned, starting to search for the other tomes he needed.

“Why should I study a book about cooking?!”

“Do you know any spell that can cook a fine Bretonian soufflé? Because I don’t.”

Not having an answer for that absurd statement, the young Imperial went to look for a seat, grumbling under his breath. It was then that Conrad noticed one of the other students, looking lost among the shelves.

What was her name? Stupid kids…

“You! Bertha, right?”

“B-Beta, master Conard, sir,” whispered the poor thing. She looked like a deer who had seen the hunter aiming a crossbow at its neck.

“Whatever. Come here, lass.”

Slowly the young apprentice came closer to him, and with each step she looked closer to having a panic attack.

“You’re still having trouble with your Restoration spells, right?” he asked as he reached for a volume.

“Yes, sir. I do. I’m sorry, I promise that—”

“Here,” Conrad said, giving the poor girl a copy of ‘Racial Phylogeny’. “This should help. Study it and experiment a little with your spells.”

The young girl was speechless for a few seconds, but slowly reached for the book.

“Thanks, master,” she whispered, before departing in long, nervous strides.

Satisfied that his good deed for the day was done, Conrad opened one of the tomes he had selected.

“Pardon me, master,” a raspy voice said behind him.

Conrad snapped his head, turning suddenly. One of the apprentices, a Khajiit, was standing right behind him. How did he sneak up on him unnoticed?!

“Ta’Sava has problems with Illusion. Would master recommend a book about that?”

Stupid kids. The only thing stopping him from outright throwing books at the students as they pestered him with questions about what texts they should study was the respect he had for Urag gro-Shoub’s memory.

That, and the certainty that the old Orc’s ghost would rise from the grave if any dared to damage his precious books.

“Mirabelle? A word, if you please?” Kaden asked as the Mirabelle crossed his path.

“Of course, my old friend, walk with me. You seem distressed, is there something wrong?”

“It’s about… well, it’s about Conrad Harissen.”

“I see,” Mirabelle said, frowning slightly. “Has he done something that troubles you?”

“Yes, but it’s not something that he did. More like… how he did it. And how he’s still doing it.”

“Kaden, what are you talking about?”

“His teaching methods are… unorthodox at best.”

“Oh, yes, I can see that,” Mirabelle smirked. Kaden had studied and started his career as a Teacher during the years of Conrad’s absence, so it was natural that he would not have been used to him.

“The other day he forced all his class to exercise, Mirabelle!” Kaden said as he stepped in front of her, blocking her way. “While throwing spells! And—”

“I’m sure that a little exercise will not hurt our students, Kaden. It could even be good for them. Actually, I’m sure that a few of them are enjoying it.”

“And he’s so… so unlike a mage! I swear, if you didn’t force him to, he would never wear his robes. And he’s rude, and—”

“Even if he’s not a typical mage, I want you to remember that he’s never been ‘typical’. And that he was considered for the title of Archmage on multiple occasions, long before my name was even brought up. And the only reason he’s—”

“RUN! HE’S CRAZY!” a voice resounded in the hallway.

As both teacher and Archmage turned their heads, they saw a small group of students sprinting in their direction.

“Ta’Sava did not sign up for this!” a young Khajiit said frantically as he passed the stupefied pair.

“What—?”

“PRACTICAL LESSON?!” another voice thundered. As Conrad came around the corner, his hands cloaked with electricity. “I’LL GIVE YOU MAGGOTS A PRACTICAL LESSON!”

He was not gaining on the students, but he was more than making up for that with his lightning bolts.

Before the flabbergasted Mirabele and her fellow mage could react, both Conrad and his students were long gone.

As Mirabelle turned towards the teacher, she saw that he was looking at her, arching an eyebrow.


“He was missing them on purpose… I hope,” Mirabelle sighed. “I’ll talk to him.”

“So, how’s your research going?” Colette asked, while pointing to a student where to move his hand.

“No luck so far,” Conrad muttered as he closed and discarded another priceless tome about ancient runes. “And it’s getting on my nerves. It’s been five months, and I’ve still got nothing!”

“Please, master Conrad, remain calm. Otherwise I will not be able to properly heal the damage to your ligaments,” Beta, the insecure apprentice, said.

Since his leg was still aching, but the damage was now minimal, Colette had asked to use his limb as practice for her own teachings. Outside of the normal studies, of course. So while a number of apprentices in their late teens hovered around his leg, casting pathetically weak spells, he had decided to try to keep going with his own research. After all he didn’t need to move for studying, and after Sven’s little number a few weeks ago, all the campus knew about the mysterious runes.

Conrad was aware that the students had started a betting pool about whether he would be able to figure them out or not, and how long it would take.

He was reaching for another volume—a fine edition about symbols and their usage in magic of other countries, which was sadly a very limited knowledge—when he felt a weird sensation in the right knee.

“Are you sure a group of apprentices is good enough for this, Colette?”

“Masteeeer!” Beta wailed, her fellow students looking as offended as she.

“Bear with us for a little more, Conrad. Then you’ll be fine,” the Restoration teacher assured.

“I hope so,” he said, before turning to the study group in front of him. “If I can’t walk straight after this, I’m sending a Storm Atronach in your rooms tonight. Again.”

“No, you will not. Not after Mirabelle’s telling-off,” the old Breton woman said.

“Spoilsport. They didn’t know about that,” Conrad said, as he saw the apprentices relaxing a little.

“You know, you would have healed at least two months early if you had practiced this on your own. Is your knowledge of the healing spells so rusted?”

“It’s not rusted. I was just… busy doing other stuff. For various years.”

“Sure you were,” the healer mused, smiling slightly. “There, all done. You can stop now, students. Conrad, try to flex the leg please.”

Nodding, Conrad slowly got up, testing his limb’s recovered strength. He flexed it, made a few steps and finally put all his weight on it.

“Well?” Beta asked, nervously as always.

“No pain, no aches… I’m finally fine. Thank you, students,” he proclaimed, with a slight smile. “Now, where are my pants?”

“On the desk behind you, master.”

“Why, thank you,” Conrad said as he started to put them on. “Now—”

“SVEN HAS MADE HIS SOUFFLÉ FOR EVERYONE, PEOPLE! COME TO EAT!”

To say that everyone was startled would be an understatement. The students jumped, Colette looked alarmed, and Conrad was searching for a missing weapon on his belt.

Ta’Sava was standing right in the middle of the crowd, no one having noticed his arrival. His furry eyes twitched in amusem*nt, and he beamed at his peeved peers mockingly.

“Damn Khajiit,” Conrad grumbled. “I should never have taught you that spell of invisibility.”

Said Khajiit only grinned even more.

“Alright, kids. Go enjoy your meal before it gets cold,” Colette said to the students, who gladly started to gather their few belongings. “And don’t be too hard with Ta’Sava, Conrad. After all, you’re proud of him and the others.”

“HA! As if!” he snorted in a maybe too forceful manner. Too bad that his eyes were probably betraying his denial.

Damn azure pool-like eyes.

“I think that young Sven missed his calling. He would have been an excellent chef,” Colette remarked as the group, teachers and apprentices alike walked towards the room’s exit.

“Don’t tell him that, master Colette! I had to force him to start using those recipes!” Beta protested.

“AH” Ta’Sava barked. “Beta just had to look at Sven with her big, mushy eyes!”

Conrad couldn’t help but chuckle at the poor girl’s expense, watching as her face turned red while she tried to defend herself from that statement.

“Yeah,” another student joined in. “Sven ended up popping his soufflé!”

As the students’ chatter started to become louder, Conrad found himself remaining a little behind the others.

Their voices grew dimmer and dimmer, until they were but echoes bouncing off the stone walls of the ancient building. Conrad suddenly realized that he hadn’t yet set foot outside of his room.

A sense of… wrongness had intruded his mind, and he couldn’t explain why.

He looked around. The room looked perfectly normal, not a single thing out of place. Then where did this horrible sensation come—

Behind him!

Conrad whirled, using the momentum to swing a power fist towards this intruder.

Fortunately the far shorter Khajiit managed to dodge, ducking right under it.

“Master, master! It is just your disciple!” Ta’Sava pleaded, throwing up his empty hands to show that he carried no weapon.

Conrad remained silent for a few seconds, his other hand still raised to strike. Obviously it wasn’t the young student the cause of his uneasiness, because he could still feel it, reverberating all over the room.

“How many times have I told you to not sneak on me when I’m alone, Ta’Sava?” he asked. Nice save. Maybe the apprentice would not take him for a madman.

“Ta’Sava is sorry, master. Ta’Sava was sent to fetch master Conrad when master Colette realized that he had not followed us,” the beastfolk explained. “Is...master alright? Master Conrad looks...suddenly troubled.”

“I… I am fine, Ta’Sava,” he replied. Or at least he hoped to be. “I was just—”

As Conrad was searching for an answer, he felt the room getting slightly colder, like heat was fleeing the room. A change too sudden to be natural.

“Master, what—?”

Then the smell of rotten fish came.

“f*ck,” Conrad hissed. He had to get the kid out of here, now. “Something has come up, Ta’Sava. It may take a while, I’m afraid.”

Conrad hoped that the Khajiit would just take the hint and leave, but apparently the tension in his voice was thick and palpable.

“Is Master sure that—”

GO, Ta’Sava,” Conrad said, gritting his teeth. “And tell everyone that for tonight, this room is off limits.

The student’s ears went flat as the chill reached him, and he felt the same sense of unease that had assaulted Conrad only moments earlier. His pupils dilated and his fur bristled while he looked around for a threat he couldn’t see. Talos, the kid was going to panic.

“Go,” the blond Nord said, posing a hand on the Khajiit’s shoulder, trying to shake him out of it.


Ta’Sava didn’t need to be told again. With a last look back to his teacher, he fled from the room.

Conrad slammed shut the door behind him, locking it.

That’s when the chuckles started, a deep, rich sound.

“My, my, Dragonborn. Perhaps your student’s fear was quite… warranted,” a condescending voice resounded behind his back.

“What. Do. You. Want,” he said, without turning. He was walking on the edge between cold fury and unleashed rage.

“What do I want? Oh, no, Last of the Dragonborns. That is not the right question.”

"And what is the right question... Hermaeus Mora?” he asked, turning towards the floating, formless mass of slick darkness and eyes. “You are not welcome here, or anywhere around me. You should know that—"

"I have what you seek, Dragonborn," the daedric prince said, silencing him for a few seconds.

"... Of course. I should have thought as much,” Conrad sighed. “You know every secret, don't you?"

"That is not a matter of importance. I have the knowledge you require, and it could be yours as well... for a price," it stated smugly, as though it were savouring the moment.

"Oh? And that would be...?" the Nord mage asked, inwardly cautious of the poisoned honey that he was being offered.

"The price? All you need to do is come work for me once you've completed this little... quest," the Lord of Secrets whispered all around him, while a tendril touched Conrad’s shoulder, like it wanted to assure him.

"No matter what you ask, or what I would gain,” Conrad snapped, slapping the cold tentacle of darkness. “I will not serve you. I made that more than clear in Solstheim, years ago."

This was Conrad’s statement, but inside him...inside him, a small part of him was tempted to accept. It would have been so simple. In five months he had achieved nothing, and he was almost out of options.

"So high and mighty,” it hissed. And it was a terrible sound. “I suppose I could sweeten the deal with some knowledge about your brother's life, and of the people that took him as one of their own."

"You—you knew of… of course you did. You bastard."


Rage blossomed as the words were ripped from his lips. The Daedric Prince had always known about his missing twin, even before they met on the icy island that was now part of Vvenderfell.

"I know everything, Dragonborn. The more a thing is unknown or secret, the more precious it is for me,” Hermaeus Mora explained with a condescending tone. “Now, make your choice. Serve me and gain that which you desire, or drown in your own ignorance."

A pressure engulfed the room as the Daedric Lord made his presence ever stronger. The pressure was terrible, and Conrad was already feeling his head spin.

"CHOOSE," it boomed, and the Dragonborn fell on one knee. Like he was pleading, humiliated.

No way he would give in. No way in Oblivion.

"I—” he gasped, “I don't need the help of a mass of floating eyeballs with an ego to figure this out."

The pressure was dispelled instantly, as it had never been there. Conrad was able to breathe normally again, but the foul stench of corruption was still present.

"You're making a mistake, Dragonborn,” the Deadric Prince said, his—its—voice seemed more disappointed than angry. Good. “You will serve me in the end. It is inevitable. Why struggle? I could make your life so... easy."

Yes, it could. It could. But—

"In your wet dreams,” Conrad growled. “Now get out of my room!"

"Very well, but remember, we will meet again—”

“Not if I can choose so. Get out.”

“—because in the near future, you will stumble across a great number of secrets… S-rank secrets."

"What?" Conrad blinked, confused by the unfamiliar term.

But the Daedric Prince had left, leaving behind no proof of his presence. Even the foul smell was fading fast.

Stumbling, Conrad managed to get on his feet. He had sent a Daedric Prince away, verbally flipping the bird to it. And one of the more dangerous ones to boot.

Somehow, this didn’t taste like a victory. The fact that the Lord of Secrets showed an interest in those runes, and Conrad finding out their meaning, was worrisome.

Maybe the thing had an agenda in… wherever his brother had lived? But even then, why ask him? The Dremora should have known that he would refuse, even if the temptation had been great.

A gamble, perhaps?

“Minato, what mess have you gotten me into? And I haven’t even started yet,” he sighed.

Maybe Sven’s soufflé would raise his spoiled mood. He still had to plan tomorrow’s Alchemy lesson, after all.

That night, Conrad simply passed out on his bed once he finally came back in his room, his belly full of mead.

In his drunken slumber, he dreamed of four faces of stone, carved on the side of a small mountain.

He ignored the whispers, and started the lecture as programmed.

"As you may know, before the facts known as the Oblivion Crisis, the Mages Guild was a single organization, widespread on all Tamriel. After the Crisis, and the Thalmor's claims that they had saved the Mundus from the invasion of daedra, the general public started to believe that magic, and all magic users, were somehow responsible for those terrible events,” Conrad said, not really interested if his students were listening to him.

The last week after Hermaeus Mora had been terribly stressful and had taken its toll. But it was not the Daedric Prince that had annoyed him.

It was the rumors.

“Both of these claims… are lies," Conrad growled to the students. Maybe he shouldn't have done that during a lecture, but damn it felt good.

He observed passively the young faces in front of him, who were now focused on his person.

"If you wish to know more about the Oblivion Crisis, I suggest you to check the Arcanaeum, or wait until we'll speak about it in another lecture."

He remained silent for a few seconds, more absorbed from his own thoughts than from the lecture he was supposed to give.

Normally he wouldn't have minded the rumors. He would have just ignored them. Nines knew that there were already a lot about him.

“The Mages Guild was dedicated to the study of magic, much like our own College today. Unlike the College of Winterhold, though, they provided their services to the general public.”

He didn’t blame Ta’Sava, he really didn’t. The poor kitten been scared out of his fur, and it was not his fault if someone had seen him in such conditions and he hadn’t been able to explain why.

“Which mostly means that they financed themselves selling potions and minor magical items and spells. More advanced—and dangerous—knowledge was reserved for the members, who were properly trained by the guild.”

Conrad knew that it was influencing him. Because among the frustration of how badly the secret war against the Thalmor was going, being forced to lay low, and the fact that his research going nowhere, he now had to face the worried and even scared expressions of his students.

All his problems in the College, though, had origin in his research. His obsession with the runes that Minato had imprinted in his mind, and that somehow Hermaeus Mora was interested in giving to him that knowledge, for its own agenda.

Speaking of those, why couldn’t the dead idiot implant more stuff in his head with such a spell?! An explanation, a way to use them...something.

But no, he had messed with Conrad’s brain to give him four symbols and a wish from beyond the grave. And Conrad was an idiot like his deceased brother apparently, because he wanted to fulfill that request.

“This doesn’t mean that they were a magic shop spread on all Tamriel. I just want you to understand how different the perception of magic was back then,” he said, trying to concentrate again on the lecture. “They were mostly researchers, studious, archivists. But some of them were pioneers, who explored new ways to apply the power of the magicka, creating most of the spells that we still use these days.”

It didn’t work. Somehow, he couldn’t put himself in the—boring, he admitted that much—lesson about the past glories of the Mages Guild.

His mind kept thinking about the unexpected visit from Hermaeus Mora.

“Their first concern, as stated from their charter…was ensuring that all of Tamriel would benefit from their knowledge,” he sighed, more because of his inner turmoil than from a genuine nostalgia for such days.

He had to admit it, after almost six months of work. He was stuck at the very first step, because the Arcanaeum couldn’t help him. Whatever those runes were, no mage had ever seen them and put them on text, and without some reference, it could take years to decipher them and discover their purpose.

“The philosophy and politics of the guild changed various times since its founding during the Second Era. The change that we can still painfully feel, after two centuries, is the ban of the necromancy applied by the Arch-Mage Hannibal Traven," he continued, before doing a totally planned pause. "I can see that you're confused. How could a decision like that, done for the good reasons, influence us badly? Anyone wants to take a guess?"

A few seconds of silence passed. Strangely, Conrad couldn't decide what was the worse alternative: his students' newfound fear of him, or their inability to gather a conclusion from the given information.

"Fine, you asked for this. You!" he exclaimed, pointing a finger in a random direction, without even looking. "Answer the question."

The poor guy squeaked, like if Conrad had pointed a finger that was charging a deadly spell in his direction.

"It's, uh, it is because—" the student managed to ramble, somehow, "It is because the, um, necromantic cults?"

Conrad blinked. The little rabbit had managed to reply, after all.

"Exactly. You've all probably heard of them. Hiding in ruins, in caves, in the wild. Experimenting with things that should not be disturbed," he droned to his students, before changing his voice to a dangerous tone. "Should you ever join one of those bands of so-called 'mages' who only wish to use their power to inflict harm on passerbies, much like common bandits… I will hunt you down myself."

Maybe he was being too hard on them. But he didn't care anymore. He was angry, and he wanted to vent.

Even if he was angry at himself.

“Now, to continue our lecture,” he said, ignoring the shock on some of his student’s faces. “The various cults and groups of outlaw spellcasters have the same origin. During the Oblivion Crisis, the Mages Guild had to face their own crisis. Mannimarco.”

A part of him, a very small part of him, thankfully easily squashed...was regretting refusing the deal with The Lord of Secrets.

“Mannimarco, who had secretly survived for centuries, gathered a large number of followers after the ban of the necromancy,” Conrad said forcefully, not wanting to dwell on those thoughts. “His forces attacked, weakened and effectively crippled the Mages Guild, who was forced to rely on their own strength since the Empire was busy dealing with the invasion of Daedra.”

His mind just couldn’t let it go, of course.

Because he had hoped to be a better person. He was not a knight on a white stallion, rescuing damsels in distress, but he had always thought that he would have been able to resist such an obvious temptation.

Or at least, resist it with more firmness.

“Mannimarco was finally destroyed in a duel with Hannibal Traven’s successor, but the troubles for the guild were not over. As I briefly told you before, people’s perception of magic started to change after the Oblivion Crisis, and the Mages Guild were among the suspects. Even if it was widely known to the higher-ups of the Empire’s government that the responsibilities were the cult known as Mythic Dawn, accusations were made.”

f*ck, why couldn't those thoughts leave him alone? This was the reason why he hated to deal with Daedric Princes. They always messed with his head.

Even the two he could at least tolerate.

And Hermaeus Mora reminded him of a too personal matter.

“In the end, the Mages Guild was dissolved. A schism occured, in more ways that you may think. Two organizations raised by the ancient guild’s ashes: the Synod, and the College of Whispers. These two groups are rivals today, competing with one other in the pursue of ancient, often forgotten knowledge. But they’re not the only ones, no. Even our College used to be part of the Mages Guild, and like the College, there are now some small, independent magic schools scattered all around Tamriel.”

And of course, he had been tempted because his research hadn't advanced at all.

Damn, he was thinking in circles now.

Repeating the same things over and over again was a symptom of madness, right?

It wasn't like he could ask Minato again. The portal to enter inside the Soul Cairn was inside Castle Volkihar, deep within Thalmor territory.

With the whole "laying low" situation, it wasn't a good idea.

And he couldn't summon Durnehviir to ask him to ask Minato. The dragon probably would have asked for a fight in exchange, and doing such a thing in an inhabited area was an even worse idea than hiking in hostile ground while the enemy was actively searching for him.

And he would not attempt to enter the Soul Cairn like the last time, almost dying. He doubted it would have worked without the dragon’s help, which would mean, a fight.

He hadn’t felt this frustrated, helpless and angry since the woman he loved had tried to kill him—

“Master…?” a voice dared to interrupt him.

“WHAT?!” he snapped viciously.

Only to realize that he had lashed against the poor, concerned Beta. The girl instinctively retracted, her expression full of hurt.

It felt like he had just kicked a puppy.

Why were all looking at him like that? Maybe he had overdone it, but—

He had stopped talking, completely lost in his thoughts. How long had he remained silent, before Beta, of all people, had found the courage to talk to him?

Conrad understood perfectly that he was losing control, that he was letting himself lose control.

What if he hadn't just screamed at the poor girl? What if he had reacted as if an enemy had sneaked up on him?

He had to stay away from the kids, for their own good.

"Conrad, what in Oblivion is wrong with you?!"

"Mirabelle, please..."

"Yelling at the students like that? You're not their blasted drill-master! This is a COLLEGE, Conrad. A MAGE'S college. Or have you forgotten?"

"So, throwing fireballs at them is fine, but not yelling at them?"

Mirabelle's features darkened. "Conrad, do not test my patience."

"Alright, sorry, Mirabelle. It's just—I don't really know. That's the problem."

"Conrad, what am I going to do with you?" the Archmage sighed, rubbing her eyes in frustration.

"I don't know. Maybe I should leave. I can pack my things in an hour."

"That would be for the best, Conrad," Mirabelle nodded gravely. "Feel free to come back once you've… cleared your mind. Take care of whatever you need to."

Conrad nodded in return, and without any further words, he left the Arch-Mage's office.

He debated immediately going towards his room to leave, but he decided against it.

He had left a little mess in the Arcanaeum the previous night, too tired to put the books in the right shelves. Since the new librarian was not… efficient like the old Orc had been, he supposed he could check it.

Then it was just a matter of prepare his bag, getting out of the robes Mirabelle had forced him to wear for months, and… and what?

He doubted he could complete his research, unless he wanted to try the Arcane University of the Imperial City. But he had no contacts there. It would be a fruitless journey.

No, he knew what he would do. He would find a nice spot to lay low without being a problem, wait until the Thalmor didn't expect anything, and go straight to Serana's former home.

Maybe even ask Serana to join for a ride.

Then he would punch Minato in his incorporeal face, over and over again, while screaming "Six months wasted!"

And only then would he ask to his brother to explain better.

If entering into Castle Volkihar revealed itself to be too risky…

Well, he had tried, at least. He could just go back doing what he had done for the last years. Even if the idea of surrendering didn't suit him at all.

As he entered the College’s library, he found himself face to face with the last person he wanted to see now.

Beta was frozen in place a few meters away, a stock of books and scrolls balanced precariously in her hands.

She stared at him, moving her lips like she wanted to say something.

Conrad just ignored her and went to collect the books he had consulted. They were exactly how he had left them.

“Master,” the girl finally managed to say, after just staring at him for some minutes. “I—”

“I’m not your master anymore, Beta. It’s better this way,” he interrupted her, without looking away from the books he was piling. “You kids will get a better teacher. A more patient one.”

“We don’t want a different teacher. We just want to know what happened to you, Master Conrad.”

Damn, why couldn’t she just… hate him, fear him, or avoid him? This was unbearable.

“It’s complicated, Beta. And as I said, I will not be your teacher anymore. I’m leaving the College today.”

Silence descended again in the Arcanaeum, interrupted only by the soft shuffle of paper.

“It has to do with you being… well… the Dragonborn?” she asked, timidly.

“Not really. Yes. Whatever… Look, Beta. This is not… easy for me. Could you just leave me alone?”

Once again, he was rewarded with a hurt expression. Why had he started to care for these kids?!

“I was here before you, Master,” Beta sniffed stubbornly, clutching her papers tightly.

“You know what? You’re right. I’ll go then,” Conrad said, putting the books on a shelf, not really caring if the placement was correct. Urag gro-Shub would probably punish his not enough diligent successor, anyway. He would have been long gone before the old Orc raised from the grave to punish him.

“Do you really have to leave now?!” the girl exclaimed while he started to move towards the exit.

“The sooner, the better,” he said, not looking back once. He reached for the door’s handle.

“I—I… Since you’re leaving, could you at least help me with this research I need to do for a class!?”

What.

He slowly turned towards the girl, knowing that the right now he had the most incredulous face that Nirn had ever seen.

“What did you say?” he asked, unable to understand why the girl had asked him that.

“I asked… if you would help me with a research of my own? For the extra curriculum?”

“What are you working on?” he sighed, caving in. Those pleading eyes could have convinced a troll to not eat the girl.

“I… I’m reading these old scrolls,” Beta said, not believing that it had worked. “They describe a spell of… Mysticism?”

“Ah, yes. The so called ‘Lost School’,” he mused, slowly coming closer to the girl to check the texts she was showing him.

“Lost?” Beta blinked.

“Well, have you ever heard of it before?” Conrad smirked, grimly. “After the fall of the Mages Guild, a lot of things changed. Some traditions were lost, as well. Mysticism was a school that was slowly abandoned. But its spells, or the majority of them, were incorporated in other schools, mostly Alteration.”

“Oh,” was all that Beta managed to say.

“Now, this spell you are studying?”

“Here it is,” she said, handing over a large, thick scroll. “It’s supposed to allow the user to teleport himself, but—”

“Let me guess,” Conrad interrupted her after checking the details of the scroll. “You can’t teleport at all, right?”

Beta’s eyes widened, and she looked to panic for a second before deciding to go for embarrassment.

“Yeah, I’m sorry that I’m not that good.”

“It’s not your fault, Beta,” he sighed. Seriously, the girl was a ball of yarn made of insecurities. “The fact is, you have only half of the spell.”

“Huh?”

“Which doesn’t surprise me, since a lot of the old Mysticism lore has been scattered and half-forgotten,” he mused. “I’ve heard of this spell. It’s composed of two separate ones. This is quite a good find, Beta. Be sure to tell to Mirabelle about this, if she doesn’t already know.”

“But… what use is it? If it’s just half of a spell…”

“Well, I’m pretty sure that with enough time, a mage could reverse-engineer the other half. See, this part of the spell, ‘Mark’, is the one that is casted first. It creates a magic rune in a location or an item. The other part of the spell, that you don’t have, allows the user to teleport back to where the first rune—”

It was right then that an idea bright as a fireball exploded in Conrad’s brain.

And for a few, long seconds, he just remained completely silent, staring at the scroll in his hand.

“Master… you’re kinda scaring me again,” Beta tried to laugh, but her voice was full of apprehension.

Conrad blinked, and stared at her, and then at the scroll.

“Sorry, sorry, I just… realized something,” he half-whispered, more talking to himself than the girl. “Would you mind if I borrow this… for… a while?”

“But… my research?” the student asked, confused.

“No matter! You just made top of all my classes as far as I’m concerned!”

“What? But… weren’t you leaving?”

“Leaving?!” Conrad exclaimed loudly. “Preposterous! I have a research to finish first!”

And with that, he left the poor, confused Beta in the Arcanaeum.

He was back in the game.

A loud knock disturbed him. He was tempted to shout the good old Fus-Ro-Dah at the intruder, but sadly he had closed the door from the inside.

“Go away! I asked to not be disturbed!” he yelled without stopping scribbling notes on a parchment.

“Masteeer!” a voice lamented from behind the thick wood barrier.

“Beta, I’ve told you I don’t wish to be disturbed! I’m at a breakthrough, here!”

“Ta’Sava told you guys that it was not a good idea.”

“Oh, shut up, fur-face! You were worried more than any of us!”

“Does Sven want to start a brawl with Ta’Sava?!” was the angry reply.

“Guys, shut up! You’re not helping. Master, you’ve not left your room in days! We’re starting to get worried!”

“I’ll leave when I’m done! Just a few more minutes…”

“Master, it has been two weeks!”

“What’s going on here?” a new voice asked. Mirabelle. “Why are you all in front of this door?”

“We’re trying to get master Conrad out of his room, Arch-Mage,” was the explanation given.

“Conrad? When did he came back?”

“I never left!” he shouted towards the door. Then he added another scribble on the paper and crossed other two. “Didn’t you notice?”

“What?! Why has no one informed me about—”

“How did you even survive, master?! What did you eat? Books?!”

“Food is for the weak!” he argued. Also, he had eaten. Two days ago. Three. Whatever.

“Master… if you come out, we have mead for you.”

Conrad remained still for a full minute, not responding to the obvious bait.

He went back to his work, giving the last touches to the whole thing.

"Give me that!" Mirabelle ordered.

Then he heard the sound of a bottle emptying.

She wouldn't dare...

And to his absolute horror, the precious nectar began to trickle in from under the door.

"Conrad," Mirabelle said, "If you don't come out right now, this mead will never go past your lips."

Conrad gritted his teeth. He was almost done!

"Oh, look at that. One bottle down, nine to go."

He heard a loud gulping noise. “Ah, delicious. There’s nothing like honey mead.”

Conrad’s eyes went flat.

"Alright, alright! You win! I'm coming!" he replied, hurrying to open to unlock the door.

It was almost time to field-test his newest spell, anyway.

As he opened the door, he found himself face to face with a not pleased Arch-Mage who had an empty bottle in her hand.

And various students were watching the scene. Conrad absently noted the other bottles, safely in Beta’s hands.

“You monster,” he hissed.

“What are you doing in my College, Conrad? Didn’t you said that you would leave?”

“I did. Then I changed my mind when I realized how to complete my research!”

“Master smells bad,” Ta’Sava lamented, stepping back along his fellow classmates.

“Wait, you realized what?”

“No time to explain! Follow me!”

“Follow you where?”

“To the roof! And you may want to send someone to clean the pots inside my bedroom.”

As he walked in the hallway in the direction of the stairway, he heard Mirabelle ordering to the apprentices to do something about the horrible smell and whatever it originated from.

A small fight amongst themselves as to who had to do it. In the end, Sven was shoved forward.

He had almost reached the door to the highest place of the College, when Mirabelle—and some of his students, minus Sven—caught up with him.

“Conrad! Why are you going to the roof?” the Arch-Mage asked, now more curious about what he had in mind than the fact that he had practically stolen a room for weeks.

“Just need to test a spell I researched, and I’m afraid it can’t be done with walls around. Or a roof over your head,” he explained, pushing the door.

“A spell that can’t be used inside—Please tell me that you have no intention of experimenting with the Icarian Flight! There are less idiotic ways to kill yourself!”

“What? No! I have no intention of imitating a long line of idiots that could not even figure out that they had to land. I just need to do this in the open,” he said, stepping in the snow-covered terrace.

“Fine, but I expect you to give me an explanation afterwards,” Mirabelle mumbled.

“No promises, but I’ll try,” Conrad said as he stopped right in the middle of the roof.

There, the moment of truth. Either he had guessed right, or he had to punch Minato’s ghostly face as soon as possible.

Even if he knew that his theory was a longshot, he had to try.

Conrad started to charge magicka in both of his hands, ignoring the students watching him curiously, held in place only by a protective gesture from Mirabelle.

A azure-white ball of magicka appeared in his hands, looking highly unstable.

He kept concentrating on the spell, overcharging it with arcane energies… before releasing it, high above him.

The ball of light immediately soared, at high speed, moving in a precise direction…

“East,” Conrad whispered, before smirking. “Sneaky little bastard…”

“Conrad, was that—”

“Wait a moment, please,” he interrupted, charging again the very same spell and releasing another ball of light that imitated the previous one. “Mmh, the direction is constant, so it’s not a fluke.”

“Conrad,” Mirabelle said with a hard voice. “What. Was. That.”

“It was a clairvoyance spell. A modified version, created by me to cover longer distances, and to search for a precise thing,” he replied, still watching the still visible light that was still moving towards the horizon. “It uses quite a lot of magicka, though.”

“The runes you showed me,” Mirabelle realized. “Are you going to explain me why they’re so important to you now?”

“Later, in your office. For now, let’s just say that I think they’re similar to a foreign version of the ancient ‘Mark’ and ‘Recall’ spells. Kids, time for a question of geography,” he said, looking towards his confused students. “What lands lie at east?”

“...Vvanderfell?” Beta meekly asked.

“Well, yes. But...what lies further? On the other side of the sea?”

“Akavir, master Conrad?” Ta’Sava replied, arching an eyebrow.

“Indeed,” Conrad sighed. “I am going to need a ship.”

Notes:

The cringe-at-the-sights-of-my-earlier-writing effect is still happening but I remember that I enjoyed writing this chapter a lot back in the day.

Here's the omake for it:

------------------------

"Fine, you asked for this. You!" he exclaimed, pointing a finger in a random direction, without even looking. "Answer the question."

The poor guy squeaked, like if Conrad had pointed a finger that was charging a deadly spell in his direction.

"It's, uh, it is because—" the student managed to ramble, somehow, "It is because the, um, necromantic cults?"

"Ten points to Gryffindor!"

Chapter 5: Ships, Gold and Journeys

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Two figures moved in the cold morning.

They were following the White River upstream, along the strait just south of the point where it joined the Sea of Ghosts.

The two men were walking towards a precise destination, but they had been forced to take the harder route to reach it. They were proceeding on freshly fallen snow, the older one forging a path through it almost effortlessly, using his staff to keep from slipping.


Even if months had passed since that accident in Hjaalmarch, it was still a bad idea to travel the main roads.

Technically speaking, Conrad and Haming were not even on any sort of road or a path.

There was nothing in the land around the river, besides cold water, cold snow, cold ground and cold rocks.

If you didn’t count wild animals and the fish, of course.

But the relative monotony of the trip was not the reason for the silence between the two adventurers. Conrad’s mind was completely focused on his new objective, after months of failed experiments and research that had led nowhere.


Just traveling to Akavir would take weeks, maybe months, by sea. But it was the only feasible way to reach the distant land.

What he would do once he arrived there, was another problem. He could follow the tracer to find the places his brother had inscribed those mysterious runes, but after that… his plans were nebulous at best.


But he had every intention of trying to satisfy his dead brother’s wish, to alert the people that had raised him about that masked man or whatever.

And hopefully to find out why Minato—the name still sounded so strange and unfamiliar to him—had been so desperate that he was forced to send his own spirit to the Soul Cairn.

He would have to improvise once he reached Akavir’s shores.

Haming’s state of mind, however…

“I hate you, boss,” the younger man spat, glaring at the being that was probably the only other survivor of the inhabitants of Helgen.

“Are you really going to be like that the whole way?” Conrad asked.

“Probably. I really hate you, you know.”

“No, you don’t,” he said dismissively without looking at his protégé. “And if I recall correctly, when we arrived in Winterhold I ordered you to not get distracted by her curves.”

“I was not distracted! I was keeping my eyes on her,” the archer protested while adjusting the weight of his backpack.

“I found you in her bed,” Conrad said smirking. True, discovering that the young hunter did indeed have some interest in the greatest mystery of creation, the woman, had been amusing.

“You dragged me out of her bed!” Haming pointed out vehemently. “I waited patiently for months—while executing your orders about what to do with my group, I might add—while you were busy with your research in that fancy College. Then you suddenly decide to drop everything and leave without notice. Couldn’t you have waited one more hour?!”

“You should thank me, you know,” Conrad said as he climbed over a small gap. Once steady, he turned and offered his hand to the younger Nord. “Now you’ll be able to tell your children, one day, about the time their uncle Conrad saved you from the clutches of a busty older woman.”

“Feida is only seven years older than me. Almost eight. But I refuse to listen to age jokes from someone that used to f*ck a millennia-old vampire,” Haming rebutted, accepting Conrad’s help.

Former vampire,” he said, feeling that pointing out such particular was important. He pulled, helping his younger fellow villager.

“And by the way,” Haming started again when he’d regained his footing, “my children, if I ever have them, will not call you uncle.”

“Oh, I’m terribly wounded,” Conrad mocked, as he started to lead again.

“They’ll call you grandfather,” the younger man scoffed.

It was a dig about his age, Conrad knew. He kept walking in silence, not wanting to give him the satisfaction of knowing it affected him.

Still, he was aware of the tiny bit of, badly hidden, pride in Haming’s voice when he had proclaimed such a thing. And he understood the meaning behind it.

A small part of him was moved by such declaration.

In any case, he punched Haming’s arm when they arrived on a safer ground a few minutes later.

Hard.

“Here we are,” Conrad said, pointing towards the walled city on the horizon. “Windhelm.”

"Oh good. A change of scenery. I'm sick of this river, boss."

"We're almost there, Haming. Come on, we're burning daylight,"

"For days, only snow and fish. Snow and fish. I want to eat meat!"

"Oh, quit your yapping. We're almost there."

For a good hour, the two men marched in silence, one dreaming of juicy, hot slices of roast, the other thinking about his next move.

A journey to Akavir was no easy task. Legend said that the last person who had tried had been the Nerevarine.


And he had never returned. If that story was even true.

Conrad had learned to not completely trust the stories of the Empire of old, but finding a ship and a crew up to the task would still be a pain.

As they finally arrived at the gates near twilight, just in time before the guards locked them for the night, he decided that he would not plan too far ahead for this foolish quest of his.

No sense in making long-term schemes with so many unknowns. You would get screwed anyway.

“Finally,” muttered Haming. “Can we find a tavern, now?”


“Yes, yes. Follow me,” the older man said, keeping his pace on the paved road.

“Wait, where are you going?” Haming asked, confused. “The Candlehearth Hall is that way.”


“I can’t go to that Inn. We’re going to the New Gnisis Cornerclub.”


“Oh. Uh, I don’t mind being around Dunmer, boss, you know that, but… why?”


“The current owner of the Candlelight Hall used to be a Stormcloak,” he said with a regretful tone.

No other explanations were given, or necessary. The short walk to the other inn was as silent as their walk in the snow, if not more.

As they passed in front of the closed and barred temple of Talos, Conrad lowered his head in shame.

That night, he dreamed of a woman with beautiful red hair.


It was not the flame-like red he had seen on other people. Her hair was red like blood.

She was speaking a tongue he could not understand, but she was smiling at him.

And her smile was like sunshine.

“Stupid dream, stupid leaves, stupid dead brother,” Conrad mumbled as he chewed his breakfast. It was clear that Minato’s spell had done more than just plant four funny symbols in his head.


He just wished he had told him that it would have messed with his dreams.

“What dead brother?” Haming asked in confusion.

“Nevermind, it’s a long and crazy story. I’ll tell you later.”

“... Fine. So what’s the plan now?” the young archer questioned as he split the dark bread in two rough halves and offering one to the older Nord.

“Simple. I have to find a ship,” Conrad said before taking a gulp of ale.

“That shouldn’t be a prob—”


“Without telling them the destination, yet. Just that it’s far away, it’s risky, and that the ship will beach on a foreign shore.”


“Yeah, boss. ‘Simple’. I don’t envy you… What about me?”

Still eating, Conrad just pulled a folded piece of paper from one of his pouches and offered it to Haming.

“Boss… what is this?” the young lad asked in confusion after opening it and reading its contents.

“A list of provisions that could be useful. You know, food. Ingredients for potions. Scrolls and blank papers. One or two extra weapons. Mead. Stuff like that.”

“Can’t I just search for a ship instead?” Haming pleaded.


“No.”

“Are you crazy, pal? I’m not moving my ship without knowing where!” the Breton merchant said, laughing a little.

“Get lost!” the Dunmer said, emphasizing his words with a rude gesture of the hand.

“Either you tell me where you want to go, or I’m not even letting you on my ship,” the old man that looked like a pirate said, immovable with his arms crossed over his chest.

“Wait, don’t I know you?” a woman asked, looking at him with a curious eye. The one not covered by an eyepatch.


The man just laughed, hard, for several minutes. Finally, when he seemed at the point of attempted suicide by asphyxiation, he began to regain control of himself. Which required another few minutes.

Finally, he spoke to Conrad.


“f*ck off!”

“Stupid captains, with their stupid ships that I need,” he growled in the dim lighted room of the tavern, clenching his fists on the sides of the table he was sitting at.

“No luck, boss?” Haming asked, placing a pair of large sacks on the wooden surface before sitting on across from him.

“A whole day, wasted. Nobody is interested in a well-paid journey on an uncharted route without knowing what exactly to expect at our destination.”

“Can’t imagine why…” the younger man said, rolling his eyes.

“Did you find everything on the list?” Conrad asked, gesturing to the sacks.

“Well, everything but—”

“Well, well, well, what a hilarious sight,” a voice interrupted. Turning towards the almost-desert inn’s common room, the two men saw a Dunmer moving slowly towards them. It was the owner of the establishment. The Dunmer was sneering, as he spoke again. “The two bloody Nords are in trouble, uh? Nobody wants to join their crazy adventure?”

Conrad saw Haming’s gaze move from the rude Dunmer to him. He was probably wondering how the older Nord would have reacted to such mockery.

The few patrons inside the inn grew silent, as the innkeeper arrived at the two men’s table, the face set in a frown.


“What’s it to you, grey ears?” he growled, narrowing his eyes.


The two of them stared each other down, blue and red eyes, for a tense few minutes. Haming seemed on the point of using one of the mugs on the table as an improvised weapon.

Then Conrad and the dark elf started laughing, much to Haming’s confusion.

The other Dunmer in the inn snickered a little, like they were seeing a familiar scene, before focusing on their drinks again.

“Took you long enough to get out of that counter to see an old friend, Malthyr.”

“I had to wait until there were less customers. I run a business, Conrad,” the dark elf said, placing a jug and three cups on the table. “Here, the best matze you’ll find outside of Morrowind.”

“I didn’t ordered it, Mal,” Conrad said, looking at the liquor with confusion.

“Nonsense! It’s on the house,” the innkeeper said while serving the two Nords and himself a good portion of the beverage. “This, and more, for the man that killed Ulfric Stormcloak!”

Conrad’s jaw clenched. Of all his achievements, that was the one that he regretted the most.

Not that Ulfric was exactly a saint. Conrad had even hated the man after he had discovered the agreement with the Thalmor the man had put in place during the Great War.

He just wished things could have been different.

So as not to offend his Dunmer friend, he accepted the drink.

“So, how’s it going, Conrad? The boy with you seems a little shocked,” Malthyr said, gesturing towards Haming that was still looking at them, not even registering the full cup in front of him.

“Never mind him, he can’t understand our old inside-joke,” Conrad said, smirking. “Haming, this is Malthyr Elenil, leader of the local Dunmer and owner of this hole—”

“Hey, I take offense in that,” Malthyr scowled again. “It stopped being a hole after I took over. Also, having Brunwulf Free-Winter as a jarl helped.”

“I can imagine,” Conrad resumed. “And, Mal, this is Haming. My minion and lackey.”

“Hey! I’m only a lackey. Not your minion,” the younger Nord protested.

“Sure you are,” Conrad snorted, ignoring the fake affront on Haming’s face. “After all, you just call me ‘boss’ all the time.”

“A pleasure, young lad. So, what’s this story about a ship?” Malthyr asked, pulling closer a stool to sit on.

“I need to rent one for a few months,” the blond mage simply said.


Rent one? What do you want to do? Travel around the continent?”


“Something like that. But I can’t tell the captain—or you—the destination until the ship will sail.”


“No self-respecting independent captain would accept such a thing. Why don’t you go to speak to the jarl? A lot of people consider you a hero. I bet he could help with an expedition—”


“It must remain… unofficial,” Conrad cut him short. “I can’t put attention on Brunwulf. He’s already in the Thalmor’s sights just by being a former Talos worshipper.”


“Former? You should just see how he looks at the barred temple,” Malthyr said, shaking slowly his head. “Alright, no official help, you say? I may—mind you, I
may—know something that could help you two.”


“What do you mean?” Haming asked expectantly, tired of being cut off the conversation.


“You see, no self-respecting captain would accept such deal. Unless they were desperate enough for money.”


“And do you know of a captain so desperate that hasn’t sold his own ship already?” Conrad asked with evident interest.

“I think that is our man,” Conrad whispered, indicating the person that had just left the Candlehearth Hall at a late hour.

“How can you tell?” Haming asked in a similar tone, peeking from the alley they were using as a hiding place.

“He has the typical walk of a man that is full of debts. Also, he’s a Breton—”

“That’s slightly racist, boss.”

“—and I saw his face when he passed besides the lantern. He matches with the description Malthyr gave us. Come on,” he concluded, gesturing to the younger Nord to follow him.

Their mark was moving towards the docks in a straight, direct path. It was not a difficult task to remain unnoticed by him even if he stopped continuously to look around.

Apparently, he was nervous about something.


Conrad was on the point of calling out to the man, so that they could discuss business, when he noticed a group of people coming out of an alley besides the street for the docks. The small crowd, all nine of them, seemed to be composed of an assorted mix of thugs.


The Breton saw them, tensing immediately once he sensed their presence. But instead of running, he stood his ground.

One of them, probably the leader, said something. Conrad was too far to hear that, though.

Then they grabbed the Breton captain, who started to struggle, and dragged him like a sack of potatoes inside an alley.

“Oh, great,” Conrad grunted.

“So, the plan is not just making a good offer to him anymore, boss?”


“Did you realize that on your own, or did you just have a hunch?” he asked rhetorically, while moving faster towards the alley where his ticket to Akavir had been yanked.

It was then that he heard the yells.

“SCUM-f*ckERS! SALT-DRINKERS! YA FILTHY SONS OF CHEAP WHOR—” a voice exclaimed at the top of his lungs, before being silenced by what sounded like a punch.

A few coughs, like if the man was not able to breath. Conrad slowly reached the corner and took a peek.

The gang of thugs was surrounding the fallen Breton. Most of them were armed with clubs, but a few blades were present on their belts. It was obvious that it was a gang of the bad side of town, the docks, in the middle of their usual business.

Reminding people who was boss around here.

“You were told that we would have come back for our money, Edvyval,” the ringleader of the gang said. “The fact that you were not able to sell the goods means nothing to me.”

“Oh, bite a squig, ya brain-dead fish!” the gasping Breton managed to say, ire in his voice. “I know it was ya and yor pals that stole my cargo. I owe you sh*t!”


The leader smirked, kneeling on the sprawled man.

“You can’t prove that. Nobody will listen to your claims. And you know what that means, right? Now I can just take your ship.”

“Ya wouldn’t dare, pus-ridden—”

“I just need a signature on a document. And you wouldn’t believe that,” the gang leader said, pulling a scroll out of a pouch attached to his belt, “I have one with me right now. You can sign, or we can see how many teeth I have to—”

“I’ve heard enough,” Conrad whispered to Haming. “Are we interrupting something?” he asked loudly, as he entered in the alley with the most menacing pacing he could do.

Haming imitated him, as the loyal self-proclaimed lackey he was.

The gang turned immediately, reacting to the potential threat, but Conrad couldn’t really take them seriously.


They had forgotten to so much as put someone as lookout during the thrashing.

“Who the f*ck are you?” the leader asked, rising from his knees and adopting what he thought was a scary position.

It just made him look fat, in Conrad’s opinion.

“Somebody that need to talk with the man you’re clobbering,” he said, taking out his hood and revealing his golden mane. “So, buzz off.”

The fat ringleader just snorted.

“Why should I? I’m not afraid of you two.”

“What did you say?” Conrad asked to the leader, in genuine surprise.

“I said that—”

“No, no. I got that,” Conrad interrupted. “You mean you didn’t recognize me?”

“Oh, I think I’ll remember you, after I’ll have added a few scars on that ugly face of yours,” the fat criminal sneered. Around him, the gang seemed to find more confidence.

Conrad just blinked.

“You know, this is… surprisingly refreshing,” he said, scratching the back of his head. “But to tell you guys the truth, I was counting on my reputation to scare the sh*t out of you.”

“It’s because you’re not like you are in the songs, boss,” Haming threw his own two septims while ignoring the confused gang. “You’re not wearing that horned helm,” he said, gesturing on the sides of his own head with his fingers.

“Talos,” Conrad growled. “I hate that stupid helm! I wore it for a year and now, because of those gods damned bards, people think I’m still using it!”

After that exchange, a couple of the thugs—probably the smarter ones—started to figure it out, and became quite pale.

Too bad their boss was not one of the smartest of the gang.

“Enough of this idiocy,” he said, taking a step ahead. “Guys, I want this two idiots—”

Conrad never had a chance of hearing what the fat*ss wanted, since he was on him in a heartbeat. The sight of the man’s eyes widening was incredibly comical.

Then he administered the old Riften’s Trio: a fast jab to the neck, a hook to the temple and, as the man was on the ground, a kick in the face.

The once tall and fat gang leader was reduced to a limp sack of meat and bones.

Haming capitalized on the surprise, charging an opponent of his own and delivering a classic one-two.

Conrad had no intention to be no less.

He saw one of the criminals attempting to hit him in the head with his club, snarling.

Conrad knelt, grabbing the man's wrist at the same time.

A simple twist, and he felt a bone breaking. The man screamed, and the club fell from his hand.

The Nord grabbed it, taking a step back to dodge a swing from another guy.

Counter, half-turn.

His burrowed club slammed on the second attacker's cheekbone, breaking at the strength of the impact.

The man went down.

Conrad saw a flash of metal, and dodged instinctively. The other man, the one with the broken wrist, was holding a short dagger in his functional hand, though he looked like he was hating every second of it.

Luckily for Conrad, he sucked with his left hand.

Conrad gave him the Ratway's Greeting.

The thug’s face turned an ugly shade of purple as Conrad's foot lashed out against his groin.

The Dragonborn didn't hesitate, and grabbed the man's head, slamming it against his own soaring, armoured knee.

Cruel, but effective.

He pulled up the almost unconscious man—Conrad had to give him credit, he was a tough bastard—and shoved him towards one of his fellows, causing the both of them to tumble down the cobblestone street.

The one still able to move got up the fastest he could, crawling away from Conrad, before turning tail and fleeing.

He was one of the gang’s more intelligent ones.

Since Haming seemed to being holding his own against his opponent, Conrad concentrated on an enemy that was trying to flank his pupil.

A rather burly Argonian.

Conrad made one, two fast steps, tapped him by the shoulder and punched the scaly face when he turned towards him.

The Argonian didn’t go down. Instead, he merely started to circle around Conrad, hissing while putting on a good defence.

Conrad took quite a liking to him.

Jab. Uppercut.


The Argonian passed on the offensive. Parry, counter.

Conrad took a step back, and the lizardfolk took the opportunity to try and bite him in the face.

He thanked him with a kick in the stomach. The Argonian charged.

Side-step, kick in the shin.

Ha! That had to hurt, even with scales on—

Conrad felt something hit both his legs, and he fell on the ground with a grunt.

sh*t. He had forgot to watch out for the f*cking tail.

The muscular Argonian was now stable again, towering over him, his hand on a knife’s handle.

Conrad decided that he didn’t like him anymore.

Oh well, nothing that a nice fire blast in the face couldn’t fix—

Conrad didn’t even made in time to call his magicka to him, that the Argonian fell face-first on the ground.

What the—

“CAME HERE, YA BLOODY DOGS!” a voice screamed, followed by various thuds. “I’LL SHOW YA!”

It was the captain, Edvyval whatever-his-surname-was.

The Breton had yanked the Argonian for the tail, and was now fending off another crook with a club, one he had probably picked up from the ground.

Conrad was really appreciating the fact that the sea captain had not fled at the first opportunity, and showed his gratitude by kicking the Argonian’s snout, which was right in front of his boots.

He repeated the process until the reptilian was out cold.

That gave the captain the opportunity to let go of the still tail and concentrating on his current adversary.

Who lost a pair of teeth, courtesy of the Breton’s club.

Conrad rolled on his flank to dodge the mallet that had been aimed at his head, stumbling onto his feet as fast as he could.

The goon threw himself at him, weapon raised.

He just grabbed the other man and headbutted him, breaking his nose.

The crook faltered for a second before falling down with a whimper.

The remaining members of the gang didn’t seem to be intimidated by this one bit. In fact, they were starting to take out real weapons.

It seemed they wanted to rush towards the three of them in a single charge.

Conrad’s axe left his belt in a flash of metal, appearing in his hand. He just remained still, waiting for them, with his head half-co*cked.

The crooks seemed to hesitate.

He raised an eyebrow, along with his axe.

What remained of the gang just turned and ran like there was no tomorrow.

Haming immediately started to check the fallen—and in one case, still moaning ones—for valuables as Conrad put his weapon away, turning towards the Breton captain.

“Who are ya?” the man asked, looking at him up and down, before spitting on Conrad’s boots. He had the club ready for any evanescence. “And what do ya—”

Conrad sucker-punched him, knocking him out cold.

“I think I like this one,” he grinned, grabbing the unconscious Breton before he hit the ground.

Haming just stared at him as though he were mad.

A moan was the first sign of the man’s recovery.

The Breton moved slowly his head, eyes half-closed while checking his surroundings.

Conrad and Haming had taken him back to the New Gnisis Cornerclub. Since it was really late at night and there were no guests for the night—besides them—Malthyr had granted him to use the common room to discuss business with their… patron.

“Oh, good. You’re waking up,” Conrad exclaimed cheerfully. He handed the man a glass of sujamma. “Here, drink this. It will help, if you’ve got a good stomach.”

The man accepted the drink slowly, not really sure where he was.

He touched his face where Conrad had given him a black eye.

Then his good eye snapped open.

"Ya little—"

He tried to get up from the chair, but Conrad firmly held him in place, placing a hand on his shoulder.

Firmly.

"The punch was just because I was pissed with you," Conrad said, showing a cruel smile.

"Jeez, boss. Way to go to get the guy's trust," Haming muttered from the angle where he was counting the money found on the gang of people that didn't listen to the songs.

Or that listened to them way too much.

"What do ya mean? I owe ya no money, I'm sure o’ that," the man proclaimed, confused by their behaviour.

"Because of the whole brawl in the alley. After all, I just want to speak with you."

"And you spit on his boots," Haming added. "What was he supposed to do?!" he cried dramatically, hands thrown up in the air. "His honor must remain intact or the world shall fall apart!"

"Shut up, Haming."

Haming snickered, then went back to counting the money.

"I don't even know who ya people are!"

"Oh, right," Conrad said, taking his hand off the Breton's shoulder and offering it to him. "Conrad Harissen, pleased to meet you."

The man frowned for a second, trying to recall where he had heard the man. His eyes widened like saucers.

"Ya're not—wait, are ya?"

"Yes, I am," Conrad said, becoming serious.

For a whole minute, nobody spoke and the only sound was the the tingling of the septims in front of Haming.

“What do ya want?” the Breton asked, the voice low.

"You could start with introducing yourself. It's common courtesy," he said, sitting on a stool right in front of the shorter man.

"Huh, yes, of course. I'm Edvyval Letons, merchant by trade."

"Very well, Edyval—I can call you Edyval, right? Sure I can, I already punched you. Now, Edyval… what can you tell me about your ship?"

"My ship? Why do ya want to know about my ship?!"

"Business. Now, tell me about your ship," Conrad insisted.

"My ship's called The Seeker. It's a good ship. Built it Dawnstar, with good wood. Not good like a honest Breton's ship, but—"

"How big it is? Is it fast?"

"It's bigger than a normal merchant ship. Probably around one hundred feet," Edyval shrugged. "I think it was commissioned as a recon vessel a little before of the Great War."

"It is good on the sea? And I mean, open sea."

"Sure it is—Wait,” the Breton stopped, looking at Conrad with suspicious eyes, “are ya trying to know about my ship so ya can steal it?!"

"Don't start spouting nonsense. I don't want to steal your ship. I want to rent it. Along with your services."

“Really?” Edyval asked, relaxing. “To go where?”


“Far,” Conrad replied flatly.

“How much? The other side of Tamriel?”


“Probably more far than that. But I can’t tell you until we’ve left Skyrim’s coasts,” he said, emphasizing the part about secrecy.

"If you're going to be like that, why should I—"

"Haming, please, fetch me the bigger sack," Conrad interrupted, calling the younger man without turning his gaze from the Breton’s eyes.

"The one I carried for the whole trip here?" Haming mumbled.

"Yes, that one," Conrad smirked.

The younger Nord complied reluctantly, rising from his seat and walking towards their room.

A few moments later, he came back with a big burlap rucksack, nearly as big as his torso.

"Thank you," Conrad smiled, relieving his younger companion from the massive weight.

Edyval looked curiously at Conrad, only to retract a little when the Nord unsheathed his dagger.

With a fast, precise movement of the blade, Conrad made a cut in the side of the sack, letting its contents spill out on the table.

A sea of gold, both septims and ancient coins from before the Empire, poured from the wounded rucksack with a metal racket.

Coin against wood, coin against coin, each shining in the candles' lights.

It took a few moments before silence fell down on the room again.

"Is this enough?" Conrad asked with a neutral expression, but inwardly he was smiling.

A life as an adventurer helped to find a lot of riches. Having places to hide them was another perk.

Having a loyal lackey to transport them in his place, instead, had no price.

Edyval started sweating.

That was a lot of gold.

Really, really a lot of gold.

It was more than enough to pay his debts and still have a lot of gold after this mysterious travel that the freaking Dragonborn wanted to do.

But he knew there was a trick somewhere.

He was aware that gold the Dragonborn had a lot of enemies. If he gold wanted to rent a ship to travel without telling the gold captain about the destination, it had surely something to do with them.

And the gold voices were almost unanimous about who these enemies were.

He was well aware that gold it was madness to join those gold lunatics as they tried to do whatever dangerous thing with gold an high chance of get themselves killed, but it was becoming way harder and harder to ignore the gold gold gold.

A week had passed since the deal between Conrad and Edvyval Letons.

He would have preferred to depart immediately, but even with his limited knowledge about sailing, the Dragonborn knew that such a long journey, on uncharted seas to boot, required an adequate preparation.

Conrad was sitting on the pier, facing the sea, organizing the letters he had prepared to explain his absence to the people he trusted and half-truths for his contacts in and outside of the province.

Once in a while, he could see the crew he and the Breton had recruited passing in front of him with crates, sacks, boxes and barrels. All the necessary supplies were been loaded on the ship.

After all, it was the day of the departure.

The Seeker was a magnificent ship, even with its half-century of age burdening its planks.

Sure, a few scratches were visible on the wooden hull.

And the single sail had to be replaced because Conrad doubted that it could sustain a long journey, as Edyval admitted. The crew had finished mounting the new one the previous day.


The ship had the typical shape of a Nord longship, but it was slightly sleeker. It had been designed for speed and maneuverability, which was suited for fast raids on enemy shores, or recons for a bigger, but slower fleet.

In the north of Tamriel, it was the perfect ship for a merchant.

Or a contrebandier, as Conrad suspected.

Honest merchants had less chances of being cornered by a local gang that pressed about disappeared goods.

As long as he had no trouble because of that, Conrad didn’t mind.

If Edyval was really a contrebandier, there were less chances of betrayal from him. After all, the “honest merchants” of the sea founded business only thanks to their reputation for being reliable people.

Also he had left half of the gold in a secure place, as a insurance.

His father had not raised a stupid boy.

The sound of steps and something heavy rolling on the wooden planks caught his attention.

Turning, he immediately hid the letters in his satchel.

Some of the men—and women, and mer, and beastfolk… Some of the crew members were moving three big barrels on the pier, under Haming’s supervision apparently.

“Hey boss,” the young Nord greeted. “Careful with those as you load them in the ship, people. Don’t damage them.”


“There you are, Haming. Where have you been? You disappeared for two days.”

“I was busy, boss,” Haming retorted.

“By what? More curves?” Conrad falsely mocked.

"No, I was just doing my own business. My life doesn't revolve around you." The younger man smiled.

"You wound me. What's with the barrels? I thought we loaded all the fresh water earlier?"

"Oh, I guess you don't want my gift for you then. Nevermind, people. Don't load them."

"Gift? What gift?"

"Well, the bottles of mead we bought are not really going to last much, with you onboard. So I decided to get you a few extra—"

"Don't listen to him! He's crazy! Put them in the hold, right now! And if one of them is scratched, remember that I know where you sleep!"

Haming really did care, afterall.

Each of those was big enough to contain a person. If said person didn't mind being really, really uncomfortable.

"Aohey, ya bloody Nords!" Edyval called from the ship. "We're almost ready to sail. My girl is ready, the sea is calm and the wind is propitious. We're just waiting ya!"

"In a moment, my Breton friend. I need to talk with Haming," Conrad said, pulling his pupil farther from the ship.

"What's wrong, boss? I thought you wanted us to depart as soon as possible?"

"True, Haming. But you're not coming with me."

"What? But… why, boss? I thought"

"You're a good fighter, Haming. Also, you’re a good agent, and one of the few people I trust. But… I need someone to watch the fort while I'm away."

Haming remained silent, not looking away from his gaze.

"There are some letters in here," he continued, handing out his satchel. "Some are coded, some aren’t. They contain orders, strategies, stuff like that."

"You want me to be a messenger?" Haming said, offended.

"There's also the whole business with Winterhold to deal with. What if I'm not back in time? Somebody has to organize their defense."

"Boss, there are way more qualified"

"It has to be you, Haming. You're already known in town, after all the months I spent inside the College. And your men are already in place."

"You want me to stay behind to protect Winterhold… and your students... from the Falmer," Haming sighed.

"Basically, yes," Conrad admitted with a sad smirk.

"Well… that's ironic…" Haming mumbled.

"What?"

"Nothing, nothing," the young man said quickly. "Anything else I should do?"

"If possible, start circulating all the stories you can think of in regards to where I've gone."

"What for?"

"It should distract the Thalmor and their agents. Tell Delphine to insist that I'm somewhere around Elsweyr, or Valenwood… No wait, better yet, I'm infiltrating the Summerset Isles."

"That's… that's the craziest thing we could say about you, boss."

"That's why the Thalmor spies will try to find out if it's true. It could even distract them from our other agents."

"Or they could think that you've finally lost it," the archer muttered.

"Do you understand why it's important that you stay here, Haming?" he asked, seriously.

The younger man finally accepted the satchel after a few seconds of silence.

"I understand, boss. Don't worry. Skyrim will still be in place when you get back."

"Oh, good. Let's hope the rest of Tamriel will be, too," he joked.

"Come on, ya coming or not?!" the captain called.

"Coming, coming," Conrad called, before turning one last time towards Haming. "See you soon, boy. Be safe."

"You too, old man," he heard.

Conrad walked on the pier, taking a deep breath before putting foot on the Seeker.

"Let's move, captain," he said to the Breton, going toward the bow and not looking back.

"Ya heard what the bloody Dragonborn said? Cast off and set sail!" Edyval ordered to the crew with his loud voice.

Conrad didn’t move from the ship’s prow for several hours.

His next journey had finally begun.

Naruto felt something being placed on his head, but he kept his eyes shut, as Iruka asked him to.

"Sensei, how much longer...?" he asked, impatient to see what the surprise was.

"Alright, you can open your eyes," Iruka said proudly.

The blond boy did so, seeing his sensei sitting in front of him, still wounded and battered, but without his forehead protector.

Iruka was smiling, even if he was in evident pain.

Naruto blinked in confusion, before he finally realize that Iruka had placed his own forehead protector in place of his old googles.

"Congratulations for graduating, Naruto.”

Notes:

Poem-omake written by Duesal Bladesinger for this chapter:

Two men doomed by destiny
One died for Leaf, soul never freed.
The other lives: warrior mage
Don't test his temper, don't enrage.
.
Falmer, Thalmor, Iwa nin
All fell to the deadly kin.
Hair like gold and icy eyes
Their cold blue gaze pierces all lies.
.
Long lost brothers, linked in soul,
So many secrets they must hold.
Yondaime, human sacrifice,
Dovahkiin, hiding for his life.
.
Yet now, somehow, the two have met
However briefly, fate is set.
Brave an ocean, foreign lands
Sun-haired nephew, close at hand.

Chapter 6: Seas, Waves and Journals

Chapter Text

4E 220, 27th Sun’s Height.

We've left Skyrim's shores behind us, and The Seeker has now entered Morrowind’s waters.

The ship is still too far to see the clouds full of ashes that spread from what remains of the Red Mountain, but I can already feel the difference from my homeland's cold air.

Besides the terrible discovery we made, the navigation has been smooth and without problems.

Edyval's crew is surprisingly efficient, even if they’re nervous about the destination. Or the lack of one, at least.

Still, they’re going to do their job without asking questions, at least according to our crude Breton captain.

Seeing how much they’re paid, some people would even say that they’ve no right to ask questions.

For the time being, using my clairvoyance spell would just be a waste of magicka. I won’t even bother until the coast of Tamriel is far behind us to

"Maaaaster!” an annoying voice wailed, daring to interrupt Conrad as he wrote in the journal bought specifically for the journey to Akavir.


“What is it, Beta?” Conrad asked, frowning. But his eyes didn’t leave the nib as he kept writing.

“Please, can we stop now?" the girl pleaded with the same tone of a mortal asking forgiveness and mercy from a god.

"The deck is not going to clean itself, Beta. Keep working," he said, destroying any hope the young Nord girl might have held.


Conrad was not inclined to let his so called students get off scot free after that stunt they’d pulled.

"Why do we have to?" Sven asked, as he squeezed a rag. The boy looked really skinny without his robes.

"You're the cabin-boys, Sven," Conrad deadpanned, searching for his ink bottle.

"Beta is a girl," Ta’Sava said as he scrubbed the deck. Strangely enough, the furred teen was the one that was complaining the least.

"Beta shouldn't have followed you in your idiotic plan," he growled.

“Actually, master…” the girl fidgeted with her fingers as she bit her lip, “...it was my plan. All of it.”

To his credit, Conrad didn’t snap immediately. Instead, he stopped writing, took a few long breaths and waited until the ink had dried completely.

Then, he snapped his journal shut, and slowly spun around on the crate he was sitting so that he could face his students.

Sven was avoiding his gaze, Ta’Sava was incredibly interested with the wooden surface of the deck and Beta was completely terrified yet still managing to meet his eyes.


Normally, during the lessons in the College, he would have taken pity on the poor girl.

But he was not in the College anymore. And neither were they.

“Why?” he asked in the harshest tone he could muster.

"We wanted to follow you," Beta squeaked, readying herself for a well-deserved scolding.

A long silence followed the statement, and Beta winced as Conrad raised an eyebrow, completely unamused.

"You managed to track me down, follow me unseen, sneak aboard the ship after enlisting Haming's help… because you wanted to follow me?"

“Well, we didn’t exactly track you down,” Beta started to speak, glancing at him nervously. “You left with your friend passing by the coast, we would’ve never made it. But Sven understood where you were going.”


“Did he, now?” Conrad deadpanned.

“Yeah, so, uh, we got a carriage and went to wait for you to Windhelm and—”

“Wait, just like that?” he asked in confusion. “Why didn’t your teachers—Sven, stop using magic at once!”

The young Imperial huffed in annoyance, and let the mops fall down, releasing his telekinesis spell.

“Don’t huff. Do you want me to repeat what happened that time people came from town to harass us? Do you?” Conrad hissed towards the boy.

The three froze and became paler. Or in the case of Ta’Sava, had his grey fur stood on end. Even if how their master had managed that particular incident was still the stuff of legend among the College’s student board, it had been a little disturbing seeing it in person.

“Good, you got it,” the Nord man growled, eyes slitted, before turning towards the speechless and slightly embarrassed Beta. “How come nobody stopped you?”

“Well, master, uh...it’s not like we’re forced to stay in the College. Every member can come and go as they please, as long as the rules are respected,” Beta said, gaining confidence with every word she spoke.

“I know that! But that should apply to grown-ups, not magelings like you!” he retorted. “That aside, you should’ve continued your studies—”

“It’s not like we left the College, we’ll go back!” Ta’Sava interrupted—how dare he?!—while passing a soap-covered brush over the planks. “We just wanted to help master Conrad.”

“Ta’Sava, go back to scrubbing the deck. And I don’t need your help!” Conrad grumbled. “Now, Beta. Tell me how you managed to persuade Haming to sneak you aboard the ship.”

“We met him in the marketplace...we were looking for you, see. And—”

“Beta. Why. Did. Haming. Help. You,” Conrad slowly growled.


The girl immediately took a step back and replied to the guttural question in a rushed and squeaky tone, eyes averted. “He says it had something to do with curves…?”

Conrad recoiled, like he had been slapped.

“Milk-drinking, arrow-loving youngster,” he whispered, gritting his teeth. “Leaving him to take care of things? Oblivion, once I’m back I will skewer his—”

“Uh, master?” the girl asked in confusion. “What did he mean by ‘curves’?”


“Nevermind that!” he barked, quickly hushing the clueless girl. “Keep doing your work. You're lucky I persuaded the captain to not throw you overboard."

"But why would he do that?" Sven asked, fighting a hopeless battle against a very old blot.

"You're stowaways, Sven. I would've gladly helped, you know."

"To let us onboard?" the girl asked, brightening in a noticeable manner.

"To throw you off the ship."

Beta's eyes widened dramatically.

"But Master, aren't there sharks?!"

"Sure there are. We’re in open waters, Beta. But at the very last moment I realized that I will need someone to carry my stuff while walking on a unknown, dangerous unexplored continent."

"... Master Conrad is evil," Ta'Sva lamented.

"And one more thing… you will continue your studies. Under my watch."

"Not really different from before, then," Sven observed, unimpressed.

"But this time… Mirabelle won’t be around to stop me."

Their faces were quite enjoyable to witness.

The masked man pulled a pair of small bells tied to a red string out from his pocket, showing them to the trio of brats in front of him.

"To pass, you have to take these from me before noon."

4E 220, 1st Last Seed.

Those three are getting used to the life on the ship, even if they complain about their cramping muscles.

puss*es.

Even if I can understand that they're not used to manual labor, it's no reason to be whiny about it.

Anyway, I have to start thinking about how to teach them. It's not like I can throw fireballs on the deck

"Hey, what's that?" the young Khajiit asked, indicating something out of Conrad’s field of view.

Judging by the grey-brownish clouds that the Dragonborn could see, he already knew what it was. Since it was nothing dangerous to the ship, at least for now, he kept writing on his journal.

"It's snow. It always snow in the north," Sven dismissed his friend worries, and kept gutting his fish with the usual unexpected enthusiasm. Even if he had started to enjoy the art of cuisine, he was still annoyed by the idea of having to process the raw ingredients.

"Oh come on, that is not true Sven,” Ta’Sava rebutted. “And it is not—"

"So what? Even if we're not in the land of barbarians and cold, it's still snow—"

“It is not cold enough for snow,” Ta’Sava insisted as he opened another small fish’s belly. “Come on, Beta, tell him that.”

Before the girl could comment about it, the three were distracted by the sound of boots on the wooden deck and turned to stare at the newcomer.

"That's not snow, ya bilge rats," Edyval, the captain of The Seeker said grimly, as he walked closer to the scoffer.

"What? But, captain—"

"That's ash," Conrad said as he closed his journal. It was clear that he wasn’t going to get anything written for now, anyway.

“Oh? Ya’ve sailed under ash before?” the Breton asked, stroking his chin covered by two-days stubble.

“A few times, either to Solstheim or Morrowind’s coasts,” Conrad said, recalling his former experience with the region.

“Good, then ya can tell to your lads and the lass about what to do if we get an ash storm,” Edyval said, while gesturing the young mages present. “Get to it, Dragonborn. I’ve to tell my crew to prepare some buckets.”

Conrad nodded, and put away his journal for the time being as the captain moved towards the other end of the ship. He was well aware of his students’ stares so he decided to avoid the barrage of questions with a simple solution.

Talking for first.

“Yes, brats, it’s ash. Don’t make those faces. Now, we’re pretty far from any volcanoes for now, so we should not find any ash storms but—”

“Um, what is an ash storm, master Conrad?” Ta’Sava asked, blinking his eyes.

Conrad huffed. Of course they would ask questions anyway.

“To make a long story short, it’s a big cloud of ash that the winds have pushed away from the Red Mountain, or one of the other active volcanoes in the province. They can travel pretty fast actually, since ash is very light.”

“That doesn’t sounds dangerous, master. Why is it a big deal?” Sven asked in confusion.

“Because you could die from asphyxiation inside one, that’s why,” Conrad deadpanned.

“Die?” Beta whispered, barely moving her lips.

“Well, yes. You breathe the ash as it falls down from the sky and lingers around. It clogs your lungs. You die,” he explained. “That’s why so many Dunmer have fled to Skyrim in the past two centuries.”

Seeing their confusion, Conrad inwardly made a note for himself to tell the magelings about the downfall of Vvanderfell at a later date.

“Now, if we can’t outrun it, it means we’re probably in the middle of it. If that happens, I want you three to get a thick cloth and use it to cover your mouth and your nose. Got it?”

He waited long enough, so that the brats would have time to process his simple instruction. Since two or three of them had nodded, he decided to continue.

“And if it starts to pour down really thick, go under the deck and remain there until it’s passed if you know what’s good for you.”


“Master? What’s the water for?” Sven asked, indicating the crew that was busy with the buckets, throwing water taken from the sea onto the whole deck.

“Sometimes, if the volcano is erupting, the ash is still burning. If you’re not careful enough, the ship could catch fire. Soaking it makes it harder to burn, and it’s better not to waste water we can drink.”

“Couldn’t we help in case the ship catches fire?” Beta asked. “You know, uh, with ice magic?”

“That would be helpful,” Conrad considered, scratching his beard. “A simple spell like Frostbite should be sufficient. Just don’t overdo if that happens, we don’t want to freeze the deck.”


“Master, how come you can’t use some magic to send the ash away?” Sven inquired.

“I can shield the ship from most of it, but we're on a moving ship. Any barrier would not be very stable and I would start to breathe ash sooner or later. And I like to breathe,” he explained, crossing his arms. “As for the Thu'um, well...it's not like stopping an actual storm."

“You can stop a storm? You’re joking right, master?”


Conrad just gave his students a smug grin.

"Oh, come on! Another D-rank, sensei?"

"Hn."

"Ah-ha. Cute little genin are not supposed to whine about their missions. Now, go on and get that trash."

4E 220, 9th Last Seed.

I had to force myself to take a hard decision today.

In better circ*mstances I would have not done such a thing, but I have no choice.

From now on, I will ration the remaining mead.

Since we’re sailing on the north of what remains of Vvanderfell, I doubt I will found a commercial dock with lots of the only thing that makes life bearable on sale.

I hope Akavir has mead, they better have it!

On an unrelated note, the magelings saw the Red Mountain on the horizon today, since the weather was somewhat clearer than usual.

They were like little children, mesmerized by the alien and somehow beautiful landscape. How can anyone find a wasteland of ash beautiful, I’ll never know.

Maybe, as long as we can still see the crimson volcano, I should lecture my students about the less discussed events that led to the Red Year.

“So, how was your mission Naruto?” the young woman asked as she placed the bowl of miso ramen in front of her favourite customer.

“It was awful! We had to buy groceries. What kind of ninja goes to buy groceries?!”

4E 220, 12th Last Seed.

Tried to teach the magelings some Alchemy for a few days by now.

Alas, they are just beginners in this field. Even with a few simple experiments, they've put a noticeable dent in the alchemy supplies available onboard.

For this reason, they're forbidden to use the rarer ingredients. But I was able to find a suitable adjustment to that problem

“Master?” Sven asked, pale as snow. “May I not drink the potion this time?”

“You botched it, Sven. Think of it as a learning experience: you’ll do your best next time, in order to avoid drinking an awful potion.”

“What if it’s poisonous?” the Imperial asked, looking with dread at the reddish-brown mixture inside the bottle in his hand. Which was actually a former mead bottle repurposed for another task.

“It’s not, trust me. Just unpleasant.”


“But—”


“Sven. Drink it,” Conrad ordered with a tone that didn’t brook a reply.

The youngster searched for the support of his fellow students, but they avoided his gaze with little or no shame, since they had been forced to do the same with their last failed potion.


If Sven was not good as them, or just unlucky with the equipment Conrad had brought on The Seeker, it was not their fault.

Sven finally resigned to his fate and after mumbling something that sounded like “traitors”, he drank the foul liquid.

“It wasn’t that bad, right?” Conrad asked, as the teen made a disgusted face.

“I need to puke...again,” Sven said.


Conrad rolled his eyes, and passed him the bucket.


What a fuss for a few fish guts mixed with salt. But at least it would teach the brats to not waste ingredients.

"This is ridiculous," the girl lamented, as she ran a paint filled brush across the surface of the fence.

"Hn."

"Heh. Don't worry guys, I've got this," the blond kid said, forming a cross symbol with his fingers. "We’ll finish this in no time.”

4E 220, 20th Last Seed.

Great news. We’re rounding Morrowind’s eastern promontory three days earlier than expected.


Once this is done, it will be open ocean, and the harder part of the journey will begin.

My mind lingers, and it's haunted by doubts.

Am I doing the right thing? I honestly don't know.

Minato's ghost gave me a task from beyond the grave, but I wonder if I'm doing this because of some sense of honor towards a sibling I never knew, or because I just want to go away for a while and forget all the problems that haunt me daily in my homeland.

Even if that was the case… so what if I am?

Maybe that's what I need after all these years.

A grand, ludicrous adventure, for old time’s sake.

Even if it is for something as stupid as a long lost twin.

Tamriel will survive without me for a few months.

I just hope to be able to find ‘Cornoah’ quickly, whateveror whoit is.

“Master!” Beta called excitingly, distracting Conrad from his writing session. “Look, look!”

He turned his head, following her student’s extended arm and what he saw pleased him.

The Seeker had passed the promontory and in front of the ship was the ocean, with its deep, cold colours. Nothing else was visible on the horizon.

Leaving his journal on the crate he had been sitting on, he started to search for the captain, giving a pat on Beta’s shoulder as she and her fellow students watched the immense mass of water in front of them.

After all, this was not the unforgiving and frozen Sea of Ghosts. No surprise they were lost in their wonder.

But as Conrad walked among the crew, he could feel the nervousness in the air.

There was a reason ships remained close to the coastline. If sh*t went down, the sailors could try to reach the closest shore, either swimming or in a launch.

In open, uncharted waters, it was a different story.

“WHAT’RE YA LOOKING AT, SCUM?” Edyval’s voice exploded from the prow. Oh, there he was. “Never saw a little water before?! At yar posts! Prepare ta steer starboard!”

"Good to see you're keeping them busy," Conrad chuckled as he reached the Breton on the ship's bow, ignoring the people scurrying back and forth the ship’s deck.

"It's better that way. If they work, tha lads will think less," Edyval said, turning towards the sea with a frown, but the Nord saw a mix of concern and nervousness in his eyes.

"Having second thoughts, old contrebandier?"

"Nonsense!” Edyval scoffed. “I'll do tha job, we have a deal. But it will be a difficult crossing, for who knows how long."


Conrad half-smiled, noticing that he had not denied anything about his profession.

"Well, nobody's dead yet. So we're going good so far," he commented grimly.

“They’re just a bunch of brats, especially the short one with a stupid face,” the burly man grunted, before taking a sip from a sake bottle. “Are they really ninja?”

“Who’s the short one with a stupid face?” the blond kid laughed, before freezing and widening his eyes. “Wait a second…”

4E 220, 24th Last Seed.

I made a great discovery today.

Being on a ship, in the middle of the ocean with nothing visible for miles, is incredibly boring.

The crew noticed this too, even with Edyval’s best efforts to distract them. The man can be a real slave driver when it comes to distract people with the necessary works that keeps this mass of wood afloat.

So far, the routine we started is working.

A little before dawn, all the crew wakes up, besides the guys that did the night shift, who can now rest a few hours. A small meal is consumed, consisting of the perishable food items. Once we run out, the only things left will be rock-hard biscuits, salted meat and fish.

The crew’s surgeon checks up on us as we eat. The guy is not really a surgeon, he’s more like a barber that acts as a surgeon. Beta helps him with the small wounds caused by the menial work, though. Magic doesn’t waste bandages and alcohol.

After this is done, the deck is scrubbed, the sail is adjusted, ropes are mended… we check our supplies too, to be sure they’re still good. And every now and then, the sailors fish.


As for me, every six hours I use my clairvoyance spell to adjust our route, and I try to teach something useful to the magelings when they’re not toiling around the ship. I’m also readingagainall the notes about Akavir I could copy or borrow from the College’s Arcanaeum.

In the evening, all of us eat dinner on the deck. Personally I find the meal rather dull, without mead to entertain my tastebuds. I’m saving the sweet nectar for the special occasions.

The crew tries to find some entertainment, singing songs or playing games of chance.


Bastards won 100 septims from me.


Edyval has also started asking me to do the whole ‘Dragonborn thing’, to boost the crew’s morale.

I’m still not sure what he means by the ‘Dragonborn thing’ but apparently I’m doing it right.

“Everyone, get down!” the shinobi yelled.

A spinning blade bigger than a man swung over the heads of Team 7 and their client before embedding itself straight into the trunk of a tree.


In the blink of an eye, a man stood on its hilt.

4E 220, 31th Last Seed.

The last week’s evenings were a nightmare.

The magelings are now used to the life on the ship, and have learned to use their sparse free time in lots of troublesome ways.

For example, they decided to provide us with something they called ‘evening entertainment’, which means that they tried to play some instruments they found onboard.

I am sure it was Sven’s idea, since he was actually a pretty good player.

The problem was that the other two, well... they couldn’t play a good note to save their lives.

Edyval told me something about a bard leaving the instruments when he left the ship without paying the fee, but I was too focused on trying to tear my ears off.

So I robbed them of their free time for the whole week and forced them to practice. They seemed surprised that I knew how to play, especially Sven.

How come all those bards sing about me, but always forget to tell people about how I used to be one of them?

True, I was and still am a passable bard at best, but still…

Since I can’t do miracles in just a week, the two musically inept magelings improved just enough to not sound like a trio of horkers farting inside a flute, or battering a lute.

This evening they somehow managed to force me into singing something, the little brats.

Apparently Beta is from Solstheim because she recognized the verses and started to educate her fellow magelings about the story of King Olaf and how the Bards College worked hard to find the missing verse of the song.

Oh, if only she knew…

But I didn’t know about her being from Solstheim.


How much do I really know about my students?

"Kid, let me borrow your kunai," the wounded, broken man said, looking to his apprentice's body.

The blond boy hesitated for a second, before throwing one of his weapons in the man's direction.

The shinobi's sharp teeth caught the weapon by the hilt mid-air.

Without pause, he immediately charged the mob of thugs on the other end of the bridge.

The little man in front of the group panicked, deciding to retreat behind the ranks of his mercenaries.

"Kill them!" the businessman screamed in fear, not realizing that it would not help.

4E 220, 4th? 5th? Hearthfire. Who cares, I’m tired.

And I can’t go back to sleep now, so I guess I’ll just write what happened.

I was awakened in the middle of the night by one of the crewmen on guard and the first thing I thought in my dazed condition was that they had seen land on the horizon.

Which proved to be a false hope since I could hear some half-whispered prayers and even a pair of superstitious exorcisms thrown around by the sailors that were still awake.

So, how to write this… a moon has disappeared from the sky.

Yesterday night both were present, but today there are no traces of Masser, the bigger moon.

I checked, sure that I was seeing things just because of the sudden awakening. But there were no clouds that could hide it from view.

It was simply gone and only Secunda was soaring the firmament above us.

Which immediately caused the natural reaction among the crew of: call the wizard.

I tried to calm them down, but apparently not even the ‘Dragonborn Thing’ was good enough for such a case. I can see the reason right now above me, as I write.

Still, between me and Edyval’s motivational speech—which may have consisted mostly of taunts, insults and comments about the crewmens’ conceptionthey realized that they’re not in any immediate danger.

Especially because Edyval promised them that if any problems should arise, I would fix it.

Damn contrebandier.

Even if I’m sure that the ship is in no danger due to the sudden disappearance of a celestial body, I can’t help but wonder how it was possible.

And without knowing the cause, I won’t know if it’s actually dangerous or not.

It could just be a deception caused by the planet’s curvature.

The moon is still present. Has the curvature of the world affected our view of it? That could explain it.

But if that were the case, we would have seen that the moon rise less and less in the sky until it finally stopped rising at all instead of this sudden disappearance.

I could be wrong, but maybe a powerful mage is behind this?

Either as a simple—but powerful—illusion or as an actual, physical disappearance?

It has already happened in the past, the most recent example in 4E 98. And the Thalmor took credit of “restoring” both moons in the sky, gaining them the gratitude and the loyalty of the Khajiit—after a coup against the Imperial-friendly government, of course.

sh*t-eating bastards.

Oh, great. I’ll have to explain to Ta’Sava that one of the moons disappeared. At least he is still asleep now, so I can deal with it in the morning.

Why would only one moon disappear, though?

This just gives me new questions. Is the moon still visible from Tamriel? Has it disappeared only for us? Or is this some kind of astrological event that has happened for

Just gave another look at the remaining moon, which is now proudly displayed in the sky.

The lunar phase is wrong.

And looking at it more closely, I can spot differences on its surface.

That moon is not Secunda.

Screw this, I’m opening one of the last bottles of mead.

For all I know, a daedra could be toying with us right now, and I wouldn’t give a damn.

"Don't overdo it, Sasuke. It will take a few days before you're completely healed."

"But—"

"No buts, you'll be able to train later."

"This is boring, sensei! If we can't spar, how're we supposed to pass our time?" the orange-clad genin lamented.

"Why don't you go helping at the bridge then? I'm sure they—"

But before the infamous Copy-nin could finish that line, his louder student had disappeared out of the door. The man shrugged and resumed reading his favourite literature.

4E 220, 15th Hearthfire.

Found a maggot in my hardtack today.

Which means that even our less perishable rations have started to go bad. Great.

I hope we will find more food before scurvy sets in.

On another note, Ta'Sava still refuses to leave his hiding place after the sunset.

I guess I can understand how he is feeling.

Sven and Beta look instead really homesick.

I've heard the three of them whispering about the College, about the places they're from... and about me.

Apparently they're interested in some aspects of my past.

This is troubling, to say the least.

I don't want them to find out about some specific things, like the Blades and our secret war.

If they found out, they would not be safe

sh*t, I have to find a way to disassociate them from me once we get back.

The last thing I want is to pull those magelings in this whole mess.

And the fact that a little voice in the back of my head is telling me that each of them has great potential, the thought of them being recruited makes me disgusted with myself.

"Woah, look at that!" the loud genin yelled. "It's even better than before!"

"Of course it is. I know my stuff," the bridge builder declared proudly.

"Well, old man, we’ll make sure to take it on our way home! Dattebayo!"

4E 220, 19th Hearthfire.

I hate this sea and everything in it.

Food stores are getting low, so most of the free hands are spent fishing. Fresh water is also running low, and there had been talk of possibly needing to break into my mead supply.

Had been.

I put an end to that fairly quickly. I set up a rotation with the magelings to freeze the buckets and let them melt. Not the highest quality water, but it’s better than seawater.

I started studying a spell to turn it into fresh water. I am so stupid, I should’ve started doing this before our departure.


If Toldfir could see me, he would be ashamed of his former pupil.


So far I still have to make it work since I can’t just make the salt disappear but I hope to make a breakthrough in one or two more days.

The cook says Sven is a wonder at helping him find new ways to prepare fish. I still doubt I’ll ever want to eat seafood again by the end of this.

Still, the crew is particularly nervous now, between the moon and these new difficulties. Some of them have started to huddle together, whispering to each other.

Everytime I or Edyval get close they stop. I suspect the same could happen with the magelings.

I immediately began making a habit of sharpening my axe in plain view.

The Wave inhabitants kept watch as the Konoha shinobi departed, heading back to their village now that their mission was complete; just as the bridge connecting their homeland to the mainland too was complete.

"Oh right," Tazuna said, as he had just remembered something very important. "We need to name this bridge, and I have a perfect name for it.”

"Oh?! What is it?"

"How about... The Great Naruto Bridge?"

4E 220, 24th Hearthfire.

Crew’s looking to mutiny, gotta go knock some heads in.

Either they calm down or it’s going to be a bloodbath.

I’ll be back soon.

Alright, I’m back.

They calmed down, I just had to give them a little reminder of who I was, and what exactly will happen to any man who actually mutinies.

I’m not sure they’ll be getting much sleep tonight

A loud yell was heard across the bridge, which was pretty normal on a ship.

Conrad would've ignored it, since there was no accompanying sound of combat or other such nasty stuff, but he wasn’t sure if he’d heard it right.

"Edyval, did one of your crew's finest just shout something about land?" he asked, turning towards the ship’s captain, who was now staring at something out over the water with incredulous eyes.

“Yeap, he did. Ya’ve to look yarself.”

Conrad leaped from his sitting place, forgetting completely about the journal, quills and ink.

He saw it.


Peeking up over the horizon, a long, incredibly long, strip of land was clearly visible.

As the crew exploded into a cacophony of celebrations and rejoicings, he allowed himself to smirk a little before casting the spell that had guided them so far.

“Correct the route north-northwest, captain,” he said, not looking away from the azure orb that was running towards the continent of Akavir. “Let’s try to make landfall as close as we can to the destination of this journey.”

Chapter 7: Silver, Stone and Steel

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

It was with a sullen mood that Team Seven approached Konoha's gates. Normally a genin team would've been happy to be finally at home, or the young shinobi would discuss about how exciting their first adventure outside of the village's walls had been.

Team Seven’s first time outside of the village had been very exciting, just not in a good way, and it had left similar scars on the three genin, even if they were reacting to it in different ways.

Sasuke looked like his normal self, but deep down he was berating himself for being too weak, not realizing that nothing could've prepared him for what had happened. The fact that that man would've been more than ready didn't help.

Sakura had been meek for the whole trip, a sad expression on her face as she realized how little she had helped during their battles on the mission. Facing Zabuza was a wake-up call for her. She had realized that she had to find her resolve, but she wasn't sure how.

Naruto could be considered an expert in hiding his emotions, but in the last days his mask just seemed to have evaporated. The deaths of Zabuza and Haku seemed to chase away his former cheer. Oh, he would put on a little show for his teammates when they had to camp, but Kakashi wasn't fooled.

At least he didn't seem to have been influenced by the beast sealed in his belly even if he had tapped into the Kyuubi's chakra. Not that he seemed to have noticed, something for which the copy-nin was incredibly grateful.

Sighing, not really looking forward to bringing that up with the village leader, Kakashi presented the identification papers to the chunin standing besides the gates, who accepted them with a nod.

It seemed that for once Izumo and Kotetsu hadn’t been assigned to gatekeeping duties.

"Here you go," the chunin at the gate said as he handed the documents back to Kakashi and let the genin team pass. "Welcome back!"

It was unusual for the blond to not return any greeting thrown his way, but Kakashi supposed it wasn't so out of place, given the circ*mstances. He would have to remind himself to talk to the kid later, even if he was hardly the right person to help genin overcome their trauma.

Out of the corner of his eye, Naruto suddenly froze, eyes widening. The one-eye'd jounin fought back a grimace as he tried to predict what new horrors were torturing the—

"ICHIRAKU RAMEN!" the boy yelled as he started to run towards the direction of the famous stand. Kakashi barely managed to snatch his jacket before he could go running off.

“Not so fast, Naruto. We have to report to Hokage-sama first,” he reprimanded his student with a bored tone, even if he was kinda relieved. Of course Naruto would’ve thought about his favourite food as soon as they had entered the village.

“What?” the boy asked indignantly as he squirmed, trying to get away. “Come on, Kakashi-sensei! It’s been almost a month since the last time I had ramen!”

“Report first, ramen later,” Kakashi said. He would’ve gladly let the genin roam around the village and do whatever they did in their free time, but the team had just came back from a mission and there was a protocol to respect. “It shouldn’t take long to—”

“Hey, what’s that?” Naruto asked, pointing a finger towards the sky.

“Naruto,” Kakashi sighed, hoping that he didn’t have drag to him all the way to the Hokage’s office. “That trick isn’t going to—”

“No seriously, Kakashi-sensei! What’s that?!”

Seeing Naruto’s insistence, Kakashi decided to humor him. After all, there was no way the boy could slip away from him. But as he moved his gaze from his loud student, he noticed that other people on the street were staring. And pointing in the same direction.

He wasn't able to raise his head to check what the whole fuss was about beforewhen some kind of blue light zipped briefly at the corner of his eyes.

Followed immediately by another.

He snapped his head towards the light and took a double-take at what he saw. Dozens of small blue trails where speeding towards the village from high in the sky, leaving a faint light at their passage.

As they came closer to the village, they started to quickly descend towards Konoha's streets, spreading out in an apparently random pattern.

Was it a jutsu? Who was casting it? Was the village under attack?!

Some departed from the group and went for the ground, reaching the streets around the gates in less than a second.

Widening his eye, Kakashi realized that one of them was going straight for his team.

Whereas his two other genin pulled themselves out of the way, Sakura froze, making Kakashi curse inwardly.

Fortunately, he’d already been in motion to snatch his genin out of the way, and plucked the pink haired girl back by her collar just in time.

Kakashi surveyed his surroundings, expecting to see shinobi swarming at the scene of the attack and civilians being evacuated, but he was shocked to see people not really doing anything except stare with worried expressions. Some of the villagers were even just carrying on with their business, almost like...

"Finally back, Kakashi?" a voice asked, causing the Copy-nin to snap towards it, still wary of any attack. It was Sarutobi Asuma, with his own genin team in tow.

"Ah, Asuma," he said, relaxing his posture slightly. "What's going on?"

"We're not sure," the other jonin said, shrugging. "It started weeks ago. Spread panic around the whole village, but apparently it's not harmful."

"Really now?" Kakashi asked, arching his only visible eyebrow and ignoring the antics of the two groups of genin who were meeting each other.

"Yeah, there's an investigation going on, but I'm out of the loop on this one," Asuma said as he lit a cigarette. "If they have found out anything about it, it's still classified. It's obviously a jutsu but—"

"AH!" Naruto yelled, distracting both the jonin-sensei. "You're going to do a D-rank? We just came back from a C-rank!"

Kakashi sighed and tried to ignore his loudest student's antics as he revealed his implanted eye so he could check the lights with the Sharingan.

He looked at one of the orbs that was still moving above the village with the eye Obito had given him as a parting gift, following it as it soared in the sky.

And he kept staring silently.

When the light had disappeared behind some buildings, he was still staring at where it had gone, completely oblivious of the weird look Asuma was giving him or how the genin were becoming a little too noisy for his tastes.

"And there was this guy that tried to kill us with a big badass sword, but he was a cool guy and—"

"Alright, listen up, my cute little genin," Kakashi said, interrupting Naruto’s rant, his tone serious despite his light-hearted words. "Nevermind the report. You're dismissed for today."

“What? But Kakashi-sensei, you just told us—”

“Why don’t you take Sakura and Sasuke with you? Unless you want to help me fill all the paperwork... “

“Bye sensei!” Naruto said, turning towards his teammates. Kakashi didn’t hear if he managed to convince Sakura and Sasuke to go to eat ramen with him though, since he left with a shunshin after giving a brief nod to Asuma.

He ran above the rooftops towards his destination, and in the span of a few seconds, he found himself outside the Hokage’s office. He gave a brief nod to the ANBU that had henged himself as the wall before jumping, perching himself on the window.

“Kakashi,” the Sandaime greeted him with a reprimanding tone. “My window is not a door.”

“If that’s the case, Hokage-sama, you really should keep it locked...”

“And get shards all over the office again when one of my shinobi tries to barge in? No thanks,” the Hokage sniffed before turning towards him, suddenly serious. “Where is your team? If I remember correctly, I think it’s still tradition to have your genin with you when reporting on a C-rank mission.”

“The mission may need to be reclassified, actually. But that’s not why I’m here alone.”

“I suppose you have questions about the… phenomenon that has interested the village these last few weeks?”

“For so long…? What has been—”

“We’ve taken measures already,” the Sandaime reassured him as he shifted some documents. “Before you ask… I expect that your mission report will be turned in soon?”

Kakashi gave a shrug, retrieving a scroll from the pouches on his flak jacket and placing it on the Hokage’s desk.

“Here it is. I wrote it as we left Wave. May I ask you about those lights now?”


“Very well,” the Hokage said, stopping to glance at the documents before refocusing on the discussion. ”Since this has started, those lights have been sighted around the village at least four times a day, with intervals of six hours or more between each sighting. Once they appear, they remain in the area very briefly, although, thanks to the repeated appearances...”

“You know where they’re coming from?”

“About their origin… we’ll talk about it in a bit. We have suspicions, although it’s impossible to prove anything yet. I’m more worried about where they were directed, though.”


“The lights have a specific target?” Kakashi asked.


“You could say that,” Sarutobi said gravely. “It took a few days of stakeouts to confirm it, but beyond any doubt… each of those lights is tracking one of Minato’s seals. The Hiraishin seals.”


Kakashi silently stared at the village leader in a mild state of shock, while the Hokage calmly started to fill his pipe with his favourite tobacco.

“And I’m not referring to only those that Minato had placed in strategic key points around the village,” the Sandaime continued, ignoring Kakashi’s reaction. “ANBU patrols were able to follow some of those lights and discovered three of his old, secret safe houses. The ones that don’t appear on any official record… and inside of them we recovered some of his special kunai.”

Silence reigned again in the small office, but Kakashi’s mind was racing this time, thinking about the implications of such a thing. If someone had found a way to track down the Hiraishin, along with what he had seen...

“Which becomes even more worrying if you consider the supposed origin of those… tracking lights.”


“How is it possible that the man responsible has not been caught yet, if this has been going on for weeks?”


“Not for lack of effort, I can assure you. Apparently those lights arrive from outside of the country's border. The north-western border.”


“Iwa?”


“The most possible candidate, but without more intelligence, sending a team to infiltrate Iwa would mean risking a war because of a hunch.”

“I don’t think it’s Iwa’s doing, sir.”


“Really now?” the Sandaime asked, arching an eyebrow. “Please, do tell the reason.”


“I examined the lights with my Sharingan, Hokage-sama. And I know it sounds absurd but… I don’t think that they were made out of chakra.”

“I see. The Hyuuga have claimed something similar, but I wanted to know what the other doujutsu in Konoha’s possession saw, to eliminate any doubt.”


“How is that possible?” he asked. Such a thing was unheard of in all the Elemental Nations.

“Kakashi… I have no idea,” the Hokage admitted, as he lit his pipe before taking a long, slow drag. And if the Professor was saying such a thing...

Well. That wasn’t a good sign.

Conrad sneered at the short man, and the short man sneered back from behind the counter. He didn’t like the shopkeeper, and the shopkeeper didn’t like him. Not being able to speak the other man’s language wasn’t helping to improve the relationship.

But the language barrier was not going to stop them from performing an incredibly ancient ritual.

Gesturing towards the items he had placed on the counter, Conrad showed a handful of gold coins to the merchant. A more than fair price, in his opinion.

The shopkeeper vehemently shook his head, showing to the Nord both his open palms with a scowl.

With an unsatisfied grunt, Conrad took a few more septims from his leather purse and added them to his already filled palm, making them dance among his fingers. His eyes never left those of the short vendor.

With a scoff, the shopkeeper pointed a bony finger towards the gold coins, before shaking his head one more time.

Conrad added one more coin to the pile, narrowing his eyes. When the merchant tried to refuse again, he closed his hand around the coins, growling menacingly. A clear way to say that it was his final offer.

The shopkeeper, seeing the potential gain on the verge of disappearing out of his store, finally agreed with a nod, although there was no trace of satisfaction on his face.

He slammed the handful of septims on the counter and as the merchant examined the coinage, quickly put the purchased goods in his bag before leaving the emporium, unsatisfied and swearing to never return.

And he wasn’t even sure if he had made a good deal or not.

“I can understand you were in a rush, Minato,” he muttered to himself as he walked in the muddy street of the small mountain town. “But when you tinkered with my mind why in the name of every aedra and daedra didn’t you gave me some hints about the local tongue?!”

He decided to add it to the list of stuff to kick his brother’s sorry incorporeal ass for if he ever managed to pay a visit to him again, and started to look around for the magelings, hoping that they had not wandered off this time.

They didn’t need a repetition of what happened in the last village when Ta’Sava had smiled at a group of curious children.

That, along with the fact that in a week they hadn't met a single not-human, made Conrad suspect that the accounts of Akavir were either wrong, mistranslated or just plain bullsh*t.

Having to deal with such reactions, the missing moons and having to wear long robes and a cowl by necessity had turned the normally cheerful Khajiit into a brooding wreck.

Speaking of which, there was the gloomy furball himself, along with the other two.

They were beside a small stand, apparently enjoying some sweets-on-a-stick. It reminded him of those honey nuts he had enjoyed when he was younger, only smaller.

Well, Beta was enjoying it. Sven was apparently more interested in watching the stand owner like a hawk, studying how the sweet balls were made. Ta'Sava was sparsely munching his own instead.

“Master!” Beta called him, having noticed his approach. “You should try these, they’re really good!”

“No, thanks,” Conrad grumbled. “Who knows what’s in them?”

“I don’t know, but they’re good,” Beta replied, giving it another bite. “They’re called dan-go, I think, and—”

“I don’t really care what they’re called,” he interrupted her, having noticed the weird looks that the stand owner was giving them. True, it could’ve been just because they were talking in what may have sounded like a weird language and had different clothes, but these kids were so oblivious, dammit! “I’ve bought us some supplies, so let’s move on. We’ve only a few more weeks before we have to go back to the ship, and the journey is far from over.”

Grumbling complaints, his more or less forced apprentices gathered their belongings and followed him as he kept walking along the main street.

He tried to ignore the stares. They were not looking at him, not with the same awed or scornful expressions that he was used to back home, at least. But for some reason the first thing the locals did—or at least enough of them to be noticeable—after staring at them as a group was look at their foreheads.

Weird. But it made Conrad reach for his hood instinctually.

“Where are we going now?” Sven asked, still eating. “Same direction?”

“South, first. Then we’ll see,” he replied. Conrad didn’t dare to use his tracking spell in a busy settlement, not knowing how magic was seen by the locals. But last time he had checked, it was indicating roughly to south, away from the mountains that seemed to dominate the rocky region where the Seeker had took to shore.

“Master?” Beta asked, having finished her dan-whatever. “There’s something we wanted to ask…”

“Then ask, Beta. We’re not at the College anymore,” he replied without looking at her.

“He didn’t say that when I asked him about the Companions…” Sven muttered to Ta’Sava.

“Well, hm, how are you sure that the ship will be there when we’ll have to go back?” Beta asked, ignoring her fellow student. “Nothing prevents them from abandoning us here…”

“Let’s just say that I assured that it will not happen,” Conrad replied with a smirk.

Sitting on his beached ship’s bridge, Edyval Letos was absolutely livid.

He couldn't vent his anger, sadly. Not really. He had already used any insult, curse and blasphemy he knew of—and he knew a lot of them—against the Dragonborn's name, his parents, his family and distant relatives he may have.

In the Breton's fingers was a silver coin, the source of his ire.

Before leaving, Conrad Harissen had turned with a spell all the gold he had used to pay Edyval into silver.

As an insurance, he’d said.

Good luck finding someone willingly to reverse it for free, he’d said.

See you in one or two months, he’d said.

Damn mages.

Being forced to wait for their return, he had ordered the ship onto the beach. At least they had landed in a relatively good place, with the high cliffs around the bay protecting them from most of the winds.

The scouting party had returned almost immediately, having found a stream of fresh water nearby. Between the sea and the land, they had enough food to survive.

It was just a matter of surviving long enough. They hadn't seen any dangerous creature or monster yet, but he didn't want to take any chances.

A small but effective palisade was built around the camp, protecting the tents that had been mounted in relative order beside the ship.

Turns were organized between fishing, hunting, cooking, mending the ship, and simple sentry duty.

This gave lot of free time to Edyval to brood and wish he could incinerate people with magical fire, like any good Breton should be able to, as his grandfather used to say.

Damn mages.

He let the silver coin fall inside the chest that contained the whole pile, before slamming it shut with a kick. Still grumbling about his grandfather and the Dragonborn, he left the ship and went to grab the small axe that lay in the tools’ pile at the centre of the camp.

It was his turn to chop wood, after all. Imagining that the logs were actually the Nord’s head would help him.

There was also the fact that it made him look like he was part of the crew, struggling alongside them. Which was good.

The more they respected him, the less chance that they would try to slit his throat during his slee—

“People!” the sentry perched on the top of the mast cried, distracting the captain from his grim thoughts. “People are coming from the cliff!”

Edyval’s head snapped in that direction, and it was not the only one. Lo and behold, a small mob was becoming visible above them, small dark silhouettes against the sky from the captain’s point of view.

Most were staring at the ship, some were pointing at it while discussing with the ones close to them… but a decently-sized group was moving towards them, walking on the track that descended to the bay.

“Don’t ya stare there, idiots!” Edyval yelled. “All hands on deck!”

Conrad pierced another piece of meat with an improvised spit before admiring his work.

Four nice rows of juicy meat were ready in his hand, but he had no intention of stopping to cook them.

"Yol!" he shouted, a short-lived stream of fire leaving his open mouth. It was enough, and the meat was cooked—if a little charred—grease still sizzling.

He took one in his other hand and passed the remaining three to the students, who started eating the impromptu meal.

"Ugh, not even some spices," Sven lamented, peeling off some burnt pieces.

"Ta'Sava is not concerned,” the Khajiit said, shrugging as he took a considerable bite. “Ta'Sava quite likes it."

As they ate, they kept walking in silence, and for a while Conrad was able to enjoy the unfamiliar landscape in silence, with the exception of munching sounds. The last days had been mostly made of mountains and rock and he was already sick of it.

At least there was no snow, thank Talos for that. Although the mountains were more distant now, and smaller in size.

Hopefully they would find an easier terrain to navigate, and—

"Master?" Beta abruptly.

"Yes, Beta?" Conrad questioned, doing his best to suppress a sigh. He should’ve known that his peace of mind wouldn’t have lasted long.

"Is it true that you're a wanted man?" the girl blurted out, appearing to regret the question the moment it slipped past her lips.

"What," he said—didn’t ask, said—flatly, coming to an halt and turning towards the magelings, who were now standing beside each other. He couldn’t decide if it was to attempt to give an impression of a common front or if the boys wanted to protect the girl.

As if.

"I said—"

"Yes, I heard what you said,” he interrupted her, crossing his arms. “Where has this come from?"

"Well, on the ship…” Beta started, unsure how to put it.

“We heard a lot of stuff on The Seeker, Master Conrad,” Sven finished, putting a hand on the girl’s shoulder as though to reassure her.

"Really now?" Conrad muttered, his mind already abuzz. Someone in the crew knew of the unofficial bounty placed on him by the Thalmor? It was not exactly a very well-protected secret, but it wasn’t that widespread. The Thalmor didn’t want to risk making a martyr of him so they couldn't try to move him against officially.

Nothing in the secret war he had inadvertently become involved in was official, though.

The problem was that rumors were around. One of the sailors had probably heard of them...

"Yes,” Beta continued, laughing nervously. “Some of it was utterly crazy, totally absurd. Like how you rode a dragon to fight vampires, or something."

"Uh-hu,” was Conrad’s unimpressed answer. Who even made up stuff like that? He had never rode a dragon during the vampire crisis!

"But we were told you were a wanted man, too. So..."

Yep, here it was. The moment they would ask him about the Thalmor hunting him down, the bounty hunters, the whole package he wanted to keep them away from.

"Look, I didn't tell you because I didn't want to—"

"So it's true!” Beta’s exclaimed in shock, covering her mouth with her left hand. “You are an outlaw in the Riften Hold!"

Conrad’s mind came to a stop. What the—She was not talking about the Thalmor?

"What? Riften?!” he exclaimed in outrage, mostly because he had almost spilled the beans. “I'm not wanted in Riften!"

"But Master Conrad,” Ta’Sava spoke. “They said—"

"Look, they just told you a lot of over-exaggerated stories,” Conrad assured them. “I'm just not... very welcome there. But I'm not wanted by the law."

"Not welcome?" Beta asked in confusion.

"It means they don't like seeing me inside Riften, and I've been asked to stay away from there," Conrad deadpanned.

"I know what that means, master! But... what did you do?"

"I—I destroyed a tavern," he grumbled, scratching his head as he recalled the tragic ending of that period of his life. Bittersweet memories.

"You... destroyed a tavern?” the girl said in disbelief.

“I can see that, actually,” Sven deadpanned. “Why would the whole city hold a grudge on it, though?"

"It was a very popular tavern," he smiled sadly. It was true, after all. The Ragged Flagon had truly been very popular once.

"Couldn't you have paid for damages?"

"I didn't have enough money," Conrad replied, getting irritated with the girl when he felt it; the same odd sensation that made his hair on his head stand on end.

He brushed it off, attributing it to another one of the odd things here. Everything just felt... off. He couldn't put his finger on what it was, though.

"But you could've—" Beta's speech was cut short by Conrad's hand clamping over her mouth to shut her up.

There it was again; that sensation.

When Beta lifted her hands to Conrad's hand to try and pull him away and speak, Conrad pressed harder, giving her a sharp look before listening to a faint noise in the underbrush.

"We're being watched," he realised. The magelings immediately tensed, looking around trying to locate the threat that had apparently put their master on edge.

Sven had even formed a small globe of fire already, ready to throw it.

Conrad on the other hand was slowly scanning their surroundings, moving his right hand to his axe's handle, ears opened.

Blasted rocks. Whoever was spying on them could've been—

There!

Conrad shouted, and the three words that formed the Whirlwind Sprint threw him towards the hiding place of the potential enemy.

He landed with his trusted weapon in his grip, lightning channelled at the point of the staff he was holding in his other hand and... nothing.

There was nothing behind the stupid rock.

"I could've sworn that..." Conrad muttered as he looked around, incredulous. Had he imagined it?

"Master Conrad!" Ta'Sava called, moving towards him with his fellow students in tow. "Are you alright?"

Conrad decided to ignore it, still on high-alert.

Where was he? He knew he was here. Where was he?!

“Master?” the Khajiit repeated, worry clearly audible in his voice.

He ignored the Khajiit, still eyeing their surroundings. The students were moving closer to him, oblivious to the possible danger.

He snapped his head towards them, opening his mouth as if to yell at them a warning—and the presence was gone.

Conrad's eyes widened in shock.

How was it possible? Had his senses fooled him?

No, that was not it.

Whoever had been there... was gone. In the blink of an eye, no less.

The thought unnerved him.

"Master?" Ta’Sava called again. Both him and his fellow students were now looking at him with worried expressions.

"Nevermind,” he grumbled, lowering his axe and relaxing only in appearance. “Let's just keep going."

“Master, are you alright?” Beta asked, sounding concerned. “What was that?”

"Yes, I'm fine... Must have been the wind or something," he replied, failing to sound completely convinced.

"Wind my ass. I think he’s just getting crazier," Sven whispered as he dispersed the spell he had prepared, not realizing that his master had heard his comment. Conrad had better things to do than reprimand the young Imperial.

Like keeping his eyes opened.

Sarutobi Hiruzen was sitting in his office, but for once the God of Shinobi was free from the tedious task known as paperwork.

Instead, he was studying a map of the Elemental Nations, covered with dots and markers. The rest of the desk was covered by reports from the patrols that had been appointed for the investigation.

Beside him were Nara Shikaku, the jonin commander, and the rest of Konoha's best and brightest strategists.

"Our scouts confirmed that there are a lot of Iwa patrols around the border, besides the regular forces of the Land of Earth."

"That's not unusual. The Earth-Fire border has always been heavily surveilled by both nations. Although, an increase of activity on the border as Konoha is experiencing such phenomena..."

"Iwa has always carried a grudge against the Yondaime Hokage, but like all the other Hidden Villages, envied his power. What if this is their attempt to study the Hiraishin?"

"Nonsense!” one of the other strategists blurted out. “The Hiraishin no Jutsu was created by Tobirama-sama. In decades, only Namikaze Minato was able to reproduce it, and only after studying the scrolls that are jealously guarded right here, in the deepest bowels of our vaults! The mere idea of someone understanding how it works without those is absurd!"

"Then how do you explain that each and every one of those lights has lead to a Hiraishin seal, huh?" was the almost mocking reply he received from one of his colleagues.

Sarutobi’s mind was a buzz of activity. Maybe it really was just a way to track the Hiraishin seals, but why now? Why more than a decade after Minato's death, when no shinobi able to use it existed?

No, it was something else. The evidence in their possession left no other explanation.

"I'm more concerned about this 'not-chakra' energy that the lights seem to be made of, according to Hakate Kakashi and the whole Hyuuga Clan," the Hokage said, eyes still on the map. "Have we made any progress on that front?"

"Our sensors are trying their best, Hokage-sama. Sadly those lights disappear as soon as they reach their target, leaving no chakra residue for analysis."

"That shouldn't surprise us, if they're not made of chakra but from... something else," Sarutobi mused, stroking his chin. "Maybe we can't detect anything because we don't know how it's made. The question is, how did Iwa—"

The door suddenly opened, interrupting the Hokage's musings and catching everyone's attention.

"Hokage-sama, forgive the intrusion, but a message with the highest priority has just arrived," the shinobi that had barged in said, presenting to the village leader a sealed scroll with a slight bow.

Sarutobi accepted it with a nod, before opening and examining its contents. The whole room was silent now, the bickering forgotten as they studied the Hokage's reactions as his eyes darted across the scroll's contents.

"It seems that our concerns were not founded as we thought," he slowly said after a few minutes, closing the parchment. "Our spies in Iwa finally managed to send a report. The lights are not their doing, and they're as baffled as us."

He took a deliberate pause before continuing, "Unlike us, though, they've a lead on their origins. Iwa patrols are stalking an unknown group that was apparently moving along the border."

"Another group involved in this?" Shikaku mumbled, eyes closed. "That leaves too many unknowns, even without considering the nature of the energy powering that jutsu."

"Indeed, but now we know where to look. This has become a race between us and Iwa, to see who will reach those responsible first," Sarutobi said, as he slowly rose to his feet. "Send an ANBU team to investigate."

Dawn was breaking over the mountain pass, and from their advantage point, Conrad was able to see the landscape in all of its glory.

The barren, snowless mountain range with all its peaks and spires almost suddenly ceased to be, leaving space for one of the most thick and lush forests he had ever seen in all of his travels.

The rising sun's rays were playing tricks with the scenery, painting the rocks and leaves in reds and blues.

Once upon a time, Conrad would've been breathless at seeing such a wonder. Now he was just wondering how much terrain they would be able to cover in one day.

In the end, the attack hadn't come.

That didn't mean that Conrad had relaxed completely.

The last few nights had been a nightmare, because he knew he couldn't rely only on the magelings to do watch duty since they had not even felt their stalker's presence the first time.

Thank the Divines for magic runes and summoned daedra. They were the only reason why he had managed to sleep at all.

No matter how paranoid the magelings thought he was.

Had it not been for their mysterious pursuer—or pursuers—he would've gladly used this opportunity to give the kids a cartography lesson. Their skills in that field were pitiful at best.

Instead, he had hastened them to break camp as he traced a map of what he was able to see from his perched spot in his journal. Sadly none of the lands they had crossed so far resembled the few Akaviri maps he had seen, which depicted only Septimia’s and Ionith’s surroundings.

They had probably landed in another part of the continent. Just his luck.

On the bright side, he was able to see at least two villages, so maybe they would be able to sleep under a roof that night.

Taking in the sight before him one last time, he stood from the rock he had been sitting on, turning towards the young mages.

Who were still having trouble packing their supplies.

Conrad groaned loudly and made a note to teach them how to do that properly on a later date, but didn't move to help them.

Let their errors teach them a lesson, first.

"Hurry up you three, or I'll leave you here," he barked as he picked up his backpack, walking away from the camping spot.

The sounds of their hurried bustling made him smile slightly, but he quashed it quickly. He had a reputation to uphold.

"Master Conrad?" Ta'Sava called, trotting behind him whilst cradling a canteen, a book and other various items. "How long before we arrive?"

"For the last time, I don't know," he replied, slightly turning towards his furried student. "We'll be there when we'll be there. Now put your stuff inside your pack while I check."

Conrad ignored the grumbling that ensued from that comment as he turned back to face the direction they were traveling in. They were getting closer, he could feel it. To what, he didn’t know, but he assumed he’d know when he got there.

Or else he’d have even more reason to hunt down his brother’s dead soul and beat it into Oblivion.

Turning his focus inward to cast the seeking spell—which he could practically cast in his sleep by now—he gathered the necessary magicka, and let it loose. The giant ball of magic had long lost its novelty, but this time something different happened.

Instead of the entire sphere flying off in one direction, it split up into multiple smaller orbs. A big cluster of them soared in the same general direction, while others shot off at seemingly random intervals. A few even landed in the forest, in the middle of nothing.

He stared at them, part of his mind noting the directions as the rest tried to process this new development.

He ignored the magelings’ comments as they tried to get his attention and question him, too busy trying to deny the conclusion he was coming to.

He was going to murder his brother. Repeatedly. He was pretty sure that the Soul Cairn would let him do that.

There were multiple objects they were tracking?! And they didn’t even have the decency to be in the same general area, no, they had be all over the damn place!

“I hate you, Minato,” he growled as he resumed walking.

“Who’s Minato?” Beta asked in confusion.

“My brother,” Conrad replied, not offering any other explanation.

“I didn’t know that the Dragonborn had a brother,” Sven whispered, once again not lowering his voice enough.

“Maybe his brother is not famous, so the bards never say anything about him in the songs?” Beta offered hesitantly.

Edyval pretended to mask his annoyance as he gave another bag of silver coins to yet another simpleton that had come to trade with them at their camp.

The fool smiled in satisfaction, and left with a deep bow, lots of smiles and words in that funny tongue of his, to which he replied with waves with his hand and smiles of his own.

Inwardly though, Edyval was gloating. He had just bought two crates of a spice never seen back home for an incredibly low price. Even if he was paying with gold-turned-into-silver coins, he would be rich once the stuff arrived on the Tamrielic markets.

And that was just with the last transaction!

One week ago, when he had seen those people on the cliff, he had feared that the camp would’ve been attacked. Instead it was a group of curious locals from a small village nearby.

At first they just gaped at the ship—something that he could understand and be proud of, since The Seeker was a great ship—but being looked at like he was a source of entertainment by these weird-dressed savages had quickly become annoying.

Then they started to trade with his crew. Although the language barrier was a problem, gestures and coin seemed to be universal. Especially the coin.

It was food at first. The crew was tired of the meager provisions that had remained after the long travel and wanted to try something new. After the weird but tasty food, they had started to buy other items from the peasants. Like those weird sticks that made light when you push a button on them—another thing that didn’t exist in Tamriel, and for which Edyval knew he could ask any price he wanted.

In a few more days, more people had started to come. Even real merchants, who had come with some bodyguards. A small camp surrounded their even smaller camp now, tents full of people that wanted to sell stuff to him.

Edyval was not stupid though. He knew that there was only so much silver—transmutated gold, he reminded myself—on the ship, and if he wanted to maximize his gains he had to be careful in choosing who he would make a bargain with. Which of course led to some screening.

Speaking of which, Edyval had some potential deals to attend to. He couldn’t deny that it was difficult to communicate to the merchants without seeming invasive or rude, but he could care less when it came to such fantastical business opportunities! His interests lay in just how low he could haggle the price, especially with imbeciles that had no idea the fortune they were laying upon him.

Edyval resisted the urge to rub his hands together gleefully as he proceeded look at the wares that had arrived that day—fabrics. Some familiar, some not, but it appeared his crew were just as eager as he to trade—with their own funds, of course. He had no doubt exclusive goods obtained from Akavir would catch an impressive price back home, and his men surely had the same idea in mind.

He scanned the camp, looking for that trader that had those weird dresses. Before seeing him, Edyval had always thought that the only men to wear a gown were mages and priests. Where was that—

“Captain, come here and take a look at this!” a sailor called Edyval from the nearby line of applicants that were waiting for their chance to talk to him.

“What do ya—” he started to call, but his eyes caught a strange sight in the middle of the camp.

A tall man in red robes was standing in there, but that was not what caught the seaman’s sight. In the last few days he had somehow become accustomed to the weird dress and fashion sense of these uncouth fools—mostly because of the prospect of future gains.

There was no way though to describe the man in red if not as eccentric, between the long—too long to possibly be practical—and thick mane of white hair and those strange red tattoos on the face.

What a land of weirdos.

He was at the point of turning away and getting back to his own business when their gazes locked. Edyval’s hair stood on end, his flesh crawling with the sensation of danger. He widened his eyes.

That man in red… he was dangerous. Incredibly so.

In a way the seasoned captain was not able to explain.

“Captain, come on!” the crewman called again, distracting him for only a second. “You must see this!”

Edyval nodded absent-mindedly, as he checked the crowd where the tall bushy-haired man had stood. He couldn’t see a speck of white, or red robes.

The man was gone. How was that possible—

“Silk, sir!” the sailor yelled to him. “This guy has silk!”

Edyval’s neck could have snapped with the speed he turned it. Trying to seem as unfazed as possible—a great effort, since he had just had one of the biggest scares of his life—he slowly walked towards the line.

“What did ya just say?” he whispered, placing both his hands on the sailor’s shoulders.

The crewman offered one of the bundles from a crate that one of the tradesmen had offered as sample of his merchandise. It was a folded cut of silk, of great quality, the texture almost flawless, and Edyval’s gnarly lips twisted into a greedy smile, his hand crawling to his money pouch.

“Tell him to—Well, let him understand that I want all of it,” he grinned, before turning towards the rest of the crew. “Ya idiots! Help this savage’s men to load the crates with the silk in the cargo bay!”

“Cap’n, I lost my sword!” someone among his men protested. “I can’t find it anywh—”

“Nevermind that! Do as I said!” he ordered, already imagining how much he could charge for the silk.

He didn’t think about the man in red for a long time.

“There's no way it's normal. What do you think?” Sven asked, still walking in the middle of the forest. “Do you think it’s normal?”

“I don’t see what the problem is,” Beta replied, slightly annoyed by her friend's insistence.

"It's just... I started to notice it on the ship, but it's only been a few weeks! How can it—"

"Ta'Sava is having a growth spurt," the Khajiit defended himself. "It's not Ta'Sava's fault if he is now taller than Sven."

"It's just not fair!" Sven wailed. "I've always been the tallest among us!"

"Sven is just jealous that Ta'Sava is the one that looks grown up, now," the feline said smugly.

"Guys... I'm a Nord,” Beta deadpanned. “Do you realize that when we’ve 'grown up', I'll probably be taller than both of you?"

"So what? The fact that you’re a Nord doesn’t mean that all Nords are giants!” Sven protested. “Master Conrad isn’t that tall!"

"Hey!” said Nord yelled, turning towards his students. “I'm just a little below average!"

The two boys blinked for a few seconds, before exploding in a loud laugh, much to the girl’s confusion and their teacher’s anger.

“Little... !” Ta’Sava managed to say between the giggles.

Conrad gritted his teeth and kept walking under the forest’s canopy. He would’ve gladly taught those two brats a lesson, but he had to admit—inwardly, of course—that he had served them that on a silver platter.

Which darkened his mood even more than the stupid woods they were in. The air was so heavy that he was covered in sweat, even after removing the armour’s heavy padding.

It was probably because of how thick and lush the trees were. He hated it already.

Conrad growled, reminding himself that torching a forest was not constructive. Speaking of constructive...

"We should be close now," he grumbled, catching the magelings attention. Casting his spell once again, he didn't spare a glance to the big cluster of lights that darted through the forest in the same direction.

Instead, he followed a single, tiny dot of light that slithered away.

Having to hasten his stride to not lose sight of it, he followed it through the trees, as the light bounced over roots and lighting up the undergrowth with a tiny blue glow.

The way it moved reminded the mage of an especially small wisp—nasty little bastards.

Bushes and shrubs were becoming thicker as Conrad was led away from the trail. He could hear his students' calls as they were left behind but he didn't stop. The Nord pushed aside a moss-covered branch, and found himself in a small clearing.

Just in time to see the small light orb disappear under the ground, passing through it as if it was a ghost.

Conrad remained still for a whole minute, still looking where the magical light had disappeared.

He had spent six months hiding in the College of Winterhold, teaching brats and losing his mind behind that research that had led nowhere. He had managed to create the tracking spell to find the runes that Minato had planted in his mind only thanks to a fortuitous intuition and used it to cross an Oblivion-damned ocean that nobody had dared to challenge in more than three and half centuries.

Spending a small fortune to rent that bloody contrebandier ship, too.

After all that, the first place he had managed to actually reach thanks to his clairvoyance spell was a small clearing in the middle of nowhere.

He felt his eye twitch.

Taking a deep calming breath, Conrad forced himself to think logically about the situation. What was so important about this place?

He started to examine his surroundings, walking slowly along the clearing. It seemed perfectly normal, just a bunch of grass and small bushes in the middle of the—

The thick forest.

The forest around was incredibly thick, so why did this clearing even exist? There was no reason for it to be natural, it should've been full of big and tall trees as the rest of the place. The soil was not poisoned or infertile. It was pretty obvious with all the underbrush he could see.

So nothing would've stopped the trees' growth.

He moved closer to the trees around the clearing. They were younger than the others in these woods, and noticeably smaller. Less than twenty years old, probably.

So the clearing was free of anything bigger than a shrub, and around it the forest was slowly reclaiming the lost ground. Maybe the clearing had been created by a fire? Lightning struck a tree and—No, no. With such a thick vegetation, the destruction caused by a fire would've been on a much larger scale.

Something had happened here, but it was too localized... a spell, maybe—

"There he is!" Beta's voice distracted him. Turning towards the end of the clearing, he saw the three magelings trotting towards him, clearly out of breath. He rolled his eyes, knowing that he would have to do something about that sooner or later.

"Dammit, Master! Don't just ran away like that, what if—" Sven said before tumbling unceremoniously on the ground, accompanied by the sound of tinkering glass.

Conrad's eyes widened.

"Sven, be more careful! You're the one carrying the alchemy equipment!" he barked, as he walked towards them. "I swear, if you broke my alambic I will—"

"It wasn't my fault!" the boy tried to defend himself, still gasping for breath. "I stumbled on something!"

"You were walking on grass, where could you possibly—"

"Wait. What's that?" Beta asked, pointing at something on the ground. Conrad followed her finger, and saw metal ring that sprung from the dirt, partially covered by the grass.

It was on that Sven had tripped up, and it was the place where the clairvoyance light had disappeared.

Conrad immediately let go of his staff and knelt besides it, scraping at the soil with his hands.

"What is Master Conrad doing?" Ta'Sava asked, arching an eyebrow.

"Digging. Either help me out or shut up," he replied. Whatever the thing was, it was connected to Minato's runes.

"I knew we should've taken a shovel with us," Beta lamented as she got to work.

"Why would anyone think to bring a shovel?" Sven muttered. "We're mages."

"Shut up and dig, Sven," Conrad said, deciding against biting back with a comment about how he had used shovels mostly to bury comrades and friends.

The deep-rooted grass and the hard soil made digging a long, tedious task, and the hot air didn't really help. Conrad was forced to remove his hood to clean off his sweat.

Finally, whatever had been buried was freed with a spray of dirt and filth and most importantly, it was in Conrad's hands.

It was a rusted knife. The oddest one the Nord had ever seen, shaped almost like a trident.

It also had the puniest and least menacing blade he had ever seen on something that was clearly a weapon. Most importantly, it had one of the runes Minato had planted in his mind inscribed on the handle.

Which was good news. It was a sign that he was not completely crazy.

"Hey, look! There's something else in there!" Ta'Sava exclaimed. The Khajiit immediately started to rummage in the hole, having to quench his curiosity.

Conrad glanced towards him, still studying the strange weapon. Why would Minato place those runes there? If it had been Minato, of course.

"Seems like a piece of cloth," his furred student mumbled, as he started to pull with a grunt. Despite giving it a good tug, the cloth seemed fixed into the ground, and refused to move. "Why it's not budging?"

"Look, it's stuck around a rock," Sven pointed out. There was actually a round shape covered by dirt and mud, that had apparently been caught by the piece of cloth.

"That's a very smooth rock," Beta said, arching an eyebrow. Ta'Sava ignored her and planted his feet into the ground before pulling even harder.

Slowly, the string of fabric began to rise, shuffling away mud and dirt as the feline boy tightened his fingers around it. Conrad managed to see a flash of metal placed on it before a whole chunk of dirt exploded outwards as the object was finally pried free from the ground, soaring right into Ta'Sava's hands.

"Yes!" Ta'Sava exclaimed excitedly because of his success, even if he had fell on his rear because of the sudden lack of balance. Then his eyes widened as he saw what he was holding.

The piece of cloth was tied around a skull.

The Khajiit shrieked in fear, tossing the body part away instinctively. Which landed right in Sven's lap, who had a similar reaction and threw it back in the hole where it had come from.

"Guys, what's wrong with you? It's just a skull!" Beta said, apparently bewildered by their reactions. "We have seen plenty on the College's shelves!"

"They all belonged to someone!" Sven retorted. "How can you not be disturbed by that?!"

"I know that but... they're just bones," Beta said meekly. "It's not like they're undead or something."

As the magelings bickered, Conrad picked up the skull, raising it to eye level to examine it better.

"Human," he mumbled, catching the three student's attention. "Judging by the teeth and the cranium's bones, he—or she—was around his twenties the time of death."

"How can you tell, master?" Beta asked, taken aback.

"I've studied it back in the days at the College," Conrad replied, not looking towards them,

"You studied how to read skulls?" Sven asked incredulously. "Why would you even think about learning how to read skulls?!?"

"I was bored," he simply said, turning towards the three of them with a small smirk on his face. "Now do you believe me when I say that all knowledge is useful?"

Silence fell among the apprentices as he turned back to the skull, hoping to find some other clues. He removed the strip of cloth that was barely hanging around it and examined it.

The only peculiar thing about it was the metal plaque at the center of it, rusted as the knife was. A symbol of some kind was engraved into it: two geometrical forms which he didn’t know the meaning of. It could be anything, from a heraldic emblem to a lucky charm. He didn't know enough about Akavir's traditions to understand it.

He placed it on the ground beside his staff and turned over the skull. To his surprise he felt one of his fingers slip through it, like if the bone had suddenly caved in.

Immediately checking, worrying to have damaged the skull, he saw that the bone hadn’t given way—there was a hole.

A very neat one.

His eyes moved towards the knife he was still holding in his other hand and slowly, very slowly, moved it towards the hole, letting it pass through.

"The weapon struck from the side, piercing through the bone, shattering it and tearing the brain apart," he grumbled. "A fatal wound, this guy was dead before realizing it."

“Why would the person that killed him leave the knife behind?” Sven asked, eyes fixed on the blade as Conrad took it out of the skull.

“There was no time to take it back, probably, This is a battlefield,” the Nord said, scanning the clearing once again. “One where one—or both sides had spellcasters of some kind among them.”

“Mages?” Beta inquired. “I mean, battlemages?

“If they have them here. That’s why this clearing exists, the forest was razed in this very specific spot,” Conrad explained. “Once the battle was over, the forces involved probably didn’t have time to retrieve lost equipment—or their fallen.”

“How can you be sure about that, Master?” Beta insisted.

“I’m not, it’s just a theory. I’m ready to bet one hundred septims that if we checked, we would find other bodies.”

“Then why did your spell take us here?” Sven asked in mind annoyance. “How come it led us to a clearing in the middle of nowhere?”

Conrad found himself unable to reply, much to his surprise. The spell had been created to track down those runes, but he had ignored—and still did—what their actual use could be. Finding them on a weapon, beside a dead body, was raising new questions in his mind.

What was the use of the runes during a fight? Had Minato just created them, or had he taken part in whatever skirmish—or war—that had raged here, years ago?

Who was his brother, really?

Those questions and more were whirling in his mind, and he was unable to find a—

Conrad's eyes widened, his body tensing slightly, as he tried to not make any sudden movements.

Their stalker was back.

He slowly put down the skull, like he wanted to leave it on the ground. Then, ignoring the weird looks the magelings were giving him, used the free hand to cast a spell, using his body to hide his actions at the best he could.

His senses expanded, sensing the location of every living being in the immediate surroundings.

The squirrels running on a tree's bark in the forest.

The birds, flying from branch to branch.

The magelings standing in front of him.

A group of four people hidden in the woods just behind him.

Conrad was baffled. He had thought so far that they had been chased down by a single person.

"So you brought friends, huh?" he whispered, reaching for his staff. "Fool me once, shame on you. Fool me twice..."

In a single sweep motion he grabbed the staff and got up, throwing the three-pronged knife towards the closest enemy before breaking in a sprint.

The short blade impacted on a tree, having been easily dodged by the human shape hidden in the bushes. As Conrad kept running towards them giving a warcry, the group of spies seemed mesmerized for couple of seconds by the knife's shape.

As they focused again on him, Conrad had almost crossed the clearing and was now able to see their figures even without the use of the spell, his right hand moving towards his axe's handle.

They panicked, for a reason the Nord wasn't able to discern. Scrambling out of their hiding spots, they fled with a nimbleness that Conrad’s gaze could barely catch. In the blink of an eye, they were gone, and out of the range of his spell. He wouldn't have been able to catch up to them even by shouting the Whirlwind Spirit.

Conrad stopped, knowing it was futile trying to pursue them. No wonder he hadn't been able to find their first stalker on the mountain pass!

He could still hear the echo of their screams, though, especially the two words they kept shouting over and over.

The Nord briefly wondered if 'Kiroi Senko' meant something like 'Run for your lives', but he was still puzzled by their reaction.

Why had they fled like that?

More importantly, he thought, as he looked at his right hand in confusion, why had he thrown that stupid knife, instead of using a good old-fashioned fireball?

In his years of duty as Konoha's Hokage, Sarutobi Hiruzen had taken to heart a single piece of advice: to keep a moment of his day to relax, a moment spent not having to think about the piles of documents, and being able to be part of the village by living among its inhabitants instead of being locked in his office all the time.

Sadly, the current state of affairs had greatly reduced the time he could slack off from his duties. He had even been forced to eat his lunch in the office in the last few days.

He didn't bat an eye as one of the lights that had become the bane of his existence entered from the window and moved towards Minato's picture hung on the wall, beside the other Kage before him.

"Five minutes late today," he mumbled without stopping his reading of the papers splayed out on his desk. His eyes widened before a scowl settled on his face. Just like a good part of the village's population, shinobi or not, he was getting too accustomed to the strange phenomenon that kept mocking all their defenses.

He went back studying the letters, hoping that the people responsible would be caught soon.

Tomorrow he would have to announce that Konoha had been selected to host the Chunin Exams. If foreign shinobi saw Konoha's "weakness" the word would quickly spread across all the Elemental Nations. Another village could even try something to test them.

Sarutobi really, really hated those lights.

“Minato,” he sighed, “maybe if you hadn’t left behind so many seals we wouldn’t have such a great security risk on our—”

His words died in his mouth as a small toad jumped in from the window, landing in the middle of his desk.

It seemed that Jiraiya had sent another report.

The small amphibian turned towards the Hokage, and with a barfing noise, it spat out a small sealing scroll that rolled amongst the important parchments, leaving a few drips of toad drool in its wake.

Then the toad looked at him almost expectantly, as Sarutobi stopped with a finger the scroll's drifting before more papers were soiled by it.

"Can I have candy now?" the summon asked eagerly. The Hokage frowned at the messenger toad, causing it to dispel in disappointment.

Once the puff of smoke cleared up, the now alone Hokage made some space on the desk and released the scrolls' contents.

There were only two items inside, but he almost didn’t register the handwritten message that was seemingly written in a haste.

His eyes were too focused on the bizarrely-shaped sword. A kind of sword he hadn't seen for almost thirty-nine years.

The feminine-shaped figure stretched itself, pirouetting less than a foot from the ground, the flames that framed its body lighting up the dark forest. Once it had finished, it turned towards its master.

“Patrol around the campsite,” Conrad ordered to the flame atronach. The summoned creature swiftly obeyed, and the Nord grunted in satisfaction. Between the explosive runes, the wards, and the creatures he had conjured around the woods, the camp was secure enough. He decided it was time to rejoin the magelings around the campfire.

Four days had passed since they had left the clearing where he had found the weird knife that was now hung on his belt, along with his dagger. There had been no sign of their pursuers after they had fled, but he hadn’t survived for so long without taking precautions.

“Supper is almost ready, Master,” Sven said, hearing him approaching as he took a spoonful from the firepot. “Wish I had more spices.”

“Ta’Sava doesn’t care about taste as long as it’s filling,” the Khajiit mumbled from the spot he was sprawled lazily. “Ta’Sava is hungry.”

“You all would be forced to eat this stuff raw, if it wasn’t for me,” Sven said smugly, indicating his fellow student with his wooden spoon.

“Ta’Sava is also too tired to insult Sven creatively,” the cat boy replied.

“Well, if Sven hadn’t learned how to cook, Master Conrad would be forced to burn all our meals with his fire breath,” Beta giggled as she mounted her tent.

“Eight preserve us,” the Imperial muttered, causing his two companions to burst out in a laugh.

Conrad snorted, sitting down at the base of a tree, a little away from the fire and not looking at it directly. He didn’t want the flames to ruin his night vision.

He started to unbuckle his armour, placing the single pieces carefully on the ground. He hadn’t taken it off at all in the last days and his whole body felt sore, every muscle aching with stiffness.

More importantly, he felt filthy.

The next river on their way, no matter what, he would take a bath in. The magelings too, if they wished.

So long as there were no limiting circ*mstances, of course. Like groups of armed people following them.

“Here, Master,” Beta called to him, handing a steaming cup to him. “Dinner’s ready.”

He accepted it with a nod. Rice and assorted roots. Well, at least it was a warm meal he could enjoy before resting.

"So what do you think?" Sven asked to his companions, passing Ta'Sava his own portion.

"About what?" Beta asked, stirring the contents of her bowl.

"About Akavir," Sven clarified.

Conrad sighed silently. Of course they would not eat their rice in silence. He sagely decided to ignore them and frown at his own dinner.

"Nothing much, it would be better if we could talk with people," the girl replied, sounding actually sad. "I would like to see one of their cities, too. Real cities, not those small villages we passed by."

"We saw some nice mountains, though," Ta'Sava butted in. "This forest, too. Is big and weird. Ta'Sava has never seen most of the plants here before."

"We should get samples!" Sven brightened up. "You know, to see how they could be used in alchemy."

"It's so exciting! Nobody from Tamriel did this in centuries... we may even write a book about our journey once we—"

"That may not be a good idea," Conrad interrupted abruptly, not liking where the discussion was going.

"What?” the girl asked, stupefied. Beside her, the two boys were having a similar reaction at his words. “Why?"

"It's—" Conrad hesitated, not really sure what explanation he could give. "I don't think it would be wise to spread the word of our expedition, that's all. Or at least of who was part of it."

"You mean... that we can't talk about our journey to anyone?"

"Yes, that's what I'm saying," he said with a tone of finality.

"Master, are you—” Beta tried to ask, hesitating for a moment. “—are you ashamed of us?"

"What? No!” Conrad said, outraged. How could she think that? “That's not—I just want to—"

"Oh I see it now. You want all the glory, don't you Master?” Sven sneered, meeting his gaze.

"The glory? What are you babbling about, Sven?" the Nord asked, raising an eyebrow.

“You don't want to share it with your magelings," the young mage continued. "This is probably going to be the most important research expedition of the century, and you won't want to divide the spoils once we will be back home!"

"The spoils? Sven, I—we don't even know what we could find here!"

"Sure you don't. You didn't even tell us where you found those runes. You know? The one we are following?" Sven insisted, slowly raising his voice. "Who would believe that you don't know what we're supposed to look for?"

"I—"

"I thought that you were supposed to be a legend, but in the end you're just a selfish liar that cares only about himself!"

Conrad reeled from the comment, taken aback by Sven's biting tone.

He searched his other students' gazes—a half-hearted attempt to prove to himself that maybe they didn't really think anything so ridiculous—but the moment his eyes met Beta's, she cast them to the ground, her fingers fumbling in her lap. He turned to Ta'Sava, expecting him too to call up Sven on his insolence, only to be met with a submissive silence.

They weren't supporting Sven, but they weren't disregarding him either.

He turned back to Sven, and saw his student staring straight back into his eyes. Conrad knew anger when he saw it, and recognized it behind Sven's glare.

Along with another thing: challenge.

Well, the Imperial wasn't the only one getting angry.

Conrad’s blood was boiling now, and he was sure that his eyes had become slitted. He could tell because his soul was demanding to put the young Imperial back in his place.

Instead—showing what he considered a considerable dose of self-control—he slowly reached for his bag, briefly rummaging through it before taking out one of the last two mead bottles he still had.

“Believe whatever you want, kid. I don’t have to explain myself to you,” he growled, walking away from the camp without looking at his students.

Conrad kept strolling until he was almost at the limit of the perimeter he had created around the campsite. Somewhere in the distance he could see his summoned atronachs moving around the dark forest. At least they still had the decency of not putting the whole place on fire. Teaching them to not do that had been difficult, back in the days.

“Stupid kids,” he said, as he popped up the bottle. “Why didn’t they stay at the College?”

He drank roughly half of the bottle in one go, enjoying the sweet taste and how the alcohol smothered his ire.

What did they know about the risks they would incur if they became associated with him? Worse, if they became known as his students.

They were too young, they were too vulnerable, and they were not prepared for the whole mess their life could become. Like his had become.

What did they know? What did they know of having to watch your back all the time, or the whole cloak and dagger business, or having to be on the move the whole time, not staying in the same place for longer than necessary?

What did they know of finding their friends dead, their throats slit? Of the people disappeared in the night, never to be seen again? Of the companions and comrades dying for stupid reasons? Of the lovers—

“Oh no,” he muttered to himself, pinching the bridge of his nose. “I don’t want to dwell on that.”

He took another sip. He didn’t want to remember—

His bitter musings were interrupted as he felt his connection to one of his summoned creatures being suddenly severed. Not even a second later, he saw a bright explosion in the distance, and some trees were set on fire.

His eyes widened. Somebody was killing his atronachs. And the magelings were alone.

Conrad dropped the bottle and started to run the way he had come from.

"Stupid, stupid stupid!" he scolded himself as he called upon his magicka reserves. "Why the f*ck did I leave the camp?!"

He needed to be able to find their attackers. As the spell showed him the living beings in the surroundings, he felt some relief when he sensed the magelings.

They were alive, but apparently unconscious and there were more figures around them. Their pursuers, without a doubt. But there seemed to be more than four—

He heard the sound of something spinning beside him, nicking his left arm.

Conrad let out a grunt of surprise, the pain dull and not much compared to some past injuries, but what had he been hit with? That was too small to be an arrow or a throwing knife.

He needed protection anyway, and gearing up with his armour in the camp was not an option. He let the magicka pass through his skin, hardening it so that it was almost as resistant as iron.

It wasn't like wearing his armour, but it would do.

Next thing, he would need a weapon—

He blindly dodged to his right, avoiding being impaled by a sword that instead barely scraped his hardened forearm. It hurt, but it wasn't a deep wound.

The enemy had been fast, very fast. It had caught up with Conrad at an impossible speed, just like the four stalkers that had fled from him in the clearing days before. Maybe even faster. Hadn't it been for his spell, he wouldn't have seen the attack coming.

This guy was not one of them though. His attacker was wearing some kind of pale mask decorated with markings and a dark set of clothes that covered him from head to toe, with a matching armour to boot. In the dark of the forest, with the distant fire light reflecting off the smooth surface of the mask, it was actually disconcerting.

Whoever this masked freak was, he was more dangerous than those cowards. Not that it mattered.

Letting go of his Detect Life spell, Conrad sent two twin streams of lightning towards his still crouched opponent, who just evaded them with a somersault that reminded him of some acrobats he had seen during his travels.

As he was preparing another barrage, the Nord felt a strong grip on his right wrist and his shoulder and suddenly his whole arm was twisted behind his own back. Someone had put him in a grapple.

Damn, these guys were really fast.

Conrad tried to struggle away but the bastard was not giving up. Not even when he started to kick his shins—even if the muffled grunts of pain were a joy for his ears.

The masked attacker quickly came close, right in front of him as his partner was blocking his movements. Instead of attempting to strike him down with his sword, he started to do strange gestures with his hands.

Conrad decided to not waste the opportunity.

“FUS!” he shouted, causing the man in front of him to stagger at the sheer strength that his voice invested him. Before his capturer could do anything, he quickly gathered his energies and released another spell.

His body was immediately set ablaze, or at least it appeared so as the cloak of flames covered him without burning him.

The enemy behind him was forced to let go to not burn his hands. The fire drove away the darkness of the night, and Conrad could see that he was surrounded.

Four masked figures, holding an assortment of weapons, were all around him. Two of them were even hanging upside-down from three branches. Not that he cared how that was possible right now.

For some reason, they were hesitating. Maybe it was because of the fact that a man was on fire in front of them. It wouldn’t last for long though.

Manipulating the energies of the plane of Oblivion once again, he conjured a daedric axe into his hand.

The reaction was immediate. The attack, carried out without hesitation. A chain coiled around his arm and with a vicious tug, it tightened, biting his skin even through his clothes.

Taking advantage of his disability, the other three masked freaks attacked him at the same time.

Twisting his trapped arm, Conrad yanked the chain with all his might, unbalancing the man holding it, making him collide against one of his partners. Turning around he was even able to block the strike of one of the remaining two with his free arm. There was nothing he could do for the last one, though.

He was kicked—kicked, of all things!—on his left ear, the blow completely unexpected. A flash of pain exploded in his head as his vision became blurred. Conrad was pretty sure that hadn’t he hardened his skin, he would’ve been knocked out.

Freeing the right arm from the now loosened chain, he turned towards the now exposed attacker, taking a swing with the conjured axe. He grinned as he felt the impact of the weapon on the enemy’s body, only to widen his eyes when he realized what he had actually hit.

Instead of being impaled in a human torso, the axe’s head was stuck in a thick log.

Before he could even ask himself what had happened, Conrad felt something smash into his side, and he was sent flying through the air. The landing was not soft and he lost his grip on the daedric weapon as he tumbled across the dirt.

He finally stopped on his back, gasping for breath.

The grass around him was already alight as he rolled back to his feet. Something sprouted out of the ground, something big and Conrad instinctively tried to roll over to dodge it.

The Nord found himself unable to move in a blink of an eye, something grasping and squeezing his legs. Glancing down towards them, he saw a thick spiral of wood ensnaring his limbs.

In a different context he would’ve surely appreciated seeing such a marvelous example of Akaviri sorcery. Right now, though, he just yelled some profanities as he tried to blast away the wood that was trapping him—and the blasted thing refused to be be damaged from the flames shrouding his figure or his spells!

More curses followed when the branch continued to grow upwards, reaching his torso. He didn’t have time to deal with it, however, as one of his opponents had recovered and appeared with surprising speed right in melee with him. If not for Conrad’s decades of fighting experience, his reflexes wouldn’t have been fast enough to deflect the strike aimed for his head, and snatch the other man’s clothes.

Now speed wouldn’t matter so much, and the Nord wasted no time in abusing that advantage. Also, he was still on fire. That was kind of like playing dirty, thankfully he had no problem with that. Particularly not when the enemy had started it first, attacking a group of children.

Conrad yanked the man towards him, causing him to lose his balance. As the masked guy was still falling, he punched, aiming for the head. The sound of his fist impacting against the mask was very satisfying.

He punched again, and again, until the strange wood immobilized one of his arms, while his punching bag stopped his other one. But he was closer now.

Leaning his head back, he brought it forward with as much force as he could muster. The sound of a mask shattering, and the feeling of blood trickling down his face—not his blood—he counted as a small victory even if his defeat seemed inevitable.

Two times in less than one year? He was really getting old.

The not-anymore-masked man fell down besides him but he could hear the other three coming towards him. He had maybe the time for a single shout—again, twice in a single year!—and briefly considered using the Storm Call but... the magelings were too close.

Accidentally frying the magelings was not an option. And he needed something able to put down these guys.

Why not do another thing two times in the same year?

"DUR NEH"

Pain blossoming against his temple was the last thing he recalled before unconsciousness claimed him.

-Dream-

He dreamed the red haired woman again. He ran his hand through her beautiful hair, and she smiled at him.

She kissed him for the first time.

Pain.

Pain was the first thing he felt. A throbbing headache that was comparable to the mother of all hangovers. Among various cuts and bruises on his whole body.

Which was good. It meant that he was still alive, even if it hurt like a bitch.

Besides the pain, though, there were other sensations that he started to feel as time passed and his mind started to work properly again.

He felt groggy, with a numbness that had probably not been caused by the strike that knocked him out. There was also a strange taste in his mouth.

He had been drugged.

He also felt the cold metal around his wrists, and the weight of the restraints placed on him.

He had been chained.

He was hungry and thirsty. Which meant that he had been unconscious for a long while.

He dared to open his eyes to check his surroundings. The light, even if dim, hurt. Conrad wasn't sure if it was because of the hit to his head or the drugs they had given to him.

It was a small room. Four walls, a door, and his chains. A cell.

He also found out that he had been sleeping on the floor.

At least it wasn't Cidhna Mine.

He tried to get up but his legs were not responding. Maybe the drug had some effect on his muscles?

Managing to sit on his butt,vaguely taking note that they had left him his clothes at least—whoever they were—he started to look around the empty cell.

It was actually a strange room. No stone, no bars in the door. A mirror, for some reason he really couldn't fathom. The strangest thing, the one that made him pause though, was the light source.

Conrad had expected a lantern or a torch.

Instead, stuck in the ceiling, there was a yellow light globe that seemed to radiate light on its own, without a fire.

Was it some kind of spell? Or an enchanted item?

Conrad thought about it for a moment. A spell would've required a constant source of magicka to not dissipate after a while, and if that was the case he would've sensed it. At the same time, who would throw away money placing a light in a prison cell?

It didn't make sense—

He heard someone clear their throat to his left.

Conrad's head snapped towards the sound, or at least he wanted it to. The drugs rendered the movement incredibly slow.

He found himself staring at a man that he was sure hadn't been there before.

A short, old man with white robes and a strangely-shaped red hat.

Notes:

Omake time:

"Pein," the voice said, echoing in the dark chamber.

The Akatsuki's nominal leader was able to see Madara's shape, sitting on his throne. He gave the ancient and powerful Uchiha a courtly nod.

"What news do you have for—" Madara started, only to stop himself as a blue dot of light entered the room without a sound. "OH NOT AGAIN! TAKE IT OUT TAKE IT OUT!"

Pein raised one of his eyebrows in confusion, as he watched one of the most dangerous shinobi in existence squirming as he tried to escape a tiny light that seemed to follow all his movements.

Chapter 8: Photos, Drawings and Memories

Chapter Text

Sarutobi Hiruzen had prepared himself for multiple worst-case scenarios he had imagined over the past few weeks.

However, the more they found out about the lights that were able to track the Hiraishin seals, the more worried he had become.

For one thing, he suspected Iwa’s involvement, as they had a history of antagonism towards Konoha—to say the least—and Minato himself. Finding out that the Tsuchikage was as confused as he was about the nature of the phenomena had only brought about more worry.

Dealing with unknown dangers was not something that a wise man, shinobi or not, was eager to do. Oh, it could be done, it would be done, if it was deemed necessary, but it wasn’t something to take lightly.

Then, while one of his best ANBU teams was tracking the—moving—source of the lights, his former student had sent a quickly-written report, complete with attached evidence, regarding a strange-looking ship that had anchored on the Earth Country’s shores.

A ship similar to another one that his students had stumbled upon thirty… eight years ago? Or was it thirty-seven?

A ship that, unlike the previous one, was still manned by weirdly-dressed men that had begun bartering for supplies with the locals. Paying in good silver, from what Jiraiya had written. And being cheated on the prices quite a bit as well.

Being tricked into buying cheap merchandize at bloated prices notwithstanding, the Sandaime was ready to bet his pipe that it had came from the same land Minato had come from—whenever that may have been. Not being able to give the young man more information about his origins was just one item on his long list of regrets, yet no matter the map, library or archive he had checked over the years, he had found nothing.

After Minato’s death, he had given up. With Minato gone and the village in disarray, there was no point in chasing old ghosts.

Now though, a ship coming—probably—from the same distant shores had appeared just as someone had figured out how to track Minato’s seals.

Hiruzen had not kept his village safe from certain doom by believing in coincidence.

He had to admit that when he had been informed of the mission’s success and the capture of the parties responsible, he had dared to feel a little relief. The team would bring them back to Konoha and questions could be asked.

Using any possible means deemed necessary to ensure the gain of the answers.

Of course, Sarutobi was an old fool to expect things to be that easy. You didn’t survive as a shinobi for so long by hoarding large amounts of good karma, at least not usually.

He struck a match on the cell’s wall and slowly lit his pipe, eyes not moving from the prisoner’s own.

There were differences, of course.

The man in front of him was older, three scars were running on the right side of his face and he seemed to cultivate an appreciation for facial hair.

Even so, the resemblance was uncanny.

The eyes, though… those eyes were completely different.

Minato's eyes had always been kind, warm and caring, unless the person under their gaze was a danger to the village. Then they turned cold, made of steel and you just knew the man was going to do anything in his power to stop you.

The stranger's eyes reminded Sarutobi of an old soldier, a man that had seen too many things and had carried too many sorrows and regrets. There was also something that he couldn't really place, but it could've been because of the drugs keeping him subdued..

He also seemed more interested into the light bulb than him, for some reason.

There were other differences as well, which confused Sarutobi a little more.

Posture, body language and mannerism. Everything was wrong, the most un-shinobi he had seen in a prisoner whose capture had required the effort of a whole ANBU team.

He would've almost bought it at face-value. Almost.

“Let’s try this again, shall we?” he asked, not thinking that anything would’ve changed since the last attempt. “I am Sarutobi Hiruzen, the Sandaime Hokage. As you may have understood by now, you’re a prisoner of Konoha.”

At the sound of his voice the stranger looked straight at him once again, staring at him for a few seconds while visibly trying to balance his body, still numbed by the narcotic.

“Look, old man. I told you already, I don’t understand anything of what you’re saying,” the blond said in a tired tone. Sarutobi could understand most of the sounds but they made no logical sense to him.

He had tried in the last hour to ask the obvious questions to the man, but he had always answered in an unintelligible way.

The Sandaime was not a linguist, but he didn’t need to be to realize that this was not a weird-sounding accent. It was a completely different language. An unknown one.

While everything seemed to point at some unknown group from outside the known lands, he couldn't dismiss the chance that this was an incredibly contrived plot.

For all he knew Orochimaru—who was very aware of a few certain facts about Minato’s origins—could’ve been responsible.

"Bet you can't understand me either,” the man's gruff voice said. “Otherwise I would ask about those three magelins of mine."

The tone the stranger had used was detached, almost callous. Yet there was something hidden behind it.

Concern.

Was the stranger feeling concern for himself, or for his younger companions though?

"Pity," the Sandaime said, deciding that it was time to throw a little bait for testing the waters. "I was hoping you could tell us why you were tracking Minato's seals..."

At the mention of the Yondaime's name, the man's eyes shot towards him, comprehension clearly visible in them.

So, there was at least one word he understood. Which didn't really make sense.

How could someone from outside the Elemental Nations know the first name of the Yondaime Hokage, since it was Hiruzen that had given it to him? Or even know about the Hiraishin, for that matter. There was also the matter of how he had found one of those kunai, as well.

Ignoring the Minato lookalike, Sarutobi dismissed himself and his form exploded in a puff of smoke.

Back in the Hokage's office, the real Sandaime stopped reading some documents concerning the upcoming exams when he had the sudden idea of letting the original deal with the headache he was feeling.

He was still for a second before collecting his thoughts. Clone memory feedback could get confusing sometimes.

Sarutobi pinched his nose with a groan, momentarily forgetting about the stack of papers. Why did this have to get more and more complicated by the minute?

"Alright," he sighed placing the documents on the top of a neatly stacked pile. “Time to deal with this and get answers, no matter what.”

Quickly getting a hold of a blank sheet of paper and a few modules, the old Hokage started to scribble some specifications about the course of action in the prisoners' interrogations.

Specifically, adding a few unusual, rarely needed procedures.

Conrad blinked as the old man disappeared, seemingly exploding in a thick whiff of smoke.

He had seen a lot of strange things in his travels—and that was the greatest understatement of the Fourth Era—but this was new even to him.

Some kind of local spell, maybe? The old man really looked like the classic figure of the old mage, with robes, weird hat and all.

Oh great. Now he was rambling on his own. Whatever the masked bastards had given to him, it really made it difficult to focus.

Since he didn't have anything better to do, he could as well get his thoughts in order as he waited for its effects to wear down.

He was a prisoner, that was a fact. The cell and the chains were a big giveaway.

The manacles needed a special mention though. There were some runes inscribed all around them, and if he looked at them closely he could see the faint, ghostly glow that they were emitting at regular intervals. He felt like a fool for not noticing it sooner.

Those bracelets, or to be more specific those runes, were sucking away his magicka.

Not completely, thank the Nines. It seemed that the ratio to which he was being depleted was slightly inferior to the one at which his magicka reserves were replenishing themselves.

Starting to throw magic without care as he usually did would leave him seriously depleted though.

Even if he was an untalented enchanter at best, he would've really liked to study how they worked. Containing spellcasters was always a problem back at home, unless you restrained them completely. Or broke their hands, or resorted to even more... drastic methods if you wanted to be sure.

He considered himself lucky that they had limited his bindings to just these pair of glorified shackles.

They itched a lot, tough. Which was terrible.

Focus. You’re not senile yet, as nice as that would be. Focus.

Tapping to his magical energies wasn't different from the usual, manacles or not.

He could feel all the living beings around his cell. There were many, a few dozens at least. Some lingered around—guards? Other prisoners?—but there was a noticeable coming and going of people, especially above him.

Probably a keep's prison or a similar place, if he had to make an educated guess.

Even if he had left his cell using his magic or the Thu'um—thank goodness they hadn't gagged him—there was no way to tell where his students were. He didn’t stand a chance trying to look for them, especially if the guards were the masked freaks that had ambushed him in the forest.

No; Conrad knew that this would take subtlety, much more than he was used to.

What really worried him was that the old man had said something about Minato. The way his luck went, the man probably had an ancient grudge against his brother.

Hopefully they wouldn’t let him starve at least.

The tension in the room was palpable to every one of the people that had recently passed through it.

So palpable, in fact, even the villagers had started to gossip about what was troubling the shinobi of their village.

In truth, only the higher ranking individuals of the village were aware of the whole situation, though their subordinates had noticed that some had expressed their concern in the privacy of their own homes.

The rumor mill had done the rest.

The old Kage sighed, looking out over his village from his office window. He knew that the stories whispered on the marketplaces, bars and homes were either completely made up, or exaggerations of reality. He couldn't help but frown at the thought that just a bit too many were about the condition of his spine.

"Tsuchikage-sama...?" his secretary called meekly, daring to get Oonoki's attention after a few minutes of silence.

He turned towards his audience, the best shinobi of Iwagakure, who were all waiting for his decision on this delicate matter.

The investigation had led to nothing, even when he had sent his own teams beyond the border. Except for the discovery of an abandoned campsite. A campsite that had been attacked by shinobi.

The attackers had been good at concealing their traces, but Iwa-nins were not famous for their earth-based techniques for nothing. Creating rock spikes or throwing giant boulders at the enemy was just one of the many possible uses.

While the squad's tracker had not being able to discern everything that had transpired in that place, it was clear what direction the winning party had left toward, taking prisoners with them.

Konoha.

Which meant that whatever answers he may had hoped to get about this "Yellow Flash Sightings" were now somewhere behind the gates of their long-term adversaries.

Tree-hugging bastards.

"Are you sure that it was him?" the Tsuchikage asked, talking to the leader of the squad that had the closest contact with their target.

"Quite certain, Tsuchikage-sama," the kunoichi, Gareki Ishina said.

"Quite, you say? Do you mean that you have some doubts?" Oonoki asked, frowning. The jonin finched visibly at this, but didn't reply, avoiding the Kage's eyes.

The Tsuchikage knew that the woman was a loyal kunoichi, a veteran of the Third Shinobi War to boot, which meant that her opinion on this matter was highly valued. Sadly it seemed that her recent experience had awakened way too unpleasant memories.

Especially those involving the Yondaime Hokage. Still, there were more important matters than a jonin suffering from post-traumatic disorder at stake, here.

"Well? We’re not getting younger, girl. Out with it!” the old Kage pressed on.

"I... I can't say for certain, sir,” the woman replied, quickly regaining her composure. “The man was old enough, he resembled the Y—that man a lot but more importantly…Those eyes, sir,” she finally said, frowning. “I saw them as he threw one of those kunai towards my squad. I would never mistake those eyes."

“The reports collected from various villages describe this man wearing a suit of armour, though,” one of Oonoki’s advisers said, seeing the discrepancy. “And neither he nor his companions were wearing any identifying insegna, or standard shinobi gear.”

“It may have been an undercover mission,” one of the other ninja in the room butted in. “Masquerading as mercenary escorting some customers, or something like that.”

“Why go in an undercover mission if you start to cast a jutsu that fires multiple lights in the Land of Fire’s direction?!” the councilor exclaimed in outrage. “That’s preposterous!”

“Enough,” Oonoki said, immediately silencing the argument before it could start. “No matter how we look at it or try to rationalize this, we need answers. Even if the trail seems to go straight into the home of our enemies.”

“I volunteer for the task, Tsuchikage-sama!” Ishina declared, taking a step forward. The Tsuchikage looked straight into her eyes, but she didn’t break eye contact.

“No,” he said firmly, considering the kunoichi’s past. “You’re too involved, you may be a liability for the mission.”

“I insist, sir,” she replied, surprising everyone in the room. The woman had guts, nobody would deny that.

“Oh? So, you think you can do better than me, youngster?” Oonoki asked in a mocking tone. “Do you think that you can take a decision for the best interest of the village?”

She better had a good reason to defy him, otherwise he would send her to teach the brats at the Academy.

“No, sir. I believe that not sending me with the team would be a great a waste of our assets.”

“A waste of our assets? You have a high opinion of yourself,” one of her fellow jonin said scoffing.

“Excuse me?” she exclaimed in genuine surprise, frowning at her colleague. “I’m the only one here who—”

“Just because you ran as everyone was—”

“Don’t you dare, you—”

“Stand down, both of you,” Oonoki ordered, defusing yet another argument before it could turn into a scuffle. “Gareki-san, you better tell me one good reason to send you on this mission, and do it now.”

"Sir with all due respect, if we take in consideration the worst-case scenario, I have the most experience to deal with it,” she proclaimed, fully confident of her abilities. “I know what to expect and I will not be a liability to this mission. And more importantly, I should be sent because I will bring my team back alive, no matter what.”

“I see,” the Kage muttered, nodding solemnly. “Very well then, I suppose you should get acquainted with your genin at once if we want to be sure that our teams will be accepted.”

“My… my what?” the kunoichi asked in confusion, her confident expression evaporating at the unexpected news, much to the old man’s amusem*nt.

“The Chunin Exams are an international event, after all,” Oonoki said, a smug grin forming on his face, before turning towards his secretary. “Procure me a list of the youngest shinobi among our forces of any rank. If they find even a single trace of that blond bastard they'll report back immediately!”

"Isn’t it strange?" Naruto asked, slumped on the bridge's railing in an incredibly bored tone. He had spent the last hours pacing up and down the usual meeting spot, before finally give up because of the boredom.

"What’s strange?" Sakura asked from the other side of the bridge. "Kakashi-sensei is always late."

"No, not that," the blond said, looking at the bright and cloudless sky. "I was thinking about those lights. The ones from before that everyone was worked up over."

"What about them?"

"Well, they scared the whole village and kept coming for a while, but then they stopped all of the sudden," he murmured.

"Isn't that a good thing?" the girl asked. "I mean, it was obviously a jutsu… even if I never read about something like that in our books..."

“Of course it’s good," Naruto answered turning quickly towards the kunoichi. "It just bothers me how nobody is going to tell us anything about it!”

“If you’re so curious, why don’t you try to ask?” Sakura proposed.

“I tried to ask but I couldn’t even see the Old Man lately, he’s busy with something," he said, pouting as he laid his back against the railing, his hands coming up to lace themselves behind his head. "And neither Kakashi-sensei or Iruka-sensei would tell me.”

“If those lights have stopped, it’s probably because the responsible was dealt with,” Sasuke suddenly said, without looking towards his teammates.

“What do you mean, ‘dealt with’?” Naruto asked, looking at the Uchiha in confusion.

Instead of answering, Sasuke slowly turned towards Naruto and stared at him coldly. The blond’s eyes widened in realization, and so did Sakura’s.

“Way to ruin the mood for the day, Sasuke.”

“Excuse me if I think that an enemy was probably killed. Idiot.”

“Hey!”

“Maybe… maybe they have been killed, but don’t you think that the Hokage would want to find out why they did it instead?”

"You know, cute little genin shouldn't poke their noses in stuff that doesn't concern them," a familiar voice said behind them.

"YOU'RE LATE!" Naruto and Sakura immediately shouted, getting quickly over their sensei's sudden arrival.

"A nice lady asked me for directions, and—"

"LIAR!" the two loud twelve years olds yelled, interrupting the older shinobi before they could hear whatever half-baked excuse he prepared this time. Sasuke instead just sneered at his general direction.

"Alright, we had our fun. Time to start the morning training though. We've wasted enough time."

"And who's fault is that?" Naruto mumbled, glancing at him accusingly. It seemed that even Sasuke was agreeing with the blond, for once.

"After training, we'll go ask for some mission at the Hokage Tower," the jonin kept explaining.

"Oh great. More D-rank chores," the blonde groaned, while his teammates flinched at the perspective of another trash-collecting, fence-painting, cat-catching or other task a random villager needed that day.

"Maybe we could do some extra physical conditioning as well, once today's mission is over," Kakashi finished, taking his favourite book out of his jacket vest. A little exercise would do the kids good.

"What?! But—"

"NARUTO, SHUT UP!” Sakura scolded him. “Don't make it worse than it is!"

Kakashi ignored his students' antics as he led them towards their usual training ground, but he secretly understood why they were curious about the mysterious event. To tell the truth, he would've liked to know as well given the mysterious jutsu had something to do with his own sensei, or at least, his sensei’s signature technique.

The investigation was still in-progress though, and having been declared a S-rank emergency, it wasn't his place to question the Sandaime directly.

Although he could pester Tenzo a little about the prisoners his team had taken back to the village, once his team had been entered in the upcoming exams.

Conrad was sitting on a chair made of metal, of all things. It was incredibly uncomfortable, and he had the suspicion that it had been designed to be that way. On the other side of a polished table made of the same material, were two people: a man and a woman.

Besides the old man with a goatee, they were the first faces he had seen since waking up in his cell, and they were glaring at him like he was trash.

The man with the bandana was mostly unremarkable, except for the strong chin and the scars covering his face.

The woman, on the other hand, besides being very attractive, had purple hair.

Purple. Hair.

A dark shade, but still…

Purple.

Conrad had never seen—or heard—of someone with such a hair colour. It was probably dyed, but still… who dyed their hair purple?

The only accessory they both wore, besides pouches, was a metallic plate on their foreheads, similar to the one he had found on that skull. It had a different symbol though, which reminded him of a badly-drawn snail.

Hair colour and snails aside, they both gave him the same impression. They were dangerous and used to situations like this.

At the corners of the small room instead, there were four of the masked guards. They may as well have been carved in stone from how still they were standing, but he could feel the barely held hostility against him.

It reminded him of that time he had stumbled upon a reunion of some Stormcloaks’ veterans by pure chance, a few years ago. This time though, there was no mead.

The room itself was very plain, besides one of those not-magical bulbs of light on the ceiling and a large mirror on one side.

He had no idea what purpose the mirror served, given the rest of the room, but he remained wary of it.

The now named Scars and Purple exchanged a quick glance. Then, the man took a thin pile of parchment out of a bag, each sheet no wider than his palm. He placed one on the center of the table.

Conrad's mind immediately took a double take as he saw it. On it was a perfect reproduction of the swarm of the tracking lights generated by his clairvoyance spell.

Then, Scar placed another paper right besides the first, this one picturing a single light passing close to a panicked person in a weird outfit.

Then another one, showing a different scene. And another one, and another one again.

Why would anyone paint that? Who would waste their time painting that to such detail?!?

Although, after a careful look, he had to admit that whoever the artist was was really good. There were no brush marks or defects in the paint, and the surface was completely smooth.

Even if Conrad appreciated the art, albeit in such a strange form, he couldn't help but wonder what the point of it was.

“What’s with this guy?” the purple-haired woman said, arching an eyebrow. “It’s like he’s never seen a photo before.”

"We know you can't understand us, so that makes interrogating you quite difficult, no matter what ... measures we would employ," Scars said in a low, gruff tone, ignoring his companion and not breaking eye contact with Conrad.

The Nord had no idea what the man had said, but it sounded like he was trying to be intimidating.

How cute.

Sadly for him, he couldn’t hold a candle to most of the beings he had the displeasure of talking with. Especially because he couldn't grasp the unfamiliar language at all.

"We can still make you understand that we mean business though," the woman said, taking the remaining small paintings from her fellow interrogator and laying them on the top of the others with a wicked smile.

Conrad's blood froze.

Just like the previous ones, the image was perfect down to the most minuscule detail, almost like if a piece of the real world had been trapped on the small paper.

Ta'Sava was staring right at him with a worried and yet curious expression, his ears pointed forwards.

Sven had been painted mid-yelling, one finger pointed towards who looked at the picture. At his hands, manacles similar to Conrad's own were clearly visible.

Beta's eyes instead were red and puffy, like she had been crying for a long time, and she looked on the verge of one of those panic attacks she used to have as Conrad met her in the College.

And finally, the last painting, showing what was clearly a set of torturer's tools gleaming in the painting's light.

Conrad saw red.

Only when he felt his shackles restraining him he noticed that he had lunged for the woman, hands aimed at her neck.

And now there was a blade pointed at the Nord's throat, heart, lung and liver, one for each of the masked guards present in the room.

Scars and Purple hadn't even moved, not even flinched.

"Well... that's different. I'm pretty sure the Yondaime didn't have anything like that," Scars commented.

"Could it be that this guy has...?" the woman said hurriedly, pointing a finger at his face, a frown on hers. What was her problem?

Oh right.

Anger, lack of control, slitted pupils. Same old, same old.

Damn, he needed a drink. It had been way too long.

"No, there are no seals of any kind on his body. It may be a weird bloodline, though," the scarred man mumbled, looking at him pensively.

"Don't talk about me like I'm not here, you filthy—" Conrad yelled at them, only to stop the long and creative chain of insults he was on the point of shout as he felt one of the blades prickle against his skin, having been pressed against it a little more firmly.

Biting his tongue, Conrad moved his gaze from the smirking woman to the paintings of his foolish students.

Even if he tried to use magic or the dragon shouts, he would get skewered like a pig. That’d be no help to himself or his younger companions. Or his own well being.

Slowly, very slowly, he moved back to his seat, the guards’ weapons following his movements and yet not wavering from his vital spots. These guys were good.

He really hated them. Damn their skill and unnatural speed.

Finally sitting down, he allowed himself to growl a little while giving a bad eye at the two people on the other side of the table.

They didn't seem to care. Bastards.

The guards didn't remove their weapons for a few seconds, just to be sure that he had calmed down. Apparently they were satisfied by seeing him boiling in rage inwardly though because they finally went back to their places around the room without saying a word.

Conrad really, really hated feeling so powerless.

“Very well, now that you know how things are Purple chirped, reaching for the insides of her own coat.

Conrad clenched his fists, expecting another bad surprise.

Which turned out to be another stack of sheets, this time white as snow and around the size of a book. And a short, sharpened stick.

Conrad was at a loss of words. What was that all about?

His confusion was probably showing because the woman smirked a little before moving the stick on the paper, which produced some scratching noises.

The stick had a black point, and to the mage's amazement, a thin black line appeared where the stick passed. It didn't seem to be ink, maybe it was charcoal? No, the line was too clean and neat.

An instrument able to write so quickly and without having to stop to refill the ink like a quill... what would have he done to examine such a thing in a less hostile environment.

Purple finished her work and showed him the page with a grin.

Conrad was wrong, now he was at a loss of words. He wasn't even sure what he was looking at.

Seven runes of unknown meaning were present on the white surface, forming a column of single... letters? He couldn't make head or tails of them. It was then that he realized a terrible truth.

In this continent, he was technically an illiterate. For some reason, the notion of not being able to read was way scarier than that time he had dined with Sheogorath.

"Mitarashi Anko," the woman said, pointing at the symbols and then at herself, still grinning. The Nord, still a bit shocked by the concept he had just grasped on could only stare in confusion, not understanding what was the point of this.

After a few seconds the woman tried again, pointing at herself and at the runes, spelling the sound of each of them. Either she was asking for something or she was introducing herself.

But why would an interrogator introduce herself, especially if they had immediately resorted to threats instead of playing good guard and bad guard?

Frustrated by his lack of response, the woman just went back to writing on the white sheet for a few minutes. Her companion just remained silent for the whole time.

"Mitarashi Anko," she repeated slowly, like she was speaking to a particularly dumb child. That was not shocking to Conrad.

There was a humanoid figure scribbled besides the column of runes, but... it was incredibly wrong.

The head was oversized, as big as the rest of the figure's body. The eyes were bigger than they should've been, there was no visible nose and no lips around the grinning mouth. The limbs instead were small, and pathetically puny to look at.

Was this woman just bad at drawing or was it a peculiar style used in Akavir in these days?

It vaguely resembled her though, so at least he knew that she WAS trying to introduce herself.

"Anko?" he tried, pointing towards the woman.

"Yes, yes. Right. Whatever, let's just get going with this farce," said Anko muttered, while nodding. "Ibiki," she said pointed a thumb towards her silent partner, who gave a barely perceptible nod. After this she scribbled a few more runes, always on a column.

Conrad was ready to bet one thousand septims that it probably was the man's name.

It didn't take a genius to figure out what was supposed to happen now.

"Con—" he started, before remembering something. Hadn't Minato said how in these lands, they said the surname before the name? Yes, something like that.

Still sounded weird to him though.

"Harissen, Conrad," he said, pointing towards himself with his restrained hands.

She repeated his name as she wrote it, butchering the pronunciation spectacularly.

It was a start, at least.

They were marching.

By hundreds, they were marching through the unfamiliar landscape, because their Kage had ordered so.

Among them there were veterans and rising stars among their village's ranks alike.

To ensure their village's victory, they would destroy their enemies without regret.

Then the screams started.

A flare of yellow, and a dozen comrades would die in the blink of an eye, mowed down like so many blades of grass.

Bodies were torn apart, gushing blood like discarded petals as blue spinning orbs mangled through flesh, muscle and bone alike.

Friends, allies and rivals were dying without even being able to defend themselves, attacked from an enemy that seemed to arrive from every direction at once.

Then those blue eyes locked onto her—

Ishina suddenly woke up, her hand tightened around one of her kunai.

Above her, she could see the canopy of the stars, and slowly looking around herself she recognized the spot where she and her team had made camp for the night.

The kunoichi let out the breath she hadn't realized she'd been holding.

Just a dream.

A dream of a distant memory.

The woman was aware that she wouldn't have been able to go back to sleep though, so she rose from her bed roll.

Her teammates, her 'genin', were all asleep besides the sentry standing on watch at a moderate distance.

They were not really genin though, but they were all young enough to pass for them. They had been selected taking in consideration their age, their skill and more importantly the fact that none of them were in any Bingo book Iwa knew of.

Which of course had led to—

"Gareki-sempai?" a girl's voice asked from the edge of the camp. "Is something troubling you?"

"I'm fine, Kurotsuchi. Go to sleep, I'll take over your shift," Ishina said, getting closer to the younger kunoichi. "That's an order," she added, seeing the girl's hesitation.

Kurotsuchi merely nodded before moving back to the camp and rejoining her teammates, while Ishina had taken her place, she couldn't help but wonder about her charges.

Powerful, well-trained enough to have a chance in this mission, and yet young enough to pass as a genin and not famous enough in the shinobi world to be recognized at a first glance.

That had been the criteria for choosing the fake genin. Which the Tsuchikage's niece satisfied completely.

The fact that it added more weight on Ishina's shoulders was left unsaid.

She had no intention to fail, though.

In only two more days they would reach Konoha and then the mission would start for real. She would protect her charges.

And find the truth.

She just hoped to have at least a chance to get a shot at that cursed blond, if he was still alive.

Conrad sneezed.

It had been happening a lot, lately.

Just one more reason to hate this place. The food had helped in that as well, but he supposed that no matter how foreign, prison food was still bad everywhere.

He was still not sure why the guards visibly flinched when he pierced his food with those stick he was given instead of a fork or spoon, though.

"Either someone is thinking about you, or you're catching a cold," Anko said jokingly. Since he didn't understand anything of it, whatever she found funny was lost on him.

The last day—judging by the number of meals brought to him, since there were no windows that he could use to judge the passage of time—had been very boring and yet stressful.

Most of the time had been invested into working with his interrogators to create a way to communicate, although it was not very complex and most of what was "said" had to be guessed with charades or visual aids.

And still he hadn't been able to find out more about this place or the magelings, besides the fact that they were the only reason he was collaborating with his captors.

He had only been “told” that they were imprisoned in the same place. If the woman's weird drawings could be trusted, of course.

Because judging by them, his students were either in various cells or inside some boxes with a lock.

This day had been the first of real questioning. For his part, Conrad had tried to answer all at the best of his abilities, if it was possible. Even if drawing with both hands chained was not exactly easy, he was sure that what he had showed them was enough to understand.

So far he had shown them a rough map of Tamriel and explained that he was a Nord, using the most typical Nord imagery he could think of. Who said that stereotypes were not useful?

His interrogators seemed confused by this though. Neither the map or the other drawings seemed to mean much to them, actually.

Could it be that they didn’t know of the Tamrielic people at all? A lot could’ve changed from the times of their attacks against it.

Tamriel knew of Akavir, why shouldn't it be the same for the Akaviri?

True, the details their invasions on Tamriel’s soil were not common knowledge among the general populace, and the few known facts about the continent had so far—in Conrad’s personal experience—revealed themselves to be very probably a giant pile of intellectual garbage.

Before he could try to imagine a possible explanation though, Ibiki placed one of the paintings he had been shown the first time. The one with the light that was moving through the sky.

Conrad sighed. It seemed to be really important to them, for some reason that he couldn’t fathom.

Explaining it to them would’ve been tricky though.

Picking up the writing tool that he had no idea how to name yet—albeit he was partial for brush-stick—he started to draw doodles trying to imitate the local artistic style.

He sketched a miniature version of himself no bigger than his thumb, being sure to make it clear that he was casting a spell.

Classic mage doing his thing pose, with staff in his other hand. Then he added a ball of light similar to the one made by the spell. Even a child would understand that.

Under it, he made another sketch, this time him following the light, followed by quickly-drawn representations of his students.

Seemed pretty simple to him.

The expressions on Anko and Ibiki's faces as they looked at each other were not encouraging though.

"At least we know that the cat-boy is real," the scarred man muttered. "Doesn't really help, though."

"Can't we just give this guy to Inoichi and get over with it?"

"If mind probing was that reliable, the whole Yamanaka clan would never get out of T&I," Ibiki said, almost shoving a new painting on Conrad's face. “Tell us about this.”

It was the strange knife he had been guided to by one of the straying clairvoyance spell.

Because Minato's runes were inscribed on its handle. It seemed to be important for these people.

Deadly important, if they were threatening to torture kids because of it.

And not knowing if these people had some grudge against his brother, trying to protect the magelings was a gamble at best.

If he managed to survive this, he would add it to the list of reasons to punch Minato for.

To explain why he had that knife though, he would have to start from the beginning.

Better avoid the part with the almost-death experience in the Soul Cairn though. One thing was answering questions, but just attempting to explain that would just create a lot more.

So he decided to start with his meeting with Minato, by drawing a miniature copy of himself standing besides a miniature copy of himself without a beard. And a cape with flames at the end of it. Or was it a coat?

Whatever.

This seemed to confuse the two interrogators, but he didn't pay them any mind as he kept going with his "explanation", starting to draw another set of figures.

Not being sure how to explain that Minato had messed with his head using this method, Conrad opted to draw Minato in a similar pose to the one he had used for his spell, and some lines to represent the spell around his own head. It wasn't the Alduin's Wall but it would do.

Finally, besides the four figures, he sketched the runes that Minato had planted inside his brain and for which he wasted months at the College of—

“IT’S A SEAL!” Anko yelled in an alarmed tone. What was her—

Something hit him. Even if it hadn't hurt more than a bee's sting, he could feel something going through his neck, as a numbing sensation spread through his body incredibly quickly. A poison? Were they killing him after obtaining what they wanted?

He felt his eyes becoming heavy, but as his head started spinning his gaze fell on the woman’s spreaded arm.


Conrad tried to rise his arms to fry the purple-haired harlot but it was a losing battle against whatever poison he had been hit with.

“Bitch,” he gurgled lamely before losing consciousness, certain that he had failed his students.

After several minutes of pondering, Sarutobi decided that he needed an aspirin.

Also, he had decided to look for a worthy successor once the exams were over. He was really getting too old for this.

"So, there are no surgical scars or anything that would suggest that the prisoner's features have been altered to resemble the Yondaime's?" he asked, hiding at the best of his abilities the tiredness from his voice.

"No, sir,” the reporting chunin replied, skimming through the report from the labs. “Nothing at all... although we found plenty of scars on the rest of the body. None of them match any of the wounds received in action listed on Namikaze-sama's files."

"What about the DNA tests?” Sarutobi wondered. “Any news on that front?"

"The lab is asking time for more time, actually,” the shinobi explained timidly. “They would like to run more tests to assure that the results they had so far are not a fluke."

"What are the results for that?" the Hokage asked, already dreading the answer.

"... positive, sir," the chunin replied, his voice no louder than a whisper.

For a whole minute there was absolute silence inside the office. The chunin didn’t want to dare to speak, and Sarutobi was too busy hearing the last, small piece of logic in the whole mess that this investigation had become shatter in tiny fragments.


Yes, he definitely needed to find a candidate to substitute him.

"Tell them to check for dental records and fingerprints as well,” he sighed heavily, not bothering to hide how badly the news had been for him. “Better be sure. Is there anything else?"

"Just a note about how those vials that the prisoners were transporting left the eggheads baffled, sir. But they're still analyzing those and—"

"I see, keep me posted. You may go," the Hokage interrupted, quickly dismissing his subordinate who was very happy to leave the report on the desk and leave the office.

Once he was alone, Sarutobi allowed himself to pinch his nose in consternation. It had been a very, very stressful day.

Just before hearing this report he had received an official letter from Oonoki of Both Scales, the Sandaime Tsuchikage, concerning Iwa's last-minute attendance to the Chunin Exams, even if with just a single team. Literally, since if his patrols were to be believed, said team would arrive barely on time to register.

Being an international event created to show the villages' abilities to their most important customers—and secretly to substitute war among Hidden Villages—he really had no valid reason to deny them, unless he hoped to strain the already tense relation between Konoha and Iwa.

The fact that Oonoki would send a team to such an event held in a rival village after the capture of their latest "guests" was no coincidence, even if there was no evidence about it. Oonoki was not being subtle, though.

Thank goodness, there were no teams from Kumo. The last things he needed was more tension at the exams, especially since it would've been a personal matter for the Hyuuga clan.

His mind quickly came back to the issue of the prisoners, though.

He had hoped that by trying to establish a communication with the strangers, maybe even teaching them their language over time, he could get answers.

Instead, things looked ever more grim than before, with more unanswered questions. The oldest prisoner not only looked like Minato and was able to track down the Yondaime's seals, he knew how they were created as well.

Too well.

Granted, Anko may had overdone it since what the man had done was just a simple schematic on a paper sheet but not knowing what the seal was, she had acted for the best.

Sarutobi looked at the sketch on his desk once again. It was crude, quickly done and not-functioning for obvious reasons, but the basics were there. There was no denying it.

The stranger, this... Conrad... knew the Hiraishin no Jutsu.

Why had he not escaped already, he had no idea considering that he may have used the array of seals created by Minato, which ironically had been fully mapped only thanks to that tracking jutsu being used for weeks.

And now he was being told that the man had a DNA that was similar enough to Minato’s to cause panic in Konoha’s labs.

Who was this man? He would’ve liked to believe that a long-lost relative of Minato’s had just stumbled upon their village, but that option was not very feasible considering the knowledge about the jutsu that had granted to Minato the title of “Yellow Flash”.

This required using tougher methods, hoping to get answers quickly. If it turned out that Harissen Conrad knew about the Rasengan, he would not be very surprised.

There was another, more important question though.

Was the man aware of Naruto as well?

"YOU'RE LATE!" two voices yelled as one.

"I was lost on the road of life," a jonin explained lamely.

"LIAR!" was the prompt answer. It was incredible how synched those two could get when they were mad at their sensei.

"This may be a bit sudden but I've nominated you guys for the chunin exams," Kakashi said matter-of-factly, ignoring his students' outrage.

"What did you say—"

"Here's your applications," he said, interrupting his genin by handing them the papers.

"KAKASHI-SENSEI I LOVE YOU!" Naruto squealed in delight, hugging the man with all of his strength.

"Those are just a nomination though," he said once he managed to free himself, "It's up to you if you want to take the exam or not."

Kakashi stopped for a moment to make that sink in. His students were all reading the documents, but Naruto looked like this was the best day of his life.

Having done one small step closer to his dream, it was a given.

"Those who wish to take the exam should sign those papers and turn them in tomorrow, at the room three-hundred and one, that’s all," he quickly finished, before jumping away with a quick goodbye to his genin.

From here on, it was on their hands.

Maybe he could try to pester Tenzo about the prisoners, after all.

Just a little bit.

Conrad woke up sneezing.

While he felt like sh*t, he was really surprised to actually be alive.

The room he had come back to his senses was shrouded in complete darkness, and from the looks of it he was strapped to some chair. Ropes or belts, in addition to those magicka-sucking manacles that he had sported lately. Which were still itching a lot.

All his muscles ached, and his limbs felt like they were made of stone. He couldn't even move his neck properly.

If it hadn't been for his bindings he may have fell from his seat, but he doubted that that was the reason for their presence.

His throat hurt like a bitch, which was kinda fitting considering how he had been injured there. No Thu'um, he would bet on that.

Purple-haired little sh*t. If she or one of her companions had touched one of the magelings' hair, he would raze the whole place on the ground. Not even a building would be spared.

Considering that wasn't even able to lift a hand though, it may be more problematic than expected though.

To complete the picture of how helpless he was, much to his dismay, he was feeling like he was building a fever as well.

Maybe it was a side-effect of whatever narcotic the woman had used on him. Difficult to say.

What had gone wrong though? That reaction seemed a bit of an overkill. What did those runes mean—

He sneezed again, louder than before.

Maybe it wasn't an effect of a lingering substance, thinking about it—

There was a sound like snapping fingers, and a bright light exploded above his head, blinding him temporarily.

He heard a door being opened and hastily closed again. Someone had entered the room.

Conrad forced his eyes opened, and remained baffled by what he saw.

Standing in front of him, wearing one of those snail-marked headbands, was another Nord.

Or at least a man that could've passed for one.

Was he a castaway that had gone native? The descendant of some legionary that had been left behind after the ill-fated "invasion" attempted by the Empire? Or even better, from nordic prisoners taken during one of the Akaviri invasions?

Conrad would've liked to ask if he would've been able to talk. And speak the local tongue.

One more thing to write in the punch-Minato-in-the-face list, he supposed.

As soon as their eyes met, the long-haired Nord started to do some gestures with his hands.

Conrad was knocked unconscious once more, this time without much of a resistance from his part.

Inoichi was surrounded by snow and howling winds.

Unusual, but this was not the weirdest thing that had happened in his career of mind-walker.

Each mind was different after all, shaped by the experiences and the personality of its owner. Entering inside one to examine the memories that formed it was not like assuming the control of an enemy during a battle, something for which his clan was renown to.

It was a gradual, and potentially dangerous process. For both the person entering the mind and the one subject it. Especially the latter. If too pressure was put on the mind, consequences could be expected.

The Yamanaka examined his surroundings. He was not inside the mind yet, merely on its outskirts, represented here by a barren land covered by snow, a never-ending blizzard.

In the distance, though, there was a light, red and warm, barely noticeable because of the storm. His senses though were showing it clearly to him: that was were his entrance was.

He started walking towards the light, not being in a rush and ignoring the snowflakes hitting him. Cold had never bothered him anyway, and besides that, it was not real.

As he got closer, the wind seemed to calm down slightly,and the light revealed itself to be an old-styled torch attached besides the entrance of a cave that seemed to sprout out of nowhere, little more than a gap in the the ground.

It seemed that his way inside the man that looked like a badly aged Minato was a literal one.

Inoichi hesitated for a moment, then he grabbed the torch before starting his descent into the steep and dark hole.

The cave was very narrow, its cold and rocky walls forming a passage that kept descending down, almost like a drill, going deeper into the mind’s bowels. Which was not surprising since it was just a projection of the entrance created by his jutsu.

When he arrived at the end of the slope though, he stopped, taken back by what had been waiting for him.

The slide gave space to a small room, clearly not natural in the making. A massive door, made of rock and covered with elaborated decorations and flanked by two lit braziers was blocking his way.

Three rings, one inside the other, were clearly visible on the door and each of them were sporting a different symbol.

No visible lock, or hinges.

Inoichi was not surprised to find some form of defense, it wasn’t unknown to find obstacles created by either training or previous tampering—especially in victims of brainwashing.

Finding something able to actually block his passage just as he had started to enter properly in the man’s head? That was something else.

Mental training to counter interrogations? Defenses created with the use of fuuinjutsu? A particularly disciplined mind? Anko and Ibiki’s report mentioned a possible unknown doujutsu as well, could this be related? Those were all possible causes.

He was not the leader of the Yamanaka clan for nothing, though. No imaginary door would stop him.

From behind the one-way mirror, Sarutobi was intently observing the ongoing interrogation.

Not that there was much to actually observe, since the prisoner was unconscious and Inoichi was in a status of trance, wandering the other man’s mind. Still he wanted to present, even if concealed behind a thin panel of glass, and hear the Yamanaka’s report as soon as the mind probing was over.

The door behind him opened, and he could hear the steps as a man walking with the help of a cane.

“Is it true?” the newcomer asked, stopping besides him, focused on the scene behind the mirror as well.

“I’m not even going to ask how you already found out, Danzo,” the Hokage said without sparing a glance to his old comrade.

"To think that the Yondaime was a foreigner... how could you choose him as your successor while being aware of this is beyond me."

"Foreigner? Minato knew nothing of his origins, just like us. He grew up here, he lived here and fought for the village and to defend its inhabitants. Minato always considered Konoha his home. How does that make him a foreigner?" Sarutobi asked with a small smile, knowing that his old friend couldn't object to that.

"I'll concede that, but he's been dead for years. What about him, instead. He is not someone that has lived in Konoha, and from what I've heard..." Danzo said, letting his words linger in the small room.

"He may not even have lived in the Elemental Nations either," Hiruzen finished for him.

"Yes, I've seen those... maps he drew," the old war hawk mused, drumming his fingers on his cane's handle. "It could be an elaborate ploy. It probably is."

"Don't you think that I suspect as much?" Sarutobi asked, turning slightly towards the other old shinobi.

"Good, that means that you're not senile yet,” the bandaged man scoffed. “What do you plan to do, then?"

"I will wait Inoichi's response. Then... I will act accordingly," Sarutobi told him, looking right in his remaining eye.

Danzo nodded, accepting the Hokage’s decision.

Nothing else was said for the rest of the interrogation.

He was lost.

Not in a literal sense, he knew the way back thanks to the mental link between his projection and his body. If he wanted, he could've just turned right around and back out the way he came to leave.

Inoichi had never seen a mind like this before, though.

It appeared to him as a labyrinthine series of narrow corridors, vast rooms filled with rock thrones and coffins, murals covered in strange glyphs, false ends and stairs that seemed to invite him to go forward, without actually getting closer to his goal.

Could it be that it was because of the different language the stranger spoke? A representation of how different his thoughts may sound to the mind-walker? Or was it something more?

Some parts had been illuminated by torches like the one he was holding or other light sources. Other had been pitch-dark and without its own light, proceeding would've been difficult, to say the least.

Then there were the traps.

"Traitor!" a ghostly voice yelled as the shinobi dived out of a swinging blade's way. Even if he couldn't understand what it meant, he could feel the rage put in the word.

Corridors full of pendulum-like blades, holes that shot barrages of small darts to their target, pressure plates that caused streams of fire to be hurled at him and any sort of contraption that in the real world would've been aimed to maim, cripple or outright kill him.

"Cheer up a little, Conrad. You're a freaking hero now!" another voice said as Inoichi dodged another attack, this one in an almost jovial tone, which was weird since the mind walker had a clear idea about what these things represented inside this mind.

They were memories. Unpleasant ones if he had to take a guess from their appearances.

While he had been tempted to examine them as he proceeded deeper in the mind, he quickly dismissed it after realizing how scattered they were, with no continuation whatsoever.

Memories were normally represented in clusters or grouped by some kind of internal logic, and for good reason. A memory was connected to another, in a long chain of events, emotions and perceptions.

Isolated memories were either forgotten or uncomfortable one. Or even things that a person was forcing himself to forget or not think about.

Being on a timetable, Inoichi couldn't afford to examine all of these. Once his chakra reserves were depleted, he would be forced to leave, so he wanted to find and examine the majority of the stranger's memories instead.

He could've checked those in another session, the man had a lot of—

Something twinkled in the dark, catching the light of his torch. And for once it wasn't a spiked ball on a chain or a serrated disk trying to cut his head off.

Getting closer, he saw that the shining object was a coin laying on the stony floor, like if someone had lost it. Inoichi knelt and picked it up, examining it. It was a perfect round coin, with no holes in the middle, that looked like it was made of gold. There was a man’s face on one side and a winged figure on the other, along with some writings Inoichi couldn’t read.

Briefly wondering why it assumed the aspect of a coin, he concentrated on the memory, using his clan’s techniques to see it as it was his own.

Inoichi found himself staring at a giant of a man, who was looking at him with his arms folded and an annoyed expression emphatized by the giant’s blue eyes. He arrived barely at the man’s gut, and suddenly felt small and vulnerable, but he knew that those were not his own emotions, merely the ones in the memory. There was also a strong sense of… shame?

“I don’t want to hurt someone, Father,” Inoichi said, albeit the language was not his own and he couldn’t understand what he had said. The voice, a child’s voice—a childhood memory, then!—sounded incredibly apologetic.

The giant, that was actually a very large adult, kept staring right at him before sighing. Was this man the prisoner’s father? They had the same eyes, and there were some other resemblances as well.

“Conrad,” the supposed father said, slowly. “We live in a dangerous land, and in dangerous times to boot. One day I may not be around, and you may have to defend yourself.”

The Yamanaka dismissed the vision, and in the blink of an eye he was back in the maze, the coin still in his hand. He needed more recent memories, but was this just another scattered memory or—

Something else twinkling down the hallway caught his attention.

Letting go of the coin in his hand, Inoichi went to inspect the new finding, and wasn't disappointed when it revealed itself to be another memoir. One of the coinage kind.

And beyond that, just a few feet away, there was another one. And another one.

Inoichi smiled. He had finally found a trail.It was just a matter of following it.

It wasn't a difficult task, since as he kept pursuing his target, he seemed to just stumble upon more of them.

Some groups had started to show up, indicating the presence of more complex memories.

Inoichi was advancing along the corridors like a hound, and the core of the prisoner's mind was his prey.

The coins began appearing more and more frequently, indicating that he was getting closer to his goal.

He turned through an open doorway, and froze.

In front of the mind-walker, a vast chamber extended as long as his eye could see. A forest of stone pillars grew from the ground, to disappear in the darkness of the ceiling.

Piles of money, despite filling the room, formed mounds that reminded the Yamanaka of the dunes in the harshest regions of the Wind Country desert.

Inoichi felt no shame in admitting that his jaw had dropped a little at the sight of such riches, even if he knew well that they were not real.

He shouldn't have been surprised by the contents of the mind's core, seeing how the memories had started to appear as coins, but he certainly wasn't expecting to find them in this amount.

The shinobi started to walk among the sea of memories, which glittered at the light of his torch. With each step, a metallic echo was created as the coins shuffled slightly under his feet.

There was not just cash and gold though. He started to notice weapons, shields, helmets placed among the riches, along with other seemingly random items, like bottles or piles of books.

What really impressed him, though, were the bones.

Popping out from the expense of coins there were large skeletal carcasses of some large animal. The closest to him was a skull, big almost as a wagon. It was long, with two large horns starting at his back and a mouth filled with teeth that looked like they could've been used as knives.

He surely wouldn't have liked to see how the beast looked when it was alive, if it was real of course.

Something about these bones didn't convince him, though. They didn't seem to fit in his mind, with its treasure theme.

The coins? One could argue that every precious memory should be treasured. The weapons and other equipment he had seen? They still fit, and could've been violent memories, probably fights. Even the books could fit, because every knowledge was precious, shinobi knew that very well.

However, these bones were completely alien in this mindscape.

Having finally accessed the mind's core, he knew it was time to start to investigate. And the large skull seemed the right place to start with.

Inoichi placed his hand on the skull's snout and reached for it, calling on its true nature.

The change was sudden.

He was not in the vast chamber anymore, instead he was soaring through the sky. He could feel the cold air, the wind around his body and he could feel how glorious it was to… to be alive again.

Before Inoichi could even start to ponder about the sensation, his view made a sudden turn downwards as the memory kept going. There was a large and lush valley under him, and much to Inoichi surprise, he could discern incredibly small details, like the single leaves on the trees, even if he was hundreds of meters above the ground.

Maybe this was the suspected doujutsu? It was like looking through the eyes of a bird of prey.

There was a sound like of leather whipped taut, and the owner of the memory turned like a bird in the sky. A new part of the valley was revealed to him, with a small village at the center.

Which was mostly on fire, the flames and the smoke clearly visible.

The owner of the memory was proud of this. The people that inhabited it were fleeing in every direction, and this pleased him. He was strong, and he knew it. It was his right to exercise his might upon those inferior to him, kill them and—

The mind walker quickly dampened the link by using the control the jutsu granted on this mind, trying to not dwell too much in those sensations. The emotions in this memory were much stronger than the ones he had experienced in this or other minds. He had really risked to go too deep there—

Pain, followed by a roar and fit of anger, strong enough to be felt even after the cautionary measure he had just taken.

The memory kept going, and he realized that its owner was being attacked by someone using a barrage of long-range fire and lightning jutsu.

Through his eyes, he saw that not all the inhabitants were fleeing. A solitary figure was standing in the small village’s square, fire dancing in one hand and a weapon ready in the other.

The man raised the latter, pointing it towards his flying opponent as if to challenge him, and thanks to the eagle-like vision Inoichi saw that the man on the ground was the prisoner he had seen in the cell! Just younger! Who the hell was this memory of—

Foolish Dovahkiin, he scoffed, changing direction with a flap of his wings—wings?! Even if he was Sahlo than Alduin, he was way Zol mul than the lesser Dov. He would Krii him with Yol and then he would Naak Du Kopraani

Inoichi panicked, feeling that the memory was overwhelming him. Cutting off his connection to the scene, he found himself back in the treasure room, staring at the massive skull that seemed to mock him with its hollow eyes.

He had no idea how that was possible, but he knew one thing. What he had seen was not a memory of the prisoner, but a planted one.

That alone would've been enough to worry him since it was a clear evidence that the mind had been tampered with. The nature of the memory though—

A sound behind him distracted the Yamanaka from that line of thought. A tinkling of metal shifting over metal, growing into a crescendo of clinking.

Instincts kicking in, he quickly turned, wary of any possible traps or mental defenses he may have activated. In the distance he saw a new dune growing from the sea of gold, coins tumbling down like snow in an avalanche, taking everything in their path down with them.

Something emerged from the top, like a shark's fin in open waters, and an identical one joined it, very close to the first one.

It wasn’t a pair of fins though, but two horns, each as long as a short spear.

The Yamanaka leaped away, searching for cover behind one of the columns to hide himself from this unknown threat. The treasure showering down from the new dune had begun to slow, as a body covered in gleaming golden scales started to reveal itself.

A head rose up, massive and reptilian, and large leathery projections hurled coins in every direction as they freed themselves from the mass of treasure. Slowly Inoichi could make out a shape, though what he could see defied all logic.

When the tail appeared as well, there was no denying it.

He was looking at a creature of legend, a creature that existed only in myths and stories used to entertain children before they went to sleep.

He was looking at a dragon.

For a second he thought if this could be some kind of last line of defense against a mental intrusion, but he quickly discarded the hypothesis. If that had been the case, it would’ve manifested itself as something artificial, like a barrier or the traps he had met or something else that could be explained as the fruit of some training or accurate preparation.

This was something that had the aspect of a flesh and bone being, besides its peculiar nature. And it had emerged from the prisoner’s memories, which meant that this could probably the man’s subconscious.

And it was turning its head toward his hiding place.

Two massive blue eyes with slitted pupils locked on him, and the thing spoke with a loud, cavernous voice.

“Koraav Hi, Mal Bron!”

Chapter 9: Of Dragons, Meetings and Reunions

Chapter Text

In his career as a shinobi, both on the field and in the dungeons of the T&I department, Inoichi had explored a myriad of minds.

Each time, it had been a different experience. There were of course patterns, minds that "felt" similar because their owners reasoned similarly or were trained in the same way.

There were, of course, dangerous minds. Dark, twisted places that tried to suck every mind-walker that probed them into their spires. Lunatics, psychopaths, deranged individuals, fanatics and worse. As a mind-walker explored their memories, he would feel the world as they saw it and it wasn’t a pleasant or safe task. Not all of the ones whom Inoichi had to delve into had been shinobi, either.

He had never seen anything like the beast that was looking at him, its eyes like cold, blue flame. Inoichi found himself unconsciously pressing even more against the stony column. If he had to hazard a guess, he would’ve said that the creature was a manifestation of the mind’s subconscious, but he had no idea why it would look like a golden dragon. It made him wonder what this said about the prisoner’s nature, though.

Slowly, the dragon started to move, its great form scattering the treasures it passed on. It was circling around the column and Inoichi found himself doing the same to keep something between him and the beast, all the while starting to feel like a small bird being stalked by a large and hungry cat.

“Fos los dreh het, Zu'u tovok?” the dragon asked calmly without stopping. While the word’s meaning was obviously lost to the shinobi, he didn’t need to be an expert in linguistics to understand that it wasn’t the same language the prisoner spoke. It was just too different. If this was the prisoner’s subconscious though, it should’ve spoken in his first language since the majority of minds reasoned in the language they were most accustomed to.

Unless this was the prisoner’s first language, but there was something behind those words that seemed to emanate power, far beyond the reach of normal men. Inoichi knew that it didn’t make any sense. Words were words, but he couldn’t shake the feeling from his own mind.

His thoughts ground to a halt though, as he slammed against a golden scaled wall blocking his path. A quick glance behind him revealed that, much to his horror, the dragon had blocked his path around the column using one of its wings. Turning back, he saw the large monstrous head emerging from behind a pillar, along with most of the neck, nearly upon him.

“Oo, wo ulaak naanven,” the dragon said in what resembled a bored tone, just before opening its jaws and taking a deep breath. Inoichi’s instincts kicked in and before he knew it, he was sprinting vertically on the column as an inferno of flames exploded at its base.

Inoichi didn't want to know if those flames would burned like real ones. He kept jumping from one column to another, not all that different from how he would’ve moved in the forests surrounding the village, knowing that he had to get out of there, out of the man's mind.

The sound of big, leathery wings closing on him made him realize that the dragon had other plans, and was chasing him. Inoichi dove to the ground just in time to avoid the beast’s maw closing on him with a snap.

The mind-walker didn’t waste time and immediately sprinted towards the passage he had come through, his only way to escape. A crashing sound accompanied by a blastwave of treasures flying around told him that the dragon had landed where he had been a moment before.

The Yamanaka heard the dragon take a deep breath again, and he not-so-elegantly scrambled behind the closest pillar, just in time to find cover. The column divided the spraying fire evenly, like water flowing around a rock. The small place not engulfed by the flames was enough for Inoichi’s needs. The raging heat didn’t matter, only not being physically touched by its source. The lack of oxygen left by the fire didn’t matter either, as he kept reminding himself that he was not really breathing air.

As soon as it had started, it suddenly ended, leaving only smoke and heated stone. Inoichi didn’t hesitate to dash towards the exit as fast as he could—only for the dragon's tail to collide with him, throwing him back. He rolled on the ground, grunting in pain as he hit the coin-shaped memories.

“Pah vodahmaan do slov,” the dragon chuckled. Inoichi staggered, trying to get back on his feet but failing to do so due to the blow received. No matter how much he tried to fight it, his own mental projection was acting like a real body would because of the pain he was feeling. The winged reptilian just walked around him, deliberately slow as if to to mock him, to finally stop between the mind-walker and the passage that would’ve led him to the exit.

Instead of attacking him, though, the dragon just co*cked its head, as if wondering what the man would try now.

"co*cky lizard," he muttered, trying to support himself with a hand against the gold-covered ground. His fingers brushed cold metal and he grimaced at the sudden influx of emotion from them. He didn't have time to get distracted—

Widening his eyes, Inoichi grabbed the closest coin he could reach and forcibly pushed his chakra through it. Scenes he had never lived flashed in front of his eyes—fire, laugher, sweet drinks. The dragon recoiled its head back as though it had been struck, confusion clear in its eyes.

Seeing it was working, Inoichi slammed his palm on the surface of memories flooding the gold around him. Instantly, he and the dragon were assaulted by a multitude of emotions and images from the prisoner’s past, to which the beast reacted as though he were having a mild seizure, thrashing around and breathing fire.

Inoichi ignored the sensory onslaught and managed to scramble to his feet and to find cover behind a pile of treasures before being stomped or burned to a crisp.

As the dragon’s blind assault stopped, it roared something, but he didn’t bother to listen to those incomprehensible words. Instead he found himself unable to hold back a grin. The mind-walker had not been sure if the trick would’ve worked, but apparently his first impression was right: the dragon was the prisoner’s subconscious, otherwise it wouldn’t have reacted that way at the stimulation of the memories.

If that was the reaction to the use of surface memories, how strong would it have been if he had used one of those hidden in the deepest parts of this mind? He had seen all those half-forgotten memories that had appeared to him as traps, but the human mind is unable to fully suppress most experiences... he just had to dig deep enough to find one with strong enough emotions.

There was the matter of finding a suitable memory without being burned or eaten, of course.

Which made Inoichi wonder why the dragon was not chasing after him. When he had tried his impromptu plan he had kinda expected to have to outrun it while looking for what he needed. The lack of said chase was worrying, to say the least.

He moved low between the piles of riches, being careful to not make any sound. Being a ninja, it was not a difficult task even if the surface he was walking on was formed by literally thousands of metallic disks that were extremely annoying to work with. Finally, he peeked from behind them to take a look at the dragon.

It was looking right at him from where it was, sitting close to the exit like a very large and scaly watchdog. Inoichi felt a cold shiver down his spine as he realized that his carefully stealthy approach had been for nothing. The dragon didn’t seem keen to attack though, but considering that he was blocking the mind-walker’s only way out it wasn’t surprising. The dragon had time. The man was instead limited by his chakra reserves, which were being slowly but steadily drained by his mental projection technique.

The last thing the Yamanaka wanted was to remain blocked inside another man’s mind in company of a dragon, so time was essential.

He hid again behind the pile—it may not have been necessary, but it was a well-ingrained habit he couldn't ignore. The Yamanaka took a deep breath, closed his eyes, and hovered a hand above the coins, pushing his perceptions deep down the mind's bowels, hoping that the dragon didn't change its mind and decide it wanted a snack.

He felt his senses expanding, moving under the surface, searching for something that he hoped was there. Sensations and moments of a life that wasn’t his flashed in front of him, chilling cold and blood in the snow and honour and battle cries, but it wasn’t what he needed.

Still, he could feel something in the distance, strong and powerful memories, the kind someone wouldn’t want to share with other people. Whatever resistance the mind could’ve offered, Inoichi just passed through it, aiming for the strongest one he could sense before pulling, not unlike a fisherman would do when it was time to see the catch of the day. There was a clink, and Inoichi felt something touch his open hand. He opened his eyes and stared at it.

It was a pendant, a circular golden trinket with a series of intricate loops, four of which formed a cross-like shape centered around a small sapphire, the chain still peeking from the coins it had emerged from. It looked a bit dented, though, and the gem itself was cracked in the middle. What could it mean, Inoichi wasn’t entirely sure, but he felt… an assorted variety of emotions emanating from it, both joyful and dark. He found himself almost overwhelmed by it.

It was exactly what he needed to either distract or incapacitate the overgrown lizard. It was a simple plan, as shinobi plans went. Use the memory, see the dragon’s reaction, continue exploring the memory if it somehow managed to subdue the beast or escape as it was affected by the backlash if it wasn’t.

Inoichi didn’t try to sneak this time, he just walked straight on the top of the pile. Not because he wanted to seem smug or taunt his enemy, but he just didn’t see the point—although the dragon seemed to be confused by his move, judging by the way it had co*cked its head. Also, the position was good to dash towards the exit if something went wrong. Or went right.

Locking eyes with the dragon once again, he concentrated his chakra on the pendant’s surface, and let its contents flood his and the beast’s minds.

A shady town with a rotten heart. Squalor, fear and corruption. Dark deals, made out of a common interest. A woman in a blue dress, looking at him with curious eyes. Stolen money, brawls in an alley. An association grows into a friendship. Stolen kisses on a rooftop. Passion, desire. Her body pressed against his. Love. A trap is sprung. Vindication is claimed. Betrayal, regret. The mission comes first. A fortuitous meeting, years later. Heated words, rage, steel meets steel. There is no point. One last kiss. A passion relighted, before her dagger stabs his left lung. Falling, falling, falling—

Inoichi found himself splayed across the bed of coins, the pain in his side quickly fading since it had never been his. He had expected a vivid experience, but nothing like that. He shuddered, thinking how much worse it could’ve been had he not braced for the experience and looked to see how badly the dragon may have reacted to it.

The dragon was not in front of the entrance anymore. Instead, it was towering over him, fangs bared in a silent snarl and emanating the most malicious aura ever felt since Orochimaru decided to cut things for sh*t and giggles. Somewhere inside his own mind, Inoichi had realized that his plan had not worked, but was too occupied crawling on his back, away from the pissed off dragon, and trying to get up and make a run for it at the same time.

“Vir krilon hi?” the massive creature asked as it kept following him. Even if the words didn’t make sense, the message was clear: it had not appreciated what the Yamanaka had done. “Vir krilon hi, hah-lir?”

Somehow, Inoichi managed to roll back on his feet. He didn’t waste time before sprinting towards the exit, ducking under the dragon’s wings. He had barely started to get some distance between himself and the creature when he heard three words that resounded like thunder.

A whirlwind howled around Inoichi, and the dragon appeared right in front of him, jaws open like if to swallow him whole. The mind-walker ducked, and changed direction as the beast’s mouth snapped shut far too close to comfort.

A quick shunshin and he was at a safe distance again in the blink of an eye—even if it was a very bad idea spending chakra so freely during a mind-probing session. It didn't seem to deter his pursuer though since three loud words echoed in the chamber again, and the dragon reappeared once again in front of Inoichi with a gust of wind.

“Fus—” the dragon said, inhaling deeply after the single word.

Inoichi found himself slowly losing the battle against his urge to panic as he stifled a yelp and threw himself into a dodge. He didn’t know exactly what attack to expect next, but he certainly didn’t want to get caught in it.

—Ro DAH!”

The words reverberated around the room before the mind-walker felt the wall of sheer force slam into him from behind, throwing him across the chamber until he impacted on the actual wall and crumbling on the ground. Inochi immediately tried to get up, even if he knew that he was at the end of his rope, but found himself pinned to the ground by one of the dragon’s claws, unable to move.

“Ganog kred,” the beast said with a low growl and the Yamanaka knew that it was over. Frying him with flames, eating him alive, just pushing a bit more with the claw until he was skewered or who knows what else the dragon could do, the result was the same. His mind would be irreparably damaged as a result, probably enough to send him in a coma.

Still, he stubbornly refused to close his eyes in defeat, and didn’t waver under the dragon’s hateful gaze.

It was only because of this that he saw the hail of shuriken impacting against the dragon's head with a metallic screech, sparks sent flying. The big reptile roared, more in surprise than in pain, as it looked around for the origin of the attack. If possible, Inoichi was even more surprised. Had the Hokage sent someone from his clan to help him? How did they understand that he was in danger?

Whoever the newcomer was, the dragon had apparently pinpointed his location judging by the stream of flames that were thrown around. The next hail of weapons arrived from the opposite direction though, much to the dragon's confusion and anger. It turned around, lightning coming out of its mouth this time, lighting up the cavernous room.

Inoichi was almost blinded by the display, but before he could shield his eyes two strong hands grabbed his shoulders and then he felt a pull. For a brief, almost unnoticeable moment all his body felt like it was being yanked away with such a force that it could tear him up to shreds, but a heartbeat later it was over. His body was still whole, and he was not in the memory’s main room anymore.

There were no gold piles or pillars in sight. The cavernous place had been replaced by a noticeably smaller room. Stone floor, wooden ceiling and walls, a few doors and a ramp of stairs going upwards. In the end it wasn’t unlike houses you could find in rural villages.

Some sort of fire pit was in the middle of it, and its walls were decorated by a disparate assortment of strange items.

What was this place?

“So they did send you, just as planned. You really made him mad, you know,” a voice behind him said. A voice he had not heard in twelve years. Slowly, the Yamanaka turned around—

“Hello, Inoichi,” Namikaze Minato said with a smile, looking not even a day older than the day he’d died. “You’ve aged well.”

The mind-walker spun around, getting in a defensive position and looking at his saviour warily.

"Who are you? Why do you look like—"

"Oh, right. I suppose it would be too crazy to believe me outright,” the fake Yondaime interrupted him, turning pensive for a moment “Mmh... during the earlier stages of the war, you, Nara Shikaku and Akimichi Chouza were stationed on the western border, and your reputation as the new Ino-Shika-Cho trio started spreading after the battle of Higashino—"

"Anyone could know that by reading the battle reports,” Inoichi said, cutting him off. “I'm grateful for the rescue, but showing up like this is—"

"And immediately after the war, Shikaku married Yoshino. At his bachelor party you got so drunk that you spent two hours whining to me about how you would never find the 'right woman to marry'. Your actual words, if I recall correctly."

Inoichi’s eye slowly widened, and he found himself unable to reply.

"Then you got very emotional and started to cry a little. You almost spoiled the mood but then Chouza convinced you to dance with one of the girls in the, uh, establishment and then you—"

"You swore you would never—” he blurted out, only to shut his mouth when he realized what he was saying. “Minato…?”

"Yes and no. Technically speaking, I'm just a representation of the memories that Minato put inside his brother's brain.”

"Wait, your brother?!” he asked. Inoichi had noticed some resemblance in the prisoner, but he had never thought about this possibility. “Minato, just where—and how did you put those in his head? You're dead!"

"It's a long story, and we don't have much time. Let's start with this place, though,” Minato said, waving his arms to indicate the room. “I don't have memories of it, but I'm pretty sure that it's the house where I was born, a long way from Konoha..."

As Inoichi woke up inside of the interrogation room, Sarutobi breathed in relief from the other side of the one-way mirror.

“Thirty-five minutes. An unusually long time,” he mused to Danzo, who was standing right beside him, while the Yamanaka left the room in a hurry, ignoring the unconscious prisoner. From what he had been told, time was perceived differently during a mind-probe and he couldn’t help but wonder how much had passed for the mind-walker.

His old friend barely managed to nod before the door opened and Inoichi all but barged inside the observation room.

“Hokage-sama, I have some interesting things to tell you,” he said, glancing briefly at Danzo.

“Well then, Yamanaka-san. Do your report,” the crippled retired shinobi demanded.

“What I have to say is for Hokage-sama alone,” Inoichi added, in a stony voice.

Hiruzen looked back and forth between the two men who were now engaged in a silent staring contest and inwardly sighed. He knew that Danzo had his own means to gather whatever information Inoichi had extracted from the stranger’s mind, and so did Inoichi. It would only require more time. If the Yamanaka was showing such stubbornness, it could only mean two things: either he had found something important, dangerous, or both.

“Very well, let’s go to my office then,” he finally said, bidding farewell to Danzo. “We’ll have all the privacy we need.”

“If I understood you correctly, you just told me that the Kyuubi’s attack was not an accident,” Sarutobi said slowly, breaking the silence. “Instead, it was a deliberate act by a mysterious shinobi with the Sharingan and a one-eyed mask.”

“Exactly, Hokage-sama. That’s what the Yondaime told me,” Inoichi replied.

“Do you realize that this doesn’t leave this room? I firmly believe that such information goes beyond S-rank secret.”

“I agree. Although, sir… there’s the matter of this enemy’s identity.”

“True, but I’m afraid we may never find out. Best case scenario, Itachi killed the one responsible that tragic night five years ago, maybe catching him by surprise. Worst case scenario...” Hiruzen sighed deeply in frustration. He was getting too old for this. Scratch that, he was too old for this. “Worst case scenario, there’s a third Uchiha out there, who is able to control a Bijuu. Something that’s been unheard of since Madara’s time.”

“It could be someone with an implanted eye, like Hatake-san,” Inoichi suggested. “Besides, there was no one in the Uchiha clan that could pose a threat against Minato in a one-on-one combat.”

“One of the shinobi’s greatest skills is to not reveal all his abilities, or have you forgotten that?” Sarutobi asked rhetorically, taking a long puff from his pipe. “I doubt that someone with an implanted doujutsu could master it to such levels, but anyway, there’s no elements to proceed in any direction for now. We should consider ourselves lucky to have gotten this information.”

That quite frustrated the Sandaime. There weren’t a lot of things that could make a Kage feel powerless, but learning that the countless deaths of that night, including those of Biwako, Minato, and Kushina had been caused by a single man and not being able to find out more or if the village was still in danger was surely enough. He hated it.

“Moving on,” he said, deciding to not dwell on it. For now. “The prisoner, this Harissen-san… he is Minato's twin brother."

"Yes, Hokage-sama," Inoichi confirmed with a nod.

"And he is from a completely different continent that lies on the other side of an ocean, with different languages, traditions, and people."

"Yes," the younger shinobi confirmed, nodding again.

"And where he is from, there's a way to enter inside the Shinigami's belly. That's how he met Minato,” Hiruzen kept summing up, not mentioning that this meant that said twin was crazy enough to enter the Shinigami’s belly, and somehow able to leave it unscathed.

"So I was told."

"And Minato put some of his memories into him."

"Again, that’s correct."

"How is it that he cannot understand our language, then?"

"Minato suggested that the cause may be the nature of his brother's soul, even if I'm not sure what he meant by that. It could also be because of the small time window he had to operate. In the end, the implant didn’t work properly, but if I can give my professional opinion, so to speak, there could still be some side-effects of it."

“Side-effects?” Hiruzen asked, raising an eyebrow.

“Nothing dangerous, from what I could see in Harissen-san’s mind and what Minato told me,” the mind-walker quickly reassured. “Mostly it would be like… dreams, made from fragments of Minato’s life. At the most, he could develop some of the same tics and gestures that Minato was prone to using.”

"Can it be fixed? There's a lot of things that I would like to ask him, and our people in the laboratories as well," Hiruzen asked, glancing at a report about the chemical mixtures the stranger had been carrying. To say the least, his scientific division was puzzled.

"Tampering with an already tampered mind could be... tricky. Potentially dangerous, even fatal."

"What do you suggest we do, then?"

"All the knowledge about our language is already in there," Inoichi said, tapping his head. "Instead of risking an invasive procedure, I think it would be for the best to try to wake it up by more mundane means."

“Do you mean… teaching?” Hiruzen asked, thinking how ironic it was since that had been his original plan before events had forced his hand.

“Teaching,” the blond repeated with a nod.

"Let's hope it will not take too much time, then. One more thing." Hiruzen took a long pause and another whiff of tobacco before speaking again. "Does he know about Naruto?"

“So... it’s true,” the Yamanaka leader whispered, grief and regret clearly visible on his face. “And I suppose that ‘Uzumaki’ is not a surname that was given to him by the orphanage…”

“Inoichi,” Hiruzen said in a warning tone.

“No, he doesn’t know,” the blond said, his voice regaining its usual strength. And I didn’t tell Minato’s apparition about his son’s life, so that it wouldn’t be archived among his memories.”

“Naruto’s parentage is obviously another S-rank secret,” Sarutobi informed regretfully. “You’re forbidden to discuss it with anyone.”

“With all respect, sir… why keep it a secret? Any of us would’ve taken him. Hell, I’m sure that Shikaku would’ve gladly adopted him!”

“Would he? Would you? Even knowing about his burden?” the Hokage asked without mercy.

“I—”

“Had I allowed for such a thing, for one of Minato’s close acquaintances to adopt his son, it would’ve been just a matter of time before someone among Minato and Kushina’s numerous enemies would’ve noticed something,” Hiruzen explained, interrupting the other man. “Even hiding his true identity wouldn’t have helped if he was seen close to someone that knew his parents.”

“We could’ve said that he was mine,” Inoichi said, clearly not convinced of his own words.

“I thought about it,” Sarutobi said, surprising the Yamanaka. “But anyone who tried would clearly see that he isn’t yours, even if you have similar traits.”

“What about you then? Or Jiraiya-sama? Surely he could’ve—”

“As you know, Konoha was terribly weakened that night, and in the following months the other villages were watching us like vultures. Looking for a weakness. I was reinstated in my position, and for this, right in the spotlight, so to speak. As for Jiraiya… Jiraiya has his reasons,” Hiruzen simply said, refusing to elaborate more as he put down his pipe. “In the end, keeping Naruto in the dark as an orphan was the only thing I could do to protect him.”

“And you gave him his mother’s surname, since it’s not unusual giving to orphans those of extinct families.”

“Indeed. Now, if you don’t mind—”

“I would have one last question, if I can ask of course. Hokage-sama,” Inoichi quickly said, adding the title as an afterthought.

“I answered a lot of questions today anyway, one more will not hurt. Even if I can imagine what it is,” the Sandaime said with a sad smile.

“Why did you reveal that the Kyuubi was sealed inside Naruto?”

“Because I was—and am—an old fool. The people needed something to help them go on with their lives after the tragedy. They needed hope. I had thought that by telling them the truth, revealing that the Yondaime had sealed the fox in a container, paying such a sacrifice…” he said, his voice fading as he kept speaking. He forcibly composed himself, and continued his explanation, even if it sounded more like a confession in his ears. “Instead, they saw Naruto as a scapegoat for all their suffering, their losses, for the lives destroyed by the beast. You know how that went in the end.”

“Your law,” Inoichi simply stated.

Sarutobi nodded. He had probably broken that law just now, along with various village secrets as he clarified those events to Inoichi—whose attitude has been borderline insubordinate, but after all the years under the hat, it felt good being able to finally vent a little. It eased his conscience, just a little bit.

“You’re wondering if I’m planning to have them meet, aren’t you?” he asked after another pause.

“Minato would’ve wanted them to meet,” the other man said, with a barely suppressed frown.

“For now, I can’t allow that,” the Hokage said with a regretful voice.

“I’m aware that it’s your decision to make, Hokage-sama, but don’t you think that Naruto has the right to know his living family?”

“Of course he does, but this man, he is a stranger. I’m not talking about the fact that he is from another place, I mean that we don’t know what kind of person he is, or about his goals or if he could even be a threat to the village. We can’t even understand him. We only know that he is Minato’s brother, and that his arrival and his stroll through Earth Country was enough to stir up Iwa’s attention. I suppose you know that they sent a team at the last minute…”

“I’m aware of that. They’re already under surveillance, of course.”

“Of course. So you can see why I can’t allow Naruto to meet his uncle, yet.”

“So… what happens now?”

As he kept listening to the head proctor, Naruto got more and more confused. Why were they being randomly assigned seats to take an exam? Weren’t they supposed to fight or something?

It was only when he saw one of the other chunin starting to hand out sheets of paper that the reality of the situation started to sink to him.

“A WRITTEN TEST?!” he shouted in horror.

The kiss was warm and passionate. He had not planned on spending the afternoon like this, but he surely would not complain.

The kiss deepened, and he could feel her body pressed against his own, and the mutual desire growing. Without warning, the embrace was interrupted and he was pushed against the bed, stumbling like a fool as he fell on it.

He tried to get up, but something soft hit him on the face. It was her blouse.

As she stood half-undressed in front of him, her red long hair falling like a crimson cascade, he realized that he was a lucky son of a—

Conrad jerked awake with a terrible headache, eyes wide in shock. Or, how he would rationalize a few minutes later, forced himself awake. There were things that a man should never know about his sibling’s private life.

Seriously, what had Minato thought in giving him that?! It had to be an accident, right? Didn’t matter, it was going on his list. He mentally filed it away as something worthy of two punches.

Even if the woman had an amazing—

“Dammit!” he growled, punching the ground he was sitting on for a good measure, only to hit something soft. He looked down, and found out that he had been sitting on a bed.

He was not in his cell anymore. It was still a cell, judging by the metal door without a handle, but it looked almost like a normal room, if a little bare. There was a real bed, for starters, a white weird-looking throne-like chair was resting against one of the walls beside a weird-looking… sink? The room was also brighter, thanks to an apparently more powerful version of the light orb he had seen in his older cell.

Also, he was not chained to the wall anymore. It seemed that for some reason his captors had decided to treat him better. The bracelets with glowings runes were still in their place, though, still sucking his magicka. Even if they had decided to treat him better, these guys were not stupid.

Why would they suddenly decide to give him slightly better lodgings, though? The last thing he remembered clearly was being tied to a chair in one of those rooms with a big mirror and—

The Nord! Well, not Nord-Nord but—whatever. The blond bastard! He had entered inside his mind, and not like with telepathy or one of those fancy specialized disciplines. That man had projected his soul inside his mind and taken a stroll inside it. He knew of wizards that would’ve gladly given their fancy hats, robes, and maybe their not-favoured hand to be able to do such a thing.

He didn’t know what the man had been looking for, but he was sure that something had happened. Something—

“Oh, great,” he mumbled in realization, facepalming as he let himself fall on the mattress. The mind-worm had prodded in his mind and of course, this had awakened his soul’s instincts. “Just f*cking great.”

Then, the fool had done… something. He wasn’t sure what had exactly happened since Conrad’s memory of the events was a bit blurry and second-handed, thanks to the awakening of his inner dragon, but he was sure of one thing.

The blond bastard had made him remember her.

Conrad's hand unconsciously moved to the scar he had gotten as a reminder of that night.

The thoughts ran, igniting a burning fury through his veins. He wanted to break and tear the damn place down. But he didn't. Of course, he knew better. It would’ve been very dumb setting the room on fire while the door was locked. He couldn’t tell if his barely-kept in check fury was his own, or his soul’s.

In hindsight, he should’ve expected for his soul to wake up sooner or later since the drastic reduction in alcoholic intake he had been forced into recently. Or the lack of killing. Seriously, couldn’t some pathetic local monster have crossed his path while he was walking through that forest? Where were all the spriggans?!

Even now he could feel his draconic nature stirring, wanting to unleash all the pent-up urges—his own and the ones of all the others that Conrad had devoured during the years—against the first unlucky beings that even dared to look at him the wrong way. Since it had just awakened, though, its grip on his actions was still loose, so getting it back to sleep could be simple enough.

A good drink, a good fight—heck even a good romp would do. It would either mildly satisfy his instincts or suppress them, and there was the extra gain of making him forget how sh*tty his life was. And once the soul was back to sleep, there’d be no urges to dominate others and show his “lessers” who had the real power on this side of Nirn, which was good in his personal opinion.


Sadly for him, there wasn’t any booze inside the cell or stuff to fight. Much less to roll on the bed with. In the face of such a dire situation, he knew that he didn’t have much choice.

He had to meditate.

Conrad didn’t like the idea in the least. Meditating was for spiritual people like priests, monks, and Greybeards, and it required too much patience for his liking.

Grumbling, he got up from the bed, sat on the floor in the right position, which he had always found more uncomfortable than relaxing. Closing his eyes, he took a deep breath and—

The sound of the door being unlocked broke whatever concentration he’d managed to gather. He should’ve expected it, though. When was the last time that he had been left undisturbed while busy with something important?

Four of those masked bastards were waiting outside of the cell, along with one man that sported the snail-marked metal plaque on his forehead, although it wasn’t like the one Ibiki and Anko had. It extended down the sides down on the man's face, and to Conrad it looked like someone had tried to turn the plaque into a helm and gave up because of the lack of metal to work with, leaving a thing that looked like a half-completed mask instead. The not-masked man barked some order, to which Conrad replied by raising an eyebrow. Had no one told this guy that he wasn't able to understand them?

The Nord still recognized a cue when he saw one though, so he slowly got up. He wasn't surprised when two of the masked freaks immediately grabbed him and dragged him out of the cell;, it wasn't anything new for him. Conrad could feel his soul twist and spasm, desperately wanting to obliterate these fools for the humiliation of being treated like this but he was able to remind himself that he had to behave, for his students’ safety. He wasn’t sure for how long that would work, though.

As the guards started to drag him through a series of tunnels, Conrad noticed that it wasn’t the same route they had used the previous times. He didn’t mind the change in the routine, but couldn’t help but wonder what was in store for him. Were they to try more extreme methods of interrogation—even if it sounded like a very bad idea that wouldn’t accomplish anything, thanks to the language barrier—he would sic a pack of atronach against them, and to Oblivion the consequences.

While he was escorted through a seemingly infinite number of twists and turns, Conrad couldn’t figure out what was responsible for that thought between what little self-control he had left or the nature of his soul.

There was a metallic clank as the guards opened a door completely identical to the scores they had passed through, and Conrad swore as he was blinded by the sudden light. Thankfully for him, his guardians were kind enough to show him where to walk even as he wasn't even able to see his nose.

His eyes adjusted quickly to the light of the day, and for the first time in days Conrad saw the sky again. Apparently, he had been taken on the top of a tall, rocky hill. Or a short mountain, but calling it a mountain could be considered an insult for the mountains back at home. And considering the mostly flat top, the closest thing that came to his mind were the mesas in some regions of Hammerfell.

They passed some distance from a pair of dome-shaped buildings, but he didn’t care for those. He was more interested in the rest of the scenery. At the bottom of the rocky formation was a city, not the biggest he had ever seen—that honor went to the Imperial City—but big enough to have at least a dozen-thousands of people between its walls, maybe even twenty-thousands or more. It was difficult to judge when a group of armed people were basically dragging him to the forest that covered the rest of the mesa, away from the edge.

Although, if he threw himself down the cliff, and used what little magicka he had left to slow down his fall with a properly modified version of that old levitation spell, so as not to use too much energies…

Conrad decided to ignore the idea. There were probably other masked guys around the city anyway, if they were the guards or the soldiers of this place, and throwing himself down a cliff without knowing if such a spell modified on the field would work would be incredibly dumb. And of course, the magelings were still missing.

The group walked through the forest for a few minutes, the trees starting to get thicker as they kept going only to abruptly stop as they reached a small clearing, barely wide enough to let the light from the sky through the foliage. At the center of it stood a small, unremarkable shack made of wood.

A silent signal was probably given, because as the group stepped into the clearing the masked guys leaped away at that inhuman speed of theirs, disappearing through the thick woods or bushes. The snail-plaque man remained for a bit more, looking from the Nord to the shack, before glancing again at Conrad with a smirk.

Then he disappeared in a swirl of leaves—not like the others who had moved some leaves as they jumped or ran away, he literally turned into a bunch of leaves that were dispersed by the wind and Conrad was left alone like a clueless fool.

Was leaving a prisoner alone normal around this place?

He felt like he was the victim in some sort of joke, but if that was the case, he wasn’t laughing. Maybe it was a test instead, to see if he would’ve tried to flee if left without supervision. The mere concept of that made him feel like someone had just insulted his intelligence, especially since he could actually see one of the masked freaks. Sure, he had to squint his eyes and at first glance he wouldn’t have noticed it, but he could see one of them perched among the branches of a tree. Admittedly, having seen them disappearing in the forest had helped a bit, but it still counted in his opinion. And the others were obviously around, too.

Grumbling some curses in all the languages he could think of, which were many, he strode towards the shack’s door. At a closer inspection, the shack was a bit weird;, it looked like someone had taken a giant block of wood and cut out everything that didn’t look like a shack, but he ignored it. He was pondering if he could get away with punching whoever was inside. Someone had to pay for the way he had been treated.

The Nord didn’t bother to knock or to see if the door was locked. He kicked it, and it opened with little resistance much to his satisfaction. Conrad stepped in, growling and ready to vent some pent up righteous rage—only to find himself staring at a startled, wide-eyed Beta.

For a brief, incredibly brief moment, Conrad had no idea what was going on. Then he was tackled and hugged by a crying and almost hysterical teen.

"Master! You're alive!"

Conrad found himself unable to reply between the surprise and the embarrassment he was feeling. He nervously placed a hand on Beta’s shoulder, while checking the unfamiliar place he had entered. A small room, almost bare besides a window and two doors that led who knew where. Satisfied, he tried to calm the girl with some reassuring words but it just had the result of having her tighten the hug even more. Thankfully, nobody was around to watch—

"What is going on—Master!” Ta’Sava emerged from one of the doors, before jumping at the Nord and joining the hug-fest. “You're alive!"

"Stop hugging me. Stop at once!" he ordered, but much to his dismay the young wizards would have none of it.

"Wait, so he is alive?" Sven asked as he walked from the same room. "Damn, I owe Ta'Sava a septim."

"You bet against me?!" Conrad asked, although he was more outraged by how small the bet’s pot had been.

"No offense Master, but I thought that you would've done something incredibly stupid and got either you or all of us killed," the young mage-in-training deadpanned.

"Oh trust me, I was so tempted,” he grumbled, before switching to more important matters. “What did they do to you? I swear, if they hurt you—"

"No, they didn't do anything,” Beta replied while drying her tears. “They kept us in some cells for a while and I was so scared but—"

"We were chained,” Sven flared while showing a manacle similar to the ones Conrad was wearing. “Chained! Like we were criminals—"

"The strange men in white kept touching Ta'Sava, and measuring Ta'Sava's tail and fangs and claws and ears while taking notes,” the young Khajiit shrugged, freeing his teacher from his grip. “It was weird."

"How long have you been here?"

"I think... less than thirty minutes?" Beta said uncertainly, finally letting go as well.

"Aye, we're still unpacking,” Sven nodded.

"Unpacking?” Conrad asked in confusion. “Unpacking what?"

"Our belongings, of course," the young Imperial deadpanned, gesturing to the room he had come from. The Nord walked to take a peek, and truth be told, the only things inside the room were a pile of sacks, their backpacks, and a few weird-looking boxes.

"They gave us our stuff back?" he questioned in bewilderment.

"Well... not everything. The money, the potions, and of course your armour and weapons are missing."

"What about the—"

"They took away your last bottle of mead as well, Master,” was the quick answer. “We checked."

Conrad forced himself to take a deep breath to calm himself. It was fine, it was just mead after all. Plenty of mead around, it shouldn’t have been a problem. If he figured out how to get some, of course.

Before he could start to plan how to get some booze under the guards’ noses—or directly from the guards—without getting caught and then find a way to escape with his students, a group of masked guards entered the shack almost not making a sound. Conrad immediately stepped between them and the kids, ready to protect them… and was be promptly ignored as the masked individuals calmly kept bringing in various items.

Chairs, a table, a small drawer, a counter, a closet—

“Master?” Beta’s voice meekly asked. “Why are the creepily silent people moving furniture in here?”

In all honestly, Conrad had no idea how to reply to that. He was pretty sure that even Sheogorath wouldn’t have been able to explain this madness. Although, he would’ve surely enjoyed it.

In a matter of minutes, the rooms were fully furnished. Shelves and cupboards had been mounted on the walls, an empty bookcase had been placed beside the window, and the table, along with six chairs, was occupying most of the space at the center of the room. It wasn’t anything fancy, but it was surely better than an empty room.

The guards entered one more time, leaving some boxes on the table before disappearing in a puff of smoke that Conrad had started to find rather irritating.

“That… was weird,” Sven broke the silence. “But at least this is way better than a cell.”

Conrad groaned his frustration. “Just… check what’s in those boxes. And put our things in order, I think that’s what they’re expecting from us.”

The magelings scattered to do as told. Apparently, Conrad giving orders to them was enough to make the situation they were in resemble a normal routine. The Nord instead sat on a chair to clear his thoughts. Why the sudden change in behaviour? One moment he was treated like a dangerous prisoner and the kids used as hostages, and then they were basically given a house. Isolated, under surveillance, but still a house. All seemed to point to the defilement of his mind that he had been forced to endure in the morning, but why—

Minato.

They had found out about Minato, and whatever he did to his mind. It was the only explanation he could think of. So they were interested in him, but why? Who was Minato, in his lifetime?

Maybe this city was not hostile, after—No. They were clearly hostile, they had threatened to torture kids, by the Nine. What kind of sick bastards would do that just to find out why they were travelling on their lands?!

Conrad had to leave, and take the magelings with him. But how—

“Hey, there’s food in here,” the younger wizard’s voice shook him out of his musings. On the other side of the table, Sven was rummaging through the stuff that had been left on its surface and seemed to wonder how he could use them. “Or at least it looks like food…”

This sprang an idea in the Nord’s mind. “Sven, do you still have the cooking gear?”

“I do—well, besides the cutlery. There’s nothing that resembles a decent knife.”

“I’m sure you’ll manage,” Conrad smirked. “Why don’t you prepare us a meal?”

“And how am I supposed to cook this stuff?” the Imperial asked with a raised eyebrow.

“I’ll take care of it,” he said, leaving the shack without hesitating. After all, if the guards had left the door open, he could exit from it, right?

The forest around the shack was silent, but Conrad knew better. He started gathering wood, but as he did so he started to purposely get more and more far from the shack, making a good show of choosing only the best pieces of wood he found. As he felt a presence behind him, he stopped and turned around. One of the masked guards was standing behind him, and while the woman—had to be a woman, with those hips—was not in a threatening posture, the silent message was clear. A second later, two other guards appeared, standing on the side—was it even standing if you were sideways?—of the trees.

Twenty meters. The guards had not bothered him until he had walked twenty meters away from the shack. With a grumping sound, Conrad straightened the pile of wood in his hands and walked back towards the cabin. He had enough, now it was time to wait for the night.

He had find a way out of the city.

The giant snake was slithering lazily through the forest, perfectly at ease among the huge trees. Around the whole forest, battles for survival were being fought but the reptile couldn't care a bit. It had just swallowed a nice prey, as the bulge in its belly clearly showed, and now it was looking for a nice sheltered spot where it could digest in peace. Which was not easy, given its size.

So, when the squirming meal suddenly multiplied in mass and volume, bloating its body in a grotesque way, the snake's shock and confusion could be understandable. Before the snake could do anything, like puke the now not very welcome meal, its body exploded, severed in half in a spectacular show of blood, gory bits, dozens of orange-clad blond kids and scaly pieces.

Thankfully, the death had been almost instantaneous.

As for the blondes, most dissolved in a puff of smoke, some were sprawled on the ground in various states of shock, and others were just grateful of being out of the beast's stomach.

"I'm going to be the Hokage," one of them, roughly in the middle of the group proclaimed pridefully. "I can't be turned into sh*t in a place like this!"

It was time.

Conrad slowly got up from the bedroll he had “slept” for the last hour or so and crept towards the door to one of the side rooms. Opening it enough to take a peek, he was satisfied to see that the kids were all asleep. It surely had taken longer than he had expected.

Having assured that they were safe and sound, he went to retrieve the plate of "leftovers" he had saved after dinner. Opening the pot, he dipped his fingers into the slippery, oily gravy and started to spread it all over his wrists. So greased, he started to pull the manacles, one at a time. Slipping them off was a long and painful task, but once the thumb was free it was basically done.

The Nord massaged his sore hands, enjoying the sensation of his free skin and feeling his arcane power being restored to its peak. He also helped himself with a quick snack from the pot, since it was bad wasting food.

Still munching the nightly meal, he lazily flickered his fingers and let the spell show him how many living beings were in the surrounding area. Ignoring the three snoring teens in the next room and the small nocturne fauna, he saw the souls of four masked guards shining like beacons in the night. In any other circ*mstances he would’ve felt insulted by being given only four guards to check on him, but these people were all but normal. He walked to the wall that seemed less exposed to the guard’s attentions, started to shape his magical power with both of his hands and concentrated for a minute. No turning back once he started this.

“Feim,” Conrad said at the lowest volume he could muster for the shout. He could feel his body turning incorporeal, eerily similar to a ghost. Mentally counting to five, he took a step through the wall without encountering any resistance from the solid object.

Just as he got out in the chilly night air, his body turned back to normal and he released the spell he had been holding. There was a weakly green aura that quickly faded as he felt it taking its effect and a look to his raised hands confirmed that he was invisible.

The whole thing may have lasted for a second, but Conrad crouched in waiting, wanting to be sure that the guards would not swarm the place to check for something unusual. He flickered his hand to detect their life forces once again, and noted to his satisfaction that they were still in their original places.

Still crouched, the invisible Nord started to advance into the night, being careful to not step on anything that could make a revealing sound. Conrad knew that he was completely out of his element here. He was not used to moving this way, having chosen to follow the way of the battlemage years ago. Thankfully, he had learned enough to support his deficiencies through the use of the Illusion school, but being used to clunking around in a set of heavy armour didn’t really help. He didn’t know how to step correctly or any other tricks of the trade, like Haming used to tease him about.

Shaking the thoughts from his head, he kept moving, using his sweaty palms to press his clothes against his body, so that they would not rustle in a betraying manner. Now it was not the time to think about his fellow former Helgen inhabitant. Conrad squinted in the pale moonlight and made sure to watch his step, as a broken branch would be as good as crying out. He carefully made his way back through the trees he had been dragged through earlier. At least, he hoped they were the same ones, it wasn’t easy finding the right way in a forest during the nighttime. He was almost out of the tree range and he could see the edge of the mesa now. There was a strange glowing coming from the city under it, which caused him to hesitate.

Ironically, this was revealed to be for the best, since as he stopped to examine the mysterious light one of the masked guards landed almost in front of him, facing away and crouching on the ground.

Conrad slowly pressed one of his hands against his mouth and nose, to hide the sound of his breathing, hoping that the bastard would just leave and go back to his patrol. Of course, there was no way he would have such luck. The guard started moving his head around, in a way that reminded the Nord of an animal, taking a few… sniffs of the air?! Was this guy tracking him down using his scent?!?

Was he a werewolf?

If that was so, then he was in deep, deep trouble. If he had not been found out yet it was probably mere luck. Maybe he was down wind, and the werewolf-guard had lost his scent? He didn’t want to know how long it would’ve taken for him to find it again, though.

As the guard started to sniff the ground a short distance from him, Conrad slowly, very slowly turned away from the man, staring back into the trees, and cupped his hands around his mouth, and decided to risk it.

“Zul,” he whispered, so quietly that he almost didn't hear it. He could only pray that it was the same for the werewolf. Less than a second later, Conrad could hear his own voice curse something from the deep of the forest.

The guard’s head snapped in that direction, and if the Nord was able to read his body language he was genuinely surprised. The man unsheathed a rather large dagger from his back and leaped away in the night. Conrad would’ve liked to sigh in relief but didnt dare. Instead he immediately moved, taking advantage of the distraction he had conjured.

He finally got closer to the edge, and saw where the glowing was coming from. It was the city. The whole city seemed to be covered by those light orbs, so many that they were brightening the night. This, was something he had never seen, not even in Imperial City.

Snapping out of it, he looked around, spotting a ramp of stairs that would’ve taken him down to the city. As he started to descend on the steps, he couldn’t help but wonder what kind of people could be able to build such a place, and then wonder what kind of people inhabited it. This thought made him realize something.

These people used werewolves as guards. Or at least, one werewolf. But if the time spent drinking, joking and fighting along the Companions had taught him something, it was that where there was one werewolf, there was a pack of them. There could be more, even in the city below him.

If that was the case, there was no way he would be able to pull off this escape plan. Not with the magelings at least, and even without them he would’ve probably been found sooner or later and he would have to fight his way out of the city.

He had to remind himself that abandoning his students was not an option. Even if Sven could be irritating sometimes.

Conrad groaned, leaning against the metal railing. Maybe, if he tried to pass from the rest of the mesa, instead of sneaking out through the city...

He looked up at the edge, and noticed for the first time the mesa’s rocky surface. On its side, four giant faces had been carved out of the stone, like the ones he had dreamt of months ago. The glowing light from the city below was reflecting on them, giving them a solemn air. And the one most distant from him, the fourth, was—

Conrad didn’t speak for a long time. He didn’t even notice when his spell faded and he became visible again. The world had just proved that it was incredibly unfair.

“I save creation two, maybe three times, I get nothing besides a lot of enemies,” he slowly said, watching his twin’s face sculpted in the stone. “You save a city… and they turn your face into a monument. Even if you have a sissy chin.”

Which he had too, of course. Indeed, very unfair. At least he had the decency of hiding it behind his beard.

The Nord thought about everything that had happened since he had started the crazy journey and couldn’t help it. He started laughing.

He had found Cornoah.

Still laughing, he walked up the ramp of stairs, intending to go back to the shack and get some sleep.

Chapter 10: Lessons And Even More Meetings

Chapter Text

Gareki Ishina was not a happy person. Partly, it was because of how her peers looked at her, thinking her a coward for having fled during a fight. The fact that all her comrades had died in the blink of an eye and that the man that had slaughtered them was the Yellow Flash seemed to matter little for most of them.

Right now, though, even in the middle of the night, the jonin was not a happy person for a completely different reason. Like the other jonin-sensei, she was waiting for the end of the second task, but being the only Iwa shinobi in the whole place she was quite a peculiar case and as such she had been the target of quite a number of glares during the day. Even the ninja from the smaller villages had been avoiding her, hoping not to risk the ire of their Konoha host.

It was fine by her. She wasn't really here to have "her team" take part in the exam or exchange pleasantries with her enemies, anyway. Her team would pass the survival test, she had no doubt about it, they were no mere genin after all. Their investigations about the “Yellow Flash Sightings” couldn’t really start until the traditional one-month gap between the second task and the tournament in front of the potential customers. Only then would she be able to find out the truth.

That was for another time though, so she went back to sharpening her weapons and imagining how it would be satisfying to use them against the thrice-cursed blond.

“Soooo… when are we leaving?” Sven, asked, serving to everyone his improvised porridge.

“Leaving?” Conrad asked in return, while flipping a page from the book he was reading.


“We know you left during the night, Master.”

“How so?” the Nord asked without moving his gaze from the book.

“We were woken up by you coming in while laughing,” Sven deadpanned, although he seemed quite irked about it.

“Pretty sure that our, uh, hosts know that too,” Beta said while glancing nervously to the masked guards that were literally surrounding the table they were having breakfast at. Between them and the seated wizards, the shack was a bit overcrowded.

“Do they?” Conrad pondered, playing a bit with his still slightly greased manacles as he glanced smugly at the guards. He could swear that he could feel them glaring at him even through their masks.

“Ta’Sava bets they do,” the Khajiit nodded, serving himself another portion. Where was he putting all that food?

“I’m not betting on that,” Sven said before turning back to Conrad. “Back on point, we’re all together now. So, when are we going to escape?”

“Escape?” the Nord snorted, lowering his gaze to concentrate on his breakfast. “We’re exactly where we are supposed to be.”

“What?” all the three magelings chorused, their eyes wide. Before Conrad could clarify, though, the shack's door opened and yet another person stepped into the packed room, saying something that may have been a greeting or an introduction in the Akaviri tongue. Conrad didn’t really register the greeting though, since in the second he realized who was standing on the other side of the room he could feel his blood boil.

The other Nord.

The blond bastard.


The mind-worm.

The Reminder Of Things That Are Better Left Forgotten.

A friend.


Wait, where did the last thought come from?! Conrad could feel his fury evaporate, being replaced by confusion and doubt. He surely wasn’t a friend with—

Minato. Of course it was Minato’s fault. Most of the things that had caused him problems in the last months had been related to him one way or another. He filed that in the list—he would really need to visit Castle Volkihar if he ever managed to get back in Tamriel—and decided to just glare at the man as a matter of principle.

After a few silent seconds, the man put a large bag he had been carrying on the table with an awkward smile and opened it, revealing a set of strangely small books without any hard leather cover. Judging by his students’ reaction, Conrad wasn’t the only one weirded out by that.

Sitting in his private office, Shimura Danzo reflected on the latest news he had received from his personal agents.

Namikaze Minato’s brother was not in a cell anymore. Instead, he was being kept as a valuable “guest” in a house within the ANBU training grounds. This, because of whatever Yamanaka Inoichi had found inside the foreigner’s mind.

Sarutobi had kept the information for himself and Danzo had not pressed him too much about it. Even if he considered his old friend a sentimental fool, the bandaged shinobi knew that there were limits to what he could do when it came to challenging the Hokage. Trying to pry what had clearly become classified information directly from Hiruzen was beyond those limits.

No sense trying to get the whole story from the Yamanaka, either. Should he disappear for a day or two, questions would be asked. Also, trying to interrogate a Yamanaka was a waste of time more often than not.

Of course, he had ways. He had not protected Konoha from the shadows for decades by idly waiting for vital intelligence to just land on his lap. As far as he was concerned, this Harissen Conrad was a completely unknown variable, and this was unacceptable.

He had already decided to send some of his own operators to spy on the foreigner, with discretion of course. Soon, Danzo would know what there was to know about this twin that had shown up at Konoha’s door. Maybe even more than Sarutobi.

Should the man and his young followers turn out to be a danger to Konoha, then he would strike swiftly and do what the Sandaime probably wouldn’t be able to.

Otherwise, he could think of how to use him to the village’s advantage...

“That’s supposed to be a tower?” a young man asked to his teammates, spying at the tall construction that emerged from the thick vegetation.

“It’s the only building in the whole forest, and it’s at the center of it. It must be,” the other one, much shorter and thinner than his companion said without even looking at said tower, opting to keeping watch around their shelter dug under a tree’s root.

“But it looks like a pile of buildings, like if someone just placed them above the other!” the first one replied back sharply. “That’s not how you build a tower!”

“Yeah, well… why don’t you go tell it to the Hokage, Mizu? Maybe he will listen to you, I’m sure he would be interested to know how you know so much about engineering.”

“Shut up Yano, you barbarian,” the bigger shinobi frowned. “People so fixated about explosions like you can’t understand the beauty in sculpting rock and earth into a perfectly stable, safe and durable example of architecture!”

“Oh I understand well instead…” Yano deadpanned, glancing at his bigger teammate. “I understand how to blow them up!”

“Cut it out, you two. Do you really have to bicker in enemy territory?” the kunoichi spoke for the first time. She understood that her teammates were frustrated, and not just for having to masquerade as genin. Deciding to hide for the first days of the exam after quickly acquiring a scroll had been a necessary move to keep their cover, since completing the test too soon would’ve looked suspicious… but idly waiting with these two was really starting to get on her nerves.

“Sorry, Kurotsuchi-sama,” Mizu quietly said. “We didn’t want to—”

“Don’t use my name, you idiot!” she hissed. “We’re undercover, or did you forget that?!”

“Right, right!” the large ‘genin’ backtracked. “Sorry, Kuroi!”

“That’s better,” the girl nodded, before going back to checking her equipment. “We’ll wait twelve more hours, and then we’ll go to the tower. Is that good?”

“Yes, all clear. Sorry for the slip, I’m not used to this undercover stuff.”

“I actually like my new name,” Yano said smiling.

“Everyone would be happy, considering how embarrassing your real name is.”

“Shut up, Mizu.”

Kurotsuchi took a deep breath, and tried to remind herself why she wasn’t able to kill these two idiots.

Oh right, they were Iwa shinobi, too.

“Tree,” Inoichi chanted, indicating the kanji he had written on the chalkboard brought in by the ANBU, along with the rough drawing of a tree to make it even more understandable.

“Tree,” the four foreigners repeated, although with various degrees of accents and enthusiasm. Or lack of.

“Cup,” the Yamanaka kept going, writing a different symbol after erasing the previous one. He wasn’t exactly a teacher, but the point of this was more about trying to stimulate the memories that Minato had placed deep inside his brother’s mind. Or at least that was the theory.

“Cup.”

“Plate,” he said, moving on with the lesson. As the Hokage had told him, he was the best choice for this task because he could tell if Minato’s twin—Harissen-san, Inoichi chastised himself for forgetting—was any under strain because of this “treatment”.

“Plate.”

“Window,” Inoichi recited. A part of him was wondering if he had been chosen to do this just because the Sandaime didn’t want to reveal that Minato had a living family and because he had been a bit insubordinate inside his office. So here he was, trying to jog some deep-hidden memories with visual aids instead of being able to worry about his daughter, who was still in the Forest of Death.

“Window,” the group kept saying, none of them getting the intonation right. The Yamanaka couldn’t help but sigh inwardly.

Unbeknownst to him, Conrad grumbled about how humiliating this was.

Somewhere far, far away from a certain Hidden Village, a man was sipping warm sake in a fairly cozy inn that would’ve deserved more customers. Sure, the food was not the best around and the booze was cheap, but the serving girls were gorgeous! That made the modest inn much better than any five-star hotel in the area in his own not-exactly humble opinion.

Of course, there was also another reason for him to be there besides some eye-candy.

“Here you go, sir,” a young beauty said, winking at him while serving some dishes. “Your special order is ready.”

He nodded, uncharacteristically not ogling at the woman—at least too much. There was business to attend to, after all. She could be ogled at later.

He took the lid off the main dish, unsurprised to see a scroll resting on a bed of fresh lettuce. Checking the seal placed upon it, he nodded in satisfaction when it turned out to be genuine. It was fortunate that he had decided to come to check in this place in case there was any news from Konoha, but had it been otherwise he was sure that his sensei would’ve managed to contact him in another way, either through his personal spy network or by sending a hawk or a messenger.

Opening the scroll after deactivating its self-destructing seal, he was not surprised to find out that it was written in code, but he didn’t become a spymaster without memorizing the most used ones or learning a trick or two of his own.

His hopes of being informed about the mysterious ship that he had found a few weeks ago quickly faded though, as he skimmed through the message with ease. Apparently he was requested to go back to Konoha, since it had come to the Hokage’s attention that one of the recently captured prisoners was actually—

Jiraiya’s mind froze, his eyes widening as he kept staring at the message. For a few long minutes, he didn’t react at all. Not even when the scroll’s seal became active again, burning the paper to a crisp in his hands. Or when the innkeeper, his contact in this backwater town, started to give him strange looks.

When he finally managed to snap out of it, he gulped the whole bottle in one go.

“This language…” Sven started, trying to find the right words.


“Akavirian,” Beta proposed, glancing back from her book.


“Nah, Ta’Sava thinks that ‘Akaviri’ could be applied to the people and the language,” the Khajit mused, although his confusion on the written words was clear.

“No, it should be called ‘Akaviric’, I think. But still! This language doesn’t make sense,” Sven concluded with a sigh.

“Well… it does sound complicated. The different alphabet sure doesn’t help,” Beta mumbled meekly.

“I don’t think it’s an alphabet,” Conrad grunted. “This seems like a glyph-based tongue.”

“Are you saying that each letter—”

“Glyph,” Conrad reminded sternly as he copied some of them on one of his notebooks.


“—that each glyph has a different meaning?” Sven asked after correcting himself. “That sounds a bit inefficient and confusing, Master.”

“There are quite a few Tamrielic languages that used glyphs or runes, albeit they’re mostly extinct languages,” the Archmage in all but name reminded his students. Just as he had said that, the Blond Bastard erased the single symbol and started to write some new ones on the chalkboard and he noticed, much to his surprise, that he started on the top right of the chalkboard and worked his way down.

Why would he do that—

Much to his consternation, Conrad suddenly realized that the Akaviri wrote in the wrong direction. Why, only the Nine knew. But if they wrote that way, then they read that way as well, and—

With a sense of dread, Conrad checked the cover of his book. As he had been afraid after his realization, it was upside-down. He let out an exasperated groan, being fully aware of how he had spent the whole morning filling his notebook with glyphs that were not even correct. Bristling and muttering some curses, he shredded the pages he had just wasted.

Both genin impacted on the broken ground without getting up, one because of the blow he had just received, the other for the strain he had put on his body by pushing it beyond its limits.

Once the smoke started to set, everyone present was shocked to see that the Suna-nin strange technique had protected him once again, if just barely. Before Rock Lee could get up, he extended an arm and sand rushed against the taijutsu specialist, catching his left leg and arm.

Then Gaara squeezed, and Lee fell down with a pained scream and the sound of crunched bones.

Sand rushed over Lee, like giant hands wanting to crush him.

A blur of green, and the sand around the genin’s body dispersed as if hit by a shockwave as the Green Beast of Konoha stood between his student and the murderous jinchuuriki, a harsh frown set on his face.

The match was over.

Click.

Lights on.

Click.


Lights off.

Click.

Lights on.

Click.


Lights off.

Inoichi could feel his right eye twitch a bit, and only his years as a T&I interrogator helped him keep an impassive face.

It had been twenty minutes since the generator and the shack’s basic electrical wiring had been working and operational, and the group of foreigners was still in awe by something as mundane as a light bulb. The cat-boy was still gleefully hitting the switch, while muttering and discussing along with the other teens, who were indicating either the cables or the switch or the bulb and making gestures and noises.

Their… sensei, since there was no better term for it—seriously, had it not been for the obvious lack of shinobi training it would’ve seemed like this Harissen guy was in charge of a genin team or something like that—seemed to be less interested by the mysteries of something as mundane as lighting, limiting himself to scoff at his students and adding his own thoughts every once in a while. Under the gruff exterior though, Inoichi could see that the man was clearly amused and couldn’t help but wonder why he kept such a front. Maybe it was because of his—and the ANBU’s—presence.

The lights flickered once again, and Inoichi forgot about the man’s personality, hidden or otherwise, and focused again on the whole group. If they were being so stunned because of a light bulb, what did that say about the place they were from? Especially if considering the… handcrafted nature of their clothes and equipment, Inoichi couldn’t help but wonder.

Maybe there wasn’t just a difference in the language between them, after all. He would have to speak to the Hokage about this—

“Hey,” Minato’s twin gruff voice called him, interrupting the Yamanaka’s line of thought.

“Yes, Harissen-san?” Inoichi asked, although he didn’t know why he bothered. The man didn’t seem to grasp the concept of honorifics, they actually seemed to confuse him, just like the idea of taking the shoes off before entering inside the shack after the short pauses in the lessons.

“Continue,” the foreigner said while frowning, as if he was trying to find the right words. “Lesson. Yes?”

Inoichi smiled faintly, before nodding. He had not taught them the word “lesson” yet.

"You fool!" Jiraiya yelled at Naruto, genuinely pissed by the kid's dissing of his novel. "I'm not just a pervert! Peeping gives me inspiration to write better—"

"Liar! What a lame excuse!" Naruto accused, flipping the bird at the Sannin. "Now what am I going to do about my training?"

"Training?" the Toad Sage asked, faking confusion at the sudden change of topic. "Are you talking about water walking?"

"You know about it?!" Naruto exclaimed excitedly, pointing a finger at Jiraiya with theatrical fare. "Then take responsibility and help me with my training!"

"I hate disrespectful and rude brats!" Jiraiya all but howled to the poor genin, while inwardly he was grinning at the fact that Naruto had asked him to train him.

Just as planned.

Inoichi sat on the log that laid outside of the shack, beside his fellow blond. He didn’t know where the other man had got the log there under the vigilant ANBU watch, and he wasn’t sure if he wanted to know.

The teens had started to tidy up while being shadowed by two ANBU, while another one perched like a bird on the roof kept an eye to Konoha's most recent S-rank secret. Inoichi would bet that the others were still patrolling the forest.

“You know brother?” the stranger that had a way too familiar face asked suddenly. “Know Minato?”

Inoichi hesitated for a few seconds. Of course, had it been him the one that found out that he had a dead long-lost sibling, he would want to know as well. Still, he couldn’t tell him everything, it was a matter of village security after all.


“Yes, Harissen-san. I knew Minato.”

“Conrad. Name Conrad,” the man all but growled. Apparently, he didn’t like to be addressed in such a formal way. “You friends?”

“Minato was a comrade at first, but… he was the one that kept all of us close when we were younger. It was impossible to not be his friend,” the Yamanaka said with a sad smile, reminiscing the old days of youth. Then he noticed the confused expression on the other man, and realized that he may have used too many words that were unfamiliar for him. “Yes, I was Minato’s friend.”

Conrad nodded, and looked away. A long and awkward silence descended on the shack, interrupted by the sounds of the teens doing the equivalent of a D-rank mission on their abode.

“Tell me of Minato?” the man spoke again after a bit. “I never know him.”

“Minato was—” the Yamanaka started, only to stop on his tracks when he realized that he couldn’t use too complex phrases. He really, really hoped that that part of Minato’s planted memories would kick in faster, and soon. “Minato was a good man. A brilliant one, and as I said, friendly too. Even if he could be a bit silly sometimes, especially when he tried to come up with names for his new jutsu—”

“What?” the foreigner gruffly asked, arching an eyebrow.

“Nevermind. I forgot that you are not familiar with the term, sorry,” Inoichi was curious about the jutsu that apparently had nothing to do with chakra, but with Harissen-san's limited vocabulary he had no idea how to ask so he opted to continue his tale about Minato. “He was also very loyal and… dedicated, I guess. After the war was over—”

“War?” The word had escaped Conrad’s lips more than being spoken. Inoichi almost tried to explain what a war was, but he could see from the man’s eyes that he knew war. Maybe even more than one, judging by the look in his eyes.

“Yes, there was a war, years ago. A big one.”

“Minato is… was a warrior?”

“I… suppose you could see it in that way, yes. A lot of us were, back then,” Inoichi said softly, remembering all the fallen friends and fellow shinobi lost in the conflict. “After the war was over, he became Hokage just like he had always dreamed. That’s the name of our leader, by the way.”

In hindsight, he found that the idea that Minato’s child had the same dream hilarious. And sad at the same time.

A jarl?!” was the surprised question, along an unfamiliar word. “Minato was jarl?”

“I… don’t know what a ‘jarl’ is, I’m afraid. But if that’s how you call your leaders, then yes.”

“Minato was jarl,” the man repeated with a snort. There was another pause before he spoke again. “How… he died?”

“He… A… the village was attacked,” Inoichi said slowly, once again reflecting how to tell this without revealing anything compromising. He decided to follow Sandaime’s law and the official version of that night’s events. It was the right thing to do, but it still felt wrong somehow. “A monster, the Kyuubi, attacked the village, and Minato—”


“A ‘monster’?” Minato’s twin asked, tilting the head at the unfamiliar word.

“Yes, a monster. A very strong beast?” he tried to explain. Harissen-san probably didn’t have an idea of what a bijuu was, though so he would probably not understand—

“You have monsters, here?” the other man asked, interrupting Inoichi’s thoughts. “Me see none, uh… walk here. No beasts, no monsters. Nothing. Weird.”

“Travelling here? You didn’t see any monster travelling here?”

“Yes. Home, more monsters. You travel, you find a lot,” Conrad smugly explained. How could someone be smug about such a thing, the Yamanaka had no idea. “Home is dangerous.”

“We have dangers, too. I assure you,“ he said, but the Yamanaka couldn’t help but secretly wonder what kind of creatures the man was talking about.

“Minato die… died,” Conrad said, correcting himself as he got a little more better in the spoken language. It seemed that Inoichi was right, after all. “Against the monster?”

“Sorry if we got a bit side-tracked. Yes, he died after killing the monster.”

“Monster dangerous?” the man asked, appearing genuinely curious. Inoichi didn’t respond immediately. After all, how do you explain what it feels to be in the presence of the powerful, malicious and hateful Nine-Tailed Fox, probably the most powerful being in the Elemental Nations? Especially when you can’t use too many words?


“The most dangerous,” he simply replied. Somehow, it didn’t give it justice.

“Good death, then. He deserve Sovngarde,” Minato’s twin said glumly, and the foreign words utterly confused the Yamanaka. Maybe it was a word that the other blond wasn’t able to translate. “But Minato soul… trapped? Yes, gets trapped.”

“That’s a way to see it, I suppose—” Inoichi said, wincing at the reminder that his friend’s soul was probably suffering unspeakable tortures inside the Shinigami’s belly.

“Minato… had family?” the foreigner asked all of sudden, interrupting him. “A… woman? Anyone?”

“No!” the Yamanaka replied almost too quickly, before composing himself. “No, he didn’t have a family, I’m afraid. Do you have—”

“No,” the man said. And there was enough regret and sorrow in that simple word that Inoichi kept himself from asking more.

Once again an uncomfortable silence fell on the clearing. It lasted longer than the first one, before the sound of something fragile broke from inside the shack, followed by two of the teens yelling at each other.

“Is there really a way to reach the Shinigami’s belly in your land?” Inoichi asked, changing topic.

“Shinigami?” Conrad asked, once again confused by the unknown word.

“Where Minato’s soul is,” the mind-walker clarified.

Soul Cairn, yes. Went there. See… saw Minato there,” he nodded slowly. “Dangerous.”

“Dangerous?”

“You go there, you dead,” was the dead-panned reply.

“How… how are you still alive then?” Inoichi asked in confusion.

“I no know words to explain,” the man sighed with a frown.

“Your land is very different, isn’t it?” the Yamanaka asked, changing the topic again.

“Yes,” Conrad nodded.”No… lights, there. No ones you have.”

“You mentioned monsters, earlier. Did you fight a lot of them?” he asked, although he doubted—and hoped—that whatever creatures they had there could be compared to a bijuu.

“Yes. Many,” the man nodded with a glare. “And people.”

“Sorry, I shouldn’t have asked if that makes you uncomfortable—”

“No. You have to. You—” the interruption died in Conrad’s throat with a groan. “I no know words to talk.”

“Why don’t you try anyway? You’ve made incredible progress for someone that didn’t even know our language a couple of weeks ago.”

“Minato’s fault. No my… merit? Yes, merit.”

“That may be true, but it’s still remarkable,” Inoichi reassured. “Now, why don’t you try to explain it to me?”

“Me think… you have to figure me. How me fight. How me think. What me want,” Conrad slowly said, turning towards Inoichi once more. “Figure if me dangerous.”

“I—”

“No know language, but not stupid.”

“I know you’re not. And, yes. You’re right. We don’t know what to do with you, or what would you want from us. That’s why we’re trying to find out.”

“You attack me first. You ask things, can’t answer. Enter my mind. You… remember me things,” Minato’s twin growled, and Inoichi could swear that he saw his pupils shift and change shape for less than a second. What the hell happened in that city he had seen inside the man’s memory? “After you find Minato is brother, you want to talk.”

“We thought that someone was impersonating our deceased Hokage!” Inoichi lashed out, albeit more because of his frustration than real malice. “And you were doing that strange jutsu that shot a storm of blue lights in the sky, which was tracking down the seals Minato left before dying, and only Minato could’ve known about them and—”

“Understood half what you say,” Conrad interrupted him with a deadpan stare. Inoichi grumbled a bit at that, massaging his temples.

“Look,” he started slowly. “You said that the… iarl is your leader, correct?”

“Leader of city, yes,” the man nodded, gesturing towards the cliff and in Konoha’s direction.

“Good. Now, I want you to imagine this: years after a iarl died, a stranger arrives. He looks like the dead jarl. And he can’t talk your language—”

“All Tamriel know language—”

“Just imagine that he can’t talk your language, please,” the Yamanaka interrupted a bit too harshly than he would’ve wanted to. “What would you do?”

“Capture him,” Harissen-san finally admitted after a long reflection. “Find out truth.”

“See? You can’t say that we did anything wrong, given the situation.”

“Is wrong for me,” the man scowled again.

“Look, we’re stuck with each other whether you like it or not. The faster you speak fluently in my language, the sooner you’ll be able to talk with Hokage-sama, and your fate will be in his hands. So suck it up.”

At that, instead of answering, the man opted to look away and mutter something in his harsh and hard-sounding tongue. Probably insults at the Yamanaka’s ancestry, but Inoichi wasn’t sure.

“Want something,” Conrad said after reflecting for a good minute. Inoichi arched an eyebrow at that. “Bring me… drink. No water. I tell you what you want know.”

Jiraiya could barely believe it. Yet, the living proof was standing right in front of him.

Sure, technically the Sannin was hidden inside a particularly thick bush, masquerading his presence with all the little tricks in the book—and some of his own design, just to be sure, but that would’ve been nitpicking.

At mere meters from him, there was a man that could’ve passed for Minato, if Minato had lived to this day, showed more years than he should, got three nasty scars on one side of his face and had completely forgotten how to move like a shinobi and developed a beard fetish for some reason.

A twin. A genuine, clichéd long-lost identical twin from a far, far land beyond the sea, whose alliances or agenda was almost completely unknown. And to make it even better, Minato had sent him here to shed some light on the events behind the Kyuubi’s attack on the village.

Had it not been for all the evidence supporting this, Jiraiya would’ve called it a premise for a very bad novel. He should’ve known, he lived on trashy novels. Not that he didn’t like to write p*rn, but at the start of his literary career, he had hoped to write something more—

The man’s head snapped from the book he had been reading and looked straight into Jiraiya’s direction. Surprised, the Sannin immediately substituted himself with a small toad that he had left behind, just in case.

He couldn’t help but smile. Either he was going soft, or Minato’s brother was sharp.

A part of Jiraiya wanted to get out of his hiding place and just go to talk to the man, but he knew better. Besides the fact that from what he had been told this… Conrad was not exactly a proficient conversationalist, he had wasted enough time by satisfying his curiosity. Orochimaru was still at large, probably around or even inside the village, and he had to train Naruto for the upcoming match with the Hyuuga.

He waited until the man decided that his book was much more interesting than whoever may hide in the bushes—probably thinking that it was just one of the ANBU that patrolled all around the shack—and silently left, having made up his mind to know the brother only after he had ensured that Minato’s son would survive the chunin exams.

Inoichi gazed over the table, feeling a little bit of pride at his brilliance. The lessons had progressed swiftly lately, especially since Harissen had started to correct his younger companions every now and then. Their grasp on the more advanced aspects of the language was still… lacking, but it was a progress.

So, to encourage them to apply what they had learned, he had decided to treat them with a home-cooked dinner at their lodgings. Thank goodness for the generator otherwise they would’ve been forced to eat with candlelights.

There was a rule, though: they were forbidden to speak in their own native language. After all, the aim was making them more comfortable with a tongue they were unfamiliar with during a social event. The fact that they were seemingly enjoying his cooking was a welcome bonus, even if it was just some rice with fish and veggies.

Sadly, making them use the chopsticks correctly turned out to be quite impossible—

“Please, uh, can Ta’Sava have more?” the cat-boy suddenly asked, the already empty bowl in his hands—or was “paws” a more correct term here? Whatever the case, he seemed really insatiable.

“You mean ‘Please, may I have some more’,” Inoichi corrected him patiently.

“Yes. What Ta’Sava say,” the feline said, clearly confused by the Yamanaka’s explanation.

“No, you don’t have to say your name every time, you can just—”

“Forget it,” Conrad interrupted him. “He not stopping.”

“But—”


“Normal for him,” the other blond explained with a shrug. “No worry.”


“Forgive me if I ask, I don’t want to be rude but… is it normal?” Inoichi asked in a whisper, getting closer to Minato’s twin. The man looked puzzled, and glanced at Ta’Sava, who was more interested into gouging down another portion of fish.


“Started eating more. Before he not,” the man mumbled, as if he had just noticed that.

“Uh, no I meant his appearance,” the Yamanaka whispered again. “What he looks like.”

"What? Ta'Sava dirty?" the cat-like teen asked as he stopped eating, having apparently heard everything Inoichi had said. He glanced at his two peers with a confused frown. "What wrong Ta'Sava?"

“Bothing wrong with Ta’Sava,” the girl immediately reassured gently.

Nothing wrong, Beta,” Conrad corrected. “Not ‘bothing’.”

"I meant his... peculiar features,” Inoichi clarified once for all, not bothering to whisper since it seemed that Ta’Sava would hear it anyway. “Is it because of a bloodline limit?"

The question was met by a long, stunned silence, along with various degrees of confusion and arched eyebrows.

"What is blood... line?" Beta asked, trying to grasp the new word.

"It's..." Inoichi trailed off, actually wondering how to explain it simply. "It's a power or ability passed down in a family."

"Oh. No, Ta’Sava not has blood-line," the grey cat said, as if simply stating a fact, much to the shinobi’s confusion. How else would those feline features be explained if not—

"Ta'Sava is Khajiit," Conrad said, understanding being hearable in his voice.

"A what?"

"Khajiit. Beast-people... race. No human. Different people."

"Not... human?" Inoichi asked, studden by this development. While it explained why the DNA tests made on the feline teen were inconclusive, it still made his head spin a little. "How is that possible?"

"It just is... ?" the kid that had seemed strangely interested when he prepared the dish—Sven, if he remembered correctly—stated, apparently confused by how this could confuse Inoichi.

"You have no... different people?” Beta asked softly. “Only humans?"

"No, as far as I know there are no other... races, among the nations,” Inoichi replied. Sure, there were a lot of strange creatures in the Elemental Nations, but none that could be considered intelligent as a person. Those were just fairy tales and legends, remnants of a more superstitious age…

Just like dragons.

"Explains people look you weird, Ta'Sava," the gruff man scoffed, before going back to his dinner.

"Is blood-line... good?" Ta'Sava asked with a pensive expression. Not sure how to answer to that, given how differently bloodlines were perceived around the countries, the Yamanaka opted to nod. After all, Konoha loved its bloodlines. "Conrad-sensei have one, then!"

There was a choking sound, and rice grains flew everywhere as Inoichi looked in shock at the man that was struggling to breathe besides him. Was Harissen Conrad really in possession of an unknown doujutsu, like Ibiki had said?

"Not from family,” the foreigner managed to say between one cough and the other, resuming only when it calmed down. “Not blood limit. Is... different thing."

"Then, what is it?" Inoichi inquired, eager to hear the man’s explanation.

"Power... from soul. No sure how to explain," Conrad sheepily said, ruffling his own hair in a way that caused Inoichi to flinch. It was the same annoying habit that Minato used to have.

"Sensei is... uh... big... thing?" Ta'Sava mumbled, clearly unable to explain with his limited vocabulary.

"Sensei is... good person? No, that not right word,” Sven guessed, before quickly backtracking. “Conrad-sensei is important... story?”

"Not a story. More than story," Beta declared with a large smile, her shyness apparently forgotten. She had even straightened up, suddenly proud for some reason.

"More than a story... ? Do you mean that he is famous?" Inoichi guessed, remembering that he would’ve to teach them more words in the future lessons.

"What is famous?" Minato’s brother asked.

"It means being celebrated, renowned, having a widespread and generally favorable reputation, and—" the Yamanaka started, only to start again with a dumbed down explanation. "It means that people like him and talk about him."

"Yes, sensei is famous—" the cat-boy exclaimed in a hurry, only to be interrupted by his teacher.

"No all like me, Ta'Sava," Conrad grumbled.

"What are you famous for, exactly?” Inoichi inquired further, hoping to find one more piece in the puzzle.

"Conrad-sensei has... big... thing that... in soul? No, for soul!" Ta'Sava answered in his teacher’s place, which earned him a glare that went completely unnoticed because of his enthusiasm.

"Something in his soul?" the mind-walker wondered in confusion, glancing to the other man.

"Something big, that do this!" Ta'Sava continued his explanation, flopping his arms frantically.

"Big thing that... fire? Fire, yes. Something with fire,” the other boy frowned, clearly unsure how to continue. ”And things."

Inoichi could feel the color flee his face as he connected the dots, remembering what had transpired inside the man’s mind. Slowly, he met Conrad’s apparently impassive gaze, but considering the tightened jaw, Inoichi could see that he was not pleased by the matter that was being discussed.

"And he travel and... and stuff?" the girl stopped, apparently unsure how to continue the tale. “No sure what sensei does—”

“Dinner is over,” Conrad suddenly said, stopping the discussion altogether. “Clean up? Yes?”

"But—"

"Clean. Up," the man repeated, sternly. With a huff, the teenagers started to gather the now empty plates, apparently used to their teacher’s borderline rude behaviour.

Said teacher, instead, grabbed one of the sake bottles that Inoichi had brought with him and with a great stride left the shack, not before looking back at Inoichi, as if to invite him to follow. He did so, giving one last glance at the kids as they retrieved some water from a barrel to wash the dirty dishes—Inoichi really hoped that they could get running, heated water soon but apparently there was some problem with installing the plumbing.

The fresh night air welcomed him, and he found Minato’s brother sitting on the same log of the previous day, right under the only light outside the house. Apparently he was not enjoying the sake, given the grim faces he was making, but he was still gulping it down like it was water.

Alcoholism, perhaps? He really didn’t want to rush a psychiatric profile, but his gut was telling him that Harissen Conrad was a man well-versed in drowning his sorrows, among other things.


The Yamanaka sat on the other side of the log, as the man gagged again. Seriously, what was wrong with sake anyway?

"You have some unusual power, but it's not a bloodline," he simply said, just stating the fact.

"Yes," Conrad confirmed with a nod.

"Can you explain?" Inoichi asked, studying the foreigner’s reaction. Had he been a Konoha citizen, asking such a thing would’ve been incredibly rude. Shinobi of every standing were really jealous of their personal techniques and their inner workings. You just didn’t ask about that stuff, but Inoichi knew he had to.

“No secret. Everyone home knows," Conrad shrugged instead, unknowingly defying centuries of shinobi tradition. Inoichi really hoped that his expression didn’t show how appalled he was, and started asking questions.

"Is the dragon I saw in your mind the source of your power?"

"That how you say it? 'Dragon'?" the foreigner mumbled, apparently amused about having learned that word.

"Is it?" Inoichi questioned again.

"Yes, but… no. Maybe? Not sure what you see,” Conrad spoke slowly, frowning deeply. “Words are problem. No sure how to explain, but dragon is… not source. Other dragon are.”

“Other dragons?” the mind-walker hastily asked, remembering well the enormous skeletons he had seen days ago, inside the man’s mind.

“Yes. Dragons are source. But it is no power… is duty,” the man slowly said, stopping only to take one more sip from the bottle. “Burden, even.”

“A burden?” Inoichi asked, his eyes widening a fraction. He didn’t like the sound of it. It reminded him too much about how the Sandaime described Uzumaki Naruto’s… condition.

“Sometimes,” Conrad nodded, before meeting Inoichi’s eyes. Even with the dim light, the Yamanaka could have sworn that they had become slitted for less than a second. “No asked for this.”

The shinobi silently stared at the other man for a long time, reflecting on what he had learned so far. He didn't have to be in the man's head to realize that the man's thoughts were taking a dark turn, and judging by the memories he'd seen earlier and how his subconscious reacted to reliving them, that definitely wasn't a good idea. As for the man's "power", he was pretty sure that he was at a dead end until Conrad gained a better grasp of their language. Considering that for all he knew it could've been anything from some weird bloodline to a sealed bijuu, there was no way they could ask for a demonstration.

"Say, Harissen-san, your... students," Inoichi asked, trying to distract the foreigner from the dark thoughts that were festering in his mind.

"What about them?" Conrad asked, throwing away the empty bottle as far as he could. The Yamanaka had to resist the urge to reprimand him for littering.

"They seem a bit... untrained. Not good at fighting," he said, adding the last bit when he saw a confused frown forming on the other man's face. Inoichi tactfully forgot to mention the fact that even a genin could probably beat them, though.

"Of course. They kids. Too young for that. They... huh... no know word... place where you learn things?"

“That could either be a school, or the Academy?”

“What is difference?”

“Well, in a school you learn… normal stuff, I guess? While in the academy you learn how to control your chakra, channel it to create jutsu with the use of handsigns, and—”

“You people use those words. I no know what they mean.”

“Magic,” Inoichi quickly said, deciding to dumb down the description about handsigns, chakra, elements and jutsu the most he could. “They learn to do magic at the academy. Among fighting and… other skills.”

"What is magic?"

"Magic is... doing things that are otherwise impossible," the Yamanaka stated after a little thought.

"Oh. Like this?" the man asked, comprehension dawning on his face. He flickered his left hand and much to Inoichi’s shocked surprise, a small light no bigger than a firefly but bright as the light bulb on the shack’s wall started to levitate in front of him. How was it possible, since the seals on his manacles should keep sucking his chakra dry?! "I do magic. Kids too. Learned at Winterhold Academy."

The shinobi studied the small light, weirded out by how… off it felt. Not because he had an apparently harmless light floating just beside him, but because he couldn’t feel any chakra emanating from it. He felt something, but it felt empty, like an echo… whatever it was, it wasn’t chakra. Furthermore, he had not felt any chakra being used by Harissen-san as he used the jutsu—Inoichi wasn’t sure if it should be classified as a ninjutsu or genjutsu—and on top of it the man had done it without handsigns at all! That was just unheard of!

“Winterhold Academy?” he asked, hiding his confusion as best as he could. If there was a place that taught such things, asking questions about it was a wise move to find out about Harissen Conrad’s allegiances.

“Old place. A cold place. Teach magic, lot people come to study. Learn magic there,” was the brief description.

“Wait, you mean that… you let people come and learn freely?” the mind-walker asked, this time not bothering to keep his composure.

“Of course. If them deserve to learn,” Conrad answered, like it was a matter of fact. Inoichi could feel his head spin a little. A place where everyone could just show up and be taught ‘magic’, no matter where they were from… such a thing was utterly alien to him, even if apparently they had some criteria when it came to selecting students.

“What—what about your students?” he asked, saying the first thing that came to mind. “Where do they come from?”

“Me think Beta come from Solitude—city of Skyrim, big one,” Conrad quickly explained as Inoichi got confused by the foreign word… only to be confused by another one. Although he could bet that ‘Skyrim’ was a nation of some kind. Nations had cities, after all. “Ta’Sava is… maybe from Khajiit caravan? And Sven… I no idea where Sven come from. He Imperial, can be anywhere.”

“You don’t even know where your students are from? … that sounds a bit irresponsible.”

“Never was responsible man,” the other blond snorted, crossing his arms. Although there was a trace of sadness in his voice.

“Why did you accept them, then?” Inoichi couldn’t help but ask, genuinely intrigued.

“Had to. Was forced to teach. Them and entire… group? Mob? Pack?”

“Class?” the Yamanaka proposed, although he couldn’t really imagine Harissen Conrad teaching anything to a—

“That right. Me teach them and entire class of kids when I came back to Academy, after years.”

“Years away?” he asked, intrigued. Was this normal for this Winterhold place, or had Minato’s brother a special permission, like the Sannin did? “How many?”

“Eight. Almost nine. Went there to… study what Minato gave me,” Conrad said, tapping a finger against his temple. “Then left. Here I am.”

“The memories?”

“No, them came later. First it was… uh… what take me here.”

“I’ve read the report of what happened with Anko and Ibiki,” Inoichi said, noting how his colleagues’ names seemed to irritate Conrad. “They mentioned that you traced a seal during the interrogation. Do you know about it?”

“No. I no even know what seal is… means nothing to me,” the man said, and Inoichi inwardly sighed in relief. Harissen Conrad didn’t know the Hiraishin no Jutsu. The Hokage would be glad to know that.

“Say, if you know that your students are not trained or… too young, as you said, how come you took them with you?”

"No take them. They hide in ship," Conrad said gruffly. "Me still angry."

"I see," Inoichi deadpanned. He had read Jiraiya’s report too of course. Normally he wouldn’t have, but since he was being assigned to this mission it had been necessary, and he was really happy that dealing with a ship full of foreigners stuck in a hostile nation was not his job. “You thought that the voyage could be too dangerous for them.”

“Yes, but… not just that,” Conrad said, peaking Inoichi’s interest. “Dangerous for them… being with me.”

“Why would you—You’re afraid of hurting them? With your ‘power’?”

“What? No! Me care for them, you dumb… dumb!” Conrad almost yelled, visibly flustered. If it was because of what he had just admitted, his lame attempt to insult him or both, Inoichi didn’t know. “Other people… enemies? Yes, enemies. Them would hurt them, to hurt me. Like you threaten to do,” he finished darkly, sparing the shinobi a glance.

“Well… I doubt that your enemies could do something to them here. Don’t you agree?” Inoichi asked trying to cheer up his friend’s brother. The only reaction he got was half a smile, half a snort.

"Minato have enemies, yes?" he asked after a short silence, much to Inoichi’s bewilderment. For not being a shinobi, he was good at seeing underneath the underneath.

"Yes, he did," Inoichi admitted. No reason to hide that, after all.

"You keep me here to hide from them,” Conrad merely stated, his tone strangely neutral.

"Partly, yes. Should they know that you are around, they would mistake you for Minato and even come to attack us just to get to you. Should they know you're just his brother—"

"They come after only me," the foreigner finished for him.

"Yes. In a way, we're protecting you."

"No need protection,” Conrad growled, frowning at him. “Me Dovahkiin. Me can fight."

"I'm sure you are," Inoichi slowly said, hesitating in front of the unknown word. If that’s how the four guests felt, it was surely irritating. "But even if you're a skilled warrior, or... dovakin or whatever you are, you would still be unable to defend yourself from a shinobi, especially if they prepare for it—"

"Give magic-man time to prepare, you no stop him," the self-proclaimed ‘magic man’ said smugly, sure of his words. Inoichi had to muster all his will to not laugh at the ridiculous appellative. Maybe it was a bad attempt to translate the word ‘dovakin’?

"Shinobi are still faster," he countered, trying to appeal to reason. After all, they had captured him.

"Then I slow them," Conrad counter-countered with a shrug.

"Slow them? How?" the shinobi asked, not really believing that such a thing could happen.

"Magic," the other blond said with an evil grin. “Dragon magic.”

"Look, this is getting us off topic and I don't want to discuss about who would win," Inoichi said with a groan.

“Because me would,” Conrad quickly replied.

“Keep telling yourself that,” the Yamanaka muttered. ”Now—”

“Want to ask for something,” the man interrupted him.

"What else do you want?" he asked, rolling his eyes. Harissen-san didn’t answer immediately, instead he glanced briefly towards the shack. Apparently, the teens had finished cleaning up and were now talking and joking in their native tongue.

"Want to teach them, Inoichi," the ‘dovakin’ firmly said, looking straight into the shinobi’s eyes.

For a long moment, neither of the two man said anything, both holding their breath: one because he hoped for an answer, the other because he was afraid to give it.

"No," Inoichi flatly told him. The village couldn’t allow the ‘magic-man’ to freely throw jutsu, even if it was to train his students.

"Them must learn," Conrad argued, his tone starting to be filled by anger. “You say it, them are untrained.”

"It's not my decision, Harissen-san—"

"Conrad,” he hissed, clearly still not liking being addressed so formally. “Call me Conrad."

"It's not my decision, Harissen-san!” Inoichi snapped. “And we can't let you throw fireballs or lightning around, do you understand that?"

"Can teach different things! Lots of things, no fighting, still good. Useful," Conrad said, sounding like he was really, really trying to push through the meager vocabulary with brute force. "Healing. Book things. Changing... stuff. Bottle... things!"

“Bottle things?” Inoichi muttered, confused by the choice of words. Then realization hit him as if a switch had been turned on inside his brain. “Do you mean the contents of those bottles we found on you?”

“No, other lot bottles me had,” Conrad deadpanned, the sarcasm dripping from his words. “What you think?”

“How do you make those liquids, anyway?” he asked. The Hokage and the scientific division seemed to be very curious and confused by them respectively.

“Bit like… cooking. Only not. You see,” the other man assured with a sly smile. For the life of him, the Yamanaka couldn’t see something that had been compared to cooking being dangerous, especially if they showed the process with the ANBU watching them like hawks. It would kill two birds with a stone, Harissen Conrad would be satisfied and the Sandaime would get some answers.

“I will ask the Hokage,” Inoichi sighed. “No promises, though.”

“We need something,” Conrad added, failing to express any gratitude. The bastard.

“What is it this time?”


“Ingredients.”

"Hn... where is this—" Naruto tiredly asked immediately after regaining consciousness.

"Get up," Jiraiya ordered, not giving the kid time to register his surroundings.

"W-what?" he asked, still barely on his feet.

"The training ends today... if you don't want to die then figure it out yourself," the Sannin said, before flicking Naruto's forehead with enough strength to make the genin stumble a few meters behind.

Just enough to fall into the ravine.

Jiraiya really, really hoped that Minato would forgive him for this.

The small kitchen and dining room area had been turned into a sort of makeshift laboratory, as the four inhabitants of the shack trafficked between pots, alembics, and mortar and pestles, carefully pulverizing ingredients and reagents and adding them to the boiling mixtures. The chalkboard that had been used for the language lessons was full of instructions and lists in the foreigners’ language, and the kids would glance at it every once in a while before proceeding with their work.

The ANBU were carefully surveying the scene of course, along with a chunin from the archives that was documenting everything he could. Inoichi, instead, was more interested in watching Harissen Conrad.

Who was seemingly focused on the task of eating a flower from the ones that Inoichi had brought from his family’s shop, among other things. Chewing it, slowly munching it, eyes half-closed like he was trying to understand every detail of the little flower’s flavour, searching for… something.

“This is good for, urhm… green one,” he finally said to his students, spitting the chewed petals’ remains. Even if the instructions had been written in their language, they couldn’t speak it. That way the demonstration served two purposes: giving them more familiarity with the local tongue and showing off their skills.

“What is the ‘green one’ for?” Inoichi asked, turning towards the foreigner.

“It help if you tired,” Conrad said, pausing to think about what words to use. Minato’s memories surely did miracles in the last weeks but learning a language was still a slow process, of course. “You feel… rested, after you drink it.”

“Sounds like a liquid soldier pill,” the desk-nin muttered while taking a few notes. “Is there any side-effect?”

“Side…?” Conrad asked, clearly confused.

“Is it dangerous to drink?” the Yamanaka clarified for him.

“No. If you no fill whole stomach. Or drink too different ones."

"Why is that?" the mind-walker asked.

"May cause… reaction. Inside you,” the Yondaime’s brother explained, pointing at his own stomach.

"Not a good thing," Sven added, grimacing at the thought.

"What happens to you if one of these 'reactions' happens inside your stomach?" the chunin piped-in, leaning closer to the table. Conrad opened his mouth and immediately closed it, apparently unsure how to explain it.

"Result may vary," he finally said with a mirthless snort.

"Seriously?" Inoichi asked. That was surely not the explanation he was hoping for.

"Dozens on dozens of effects. Mixing with no sense in a person. Try guess," Conrad quickly said meeting his eyes with a hard stare.

"Alright, but why don’t you give us an example?” the Yamanaka encouraged.

“May hurt you. Make you sick… not work at all. Or…”


“Or...?”

"Saw man drink seven different ones. Stomach exploded,” Conrad deadpanned. The kids grimaced at the thought, or at the tone their teacher had used.

Inoichi glanced over as the chuunin's face lit up and he quickly scribbled the detail down. He would bet that the scientific division would probably try to weaponize such a thing as an assassination weapon.

"But them good for you if you careful!"

"What if you're in a hurry and you accidentally drink the wrong one? What then?"

"Made mistake a few times. You learn not to. Keep them organized."

"What about the red one?" Inoichi gestured to the one that the girl, Beta, was carefully pouring in a vial. “What does it do?”

"That one heal you."

“Heal you? So it’s a cure for some sickness? Which one?” the other shinobi asked.

“Sickness… ? No, no. It heal you,” Conrad repeated. “Stop blood, close wound… ?”

“So it helps the body to heal?” the chunin inquired. “How quickly?”

“Lot quickly, most common kind,” the man immediately guaranteed, to which Inoichi and the chunin exchanged a perplexed stare.

“That’s just impossible,” the desk-nin said disbelievingly.

"No, is truth," Conrad countered, frowning at the statement like it was an accusation.

"Harissen-san, surely you must realize how ridiculous that sounds,” Inoichi tried to reason. “To heal quickly just by drinking something?"

"Beta, is it ready?" the other blond asked without looking at the girl.

"Huh?” the teen mumbled in surprise. “Yes I think so but why—"

Without even waiting for the girl to finish her question, Conrad took his hand and bit at the edge of his palm with a swift crunch, his face tightening against the pain.

Every shinobi in the room, even the observing chuunin immediately fell into combat-ready stances, startled by the sudden gesture as well-ingrained training kicked in at the sight of blood. The magelings flinched at the obviously hostile postures and looked to Conrad for guidance, but other than that he made no motions to them, still chewing his own hand instead. They opted to try to look the least signficant as possible and held their breath.

"Harissen-san!” Inoichi exclaimed. “What are you doing?!"

Conrad drew his dripping hand away, and gestured for Beta to hand him the phial. He took it from the girl’s shaking hands and downed the contents with a single gulp.

Much to Inoichi's awe, the wound started to mend itself, one stratum at a time, until the skin closed like a curtain. leaving only a small smear of blood on an otherwise untouched hand the only sign that the wound had even been there.

"No scar," Conrad said, approvingly. "Good, Beta. Good. Still tastes bad."

"Sensei please no do that!" Beta yelled, finally getting over her panic.

"Inoichi-san, what's he—" the chunin mumbled, only to be interrupted by Inoichi’s awed voice.

"This is going to change everything about field medicine..."

"Really? Simple thing back home,” Conrad shrugged, and the Yamanaka couldn’t help but wonder how such a miraculous thing had been developed in a land without electricity. “Better for little wounds. Bad ones... you need healer."

"This is simple?!” the chuunin exclaimed, flabbergasted. “How many of these brews do you have in your homeland?"

"Many. I write list," the foreigner said. Inoichi couldn’t help but think that men would’ve killed to have that list. And here he was, offering it to them without a second thought, like it was common knowledge… maybe it was, in Harissen Conrad's homeland. If only he knew that entire wars could be waged over such a 'discovery'. Droves of shinobi would gladly bleed and die for any chance to give their village an edge or to keep it secret. And this? This was no mere edge. This was a new tool altogether. Foreign, unknown, and powerful.

Even the daimyo would have demanded it, for his subjects and his armies.

"Keep going, you three. Check ingredients before use," Conrad said, putting the empty vial on the table and completely unaware of what he may have done. "One more hour."

"I think I've heard enough about how brews and tonics are prepared for now," the chunin giddily declared. "Inoichi-san? If you would...."

"Harissen-san?" Inoichi called, getting a scroll out of his flak jacket as he took a step towards the man. "Inside this scrolls there are some of your bottled... tonics, I guess. We would like to know what they do."

"No call me that—What?” Conrad said in confusion, interrupting yet another attempt to correct Inoichi about his name. “Inside scroll?"

"You... don't have sealing scrolls in your land, do you?" the blond shinobi asked, finding it ironic that such a place could have incredibly advanced healing—and who knew what else—but still lack one of the most common and used sealing techniques.

"We have... Old Scrolls, me guess,” the man said, caressing his beard. “And small ones with magic. No ‘sealing’ scrolls."

"Allow me, then," Inoichi said, placing the scroll on the ground and opening it, revealing the standard seal traced onto it. A couple of hand seals later, and a pile of items appeared on the scrolls with a flash of smoke.

On the paper surface laid a perfectly organized small collection of glass vials and small bottles, their contents of various colours but the blue and red ones being the most common.

Inoichi turned to face Minato's brother again, only to see the man all but lunge to a brownish bottle.

"Me afraid lost it!" Conrad yelled, apparently filled with joy.

"Is that an important one?" Inoichi asked, wondering what could make the man react like this.

"Most important! No like sake you give me,"

"Not like the sake? ... that's just cheap alcohol?" the Yamanaka asked unamused. Maybe he should evaluate Harissen Conrad as an alcoholic in an eventual psychological profile.

"No, you shame of Nord! It's—"

"What is a Nord?" Inoichi asked.

"Me is Nord! Man from Skyrim. Your ancestors too, I bet."

"That doesn't make sense, Harissen-san,” Inoichi tried to reason. “My family always lived in Fire Country."

"You have Nord blood in you, or me no Dovahkiin," Conrad just scoffed.

"I am Nord, too!" Beta said from the table, shyly raising her hand.

"Is mead. Best drink ever!” the man continued, reprising the praise of the beverage. “You should taste, and—"

"I can't drink on the job, Harissen-san,” Inoichi interrupted him. “What is it made from, anyway?"

"Honey, of course!"

"Honey? Harissen-san, I never heard of a liquor made of honey."

A sudden silence fell on the room, the noise of ingredients being grinded, mixed or otherwise processed ceasing all of sudden. Inoichi wasn't sure why he glanced up at first, but then he realized that it was because the magelings had gone absolutely still and wide-eyed. As had Conrad.

He couldn't help but look at the man's haunted expression. It was like looking at a veteran sporting the mile-wide stare, a child who had been robbed of his candies, and a kicked dog all rolled in one.

"Conrad-sensei...?" Ta'Sava called all of sudden in a worried tone.

"No now, Ta'Sava,” the desperate man replying with an empty voice. “Please."

"Conrad-sensei!" the Khajiit repeated, exchanging glances between his teacher and his tools.

"What?!?" Conrad yelled at the top of his lungs, much like someone who had been disturbed during a mourning.

"Is it normal?" the young Khajiit asked, indicating the thick purple smoke that was emanating from his alambic.

Inoichi almost grabbed Conrad as the man suddenly ran towards the other end of the small room, but when he realized that he had an arm stretched towards the appliance, the man’s words about unexpected reactions came back to mind and he quickly grabbed Beta and Sven’s collar sleeves and forced them to step back from the table.

Conrad only managed to pull Ta’Sava away before the alambic exploded.

The man kept looking outside of the window which offered a good view of the village he had grown in. If in his heart he felt any nostalgia for those simpler times, he didn't show it. And even if he had felt it, he would've squashed it under his hate.

He looked away, and placed the large hat, so similar to the one he had once desired, on the desk besides him. The hotel suite wasn't incredibly large but it was considered fancy enough for a honored guest as him.

Well, at least for the man whose identity he'd stolen.

“You fool,” he said without looking back towards the door. “Do you know how risky it is to meet as our plans are already in motion?”

“I am very aware, ‘Kazekage-dono’,” his spy’s voice replied, a sort of dark sarcasm filling the last words.

“Why are you here then?” Orochimaru asked, turning towards his apprentice and best agent.

“I came across some information that you may want to hear,” the bespectacled shinobi said with a smirk.

“If you mean the identity of the Iwa team’s kunoichi, I am well aware of that. Even then, you should’ve given it to your contact among my forces,” the fallen Sannin said in a hard tone, not breaking his character in case one of the Suna shinobi that were guarding the area reserved for ‘his’ entourage decided to eavesdrop. “Coming straight to me was unwise.”

“Aah, as expected of Kazekage-dono,” Kabuto said, but Orochimaru could tell that he had not expected that at all. “Should I refer to my master what are your intentions, then?”

Which was a way to ask for specific orders, of course. Orochimaru looked again outside of the window. In a matter of days, Konoha’s peaceful streets would be filled with shinobi clashing against each other, the screams of the wounded and the bodies of the fallen, and the Ichibi rampaging through its buildings. This thought pleased him, and a creepy grin spread through his burrowed face.

The invasion's objective was simple. Kill Sarutobi and cause as much damage as possible to the village's shinobi forces and infrastructures. One didn’t just conquer a shinobi village: too many problems between the nation’s regular military or the guerrilla tactics that the surviving inhabitants could employ. You destroyed villages instead, forcing the nation to ask for the shinobi’s specialized services from outside of its own borders.

The perspective of prosperity for his own village had been the selling point when it had come to seal the deal and convince the Kazekage to agree to this bold plan… before killing him, of course.

A plan though, no matter how good, never survived first contact with the enemy. Especially such a large-scale one. Sarutobi taught him that, and he had seen how true that was.

The invasion was a risky move and it could fail. Only a fool would think otherwise. Too many key elements were out of his control, especially their trump card, Suna's jinchuuriki.

The boy was not stable, and even his sensei had seemed unable to keep him in check lately. The Kazekage, the real one, had been a fool to not fix the problem. Not that he had not tried, from what he had heard, but the man's attempts against his own son's life had been sloppy and inefficient, at best.

And during the last month, he'd heard worrying rumors of Jiraiya's return. To train the son of his former pupil, the sentimental fool!

He was still a potentially dangerous opponent, and a very valuable asset to Konoha's forces.

The result of the invasion could be less certain than his followers and the Suna-nin thought. Should the Leaf survive the assault, though... the girl, the Tsuchikage's granddaughter, could be a valuable pawn.

After all, accidents happened during a battle. Nobody would know who had thrown the kunai, and Iwa would never believe Konoha's innocence. And then they would finish off the weakened village.

All in all, a good contingency plan. No matter what, Konoha would fall.

"I will send a word to you," Orochimaru said without looking back at his spy. "Now, begone!"

"Wouldn't you want to know why Iwa is showing such an interest into Konoha right now, though?" Kabuto said with a sly smile. "I found something interesting while browsing the more recent hospital archives. The highly secured ones."

Orochimaru turned back towards his minion, slightly arching an eyebrow. Kabuto was being insolent, but he probably had a reason to.

Without saying a word. the double-agent took a scroll out of his pouch and passed it to his master. The snake wearing the Kazekage’s skin opened it, and for a long time there was absolute silence in the room.

Then, a single word escaped Orochimaru’s mouth, carrying as much venom as he could.

“... Namikaze…

Wake up.

He is close. Wake up!

Conrad stirred, disturbed by the words resounding in his dream. Opening his eyes, he saw an unknown white ceiling above him.

Still half-asleep and aching, he realized how much he distrusted Akavir. Since he had arrived in this gods-forsaken lands, he had been knocked out way more times than he felt he deserved.

“Hey, he’s awake!” a voice exclaimed in Cyrodilic. Conrad heard the sounds of feet getting closer to his bed, because of course he was on a bed. Raising his head, he saw the magelings standing around him, their expressions a mix of relief and worry.

“Welcome back, Master,” Beta said, offering him a glass of water.

“Where am I?” he asked, rubbing the sleep out of his eyes before accepting it.

“It’s some big building where they heal people, but it doesn’t look like a temple to me,” Sven explained. “They have a lot of weird things here, way weirder than those light-orbs they use.”

“Ta’Sava is sorry for what happened, Master!” the Khajiit apologized, his ears turned back. “Ta’Sava didn’t realize that he had put the wrong reagent in the boiling solution! It’s Ta’Sava’s fault if—”

“Are you three alright?” he questioned, interrupting his feline student. At this, the three kids exchanged a few confused glances.

“Uh, yes we are fine, Master,” Beta replied. “The explosion wasn’t very big—”

“Ta’Sava got a bit singed, but it’s fine because it’s Ta’Sava’s fault so—”

“—and even our guards and Inoichi were left unscathed.”

“Good,” Conrad said tersely, finally drinking the water. “How long was I out?”

“A couple of days,” Sven said. “We—well, the guards—took you to this place, and tried to interrogate us—”

“They did what?” Conrad demanded.

“They just asked a few questions, they didn’t understand that it was an accident, Master. At first, at least.”

“We cleared it, though,” Beta added, snatching the now empty glass.

“Of course you did, otherwise we would be back in the dungeons,” Conrad muttered, slowly sitting up on the bed. The kids didn’t reply to that, glancing to each other nervously. “What is it? Did I get injured badly? Is the mead safe?!” the Nord asked in a hurry, as he remembered the important stuff.

“No, no no!” Beta hurriedly said. “The mead is safe, back at our shed. And you didn’t lose any… important bits. Don’t worry Master!”

“Yeah, the healers here did a very good job. The potions we prepared, too,” Sven explained, although he seemed half-way ready to take a step back from the bed.

“And Beta helped, too,” Ta’Sava added for a good measure with a nervous grin. “Master Conrad didn’t even get new scars. Only the ones he already has!”

“Then why are you—” Conrad started, stopping to talk as he massaged his aching jaw.

His shaved jaw.

“The healers had to trim it to heal your burns!” Beta quickly started to talk. “And half of it was gone anyway—”

“Because of the explosion,” Sven added, for a matter of precision.

“Ta’Sava is sorry, Master Conrad! It was an accident!”

“—but it will grow back!” Beta continued, ignoring her fellow apprentices. “I mean, I think it will… the wounds healed completely though! Isn’t that something to be happy of?”

Sadly for the Nord girl, Conrad was not listening to her or her companions. At all. He was more focused on trying to take deep, calming breaths. And failing as the rage inside him kept getting closer to the breaking point. Not only had he been captured, imprisoned, interrogated, humiliated, probed, and confined for a month in a hut.

But in his most recent memory, he had also found out that he was stuck in a mead-less land and he’d lost his beard to boot!

Before he knew it, he was on his feet, gritting his teeth and a feral growl threatening to escape his throat. He passed by his students and went straight towards the room’s door, ignoring the weird furniture entirely.

He needed fresh air. Or to punch something.

Rue the foolish soul that would try to stop him.

Naruto and Shikamaru bid farewell to Lee’s eccentric sensei and quietly left the hospital room. They had waited a bit—alright, a lot—before leaving just to be sure that the creepy Suna genin would actually leave, instead of ambushing them just outside the door.

Both the boys were still shaken by the tale of the redhaired teen’s life, especially Naruto since it was way too similar to his own for comfort. A part of him couldn’t help but wonder if he could’ve gone the same way had he not met Iruka-sensei or his teammates, and the rest of him was scared sh*tless at the idea of facing someone like Gaara during the tournament.

How did you fight someone with such techniques and powers who claimed to exist only to kill others?

“If it hadn’t been for bushy-brows-sensei…” he started, not looking Shikamaru in the eyes.

“Yeah…” Shikamaru mumbled in agreement, even if Naruto were stating the obvious.

"So, Shikamaru... you're gonna see Chouji now, right?" he asked, trying to change topic.

"Yeah. Want to come?"

"No, I think that I'll go straight home. You know..."

"Yeah," the Nara simply shrugged. “See you tomorrow then.”

“Sure,” Naruto said, waving goodbye as he started to walk towards the staircase at the end of the hallway. The blond knew that he was in a tricky situation, to use an eup… an anal… to put it simply! He wanted to punch Neji’s stupid face and win, but doing so he would risk fighting Gaara who wouldn’t think twice before killing him.

That was, of course, if Gaara won against Sasuke.

What if Sasuke was killed by Gaara, though?! No, no, there was no way that he would die. He had been trained for a month by Kakashi-sensei after all and he had the whole ‘vengeance’ thing to do, he wouldn’t let himself be killed before that.

Maybe he was worrying himself for nothing. He had been training for a month too, after all! Sure, Ero-Sennin wasn’t as cool as Kakashi-sensei but he was supposed to be a powerful ninja and stuff—he was surely more perverted than Kakashi-sensei. And he had taught him… how to… summon… toads…

Naruto groaned, considering how little help a small amp… amphi… a toad would be during a fight. Unless he summoned the boss toad, Gamabunta. A giant toad surely sounded helpful in a fight… too bad that said giant toad didn’t like it that much, considering what had happened after he had summoned him. What kind of impression would he give to the tournament judges if it happened again?


He was half-way on the stairwell when he heard a commotion and some muffled shouts coming from the floor above him. Strangely enough, they didn’t seem to quiet down, they were actually becoming louder. Didn’t they know that this was a hospital? Even he knew better than to piss off the doctors like this...

It wasn’t his business though and surely the nurses would stop whoever was yelling so much, but before he took another step there was a loud crash, along with the sound of broken glass.

“That’s it!” he exclaimed, turning around and storming up the stairwell to the next floor, determined to find the source of the commotion. It didn’t matter who it was, he was going to chew out whoever was the responsible. There were actual sick people in this place!

When he finally reached the floor where all the noise was coming from, he was able to hear the yells a bit clearer from the half-closed door.

“Please sir, just...just calm down, there are patients who need to rest,” a woman, probably a doctor or a nurse said from beyond the door. “If you force me to, I will have to—”

“I no understand half you say!” another voice yelled—so this was the guy that was causing all this mess! Naruto got closer to the door, starting to roll up his sleeves. “WHERE IS EXIT?!”

“Restrain him!” someone else shouted. Naruto bolted towards the door, startled by the sudden sound of a brawl and even more shouting. He grabbed the handle—

“—RO DAH!”

The door opened, pushed almost out off its hinges by a shockwave-like explosion and Naruto found himself hitting the stairwell’s railing and slumping on the ground, breathless from the impact. Someone else, one of the masked guys that always seemed to hang around the Hokage, landed beside him, managing somehow to roll on his feet even if completely unbalanced.

The masked shinobi tried to get up but another figure darted out of the door, punching him so hard that his white mask shattered in dozens of fragments. The now maskless ninja fell on the ground, unmoving, and his attacker roared in satisfaction.

It wasn’t a sound that would be associated to a human’s throat.

Naruto had to suppress a shiver as the tall man—although not as tall as Ero-Sennin—turned towards him, revealing a pair of slitted eyes. Although these were blue, they reminded the young genin way too much of Orochimaru.

As their eyes met, the man seemed to freeze on his spot. Naruto couldn’t swear that he was even breathing. He noticed the other details of the man’s face, like the blond hair, the scarred face, the wrinkles starting to show up around the eyes, but found himself unable to look away from those slitted pupils.

Naruto was halfway moving his hand towards his kunai holster, when the stranger’s face seemed to morph all of sudden. Gone was the feral frown, replaced with a confused look. The eyes were changing too, the pupil becoming rounder, until they became more similar to a normal eye, not very different from his own besides the look of surprise and shock in them.

The man opened his mouth a couple of times, but no sound was coming from it, as if he was at a loss of words.

“Naruto… ?” he finally said, looking strangely surprised by the word that had escaped from his lips.


“How do you know my name, old man?!”

Chapter 11: Discussions and Sour Truths

Chapter Text

His fist shattered the guard’s stupid mask, and Conrad roared in satisfaction as the man fell on the ground, unconscious. It was a sound coming from the deep bowels of his soul, and he felt his larynx tremble at the might of it.

It was liberating. It was intoxicating. It was dangerous.

A part of him knew that he was getting close to the edge but after what he had to put up with, he just didn't care.

Movement just on the corner of his sight caught his attention and he abruptly turned to face his new opponent. It was then that his mind and soul ground to a complete and utter stop.

A boy, a very young boy, not even in his teens, was laying on the ground, a look of fear in his eyes.

The picture of helplessness sent something predatory stirring in his blood, but he ignored it, concentrating on the boy's eyes.

He had already seen those eyes.

They were very similar to his own.

He felt his rage simmer down and fade, replaced with confusion as memories flooded right in front of him, echoes of a life that wasn't his own but sometimes surely felt like it was.

"Naruto...?" he asked uncertainly, almost not realizing that he had spoken out loud.

The boy flinched before a defiant glint entered his eyes. "How do you know my name, old man?!"

How, indeed. Conrad could feel his head spin, trying to register what he had just realized. While his nephew— his nephew —waited for an answer that the Nord wasn't sure how to formulate, he realized something.

He had been lied to. Inoichi had lied to him, about Minato's family. Minato had a son, before dying.

The kid wasn’t a copy of Minato, of course. His hair was blond, but a slightly different shade. His skin was a a bit more tanned, and his face had a rounder shape. Conrad couldn’t help but wonder how much of his mother was in him, then he frowned as he felt Minato’s memories playing tricks on him once again.

He had never seen anything like the marks on the boy’s cheeks though. They looked like scars, but a closer inspection revealed that they weren’t scars, or tattoos or birthmarks or anything like that. They were just… marks on the skin.

"Hey! I'm talking to you!" Naruto said, getting up with a frown on his face. He barely reached Conrad's chest. The boy was short . "Answer my question! And what’re you doing?! There are sick people here!"

Conrad would've liked to reply to the disrespectful tone accordingly, or just say anything... but what was he supposed to say? What's the first thing a man should say to a kid that he just met and magically found out he was related to?

"Well?! And why did you knock out this guy?!" Naruto asked loudly, seemingly taking notice of the passed out guard only now.

The Nord focused again on the boy, he had not even realized that he had got lost in his own thoughts. He supposed that presentations were in order.

"You see, Naruto..." he started, hesitating for a moment. "I—"

"Don't move!" someone ordered, mercilessly breaking the mood.

"Oh you have to be jesting," Conrad muttered in Nordic, before slowly turning his head. Behind him, two masked guards had literally just appeared , weapons in hands and ready to strike. He was really getting tired of that.

Sadly for the poor bastards, he had long realized that if they truly wanted to kill him, they would've done it already. "Tiid Klo Ul."

Time froze, or at least it was slowed down like if was made of molasses, and everyone along with it. Everyone but the Dragonborn.

He cracked his knuckles as he turned to face them, and they lunged at him. Unsurprisingly, even with Conrad’s shout they were almost as fast as a normal man would’ve been in more mundane circ*mstances, which was a testament to their speed. Almost was not enough, though.

Conrad side-stepped the first attack, idly noticing that hadn’t he moved he would’ve been hit with the flat of the blade—yet another confirmation that they didn’t want to kill him—and grabbed the man’s wrist. With a single motion, he twisted it until the short, single-edged sword fell from the guard’s hand.

The sword fell at normal speed, but to Conrad it was like it was falling through water. He caught it by the hilt with his free hand easily and used it to parry the other guard’s attack. The blades clashed and locked, as Conrad shoved his own one to the side, leaving an opening in his opponent's defense.

With a spin, he threw the unarmed guard right against the other one, sending them tumbling down. To their credit, they were already trying to get up, and it was clear that they would’ve not landed in a mess of limbs and bodies as the Nord had hoped.

He let go of his weapon and bounded at them with his bare hands. Both found the neck of one of the guards, but the Dragonborn didn’t stop his sprint.


There was no grace, no complex or calculated movements or anything like that. Just brute strength and momentum, aimed to slam the two men’s unprotected napes against the wall.

The impact sounded dull through the effect of Conrad’s dragon shout, but the cracks forming on the hard surface were satisfying enough.

The sword fell from the hand of the guard on his right, while the other grabbed his arm and tried to free himself. The fact that they had refused to fall unconscious just pissed him even more.

So he pulled, just enough to distance the two fighters from the wall. Then he slammed them against it again.

And again.

And again, each time causing even more cracks to appear on the wall.

Adding a knee to the crotch of the more resilient guy for a good measure, Conrad finally let them go. They fell like two sacks of potatoes, or at least how two sacks of potatoes would fall if time were slowed down, before remaining limp on the ground.

Then he kicked them both on their sides, just to be sure. Hopefully they would not disturb his reunion with his unexpectedly newly-found kin now.

Time started to flow normally as he straightened up, dusting off his hands. Turning around, he almost tried to resume his introduction from where he had been interrupted from, only to stop on his tracks as he saw Naruto.

The kid was looking at him with a shocked expression, eyes darting from the three unconscious men to Conrad. He had even taken a step back.

The Nord realized that beating three city guards, even if they deserved it, wasn’t exactly a very good first impression. Scratching his head, he tried to think how to explain his actions.

Naruto’s punch caught him completely by surprise, hitting him square on his chin.

Conrad’s reaction was swift enough, grabbing the kid’s orange— orange! —jacket and simply lifting him in the air, giving him a bad eye. Naruto immediately started to thrashing around, trying to hit him and screaming words that the Dragonborn didn’t know, probably swear words or threats.

Conrad sighed, inwardly asking himself what he was supposed to do now. As long as reunions between long-lost family members could go, this was probably among the least encouraging ones.

For being such a shortie, the kid had a pretty good punch, he mused. Quite fast, too. Not as the masked fools that had spied on him for a month or so, but noticeably so. His eyes caught sight of the headband with the snail mark on his nephew’s forehead, the same that Inoichi, Anko and a few others he had seen sported proudly. He had been so absorbed from the discovery of having a family that he had not even noticed it.

An apprentice, perhaps? Maybe still studying how to become a “shinobi” in that place Inoichi mentioned? He sure seemed young enough...

“Let me go, dammit!” Naruto shouted, talking so fast that Conrad was barely able to understand the words. “What the hell do you think you’re doing, fighting the old man’s guys?!”

“They attack me first,” he replied, honestly confused by how that seemed to be a bad thing. It wasn’t like he had conjured a knife and slit their throats, after all. Sure, there would probably be a fine to pay or something like that later, but it was totally worth it. “Naruto, listen very—”

Conrad's instructions came to a screeching halt as three figures came barreling down the hall.

“Master, please calm down—” Beta, the first to arrive, called to him in their mother tongue. Her words died as she noticed the three unconscious guards. “Oh no. It’s too late.”

“That’s it. We’ll be hunted down and killed like outlaws now. I knew it was going to happen sooner or later,” Sven proclaimed somberly. “You guys owe me twenty septims.”

“Ta’Sava did not sign up for this—Oooh. A little copy of the master. Except for the whiskers. Why he have whiskers? He is no Khajiit.”

“Wha—What the—?!” Naruto yelped, eyes darting from one mage to the other in confusion. Conrad doubted it was because he had been hearing unfamiliar words. If he had to guess, he would say that he had grasped that he was staring at a bipedal cat. It seemed to be the norm when someone saw Ta’Sava these days.

“Master… who is that boy?” Beta asked, sounding concerned by how he was holding Naruto above the ground level close to a stairway well.

Conrad sighed, slowly putting down his nephew, without letting him go though since the kid predictably tried to bolt out. “Speak Akaviric or how it’s called, Beta,” Conrad said gruffly in said language. “Is rude to speak in way someone can’t understand. Come on,” he gestured, starting to walk towards the stairs, pulling Naruto along with him. “You three, too.”

“Hey, wait a minute!” Naruto protested, trying to get free but still following his steps. “Who are you guys? And why do you talk funny—”

“I said, come on !” he growled without slowing down. “We must go.”

“Go where?!” Naruto and the magelings asked in unison.

"I want explanation. Must kill blonde liar too... Maybe he explain before."

“An explanation about what , you crazy old man?!” the kid yelled at the top of his lungs.

“That is a good description,” Sven snorted, which gained him a playful whack in the head from Ta’Sava.

Conrad was about to ask to the boy if he was always this loud, but a sudden thought made him pause. As he stopped on the lower floor, right in front of one of the large windows, Naruto freed himself of his grip and took a step back, a confused and yet defiant expression on his face. The Nord studied the kid’s face for a few, tense seconds. Even the magelings didn’t dare to interrupt.

There was no recognition or realization in his nephew’s eyes.

“They never tell you about your father?” he asked with a heavy sigh. Naruto’s eyes went wide at that, confirming his suspicions.

“My… father?” the stunned child whispered. Oh, this was going to be so easy to explain.

Something about this didn’t make sense though. If Minato had been their leader, why would these people not tell his son about his father's identity?

Unless he was a bastard? The dreams and bits he had experienced from Minato's memories had shown him a woman , not a wife ... Not yet, at least. But seeing how fragmented and confusing they had been, he didn't think he would get any confirmation of Naruto's legitimacy from them.

Not that there was anything wrong with being a bastard. But he knew well that some people and cultures thought that having a son out of wedlock was dishonorable, especially for someone in a high position. That could explain why people could not acknowledge the boy as Minato's family. Like Inoichi had.

Unless there was something else he had not been told, that was the only reason he could think of. Or perhaps Minato had kept it a—

He heard the sound of running footsteps, and he saw something green and fast rushing at him from his side. He turned to face it—

“DYNAMIC—”

Conrad felt the blow on the torso, and immediately after there was the sound of something breaking all around him.

A split of a second later, he was staring at the sky, surrounded by glass shards. Then he saw the ground in the distance, racing to meet him...

“Crap!” he exclaimed with a tinge of panic, frantically tapping to the power of the Aetherius and putting his knowledges in the school of Alteration at work. Spreading his arms wide open, he forced gravity to lessen its grip on him. It wasn’t enough to reach full levitation, not by a long shot, but it surely slowed him down enough.

The Nord landed in the middle of the street with a grunt, falling on his knees. Not a very graceful landing, but at least he had nothing broken.

He was aware of the startled people around him, but the pangs of pain from the cuts and glass shards edged all over his body seemed a bit more important.

With as much care he could muster, he started to dig them from his skin, trying to avoid to break them further otherwise healing the deeper cuts would be a problem later.

All around him, Conrad could feel the stares. The whispers. He even saw a couple of people point at him with awe-struck expressions. Shouldn’t they have been calling the guards instead? Or was it normal for people to be thrown out of windows around here?

Oh, right. He had lost his beard, so he looked like Minato—

A figure landed a little distance from him, way more gracefully than he had fell to the ground. The green color was the first thing his mind registered. Lots and lots of green, on what looked to be well-toned muscles.

Then he saw the hair, shaped like a bowl.

Much to his surprise, the people on the street didn't seem to react to the man's appearance as much as he would've thought.

"How unyouthful of you to cause trouble in a hospital! If it is a fight that you wish for, let us continue out here so as not to disturb my most youthful student and the rest of the patients!" the green-clad man proclaimed boisterously. "As much as I admire the flames of your passion, I would prefer if you would stand down!"

Conrad didn't understand everything that the strange man had said, partly because of the weird way he spoke, but mostly for the fury mounting from the deepest corners of his soul.

He had caught the part about calming down and surrendering. Normally Conrad would have even listened. He wasn't the kind of person that picked a fight in the middle of a street.

Not without a damn good reason, at least.

However, he had a bad couple of days, between the news about the lack of mead available on the local markets and the loss of the beard he was so proud of. Then he had been attacked just because he wanted to get some fresh air.

Oh, and he found out that he had a living blood relative. It was that kind of news that changed how some people looked at their lives.

But this utter fool, this man in green, had taken him away from Naruto before he could explain to the kid about his father. Which apparently nobody had ever bothered to do.

Also, he threw him out of a window. From a tall building.

Picking out the last of the shards wedged in his upper arms, Conrad extended a palm towards the freak of nature. " Burn ."

A stream of flames shot from his hand, engulfing the green-dressed man.

Conrad heard a startled scream from the crowd, but instead of running away from the fight the people just seemed to move on the edges of the street, just enough to be safe, chattering among themselves.

What was wrong with these—

"I understand,” the voice of the green man said from behind him. “Out of respect for your resolve, I'll give you the fight you wish."

Before Conrad could even spun around, he felt the blow. It was like being hit by a warhammer, and like a warhammer it spread fire from his side to his whole body. There was a sickening crunch, and at least one rib fractured from the impact, which cracked a few more for sure.

A pained yell died in his throat as a punch crashed on his chest, knocking the wind out of him. Another punch immediately followed, this time striking his left cheek. All of this had happened in a single green and painful blur.

Conrad blindly aimed another jet of magical flames against his opponent, but it singed nothing but air. Another blow—either a kick or a punch—exploded against the back of his head, and he felt his vision swimming, just on the brink of unconsciousness.

Something stirred inside the Nord. Being knocked unconscious like a milk-drinker? Again ? f*ck that.

Gritting his teeth, the mage pulled together his hands and forced as much power he could muster into a spell, trying to overcome the limits imposed from the manacles. He let it go, a brief azure flash surrounded his body just before the man’s next strike hit him square on his face.

It was a strong punch, but the pain wasn’t anywhere near comparable to the blows he had just been pummelled with. Instead, it felt more like a strong slap to his face, which helped the Nord to clear his head.

The punches ceased all of a sudden, and Conrad looked up, bruised, bloodied, but getting steadier on his feet. He saw the man in the horrible attire staring at him with undisguised curiosity, his pose vaguely defensive.

"Just now, you somehow made your skin harder,” the green-clad fighter muttered in wonder. “I can feel it with my fists."

"No sh*t," Conrad replied. It was a lame comeback, but considering that he barely felt half of his face he couldn’t think of anything better. Frankly, he counted himself lucky he still had all his teeth inside his mouth.

Taking advantage of the unexpected pause, he moved his hands on his wounded side, concentrating as best as he could. A warm golden light appeared above each hand, he felt the pain from the broken rib subside, as bone roughly melded itself. The cuts and scrapes from the glass shards slowly closed as well, and his many bruises faded a bit. From across the street, his opponent watched with rapt fascination.

Which was good. The longer he stood still to stare at him, the longer the Dragonborn could come up with a plan. If Conrad had thought the masked men were fast, this green-clad monstrosity was made them look sluggish. It didn’t even feel like fighting against a human.

No wonder he was dressed like that. He probably knew that nobody would criticize his dressing preferences.

As soon as he felt good enough, Conrad shifted the way he was using his magic with a simple flicker of his fingers, and the golden lights faded away, being replaced by little electric arches. He could feel the energy building up, but part of it was being lost because of the accursed manacles he was still wearing, greatly limiting his options.

The man in green wasn't moving though, actually he seemed to be waiting for the Nord to make his move.

Either it was because of chivalry or because what Conrad had done so far was unknown to him, but it was a big mistake. You never, ever leave a wizard enough time to prepare—

In the blink of an eye, the man was right in front of him, fist ready to strike.

“Feim!” he yelled in a hurry, and the green man’s fist passed through him, leaving him unscathed as his opponent almost lost balance due to his own momentum. Conrad half-turned towards the man that has gone through his ethereal body, a hand sprayed against him, cackling with electricity.

“Dodge this ,” Conrad seethed, unleashing a bolt of lightning, his body returning to a corporeal form.

Much to his surprise, the man did dodge it, albeit barely. By jumping and twisting in mid-air, which was just ridiculous . The spell passed close to the man’s head, and crashed against a building, defacing its walls with a quite large scorching mark.

This finally caused the crowd to back off, at least.

“Yosh! You use quite a few strange techniques!” the man exclaimed as he landed, his hair now bristled and pointing upwards, some of its ends slightly burned. He didn’t seem to notice, though. “Time to treat you seriously, then—”

“FUS RO DAH!” the Nord yelled, sending his opponent flying all the way down the street. Like the masked guards, he didn’t have the decency to stay down, opting for bouncing right back on his feet instead.

The man grinned, and Conrad swore that his teeth shone , reflecting the light of the day. “A most splendid attack, allow me to show you—”

Yet another lightning bolt exploded from the Nord’s outstretched hand, and the green monstrosity just side-stepped it, before shooting forward faster than an arrow. Conrad let him know how annoyed he was by throwing yet another fast-travelling spell at him, one after another, alternating between his left and right hand. Each time, the man would dodge it, appearing to the wizard as a smudge of green charging towards him.

With a mighty jump, the man soared high above the Nord, a body of solid muscle that ended with an outstretched heel aimed for Conrad’s face.

Good.

“Tiid!” the Dragonborn shouted, raising his arms to protect himself from the imminent impact as the world slowed down around him. The kick, stronger than an axe, landed straight on the manacles at Conrad’s wrists. Caught between the hardened skin and the monstrously powerful blow, the magic-tampering metal bent and finally broke apart.

Conrad couldn’t help but grin maliciously as he saw surprise setting on the green man’s face, savoring each change it slowly went through. That, and the fact that his arcane power wasn’t limited anymore.

Deciding to avoid staying under the still-descending foot, he took a few steps backwards, just out of the way of the man’s kick. At a gesture of his hands, glowing blue lines traced themselves into the dirt in front of him.

The man’s eyes widened in alarm as he took notice, and if possible, Conrad’s grin turned even fiercer.

Time began flowing normally again, and the green monstrosity fell right on the magic rune. Conrad instinctively braced for the impact, shielding his head with his arms as best as he could.

A short-lived flash, and then there was just cold . There was no other way to describe it.

It came in a single wave, a deep, bitter chill straight from the hellish depths of winter. When Conrad opened his eyes, his front was coated with a thin layer of hoarfrost. His skin was numb, and he couldn’t feel the tips of his fingers, but he could ignore it.

Even if he didn’t like the cold, there were a few advantages to having Nord blood in his veins.

His opponent, much to Conrad’s delight, had fared far worse. Icicles had formed around his body, his face showed the first signs of frostbite and his limbs were now encased in solid blocks of ice, trapping him on the spot.

The man’s face was glowing with amazement, though. “Brilliant tactical maneuver! I must applaud your wit!” he exclaimed cheerfully. How dared he be so cheerful?!

“You can use Ice-Style? I didn't even knew there was anyone still able to!" he continued, possibly even more excited than before, besides the fact that he was shivering for the sudden drop in bodily temperature. Then there was a solid solid crack and part of the icy formation exploded, sending sending ice shards flying in every direction.

Conrad's eyes widened as the man flexed his now free arm. People can't just break to free themselves from ice!

"Say, where are you from—"

"For the love of Talos, shut up !" Conrad hissed as a sickly and malicious green color coated his fingertips. Without hesitation, he charged and fired the spell.

Still trapped by the ice, the fighter had no chance to dodge it and his body was immediately coated by the green tinge of the paralyzing magic, freezing him on the spot, his face petrified in surprise.

Conrad briefly thought that the color suited him, as he started to conjure another spell on his right hand. In a swirl of flame, a small fireball was born, hovering on his palm.

He raised his arm, pointing the deadly spell right in front of the green man's face, almost at point-blank range. He could feel the fighter's gaze on him, even if his body wasn't able to move. He met the frozen eyes with his ice one, as the fire kept raging in his hand.

Then he cut the magicka that was feeding the spell and closed his fist, snuffing it like a candle.

"I win," Conrad said, his voice tinged with vicious satisfaction.

"That was a fine show," a voice behind him remarked.

Conrad jerked around, and found himself face to face with a familiar face. It was the same old man that he had met when he woke up in that cell almost one month ago.

It was like if he had just appeared there, weird hat and pipe in the mouth. Not a sound at all.

Was anyone remotely normal in this accursed continent?!

The old man smiled gently, but Conrad didn't miss the sharp glint in his eyes. "I trust this fight is over?"

"How long you watch?" he asked. He didn't like the idea that someone could sneak on him during a fight.

"Enough to see you using some... unusual abilities, so to speak. Could you be so kind to release my subordinate, now?"

At that, Conrad glanced at the paralyzed man, noticing only then that he was sporting that stupid snail marking him as a shinobi. On a belt, strangely enough. "You're the Hokage," he commented, not doing anything to please the old man's request.

"What gave me away?" the man asked mirthfully, before frowning. "I am Sarutobi Hiruzen, and the village is under my protection. Now, I'm asking you to—"

"Your shinobi will be fine," Conrad scoffed. "Spell not last long. How did you know I not kill him?"

"I felt that it wasn't your intention," the old man replied cryptically. "Besides, I could've stopped you whenever I wished to."

It wasn’t a threat, or at least the wording—if Conrad had understood it correctly—hadn’t been threatening. But there was something in the way it had been said, as though it were a fact , that made Conrad pause. Having spent a lot of his life surrounded by wizards of various age categories, he knew very well that old ones tended to be the most dangerous as a rule of thumb, even if not physically.

If a shinobi could become as powerful as the man in green, how dangerous could their leader be?

“You know, for something like what you pulled you would normally being sent back in prison… or worse.”

"He started it, just like the masked ones," Conrad grunted, deciding that the best defense against an implied threat was to ignore it and change the topic. “You have explanation to give, old man.”

"Oh? About what?" the Hokage asked, taking a long puff from his pipe. It was like watching a glacier, immutable and imperturbable.

"THAT WAS AWESOME!" a much younger voice yelled from above with perfect timing. The old man’s shock as he choked on his pipe was incredibly satisfying. And lo and behold, there was Naruto, at the window Conrad had been thrown from, along with the magelings. “You can do the same stuff Haku did? Can you do the mirror trick?!”

“About that,” the Nord gestured with a tilt of his head. He had no idea what or who this ‘Aku’ and the mirror trick were, but there were more pressing matters than explaining it to his nephew.

Briefly glancing at the young boy, Sarutobi turned to face Conrad and an unspoken question was given.“Yes. I know who boy is,” Conrad said, looking straight into the old man’s eyes. “I know he no knows, too.”

The Hokage coughed one last time. “Perhaps now is not quite the best time or place to—”

“He has right to know,” he interrupted with a scowl, but keeping his voice down so that the child would not hear him.

“Hey, are you talking about me?” Naruto asked loudly. If once he became older the shinobi profession didn’t reveal to be good enough for him, Conrad was sure that the kid would be able to get a future as a herald.

The old man sighed and ran a hand over his face. If Conrad had to guess, he was quite stressed. Good. “You don’t understand, the risks are too great—”

“If you no tell him, I will,” Conrad interrupted again. At this, the Hokage’s eyes grew dangerous , not a trace of the previous worried expression present. The Nord didn’t wither under that gaze, though. He had stared down dragons , for the gods’ sake. Multiple ones. There was no way that an old shinobi would manage to scare him.

But he surely got close enough.

“Yeah, I’m pretty sure they’re talking about me now. Hey, I’m right here!” Naruto called, but none of the two men turned to that. “Quit ignoring me!”

"There is a situation at hand right now," the old man said, not elaborating about it and quite ignoring Naruto's outburst. "And it got even more complex in the last days. I, and Konoha, can't afford to deal with this now."

"Not my problem," Conrad said dismissively, slowly shaking his head.

"It will be solved shortly," the ancient shinobi said, as if he needed to be reassured about that. "Just wait for two days, Harissen-san. Two days to sort it out, then I'll explain everything."

" Minato sent me here. I crossed big sea, mountains and forests. Travelled for months. Your prisoner for one," the Dragonborn said taking a few steps towards the older man. "You better to—"

"That's it! I'm coming down now!" Naruto called, stopping Conrad on his tracks. Coming down?

His head snapped up towards the broken window, just in time to see Naruto stepping out on the window frame. Without the slightest bit of hesitation the boy jumped from the second floor, ignoring the startled yells from the magelings.

Conrad felt his heart skip a beat. The rest of his body, instead, decided to move .

In hindsight, he may have handled it better. The right shout at the right time, or a very strong telekinetic spell to either slow down or stop the boy's fall for a few seconds would've been enough to stop the reckless fool's fall. Sadly, when their only living relative does something incredibly stupid and dangerous, people don't always react in the most appropriate manner.

Somehow he still managed to rush there in time, arms closing around the falling body. He grunted as his sore and bruised muscles flared up in pain, along with the strain put on his barely-healed ribs. Still, he refused to fall on his knees.

The broken window shards would not have been pleasant to land on.

For a short moment, silence reigned on the almost deserted street, as Conrad checked the boy in his arms for injury. Considering that he was just staring stupidly at him he decided that he was fine. Time to give the boy a piece of his mind then.

"WHAT DID YOU THINK?!" the Nord yelled at the tops of his lungs. "YOU LITTLE—"

"HEY!" Naruto interrupted, yelling even louder than the Dragonborn, if that was even possible. "Let me go, you idiot! Who asked you to catch me?!"

“You were going to hurt you, boy! Why you jump?!”

“What? It’s just a jump!" Naruto asked incredulous, starting to struggle in the Nord's arms. "How could it hurt me?”

Conrad stared in disbelief at the boy in his arms for a long moment, before daring to ask what he was thinking. “Are you stupid?”

“I’m not the stupid one here—”

A cough was heard in the mostly deserted street, cutting off whatever retort or insults Naruto may have had.

“Harissen-san," the Hokage said, after catching the attention of both blonds. "I assure you that Naruto was not in danger to hurt himself. If he was, I would’ve stopped him.”

“HAH! See?!” Naruto exclaimed smugly, as he got free from Conrad's embrace.

“On the other hand, Naruto, Harissen-san is largely unaware of the skills possessed by shinobi,” the old man kept explaining.

“What?!” the boy exclaimed in a shocked and yet confused tone.

“He is not a shinobi and doesn’t know exactly what a shinobi can do," the Kage patiently clarified. "Like jumping from a building.”

“But he defeated Bushi-Brow-sensei!” Naruto protested, glancing at the frozen and paralyzed green-haired man. Conrad couldn't help but snicker at the strange name.

“Yes, he did. Which is quite impressive,” the elder shinobi said that, with an almost condescending tone, which caused the Nord to suppress a growl. “Still, even if he misunderstood your actions and tried to ‘save’ you, his utter lack of hesitation is remarkable.”

“Huh?” the boy asked, tilting his head.

“He got scared at the thought of you getting hurt.”

“Ooh. Is this because he knows about my father?” Naruto asked, a sparkle of realization in his eyes.

“More or less, yes,” Conrad replied with some mirth in his voice as he saw the old shinobi shot a brief glare in his direction.

“Are you—” Naruto hesitated for a moment to ask, biting his lips. “are you my father?”

In the silence that ensued, Conrad felt his eyebrows disappear into his hairline in surprise. Sarutobi wasn't faring better, since he looked like he was on the verge of choking on his own pipe—not the smoke, the pipe .

They had surely not expected that.

"So... are you?" the boy asked again, looking actually hopeful.

“No!” the Nord exclaimed, maybe a bit more harshly that he had intended. But he wanted to clear that misunderstanding as soon as possible.

“Oh…” Naruto mumbled, looking downcast.

“What made you think that?” Conrad couldn’t help but ask.

“Before you told me...” the boy said, pointing at the broken window from where the magelings were watching the strange exchange in silence. “And you, well… kinda look like me, so I thought…”

“I’m sorry, Naruto,” the Hokage sighed, talking in a way that reminded the Dragonborn of a concerned grandfather. “I’m afraid that Harissen-san is not your father.”

“Hokage is right. I am...” Conrad paused, unsure to continue. He turned towards the old man, pointing at himself and Naruto repeatedly. “What is word for…”

“If we are really going to have this conversation, since it looks unavoidable at this point, we will not have it here in the open,” the old shinobi said sternly. Gone was the grandfatherly voice.

“Is fine by me,” he shrugged.

“It’s not fine by me , Harissen-san,” the Hokage frowned, undeterred. “You’ll have your answers, but you will get them where I want to give them.”

Conrad could see that nothing was going to make the shinobi leader change his mind, but he didn’t want to recognize his defeat. He opted for just grunting something that sounded approving instead.

“Very well then,” the Hokage said, gesturing with a couple of fingers towards Conrad and Naruto’s direction. One of the masked guards, not different from the ones that he had knocked out cold, appeared behind Naruto, startling him. At the same time, the Nord felt a pair of strong hands closing on his own shoulders, and against all instinct, decided not to resist.

A blink of an eye later, Conrad found himself being dragged away at a ridiculous speed, the world around him a blur.

"There they go. I told you he would get arrested again," Sven commented after seeing his teacher being taken away in a puff of smoke.

"Do you think we should help the man in green before he goes into hypothermia?" Beta asked anxiously. "If he dies, it will look bad."

"No, they've got it covered. Look," the boy answered pointing towards the street, where a couple of the whitish-dressed healers that worked in the building had rushed to attend the frozen warrior as soon as their master had been taken away. "Who was that kid anyway?"

"He looked like Master Conrad," Ta'Sava mumbled. "And Master Conrad said something about fathers..."

"You don't think that..."

"No, come on guys. That's impossible," the Imperial reasoned. "I mean, he never travelled to Akavir before."

“He didn’t, but… it doesn’t mean that the kid’s mother didn’t—” Beta countered, only to be interrupted by someone tapping her shoulder. The Nord girl turned, only to be meet by one of those inexpressive masks of their guards.

“Aaaw, Ta’Sava wanted to spring Master Conrad out of prison…”

In hindsight, Conrad should've just broken the guard's arm and been done with it. He would've avoided the vertigo and nausea he was experiencing. Sure, he had dealt with worse hangovers, but this was like waking up the next morning without having got any fun first.

How in the name of Julianos could these shinobi move at such high speeds and not suffer from any sort of side effects? The mere strain that they put on the muscles should've been enough to tear their limbs apart!

Unless there was magic involved, because magic explained everything. Almost. There were limits even to that .

Hadn't Minato mentioned something about the magic of Akavir working in a different way? Yes he did. He hadn't been very clear now that he thought about it, though. If there hadn’t been time to tell him about a nephew he never met, he suppose there hadn’t been time to pontificate about different kinds of magic.

"Harissen-san?" the old man's voice came to him. "If you would please join us..."

Conrad grunted some vaguely affirmative sound as he straightened up, fighting the wooziness he was still feeling to take in his surroundings. He had been taken to an unfamiliar room, but at least it wasn't a cell this time.

It was vaguely circular, with large windows making up one of its walls which gave an incredible view on the rest of the city. A fairly large—and strangely familiar—desk stood in the middle, impossible to not notice. And right behind it sat Sarutobi Hiruzen, the leader of these people.

Instead of looking like a jarl or lord or whatever’s throne room, though, the place seemed closer to a clerk’s office. An impression that was strengthened by the fact that the Hokage was apparently busy writing on some papers with one of those quill-with-no-quill that didn't need to be refilled with ink.

He had to remember to get one when he went back at home. Or a dozen.

Glancing around, he noticed Naruto, fidgeting on his feet and trying to not show how he was obviously staring at him, and failing. Badly.

Unsure about how to deal with it, he opted to ignore the kid, hoping that he would stop doing it. Seriously, it was annoying to be stared like that.

Finally, the Hokage put down his writing stick or whatever it was called and looked at both of the blondes in front of him. “I know you both have a lot of questions. I had wished to speak about this at a later date, but—”

"Old Man, he said he knows about my dad! Who the hell is he?!" Naruto interrupted, deciding to jump straight to the point. Good kid.

"I had hoped to tell you when you were older, Naruto... I'm sorry I had to keep this from you."

"Tell me what? Keep what from me?!"

"He mean I your..." Conrad started, only to stumble on his own words and opting to keep it simple for his own's sake. "Minato my brother."

"Who's that?" the boy asked in confusion. "That sounds like a sissy name."

"You not know? Inoichi said Minato was..." the Nord asked in turn, turning towards the Hokage who seemed to be trying to hold back a groan.

"Naruto, unfortunately, was frequently truant in school and, consequently, there are many gaps in his knowledge. Even in things that should be obvious," the old man answered.

"What?" he asked, feeling incredibly embarrassed. He hated not understanding big words. Damned his limited vocabulary!

"He studied very little," Sarutobi clarified for his sake.

"Hey!... That's kinda true," Naruto exclaimed in an attempt to sound outraged, only to mumble the last part.

Conrad looked at him with the stern disapproval that only family could pull off, having learned it from the best. "Is no good. Lessons important. Make mind better."

"But they were boring! And I'm not good at book stuff..." the boy mumbled. "Why am I saying this to you, anyway?!?"

"You let him no go to lessons?" Conrad accused Sarutobi, ignoring the boy's latest outburst.

"Of course not! I made every effort to keep him in the classroom!" the Hokage exclaimed, looked understandably offended.

"QuitStop talking like I'm not here, dammit!" Naruto protested. "Old man, how'd this guy know my dad? You said my dad was dead!"

"Yes, he is Naruto, I'm afraid that it's not easy to explain, but before we continue you must realize this: everything that will be said from this point onwards, is a S-Rank secret."

"S-Rank...?" Naruto almost whispered, eyes widening. Conrad couldn't help but think that he was missing something here, having heard the strange appellative months ago from Hermaeus Mora. Sadly he didn't have enough context to extrapolate. Not even Minato's jumbled memories were helping. What did S-Rank even stand for, though?

"Do you understand?" the Hokage demanded in a stern voice, and Naruto nodded frantically. "Very well. Harissen-san, if you could please take the fourth picture from the wall behind you?"

Conrad turned as asked, getting a good eye of the rest of the room, and the piles of books and papers scattered around. It definitely resembled a clerk or a scholar's office during a busy day. Above the door, four portraits were hanging from the wall. Four individuals, all with a serious look. The first two, he had no idea who they were. Not that he cared. The third one... either Sarutobi had not aged well, or the portrait was done when he was much, much younger. And of course, there was Minato.

So, that was how he would’ve looked if he had let his bangs grow longer when he was younger. Strange how such a thought could come up now , of all times.

"This is Minato," he said, taking the picture—which was probably how the locals called those incredibly detailed portraits, for all he knew—and passing it to Naruto.

"Uh. He looks familiar," the boy mused. Conrad had to resist the temptation of rolling his eyes. Or smacking some sense in the kid.

"Because he is—no, was..." he started, correcting himself. Verb conjugation was important. "He was my brother."

"But he looks just like you! Even if he has less wrinkles," Naruto observed.

"Twins," Conrad growled, getting more and more irritated at his nephew. He wasn’t sure if it was because the casual comment about his age or for the boy’s lack of awareness. “And he was your father."

The Nord silently stared as the boy’s eyes widened in shock, probably because the discussion’s whole weight crashed on him all at once. In Conrad’s opinion, he should’ve seen it coming by now.

"W-what?" Naruto finally choked out, his gaze darting from the picture to Conrad’s face. He was either desperately trying to regain grasp of reality, of he was a really slow one. Conrad hoped that the latter was truer than the former.

"This man is your uncle, Naruto," Sarutobi clarified for the poor boy.

"Uncle...?"

"Yes," Conrad nodded. Naruto kept staring at him, but there was a different light in his eyes, like if he was seeing him for the first time.

"Why...?" the kid finally spoke, but nothing else came out the boy’s mouth, like if he couldn’t find the right words.

"Why?" the Nord asked, raising an eyebrow.

"Why didn't you come sooner...?" Naruto managed to ask, starting to tremble as he clenched his fists.

"Now wait moment—" Conrad tried to explain, only to be interrupted by a punch to his stomach, courtesy of his newly-found nephew.

"Where were you for all my life?!" Naruto all but yelled as he kept punching Conrad’s torso. He would’ve found it annoying, especially because he was still hurting from his fight, but was a bit taken back from the younger blond’s reaction.

"I not know, boy," he tried to say, but this didn’t seem to satisfy Naruto. It’s not like it was his fault if he had met him only now!

"Stop talking like that and answer me!" Naruto exclaimed in frustration and anger, tears forming around his eyes.

"Naruto!" Sarutobi interrupted the boy with a sharp tone. "I understand that you're confused, but Harissen-san didn't find out about your father until recently."

"What?" Naruto asked in confusion, lowering a fist that had been ready to strike again Conrad’s abused torso.

"I am from very far land. I came here fast I could," Conrad explained, putting Minato’s portrait on the desk, leaving out the fact that he hadn't even heard of the kid less than one hour ago. Somehow, that seemed like something that a child was not supposed to hear.

"Oh... sorry," Naruto said, deflating a little. "So, uhm... A land far away? Which one?"

"One you never heard of," the Nord stated, matter-of-factly.

"Huh? Yeah I wasn't good in geography, but—"

"Harissen-san is not from the Elemental Nations, Naruto. He has learned our language only recently." Sarutobi explained for the kid's sake.

"What? No way!" Naruto exclaimed.

"Oh, yes. Very much way. That's a topic we can talk about later, though," the Hokage said, probably to avoid for the discussion to go off-topic.

"I agree," Conrad reluctantly grunted. "Why Naruto not knows about Minato? Why it secret?"

"Oh, right!" the boy said, as if he had just remembered what they had been talking about. "You always told me that my parents—"

"I told you that your parents sacrificed their lives to protect the village. That much was true... but it wasn't the whole truth."

"Wasn't the whole truth? What do you mean, Old Man?" Naruto asked, real hurt being hearable in his voice.

"You must understand. Everything I've done, everything I've had to do, has all been to protect you," the old shinobi tiredly said. "The man in this photo, your father, was the Yondaime of Konohagakure."

"The... the Yondaime is... was my dad?" Naruto asked, even more shocked than before if such a thing was possible, gripping his stomach with all his strength. Conrad didn't blame him, it was a lot to handle all at once. "But then—”

"Yes, Naruto. Your father is the man that killed the Fox," Sarutobi said with a stern tone.

"But he—"

"And doing so, he saved the village," the Hokage continued, and Naruto's attempted protest died with it. Once again, Conrad couldn't help but think that something was amiss here. Maybe some details about how the beast was killed were not exactly of public dominion? After all, to kill it Minato had condemned himself to an eternity spent inside the Soul Cairn.

Maybe necromancy of any kind was particularly frowned, here? Conrad decided to leave such speculations for later. Living family matters came first.

"But... if I am the Yondaime's son, then how come I was never told?" Naruto asked, still appearing a little shocked.

"To protect you."

"Protect me from who?"

"You may have ignored the lectures that bored you, but I'm sure that you're aware that your father was a powerful shinobi—"

"Everyone knows that the Yondaime was strong, old man!" the boy butted out, like if he was stating an obvious thing.

"—and, because of that, he made a lot of enemies," the Hokage continued, ignoring Naruto's interruption. "Surely you can imagine what a child of an important leader could risk."

Conrad nodded in comprehension. "A target. Weak one. Way to strike father. Or mother."

"Are you saying that... someone could've tried to kill me because of that?!" Naruto asked as if such a thing was unthinkable. So, slow-witted, inattentive and naive to boot. Wonderful. "But everyone respected him! They still do—"

"They respect him, yes. In Konoha ," Sarutobi continued explaining. "Among his enemies, especially Iwa, he was quite vilified and hated. Which is why you can’t go bragging about him, especially right now, as a team from Iwa is in the village for the Chunin Exams."

“You let enemies of Minato in your city?” Conrad asked, ignoring how the older man had looked at him as he spoke—it’s not like it was his fault if his enemies were paranoid. Allowing them to visit sounded like inviting Thalmor to a lecture or feast, though.

“Village," Sarutobi corrected. Conrad didn't say anything, but he refused to call a place that had probably a few good dozens of thousands of inhabitants a village. "And the exams are an international event, refusing them would’ve been like admitting we are too weak. Or that we have something to hide.”

“You have something to hide,” the Nord snorted, gesturing towards Naruto.

“Yes, but they don’t know that,” Sarutobi admitted, with what looked like the ghost of a smirk.

Naruto didn't say anything, still processing what he had been told. It was like he had never considered that people may hate what he considers heroes. Actually, from what the Dragonborn had seen so far, there was a good chance of that.

"What about my mom?" the boy suddenly asked, maybe trying to change the topic. "You guys never said anything about her... Is she alive?"

"She died the day you were born," Sarutobi said slowly, regretful of giving such bad news.

"Oh," Naruto said glumly, as the hope that had practically been emanating from him a moment ago all but evaporated.

"Her name was Uzumaki Kushina, Naruto," the Hokage continued. "She loved you very much."

"She was a beautiful woman. Long hair. Red like blood," Conrad offered, realizing too late what he was saying.

"You knew my mom?" Naruto asked in amazement.

"Not... exactly..." Conrad mumbled, ignoring the sharp glare that Sarutobi was giving him. He couldn’t exactly tell the boy the details about how he knew something about his mother. Not that he knew much, thanks to Minato’s botched job. Thinking back to that made him look warily at the desk, hoping that the familiarity he felt was not related to those memories he had got.

At that, Naruto just tilted his head in confusion. "Eh?"

“Your father told me,” he added. It wasn’t a lie, technically .

"But… you said you found out only now, and he’s been dead for foreveryears,” the boy slowly reasoned. “It doesn’t make sense!"

"Met his ghost," Conrad explained.

"... I call bullsh*t."

"Language, Naruto," Sarutobi reprimanded the boy. Conrad filed what was apparently a bad word for later usage. Not knowing enough swear words in the local tongue was frustrating. "As far as we can tell, he is telling the truth."

"In my land there is special place," Conrad explained. "Place where you can meet dead. There I meet Minato."

"Really... ? Do you think my mom is there too?"

"I... not see her, sorry,” the Nord said, hoping that that wasn’t the case. “Meet only Minato and he sends me here."

"To find me?" Naruto asked expectantly.

"To find you, yes," Conrad nodded. Although being advised about the kid's existence would've been nice.

"Why couldn't he come too?! I mean, he's a ghost, right?” Naruto pressed. “He could've... I don't know... floated here, or something!"

"Dead people... can't leave that place," he explained, in an admittedly lame way. He just didn’t know enough Akaviric words to express why the soul trapped in that plane weren’t able to leave.

"Then we could go there and talk to my dad!” the boy insisted, getting more and more excited at the idea. “And ask him if mom's there too!"

"That... is stupid idea,” Conrad said flatly. “More stupid idea I heard in my life."

“You mean ‘most’, Harissen-san,” Sarutobi corrected him.

“Whatever.”

"Huh? How come?" Naruto asked.

"Only dead can enter that place. You die if you go."

"Didn't you go, though?" his nephew questioned skeptically.

"I special case," Conrad said matter-of-factly.

"Bullsh*t!" Naruto exclaimed, pointing a finger at him.

Before he could retort, Sarutobi caught the duo’s attention with a short cough. "While I considered the option of contacting Minato's soul—"

"YES!" the boy loudly cheered, pumping both of his arms in the air.

“—I've decided that right now, it's not possible,” The Hokage continued imperturbed before Conrad could open his mouth to protest. “The location your uncle mentioned is very far from the village, in an unknown land, and probably far more dangerous than I could ever imagine."

"But—"

"To go there, you have to cross sea,” Conrad interjected. “Arrive in land you no know about, no know language, no know monsters—”

“Monsters?” Naruto asked in a mix of confusion and worry, his hand going once again to rest on his belly. Was the boy weak of stomach or something, too?

“Yes, monsters,” the Nord nodded, resuming listing the reasons why such a travel would’ve been difficult. “No have contacts, no allies. Then you walk for... what is word for that? Whatever. Even if you arrive there, something something Volkihar is not safe place either."

"Volkihar?" Sarutobi asked, arching an eyebrow.

"Big... house of stone? Door for Soul Cairn is in there," Conrad explained. No matter how zealously the Dawnguard had cleansed it, the whole place just kept feeling wrong , somehow. And not in the mundane way.

Naruto blinked for a moment at that. "And what is the—"

"Place where your father soul is."

“I would like to hear about this place—and of your land—at a later date, Harissen-san,” the Hokage said all of sudden. “For now, I think there are more immediate topics to talk about.”

A moment of silence followed that statement, and Conrad stole a glance to his nephew, who was apparently doing the same.

“What… what happens now?” Naruto asked apprehensively.

“First off, Harissen-san, you’ll have to avoid being seen. There are enough wild rumors spreading from here to Earth Country. Obviously, any other disturbances like the one back at the hospital will not be tolerated,” Sarutobi explained, making sure that what he meant was clearly understandable. As threats went, that was among the most polite that the Dragonborn had ever got. Probably the second most polite.

“So, you want me to never leave cabin?” Conrad asked, glaring at the Hokage.

“What cabin?” Naruto asked, being out of the loop on this detail of his uncle’s stay in the village.

“For the time being, yes. We need to make sure that Iwa doesn’t believe that their old enemy has returned from the grave. And avoid mass panic in the village.”

“City,” Conrad corrected instinctively.

Village ,” the Hokage insisted. It seemed that the old man was very attached to that particular terminology, for some reason.

“No seriously, what cabin?!” Naruto asked again, glancing from one man to another frustratedly.

“Your uncle and his students have been given… lodgings in a cabin in the woods above the Hokage Monument,” Sarutobi explained.

Lodgings , he says,” Conrad muttered sarcastically. “At least view is nice…”

“Wait,” Naruto said, looking up towards his uncle with a hopeful look. “Does that mean that you’re… staying in Konoha?”


“Yes,” the Nord said, after exchanging a glance with Sarutobi. “For bit.”

“That’s so cool!” the boy exclaimed, as he started to look ready to bounce around in excitement. “Can I come to visit?! Can I?!”

“Maybe it would—”

“Of course you can,” Conrad quickly said, locking eyes with the Hokage once again. This time it wasn’t a brief glance. This time it was an actual staring contest, a mean for a battle of wills without causing a scene in front of his nephew. “Right?”

Conrad knew he was playing dirty, and not in the usual way you play dirty during a fight. But why should he have cared? Obviously the old man cared about Naruto a lot, which could have been for reasons that went beyond such things like “secret son of our deceased lord” detail. Now that Naruto had been told about his newly-arrived uncle, not letting them meet again would’ve been a bad move.

Wicked, even.

Finally, Sarutobi gave a reluctant nod.

“YES!” Naruto yelled, jumping in the air.

“On one condition though,” the old shinobi said before the boy could start jumping around in

“Uh?” the boy mumbled, calming down immediately.

“Don’t overexert yourself: you still have the final phase of the exams tomorrow.”

“Oh, that’s right!” Naruto said as if he had completely forgotten about these… exams. “Wait, can I still take part in those? Even now, that I know—”

“Being the Yondaime’s son doesn’t give you any special privileges for the exams. Also, would Uzumaki Naruto ever drop the exams the day before the finals?”

“Hell, no!” Naruto exclaimed, pumping his fist. “I have to kick Neji’s ass! And Sasuke’s too, I guess.”

Conrad briefly wondered what this “exam” was about. Since his nephew was a shinobi apprentice—or something along those lines, at least—then it was probably some kind of test for his skills. And since shinobi seemed to be this place’s warriors, there was probably a physical part in such task. The fact that he wanted to kick those guys—were those even male names?—pointed at some sort of tournament or simulated battle.

He would’ve been worried, but if it was something that Naruto was able to take part to, it was probably nothing dangerous. After all, he was a kid. The others apprentices were probably around his age as well. Any fight would’ve probably ended looking more like a brawl between children than a serious match.

Before anyone could say anything more, there was a knock at the door.

"Come in," Sarutobi called. The door slightly opened, revealing a young-looking shinobi with a large stack of papers and scrolls under his arm.

"Sorry to interrupt, Hokage-sama," he said, warily looking at Conrad. "But it's almost time for your appointment with the daimyo's envoy."

"Politics," Sarutobi muttered, showing his distaste for the subject with the tone of his voice. Finally something him and Conrad could agree on! "I'm afraid we'll have to cut this short, but there are other things will have to discuss in the future."

"Can I go to cabin, then?" Conrad asked.

"Are you? Can I come now?!" Naruto asked as well.

“I don’t see why not,” the Nord said as he walked towards the door.

"Hold it, you two," the Hokage called, stopping him before he could trample the young man blocking his way. "You can't be seen Harissen-san. Especially along Naruto, remember?"

"Then how we supposed to—” Conrad asked, before his eyes widened in realization at Sarutobi’s smug smirk. “Oh no. No way. I refuse—"

"Put me down!" Conrad growled to the guard that had taken him on the top of the mountain, ignoring the sickness he was feeling once again. Being treated like a piece of... of... luggage!

The true source of humiliation, though, was his nephew laughing at his misfortune. A lot.

Conrad ignored it at the best as he could. He was a grown man, it wasn't like he cared if a child was laughing at him.

As soon as they had been placed on the ground, the masked guards immediately dispersed, apparently leaving the two of them alone. Conrad knew better, though. He would bet that at least four of them were watching the two of them.

"You coming or not?" he called for the still snorting Naruto, as he started to walk through the small woods around his not-exactly gilded prison. Still trying to get a hold of his laughs, Naruto followed him. "We probably meet my students, if they were taken back, that is. They little older than you—"

"Students? Oh! You mean those guys that were with you!” Naruto said in realization. “They're your students?!"

"Yes,” the Nord nodded as they reached the clearing. “They may ask lot questions but—"

"That's awesome! It's like you have your own genin team!" the boy grinned at him.

"My... what?" Conrad asked, tilting his head.

"You know, a genin team! A—Ah, right,” Naruto stammered, sounding somehow disappointed. “You're not a shinobi. That still sounds weird, you know?"

"I proud of what I am," Conrad replied. "Wouldn't be any else."

"You mean 'anything' else, right?" Naruto offered.

"Whatever. Look, they good kids,” he sighed, stopping right in front of the cabin. “Just very, very curious. Too curious. If you don't feel to, no answer their questions. I do it all time."

"That doesn't sound... fair. Uncle," Naruto said, adding the last part at the last moment.

" Life is not—" Conrad started to say as he opened the wooden door, but his words fell dead as he noticed who was inside the cabin, examining a vial with a potion. "You!"

"Harissen-san? What—" Inoichi asked, a bit taken back by being addressed with such an angry tone. Before he could finish, though, Conrad had crossed the small room and punched him right on the nose.

"You liar!" Conrad seethed, preparing to give another punch. The other blond man objected to such course of action with a blow of his own, though. The Nord felt a loud crack, and pain immediately spread all over his face. He stumbled back, touching his nose by reflex and he could feel a generous amount of blood flowing among his fingers.

The blond bastard had broken his nose.

Whatever part of his mind may have told him that getting in another fight with a shinobi may had been a bad idea stopped protesting at the sight of his own blood.

"Oh, it's on !" he growled as he cracked his knuckles. Then, he all but charged at his fellow Nord—not caring if he wanted to be considered one or not—with a mighty roar.

Naruto kept staring as the two men crashed through the room, yelling, grunting, slamming their fists on each other’s face and making quite a mess of the room.

"Isn't that... Ino's dad?" Naruto asked idly, a bit confused by the sudden and unexpected violence.

"Who is Ino?" a boy Naruto hadn't even noticed asked, not stopping from peeling a potato. If he had been startled from the sudden brawl, he wasn't showing it. Instead he opted to merely stay safe from it, in the far corner of the room, well away from the fight along his two companions.

"Uh, she's one of my old classmates," Naruto explained, shooting a wary glance at the cat-thing sitting close by. At least it seemed to be as confused and worried as him about the fight.

"Oh, it is little guy that look like master Conrad!" it said, before glancing back to the two men that seemed to be focused only on beating each other to a pulp. "Should we do... anything?"

"It's Nord thing," the girl said with a somehow wise-sounding tone, discarding a long strip of potato’s skin. "You two can’t understand."

Naruto wasn't sure why his uncle had attacked Ino's dad like that, but he couldn't help thinking that having a family was going to be... interesting.

Chapter 12: Of Awkward Family Dinners and Inquire

Chapter Text

This was by far the most awkward meal Naruto had ever eaten.

The room was so crowded that it gave the impression of being smaller than it truly was, and an awkward silence had fallen over the table since the dinner was served.

On one side of the table sat his… uncle, who he had met less than two hours ago. On the other was Ino’s dad. Both men were visibly bruised, and still shooting nasty glares at each other, but at least they weren’t trying to punch each other to a pulp anymore. What was Ino’s dad even doing here, though? Shouldn’t he have been eating with his own family? Not that Naruto didn’t appreciate company during a meal since it happened so rarely, but weren’t dads supposed to do that?

Then there were the three genin—which, he had been told, weren’t actually genin since their teacher wasn’t a shinobi, but he couldn’t think of a better word to call them—who had been watching him like a trio of attentive yet unsubtle hawks, as if trying to gauge his intentions toward their sensei.

Naruto wasn't sure what he was supposed to be doing. He was sitting next to an uncle he’d never known he’d had. An uncle that hadn't known about him either.

He knew that they were supposed to talk to each other—after all, this was kind of a big deal. Relatives were supposed to talk about stuff, right?? But there hadn't been much talking at all since they had arrived at his uncle's house. Sure, once the brawl between the two grown-ups had concluded there were some very brief introductions, followed by a few instructions on the arrangements for dinner, but that that was it.

Every attempt Naruto had made to start bombarding his newly-found relative with questions had earned half-hearted—and short—answers in that broken speech the man used, if the questions weren’t just dodged entirely. It was like his uncle was just as clueless about what they should talk about as he was!

Which was just stupid. There were so many things he wanted to ask him! What was the land like where he had come from? Were there a lot of strong people there? How come he could do Haku's ice thing? Was he married? Were there any cousins that Naruto needed to know about? Why was the cat bigger than he was, and able to talk too? And why were the four of them so bad at using the chopsticks?

But he had found himself unable to voice them. It was very unlike him, he knew this. Normally, he would've drowned the room with questions, attacking without mercy until his curiosity was sated. But he was too nervous to really try.

Naruto supposed that he could blame the circ*mstances of how they had met for the awkwardness. He’d punched his uncle. What kind of first impression was that?! He surely didn't want to ruin whatever chances were left that the man would like him, so not annoying him sounded good. For now.

Also, he was kind of hoping that he could talk to his newly-found family without an audience staring at him. Well, there were a few things he couldn’t talk about with his uncle, even if they were alone.

Like the Fox trapped in his stomach, which the Old Man, for whatever reason, didn’t want his uncle to know about. Naruto may have been dense, but he understood perfectly why the Hokage had interrupted him and reminded him that the Yondaime had “killed” the Kyuubi. He just didn’t get why his Uncle couldn’t know about it. You weren’t supposed to keep secrets from family, right?

Which raised the fact that the Yondaime was also his dad—and his uncle’s brother, of course—which would’ve been very fine and dandy if it wasn’t that he had basically been told that it had been his dad who’d sealed the Fox into him. Naruto hadn’t really thought about it when he first learned he’d had a dad, but now that it had time to sink in, the bitterness was coming to the surface.

How was he supposed to feel about it?! Was he supposed to be mad because it had been his father that caused his life to suck so much, or happy because he finally knew who his parents were?

“You not eat?” his uncle asked, interrupting his inner turmoil and attempts at drawing funny things in his mashed potatoes.

“I’m not hungry,” Naruto mumbled as he shrugged. All the life-changing revelations of the day were messing with his appetite. Besides, it wasn’t ramen. As soon as he had finished saying that, the cat-boy—Tassava or something like that—tried to reach for Naruto's roasted fish, but his uncle smacked his hand—paw?—away with his chopsticks, giving the feline a pointed glare. The other boy, Sven, snickered at his friend’s misfortune, which earned him a light elbow to the side.

"You should eat. You're too short," the man said, nudging the plate closer to him. Naruto opened his mouth to protest—he wasn’t that short—but his uncle continued, "You have that... exam tomorrow, too. Right? Was that right word, 'exam'?"

"Oh, yeah! We've got the Chuunin Exams,” Naruto explained, forgetting the remark about his stature. ”They're a really big deal, you know! And I made it to the final rounds!"

"This is important?" Conrad raised an eyebrow.

"Yeah! And I made it to the final rounds!" Naruto beamed, hoping to make his newly-found family proud of his achievements.

"Why?"

Naruto blinked.That wasn’t the reaction he had been expecting. Maybe his uncle had misunderstood what he meant? "Because I kicked Kiba's—"

"No, I mean... why exams are so important?" his uncle asked, sounding genuinely confused. Maybe they didn’t have tournaments or exams where he was from? Probably something like that.

"The ones who make it to the top are the best of the best. And I'm going to beat them all!” Naruto tried to explain, boosting his confidence for the impending match. “Especially that smug bastard, Neji."

"That do not explain why they important, boy,” the man grumbled, pinching the bridge of his nose. “That is what they do, not why."

"It's a contest, but also a performance, in a way,” Ino’s dad answered before Naruto had a chance to reply. “This is the way different shinobi villages show the world how their up-and-coming shinobi stack up against each other."

"... and you use children to show off?" Conrad wondered, frowning in confusion. Looking around, Naruto noticed that even his uncle’s students seemed puzzled by the idea. What was wrong with it? Genin were usually young, nothing strange about that.

"Not always, but you see, a big part of it is showing the strength that the next generation will bring to the village," Inoichi replied.

"That... make sense, but you should use strong people," his uncle continued. "Why use child when you can—Wait, there are other shinobi cities?"

"Villages, Harissen-san. Villages," the Yamanaka said tiredly, which just made Conrad scoff, much to Naruto’s confusion. No matter what, it seemed like his uncle wasn’t able to understand that he was saying it wrong. "It's also an excuse for a diplomatic exchange with dignitaries from the Land of Fire and beyond."

"Right. Hokage was busy with politics," Conrad said, spitting the last word in disgust.

"You don't like politics?" Ino’s dad wondered.

"Who does?" shot back Naruto’s uncle, as he poured himself another cup of sake. How he could enjoy that so much, Naruto had no idea. Sake wasn’t good for you, right?

"You have a point there, Harissen-san," Inoichi admitted.

"Uncle?" Naruto called, trying to catch his relative's attention. This stuff was boring, anyway.

" 'Uncle'?!" the boy named Sven interrupted loudly.

"See, I tell you Conrad-sensei wasn't father," the girl—Bata or Baeta or something—smiled, singsonging in a ‘I-told-you-so’ tone.

"But that not explains how he exists!" Sven rebutted, pointing at Naruto.

"Small Master must be son of Master's brother," Tassava reasoned. “Or sister. That make Master an uncle, too!”

"Stop calling me small!” Naruto yelled in outrage, “I'm not small!"

"Yes you are," the boys replied at the same time, chuckling.

“He is Minato’s son,” Conrad said just before Naruto could find a suitable counterback or just throw himself against the two jokers. “I no have sisters.”

"The one that the bards no talk about?" Sven asked, sounding af he was remembering something. “How did he arrive here, then?”

“With a ship, as a newborn,” his uncle explained after a long sip from his drink. “I not sure, but I think that… our mother was with him.”

“Grandma…?” Naruto asked, in awe. This was what he had wanted to ask! He didn’t have found just an uncle, he had found a whole family! A foreboding doubt made way through his hopes though, as logic told him what the next question should have been. “But… where is she?”

His uncle Conrad remained silent for a moment, before gulping down what was left in his is cup. “I not know. Probably dead, if she was not with Minato.”

The reactions to that were mixed, to say the least, but the room fell silent again because of it. Ino's dad didn't seem very surprised, but a sorrowful shadow had entered his eyes. The not-genin, on the other hand, appeared to be shocked, which meant this was news to them.

Naruto wasn't sure of what he was feeling instead, it was a mess of emotions that he couldn't fully describe. On one hand he could understand how his uncle felt about it, never having met his mom himself, but a part of him had hoped to know more about his family.

“I’m sorry…” he half-whispered, not sure what else he could say.

“Don’t be,” Conrad grunted, quickly filling his cup one more time. “I never met her, I can’t miss her.”

"How the heck are you not sad about that?!” Naruto exclaimed, shooting to his feet. He couldn’t believe what he had just heard. Everyone was supposed to love their mother, right?! “Who cares if you never met her, she was still your mom!"

"She left, boy,” his uncle growled, slowly turning towards him. “Why you think she crashed ship on your shores?"

"She left...? What do you mean 'She left'?" the genin repeated, incredulous. Surely had heard it wrong. Surely his uncle was using the wrong words again. He didn’t mean what Naruto thought he meant, did he?

"Not all marriages last. She left. I... learn to not ask of it."

Naruto clenched his jaw as his fear was confirmed. His uncle’s mom actually abandoned him. Somehow, that sounded even worse than never meeting her. What kind of a parent would just leave?

“Good thing for you, too,” Conrad murmured, before taking another drink.

“What? Why would it be a good thing?!” Naruto asked. There was no way there was anything remotely good in that.

“If Mother not came here, your father never met your mother,” his uncle explained with a smirk. “Lucky bastard…”

Ino’s dad started coughing out of nowhere, as if he was choking on something. The girl that his uncle brought with him had turned completely red, and that freaky cat person and the last student were trying not to laugh for some reason, but Naruto wasn’t really paying attention. He was still distracted by the implication of his uncle’s words.

"What... what about grandpa?" he asked, suddenly willingly to change the topic.

"Our town was burned by Alduin. I never see him after that,” Conrad said, his gaze lost in distant memories. “Could be dead, too."

Naruto had been sure that nothing would’ve shocked him again, not after the day of revelations he had went through, but he had just been proven wrong. His uncle was an orphan and he had lost the place where he was from? The young genin bit his lips at the thought, he had no idea what he would do if something bad ever happened to Konoha.

"Who is Alduin?" Inoichi asked all of sudden, much to Naruto’s confusion. How was that important? “Is he an enemy of your people?

Oh. That did sound like an important question, now that he thought about it.

“Is long story, very long story,” the foreigner sighed, which only seemed to encourage the jonin into pressing the matter.

“Can’t you make it simple?”

“Alduin was dragon,” Conrad said, finally putting down his drink. “Was. Big one, too.”

“You have dragons where you are from?” Naruto asked, incredulous. “And one of them burned down your home?”

“Not before twenty years ago,” his uncle muttered.

“What?” Naruto furrowed his brow in confusion.

“They come back. Big surprise for everyone,” Conrad explained in a way that told Naruto the man was really irritated by the fact.

“I thought dragons were fairytales,” Naruto argued.

“Lots of tales are real,” his uncle slowly said, looking at the cup in front of him. “I’ve learned such.”

“So, uhm... you people have story about dragons, too?” Beta timidly asked.

“It make sense, since this is Akavir,” the boy named Sven reasoned.

"Akavir?” Naruto repeated, intrigued by the unfamiliar word. “What's that?"

"Name of this land,” Conrad elaborated. “Or it used to be. I think you all forgot about it."

"You're making this up, uncle. How can you forget about a place's name?"

"Time erase everything," the man replied, with a tone that sounded a bit like the one Iruka used when he tried to say something deep. Naruto stole a glimpse to Ino’s dad, but he seemed to be confused as much as he was.

“Uh... how you know how your brother arrive in Akavir, Conrad-sensei?" the girl asked. “I mean, if he was dead…”

“Minato told me, when I met him in Soul Cairn," was the quick and gruff reply.

"Oh, right! That scary place you said his ghost is trapped in!" Naruto nodded, remembering how the Old Man and his uncle had briefly mentioned it.

"... you went inside the Soul Cairn?" Beta asked, slack-jawed just like as her ‘teammates’. "Conrad-sensei... that is..."

"Very bad place, Beta. Don’t go there," the man sternly advised. "A... friend gave proof of Minato’s words. I had found a brother I never heard of, and he was dead."

"A friend?”

“Another dragon,” Conrad clarified.

“You have interesting friends, Harissen-san,” Inoichi stated after a few seconds of silence, reaching for the sake for the first time.

“So... what did you talk about?" Naruto asked, curious about his father.

"Not much. He asked me to travel here and talk to the Hokage, I guess."

"What else did you talk about?” he insisted. “You said he told you about Mom, so I was wondering..."

"What do you—Oh,” his uncle stopped, grimacing and massaging his temples, as if he had a headache. Maybe he had drank too much sake? “Yes, we... talk about your mother… a little bit. But we not have time."

"Not have time...?" Naruto frowned.

"I... left the Soul Cairn, more or less."

"What do you mean?” the boy asked. “Why would you leave just after meeting your brother?!"

"His ghost," Beta chimed in.

"Same thing!" he mumbled. If his dad was in the ghost-place, him being a ghost was a given. There was no reason to remind him of it.

"I had no choice,” his uncle said, looking at him straight in the eyes.

“But why?” he asked, genuinely confused. “Were you forced to leave or something?”

“Yes,” Conrad answered, scratching his head as if thinking how to explain it. “Look, it was magic.”

"Magic?"

"Magic,” the man repeated. “More simpler way I can explain it. I not know enough words."

"You mean 'simplest', Harissen-san," Inoichi corrected him

"Whatever."

"Oh. So... you don't know much about my mom?” Naruto asked, crestfallen. “Or how she and dad...?"

"I don't, no," his uncle slowly shook his head, before gesturing towards Ino’s dad with an evil smirk. "But he does."

"W-What?" the Yamanaka stammered, uncomfortable under the sudden attention.

"He does?!" the boy exclaimed, his eyes widening.

"He was Minato's friend,” Conrad shrugged. “Guess he know about your mother, too."

“Harissen-san, that’s—” Inoichi protested in a slightly panicked voice.


“The Old Man explained a little,” Naruto said, interrupting Inoichi before he could protest. “But I still wanna know a few things! The first is… why are you here?”

“I was tasked by the Hokage to teach your uncle and his students our language,” the shinobi admitted with a sigh.

“You’re not very good at this job, are you?” Naruto asked, staring at the man with obvious judgement. It was clear that the foreigners had not learned very well.

“Hey!” the Yamanaka exclaimed, affronted. “It’s not easy teaching a language when it’s impossible to communicate—”

“I have a lot of other questions, you know!” Naruto interrupted him again. “Did you really know my dad? What—”

“That’s an S-Rank secret!” the man exclaimed, trying to stop him.

“I already know it so you better spill!” he yelled back, pointing an accusing finger. “Did you know him? What about my mom? Oh! Did you know that they were my parents?!”

“I—”

“If you knew, why didn’t you say anything? Who else knows? Was Mom strong? I bet Dad was, but I want to know about Mom too! What did they like to do? Did they like ramen?” Naruto continued, not stopping his questioning assault. He was so focused on his interrogation that he didn’t even notice when his uncle quietly left the table with a slight frown on his face.

He was finally going to have answers, and nothing would stop him now!

A chorus of snores harmonized in the air. Almost musically-so, if Conrad paused to listen.

Finally, as the night had come, the boy had collapsed in the middle of his seemingly inexhaustible question. The magelings had retired a little earlier instead, and were providing quite a chorus to his nephew's aria.

"Thanks a lot," Inoichi said, more than a little frazzled after living through Naruto's undivided attention, keeping his voice low to not wake up the younger residents of the shack. "I barely escaped."

"The child want to know about his family,” Conrad deadpanned as he he prepared a bedroll for the sleeping boy. “It is natural he curious."

"Is this why you left?" Inoichi asked wryly, arching an eyebrow.

The only answer he gave the inquisitive shinobi was a noncommittal grunt.

“I am no good with children,” he whispered as he finished his task and got up, moving closer to the sleeping boy.

“You seem to do well with your students,” Inoichi pointed out.

“They older. And I no need carry them to bed,” Conrad protested as he picked up the snoring child.

“And you don’t just leave because they make you feel uncomfortable,” the Yamanaka added. The Nord couldn’t deny the statement, he had got used to the magelings’ presence but only after all the time he’d spent with them. Naruto… he was new. Stranger, he was related to him. That was not exactly something he had wrapped his head around yet.

Once the boy was safely tucked under the sheets, he felt the instinct to ruffle his hair but managed to stop his traitorous hand, frowning at the doubt that crept in his head. Had the idea been his own or was it a remnant of Minato’s memories imprinted into his subconscious?


“Why are you here?” he whispered, as he turned towards Inoichi “After accident, I think lessons were…?”

"Let's go outside,” the shinobi answered with the same tone. “We don't want to wake them."

After giving one last look at Naruto, Conrad followed the shinobi towards the door, grabbing a bowl of leftovers from the table. Once outside, he raised it above his head and the next second later the bowl vanished as one of the masked guards swooped down to claim their prize. Since his escapade of a few weeks earlier, he had not been allowed to keep any leftovers, but he couldn’t tell if the guards were being paranoid or just petty. He hoped that they choked on them, though.

"We out," the Nord said, closing the door. "Talk."

"I was asked to accompany your students 'home' after your... ‘encounter’ with Gai."

"How nice,” he snarked.

“For your information, I asked to accompany them. I didn’t have to, but I thought that it would've been better for them to deal with a shinobi they were familiar with.” Inoichi frowned, massaging his bruised and battered face. “Nice sense of gratitude, you have,” Inoichi complained, and Conrad just snorted back.

“You deserve it, and you know it Inoichi,” Conrad said, not feeling the slightest bit of guilt. “Besides, you break my nose. We even.”

“Seriously? That’s normal for you?”

“Not different from evening at inn,” he shrugged.

“Your land is a strange one, isn’t it?”

“It is, sometimes. Saw strangest, too. I will tell about it one day,” Conrad half-smiled, looking at Inoichi straight in the eyes. “You did not just take the kids to shack, though.”

“It’s about your incident in front of the hospital.”

“Incident?”

“That fight in the middle of the street,” Inoichi explained, “I was told that there were consequences, although I wasn’t aware that you had met Naruto as well.”

“I already speak with Hokage, and—”

“I’m aware of that, and I’m sure that he was disappointed by what happened. But that’s not what I meant.”

“What then?”

“There were a lot of people on that street.”

“And they saw me. My face,” Conrad finished for Inoichi, easily guessing where the man was going with this. “That is problem, yes?”

“You would be surprised how large a rumor can grow in just a few hours.”

“People talk. People always talk. I know very well.” Conrad sighed after a moment. It seemed that no matter where he went, rumors would start about him. Same old, same old. “How bad?” he asked.

“Truthfully, I have no idea. I’ve been up here the entire time” Inoichi admitted with a shrug. “But something tells me we’ll be getting a whole lot of trouble soon enough.”

“I mean, what it mean for me?” Conrad persisted.

“Oh, it just means that you’ll be even more heavily guarded than before.”

“Not very different then,” Conrad huffed, grimacing at the prospect of even more of those masked guards.

“We can’t have some foreign diplomat see someone that has an uncanny resemblance to Namikaze Minato. It would raise… too many questions.”

“I do this for Naruto, now,” Conrad decided. Inoichi nodded in agreement, and Conrad continued, “But, Inoichi… I have limits.”

“Things will get better in a few days, after the diplomats leave. Just bear with it.”

Conrad grunted and, sensing their conversation was over, Inoichi got up.

“Well, goodnight. Try to remember to put a blanket on your students, too,” Inoichi spoke in farewell.

“You are leaving?”

“It’s late, and I want to go home. Where my family is, you know.”

“Do so, then,” Conrad said, shrugging. Far be it for him to keep a man from his wife and children.

Inoichi started walking, then stopped. “I was wondering, though…” he mumbled.

“Mh?”

“How did you convince the Hokage to let Naruto see you?”

“Naruto asked in front of both. I answered first.” Conrad answered, not even bothering to hide the smirk tugging at the corners of his mouth.

“Ah, I see. You’re the evil twin, are you?”

Conrad laughed at that, “Get lost, milk drinker. Let me sleep.”

Inoichi left with something that sounded like a confused chuckle, if such a thing existed. It seemed that Conrad would have to teach him about Nord insults as well. It wasn’t fun insulting someone if they didn’t get offended.

Bemoaning his lack of a decent verbal sparring partner, Conrad went back inside, turned off the various lights and, after a moment of internal debate, put a blanket over his students so they wouldn’t freeze during the night. He didn’t tuck them in, though.

Lying down on his own bed, the last thought he had before falling asleep was that he had forgotten to ask if Naruto's guardians had agreed to let him stay out for the night.

He guessed that whoever was currently looking after the boy after his parents' death would understand, considering the circ*mstances. Or they could just say the Hokage had ordered it.

Inwardly shrugging, Conrad decided that he would deal with it tomorrow.

Chapter 13: Misunderstandings, Doubts and an Arena

Chapter Text

The cry of a seagull caught his attention. Conrad admired how the bird soared through the air before falling toward the sea to catch its prey. It emerged with haste, a fish firmly trapped in his beak, wobbling a bit with each flap of its wings, as if it was drunk.

Which was not surprising, given that the ocean was made of mead.

Reaching overboard with a cup, he filled it with the sweet nectar. The color, the transparency, the smell… without a doubt, this was the best mead that ever was and ever would be, and even better, he had a whole ocean of it at his disposal. It was his mead, and only his! No one else could have it!

Resolute in his judgement, he moved the cup close to his lips, anticipating the taste—

“Captain, ships to port! They’re chasing us!” the lookout called from the top of the mast. Conrad frowned. Of course someone would try to come between him and his mead. Well, they would have to fight for it.

“Everyone, battle stations!” he ordered, opening his arms wide in a theatrical gesture. He found himself embraced by two lovely and identical women whose outfits would’ve offended any proper lady in any known land.

“Oh, Dragonborn,” the one on the left moaned as she sensually caressed his chin. “Your beard is so… manly.”

“Yes, I know,” he answered without taking his eyes away from the horizon.

“There’s so many of them,” the one on the right said, following his gaze while playing with the clasp on his cloak.

“There are always many,” he sighed. He found himself grasped by a strange discomfort, for reasons he couldn't really discern. Maybe it was just because the position he found himself at the moment rendered it impossible to drink the mead.

The woman on the left hummed and leaned in closer, stretching her neck to reach his ear, as if to whisper something to him. Conrad felt her hot breath tickling him, and eagerly waited to hear whatever voluptuous words she wanted to say.

"I'M LATE!" she yelled at the top of her lungs, deafening him. Conrad forcefully freed himself from the women's’ hold as he stumbled away, tumbling over the ship's railing in the process. A brief fall, and he found himself deep in the ocean of mead.

Instead of trying not to drown, he cleverly figured that there were worse ways to go and opened his mouth to finally have a taste.

Mead, apparently, tasted of cheap blankets.

“I’M LATE!” the voice sounded again, still painful to the Nord’s abused hearing. This time, though, it didn’t sound like a woman at all. It sounded more like a loud, young and rather whiny boy.

Conrad opened his eyes and realized that he hadn't fallen into a more or less limitless supply of his favorite mind-numbing beverage. Instead, he was trapped in a land of mead-less heathens overly obsessed with rice-based dishes, walking around without shoes and adding stupid words at the end of everyone's names. He owned the only bottle of mead on the whole continent, but he didn't dare drink it yet, because there was no way of knowing when more would be available.

He had also gained a nephew in exchange for being a prisoner for the better part of two months. Part of him wasn't yet sure if it had been worth it.

"The tournament’s starting soon! I'm gonna be late!" said nephew yelled as he scampered around the room, trying to collect his belongings and put on his way-too-bright jacket all at once. Even in his mostly-conscious state, Conrad could hear his students stirring and grumbling about being awakened in such a manner.

"Too loud..." one of the three growled, throwing a shoe in Naruto's general direction. It didn't even come close, but at least it caught the boy's attention.

"Hey! Watch it!" he yelled, scowling at the magelings as they slowly got up, apparently having surrendered to the arrival of a new day.

"What go on?" Conrad asked, spitting the blankets from his mouth and not even caring about using proper words. It was too early for grammar.

"Sorry I woke you guys up," Naruto quickly apologized as he grabbed whatever food he could find in the small pantry. Were those cookies? Since when did they have cookies? "But I gotta go!"

"Is tour important enough to panic?" the Nord asked, rubbing his eyes, wondering what hour it was.

"Tournament, not tour!" Naruto corrected, munching his improvised breakfast. "And of course it's important! I need to become a chunin otherwise I'll never become Hokage!"

Even in his barely-awake state, Conrad's mind analyzed what he had just been told. The statement implied that it was possible to 'become' Hokage. But if the Hokage was the city's leader, as well as the shinobi's general, commander or whatever, it meant it could be attained only through military service.

Unless he was wrong and Naruto had been told he could become Hokage because he was Minato's son. Sadly, he wasn't able to confirm or deny either theory because Minato had forgotten to explain to him how to access the memories that had been forcibly engraved into his skull.

He would have to refrain from making assumptions until he could ask Inoichi or one of the masked curs outside, if he managed to pester them long enough to get an answer. But that wasn't important at the moment.

"Why would you ever want that?" he asked. Naruto was ten, eleven at the most. What kid would want to attain a position that required assuming way more responsibility than it was worth, and involve themselves in politics?

A wide range of emotions flashed across Naruto's face as he fumbled for an answer.

"I don't have time to explain it," he whispered, frowning, eyes downcast. He walked toward the door. "See you later, okay?"

After the boy left, silence reigned for a few seconds. The apprentice wizards stirred in their pallet, and Conrad found himself wondering if he had said something wrong. The boy couldn't have been offended by his question, right? Because that would've just been ridiculous.

Also, what did “okay” even mean?

Eh, whatever. The kid would get over it.

"I was having a dream," Conrad bemoaned as he turned his attention back to the important things in life. "Twins, they were."

A sudden, grumbling sound caught his attention, but he wasn't sure if it was coming from the pile of youngsters or from his stomach.

"Are you three still awake?" he asked them, switching back to Cyrodillic, to which they replied with a noncommittal noise. "Then get up and prepare some breakfast.”

A moment later, Sven was promptly thrown out of the sheets by his fellow students.

The public had already started to gather inside the stadium in spite of the early hour. So far, only villagers and the odd off-duty shinobi had shown up to more or less peacefully contend for the best seats. The rich merchants and envoys from the various nobles of the lands, who were more interested in getting a good idea of who to hire for their shady business than a good show, had the luxury of arriving later.

After all, their seats were reserved.

Under normal circ*mstances, Kakashi wouldn't have been anywhere near the place yet. He would've taken his sweet time, maybe even making a nice last-minute dramatic entrance just to have some fun.

But orders were orders, and the Sandaime's messenger hawk had carried very precise ones. Recommendations to be punctual, a short briefing about a possible threat to Konoha, instructions about what to watch out for during the day's event and the promise of doing unspeakable things to him if he failed to show up before the tournament began. Like burning down his Icha Icha collection. Or worse, send him to teach at the Academy.

So here he was, escorting one of his cute little genin to his first Chunin Exam finals.

“Now, remember,” he said, not bothering to even glance at Sasuke. “Be polite to your fellow finalists until you’re actually inside the arena.”

“Hn,” Sasuke grunted, barely acknowledging the jonin’s words. Kakashi inwardly sighed. Whatever Orochimaru used to create that cursed seal of his, it definitely hadn’t helped the kid’s personality.

“And more importantly, don’t underestimate your opponent,” Kakashi continued, a much more serious tone in his voice.

"You’ve told me that a hundred of times already!" Sasuke spat, looking straight at him. "I know Gaara is dangerous."

"I don't want to see you end up like Lee or worse, Sasuke," Kakashi explained once again. As much as he trusted his student, this was going to be the hardest battle he had ever fought so far. Setting foot in the arena with a co*cky attitude wouldn’t do him any good.

Sasuke opened his mouth, more than likely to protest, but ended up not making a sound as his eyes darted down the street.

Kakashi followed his gaze, only to see Naruto walking toward them. He looked more unkempt than usual with an inside-out jacket, unbrushed hair, and specks of crumbs at the corners of his mouth. The kid must have been in one hell of a hurry to get to the stadium.

But that wasn't what worried Kakashi. It was Naruto's downcast eyes that got his attention.

"Hn," Sasuke grunted in surprise, confused and perturbed by his teammate’s actions "You look more terrible than usual."

There was no comeback to that: no grin, no boasting, no posturing, no reciprocal glaring like usual. Naruto just passed them both, barely sparing them a glance.

What the hell had happened while Kakashi was gone? Jiraiya-sama was supposed to train the kid, not turn him into an unresponsive drone. Even Sasuke was surprised by this behaviour, as he stared at the blond's back with a raised eyebrow.

The genin shot his sensei a questioning look. Kakashi didn’t reply, trying to figure out what was wrong. Maybe Naruto was just nervous about the upcoming match? He was sure that Jiraiya wouldn't have let Minato's son participate if he wasn't sure of his skills, so the kid shouldn’t be all that worried.

"Well, Sasuke, you already know what you need to do," Kakashi said, making a mental note to ask for an explanation from the Sannin later. "Now I'll just be on my way and—"

"Are you going to read p*rn again?" the Uchiha asked with an annoyed tone.

"Yes. Yes I am," he nodded sagely. Technically speaking, he was going to do that as well as meet with the Hokage. He waited until Sasuke was just about to leave, clearly unamused, before speaking again. “Keep an eye on Naruto, would you?”

Sasuke looked at Kakashi for a moment and nodded before turning away and disappearing into the deep bowels of the stadium.

Kakashi didn’t linger, and started to make his way towards the Hokage’s box, taking the long route around the bleachers as his mind lingered on what he had just witnessed. He didn’t want to admit it, but seeing Naruto acting so strangely and out of character had worried him more than he’d thought it would. Not even Sasuke’s brooding over revenge during their little training trip had unsettled him as much.

Walking slowly, lost among the crowd that was moving to their seats, was actually good. It allowed him to think over this and be fashionably late—but not too late—for his appointment with the Hokage. Two birds with a stone.

Maybe he was just overreacting. Maybe there was no reason to be worried. Maybe—

“I’m telling you, it was the Yondaime Hokage!” a voice suddenly yelled from the crowd, bringing Kakashi’s train of worries to a screeching halt. A new thought took its place instead, one that could be fully expressed with a flat ‘what’.

“As if,” someone else denied. Closer inspection revealed the two conversationalists to be two regular civilians sitting a few isles from the shinobi, although it seemed their conversation was catching the attention of a few others. “You must have been seeing things. There’s no way you saw the Yondaime.”

“But I did see him! I was there!” the first civilian protested. “I even checked some old pictures of the Yondaime, and the guy looked exactly like him!”

“Okay, so maybe you saw someone who looked like the Yondaime. That doesn’t prove that he was Namikaze Minato.”

“How come?” the first civilian frowned in confusion.

“We’re a Hidden Village. That means that there’s thousands of people who could’ve used an illusion to look like the Yondaime. Even children can use it, my son showed me!” the skeptical man replied in an amused tone. “What did they call it…?”


“Henge,” a third person helpfully supplied. “But I thought that was a physical transformation, not an illusion. Right?”

“Yeah, that one,” the skeptical man nodded. “But how it works doesn’t matter. What matters is that it would explain all these crazy rumors that started yesterday.”

“Look, I’m telling you that I was there! I saw everything!” the first man protested as Kakashi, who had gotten more and more confused as the conversation progressed, was tempted to ask what the heck happened yesterday. “The Yondaime was in a fight with that crazy green dude—”

“Crazy green dude?” the third man interrupted. Kakashi was sure he knew who they were talking about. “You mean the one who’s always exercising and preaching about Youth?”

“Yeah, him! But anyway, they were fighting in front of the hospital. They were hitting each other. It must have been a damn good transformation if it didn’t waver even once.”

A moment of silence descended on the trio of gossipers as they pondered over this.

“But… wasn’t the Yondaime dead?” the second man asked, dubious at his own words. “Against the—”

“Maybe it’s the Yondaime’s ghost?” the third man supplied, not very helpfully this time.

"Aren't you a little too old to believe in ghosts?" the first man asked skeptically.

"But it would explain the Yondaime's weird ice powers!” the second man replied, feigning shock. “Of course, it’s the only answer! He's back from the cold, frozen land of the dead and—"

As the first villager reached over and whacked the second on the back of the head, Kakashi realized that he was wasting his time and immediately stopped listening to their nonsense. Civilians were part of the village, and thus part of what was worth protecting—Will of Fire, and all that—and Kakashi would’ve gladly put his life on the line to protect the village and its inhabitants, of course... but sometimes they just made up the most absurd stories.

His mind kept wandering back to the strangeness of it, though. The message from the Hokage had arrived the previous day, and the rumors about the fight started yesterday as well. Could the two things be related?

Had it not been for one crazy little detail, he would’ve gladly accepted the explanation that Naruto had posed as Minato—oh, the irony if that was true—for some reason and been scolded by the Hokage because of it. That mighte explained Naruto’s mood from before.

And that little crazy detail was “ice-powers”.

Kakashi made up his mind and turned on his heels. He had already planned to be a bit late to the meeting with the Hokage, mostly for the sake of tradition. He may as well keep an eye out for Gai to have a little chat.

Conrad shifted the small brush he was holding between his fingers. He didn’t know what material the handle was made out of, or from what kind of animal the pale bristles came from. Yet, such a small contraption was incredibly good for its purpose.

The weird-tasting paste that had to be used along with it—which Inoichi had insisted wasn’t poisonous nor the fruit of alchemy—was more efficient than simply chewing a mixture of herbal plants, or spending time brewing a potion that helped guard against teeth rot.

For all the annoyance he felt for the Akaviri civilization, given his current experience with them, he had to admit that they had a few interesting contraptions that seemed to make daily life easier.

With that last thought, Conrad finished brushing his teeth and left the toothbrush on the side of the basin. That done, he forced himself to look in the mirror.

An artisan would’ve described the mirror as a perfect craft. Not a bump or a deformation in sight, a completely smooth surface. Said artisan would’ve probably mentioned how such a masterwork should’ve been encased in a fitting frame, maybe with lots of marqueries or gold furnishments, instead of just being put on a wall like that.


Conrad didn’t care what an artisan would’ve thought at the moment, though, as he moved his fingers along the ghost of stubble that was growing way too slowly on his chin. It would take weeks before his beard would even be able to pass as a proper one.

For a moment he began thinking about a possible use of the Alteration school to suit his needs, or at least a possible potion that would help. But previous experiences in his younger years had taught him that beards didn't like to be messed with magically.

He could still hear J'zargo and Brelyna's laughs.

Giving one last glare at his sissy chin—which he blamed on his mother—he left the bathroom, thankful that nobody he knew from back home could witness the damage.

Nobody except for the three students of his, of course.

He supposed he could bribe them by teaching them a spell of two in exchange for their silence. Or blackmail them. Blackmail always worked—

"Master?" Sven called from the dining table, interrupting the Dragonborn's musings. "We finished cleaning up, and Beta and Ta'Sava are waiting us outside."

Conrad nodded absently, retrieving his tunic and preparing to face yet another day of shinobi hospitality. At least he had the prospect of spending time with family, now. Which was strangely nice.

"We also finished taking inventory and assessing the damage, as you asked."

"And?" the Nord asked, turning to look at his apprentice. This was actually worth hearing.

"Well... we lost almost all the ingredients we took with us from the ship. Especially the fire salts," the young Imperial said, checking a couple of notes. "That’s what caused the flames, I think. Oh and your alambic was destroyed, but that shouldn’t be a problem. I mean, it was an old, battered thing—"

“That alambic was a gift from one of my teachers. It used to be his,” Conrad sighed, ignoring the sudden panic on his student’s face. He really hoped that Tolfdir's ghost didn’t decide to manifest and demand an explanation. Then there was the matter of the fire salts. Somehow he doubted he would've been able to find some in a local store, and he really wasn’t looking forward to wasting time summoning and killing fire atronachs to harvest them. "What about the potions?"

"If we count the ones made by us during practice, and the few you made as examples that were spared—"

"Numbers, Sven. Just give me the numbers."

"We have five healing potions, three magicka restoration ones, six stamina tonics, and one to resist frostbite. Or at least I think it's for frostbite."

"... why do we have one for that?" Conrad asked in genuine confusion. "This place is way too warm."

"I added the wrong ingredient during practice," the younger wizard admitted, having the decency to look embarrassed.

“At least you’ve learned something that will help you once we get back back to Skyrim,” Conrad said, trying to see the silver lining.

“Will we even be able to get back?” Sven asked after a moment of silence.

“Of course we will!” the Nord exclaimed, harsher than he had wanted to. “Why wouldn’t we?”

“It’s just… it’s been a long time since we arrived. We don’t know if the ship will wait for us.”

“Yes but they should wait for us until… what’s the date, anyway?” Conrad asked, a bit peeved by the fact of having lost track of time during their imprisonment turned into a forceful welcome to stay.

“Beta and I tried to make sense of it all, but these Akaviri use a different calendar,” Sven explained. “We’re not sure of the exact day, but we should be well into Sun’s Dusk’s third week by now.”

Conrad bit his lip, pondering over this. He had agreed—and not coerced at all—with Edyval that the ship would wait for them for two months at maximum, which meant they were running out of time.

Greed could hold a man in a place for only so long, especially a smuggler that was sitting on a pile of silver coins. If the Breton had not departed yet, he would as soon as his patience reached the boiling point. That would leave Conrad stranded in this forsaken country, along with three far too inexperienced apprentices. Only the gods knew what was going on back home. He hadn’t planned to stay away for such a long time.

Sadly, his studies and general area of expertise had never really covered magical long-distance communication, unlike the wizards and battlemages of old. Nowadays it was a knowledge that the Synod kept for themselves as a politicking tool, the hoarding bastards. So trying to contact the Winterhold College or some of his allies magically, to ask how things were going, was out of the question.

Unless he dared to delve into... alternative methods, which normally he wouldn’t touch with a three-meter long mage’s staff. It was nice knowing that the option existed, but he wasn’t that desperate.

Even if he miraculously managed to get back to the ship on time, or find—or borrow, if he was forced to—another one, fate had conspired for keeping him in that insufferable city by putting someone in his path.

Albeit, to be fair, Minato should get his share of credit for Naruto’s existence.


Conrad was many things, some of which were not all that praise-worthy. But he couldn’t, and wouldn’t, leave after finding a relative just because it was convenient.

He wasn’t like his mother.

“You’re thinking about him, aren’t you?” Sven asked, much to Conrad’s surprise.

“Am I that easy to read, now?” he asked with a snort. He was getting way too used to these kids.

“I’m a wizard,” the young apprentice smiled thinly. “I can do anything.”

“Hah! No, you’re not,” Conrad said, with a short-lived grin. “Not yet, at least. Now come on, let’s join your friends outside.”

Naruto's tunnel vision operated splendidly as he stomped into the finalists' waiting room, ignoring the various people around him.

Since he had left the shack, his uncle Conrad's question kept raging in his head.

Why did he want to be Hokage?

The answer was easy, he wanted to become Hokage to be acknowledged by everyone. To force them to acknowledge him and shove how much of a great ninja he was down their throats!

Or at least that had been the idea when he was younger. But since then, he’d had people who actually acknowledged him, who accepted him! Sure, there were still plenty of jerks who couldn’t stand the sight of him, but he had people he cared for and that was all he really needed.

So why did he need to be Hokage now? It wasn’t because he wanted acknowledgement… or at least, not just acknowledgement. Yet he still couldn’t find a good answer for his uncle. Not because he was having second thoughts about his dream, but because he didn’t want to admit to the man just how badly the villagers regarded him.

His uncle might ask why.

The thought actually terrified him. Would his uncle leave him if he knew what he was? No, uncle wouldn’t do that. At least, Naruto thought his uncle wouldn’t do that. The man had treated him nice enough, considering Naruto had punched him almost as soon as they had met, but despite that, Naruto didn’t actually know him. It had been, what, less than a day? That wasn’t enough time to get to know anybody, much less family.

Maybe being ordered by the Hokage not to tell his uncle about the fox was a good thing.

Before he could ponder it any further, though, he found himself being grabbed from behind and yanked away from his train of thoughts. Literally. He formed a fist to punch whoever had assaulted him, but stopped when he found himself face to face with Sasuke.

"What are you doing?!" the last Uchiha hissed. Naruto immediately regretted not punching him.

"Mind your own business—" he started, only to be silenced as Sasuke motioned to look behind him. Naruto did so, and he was met by two cold, light green eyes.

Naruto had not seen Gaara since that episode back at the hospital, but he doubted the Suna genin's disposition had gotten any better. Then he realized that he had almost collided with him when he had stomping across the room without a care for his surroundings.

He could swear he saw a few grains of sand floating between him and the redhead. He abruptly stopped resisting Sasuke's attempts to distance the both of them from the bloodthirsty teen.

"Idiot," Sasuke hissed while Naruto stared at the sand ninja, images of Lee's preliminary match and subsequent crippling flashing through his head. Thankfully, said images were quickly dismissed as the Uchiha released him with a shove toward the wall. "What is wrong with you today? At this rate, you'll end up dead before your match with the Hyuuga."

"Shut up! I was just thinking about the match, that's all!" Naruto lied. He didn't want to give the impression that he wasn't thinking about the finals. Besides, it was his own business.

"I hope you're taking this seriously," Sasuke muttered.

"Of course I am! I'm not scared of any stupid Hyuuga!"

"Good,” Sasuke said, unconvinced as he glanced at Naruto’s opponent. “Don’t underestimate him.”

"Hmph. Not that it matters, it's his fate to lose," Hyuuga Neji scoffed from his place on the other side of the railing, making Naruto realize that the rest of the finalists were there too.

“Save it for the match, you two,” a voice called before Naruto could retort in an appropriately creative but probably rude manner. Turning around, he saw that a Konoha shinobi had arrived, although he wasn’t the same proctor from the preliminary matches. Maybe they had decided to go with someone that didn’t cough all the time as the finals’ referee. “Come along now. The public, and the customers, are waiting for you.”

Conrad had decided to spend the day teaching magical theory out in the open because of the sudden lack of alchemical equipment and his personal desire to breathe fresh air. All under the watch of the masked guards, of course, who—apart from silently observing—had made it clear that practice of something called ‘jutsu’ was forbidden.

Which the Nord was pretty sure meant ‘spell’ in their tongue.

Sadly, the lesson had deviated from his original plan because of the magelings’ tendency to nag him about details.

"If such spells exist, then why—"

"Because you can't just make rock," Conrad explained as patiently as he could while plucking yet another blade of grass. They may have been forbidden to go too far from the shack but at least the view of the city was nice.

"But there are a lot spells that create things,” Sven countered. “Fire, and—"

"No, they don't,” Conrad interrupted. “Combustion is just an alchemical reaction. You use magic to force it happen. Still, you can't create matter from nothing."

"What about ice?" Beta asked.

"Where there's air, there's water. Unless you're inside a burning building," Conrad answered, citing personal experience.

“That can’t be the only reason though,” Beta protested. “You can find soil everywhere!”

“Not in the middle of the sea,” Ta’Sava pointed out.

“There’s earth at the bottom of the sea!” the girl frowned.

“Yes, yes. There’s a lot of earth and rock everywhere,” Conrad conceded, patting the ground he was sitting on. ”But using it for a spell is very taxing.”

“Why’s that?”

"Because most spells would require manipulating the ground. Earth, rock, sand, bricks, it's still solid matter, and grasping it is more difficult than, say, turning water into ice. Then your spell has to shape it, move it, change its appearance or whatever you may have designed," he explained with a huff. “It’s better to use that energy to directly attack your enemy or to protect yourself."

"Can you even talk about magic without using combat for context, Master Conrad?" Ta'Sava asked, tilting his ears.

"I'm a battlemage, kitten. It comes with the territory,” the Nord said with a faint smile.

“What about conjuring it?”

"That would cost even more, because you would have to pull the damn thing from beyond the veil of Oblivion. Unless you want to summon an earth atronach, that is."

"There are earth atronachs?" Ta’Sava wondered out loud.

"Why wouldn't there be?" Conrad asked, enjoying the looks on his students’ faces as they realized that they didn’t have an answer to that.

“Have you ever met a wizard that specialized in earth spells?” Sven asked after a moment of silence.

“Yes, I met one once. I think it was eight, nine years ago. She made a living restoring fortifications for the Empire, or nobles that could afford her services—”

A distant roar stopped Conrad before he could get on with the anecdote of that encounter, catching everyone's attention. It was as if thousands of people had screamed all at once in a mix of excitement, cheer and enthusiasm.

"What was that?" Beta asked.

"How should I know?" Conrad asked, getting on his feet before turning towards the guards and addressing them in their tongue. "What's that noise?"

The two guards didn’t answer immediately, but seemed to have a silent conversation just by exchanging a glance. They were probably debating if they really had to answer, and how much they could say to him.

“That was the beginning of the tournament,” the one with a mask that resembled a bird of prey’s head answered.

"What," Conrad muttered with a frown.

"I said, it means that the tournament—"

"Yes I understand that," Conrad grunted. That sounded like half the city had cheered at the same time, which utterly confused him. "Who would care so much for children sparring?"

This time they seemed even less eager to answer, much to Conrad’s annoyance. If there was one thing Conrad had learned quickly about shinobi, it was that they were so paranoid that he had no idea how they even managed to go to the outhouse without checking for spies and traitors.

“What do you mean by that, Harissen-san?” the birdie asked with what sounded like genuine confusion, as yet another roar echoed from the distance.

"I think it’s coming from over there," Beta said, pointing to the city in the distance. "From that oval-shaped building."

"That's not an oval, it's a round!" Sven said, before looking at the building with a puzzled expression. "It almost looks like an arena."

"Uh, Ta'sava wonders... did the Akaviri imitate the Imperials' arenas, or is it the other way around?"

As much as Conrad would've liked to ponder over that very intriguing historical and anthropological question, he was too busy connecting ugly little dots in his mind. And he did not like the picture he was seeing.

"Bird-face," he growled slowly, his eyes glued on the arena that lied way too far away for his liking. "What the tournament consists of, exactly?"

It was over. His opponent was laying on the ground, unable to move and quite shocked to have his worldview proved wrong.

"Fate, fate, fate... stop whining about stupid stuff like that," Naruto said, still catching his breath and trying to ignore the pain all over his body. They may call it gentle fist, but there was nothing gentle in getting a beating from it. "Instead of giving up and accepting something you don't like, why don't you just change it?"

Neji’s eyes seemed to widen for only a moment, but before he could say something else he heard the proctor yell something. Then the whole stadium started cheering for him.

He had won.

Naruto couldn’t help but grin, ignoring his bruises, and wave happily at the audience. He still had to win the other matches, but he couldn't wait to tell his uncle about his victory!


The Dragonborn’s reaction to the explanation of how the tournament worked, which was just the final phase of the chunin exams Naruto had been gushing so much, was surprisingly reasonable. Cordial, even. In fact, he wasn’t roasting the masked guard that had explained it to him alive.

Instead, he was just strangling him. Which was much nicer in comparison. While the idea of applying fire to express his disdain had crossed his mind, it would’ve probably been considered rude. Also, he strongly believed that sometimes it was more satisfying to use his own hands instead of magic to do something.

As the masked warrior was gasping for breath, his comrades were trying to restrain the enraged but eerily silent Nord instead of stabbing him with various pointed objects, although that may have been because they had received orders to not kill him and instead, merely reciprocate Conrad’s tact.

Strangely, the magelings had been completely ignored, and were forced to look on as a strange stalemate of pulling, choke-holding and grasping had been reached.

“Maybe if we don’t protest too much once this is over, they’ll just force us to fight in their arena instead of being executed on the spot,” Sven mused, while the rest of the trio wondered if they should get involved or not.

Gareki Ishina’s mood had not improved in the last few weeks. It wasn’t because of the stares or whispers of the crowd, though. She was above such petty things. Civilians’ opinions meant nothing to a shinobi, or at least that what she kept telling herself.

Having to coexist with her enemies for so long, though, wasn’t exactly a cheerful way to spend her time, mission or not. And speaking of the mission, the lack of progress was incredibly frustrating.

All her attempts to locate and infiltrate Konoha's archives had been unsuccessful, mostly because she had been trailed by ANBU shinobi almost the entire time. She had expected it—after all, they would've done the same in Iwa. But slipping away and leaving a mud clone to 'train' her 'students' had taken much more effort than she had anticipated.

Even the rumors going around the village hadn't helped her, since the civilians seemed to be just happy that the weird blue lights that had caused the whole mess had stopped.

She had noticed, though, that there seemed to be a tighter security detail patrolling the village than what would've been usual for the standard chunin exams affair. Especially around the monstrous ego trip that the locals referred to as a monument.

Seriously, what would they do when they finally found themselves out of space on that mountain?

Impracticality aside, the Hokage monument was just that: a monument. And from what she had been hearing, open to the public until recently. Just before the exams, visiting the top had been forbidden with no explanation, and the village had accepted it without question. And just yesterday, even more guards had been added around the secluded area on the top.

Ishina hadn't tried to get up there yet, since there were almost as many ANBU operatives as there were in the Hokage's tower—she knew because she had checked. But having to keep her cover as her teammates' sensei had stopped her from attempting a climb up the moment. If Konoha was hiding something, it was surely valuable.

An annoyed groan distracted her, and she glanced at her third 'student' sitting right besides her.

"What's wrong?" she asked.

"Somehow, watching Konoha shinobi beating each other up is less amusing than I thought it would be," Kurotsuchi, the Tsuchikage's granddaughter, replied. Of course, she had not called her by her real name in the last few weeks to keep their cover. Which was the same reason why the younger kunoichi had been forced to retire from the preliminaries. As much as she would've liked to compete, Ishina had pointed out that they couldn't afford the risk of someone among the spectators recognizing her.

"You have to admit that this match had an unexpected outcome, though," Ishina pointed out, as she watched the two genin leaving the arena, the loser on a stretcher and the winner on his feet.

For a moment, she felt a strange feeling in her gut. Blond hair and blue eyes.

Could it have been... ?

No, there wasn’t a snowball's chance in hell. The Leaf would have raised the Fourth's son as a goddamn prince. As much of a good fighter he was for his age, that kid couldn’t even dress himself properly. It was just her personal obsession and paranoia going awry.

"I suppose," Kurotsuchi mumbled. "It's still better than the match between Mizu and Yano will be once it's their turn."

Ishina would've liked to object to the dismissal of their fellow comrades, but briefly tried to imagine how such a match would've played out from what she had learned during the 'training' sessions. Mizu would immediately hunker down, building bunkers and defensive battlements... and Yano would spend the rest of the match blowing them up, acting like he was Deidara's little brother, in a flashy but boring stalemate. And, of course, they would bicker the whole time.

Not exactly a great moment for Iwa in front of the international shinobi community and foreign dignitaries, and that was her best-case scenario. Ishina shuddered at the idea of the Tsuchikage waking up one morning and finding a missive from Konoha that said “You owe us a new stadium.”

At least, it would make a good distraction for her last recon trip around the village. Today was the last chance they had to complete their mission, because Konoha would probably throw them out as soon as the exams were over. She would've done the same.

The crowd finally became silent as the proctor called the next fighters to the arena. This had been the most anticipated match in these exams, and for a good reason. Everyone was eager to see the Uchiha's skill, Ishiha held no doubts about that, and verify that the power of his bloodline held a candle to the stories they’d certainly all heard.

Ishina personally wasn't interested in that very much. She just wanted an excuse to leave send back a mud clone, and move on to accomplish the mission. Kurotsuchi could evaluate the last hope the Uchiha had of existing in her stead.

The Suna genin, though... there was just something plain wrong about him. And it wasn't just how eagerly he had crippled his opponent during the preliminary matches. The way he looked at the people in the stands sent cold chills down her spine.

If that Konoha genin wasn't careful, the Uchiha clan risked becoming a footnote in the shinobi world history.

That wasn't her problem, though. With that thought in mind, Ishina lurched to her feet, signaled her companion that the operation was starting and began walking off towards the staircase.

She just had to find a secluded area, like the ladies’ restroom, make a little switcheroo trick with a clone and sneak out of the stadium. And that was just the easy part.

Just as she reached the top of the walkway, though, she stumbled into an unexpected problem.

A tall problem. A tall, silver-haired, green-jacket-and-dark-mask-wearing problem. She hadn’t even heard him coming, but standing right at the top of the staircase, looking down at her, was one of the most infamous shinobi that Konoha had produced in recent years.

Hatake Kakashi, the copy-nin, son of Hatake Sakumo, student of the Yondaime, and according to Iwa’s intelligence division, the most probable candidate to succeed Sarutobi Hiruzen.

Did she screw up? Had they found out about their mission?

No, that wasn't possible. Had that been the case, she would've already been ambushed and carted off to their intelligence division. Instead, he was just staring at her with his only visible eye, which lingered on her hitai-ate for a moment as he seemed to gauge her.

Maybe the jonin in front of her had a personal matter to settle with her, or another Iwa-nin. In any other circ*mstance, she would've gladly taken part in that, considering her own personal baggage regarding this man's teacher, but—

“Excuse me, have you seen a man wearing an atrociously green outfit?” the son of the White Fang asked, in a bored voice. “Kinda boisterous, yells about ‘Youth’ all the time? Wears his forehead protector as a belt?”

They both remained silent for a moment, while the rest of the stadium cheered at the match everyone was waiting for finally starting below.

“I’m sorry, what?” she eventually managed to ask.

Ishina wasn’t sure how to react to such a weird question. She had half-expected to be attacked, or called out on her intentions, or maybe something along the lines of “We are watching you, scum,” but instead she was being asked about the whereabouts of another Konoha shinobi?

“I said—” Kakashi asked again, only to stop as he saw a feather passing between the two of them. Ishina followed it with her eyes, and saw another and another appear all around.

It began raining feathers.

All around them, people slumped to the ground with their eyes closed. As if they were asleep.

Then, she heard the explosions going off in the distance.


Everyone froze in their tracks. The masked guards, the Dragonborn and the masked guard that the Dragonborn had been trying to throttle. The magelings, too, but they had not been moving much to start with.

It would’ve been almost an amusing sight had it not been for the cause of their sudden stop.

Conrad let go of the guard, who collapsed to the ground, gasping for breath. When the others let him go with a poignant glare, he moved close to the mountain’s edge to get a better look of the city.

A city dotted by black smoking columns, and echoing with panicked screams. A city under siege, something that Conrad hadn’t seen in a long time.

For a moment he thought of asking how the enemy, whoever they were, had already got in the city. Then he remembered that the enemy probably had shinobi of their own on the inside. They didn’t need to breach the walls.

As he stood there, sounds of fighting and clashes of weapons reverberating through the city, he realized that most of fighting was centered around the arena in the distance.

Exactly where Naruto was.

The next thing Conrad knew, he was running back to the shack, flanked by the guards that were probably thinking that he wanted to escape and chased by his worried students who were shouting questions. He didn’t even bother to listen as he slammed the hut’s door open.

“Stupid, moronic shinobi!” Conrad yelled. “Busy with an important event my arse!”

If the Hokage didn’t want to tell him the city’s little dirty secrets, that was fine by him. Everyone had some, especially the world’s rulers. He had gotten into enough trouble by stumbling upon way too many to believe that anyone in a position of power was a knight in shining armor. But not being told that the city was at risk of being attacked? That was something he took as a personal offense.

Grabbing his bag, he roughly emptied it onto the table, making a mess of pens, pencils, sheets of paper and whatever else he had kept in there. Then he quickly started putting various potions inside.

“Five healing, three magicka, six stamina,” he recounted with a grimace. “All made by greenhorn alchemists.“ Beggars couldn’t be choosers, though. He was more worried about the lack of armour and weapons, but that wasn’t going to make him balk. No army would.

Leaving behind the useless potion of frost resistance, he closed the bag, strapped it on his shoulder and stormed outside. He was met by a wall of masked guards, who were already on edge for his completely justifiable actions of a few moments ago.

"Halt, sir," their leader called, his voice firm even if it was still a bit coarse.

"Move," Conrad growled without stopping.

"We have orders to—"

"Don't care,” the Nord interrupted, still advancing. “Move."

"We need—"

"There is war out there, or did you not notice with that mask on?!" Conrad asked, finally coming to a stop right in front of the other man. The other guards surrounded him, hands ready on their weapons.

"I did notice. We all did,” the guard with the bird mask said, icily. He was probably pissed. Who wouldn’t be? His city was under attack and he was forced to keep watch over the crazy foreigner. “But we were tasked with keeping you safe here—"

"My nephew is out there, where people are dying,” Conrad said flatly, looking straight in the holes of the man’s mask. “I dare you to stop me."

The guard stared at him in silence for a few long seconds. After a tense moment with both sides preparing for a brawl, the man finally stepped aside.

Chapter 14: In Which Shinobi Meet The Dragonborn

Chapter Text

As he walked closer to the edge, he could clearly hear the chaos the city was spiraling into. War cries, screams, and the clash of weapons filled the air. An explosion went off in the distance and from his vantage point, Conrad tried to figure out where the enemy may have placed their siege engines.

Then he realized that shinobi didn’t need siege engines, not when they could move at such absurd speeds and use magic, jutsu or whatever they wanted to call it.


Conrad had to get to the arena as fast as possible, and he knew there was only one way.

"Dur Neh Viir!" he shouted, the power of the words tearing a rift in reality's veil. No reason to hold back.

A dark purple portal sang itself into existence with an otherworldly hum. Within seconds it dispersed, leaving behind a massive creature standing before its summoner on the mountaintop.

His students and the guards shouted in a panic, cowering at the sight of the great dragon. Well, his students were cowering and looking in awe. The guards were still doing their best to look stoic, although they were brandishing their weapons.

He tried not to gag when the stench finally hit him. It was like someone had suddenly dropped a warehouse of rotten meat in the middle of a mass grave, and the odor instantly turned the gawking looks that his students had been sporting into grimaces of disgust. Even the guards seemed to be taken aback, perhaps even more than the ancient dragon looming by the Nord’s side.

“Since when do dragons stink?!” Beta exclaimed in her mother tongue as she pinched her nose.

“Nevermind that,” Sven quickly said as he tried to steady himself, looking right at his teacher. “You can summon dragons?!”

“A couple,” Conrad answered with a grimace. “But normally I don’t call for this one.”

“Because it stinks?” Beta asked.

“How can you even—”

Qahnaarin,” Durnehviir rumbled after taking in his surroundings, his head slowly looking over the magelings and the assembled guards. “Are these the ones we must kill?”

The sight of the panicked expressions caused by the dragon’s sudden attention would’ve been amusing in any other circ*mstances. Sadly, he wasn’t able to see the guards’ faces because of those cursed expressionless masks of theirs.

“No,” Conrad said as he mustered the courage to do what he had to. Suppressing a sigh and trying hold back the nausea, he started to climb over the rotting dragon’s neck.

“Dovahkiin, what is the meaning of this? I am not Odahviing, I have no intention to be used as a—”

“See that?” Conrad interrupted once he got properly seated, gesturing to the city below. “There’s a war going on. City under siege, plenty of enemies to destroy and a lost kin to find before he gets killed.”

For a short moment the dragon looked upon the ongoing battle before making a satisfied growl.

“You could have just said that.” The Nord couldn’t see it from his scaly seat, but he was sure that the warmongering dragon was smiling.

As the mighty dragon spread his wings, Conrad turned towards the masked guards that were frantically gesticulating among themselves for some reason. “Keep kids safe,” he ordered in his mangled Akavirian, glancing at his mount.

Before they could even protest, the great beast jumped from the cliff, and for the first time in millennia, a dragon was flying under Akavir’s skies.


The ANBU stood in silence for several seconds as they watched the dragon fly away. The magelings were clearly in awe. The girl whispered something in her native language, as he stared at their teacher’s summon. The cat-boy nodded in agreement, his tail twitching.

“... Sir?” Squirrel said hesitantly. “Did we just… let the prisoner go?”

“You heard the Hokage. These people are our guests, not our prisoners,” Owl explained, his arms crossed. “Besides, we didn’t let him go. He just left.”

“... Yes, sir.”

“But captain, it seems as if he’s going straight where the fighting is more intense,” Badger pointed out, her tone possibly tainted by a trace of amusem*nt.

"That won't do. We can't let a civilian under our watch wander around a combat zone."

"Didn't said civilian just summon a mythological creature?"

"That may be, but he still counts as a civilian," Owl pointed out.

“Yes, sir.”


“Half of you will stay with Hawk here and protect the children,” the captain ordered.

“Hey! We’re not children! I amuh... six-ten years old!” Sven objected, fumbling with his Akavirian numbers.

“The rest of you come with me,” he went on, ignoring the young wizard. “We will track down and protect the… civilian. Move out.”


As soon as the instructions were given, half of the team moved as one, doing their best to catch up with the faster dragon.

“If they wanted to protect their home, they could’ve just said so,” Beta said, which prompted a nod from her fellow Tamrelians.

“Kai!” Sasuke exclaimed, focusing to break the genjutsu that almost made him fall asleep. He had not expected Gaara to be a genjutsu user since he had always seen him rely only on his sand, but if the Suna genin thought that an Uchiha would be so easily defeated by an illusion, he was wrong.

Gaara took advantage of his moment of distraction and, with a raised arm, sent a wave of sand rushing towards Sasuke. The Uchiha was saved from a premature demise only because his Sharingan registered the incoming attack as soon as Sasuke opened his eyes again, and his reflexes honed during training with Kakashi took over.

An instant after dodging the deadly sand he was across the field, whirling a foot into his opponent's face. Sasuke saw Gaara's eyes actually widen a little before impact. A satisfying crack was heard as the sand covering Gaara's cheek fractured.

He escaped just before the sand-user’s so-called perfect defence could catch up with him and crush him to a pulp. He couldn’t help but grin at the knowledge that he was too fast for his opponent.


An explosion in the audience distracted him from his thoughts. Before Sasuke could react, there were shinobi fighting all over the stadium. Even the proctor had an assailant engaged with him in the arena itself.

Gaara didn’t seem to be surprised by this turn of events, though, and as Sasuke looked around, stunned at the battle surrounding them, the Suna genin sent yet another wave of sand to envelope him. This time, however, Sasuke wasn’t going to be able to dodge it.

His eyes widened in the half second before he was grabbed around the waist. Much to his surprise and briefly-lived confusion, though, he wasn’t squished to a pulp. He was being pulled away, and a quick look revealed that a man—an ANBU, given the mask he was wearing—had snatched him away from the match.

As he found himself being dragged over the stadium walls at shinobi speed, he gave a last look at the building that was descending into chaos. Then he did his best to wriggle free.

“Hey, let me go!” he yelled when the shinobi holding him refused to loosen his grip. “I need to defeat him!”

“The tournament is over, Sasuke,” the ANBU said as he landed on a nearby rooftop. His voice sounded strangely familiar, for some reason.

“Over?” Sasuke asked, jerking free from the ANBU’s hands. The man didn’t make any attempt to stop him.

“Konoha is being invaded,” the masked shinobi continued. “Suna has betrayed you.”

“What do you mean, ‘you’?” Sasuke asked, eyeing the other shinobi suspiciously. “Aren’t you ANBU?”

“Not quite, Sasuke,” the man said in an amused tone, removing his mask to reveal a known spectacled face.

“Kabuto?” the young genin asked, slightly confused. “What’s going on here? You’re a Konoha genin.”

"I'm no genin," Kabuto said calmly, his demeanor completely different from what Sasuke remembered. "And Sarutobi Hiruzen is not my Kage."


Sasuke’s eyes quickly widened in realization as he took a step back. “You’re a spy.”

“Correct,” Kabuto said, throwing away the mask. “You see, Sasuke, my master has a special interest in you. But you should know that already by now, am I right?"

Sasuke hands instinctively went to the cursed mark on his neck.

"That's right," Kabuto nodded with a hint of amusem*nt. "Orochimaru-sama sent me to give you an... invitation, of sorts."

"An invitation?" he asked, trying to ignore the sounds of battle in the distance. If the village was being invaded, there was no way help would arrive any time soon. He was on his own.

"Indeed. He is giving you an offer to join Otogakure. He will train you, and give you the power to accomplish your goal."

Sasuke froze as his mind drifted to that man. He felt the curse mark flare for a second, even with the seal Kakashi had placed around it. "And what would he want from me in exchange?" he found himself asking. Was he really thinking about it? Leaving Konoha, betraying his village to reach his goal?

"Your loyalty," Kabuto stated as if it was obvious. "And in a few years, your body.”

“My body?” Sasuke asked, taken aback by such request. Had it not been for the fact that he was standing in front of a self-declared enemy shinobi, he would've felt sick. Or at least, sicker than he was feeling all of sudden.

“Orochimaru-sama’s reincarnation technique is not perfect, sadly,” Kabuto explained, in a way that didn’t sound like he was saddened at all. “He requires a new host every three years, and he is really interested in your doujutsu.”

Oh, so that was what he had meant. It didn’t make Sasuke feel any better, though.

"I don't think that would be a good deal for me, then,” he said, stalling for time as he dropped one hand to his side in an attempt to look casual. His hand was now much closer to the shuriken in his pouch. “After killing my brother, I must restore my clan."

"Mmh, yes,” Kabuto nodded, tipping his chin in a pensive manner. “You may need your body for that."

"Yes. So... please tell Orochimaru that I’m not interested,” Sasuke said, waiting for the facade to drop.

"But you see, Sasuke... Orochimaru-sama doesn't like being told no. This farce was just to see if you would come on your own, or"

Sasuke moved, throwing three shuriken as a distraction while drawing a kunai from the holster. As Kabuto swiftly dodged the throwing stars, Sasuke jumped at him, aiming to stab him in the neck.

His charge came to a halt as Kabuto’s hand closed on his wrist, and the traitor used Sasuke’s own momentum to slam him to the roof.

“I told you, Sasuke-kun,” Kabuto said with a mocking smirk, producing a syringe from nowhere. “I’m no mere genin.”

“Let him go,” a voice said all of sudden, causing both of them to freeze. “He is mine.”

Sasuke didn’t move his eyes from Kabuto and his syringe until he saw a few grain of sands floating by. Daring to look away, he saw Sabaku no Gaara literally rising from the roof’s edge, his sand keeping him aloft while simultaneously billowing out into an ominous brown cloud.

For a moment, Sasuke met Gaara’s crazed eyes.

“What are you doing here, jinchuuriki?” Kabuto asked, almost disdainfully. Sasuke couldn’t help but wonder what jinchuuriki meant, but he had more pressing matters. He tried to reach for his weapon pouch, but Kabuto put a foot on his free hand. Dammit. “You were instructed on what to do, you’re supposed to be wrecking as much of this place as you can.”

“Let Uchiha Sasuke go,” Gaara repeated, his voice sounding very different from before. Almost more feral. “He must prove my existence!!!”

And with that, all the sand around them rushed toward Kabuto, whose eyes widened in utter shock. “Oh, fu—”

Sasuke interrupted the spy’s rude choice of words by kicking him with all his strength, rolling away as the sand passed over where he had been lying. Getting to his feet, he watched the sand envelope his almost kidnapper. Then, it collapsed on itself.

There was a sickening crunch and the Kabuto cried out in pain before being thrown from the roof like so much garbage.

Sasuke was now alone on the rooftop with Gaara. Something brushed against his foot, and looking down he almost panicked at seeing streams of sand snaking between his legs. But the sand just kept going towards Gaara, flowing all around Sasuke’s feet and not harming him in any way.

Was Gaara being fair because their match had been interrupted? No, that couldn’t be. He was just playing with him, like a cat with the mouse.

He couldn’t help but feel creeped out, really creeped out by the way Gaara was looking at him. It wasn’t at all like in the arena. Gone was the cold and expressionless face that Sasuke was used to; but after all, this wasn’t a tournament match anymore.


Concentrating on his chakra, Sasuke started forming his Chidori. Gaara threw himself at him like a sandstorm.

Ishina hadn’t seen it coming. That wasn’t good, because shinobi that got surprised tended to quickly become dead shinobi in such scenarios.

The stadium was in a state of chaos. Civilians had all been caught in a massive genjutsu, and an explosion from the balcony reserved for the two Kage had immediately followed.

It didn’t take much time before shinobi from both sides had arrived on the scene, and small skirmishes were escalating in a large battles all over the stadium between the seats of sleeping people.

Konoha was being invaded, and Ishina and her team were trapped in the middle of it.

Worse, right in front of her stood one of the elite jonin of this forsaken village, who was silently staring at her with his only visible eye as if he was wondering whether she was involved in this.

She was distracted from wondering how she could survive against such an opponent by the sound of metal and an alarmed crya cry from a familiar voice.

She snapped her head back and saw Kurotsuchi deflecting a barrage of kunai. Ishina’s eyes instantly tracked the kunai’s flight path back to a ninja who was running towards her student, already forming hand signs for a jutsu.

Her fingers blurred through a jutsu of her own, but much to her dread it became clear that she wouldn’t be able to finish in time. The shinobi leaped towards Kurotsuchi, the single note symbol in his hitai-ate perfectly visible now as he drew his head back as if to take a deep breath.

And then the Yondaime's student was there, barrelling into him like a loose boulder and sliding a kunai into his jugular.

The Sound nin dropped to the ground as the Konoha jonin took a defensive position. Two other ninja engaged him, eager to avenge their fallen comrade.

Ishina quickly finished her sequence of handsigns and unleashed the technique.

The concrete wasn't the best to work with, but the bleachers broke apart all the same, forming a crown of hardened spikes around Kurotsuchi and the Konoha-nin that had just saved her. The two men were impaled on the spot.

Kakashi of the Sharingan stared idly at the still-twitching corpses for a couple of seconds before turning towards her.

"I take it that Iwa is not involved in this?"

Annoyed, Ishina almost replied, but the whizzing sound of shuriken announced the arrival of more shinobifrom Suna this timeand they were thrust again into battle.

A Suna nin jumped over the spikes, diving directly for Ishina. Before she could react, something scathingly hot soared right over her head, crashing into the shinobi's torso. His screams were short-lived as the lava burned through his uniform, then his body burst into flames. Ishina dodged the flaming corpse falling towards her, turning around to see Kurotsuchi right before her, hands still held together.

“You know, that’s really impressive for a genin,” the jonin remarked, a spark of suspicion in his gaze.

“We train them well in Iwa,” Ishina replied, hoping that the explanation would be enough in the middle of battle. There was no way it would pass more thorough questioning. As soon as she was able, she was going to have to pull her team out of the village. “I need to find my other two students.”

"Your other students? If they're skilled as this one, I'm sure they'll be fine."

Ishina didn't reply to that. Not because she didn't want to, or because the battle around them made her unable to come up with a suitable rebuttal to a nosy Konoha shinobi. It was the giant purple barrier appearing on the top of a nearby roof that distracted her from that. Even Hatake Kakashi, notorious for being as laid back as he was lethal, seemed to blink in surprise at that for a moment.

"How unyouthful," someone declared loudly. "Hokage-sama is trapped in there."

Said voice belonged to a tall, muscular man dressed in green unitard that left little to imagination. To make it worse, he had the worst haircut Ishina had ever seen. Somehow, the the monstrous eyebrows were the closest thing to normal on his person. It didn’t take a genius to realize that she was standing right in front of Konoha’s Green Beast.

“Oh, Gai. You’re here,” Kakashi said in greeting.

“Yosh!” the horrifically green shinobi exclaimed as he punched an enemy with the back of his fist without even looking back. “My eternal rival, it appears that our allies have turned against us during this most youthful exam,” the man ranted without even bothering to lower his voice. "And who would these lovely kunoichi be?"

"Oh, they're two foreign guests that got caught in our own invasion."

"Oooh, I see. Quickly, my rival! We must escort our honorable guests to safety!"

"Ah," Kakashi intoned in agreement. "Her two other genin as well."

Ishina weighed her options. She could try to find the rest of her team by herself and then attempt to run away and possibly be killed, either ‘accidentally’ from the defenders or by one of the invaders. On the other hand, if she stayed with the two joninwho were strange, but had not attacked her yetshe could keep her team safe, but there was no way she would be let go once the crisis was over.

As she realized that her chances of completing her mission were long gone, a loud roar echoed from the sky, forcing her to look up.

What she saw was straight out of legend.

Dragon and rider circled slowly above the arena, and for a moment the battle seemed to grow quiet as the beast growled at the fighters below. Conrad ignored it as much as he could and scanned their surroundings, yelling at Durnehviir to get closer.

The purple barrier that had appeared during the brief flight was intriguing. It could've been some sort of protective ritual, but why concentrate it on the roof instead of a larger area?

It didn't really matter to him. He guessed that whatever kind of magic the ninja were trying to use to protect their home was their business. Knowing that they would handle it, he kept scanning the arena.

Aside from the shape, the arena didn't resemble the ones Conrad had seen in his travels through the Empire, but the purpose was clear all the same.

Unlike the Empire, though, it seemed that Akavir enjoyed the idea of children taking part in a blood sport. He was planning to have a little talk about this with the Sandaime.

Either that or just take the boy and get out of the city.

As Conrad shifted his gaze over to the area reserved for spectators, Durnehviir stopped his glide, flapping his wings to hover in place. Everywhere he looked, he could see bodies scattered across the arena’s terraces. He tried to not think about the chance that Naruto was among them.

The shinobi, having overcome the surprise of seeing a dragon soaring above their heads, resumed fighting and killing each other.

He could feel the dragon's impatience through its muscular neck, but for now it seemed that Durnehviir was content with merely observing the battle.

Flickering his fingers, he called to a small ounce of his power to distractedly fuel his spell. A pale blue light left his hand and flew over the arena, never escaping Conrad’s eyes. After a brief flight, it disappeared right at the other side of the arena, close to the edge.

The Nord stretched a bit out from the dragon's neck, as if it would help him see better, squinting his eyes in that direction. There seemed to be a small group of people along the top rows, made up of adults and children. The adults were obviously trying to keep them safe from the battle, but that wasn’t what had caught Conrad’s interest.

Orange. He wasn't imagining it, one of the smaller figures on the bleachers was wearing orange clothes.

Yes, that was the boy. Thank the gods, he had had enough common sense to stay away from the lower stands where the fighting was more fierce.

Without any warning, the massive skeletal form beneath him ceased hovering and lurched forward with a few mighty flaps of his wings. The Nord managed to grip the big spinal scales for dear life, while yelling protests to the dragon at the top of his lungs.

“Durnehviir!” Conrad shouted, all too aware of the growing distance between him and Naruto. “Turn back! We’re going the wrong way!”

“Behold, Qahnaarin,” Durnehviir rumbled as he inhaled deeply, tasting the air. “A great challenge waits ahead of us! A worthy foe indeed!”

A worthy foe? What on earth was the overgrown lizard—

He heard it before he saw it. He turned his head as the outer city walls burst inward, wood and stone splintering like twigs as a large form appeared from the dust.

Conrad blinked. It was a giant snake. A giant, three-headed snake.

The thing was massive, dwarfing entire streets as it slithered into the city proper, contemptuously wrecking the buildings around it with every move. It seemed that when it came to monsters, Akavir compensated for the lack of quantity with quality.

Strangeness, too.

With his luck, the damn thing probably breathed fire. Or lightning. Or acid. Or all three, one from each head.

Conrad could surely understand why the ancient dragon had rushed in the walls' direction. He himself could feel his draconic soul rear its ugly head, enticed by the idea of fighting such an exotic, and more importantly, bigger creature.

A low growl escaped his bared teeth, but before it could escalate in a full-fledged roar he noticed the tiny specks darting around the snake. Shinobi, he bet, invading the city through the breach that had just opened up.


Taking a deep breath, he did his best to keep his instincts at bay, forcing himself to remain calm and logical.

Right. Logic. He was a wizard, more or less, and wizards used logic.

The city was under attack. Actually, the city's enemies were already inside its walls. Which meant two things for Conrad.

First, that Konoha's defences were so ineffective that they had fallen within less than a day of siege, something which he would ridicule them over for as long as he lived. Secondly, that each second he spent on the back of the most smelly flying creature that had ever soared Tamriel and Akavir's skies was a second more that Naruto was left on his own in the middle of a chaotic battlefield.

Clearly, there was only one logical thing to do.


“Good hunting,” Conrad said, patting the dragon's scales before leaning to the side and letting gravity take hold of him.

Forcing himself to not look down, he started to weave spells as quickly as he could and tried to not think about what would happen in just a few seconds if he stopped.

Slowing down the fall was an obvious priority, so he focused on that first. A half-assed levitation variant on the fly worked splendidly for that purpose, but much to his annoyance the drain was a bit more than he had anticipated. After all, levitation was just applied telekinesis and that kind of magic tended to suck magicka like a vampire sucked blood, no matter how skilled the user was.

He concentrated just enough on the spell until he was what seemed like a survivable length above a house, then released the spell and hastily began casting another one. Magicka burned across his skin, hardening it just before he crashed through the roof.

It hurt more than he had expected, but it was only when he finally stopped against a floor, reducing it to a heap of rubble, that he really felt pain.

His skin ached. His muscles ached. His bones ached. Yet he was still alive.

After staring at the almost man-shaped hole above him for a moment, he tried to get up with a groan, ignoring his body’s protests.

As he stumbled into a mostly erect position, Conrad started rummaging through his pouch, only to pause as he felt cold liquid smearing his hands. Dread filled him as he fumbled blindly around the bag's interior. His fingers brushed against sharp edges that would have sliced his hand open if not for his hardened skin, and fearfully, he pulled the objects out.

Broken, shattered, empty vials.

Kneeling down, Conrad turned the bag inside out, letting the contents spill onto the ground. Quickly sorting the broken glass from the still intact phials, Conrad groaned as he realized how many he had lost in the impact. How had jumping looked like a good idea, mere moments ago?

Uncorking one of the few healing potions left, he gulped it down in one go. The taste was beyond terrible, and he pressed a hand to his mouth as he forced himself to not retch. It was probably one of Sven’s. How could a promising chef be so terrible when it came to alchemy? It was pretty much the same thing!

As Conrad thought about one of his apprentices’ future career choices, he could feel a warm, soothing sensation passing through his body. The aching stopped and the pain subsided as the potion’s magic repaired injuries, which he helped further with a simple healing spell.

He took a few breaths before putting the remaining potions back in the bag. It was time to go.

He had a nephew to save, after all.

The street was clear when he left the house he had landed in. Most of the citizens had probably gone to watch the tournament, or fled as the giant snake was sighted. He could hear the fighting in the distance and could see Durnehviir challenging the three headed snake by the wall.

It would have been an interesting battle to watch, but he had more important things to do. Focusing, he recalled the image of Naruto and cast a clairvoyance spell. The familiar blue light left his palm, and he started to follow after it.

Then the road broke in a massive wave of earth and he was slammed against a building.

“Got one!” Masumi exclaimed as he felt a sense of satisfaction at seeing his victim impact against the wall.

“Sure, you got a civilian,” Jun sneered at him. “That doesn’t count.”

“Is that envy, Jun?” Masumi asked, mocking his comrade from his missing-nin days. Even if it was just a civilian, he was the one that had drawn first blood out of his teammates. Just the first of many, since Orochimaru-sama had ordered them to cause as much damage as possible. Ninja, civilians or visitors, it didn’t matter.

Today was the day Konoha would be painted in blood.

“Cut it out you two,” Hisoka, their chunin team leader called. She quickly signaled to advance, and the four-man cell moved as one, jumping above the wrecked street and starting to speed across the rooftops, their eyes scanning for any threats.

The roar of thunder came from behind them, unexpected. Masumi’s eyes widened as they scattered out of reflex just as a bolt of electricity passed through the middle of their formation. Jun wasn’t able to dodge as quickly as the others and cried in pain as the jutsu hit his left arm. As the team landed, Masumi forced himself to not rush to check on his friend’s condition, looking instead in the direction from where the attack had come.

In the middle of the street stood the man Masumi had attacked just moments earlier, who was now calmly dusting off his odd clothes.

Masumi could feel sweat forming on his brow. The man didn’t look like a shinobi, hell, he wasn’t even moving like one. Yet he had thrown a raiton jutsu at them, one they had barely dodged.

They all stared at each other for a few seconds, before the stranger opened his mouth, as if to speak. It seemed that he changed his mind very quickly though, since he just closed it and raised one of his arms.

There was no warning for what came next, save for the sudden light around their opponent’s hand. No handsigns, no calling of chakra, nothing. Just a strong stream of fire that erupted from the extended hand into their direction.

Masumi jumped away, guided by honed instincts. His mind, though, was screaming about what he was seeing. An elemental jutsu being cast without handsigns at all wasn’t possible: it went against the way ninjutsu worked. Jun may have been thinking the same thing, or being distracted by the wound on his arm, because he was enveloped by the jet of flames.

The scream echoed through the street even after he’d stopped moving.

Masumi tried to ignore it as much as he could. The mission came before everything. Still, he couldn’t help but feel something inside of him breaking at seeing Jun’s horrible fate. No one deserved a death like that, not even a former missing-nin.

Gritting his teeth, Masumi unsheathed two kunai from his holster. A quick shunshin, and he was charging right up to the blond man, slashing at his face and throat. The man’s head jerked aside, and Masumi felt a sense of satisfaction at the idea of having avenged his comrade.

It was short-lived though, as instead of the satisfying sound of metal searing through flesh, the Sound shinobi felt like he had just scraped his weapons against stone.

The man turned his head, glaring at him. Much to Masumi’s shock, instead of the gaping wounds he was expecting, there were barely two scratches on the stranger’s skin.

Then the man shouted one word that didn’t make any sense. “Fus—”

The stranger said something else, but Masumi didn’t catch it as he was thrown by an unseen force into a wall. Pain shot through his body at the impact, nearly blinding him.

There were flashes of light in his peripheral vision, but he was in so much agony that he

couldn’t focus on the fight. Maybe he had broken a rib or two, he reasoned. Putting an arm to the ground, he tried to get up. His team needed him.

His legs refused to move. With a growing horror, he realized that he could not feel his feet anymore. This… was a problem. He tried to pull himself to a standing position, but quickly realized that it was a terrible idea as pain roared through his upper body. He blinked back tears of agony. Something was broken. Likely his back.

He heard a scream, and his head snapped around, praying to whatever gods there were that it was from the bastard who did this to him.

The blond man had used another raiton jutsu with Hisoka as the target. The woman’s body collapsed, twitching even after death. Her murderer just walked over her corpse, uncaring and already sizing up his next target.

The last of his teammates—Ippei, he thought—threw a barrage of shuriken at the enemy, before using a quick substitution to appear right behind the man, a kunai in his hand. He made a movement as if to stab the opponent in the lungs, but it was about as effective as Masumi’s earlier strikes.

The stranger turned into a blur, a purple flash briefly appearing around his right hand. The next moment, the blond man was holding a weird black axe in his hand, its head buried deeply into Ippei’s chest. As the Oto shinobi fell to his knees, gurgling his last breath, the man put a foot on his torso and pulled his weapon free.

He turned to Masumi, annoyance written across his face. That was when Masumi realized that he was going to die there.

He lowered his gaze, resigning himself to his fate as his soon-to-be killer started walking up to him. Walking. What kind of shinobi walked during a fight, he wondered.

As the man was just a few steps away from him, though, a sudden jet of water slammed into the blond, knocking him flat on the ground several feet away.

Looking up, Masumi saw several figures on the rooftops. Shinobi, part of the invasion force, most proudly wearing the symbol of Otogakure, but there were a few Suna nin as well.

Backup had arrived, probably attracted by the sound of the fight. Masumi felt a wave of relief wash over him and a hint of satisfaction at the idea of seeing the bastard that crippled him die.


Masumi saw something move in the corner of his eyes and turned just to see the enemy get up from a pile of freshly-formed mud, glaring in the reinforcement's direction.

A shinobi quickly flashed through a series of hand signs which resulted in an explosion of fire being thrown in the blond man's direction.

Widening his eyes, the man raised his hand, as if to shield himself from the incoming flames.

Much to Masumi and everyone else's surprise, it worked. The flames stopped right before the stranger's hand as if they had hit an invisible wall. As the fire subsided, Musumi noticed a shimmering blur around the man's hand. What kind of jutsu was that?

The other shinobi hesitated, but it was just for the blink of an eye. Soon, more jutsu started crashing against the strange barrier. A water bullet, a earth spike, a flurry of wind blades, everything seemed to be stopped or deflected by the man’s defensive technique. Strangely enough, kunai and shuriken didn’t seem to be affected by it, but they still bounced off without leaving any substantial damage in that stupidly thick skin.


The stranger started to stumble backwards under the onslaught, arm still raised. The shinobi around him smirked as he retreated toward a nearby house, but much to Masumi’s confusion, the enemy produced a flask containing a blue liquid from his pouch and drank it right before disappearing into the building.

Poison, maybe? Could it be that the blond man wanted to die on his own terms instead of being overwhelmed? If that was the case, Masumi wondered bitterly why he hadn’t done it before breaking his back.

Whatever that liquid was, the stranger had backed himself into a corner, and there was no way he’d be able to escape now. Masumi observed as the other shinobi advanced, warily getting closer to the house.

There was a purple flash from the inside, making them hesitate and step back as it turned into a red, glowing light. Then a woman on fire lunged from the doorway, throwing fire jutsu at the closest person she saw.

One ninja was cut down by the flames, and Masumi was able to look at her more clearly for just an instant. It wasn't a woman on fire. It was made of fire. She was like an angry, aggressive living flame, contained in a strange black shell making the rest of her body. To top it off, her feet weren't even touching the ground, rather, she was floating just a few inches from the street.

Whatever that thing was, it was not, and probably never had been, human. It was one of the most twisted summons that Masumi had ever seen, and he had seen Orochimaru-sama feed his snakes once.

The other shinobi quickly reacted to such a strange appearance, focusing their attacks on the summoned creature. There was a flash of steel as someone Masumi didn’t know unsheathed her ninjato and slashed it at the fire monster’s head. The sword struck true, cutting deeply into the creature’s neck, from which a rain of embers fell.

The next thing Masumi knew, the thing exploded in a burst of flames, causing him to shield his eyes from the bright light.

What remained of the shinobi that had engaged the summon in melee was now scattered around by the blast, the fire from the explosion quickly covering the whole area in smoke.

Masumi’s ears were still ringing when the stranger emerged again from the doorway, stepping over the body of his own summon, which was quickly disintegrating for some reason. The blond warrior was again wielding an axe, but this time it was much longer and larger, as tall as a man.

He seemed to yell something in… whatever language he—or it—spoke. Masumi wasn’t able to hear it well, but thanks to years of training, he could still read the man’s lips.

Hun Kaal Zor.

Danzo stood in an underground chamber, looking down at a map of the village spread flat over the surface of a large table. On either side of the table sat two shinobi, each operating a radio and reporting the events unfolding around the village to their leader.

“Second team in position, Danzo-sama,” one said. “Waiting for orders.”

“Tell them that their previous orders stand,” Danzo replied, his only visible eye moving briefly to the spot where the team in question was located on the map. “Flank the enemy’s reinforcements, prioritize taking down team leaders.”

The radio operator made an acknowledging reply and relayed his instructions. Danzo took a moment to observe the situation. The enemy had already been inside their walls when the attack had begun, and more were currently converging on the village from outside. Forces of both Suna and Oto had been spotted moving through the forests around Konoha, meaning that they had managed to set up staging positions around the village without their patrols noticing.

Someone, he swore, was going to be held accountable for this failure once the invasion was repelled.

Meanwhile, Sarutobi was trapped inside a barrier jutsu above the stadium and locked in a fight against Orochimaru himself. To make things worse, it seemed that Orochimaru had summoned the Shodaime and Nidaime Hokage with a forbidden technique to assist him.

The barrier rendered any attempts to help Sarutobi a moot point for now, and Danzo couldn’t help but wonder how long his old comrade would be able to hold against three formidable opponents. Had it been just Orochimaru, Hiruzen may have even been able to come out victorious, if he managed to find the will to kill his former pupil and the will to follow through with it.

If the barrier didn’t go down soon, though, Konoha might find itself in need of a new Hokage by the end of the day.

“Any updates on Jiraiya’s position?” he asked.

“He was seen moving towards the breach in the walls, Danzo-sama, but there have been no further sightings yet,” one of the operators replied. Danzo nodded in a barely noticeable way and went back to study the map. Jiraiya probably wanted to face the invaders’ summon with one of his own to limit the damage to the village.

“We’re getting an update from the first team: mission successful, minimal casualties,” the radio operator continued.

“Order them to relocate on the western outskirts of the village and begin using hit-and-run tactics on the Suna forces coming from that direction until further notice.”

“Danzo-sama,” the shinobi on the other side of the table called all of sudden. “We have confirmation on the foreigner’s position. He is currently engaging the invaders in the eastern residential district.”

“On his own?” Danzo found himself asking, a part of him genuinely curious about this unexpected turn of events.

“Yes, Danzo-sama,” the ROOT shinobi nodded. “He is showing some unorthodox abilities but it seems that he is faring well, for now.”

“How did he get there?” he asked with a frown. “The foreigners are supposed to be in custody.”

“Our observer reported that he summoned some sort of creature and used it to fly over the village. The ANBU in charge of him let him go.”

Danzo’s grip on his cane tightened for a moment. What kind of fools had Sarutobi put on that guard detail? Even if that man happened to be related to both the Yondaime Hokage and Konoha’s jinchuuriki, it didn’t mean it was a sensible decision letting him to run amok unchecked. Especially during an invasion. He wasn’t from the village, he wasn’t a shinobi sworn to protect Konohagakure and the only place he should’ve spent the duration of his stay was a high-security cell.

But Sarutobi’s judgement had once again been clouded by his emotions and the attachment to the jinchuuriki.

“What’s the situation around the Hokage Mountain?” Danzo finally asked.

“The ANBU team in charge of the prisoners has split. Half of them are tailing the foreigner’s summon as we speak, while the other half is keeping watch on the others.”

“Danzo-sama, the first team reports a… please repeat, first team?” The second radio operator said, pausing as he listened intently to his headset, the faintest trace of disbelief in his voice. “A dragon,” the shinobi said with a neutral tone, before looking up at him. “Danzo-sama, the first team reports sighting a dragon fighting with the snake that breached the southern wall.”

“A dragon?” Danzo asked.

“Yes, Danzo-sama. A dragon,” the ROOT shinobi confirmed.

Danzo remained silent for a long moment, pondering the implications of the foreigner being able to summon creatures straight out of legend of old. He was attacking the invaders, for now at least. But nothing was stopping him from turning on the Leaf at a moment’s notice.

“Is the third team still getting in position?” he asked.

“Yes, Danzo-sama. They should be—”

“Tell them to pull back. I have a new objective for them,” Danzo said somberly. It was time for Konoha to gain some leverage on this foreigner warrior.


"Naruto! Naruto, wake up!" someone was saying, shaking his shoulder for some reason.

"Mmmh, five more minutes, Uncle," he muttered, trying to roll over and get back to sleep.

"What are you—Nevermind that, just wake up!" The shaking grew harder to the point that he felt like his shoulder was about to break. He reluctantly opened his eyes.

"Sakura-chan?" Naruto said, confused. The last thing he remembered was watching Sasuke fight against Gaara. Then feathers had fallen, and sleep overtook him. He sat up and looked around him. They were in a dark cave-like place: the only light streamed in from a small hole at the top. “What's wrong?"

"We're under attack, that's what's wrong. You were caught by a genjutsu."

"Wait, where are we?" Naruto asked getting a look around them. He could see some of his classmates, along with two people he didn’t recognize who were arguing either with each other or with someone that sounded like Kiba.

"We're still in the stadium bleachers," Sakura told him.

"But, it’s so dark—”

"That guy over there made the walls,” she pointed at the bigger stranger in the corner. “And the ceiling."

"Let us out, you moron!" Kiba half-yelled, half-growled all of sudden.

"Like hell I am! The two of us are Iwa shinobi in the middle of Konoha during an invasion," the bigger guy pointed to himself and his teammate. "Our life expectancy out of these walls I made is lower than a snowflake's in a volcano!"

"I still believe that we could've just made our way to safety using explosive tags," the other Iwa nin muttered, crossing his arms. "Lots and lots of explosive tags..."

"Good idea, Yano. That's a great plan,” the big guy said mockingly. “It would only cause the fourth shinobi world war, but that’s no big deal, right?"

"Oh as if this bunker you made is going to withstand the fighting outside, Mizu."

"Hey!" Kiba shouted, concern written across his face. "My teammate is wounded, she needs to see a medic. You can't keep us here!"

"Wait, who's wounded?" Naruto asks, getting up.

"Hinata," Sakura explained, and Naruto noticed the prone figures of the young Hyuuga heiress and Shikamaru, both closely guarded by Shino. "We think her wounds reopened."

"What?"

"The wounds from her fight with Neji haven’t completely healed," Sakura explained.

"Oh," Naruto said. He hoped she was going to be okay. "Was Shikamaru wounded, too?"

"No, he was just put to sleep, like you."

"To be honest, I didn't plan on including you in my bunker jutsu," Mizu volunteered in a meek tone. "It was an unfortunate accident."

"Then release us!" Kiba yelled, growling in an almost feral way. Although that may have been Akamaru from his jacket. It was hard to tell sometimes.

"Yeah! Let us go, you... you rock-eater!" Naruto said, catching everyone's attention.

"Rock-eater? Seriously?" Sakura asked, raising an eyebrow.

"Hey, that was the best I could come up with," he muttered.

"Look, I'm not keeping you here or anything, alright?" the bigger ninja, Mizu, said, raising his arms in a placating matter. "But I am asking you guys to ensure our safety."

"Safety? What do you mean?" Naruto asked, tilting his head.

"Are you for real, kid?" Yano asked, pointing to the rocks on his forehead protector. "We might as well be wearing targets on our backs right now."

“Actually, we’re wearing them on our heads,” Mizu pointed out.

“Shut up, Mizu.”

"Uh, right..." Naruto scrunched his face up in thought. “Well, we could just tell people you're not bad Iwa-nin?”

Bad Iwa-nin?” they chorused in outrage, clearly insulted.

“I mean… you know… not bad people?” he tried to explain, not really helping his case, given the way they glared at him.

Before Naruto could try to clarify what he meant though, they all heard the sound of something metallic being banged against the concrete-made walls

“Mizu? Yano?” a muffled voice called. “Are you in there?”

“Kuro—Yuki-chan?!” Yano called loudly, saying the last part of the name in a hurried way for some reason. “Is that you?”

“No, it’s the Yellow Flash,” the voice called back in an annoyed tone. “Open up!”

“Fine, fine,” Mizu grumbled, starting to form hand seals. Once he was finished one of the walls parted away, revealing Kakashi-sensei, Bushybrows-sensei, and a woman and a young girl with Iwa headbands.

“Sensei!” Naruto and Sakura cried out in relief.

“Yo,” Kakashi said as a greeting while Gai dispatched an optimistic enemy that had tried to attack the group from behind. “Have you been making friends?”

“Sensei, what’s going on?” Sakura asked anxiously. “There was a genjutsu, and then the Iwa genin raised a rock wall around us, and—”

"And Hinata is hurt!" Kiba exclaimed, moving closer to his teammate. "She needs a medic."

"We're under attack. But I'm sure you've already figured that out," Kakashi said as he entered the small alcove, glancing at the three members of Team Eight. "Kiba, Shino, we have a mission for you. You must escort your teammate to the hospital."

"Yosh! Don't you worry for your teammate, the hospital should still be safe," Gai exclaimed, before switching to a more serious tone. "But keep a low profile on the way there. Your goal is to take young Hinata to safety, not to put her in danger."


Kiba and Shino nodded, and without wasting time, started to pick up Hinata as carefully as they could.

"Ishina-sensei, Yuki-chan, are you alright?" Mizu asked in a carefully neutral tone, as Yano tensed beside him.

"I thought her name was Kuroyuki?" Naruto couldn’t help but ask. At that, the Iwa woman sent a glare in his direction, but Naruto couldn't tell if it was directed at him, her students or both.

"Please stop looking that way at my students,” Kakashi said calmly. “As for you two—and I mean Naruto and Sakura—you should go find Sasuke. He may be in trouble."

"In trouble?" Naruto asked..

"Last time I saw him, he was being chased by Gaara," Kakashi continued, "You too, Shikamaru. I know you're not asleep."

"Troublesome," said Nara muttered, slowly getting up.

"Wait, you weren’t caught in the genjutsu?" Yano asked with a raised eyebrow.

"I thought no one would notice," Shikamaru explained as he dusted off his pants. "So I could just wait until the end of the invasion."

"Wow. You’re either lazy or a coward," Kuroyuki said, not having spoken since the walls had been opened.

"Hey! Shikamaru is no coward!" Naruto yelled. “He’s just lazy!”

“If he’s unwilling to protect his village, then he should be called what he deserves,” the young kunoichi said coldly, looking Naruto straight in the eyes.

"Meanwhile, Kakashi and I will stay here to protect our honorable guests from Iwa," Gai proclaimed, ignoring the genin's antics and, more importantly, speaking before anyone said something that could potentially end in bloodshed. "No harm shall fall on them—"

“Hey, who says that we need protection?” Yano challenged, crossing his arms.

"The fact that we're on our own in the middle of a warzone,” Ishina pointed out. “In a Hidden Village that is not on friendly terms with ours."

“She has a point, guys,” Kuroyuki said, a bit downcast.

“You three should hurry, you know,” Kakashi said, looking at his students and Shikamaru.

“But, Sensei, how can we find Sasuke?” Sakura asked. Naruto was about to ask the same thing, honestly.

“Oh, right,” Kakashi hummed as if he just remembered something. Then he crouched down, quickly formed a series of hand seals. As he slammed his palm on the ground, a sizeable burst of smoke appeared out of nowhere, revealing a small pug inside of it. “Hello, Pakkun.”

Jiraiya sat on the top of a roof in a half-crouched position, looking at the battle ensuing just a short distance away.

He had been ready to summon some of his toads to deal with the giant three-headed snake that had crashed through the village’s wall, surely Orochimaru’s doing. Before the beast could rampage through Konoha, though, a dragon had appeared and engaged the other scaly beast.

He couldn’t help but gawk at the creature in awe as he watched it giving no quarter to the much bigger reptile. Sure, it was a bit thin and sickly-looking for some reason, but it was a dragon. A real dragon! Fighting a huge summon with three heads as war raged around the two beasts. Yet it wasn’t a genjutsu. He had checked.

He was so going to put this in one of his books, somehow.

But as much as he would’ve liked to stay and see which beast would come out victorious, the village was under attack and there were better ways to use his time than just spectating. Turning around, he saw the purple barrier looming by the stadium in the distance.

For some reason, he had a hunch that that was Orochimaru’s doing, too.

After one final glance to the battling beasts to commit the scene to memory, and he was off, making a beeline for the stadium.

“Yes, I repeat! We need backup!” a shinobi yelled for no apparent reason. Conrad didn't waste time wondering why the man had done such a thing and introduced the man’s torso to the battleaxe he had conjured.

He had always preferred conjured weapons over bound ones. It just didn't feel right to fight with a weightless weapon. A shame that it was illegal summoning them, but thankfully, this wasn’t Tamriel. So the chances of being spotted by one of the Vigilants of Stendarr were very low.

The corpse fell to the ground as he jerked the daedric weapon away.

A rustle of movement was all the warning he got before a shinobi lunged at him, weapons raised. Conrad took a quick step back and struck at the woman with the axe's handle, knocking her off-balance. She quickly got back on her feet, and charged again at the Nord. Conrad waved his hand and inscribed a rune in the ground between them. The ninja ran straight into it, either unable to stop her own dash or just not caring.

A wave of cold washed over Conrad as the ice rune exploded beneath the woman's feet, turning her in a macabre ice sculpture.

Conrad raised the battleaxe and let it fall straight on her head. The impact shattered most of it, along with part of her upper body. After what had happened the last time he had put a shinobi under ice, he had to be sure.

A yell from behind him made him turn, and he saw that another Nord was sharing his culture with the locals. This Nord had the unfair advantage of being a conjured ghost from Sovngarde though, so he didn’t have to care about such petty things like injuries or death. And he was freaking out the shinobi for some reason.

Conrad moved closer to Hakon One-Eye, standing back-to-ethereal-back as the shinobi tried to reorganize themselves. He could see shapes running along the rooftops, which meant that someone had heard the cry for help from before, somehow.

The prospect of having more people to fight didn’t scare Conrad. On the contrary, his blood was boiling in anticipation. After weeks of being cooped up in either a cell or a small shack and being forced to play the part of the nice and reasonable prisoner, the thrill of battle was as welcome as a barrel of honey mead after a long day’s work.

Sadly, he couldn’t afford to waste time. He had to finish this quickly and find his nephew. Nothing else mattered.

The idiots that were attacking him didn't seem to grasp that, though. One of them jumped high in the air all of sudden, easily reaching two stories of height like it was nothing. The airborne ninja threw a cluster of throwing stars at him. Conrad covered his eyes with his arm, grimacing. His skin may have been hardened by his spell, but his eyes were not.

He felt them slashing at his skin, scratching his arms and shoulders and landing behind him. As soon as the stars stopped buzzing around him, he heard some louder thumps around his feet.


Conrad opened his eyes to take a peek, and spotted four of those puny knife-like weapons planted in the ground, having missed his feet by a long margin. He was about to insult the ninja’s aim when he heard a low hissing sound. Looking down, it seemed that it came from each of the small scrolls attached to the weapons’ handle. Why would a scroll hiss?

A closer inspection, though, made him understand that the hissing didn’t come from the scrolls themselves, but from what was scribbled on them. Interestingly, it almost reminded him of runes—

His eyes widening, Conrad immediately started running away from the scrolls. That's what saved his life in the end. He had not even got past Hakon, who was looking at him with a curious expression, before the runes detonated. The legendary hero absorbed the brunt of the explosion and was sent back to the halls of Sovngarde. Conrad got hit by the debris, flames and blastwave that sent him flying to the other side of the street.

As he landed with all the grace of a sack of onions thrown in a cart, he lost his grip on the daedric axe, which disappeared in a purple blur. He tried to get up as fast as he could, which given that he had just been caught in a small explosion, may as well have been a snail’s pace.

Groaning, he managed to push himself to his knees before being struck from behind. Pain flashed through his back as his attacker came at him again and again, trying to slash at him with a sword. Each time, Conrad yelped in pain. It may not have wounded him because of his spell, but it still hurt like being struck with a mace. A sharp mace.

Conrad growled as he quickly became fed up with the hammering, grasping the dirt with his hands before channelling his Voice.

"Zun Haal Viik!" he roared as he turned around, and the sword went flying from the man's grasp. The ninja gaped at his empty hand for a brief moment, and Conrad threw the dirt he had in his fist, aiming for the ninja's face.

The shinobi saw it coming, though, and raised his arm to shield himself. Conrad rushed him as he got up, slamming the palm of his hands in the man's chest and shooting an electrical discharge at point blank.

The man opened his mouth in a silent cry, losing consciousness as his heart ceased functioning. Conrad gave him a little push and he fell down, spasming like a fish out of water as the energies from Conrad’s spell ravaged his nervous system. The man was either dead or would probably die soon, but Conrad didn't care. He had other things to deal with.

He looked at the shinobi observing him from the rooftops, either readying their weapons or preparing some of their spells that required entirely too many complicated gestures to function.

"Spineless sons of a motherless skeever-scat—” Conrad had had enough. “MUL QAH DIIV!"

Sarutobi stopped his attack at the last instant, jumping back in a more guarded stance. Orochimaru did the same, and the two resurrected Senju stopped as well, having sensed a lull in the fight even if they had been reduced to nothing but soulless puppets.

Both master and former pupil never took their eyes off each other, as they both felt the sudden appearance of a powerful, menacing presence washing over the village. For a brief moment, it seemed like the fighting throughout the whole village subsided, as shinobi of both sides felt the same. Just as quickly as it had appeared, though, it faded. It didn’t disappear, since Sarutobi was able to detect it in the distance, but it was now significantly less intense than when it had first manifested.

The battle around the village resumed.

“What was that?” Sarutobi couldn’t help but ask loudly.

“That would be my question,” Orochimaru said coolly. Even the traitor’s minions, who were keeping the barrier up, seemed perplexed. “I was wondering when you would reveal your trump card, old man. But I wasn’t expecting something like that.”

“What are you talking about?” Hiruzen asked, skeptically.

“You know well what I’m talking about,” Orochimaru sneered, pointing an accusing finger at him.

“I don’t have time for your mind games, my old student,” Sarutobi said, preparing to spin Enma’s adamantine form at his opponents.

“I know that you created a clone of Namikaze, sensei.”

At this, Sarutobi almost dropped the staff, but he was able to catch himself just in time to not look like an old fool. “What,” he said, flatly. He briefly wondered if he had just gone senile all of a sudden.

“I saw the blood test,” Orochimaru offered as the only explanation. “I’m surprised that you would do that. A bit hypocritical, don’t you think?”

“You’re the last person that should be lecturing me on hypocrisy,” Sarutobi said dismissively. He had his own share of sin, but he had never sunk as low as Orochimaru. “I didn’t allow such experiments, and I didn’t clone—”

The Hokage’s voice died in his throat as comprehension creeped subtly into his mind. Minato’s twin. Orochimaru had probably planted at least one spy, maybe more, and one of them had stumbled upon the blood test he had ordered after Harissen-san’s capture.

Not having the whole picture, Orochimaru had jumped to the most logical explanation. At least, logical for someone like him. Sarutobi wasn’t sure which was more preposterous between a clone and a long-lost twin showing up out of nowhere, though.

He couldn’t help but smirk at the idea.

“What’s so funny, old man?” Orochimaru asked, annoyance crossing his face.

“Nothing,” Hiruzen said with a small smile. “I just know something you don’t.” Orochimaru narrowed his eyes, visibly annoyed.


Before the Snake Sannin could say anything, though, Jiraiya landed on the roof just outside of the barrier. The Toad Sannin gave a cold look at his former comrade, who reciprocated the look twofold. Then his attention moved to the wall of purple light with an interested look, feigning disinterested in his former comrade.

“Hello Jiraiya. So kind of you to join us,” Sarutobi said as if he was greeting a genin showing up late.

“Too bad Tsunade-hime isn’t here, sensei. It would’ve been a great reunion,” Jiraiya said, rubbing his chin as he surveyed the barrier. “Hmn. This one is going to be tricky.”

“You may want to hurry,” he told his former student, as his other former student opened his mouth wide. With a disgusting sound, the hilt of Orochimaru’s trademark sword started to emerge from his throat. Sarutobi spun the staff in a low arc to stop him from unsheathing Kusanagi. Before he could make contact, a tree exploded from the roof they were standing on. Enma crashed against the tree, scraping away bark and wood alike but not even coming close to his intended target.

The Nidaime moved behind Sarutobi, hands so fast that he could barely follow them. Sarutobi substituted himself with one of the still intact shingles and evaded a powerful water jutsu that would’ve surely thrown him against the barrier, if not outright killed him on the spot.


“Don’t rush me, old man,” Jiraiya calmly said as he produced ink, scrolls, and other sealing materials.

The two former Kage rushed forward, and Sarutobi was thrust into battle once again, hoping that his student would bring down the barrier in time.

Raw power was flowing through him. It felt like being on fire and being submerged in an icy river at the same time, yet it wasn’t unpleasant in the slightest.

All the doubts and reservations about using it were gone, like snow in the summer sun.

Power was meant to be exercised, especially over such inferior beings that dared to stand against him. He grinned at them, and the fiery shape surrounding him did the same.

“J-jinchuuriki,” one of the mortals stuttered, sounding almost hysterical. “Jinchuuri—”

With a simple gesture, a lightning bolt struck the mere man in the face. Looking at the way the panic spread among the ninja ranks, the Dovahkiin briefly pondered if ‘Jinchuuriki’ meant ‘Run’. But it was quickly drowned by the satisfaction he felt at seeing most of his enemies turn tail and flee.


That was the proper way to react to a dragon’s wrath.

Some brave or foolish souls chose otherwise, though. One of the females rushed at him, trying to chop his head off with a strange weapon that reminded him of a straight sickle. Her aim was true and on mark, but the blade was stopped by his protective aura.

Before she could realize what had happened, the Dragonborn tore the veil between Oblivion and Nirn with a simple spell. With a purple flash, an ice atronach manifested itself in the street. Without hesitation, the daedra struck at the closest person that was threatening its master.

The female shinobi, though, was quick on her feet and managed to jump away in time. The atronach, having lost its target, threw itself at the other shinobi. Uncaring of what his servant was doing, the Dovahkiin looked around, searching for a new quarry.

He spotted a few of the shinobi running in terror at the end of the street. A crazed smile curved his mouth. They should’ve taken the rooftops. Not that it would’ve helped much.

“Wuld Nah Kest!” The power of his Thu'um threw him forward, faster than a sabre cat's pounce. In the blink of an eye he had moved to the middle of the group of Akaviri warriors.

As he spun around, one of the shinobi managed, probably from sheer desperation, to stab him in the shoulder. He just grabbed the ninja’s hand with his own, so that he couldn’t flee, and slashed the man’s throat with one of his claws, ripping away a good chunk of meat and blood. The man fell, clutching at the gaping wound.

The others backed off, retreating as they threw everything they had at the Dovahkiin. He just kept walking, not even bothering to defend himself. There was no need. A shinobi stood his ground and took a large breath, before shooting fire from his mouth. That actually caught his interest, and for a moment let the flames engulf him. The fire caressed him, but his dragon soul protected him from most of the harm.

The shinobi’s expression when he emerged by the inferno created by his spell was the most satisfying sight he had seen all day.

“Ven—” the Dragonborn intoned, “Gaar Nos!”

A gust of wind exploded from his maw, hitting the fire-using shinobi and knocking him off his feet. Then the wind quickly picked up, turning into a cyclone that devastated everything in his path. The Dragonborn’s enemies were scattered everywhere, slamming against buildings and each other before being thrown out onto the street. Before dispersing, the small tornado slammed into a house, ripping most of the roof from its frame.

He observed it for just a moment and then shrugged at the collateral damage. Roofs could be rebuilt.

His attention went back to the shinobi, now looking much worse for the wear. Raising his hands, he started to conjure a sphere of flames with slow, powerful motions.

Power was strength, and might made right. That was the dragons’ way, sculpted forever in every dragon’s soul. He knew that he was stronger than every living dragon, he had proven so in the past.

And that power would be unleashed against those who dared to oppose him.

It was with great satisfaction that he let loose the storm of fire down the street.

“I hope Shikamaru will be alright,” Naruto muttered as he leaped from the rooftop.

“I hope so too,” Sakura said as they landed, before taking another leap. Shikamaru had told them to go on as he remained behind to distract a group of enemies, but it still didn’t feel right to the young Uzumaki. They should’ve beat the crap out of them after Shikamaru had caught them with that shadow-grabby-thing he did.

“He knows what he’s doing,” Pakkun, the little dog that sensei put in charge of them, said. “Focus on the mission.”

“Do you still have Sasuke’s scent?” Sakura asked worriedly, as the trio jumped from yet another roof.

“Not much further. We’re gaining on them,” the dog said as he continued sniffing the air without even slowing down. They were almost in the southern outskirts of Konoha now. It seemed that this part of the village had been spared by the ferocious fights that still raged in the distance, but if they kept going, they would end up in the forest that surrounded the village.

As they scaled a tall apartment building, a glimpse of movement on a relatively distant rooftop caught Naruto’s attention. As he quickly turned in that direction, he immediately spotted Sasuke’s distinctive duck-butt hair.

“There he is!” he exclaimed, pointing a finger excitedly. Sasuke was standing on top of a roof, apparently not having noticed their presence.

“Thank goodness he’s okay,” Sakura exclaimed with a sigh of relief. Naruto felt a twinge of jealousy at that but decided to ignore it. He had been worried for the bastard, too. Then he realized that something was off about the whole situation.

“Wait, where’s that Gaara guy?” he asked to no one in particular as he started looking around. It wasn’t possible that the guy had just let Sasuke go, given how bloodthirsty he was.

“He’s there,” Pakkun half-growled, settling into a more aggressive stance. Naruto didn’t realize what the pug meant until he took a better look at Sasuke’s surroundings. The Uchiha was standing in front of a large sphere that he had dismissed as some weird-looking piece of architecture. Was that made of… sand?

He guessed that that was where Gaara had hidden, but why? Surely not to get away from Sasuke. The more he looked at it, the more he had a bad feeling about the whole situation. Something stirred inside of his stomach, and it sure wasn’t his lunch.

Whatever Gaara was doing inside of his sphere of sand had somehow caught the Kyuubi’s attention.

No one was left on the entire street.


He was surrounded by scorch marks, craters, and scattered or broken weapons. At the very end of the street he could see his ice atronach running away, probably chasing someone. There were corpses everywhere and at least one of the buildings was on fire. And it was spreading. He wasn’t really sure how that had happened.

Conrad took a deep breath, still covered by the ethereal cloak of his dragon soul. It was done, time to lock the dragon, along with its power, back into the dark hole it had come from.. He closed his eyes, concentrated on his soul and, not surprisingly, was met with a sense of resistance and refusal.

The dragon didn’t want to slumber. It was awake and it wanted to hunt for more prey. It longed for battle and bloodshed, to show to these puny mortals that inhabited this aedra and daedra-forsaken country who was in charge.

Conrad shook his head, reminding himself that he was a mortal. He wasn’t a dragon; he just happened to be born with the soul of one. He was better than all the bloodthirsty monsters he had put down during the years, be they dragons or other immortal beings.


He stood for a good minute or two there, inwardly struggling with his soul’s most basic instincts. Conrad wondered what philosophers and priests would say about that. It’d probably depend on what they had felt about Skyrim’s Civil War, he thought, and his role in ending it.

He scoffed. Who cared about what people thought? Certainly not him. He was the Dragonborn, and he was in charge, not his soul. With that last thought, he felt the dragon-shaped mantle disappear, and his mind became clearer.

Dusting himself a little, he felt a sting from his shoulder. Right, he had been stabbed. He picked one of the vials from his pouch and chugged it down. The pain subsided, and the wound—along with all the other scratches over his body—started itching as the flesh mended itself.

As he threw away the empty vial, he heard a whimper of pain close by. Spinning around, he called on his magicka and his hands were covered by lightning, ready to be thrown. One of the men he had just fought was lying against the wall, clearly alive but unmoving. After a moment Conrad recognized him as one of the first ones that had attacked him. Terror was written across his features, and the awkward angle he was lying at pointed to a broken back.

Conrad lowered his hands, letting the spell die before being cast. Instead, he picked one of the discarded weapons from the ground. It was a short sword that reminded him of the ones Delphine had insisted he become at least comfortable enough with, even if he preferred axes. It would do.

As he walked closer, the crippled man’s face tensed, and desperation creeped in as he realized Conrad’s intent. Looking at him, the man opened his mouth a few times, as if he wanted to say something.

Conrad just drove the blade straight into his heart with both of his hands, making it as quick as he could. The look of shock on the man’s face quickly faded, as did the light in his eyes.

Now it was really done.

“Harissen-san?” someone called from his left. Conrad spun around, startled by the sudden voice, yanking the sword from the corpse and preparing for another fight. Then he saw the pair of white masks, and stopped just before taking a swing.

“By Talos, don’t do that!” Conrad protested, lowering the sword.

The masked shinobi co*cked his head a bit, confused by the unfamiliar word. From what Conrad remembered, he was their leader or something akin to an officer. “Apologies. We merely wanted to ensure that you were not injured.”

"What are you doing here?" Conrad asked as he cleaned the blade off on the corpse’s clothes.

"We came here to protect you," the other shinobi said neutrally, as he looked around at the corpses. And the burning building.

"Protection?" Conrad questioned with a puzzled and skeptical look.

"You're a non-combatant, at least as far as our ranks are concerned," the leading shinobi explained. "And a guest."

"A what?" he asked in confusion, not recognizing some of the words. Damn language barrier!

“A guest,” the shinobi repeated.

“I understood that,” Conrad said, annoyed. If what had happened to him was the treatment for guests, he didn’t want to know what ninja did to their enemies. “The other word, what that?”

"A non-combatant. A civilian." At that, the Nord could only raise his eyebrow in utter bewilderment. "Only shinobi fight for the village."

"City," Conrad corrected automatically. One day he would finally make the shinobi realize the error of their chosen terminology. "You just wanted excuse to protect home, yes?"

Before the shinobi officer could answer, though, more people appeared on the rooftops, jumping from one side of the street to the other. Conrad almost started shooting fireballs everywhere, but quickly noticed that the two masked guards didn’t seem concerned.

It was Konoha’s own forces, finally showing up to save the day. Most of them just jumped from one building to the next—something that Conrad was still finding breath-taking, and he was a wizard—without stopping. But some slowed and jumped down to street level.

Conrad recognized one of the trio, and he couldn’t help but smirk at the face the man made when he finally noticed him.


“Inoichi,” Conrad greeted the other blond. “What you doing here?”

Inoichi stared at him in mute shock, probably thinking that the world itself was crashing on him, so Conrad checked his two companions. One was a big, hefty man with a huge mane for hair and, strangely enough, was wearing what seemed to be armour. Conrad had almost started to believe that shinobi were forbidden from wearing armour, or just didn’t know what it was.

He was also looking at Conrad with a stunned expression, jaw half-dropped.

The other one instead had black spiky hair pulled in the most gravity-defying hairstyle Conrad had ever seen, a goatee and battle scars on his face. The way he looked at him, though, was difficult to read. He silently stared at him for a long moment, expressionless, before his gaze moved to the carnage on the street. Without saying a word, he turned towards Inoichi, as if to silently ask for an explanation.

This seemed to shake the other blond man out of his daze, since he suddenly remembered how to speak. “We were told that there were a lot of enemies in this area, and then there was a huge spike of killing intent…” he started, trying to ignore the looks he was receiving from his comrades. “Was that you?”

“Me?” Conrad asked, wondering what ‘killing intent’ meant. There had been a lot of killing, so it was probably a question about that. “Yes, I kill them.”

“That’s not what I meant—”


“Inoichi,” the large man called all of sudden. Even the spiky-haired one seemed surprised by the forcefully neutral tone in his voice. “You knew that Minato was alive, and you told us nothing?”

Oh. Oh.

Right. He didn’t have his beard anymore. Something for which he would still be mourning if wasn’t a warraging right now. He looked like Minato...

“No time,” Conrad said, rolling his eyes. With a flicker of his fingers, he cast a clairvoyance spell. The blue light trailed past the ninja trio, and he just followed. As he passed close by, the spiky-haired man kept looking at him, rubbing his chin.

“Wait, where are you going?” Inoichi asked.

“Yeah, come on Minato. You can’t just—”


“Naruto is that way. You deal with this.” Conrad called as he sped up his pace. Seeing that he was leaving, the guards started following him.

“Naruto? As in, Uzumaki Naruto, Chouji’s former classmate?” the fat man asked to no one in particular, before his eyes widened in realization. “Oh, sh*t.”

The silent, spiky-haired man just turned towards Inoichi as if waiting for an explanation. Inoichi groaned loudly in frustration, already wondering how the Hokage was going to take the news.

As battles to the death between pre-pubescent teens went, it had gone well until everything went wrong.

"WHAT THE HELL IS THAT!?" Naruto yelled at the top of his lungs as the arm-thing full of claws destroyed the balcony he had been standing on mere seconds ago.

Sakura dodged the inhumanly oversized appendage as well, while the figure it was attached to focused most of his attention back on Sasuke.

"It's Gaara, that arm is made up of his sand!” she exclaimed. “But... his face... it's like part of his body was warped. What kind of jutsu can do that?"

"I don't think it's a jutsu," Naruto said pensively, placing a hand over his gut. It was probably caused by whatever that guy had inside of him. Like what had happened to him on Tazuna’s bridge, but this was worse. Much worse.

"What?" Sakura asked absently. Before Naruto could answer, Gaara’s deformed face turned towards him though, and he could fully appreciate the sight of the twisted mouth full of fangs and the inhuman eye that was looking straight at him.

"You... you are the one from the hospital..." Gaara growled, as drool dripped from of the inhuman part of his face. Naruto remembered that encounter very well, even if he hadn’t thought much about it since he had met his uncle immediately after it. Naruto hoped that he was alright, since his uncle wasn’t a ninja.

Sasuke suddenly jumped at Gaara from behind, his left hand coated in lightning and emitting a high-pitched chirping. The half-transformed ninja spun around to face the threat, swinging at the Uchiha with his monstrous arm. The Chidori cut straight through the sand like it was paper, splitting the transformed appendage in half, and Gaara cried out in pain.

A cry of pain that quickly morphed into a deranged laugh.


“Yes. YES! This is what I’ve been looking for!” Gaara exclaimed, suddenly excited. “Fighting someone this strong… it will prove my existence for sure!”

"Is this guy completely crazy?" Sakura asked, a twinge of fear in her voice.

"No," Naruto replied grimly as he quickly extracted two kunai from his holster. "They made him that way."

She looked at him with a puzzled expression, but Naruto didn’t elaborate further. As he started running towards the roof’s edge, he threw the two kunai at Gaara. The sand-covered boy turned, raising the sand arm in an almost lazy way to stop the two weapons.

Naruto leaped leaped up to join the fight as Sasuke took advantage of the opening he had created. As Gaara’s attention was on Naruto, the Uchiha threw a hail of shuriken in the blink of an eye, aiming for the sand-user’s face. Even if caught by surprise, Gaara only had to move his massive claw-hand in front of him to stop them.

Then Naruto landed with both of his feet against Gaara’s ugly drooling mug, kicking with all of his strength. The impact managed to knock the Suna genin off balance, pushing him back off the roof.

“What are you doing, idiot?!” Sasuke asked as Naruto landed besides him.

“Helping your sorry ass!” he replied, crossing his fingers and creating a dozen of clones, knowing that he would need them soon. As a matter of fact, a huge sand arm appeared from the edge of a nearby roof, and Gaara started climbing up like a demon from the pits of hell.

“Can’t you help somehow?” Sakura asked, glancing toward Kakashi’s dog summon.

“I’m not much of a fighter, sorry,” Pakkun quickly answered, completely unapologetic.

“Seriously?!” she exclaimed in an annoyed tone. She started rummaging through the equipment in her pouch while her teammates were busy with not dying.

Gaara gleefully ravaged through wave after wave of shadow clones, crushing, tearing or slamming then against the buildings with such strength to make them pop out of existence and leave serious dents in the walls, as well as shattered windows.

"Sasuke, follow my lead!" Naruto called as he ran towards Gaara.

"What?" Sasuke asked, confused by either the blond’s overconfidence or by the fact that Naruto had just tried to give him an order.

"Just do it!" he said as he jumped towards the enemy, creating even more clones.

Sasuke followed, muttering to himself about suicidally confident blondes.

As Naruto landed, Gaara grabbed the clone right beside him and tore it apart, the sand claws ripping its left arm off and causing it to disperse before it could even yell in panic. Naruto kept moving around the crazed genin, swapping place with his clones or just creating more, so that Gaara was distracted trying to catch him, becoming more frustrated and enraged at the sight of puffs of smoke instead of fountains of blood.

Seeing Gaara so distracted, Sasuke sprinted, raising a punch to strike. Then, Gaara turned, and seeing his so-yearned-for target stopped caring about Naruto and his clones.

"UCHIHA SASUKE!" he yelled, his sand-arm racing towards Sasuke in a way similar to a spear. Seeing Sasuke about to be skewered, Naruto started making hand seals, hoping to not screw it up.

Tiger. Boar. Ox. Dog… Snake? Yes it was Snake!

There was a short-lived blast of smoke and then, a clone had taken Sasuke’s place. The clone actually sent a betrayed look at the original Naruto as the sand claws destroyed it. If Sasuke had been confused by his sudden displacing, he didn’t show it. Instead, he took advantage of his new position to deliver a devastating flying kick aimed at the back of Gaara’s head. There was a crunching sound as Gaara’s sand armour broke around Sasuke’s foot.

Naruto followed his teammate’s example by rushing inside Gaara’s lowered guard and delivering an uppercut punch to the Suna genin’s chin. He saw cracks forming on Gaara’s face, and his clones charged as one to deliver a nice beating on the outnumbered enemy.

Gaara blindly spun his arm around with a frustrated growl, thrashing wildly and yelling nonsense. Naruto felt a flash of pain as the trunk-like sand construct slammed into his chest, sending him tumbling away.

Seeing the edge of the roof getting dangerously close, he quickly grabbed a kunai and planted it into the flat roof. The tile broke, but he was slowed just enough to avoid falling off. One of his clones wasn’t so quick-thinking though and fell with a panicked yell.

Getting to his feet, he noticed that Gaara was having trouble standing up, clutching his head with his human arm while the monstrous one kept swinging around and causing minor property damage. Naruto guessed that sand armour or not, a kick to the head was a kick to the head. Then, realizing that he was inwardly complementing Sasuke, he reminded himself that he had punched Gaara, too.


He saw Sasuke standing a short distance from him, having managed to not be thrown off the roof himself.

“Can’t you use Kakashi-sensei’s jutsu again?” he asked, seeing the relatively vulnerable state Gaara was in.

“I’ve already reached the limit,” Sasuke explained as he retrieved more shuriken and kunai from his weapon pouch. “It’s a jutsu that uses too much chakra.”

Hearing their voices, Gaara stopped thrashing and slowly got back on his feet. He tilted his head, and his inhuman eye burned like molten gold, staring right at Naruto.

“Dammit,” Naruto growled, creating more shadow clones as Gaara leaped at them both in a way that reminded Naruto of a predator pouncing on their prey. While the monstrous genin was still in mid-flight, though, two kunai pierced into the side morphed by the sand and almost immediately exploded, sending Gaara off-course and causing him to crash onto a nearby balcony.


“Did you do that?” Naruto asked Sasuke as his clones kept staring with an array of confused expressions.

“No,” the Uchina said briefly, looking past the blond. Naruto turned around and saw Sakura standing on a roof on the other side of the street, quickly wrapping an explosive tag around a kunai handle.


“Don’t just stand there!” she yelled, throwing the newly-prepped explosive kunai at Gaara. The kunai embedded itself in the balcony’s railing and the tag started hissing. Before the Suna genin could shake off the previous explosion, it went off, causing him to fall down to the alley below.

“Come on guys! Let’s go!” one of the clones shouted before rushing down the building with what may have passed as a decent war cry. All the other clones followed in a similar fashion, to buy the genin team more time.

Naruto and Sasuke took the opportunity to regroup with Sakura and Pakkun while Gaara was besieged by Naruto's clones in a dirty backstreet. Looking down, they saw some villagers running away, scared out of their mind by the battle raging nearby.

“We can’t fight him here,” Sakura said. “There are too many civilians around.”

“Then we lure him away from the village,” Sasuke told them, determined.

“How?” Naruto asked. “We could use some clones as bait—”

“He wants to kill me,” the Uchiha interrupted him. “So, I’ll be the bait.”

Wrong,” the Sand nin's voice said. But what had climbed on the rooftop didn't resemble Gaara anymore. It was a bestial thing, with little or no human features left. His right arm had turned into a long and clawed appendage as well, his face was completely transformed and Naruto could've sworn he saw a tail swinging from the genin's back with deceptive laziness. Gaara was nothing short of a monster now. “I want to kill all of you.”

Naruto, and his teammates as well, stared at the terrible apparition with a mixture of horror and awe. Then Gaara moved. Naruto snapped back to reality and made the hand seal for the Kage Bunshin no Jutsu, pumping as much chakra as he could into it.

A veritable sea of orange appeared between them and Gaara. The clones, true to the original’s nature, charged with reckless abandon, momentarily stopping Gaara’s advance with their sheer numbers. It didn't matter that they poofed out of existence with the slightest blow. They never stopped and there were always more.


“Run, you two!” Naruto yelled at his two shocked teammates, who didn’t need to be told twice. The trio started make a beeline for the village’s walls as Gaara’s bestial roars echoed behind them. Naruto didn’t dare turn around. “Run, run, run!”

“How did you even make so many clones?” Sasuke asked as they kept moving. They heard a louder roar from behind them.

“I don’t think now is the time for that!!”

“You get him out of the village, I’ll go get help!” Pakkun told them before jumping away from the group. “Don’t die!”

Sarutobi was getting tired.

Had he been more vain, he could’ve justified it by telling himself that his opponents were three of the most dangerous and powerful shinobi that had ever lived. The simple truth was that he was old. Much older than any shinobi had the right to be.

What had kept him alive so far was the sheer experience he had accumulated in his decades as a ninja and the vast repertoire of jutsu at his disposal. That and the fact that the Shodaime and Nidaime weren’t able to fight at the peak of their power, the only silver lining in seeing his predecessors turned into simple-minded automatons.

He didn’t dare look at what was going on outside of the barrier, because even a simple glance away from his opponents would be inviting death. He was aware that Jiraiya was preparing something and that there were more shinobi around the barrier. Hiruzen just hoped that his former student had thought about a way to stop the two mindless Kage, because Hiruzen could only think about one way to do so. Even if it would cost him his life and soul.

Attempting to gain some time before having to resort to that, Hiruzen summoned his lagging chakra and released a stream of fire from his mouth, aiming straight for Orochimaru.

The flames were promptly stopped by a wooden barrier created by the Shodaime’s Mokuton, while the Nidaime extinguished any flames before they could spread with an suiton jutsu of his own. The impact of water and fire generated a thick cloud of steam that almost obscured the two opponents from Sarutobi’s sight.

Without warning, the thinning mist exploded as Orochimaru emerged from it, Kusanagi ready to strike. Sarutobi raised his own adamantine staff, and metal clashed against metal. Then Kusanagi left a small scratch Sarutobi’s weapon, which yelled in pain.

Sarutobi held fast, sending a silent apology to Enma as he did so. But even if Enma was pretty much unbreakable in his adamantine form, Sarutobi certainly wasn't. He felt his bones creaking as he was pushed back, ignoring the ache in his joints as much as he could.

With a great push, he shoved Orochimaru away, their weapons scraping as they parted. Hiruzen found himself panting, trying to catch his breath.

“Getting tired, sensei?” Orochimaru asked mockingly as the two resurrected Kage silently emerged from what remained of the steam. “At your age, you may want to consider retirement.”

“I did retire once, did you forget that?” Sarutobi rebutted, leaning against the staff for just a moment. It seemed that he had no other options left. He put his hands together, ready to make the series of seals that would end his final battle, one way or another. Before he could even start channeling chakra, though, he heard a sharp sound, like a cacophony of breaking glass.

All around him in the air were purple shards of the former barrier, now falling without purpose and dissolving before they could reach the roof they were all standing on.

Jiraiya had actually done it.


Sarutobi felt a faint smile forming as the Toad Sannin appeared by his side, accompanied by two of his summons, armed to the teeth.

"Took you long enough," he said without looking in his direction.

“You should know to not rush an artist, sensei,” Jiraiya said.

Hiruzen dared to take a brief look around, and saw that more shinobi had shown, either on the roof itself or on the buildings around it. Reinforcements had come.


Looking back at Orochimaru, he could see that his former pupil was absolutely livid. Even his four servants that had held the barrier together didn’t seem to eager to get close to their master right now.

“Orochimaru—” Hiruzen began, unsure of what he wanted to say. Perhaps it would’ve been one last attempt to reach that young and brilliant boy he had met all those years ago. He would never know though, because hearing his name seemed to be the last straw for Orochimaru. With a snarl, the Snake Sannin swung his sword, its blade extending to bridge the gap between former master and student.

One of Jiraiya’s toads deflected the attack with both of its own blades, cleaving the weapons in half.

Chaos exploded on the rooftop, as both sides rushed at each other. Sarutobi saw some chunin and ANBU jump in to face Orochimaru’s followers, while Jiraiya’s summons were trying to keep Senju Tobirama occupied. That left himself and Jiraiya against Orochimaru and Hashirama.

Wood spikes were sent against them, forcing them to move out of the way or be impaled. Orochimaru swung Kusanagi again, trying to cut them down in mid-air. Sarutobi quickly spun Enma between his hands, pushing the elongated blade out of the way.

"That jutsu," Jiraiya said as they landed, his eyes locked on the Shodaime. "It’s the Nidaime's forbidden technique, right? Orochimaru managed to reproduce it?"

"Yes. As far as I know the only conventional way to stop it is to kill the summoner," Sarutobi explained. "But my predecessors may do too much damage to the village before that."

"I have an idea," Jiraiya said, producing a bundle of sealing papers from the inside of his kimono. "I'll need you to keep Orochimaru busy, though."

“I think I can manage that,” Hiruzen said grimly, resting the end of Enma’s staff form on the roof. In less time than it took to blink, Hiruzen threw two kunai with explosive tags at Orochimaru’s feet. His student jumped away to avoid the explosion, landing on the branches of the tree that had been created during the fight.

Sarutobi rushed towards him, running over the stalks that had almost impaled him before. Orochimaru started moving towards him as well, with long and fast strides to meet him midway.

Hashirama appeared in Hiruzen’s vision, ready to block Hiruzen to protect Orochimaru. Sarutobi swung Enma with all his remaining strength without slowing the adamantine staff striking the Shodaime’s cheek. Part of the ancient shinobi’s face exploded in a small cloud of ash as he was thrown off the tree by the impact.

The Sandaime was aware that Hashirama had landed perfectly at the base of the tree, no worse for wear than before. He was also aware that Jiraiya was charging at the Shodaime even before the latter had landed. All his attention, though, was focused on his own opponent.

With eerie flexibility, Orochimaru dodged the staff, Orochimaru’s blade whistling with each slash he took. Once again staff and legendary sword clashed as Sarutobi deflected or parried the attacks he couldn’t evade. Sarutobi decided to remain on the defensive, since he just had to gain some time to allow Jiraiya to accomplish his plan. He prayed it would be enough to stop the two Senju brothers.

Orochimaru made to swing again from his left, and Sarutobi followed with his staff. At the last moment though, Orochimaru spun the other way, and he realized that it had been a feint. Orochimaru’s free hand shot towards him, and a snake sprang from his sleeve, its fangs aiming for Hiruzen’s neck.

Hiruzen swatted the snake away with one of his hands as he jumped back to gain some distance from the venomous reptile. That was when Orochimaru swung Kusanagi again, extending the blade.


Sharp, furious pain like he had never felt before exploded in Sarutobi’s right leg, and he found himself unable to stand. He was falling, having lost his chakra grip on the tree bark.

He landed on what remained of the roof before he could redirect his fall, and found himself on his side, suddenly feeling very tired.

The sound of fighting caught his attention, and he turned just enough to have a look. Senju Hashirama was standing mere meters from him, most of his torso and left arm covered by papers with various seals inscribed on them. Jiraiya was dancing, for the lack of a better term, around his opponent, and Hiruzen noticed that the Shodaime seemed to be unable to move his left arm or rotate his chest. The Toad Sage applied two more paper tags to his opponent’s body, and it seemed to slow the resurrected Kage a bit more. Not bad, for an improvised plan.

He could see the toads and most of the other Konoha shinobi trying to keep the Nidaime at bay, but he knew they wouldn’t be able to handle him for long. Especially with Orochimaru still on the battlefield. Planting his arms on the roof, he pushed, trying to get up.

And promptly fell down on his right side, which made him feel another rush of pain. He also felt colder all of sudden, for some reason.

Looking down at his leg to inspect the wound, he found himself staring at nothing. His right leg wasn’t in the place to which it belonged. He struggled to get a better look, and saw that his limb ended in a bloody stump right below the knee. A large pool of blood was forming, which slowly poured down the roof following its inclination.

His mind fought the tiredness that was overtaking him, and he realized that he was going into shock from the loss of his leg and from the consequential blood loss. He felt hands closing around his right knee, and he had to suppress a yell of pain. Turning around, he saw that Enma, now back in his real form, was packing his stump with his bare hands, while an ANBU was opening a field first-aid kit.

He tried to warn them about Orochimaru, since it was just a matter of seconds before he would come to finish him, but he was calmly told to not overexert himself. Or at least that was what he thought Enma had said to him, he could barely hear their words.

Looking up at the tree, he searched for any sign of Orochimaru, but the Snake Sannin was nowhere to be seen.

Before losing consciousness, he heard Jiraiya yell something that sounded vaguely like a jutsu name, and there was a bright flash of light. Then, darkness enveloped him.

The room was mostly in the dark. Not because it was night, but because the shack had no windows and their guards had ordered them to stay inside with the door closed. So their only source of light were the magical spheres floating above the three of them which, while doing their job perfectly, gave a bit of an eerie atmosphere to the place.

Still better than being locked in the city’s dungeon, though.

“Ta’Sava is bored,” the Khajiit yawned, showing an impressive set of jaws. “Do you know any jokes?”

“Be serious. There’s a war out there, people are dying,” Beta admonished with no malice in her voice. This caused Ta’Sava to look ashamed all the same, though. At least for a few minutes.


“Ta’Sava is still bored,” he repeated.

“You know, since we’re alone we could take a peek Master Conrad’s journal,” Sven said, looking at their teacher’s sleeping spot and the few items sprawled upon it, among which said journal stood out.

“Oooh, Ta’Sava likes that idea,” the cat boy said, swiftly getting up to pick up the item that promised to break his boredom.

“Good luck. I think it’s written in Nedic,” Beta deadpanned, which caused her fellow apprentices to turn to look at her.

“How does Beta know that?” Ta’Sava asked, book still closed in his hands.

Beta valiantly withstood her peers’ curiosity for a brief moment before blushing a little and looking away, muttering something about genuine curiosity and trouble getting to sleep. Maybe. Her voice kinda trailed off during that last part of that.

Ta’Sava opened his mouth to say something, probably to tease the poor girl, but stopped as his left ear started twitching. “Someone just arrived outside,” he half-whispered. “They’re talking with the guards.”

He had not even finished saying that when his two friends scrambled towards the door to hear what was being said since they didn’t have hearing as good as his.

“What are they saying?” Beta whispered, pressing her ear against the door. “Is Master Conrad back?”

“Hush, I’m trying to listen,” Sven muttered. “I think that another group of guards arrived. They’re saying… something about us?”

“They said… wait, Ta’Sava thinks that the word is ‘move’?” Ta’Sava wondered for a brief moment. “Yes, they said something about moving the prisoners.”

“And here I thought we were guests,” Sven snarked, emphasizing the last word.

“Maybe their enemies are moving this way and they want to take us somewhere safe?” Beta suggested.

“That doesn’t justify treating us like criminals.”

“Strange. Ta’Sava thinks that the guards that remained here are not agreeing with—” A sound from outside interrupted the Khajiit. A sound that they would’ve been able to hear even without eavesdropping.

The sound of two blades meeting each other.

“Oh, no,” Beta whispered, her face even paler than what it should’ve been because of the cold magical lights.

“I-I don’t understand,” Sven said, a tinge of fear in his voice as the sound of fighting from outside escalated. “What’s going on out there?”

“Don’t worry, there’s no windows and the door is closed,” Ta’Sava said, attempting to reassure the others. “They can’t get in.”

Sadly, his words didn’t seem to reassure Sven at all, who started to slowly back away from the entrance. “That door doesn’t have a lock.”

Similar expressions of horror appeared on Ta’Sava and Beta’s faces. It was true, the door didn’t have a lock. Master Conrad had said that a golden cage didn’t need a lock, or something along those lines. That, and he had believed that they were afraid that he would take Inoichi as a hostage and lock the door.

Suddenly, the door started moving, opening inwards.

Beta was the first to react, throwing herself against the door and slamming it shut, pressing herself against it to keep it in place. That seemed to snap the other two back to reality. Ta’Sava started pushing the table, and Beta moved just enough to allow the tall Khajiit to push it against the door. It was a light table, but it was better than nothing.

Sven channelled his magicka instead, half-whispering arcane words to help himself focus and not panic in a reasonably scary situation. In a matter of seconds the spell was cast and a clear blue rune appeared on the door frame. If anyone managed to get inside, they would be enveloped by an electrical discharge.


Ta’Sava and Beta started to cast some spells as well, either on the door or on themselves. It wasn’t going to be enough though. Sven started waving his arms, trying to cast a spell he had learned sneaking around the Arcanaeum, even if he knew he had barely the reserves or expertise to pull it off.

But they needed help, so he was going to summon some.

Conrad closed his eyes to focus again on the boy, releasing the clairvoyance spell so that it would show him the way to reach his nephew. He kept following the blue light at a hurried pace, pleased to see that Naruto had moved far away from the worst of the battle. Actually, the street he was walking through reminded him of a ghost town. It was like the people had run away from the battle as well, leaving half-eaten food on counters or groceries on market stands. Which raised his hopes to find the boy safe and sound.

“Harissen-san, please—” one of the guards that had decided to follow him as if they were lost ducklings pleaded once again.


“No,” he said before the masked man could finish.

“But we would be much faster if—”

“I am not piece of furniture to be moved around,” Conrad exclaimed turning around, doing his best to not snap at them. “I am a man! I will walk!”

The guards suddenly looked startled by his declaration of self-sufficient locomotion. Scared, even, much to Conrad’s confusion. He briefly wondered if his words had sounded harsher in Akaviri, after all it seemed to be a language with way too formalities and honorifics.

Then there was an incredibly loud roar.

Conrad turned as the roar echoed all across the city, and for a moment, he couldn’t believe what he was staring at. In the forest outside of the city, a brief distance from its walls, a small weirdly-shaped mountain had appeared. Or at least he thought it was a mountain until he noticed the massive limbs and the giant tail wobbling behind it. Before he could voice his confusion with a brief but concise—not to mention vile—exclamation, there was a huge explosion of smoke in the forest that tore down some trees and another massive creature appeared. This one looked like a giant dark red toad, only with appropriately-sized clothes and, as if the situation wasn’t already weird enough, it was smoking from a pipe as big as a chimney.

The two beasts faced each other before the toad produced a sword roughly the size of a watchtower from somewhere. Conrad was utterly convinced that Akavir’s compensation for the quantity of monsters with the quality of said monsters had now reached new, unregistered levels of ridiculousness. If this is what roamed around these lands, he was actually surprised there was human civilization at all.

The monsters had begun their fight, but as much as he would’ve liked to see two gargantuan beings like these tear each other apart, since it wasn’t something you saw every day, he had more important things to do.

He took exactly one step before being filled with a new-found sense of dread. He looked back at the colossal duel in the distance, and, without daring to look away, cast the spell once again, concentrating as much as he could on the mental picture of Naruto.

The tracking spell did its job, and as much as he had wished otherwise, the pale blue light darted towards the forest outside, where the two monsters were fighting in a way that was reshaping the landscape.


Conrad didn’t even realize that he had started running, just that he wasn’t fast enough. The guards were easily keeping pace with him, and one called to him, saying something, probably asking if he wanted to be picked up now. He ignored them, attempting to recall how a spell he hadn’t used in years worked. It took him way too long for his taste.

There was a purple flash as he unleashed it, and a skeletal equine with a cold, flaming mane appeared in front of him. Conrad kept moving and vaulted on Arvak’s back, kicking the undead horse so that it would launch itself into a gallop.


Doing his best to not be thrown off the saddle, he took a look at the battle to see if anything had changed. Just as he caught a glimpse of the two monsters, the giant toad turned into a giant… fox-bunny thing with human-like hands and nine tails?

Conrad just stared dumbly at it for a few seconds before deciding that it didn’t matter whatever those monsters were turning into. Or the lack of logic behind it.

He would fight both if he had to in order to reach Naruto.

Naruto swat away a little blue light as if it was a pestering mosquito. He remembered seeing something like this when coming back to the village after their mission in Wave, but they had never bothered him specifically. But since the start of the invasion he had been dealing with one of them every few minutes.

"Naruto... why did you transform the giant toad in the Kyuubi?" Sakura asked very slowly, looking in awe at the veritable sea of bright orange fur the three of them were standing on. Or lying, in Sasuke’s case.

"Uuuh... it was the first badass beast I could think of?" Naruto half-asked, nervously. In hindsight, he should’ve picked something different.

"Nevermind why,” Sasuke muttered, ignoring the pain caused by the cursed seal ravaging his body. Trying to use it to fuel a third Chidori had backfired spectacularly. “How did you transform the toad at all?!"

"I have lots of chakra?" he offered.

"That's barely an explanation," Sakura deadpanned.

“Hey, brats!” the transformed Gamabunta yelled at them. “This is not the right time to be chatting between yourselves.”

The three genin glanced up, suddenly silent as they looked over the figure of Shukaku, the thing that lived inside Gaara and was now able to roam free as long as its host was asleep.

“Prepare yourself. We may have only one chance at this,” the henged boss toad told them as he grasped the ground, preparing to sprint.

“I’m out of explosives,” Sakura said with a tired voice, unable to look away from the monster they were about to charge in an all-in gamble.

“Here, take mine,” Sasuke groaned, handing her a stack of tags.

“Yeah, mine too,” Naruto agreed, throwing his whole equipment pouch at her. He turned to face Shukaku, his eyes filled with determination. “Let’s do this!”

“Hold tight!” Gamabunta yelled as he rushed forward. The kids had to grab the fur on his head to avoid being thrown off the toad-turned-fox’s back.

The two beasts collided, claws clashing in a terrible battle for dominance. Gamabunta used his new claws to grab Shukaku and bit him in the neck with his massive jaw, trying to hold the giant tanuki still. Naruto used the momentum of the charge to leap onto Shukaku’s hardened, sandy shoulders. He started running towards the head, his mind set on reaching Gaara.

Sand tendrils formed on the tanuki’s surface, trying to snatch the blond genin as he advanced. He dodged as many as he could, and everytime it seemed that one of the sandy tentacles was about to catch him, a kunai struck its base, detonating on impact. Thankfully, Sakura had a better aim than he did. He might have ended up with a few mouthfuls of sand but nothing was going to stop him.


Finally reaching the top of the head, he caught sight of Gaara’s sleeping form, half-embedded in sand. Naruto rushed closer to the Suna genin, grabbed him by the collar and punched him with all of his strength. The impact echoed loudly in Naruto’s ears, even more than the tanuki’s roars.

The sand under his feet suddenly crumbled and Naruto found himself in free-fall, reflexively tightening his grip on Gaara’s collar. The sand user, now awake, struggled to get free or gain some control over the sand cascading around them—Naruto wasn’t sure. He just continued to punch Gaara to keep him from gaining the upper hand.


They slammed into something, and as the leaves and branches whipped around him, Naruto realized that they were falling through the canopy of the forest. Naruto felt like he had cracked or broken a few bones from the impact but did what he could to shield his head and face as they kept breaking tree limbs in a twin symphony of snapping wood.

Naruto glimpsed down and, seeing that the ground was getting dangerously close, tried to brace himself to soften the landing. He hit the ground with a small yelp as something in his right leg twingedsnapped, causing him to collapse in a leaf-covered bundle of pain.

Groaning, he tried to roll over onto his stomach, only to stop when he heard some other pained sounds. Raising his head from the grass, he saw Gaara a brief distance away, trying his best to wobble back to his feet. Naruto planted his hands on the ground and pushed, trying to get up. As he managed to get on all fours, Gaara’s head snapped in his direction.

Naruto’s first impression was that Gaara looked… different, somehow. Bruised, with small cuts caused by the fall through the tree and blood dripping from them. More importantly, he looked tired and worried for the first time since Naruto had met him.

Yet he stood up, barely, a resolute expression settling on his face. Then, the sand user took a slow step towards him. Naruto somehow managed to get up, even if it took him a moment, and stumbled towards Gaara, trying his best to not put weight on his wounded leg.

None of them said anything as they got closer to each other. There was probably no need to. Gaara raised a fist, a perfectly normal looking hand, and tried to punch Naruto. Naruto was faster.

He felt the impact of his knuckles against the other boy’s face as he sent Gaara slumping to the ground.Once he was sure that the Suna genin wasn’t going to get up again, Naruto let himself fall as well, unable to keep himself upright anymore.

Naruto stared at the sky, barely visible from under the canopy. He wondered where the Boss Toad, Sakura and Sasuke had ended up.

“My existence…” Gaara muttered besides him, before being interrupted by a cough fit.

“Huh?” Naruto asked as he turned towards his enemy, feeling a bit dazed. Maybe it was because his body was catching up to all the stress he had just been put through.

“I won’t let my existence end like this! I refuse to!” Gaara shouted all of sudden, his face a mask of panic. Naruto wondered when was the last time Gaara had felt fear.

With a grunt, he tried to roll over to look Gaara straight in the eyes, but it was a sluggish effort made even more difficult by the fits of pain that he felt with every movement.

“Stay… stay away!” Gaara yelled, trying to get away from Naruto. But all his efforts were in vain, for it seemed that the fall had been much worse for Gaara than for him. “I’ll kill you!”

"Can you stop that?" Naruto said tiredly. "I don't want to hurt you... you’ve suffered enough."

Gaara fell silent, looking at him in silent confusion. Naruto couldn’t help but notice how vulnerable he looked, unable to defend himself.

"Your pain... I felt it too. I feel it every day," he said slowly. "But I met people that cared for me and I will stop you if you try to hurt them."

"Why...?" Gaara asked, eyes wide. “Why do you care for others?”

"They saved me... from becoming the monster everyone thought I was,” he explained before being forced to take a brief pause. Talking was becoming a bit difficult, and something ached every time he tried to.

"What do you mean?" Gaara asked again, confused.

"We're the same..." he started explaining. "Both of our dads, they sealed monsters inside of us. But, I think they did it for different reasons."

At that, Gaara eyes widened even more, comprehension dawning on his face. Naruto couldn’t help but wonder what would’ve happened had their lives been slightly different.

"Had it not been for the people that were kind to me—"

Two figures landed beside Gaara before Naruto could finish. Temari and Kankuro, Gaara’s siblings, were now standing protectively over their younger brother. Before Naruto could say anything, he felt two presences behind him, and slightly turned to see Sakura and Sasuke, cursed seal active but standing, doing the same for him.


Naruto would truly have been moved by the fact that his teammates were willing to protect him had it not been for the tension filling the forest and the uncomfortable knowledge that he and Gaara would be completely unable to defend themselves if things went badly.

“Enough, you two,” Gaara said, sounding very tired. “It’s over…” His siblings stared at him in surprise for a moment, before glancing at Naruto and his team. Cautiously, without lowering their guard, the two Suna genin bent down and scooped up their younger brother, holding him up by his arms.


“Gaara… remember what I said,” Naruto told them before they left. “Give them a chance.”

At this, not just the Suna shinobi but even his own teammates gave Naruto a strange look. Then, the trio of siblings leaped away, disappearing into the forest. His teammates stood there for a long moment before they realized that, yes, it was over and they could lower their guard.

Sasuke sat silently, crossing his legs, while Sakura produced a first-aid kit from her pouch and knelt beside Naruto.

“We just let them go,” Sasuke said while reaching for the seal on his neck, which was obviously still hurting him. “Isn’t that treason?”

“Do you really think we could have captured them?” Sakura asked, eyes downcast as she looked for some gauze.

“We could’ve captured Gaara if they hadn’t shown up,” Sasuke insisted. Naruto wondered if Konoha would’ve been able to contain Gaara had they kept him as a prisoner. Probably not.

“We drove an enemy team from the village, fought a… whatever that was, and we are all still alive,” Sakura countered, turning towards the Uchiha. “I think it’s more than we could’ve hoped for.”

“Hn.”

“Say, Naruto...” she said, starting to treat Naruto’s wounds, for which the blond was grateful even if he had to suppress a hiss. “What did you mean when you said that both of your fathers sealed monsters inside of you and Gaara?”

Ah, crap.

Thankfully, Naruto was saved from having to give an explanation by the sensation of slowly losing consciousness. He supposed he had overdone it a bit in that fight.

He heard Sakura and, surprisingly, Sasuke's voices calling for him, almost as if he was dying. He would've liked to tell them that he wasn't dying, he was just resting his eyes. Or at least he would've liked to, had it not been for the sound of hooves coming closer.

Wait. Hooves?

Naruto heard the sound of hooves approaching, followed by the sound of bushes and undergrowth being disturbed by something large passing through them. He heard a horse neigh very loudly, stopping near them. Sasuke and Sakura started yelling in a panic for some reason, and there was the sound of weapons being prepared.

He heard heavy steps running towards him—clearly not a shinobi—and Sakura and Sasuke’s indignant squawks as they were pushed aside. He felt two strong hands slowly lift his head, and he did his best to open his eyes.


It was his uncle, wide-eyed and panicked. He was saying something, but Naruto couldn't quite piece together what it was. He was too exhausted, and he was half-certain that his uncle wasn't even speaking the right language.

"Un...?" Naruto tried to say something, but he ended up groaning instead as his tongue refused to work.

The panic left his uncle's eyes in an instant, and they took on a hard and focused quality. A moment later something red was shoved into Naruto's face. He didn't understand what it was at first, but then he felt some kind of liquid touching his lips

"Drink, boy! Drink!" his uncle urged him, and Naruto complied. He was a bit thirsty because of all the sand that had gotten in his mouth anyway.

“Hey!” Sasuke yelled. “What do you think you’re—”


“Don’t worry, Uchiha-san,” someone else said. Just how many people had arrived? “Your teammate is in no danger.”

Naruto felt the liquid go down his throat, but as as he tasted its foul flavor he almost spit it out by reflex. Only his uncle’s hands stopped him, and he was forced to swallow. The pain faded as his body started to itch everywhere for some reason. Even the leg wasn’t hurting as much.

His uncle pressed a hand on his chest, and for a brief moment it was surrounded by a pale white light. Once he was done, Naruto felt that breathing had become much, much easier, and he tried to sit up. He had the time to catch just a glimpse of his two teammates being held back by two ANBU guys before feeling two arms wrapping around him.

Naruto stiffened, shocked by the unexpected hug. As the surprise passed, he relaxed into his uncle's embrace. It was warm, and... wet? He was feeling something dripping onto his shoulder, dampening his jacket. He felt the body of his uncle tremble slightly, and realized that he was crying.


“Uncle, why are you crying?” Naruto asked, even as he fought back tears of his own. “We won.”

Uncle?!” Sakura and Sasuke exclaimed in utter confusion.

Ah, crap.

Chapter 15: Aftermaths and After That

Chapter Text

"I'm telling you, uncle, I can walk! Put me down!" Naruto protested in vain.

“You were injured,” Conrad grunted. After the battle in the distance had died down he had picked up the boy and started walking towards the city, followed closely by the two other kids and the masked guards in tow.

“Well… yeah! But I’m not now so it’s fine! And you’re embarrassing me in front of my teammates!” Naruto pointed out, gesturing towards the two other children.

“That was an impressive medical jutsu, that’s for sure,” the girl with pink hair mumbled.

Pink hair. Had Conrad not just seen the boy badly wounded, he wouldn’t have been able to not stare at her in disbelief.

“Hey Sakura-chan, are you alright?” Naruto asked as he tried once again to get free from his grasp and turn around to face his friend. The boy was as wriggly as a ferret.

"Since when do you even have an uncle?" the girl asked, not even bothering to respond to Naruto’s question. Kinda rude, but the Nord had to admit that her question was a legitimate one.

"Since two days ago, I guess?" Naruto shrugged. Conrad almost interjected saying that technically speaking he had an uncle since he was born, but it was fair. After all, Conrad himself had not known about the boy until he literally stumbled into him.

"Sounds fishy to me..." the girl—pink hair—said, giving the Nord a pointed look. The other boy, who looked to be the moody one of the bunch, seemed to agree by scowling harder.

"Fish?” he wondered out loud. “I didn't go fishing. I have no fish."

"What?" she asked, her suspicious stare replaced by utter confusion.

"Uncle doesn't understand us very well. He comes from a far away place. They talk funny there," Naruto explained.

"Naruto, don't lie," Pink Hair told him with an admonishing tone.

“Boy is not lying,” Conrad said with a slight frown. “I come from Skyrim.”

“Skyrim?”

“Land in Tamriel. Far from here.”

“Tamriel... ?” she repeated, casting a glance to the dark-haired kid.

"What did you mean earlier—" he started impatiently, only to be interrupted by an annoyed cough.

"Haruno-san, Uchiha-san,” one of the masked guards calmly requested, silencing any further questions. “Please do not discuss S-ranks secrets any further in present company.”

Conrad almost missed a step as he heard that phrase. Where had he heard it before? It seemed to trigger one of his 'Daedric Prince' alarms in the back of his head for some reason...

Taking advantage of his distraction, Naruto managed to squirm free and jump on the ground, yelling about victory and freedom. Conrad almost tried to pick him up again, but decided otherwise. If the boy had so much energy to celebrate his little conquest, he could walk just fine.

"... Is it just me, or does Naruto's 'uncle' look a bit like the Yondaime?" Pink Hair whispered to the moody one after a few minutes of silence.

Both masked guards coughed.

Kakashi was not wandering aimlessly around Konoha. In fact, he had a purpose.

Glancing up, he saw a team of shinobi jumping over the rooftops, sweeping the village for any enemy unlucky enough to have been left behind. As soon as the invasion was repelled, the Leaf forces had started to organize again, taking care of the wounded and escorting the prisoners to the cell blocks.

Someone had even formed teams of volunteers, shinobi and civilians alike, to help with the clean-up operation, be it taking care of rubble or bodies.

He had convinced Gai to show the great Konoha hospitality to that team from Iwa so that he could look for his genin. As far as he was concerned, deciding how to deal with a foreign team caught in the crossfire was too much work, but it wouldn't look good if they ran away or got hurt while in the village.

Konoha had been hurt, not just because of the invasion but also politically. A betrayal from an ally didn't go unnoticed by your enemies. Kakashi knew that everyone would watch them now, hoping to find a sign of weakness.

There had been no official reports yet but from what he was seeing the invasion could've gone worse. Especially when the giant three-headed snake or the dragon appeared.

The snake's allegiance was obvious, but the dragon's? One of the many enemy nin he had encountered that day had actually asked him if the dragon was on his side. Kakashi promptly stabbed him in the face, of course. But it did shed some light on the situation.

He had checked later and nobody knew where it had come from. Most had even wondered if it had been a genjutsu, but illusions didn’t rip a giant snake's throat. Or feast on their corpse.

To make it all confusing, the beast had vanished in a flash of purple flames after that.

Today had been weird.

He wondered if his missing students had been caught up in the weirdness. Hopefully not.

This search was getting frustrating, though. Where had they gone?

“Kakashi! Hey, Kakashi!” a familiar voice called him. Turning around he saw the familiar shape of Pakkun, running towards him as fast as he could.

“Pakkun? What are you doing here?” he asked before remembering who he was supposed to escort. “Where is my team?”

“Kakashi, it’s an emergency! You must come to help! Your students—” the dog started talking between pants, each word alarming the jonin before stopping all of sudden and looking further down the road. “Oh, there they are.”

“Kakashi-sensei!” someone called happily, and the last worries for the day finally left him. He turned around to see Naruto, Sakura and Sasuke walking towards him. They looked a bit worse to wear, but none of them seemed to be injured. Kakashi sighed in relief and spared a glance to the two ANBU that were following them and—

He froze. For half a second he wondered if he was seeing things. Then he wondered if it could be a genjutsu or a henge, or some other technique he couldn't think about right now. Because that man shouldn't be here. He was dead. Kakashi had seen the corpse and been at the funeral. He had mourned him.

Someone had the gall, and the balls, to go around wearing Minato-sensei's face in the middle of Konoha. And get close to Naruto. Kakashi felt the handle of a kunai brush against his fingertips.

Stop, the ANBU captain signed quickly. Ally.

Kakashi blinked, his brain once again refusing to comprehend. He must have seen the signs wrong somehow.

No danger, the captain signaled again. This time Kakashi was sure he had got it right. As the group got closer, he glanced uneasily at the man who was wearing his sensei’s face. He couldn't decide if the man's disguise was very good or over-the-top. If Minato-sensei had been alive, he would surely have gained a few wrinkles or scars, but not that many.

Who is this? he signed. Technically he had asked Who is target? but there was just so much that could be said without starting a pantomime in front of everyone.

Not now, the ANBU replied. Kakashi may have imagined it, but he thought he had seen an annoyed glint in the shinobi’s hidden eyes.

“Kakashi-sensei?” Naruto called again, catching his attention. Even Sakura and Sasuke seemed to wonder about his silence.

“Hello there,” Kakashi greeted the group. “So, how did it go?”

"How did it go... How did it go?! It went crazy!" Naruto exploded all of sudden. "Gaara was all, you know, ‘I'll kill you’ and BAM and—"

"The enemy nin pursued us, which kept him away from the village," Sasuke interrupted, trying to give a more understandable report. "They retreated and we weren't in any condition to pursue."

“And we were awesome and fought together and Sakura was using explosives—”

"I was just throwing them, Naruto,” Sakura protested. “It's not like I made them."

"Yeah but you were still really cool! It was all like BOOM and stuff!" Naruto kept going, making gestures that Kakashi guessed were meant to be explosions.

"Well... it was pretty cool to actually use them..." Sakura admitted, sounding a bit embarrassed by all the praise.

Kakashi wondered if Sakura may end being as destructive as her teammates if the habit of using explosives caught on. But he was more interested in the man’s reactions. As the genin kept talking and recalling what had happened in their battle against the son of the Kazekage, the stranger got more worried and… angry? Why would he get angry about it if he wasn’t a prisoner but an ally?

“I’m glad to hear that your teamwork helped,” Kakashi said, silencing his students before acting like he had just noticed the stranger. “And who would this be?”

“Huh?” Naruto looked between the man wearing his sensei’s face and Kakashi for a moment, before turning towards the jonin with a grin. “Oh, that’s my uncle.”

“Your uncle,” Kakashi said flatly. It wasn’t a question, because the statement pretty much froze on the spot whatever actual question Kakashi’s brain may have elaborated.

“Yup! Uncle, this is Kakashi-sensei. Kakashi-sensei, this is Uncle Conrad,” Naruto said, before leaning in a conspiratorial manner and half-whisper to him. “He’s my dad’s brother!”

“Your father’s... brother,” Kakashi repeated slowly. He must have misheard, because there was no way that—

“Yep!” Naruto nodded proudly, not noticing how still Kakashi went all of sudden. The jonin was almost certain he was not trapped in a genjutsu now. It was far too crazy to be one, although he was painfully tempted to check. He glanced again at the two ANBU.

Not here, both the masked shinobi gestured again. Kakashi thought that it was unfair; he just wanted for someone to say something that would make the world make sense again.

“Hey, One-Eye,” the man said, speaking for the first time with an odd cadence and an accent that Kakashi couldn’t recognize. One-Eye? That was a new one. “The boy calls you ‘sensei’. You taught them?”

"A bit," Kakashi admitted with a shrug. Much to his confusion, the man’s anger seemed to be suddenly aimed at him. The tension was so palpable that people passing by, civilians and shinobi alike, had stopped to glance at what was going on.

Which didn’t seem to be lost on the two ANBU, especially when some of the onlookers started whispering between themselves or tried to get closer to have a better look.

“Harissen-san, we should take you to your lodgings,” Owl said all of sudden, grabbing the man’s shoulder.

“No way, I’m not—” the Minato lookalike started to protest, before the two shinobi grabbed him arms and all but manhandled him away. The man started struggling and shouting a series of very angry-sounding words that Kakashi didn’t understand. The two shinobi darted away as fast as they could with their passenger and Kakashi kept following them with his eye as long as he could, noticing that they were making a beeline for the Hokage Monument.

“Why did they take him away?” Naruto asked, sounding none of the wiser as the people around dispersed after a nasty look from Kakashi.

“Oh, I’m sure he’ll be fine,” he reassured him, thinking that he had to see the Hokage as soon as he could to ask what the hell was all this about. “Now—”

“Alright, Naruto. Talk. How did this person show up claiming he’s your uncle?” Sakura asked before Kakashi could finish, almost hissing. “No offense, but... I thought you didn’t know who your parents were?”

“And what’s this story about your father sealing a monster in your gut?” Sasuke asked, co*cking an eyebrow.

Kakashi stared between his genin in silence for a few seconds before letting out an audible groan. His brain didn’t deserve being treated like this, he could feel a headache coming already.

"Let me get this straight... that wasn't Minato," Chouza said, gesturing in emphasis.

"No," Inoichi drawled out. He briefly wondered how his life would’ve been if a certain person hadn’t shown up, ever. It would probably have been better for his sanity.

"But Minato is the father of that kid, Naruto," Chouza continued.

“Yes,” he almost snapped, not really giving a damn anymore. What was the point of keeping a S-rank secret if the living evidence of it just waltzed around the village and wrecked invaders anyway?

“Wow... we're terrible friends,” the Akimichi leader said, looking ashamed. ”He's even called Uzumaki!"

“That's what I said when Hokage-sama told me," Inoichi sighed, wondering where he could get some drinks. He briefly wondered if there were any bars still open, even if the village was still in a state of disarray.

“So, he really is their son,” Shikaku said pensively, speaking for the first time since they had met Harissen-san.

“You knew?!” Inoichi and Chouza asked at the same time.

“No, I didn’t know,” Shikaku shook his head. “I suspected it, though. But I never tried to find out.”

“Why?” Inoichi had to ask.

“A part of me wondered if I wasn’t just… seeing things,” the Nara admitted. “Wishful thinking, you know?”

Inoichi winced, wondering what his friend may be thinking. All the times he may have noticed something, but ignored it… it was probably worse than not even suspecting anything like he had.

“Come on guys, don’t be so glum,” Chouza interrupted, grabbing the other two in a boisterous hug. “We can still make-up to the kid! I’m sure that if we do so, Minato may even forgive us.”

“Minato would,” Inoichi muttered. “Kushina would still flay us alive with her chains though.”

All three men nodded in solemn agreement before going back to work. Konoha wouldn’t fix itself.

“Jinchuuriki?” Sakura asked, repeating the unfamiliar word. “What's a Jinchuuriki?”

Kakashi had led his team to a secluded spot away from the clean-up teams, knowing that if the cat was out of the bag, it was better to deal with it and properly debrief them. Especially since it seemed to be a whole herd of cats that had escaped, because obviously the universe hated him.

“A Jinchuuriki is someone that was used to seal a bijuu,” Naruto explained, a tinge of hesitation in his voice. “Gaara is one… and so am I.”

“W-what…?” Sakura stuttered, eyes widening. “Does… does it hurt? Are you alright?”

“Huh?” Naruto blinked. “No I’m fine, it doesn’t hurt. Well, not physically…”

“The seal on Naruto’s body is perfect. The demon can’t hurt or influence him,” Kakashi interrupted, thinking that he had to explain this himself. “The fact that he’s a jinchuuriki is a common knowledge among the adult population but there’s a law created by the Sandaime that forbids to speak about it.”

“But then…” Sakura wondered uncomfortably.

“I'm not stopping you from having this talk only because the Sandaime's law doesn't say anything about Naruto telling this to other people," Kakashi clarified, and his little genin seemed to relax a bit. If he had to use a loophole to inform his team, so be it.

“Can we see it?” Sakura blurted all of sudden, before realizing what she had just said. “I meant the seal!”

Naruto looked at her for a moment before getting up, lifting his ruined jacket and shirt and closing his eyes, concentrating to mold his chakra. Slowly, the seal’s complex pattern appeared on his belly. Kakashi watched as his teammates got closer to get a better look. Then Sakura, for some reason, poked the seal with her fingers.

“Sakura-chan, that tickles!” Naruto protested, covering himself and trying to not laugh.

“Sorry!” she quickly said before staring back at the seal. “So, what’s inside of this—”

“The Kyuubi,” Sasuke said, deadly serious. “The Kyuubi is sealed inside of you.”

Naruto’s mirth quickly died and he nodded, avoiding their gazes. Kakashi had never seen him so nervous before.

“But… but it’s dead! The Yondaime killed it, we learned it at the Academy—” Sakura started, while Naruto shook his head.

“It wasn’t. The Yondaime sealed it into me.”

“But you said that it was your father that sealed a—” she protested, as a glint of realization flashed on her eyes. “No way.”

“Sakura—”

“No way! You—You can’t be meaning that…”

“You never told us,” Sasuke said, almost accusing his teammate.

“I found out two days ago,” Naruto explained. “About my dad, I mean. I’ve known about the Kyuubi since we graduated but it’s supposed to be a secret, so…”

“But then your uncle…”

“He’s the Yondaime’s brother, yes,” Naruto nodded. “Long-lost twin, actually.”

Kakashi kept his eyes on Naruto but noticed Sasuke scowling all the same, an odd mix of jealousy and longing on the Uchiha’s face. The jonin knew that the prodigy would’ve done anything to discover another member of his family, so he could understand why he felt that way. Even if Naruto’s “uncle” was obviously an impostor… right?

“Sensei, why are you being so calm about this?!” Sakura asked, turning towards him.

“I don't know about the uncle part, but all the rest is true,” Kakashi confirmed from his spot. If it was true, he couldn’t even imagine how the Hokage would deal with it.

“You knew?!” Naruto exclaimed, turning towards him with a shocked expression.

“Yes,” Kakashi said guiltily, looking right in Naruto’s eyes. “Your father… he was my sensei.”

It had sounded more like a confession than an explanation to his ears. All the genin looked at Kakashi in disbelief while Naruto seemed to be shocked to the core. After a few second, his loudest student had to sit down.

There was a long, uncomfortable silence as Kakashi watched Naruto dwell on what he realized must have been yet another life-changing revelation in just a few days. Sasuke and Sakura kept looking between the two of them, but they didn’t dare say anything, realizing how important this moment was for their teammate.

“Why… ?” Naruto uttered, not looking up at Kakashi, the implied part of question obvious for everyone. The older shinobi could feel all the old guilt come back at him at once, like an ugly beast that refused to just die and decided to haunt you instead.

“Your parents loved you, Naruto,” Kakashi assured him. “They would’ve been really proud of you.”

“Then why didn’t you ever show up to tell me that?!?” Naruto exclaimed in anger, looking up. Kakashi could see tears forming up in his eyes and had to look away in shame, jonin or not. What he saw instead were the dark look Sasuke was giving him and how white Sakura’s knuckles had become.

His students were all mad at him, Kakashi noticed. He felt like he deserved that, though.

“I wasn’t allowed to,” he admitted in a low voice, trying to tell himself that it didn’t sound like a weak excuse. He forced himself to look back at his student. “And I didn’t know how.”

It was Naruto’s turn to be silent now, but it didn’t last long. “Why not?”

“Because,” Kakashi started, trying to choose his next words carefully. “I was very young at the time, and I was in no condition to do anything but…” he felt himself trail off for a moment. “It was better if I watched you from afar.”

“But later—”

"Later... it was too late. By then there were orders in place, to keep you safe. If anyone ever suspected that you were your father's son, you would've become a target so I had to keep my distance," he continued as his mind trailed to that team from Iwa. After weighting what he had just said, he rolled up his sleeve, showing the genin his ANBU tattoo. Today they had learned a lot of secrets, what was just one more? “I tried to watch you from the shadows, when I wasn’t on an assignment. I know it isn’t enough, but…”

His voice trailed off and once more, nobody talked. He felt Sasuke’s eyes stare at his shoulder even after he hid the tattoo back, but he kept staring at his sensei’s son. After a brief moment, Sakura awkwardly reached over and patted Naruto’s back.

As Naruto processed his words, Kakashi felt all the memories, what-ifs and guilt accumulated in his shinobi career weight heavy on him. He knew that Naruto would probably hate him for not telling this sooner, orders or not orders and honestly? He deserved it.

“Can… can you tell me about them now, then?” his student finally asked with the meekest voice the jonin had ever heard from him.

Kakashi’s expression softened as his worries washed away, but before he could answer he heard the sounds of someone approaching. He noticed that Sasuke had heard, too. “I will, later,” he said, getting up and giving a look at his team. “Not a word of this, understood?”

"Hey, lazybones! How come you get to skip clean-up duty?" a voice broke through the air. Turning around, Kakashi saw the two Inuzuka siblings coming from around the corner, along with their dogs.

“My little genin had a long day and I was allowing them to rest,” Kakashi offered as Hana scolded her younger brother.

“Hey, Kiba,” Naruto greeted. “What are you guys doing here?”

“We’re looking around for anyone injured or trapped under the rubble,” Hana explained as the dogs kept sniffing around. The pup, Akamaru if Kakashi remembered correctly, got closer to Naruto and after giving the Uzumaki a few sniffs, jumped on his lap and gave him a few licks on his face.

"Naruto, were you crying?" Kiba asked to Naruto.

“I’m not,” the blond answered, rubbing his face with his arm as he kept petting the small dog.

“Looks like you were to me,” the young Inuzuka said teasingly, but before the blond could answer back Sasuke moved right between him and Kiba.

"He wasn't," Sasuke almost seethed, causing Kiba to back off, arms raised. Kakashi raised an eyebrow at that, Sasuke being protective of Naruto? He had thought the day had been strange as it was but here he stood corrected.

“How’s Hinata doing?” Sakura asked, attempting to defuse the situation.

“Shino and I took her to the hospital after you two left,” Kiba said detachedly. “I haven’t heard anything yet.”

“The invasion?” Hana spoke in a low voice, moving closer to Kakashi as she glanced at his genin. He realized what she meant; even if his team had already seen combat in Wave, today was the first time their generation had experienced actual warfare.

“More or less,” Kakashi said, noncommittal. It was a good explanation for their private chit-chat after all. “Now, if you would excuse us, my team and I have to speak with Hokage-sama about a few things, so—”

“Wait, you didn’t hear?” Hana asked with a seriousness that interrupted the kids’ antics.

“Heard what?” Kakashi already felt a sense of dread.

“Hokage-sama… he was badly injured.”

As soon as Conrad felt his feet touching solid ground again, he freed himself from the guard’s grasp. He started to protest about their habit of carrying people like a sack of wheat, but whatever threat he was about to tell them died in his throat as he noticed the state in which the clearing was.

Bodies were littered in front of the familiar shack, some badly mutilated. Two belonged to the masked guards he had become accustomed to, the others… for a moment he thought it was another group of ninja soldiers, but their outfits and masks seemed different from the ones he had seen so far.

He didn’t have time to focus on them too much though because the lonely figure standing in front of the cabin caught all his attention. Must have been the weapon in his hand, or the dark armour full of spikes he was wearing.

Daedric armour.

The figure’s helm turned slightly towards him and he could see the warrior’s face through the opened faceplate. Conrad couldn’t recognize the caste the being belonged to, but he recognized what was standing in front of him.

"I thought I had smelled dragon’s stench," the dremora said in perfect Cyrodilic, giving a huge bite to an apple—no, it was a heart, probably harvested by one of the bodies. Conrad idly wondered how strong his jaw was. "It's been a long time since I met a spawn of Akatosh."

"You're unbound," Conrad stated.

"And you're a mortal,” the dremora replied in a mocking tone. “Must be frustrating."

"Harissen-san?" the guard with the owl mask asked, hand on the sword’s hilt. "Who is this?"

Conrad ignored him, trying to ignore the dreadful sensation he felt as he realized that as much as he wished otherwise, there was only one explanation for the presence of an unbound dremora here.

He flickered his fingers, not daring to break eye contact with the creature in front of him as he called the spell. Faint auras appeared around the cautious guards and the dremora, along with three shapes from the inside of the shack. Conrad felt a felt a flash of relief pass through him.

"How peculiar,” the dremora observed, tilting his head. “You care for—"

Conrad interrupted whatever deceit the creature was about to say with an ice spear shooting from his outstretched hand. The daedra stumbled one step back, mostly because of the surprise than for the impact on his chest.

He heard the two guards readying their weapons, but his eyes didn’t leave the dremora’s ember-like ones, now burning with rage.

Raising his sword, the infernal being charged with reckless abandon. Expecting this, the Nord raised his left hand and a spiked shield manifested from the ether. He barely had time to brace for impact before daedric metal clashed with its brethren.

The two guards flanked the dremora, so fast that their enemy didn’t see them coming until their short swords slashing downwards. While one barely scratched the daedric armour’s surface, the other struck true between the elbow joints, drawing blood.

The dremora snarled, grabbing the masked ninja that had wounded him by the wrist and throwing him away like if he was a doll.

“Zun,” Conrad called as the monster turned around to cleave his other ally. The sword flew away from the daedra’s hand, landing among the grass. The dremora hesitated for a moment and the Nord charged, slamming the shield against his enemy putting all his weight behind it.

The daedra stumbled under the crash, barely managing to stay upright. Conrad took a deep breath and bellowed at the top of his lungs.

“Gaan Lah Haas!” A blur of purple flames surrounded the dremora, who finally fell down on one knee as the Thu’um ravaged his body. Not wasting time, Conrad raised his shield and slammed its serrated edge on the daedra’s helm with all of his strength.

Sparks and blood flew as the helmet was ripped away. The dremora struggled to stand, still weakened by the Dragonborn’s shout. The two guards restrained him, putting their swords against the daedra’s throat and eventually he stilled to stare hard at the Nord.

Why, Conrad didn’t know. After all, why would a dremora stop because of a blade? If they were deadly injured they would just disappear and return unharmed from whatever reign of Oblivion they were from.

“Tell me, is this really Akavir?” the daedra asked. That explained the sudden change of attitude.

“Yes,” Conrad said, slightly lowering the shield. He could always slam it against the dremora’s face later. “What of it?”

Much to his confusion, the daedra laughed, drops of blood falling from the nasty gash on his face. “Then I’m the first of my kind to step foot under its accursed moon in a millennia.”

"The moon?" he couldn’t help but ask. He had spent weeks wondering about the only moon visible from here, to no avail. When he had asked Inoichi, he had got the impression that the shinobi thought he was messing with him.

"The veil has been pierced,” the dremora all but yelled. “And nobody, neither Him or his accursed mother can do anything about it!"

After this outburst, Conrad blinked for a few seconds before letting go of the shield, which dissolved in a flash of purple light.

“I have neither the time or patience to deal with you right now,” he told the daedra with disdain, as he charged a spell with both of his hands. “Let him go,” he told the guards in his broken Akaviri.

“What?” the higher-ranking between the two said, and once again Conrad had the impression that they thought he was crazy.

“Just do it, or you will be hit,” he said as the humming spell between his palms started to make him lose sensibility to his fingers.

The two ninja looked at each other for a moment, having some kind of silent, inexpressive conversation about it. As soon as they took a step back, the dremora lunged for Conrad, a hand outstretched towards his face. The Nord fired the spell just in time, and a literal ice storm invested the daedra, encapsulating his body in a thick layer of ice. By the time he stopped, only the daedra’s head wasn’t completely shrouded.

“This should do for now,” he murmured, ignoring the dremora’s obscenities and occasional blasphemies as he walked towards the shack. He would need to find a better solution later. While he had no idea what the dremora had been babbling about the moon, it sounded ominous enough that he didn’t like the idea of sending the bastard back to Oblivion to tell to all his minions and superiors about this place.

Unless he found some permanent solution, the daedra would end up going back to Oblivion sooner or later. Silently thanking the Nine for the barrier placed between their worlds, he took a peek inside of the shack’s broken door.

An alarmed yelp sounded from behind a flipped table as he entered. The apprentices he had been stuck with glimpsed from their hiding place, ready to throw whatever they had at him, be it spells or—was that his journal?

The magelings sighed in relief as they saw him, relaxing from their defensive stances. Conrad looked them over. They didn't look hurt, albeit this was probably the first life or death situation they’d had to deal with. They looked way too young for these things, just like his even younger nephew and the other two kids.

He was going to have to deal with this too, wasn’t he? First though, the important things.

“Alright you three,” Conrad said, crossing his arms. “Who was stupid enough to summon a dremora?”

Chapter 16: Moving On and Moving Out

Chapter Text

Much to Sarutobi’s chargin, being confined to a hospital bed after the loss of a limb didn’t stop his duties from stealing most of his time. Especially because the village had been attacked and he had been unconscious for the crucial first day after the invasion.

The doctors had been very against the idea of letting a patient that had almost died, suffered physical trauma and with a long process of surgeries and physical therapy ahead being visited by a literal mob of people asking for orders. So Hiruzen had ordered them to shut up, give him a soldier pill, keep one of them in the room in case he had a heart attack or something and let him do his job.

They had vetoed him leaving the bed though, which was why the Sandaime Hokage had to listen to reports, read lists and more reports, ask what measures had already been taken while he was under, approve new measures, order mission schedules and re-schedules and delegate what really didn’t need his attention no matter how much everyone else said about it, while laying down between hospital sheets.

At least he didn’t have to talk to diplomats that had awakened in the aftermath of a warzone and had been reasonably spooked by it. Homura and Koharu had agreed with him that meeting the leader of the village to be reassured that everything was alright would be counter-intuitive if said Kage was a cripple with a haggard appearance.

He sighed as he stamped his approval on yet another top-priority mission order. He had pretended to not notice the way his subordinates had winced at seeing his stump as the medic changed the bandage, but it didn’t change the facts.

The village needed to look strong, now more than ever. Their allies had betrayed them and if they showed any sign of weakness, the other villages would take advantage of it.

A shinobi without a leg wasn’t able to fight, and a Kage unable to fight wasn’t able to protect the village. Hiruzen knew that his days as a shinobi were over.

The problem, obviously, was finding someone that could succeed him as soon as possible.

The door to the hospital room opened and Jiraiya stumbled in, the perfect image of exhaustion. The fact alone that he hadn't come through the window told Sarutobi all about his current state.

“Are you here to claim my hat?” he asked, trying to lighten the mood.

The half-joke fell flat. “No,” was all that Jiraiya said as he closed the door.

"How come that I am the one in the hospital bed, and yet you look in worse shape than I do?"

Jiraiya gave a sad excuse of a cheerful grin. "Sealing two resurrected kage is not an easy task. Neither is ensuring they're stored away safely."

"Stored?" he asked, raising an eyebrow.

Jiraiya slumped into the chair at his bedside with a sigh. "So they didn't tell you?"

"Nobody told me anything aside from the fight being over and Orochimaru escaping," Hiruzen explained. "Given that the village was still there, I had assumed that you managed to stop them."

Jiraiya gave him a long, tired look before glancing at the medic standing by in the room. Sarutobi sighed and turned towards the medic. "Leave us."

The medic-nin seemed willing to protest, but after looking at him in the eyes he relented and left without a word.

“It could’ve been worse,” Jiraiya started as the door was closed shut. “I mean, I did have to pretty much improvise, make-up new seals on the battlefield while fighting against twoKage, it’s not like—”

“Jiraiya.”

“The seals were able to stop them. It required a lot of work but they’re unable to move,” Jiraiya explained with a sigh. “But it didn’t dispel Orochimaru’s kinjutsu.”

Sarutobi slowly digested this and decided he didn’t like it at all. “So, when you said ‘stored’, you meant…”

“As long as nobody touches the seals improperly, it should be fine,” Jiraiya said, slumping back against his chair.

He almost asked where his student had put the two Kage that had been resurrected as mindless drones by hisotherstudent, but Sarutobi bit his tongue. This wasn’t his office, and walls had ears.

“Anything else out of the ordinary?” he asked, browsing through a stack of papers and trying to not think how things could go wrong if anyone got their hands on the not-so-deceased Senju prodigies.

“No—Wait, yes,” Jiraiya quickly backpedaled. “Yamanaka Inoichi told me that Harissen-san’s student were attacked during the invasion.”

Sarutobi didn’t look up, but he stopped shuffling pages he had finished double-checking ten minutes ago. “Oh?”

“Yes, it’s kinda odd. Apparently some unknown shinobi showed up as their sensei was out butchering invaders.”

“I see,” he hummed, stroking his beard. He had a strong suspicion of who those ‘unknown’ shinobi may have been, since he was absolutely certain that the enemy had not managed to get anywhere close to the mountain. Justfantastic. “Were Harissen-san’s students captured, or—”

“Actually, the shinobi that attacked them are all dead,” Jiraiya clarified. “According to Inoichi they were a bit shaken by the experience but are otherwise fine.”

Hiruzen paused at that. He didn’t know the details, but three teenagers untrained for combat shouldn’t be able to face a shinobi team and emerge victorious under normal circ*mstances. “It seems that we’ve underestimated these foreigners, after all.”

“Well, their sensei can summon dragons,” Jiraiya hummed in thought. “Oh, and Inoichi told me that Minato’s brother captured an unusual prisoner when he was escorted back to his lodgings.”

“What?”

“What you mean ‘I don’t know what a daedra is’, Inoichi?” Conrad asked slowly. He had been keeping an eye on the apprentices, who were supposed to pack their things so they could move to a different location, but that statement caught his whole attention. Because he had seen and done many absurd things in his life, but he had never heard of something so utterly ridiculous before.

“I told you, Harissen-san. I never heard that word before."

"You saw one,” he deadpanned. “I show him to you."

"Oh. To be honest, he looked like an oni to me. Or some other kind of yokai."

"What is oni?"

"Legendary creatures that appear in stories and old myths," Inoichi quickly explained, and Conrad couldn’t help but think that the daedra had told him the truth. Or at least a half-truth, because he wouldn’t trust the word of a random daedra as far as he could throw said daedra's carcass. A millennia of lack of contact with them would make them sound like old stories to scare children for sure.

He had no idea why they would change their names so much, though.

“I want to see him,” he finally spoke, observing Ta’Sava putting the meager alchemical supplies in a stuffed box. At least he didn’t make anything explode this time.

Inoichi paused, hesitating. “I’m sorry, but while we appreciate your assistance in capturing him, I believe it’s better that interrogating him remains a shinobi matter.”

That caught the Nord's attention once more. "What you thinking?" he seethed, turning towards the blond ninja. "You know not what you dealing with!"

On an academical level, Conrad knew that it wasn't just Inoichi's call, but he couldn't help but feel contempt for the shinobi's collective paranoia.

"Tell me about this... daedra, then," Inoichi asked patiently. "How did it even get here?"

"Sven summoned him," he answered, pointing towards his student.

"Master, I said I was sorry!" the young Imperial answered from the corner where he had been confined.

"Go back to packing, Sven. Andno magic," Conrad ordered, emphasizing the last words. While what Sven had done was an amazing feat for someone of his age, he still deserved to be punished somehow. The apprentice sighed and went back to putting books in one of the strange chests that Inoichi had sworn were made of pressed paper.

"So, he's a summon?" Inoichi asked, sounding intrigued.

"That’s what I said. Or did I use wrong word?"

"But why did he attack you?"

"Because he was... what's the word when you not sworn to someone's service?" Conrad asked.

"Loose?" Inoichi offered.

"If you say so," Conrad shrugged. "Is your language, not mine."

"But what does it mean? Did Sven summon him without a contract?"

"Contract?" he repeated, hating the fact that he probably sounded like an uncouth moron.

"It's when two groups agree to something," the other man said without batting an eye.

"Oh. No. Making pacts with daedra is always bad idea, but summoning a loose one is bad also."

"I said I was sorry!" Sven repeated once again.

"Then why didn't he dispel himself when you captured it?" the Yamanaka asked, clearly confused.

"Because he can not,” Conrad scoffed. “Not how it works."

"Actually... I'm pretty sure that's how it works."

"Who met daedra before here?" Conrad asked with a gruff.

"You, I guess, but—"

"Thentrust mewhen I say that not how it works,” he insisted. “Good thing, too."

"Why? Would it be that bad if he went back where he came from?"

"I am not sure yet... if Akavir really wasn't influenced by daedra for—” Conrad stopped with a sigh. This was getting old. “What's the word for ten one-hundreds?"

"One thousand."

"If Akavir was not influenced by daedra for one thousand years, who knows what happen if they find a way here."

"But Conrad-sensei—" Beta spoke up as she finished her chores.

"Don't call me that," he grumbled. He didn’t want to be called with the same title of people that trained children for war.

"Sorry, Master Conrad,” she said, in an odd mix of Akaviri and Cyrodilic. “But... the Dragonfires protect all of Nirn, right? They should protect this place too, yes?"

"The Dragonfires protect us, but you can find daedric cults in every,” Conrad faltered, wondering what the word for ‘province’ was. “In all Tamriel, Beta."

"Forgive me if I ask, but why do you keep using that word?" Inoichi asked.

"Dragonfires?"

"No, Akavir. It's a bit... archaic—”

“What does that mean?”

“Old. Very old. And with that I mean centuries before the Warring Clans era."

"The war what?"

"... right. I guess that we'll also have to teach you all a bit of history, too."

“Just give us some books later. We can read. Mostly.”

“Very well," Inoichi nodded, writing something on one of those paper-chests. "So, what are the… ‘Dragonfires’? And how that has anything to do with the daedra you captured?”

Conrad pinched his nose, wondering how much context was needed to explainthatto someone that didn't know about the daedra and Oblivion.

What followed was the most irritating explanation Conrad ever had to give, combined with a long walk through back alleys and continuous detours to keep their group, specifically him, away from the crowd. Everytime he had to explain a simple concept, he would have to go off tangent just to clarify. Adding to that the fact that he couldn’t translate some words correctly, he was sure that he was butchering any grimoire of cosmology regarding Nirn he had ever read.

What really irritated him, though, was the reactions to his explanation. Inoichi was listening and asking questions, sure, but Conrad couldn’t shake the sensation that he wasn’t been taken completely seriously. It was one thing to explain the various daedra and the chaos and bloodshed they sowed when they were summoned by moronic spellcasters. Or the cults around the powerful and cruel entities, that much Inoichi could grasp. Akavir had those too, it seemed. But the suspension of disbelief seemed to shut down when Conrad got around to explaining about the Princes.

“You’re talking about gods,” Inoichi said, the utter disbelief in his voice making Conrad want to punch him.

“No,” Conrad gritted his teeth, disliking the comparison. “Not gods, not really. Gods are… nicer. And more quiet. Princes are… different.”

“So you have demonsandgods, neither of which anyone on this continent has heard of before now.”

“Yes.” Conrad nodded. That was pretty much it. Calling daedra ‘demons’ was not completely correct but he wasn’t going to complain if saying so was going to get the point across.

Inoichi threw his hands up in the air. “How am I supposed to believe this?! It’s one thing to capture a weird red-skinned thing you call a daemon, but now you’re telling me aboutactual godlike beingshigher up the food chain?”

Yes,” Conrad repeated, frustrated. What was so difficult to understand about it?

“Look, I don’t want to offend you by criticizing your religion or your beliefs,” the Yamanaka started, carefully measuring his words. “But I can’t take that as a valid reason to consider that prisoner a threat as big as you claim.”

Now, Conrad had become a teacher by a cruel twist of fate. Even if he hadn’t planned to, he had become well-versed in explaining about Mundus and Oblivion and the various Divines and Daedric Princes therein, but he was used to explaining it to students who knew he was right. It slowly dawned on Conrad that Inoichi wasn’t taking him seriously, like if he was telling fables or other make-believe stories. That made him mad.

"Listen, daedra, atronachs, and scamps are dangerous,” he started, ignoring the man’s confused expression at the unknown words. Served him right, now he knew what it felt like. “They useful when summoned for specific purpose, tied to the summoner, controlled. But Daedra only see mortals as less... beneath them. With the Princes? Is worse."

At this Inoichi seemed to pause in place. While he didn’t look convinced, a reluctant caution was clear in his eyes all the same. Good. He was listening.

"They are older than the world. Very powerful. Very dangerous,” Conrad continued, as the magelings stopped in their tracks, doing their best to not drop the little luggage they had to take care of. Conrad was ready to bet that the guards that had been shadowing them from the rooftops had stopped, too. “They treat men like toys, like puppets. They interfere and force things to go their way."

“Wait, stop,” Inoichi said, raising an arm. “Say I believe you. Say these… ‘Princes’ are real, that where they come from is real.Howdo they interfere? Why? What are their motives?”

Conrad grimaced. Some things just couldn’t be sugar-coated. How to explain their motives? Their reasons? Especially with his limited grasp on the Akaviri language.

Mehrunes Dagon, who had orchestrated the Oblivion Crisis. Boethiah, master of murder and treachery. Clavicus Vile, who loved playing cruel tricks to those mad enough to ask for his help. Vaermina, who domained over nightmares. Molag Bar, the King of Rape. Namira, the patron of cannibalism. Sanguine, who would probably show up to offer a pint or two to everyone if Conrad got really, really really drunk. Sheogorath, the only Prince Conrad had not been crazy enough to double-cross out of spite. Hermaeus Mora...

And all the others, of course. Even the most “benevolent” ones, like Meridia and Azura, extended their influence on the world for the same reason after all.

“Because they can,” the Nord finally said. As Inoichi’s eyes widened slightly, Conrad kept walking without looking back.

Ino sighed loudly and, much to her disappointment, her teammates didn’t seem to care. They had just finished a long, long morning of D-rank missions all over the village, a fate shared by every genin and possibly some unlucky chunin after the invasion was over.

Since Asuma-sensei was out of Konoha right now and Shikamaru was too lazy to actually train without their teacher, the three of them had decided to crash at the Yamanaka clan compound. Although, technically, it wasn’t a proper compound. It was closer to a couple of normal roads where most of the Yamanaka clansmen lived, alongside a lot of simple villagers and shopkeepers. The Yamanaka didn’t even own the place, but when she was younger Ino was a little jealous that the Nara had those big clan grounds with a whole forest to keep their deers in as well, so she had started to call the area around her home like that and it had stuck.

This of course meant that Ino, Shikamaru and Chouji were just sitting on a bench besides Ino’s home.

"I'm bored," Ino admitted, hoping that it would have more effect than sighing.

"Here, my mom packed me some extra snacks," Chouji replied, immediately offering her something wrapped in a linen cloth. Shikamaru obviously didn't even look up.

"How is eating a way to stop boredom?" she asked.

"If you eat your food slowly, enjoying every single flavor and its texture, the world will stop being boring,” he explained in what she supposed was an attempt for a sagely tone. “Trust me—is that your dad?"

Ino turned and noticed that, indeed, her father was coming home earlier. Along with four strangers, all carrying a few boxes each.

“Who are those people?” she asked aloud. “Shikamaru, did you ever see a team like them?”

Shikamaru whispered something that suspiciously sounded like “troublesome”, but he did indeed look up. “No. I don’t see any headband either,” he said. Ino blinked, and realized that it was indeed the case. Then Shikamaru spoke again in an unusually confused tone. “Is that guy dressed like a cat?”

“I think so, but why would—Is that atail?!” Ino almost shrieked as she spotted said appendage swishing and swirling behind one of the unknown genin. Or whatever they were.

It was official, boredom was over. Ino got up, dusted herself off and walked towards the odd group plus parent.

“Hello, Dad,” she greeted, stopping a short distance from them. “Who are these people?

“Ino?” his father asked, looking surprised at seeing her. “Shouldn’t you be with your team?”

“My team is over there,” she said, gesturing at the bench. Chouji waved. “We finished our D-ranks.”

“Ah, I see,” he said, looking like he wasn’t seeing at all. Actually, he sounded very… off, for some reason.

“Are you alright?” she asked, ignoring the curious glances from the others. “You look pale.”

“Yes, I’m fine, thank you. I just have… a lot of going on right now,” Inoichi sighed.

“Is this yours?” the man leading the strangers asked her father, pointing at her. There was an accent in his voice, a very strange one, but Ino couldn’t recognize it.

“Oh, right,” her dad said, as if he had just remembered that they were there. “Harissen-san, this is my daughter Ino. Ino, this is Harissen-san and his students. They’re going to stay with us for a while.”

"What? Seriously?" she asked, giving another glance at the odd bunch.

"Of course, we have room to spare," her father said, all but ushering the four strangers in the house.

Ino just stared at the doorway for a bit, wondering why her father was in such a hurry. Gesturing at her teammates to follow her, she walked inside just in time to hear some argument about shoes inside of the house between the two adults. The other genin, if they even were genin, were looking around the house in awe, much to Ino’s confusion. Sure it was a nice house but it wasn’t luxurious or fancily decorated.

After her father had finished explaining that boots were supposed to be taken off before entering someone’s house, he opened a door to a spare room that Ino was sure had been used to keep supplies for the flower shop until that morning. The not-smelly ones, obviously. “Here, this is where you will sleep.”

"Dad, what's going on?" she asked as the strangers started putting their things down.

"I know it's a bit sudden, but it's an emergency. It will only be for a few days, though."

"But do we even know them? Why would you invite four strangers in our house?"

"Oh they're not strangers, I've seen them a lot in the last months," Inoichi explained as he gave worried look to the newcomers. “Please, tell your mother I'll explain when I get back."

"You didn't even tell Mom?!" she asked. This wasnotnormal. "Wait, where are you going now?"

"It was a last-second decision, and I need to talk to Shikaku about a few things."

"Dad—"

"I'm sorry, Ino," he sighed, putting both of his hands on her shoulders. "I know you have questions, but it's all a bit hectic right now. I'll try to be home and explain as soon as I can. Sounds good?"

"Alright," she said. "But you better have a good explanation for Mom."

"Of course," her father said with a small smile. "Oh, and one more thing: please do not bother Harissen-san too much."

And with that, he left the house leaving her even more confused. Not bothering a guest? She would've asked some questions, it wasn't that bothersome. Right?

She joined Shikamaru and Chouji in the living room and kept an eye on the strangers moving around the house. They stared, of course. What else could they do? They had never seen people this strange before. Their clothes were odd and they seemed to be speaking gibberish. Or in code. Why would they speak in code?

Oh right and one of them was acat. Overall, it would've been odd if they had not stared. Even if the cat-boy seemed a bit unnerved by them.

"That's odd," Shikamaru murmured before taking a sip of juice he had helped himself to.

"Of course it's odd," Chouji agreed, eating some chips. "It's a cat. But... human-like."

“Chouji, ‘it’ is a ‘he',” Ino clarified. She was almost certain that the cat-boy wasn't a pet. Must have been some odd bloodline limit, she hoped it was worth it.

"No, not that. I mean sure, they're all a bit odd. But their sensei is the oddest among them," the young Nara continued.

"How is that guy weirder than a cat-boy?" she asked. To be honest, had her father showed up with only him, she would have suspected that he had taken pity on a hobo or something.

"It's just... did your father ever show you any pictures of when they were young?" he asked.

"I wish he didn't. I can't believe he used to wear a mullet," Ino snorted. Seriously, what had her dad been thinking?

"I know it sounds weird, but I could swear that I saw that guy over there in a few of—"

"Hey, you three!" Harissen-san called, peeking from the improvised guest room. "You genin?"

"Huh? I mean, yes we are, sir," Chouji answered. Ino frowned; the guy couldn't tell? Maybe he wasn't a shinobi then.

"Do you know Naruto?" the man asked, walking closer.

"Naruto?" Ino asked, confused as much as her teammates. Why would this person ask about Naruto?

"Has same eyes and hair I do. Loud. Orange. Short," Harissen-san clarified, using his hand to emphasize the last part. "You know where he is?"

"We know Naruto, yes," Ino replied, talking slowly because if the man spoke like that he probably wasn't too bright. "But why do you want to know where he is?"

"I am his uncle," the man said matter-of-factly. Shikamaru immediately started choking on his juice, but thankfully Chouji promptly jumped to his help.

"But... Naruto doesn't have any family," Ino couldn't help but say, ignoring Shikamaru's coughs.

"He does now," he grumbled, crossing his arms. "Ask Inoichi if you not believe me."

A moment of silence followed that. Ino couldn't believe it. Actually, she didn't believe it. Naruto was an orphan and lived alone... that was why he acted like he did, right?

"Well?" the man asked.

"Well what?" she asked back.

"Do you know where Naruto is?"

"He and his team were assigned D-rank missions around the village, like us," Ino explained, noticing how confused the man was by her explanation for some reason. "So they could be anywhere."

"I see," Harissen-san pondered on this for a bit. "I look for him then."

“Are we allowed to?” the cat-boy called as the man walked by the exit and started putting his boots on.

“Allowed to what?” she asked.

“Go outside?” the cat asked.

“Why wouldn’t you be allowed to go outside?” Chouji asked. Ino and Shikamaru shared a glance. This wasn't normal, at all. She wanted to ask questions but she remembered her father's words and bit her tongue. Then the probably mentally-impaired stranger started rummaging through a closet and throwing clothes on the floor.

“Hey, you can’t do that!” Ino called him out.

“I will put it back,” the strange man replied, not even bothering to apologise.

“Th-That’s not the point!” She sputtered. “You have toaskbefore taking clothes!”

Harrisen-san swivelled around to stare flatly at her. “May I have clothes?” And then, pointedly not waiting for her answer, went back to rummaging through the closet.

Ino went red in the face from sheer indignation, her voice failing her at the audacity of this man. OnlyNaruto’suncle could possibly be this rude. And since when did Naruto have an uncle? Hadn’t Naruto been an orphan since he was born? Why would a relative show up now? Inherhouse, of all places!

Her unspoken questions ceased as Harrisen-san pulled something out of the closet and put then on. Ino blinked. The man was now sporting her grandfather’s old raincoat and the big, obvious straw hat that her father used sometimes for gardening.

“Those lookterribleon you,” she blurted out.

“I do not care about how look, girl,” the rude man snorted.

Ino’s eye twitched. “Ino.I-no. Notgirl,Ino.”

“Sorry, Ino then,” Harrisen-san dismissively said, already walking out the door.

“Sen-sorry, Master, where are you going?” one of the other strange people called out. It was the girl this time. She looked worried. Ino supposed she had been here during the invasion and was still rattled up. She still was as well.

“I go walk around some,” Harrisen-san called out, pausing at the door, with the wide, ugly straw hat shadowing his face. “Sven, no magic.”

“I said sorry!”

“Magic?” Ino asked flatly. “Don’t you mean jutsu?”

But instead of answering, Harissen-san just slammed the door shut.

Very well then. If her father had asked her to not bother Harissen-san, she wouldn't. Especially since he was gone.

No one had said anything about the man's genin, though.

Despite his gods awful ‘disguise’, nobody noticed Conrad as he walked around the city.

It was odd, walking around Konoha’s streets on his own for the first time. The first time without having to run frantically not having to kill someone, at least. In his voyage to reach it, he had passed only through some small villages. If this place was similar to other larger settlements, then Akaviri cities were larger, cleaner and more chaotic than he was used to.

There were also exotic things, from the decorations to their strange technology to the ways the buildings were built. He supposed that when half of the population seemed to be able to jump from a building to another in a single bound, architecture had to take it in account.

Every now and then he passed by some places that had been hit by the battle, and the population seemed to work as much as they could to fix the damages as soon as possible.

It reminded him of a anthill, cleaning up as soon as the battle with their rivals was over.

He didn’t have time to sight-seeing though; he had to find Naruto. He dodged into an alley to cut around a partially collapsed building. As expected, he felt someone landing behind him.

“If you really wanted to go out, you could at least try to besubtleabout it, Harissen-san,” the man with an owl mask said in an admonishing tone. Conrad guessed that he had been walking around Konohamostlyon his own, then.

“Why? Nobody cares,” he said. It was true, and he could see how this frustrated the masked guard a bit. The clothes he had borrowed would’ve been easy to spot in the middle of a crowd, just like a hooded robe. But just like a hooded robe, most people didn’t seem to notice until the person with said hood didn’t do anything out of ordinary.

Apparently, some things were universal.

Ignoring a protest about safety and protocols and other words he didn’t understand, he concentrated on his nephew and summoned magika to his hand to cast a clairvoyance spell. The man grabbed his hand and shook his head as if he were scolding a child.

“Don’t use that jutsu, Harissen-san. The village is already tense even without seeing your blue lights again.”

Conrad inwardly grumbled about how his spell wasn’t neither dangerous or scary, especially the weaker, basic version he had intended to use. He looked at the crowded street out of the alley. “How is the city, after attack?”

“We’re rebuilding,” the Owl-man said curtly. Conrad suspected he didn’t want to share details with an outsider.

“I am sorry for your men. They died to protect my students,” he said, sincerely. As much as he had quickly came to dislike shinobi, the masked guards had shed blood and lost some of their own to protect his apprentices.

The ninja with an owl mask seemed taken back by this. “Thank you,” he replied after a few seconds. “I’m glad that the invaders didn’t harm your students.”

“Thank you. Speaking of which… it is odd?” Conrad asked. Time to test a little theory of his.

“What do you mean?”

“The city was attacked, but from what I remember, there was no battle close to the mountain. Yet four invaders attack where my students and I lived for a month.”

He noticed as the Owl-man went more still than usual at hearing his words. He would have gladly paid his own weight in gold to see the man’s face, but he could tell he was being very careful now.

“Almost like they know where to find us,” Conrad continued, deciding prod a bit more forcefully. “Good thing we moved to Inoichi’s house. He is a little important in the city, is he not?”

“Yamanaka-sama is a clan head, that is true. It would be unwise to attack his residence,” the masked man replied in a forcefully neutral tone. Conrad wondered if the Owl-man trying to tell him that they were supposed to be safe there without admitting anything.

The man was probably too loyal to speak against his superiors, or sworn to secrecy or something similar, given how much paranoia seemed to be considered a virtue among shinobi. The Nord couldn’t help but think that he had suspected right -- those invaders weren’t invaders, they were from Konoha.

But who? If the old Kage wanted him dead or thrown in a cell, he would have ordered it a long time ago. Not that it would’ve worked, obviously. A separate faction, maybe? A secret cabal? Why attack his students? Were they trying to attack him through them? And why was Owl apparently not allowed to speak on it?

Conrad bit back a curse.Politics. He had managed to get himself involved in some mess even so far away from home.

“I guess you right, I should thank him for having us in his house,” he replied, wondering what was the word for ‘hospitality’ and deciding that he would deal with it when he knew more. Then he tried to cast the spell like if the last chat had not happened at all. “Now, where is the boy—”

Owl grabbed his hand again, his voice clearly exasperated this time. “Please, don’t. Let me find him, and I’ll take you to him.”

“Lead the way,” Conrad said cheerfully. Finally some cooperation.

Once again he found himself walking around Konoha’s busy streets, looking up every once in a while to look for Owl. Nobody seemed to notice the masked guard moving above them, they were probably used to seeing people running over their heads.

He had no idea how Owl-man was tracking down Naruto, but as long as the ninja was doing his job, Conrad didn’t really care. Every once in a while the masked guard would appear on a rooftop and point in a direction before leaping away in a single bound.

Soon, Conrad found himself standing in the front of a strange, short building. It looked like a store without a front wall. Instead, a half-curtain with big red runes concealed the inside. He glanced at the masked shinobi sitting on the roof and walked towards the shop’s wide entrance.

He was invested by the smell of food being cooked and a sight that reminded him of a inn counter. He idly wondered if they had booze while a familiar voice assaulted his eardrums as soon as he moved past the small curtain.

"Old man! Another bowl, please!" Naruto was sitting on a tall stool, alongside his two friends and their sensei, who seemed to be the only one that had noticed him.

"There you are," Conrad greeted, taking off his hat. "I had to ask an owl to find you."

"Huh? Uncle!" Naruto exclaimed as he turned towards him. The other kids greeted him, or at least the girl with pink hair did. The other one and Kakawhateverhisnamewas just gave him a glance. The old man behind the counter, instead, looked like he was about to faint at any moment's notice.

"Hello, Naruto," he said, sitting besides the kid and putting the hat on the counter. "How are you?"

"Tired," Naruto grumbled. "We spent the whole morning doing D-ranks. It was awful."

"Why? Are... D-ranks that bad?" he asked, trying to pronounce the unfamiliar term and doing a bad job at it.

"Yes they are," all three children agreed immediately.

"We had to help with the clean-up duty, Harrisen-san," their sensei explained. "Picking up the rubble, helping people moving their belongings, that sort of stuff."

"Wedid that, Kakashi-sensei,” the girl protested. “You disappeared the whole morning!”

"You have your D-ranks, I have mine," the man said with the tone that every teacher used to speak with their students. "Speaking of which, Teuchi-san, could I have four large bowls to take away, please?"

Hearing his name, the food stall's owner seemed to snap out of his reverie and stopped looking at Conrad like he was a ghost, opting to serve his customers instead.

"What is that stuff?" the Nord asked as the cook put some odd, white worm-looking things in a pot behind the counter.

"It's ramen!" Naruto helpfully answered, before looking at him in confusion. "You don't know ramen?"

"We do not have in Skyrim," he explained. Or in the rest of Tamriel, as far as he knew.

"No ramen..." Naruto muttered, his eyes going glassy for a moment, like he had just been told the most terrible news he could ever hear. Then, he turned to the cook with a determined expression. "Old man! A pork ramen bowl for my uncle!"

“Youruncle?” the man called Teuchi asked, stopping right in the middle of putting some ingredients together. Conrad inwardly sighed. This was going to happen every time he was introduced to someone here, wasn’t it?

“Yup!” the boy nodded, happy as a clam.

The stall owner glanced at Conrad for a few seconds before giving him a friendly smile. "Pleasure to meet you, Na—I'm sorry, Harissen-san was it?"

The Nord gave him a nod and the man went back to his cooking. So, yet another person that had known his brother. Naruto didn't seem to notice though, mesmerized as he was in his odd broth.

As the cook worked on yet another order, Kakashi leaned a bit on the counter with a lazy attitude. "So, Harissen-san... how are you enjoying the sights and scenery so far?"

The genin gave an odd look at their sensei, while Conrad recalled the buildings damaged from the battle. "Difficult," he answered, looking at the cyclops directly in the eye.

"Ah, well, maybe it wasn't the best timing," Kakashi mused. "Is Konoha much different from what you're used to?"

“Warm,” he started. But to be fair, pretty much every country was warmer than Skyrim. “There are strange things. Less monsters… and only humans.”

“Only humans? What do you mean by that?”

“You know, only people like me, you, them,” Conrad tried to explain, gesturing at everyone. Sadly, Inoichi had not taught him the word used for different races.

“You mean like your student? The cat one?” Naruto asked.

“Cat student?” Kakashi asked, arching his only visible eyebrow. “Like a summon?”

“No, Kakashi-sensei,” Naruto answered before Conrad could. “It’s like a guy, see? But with a cat face and ears and a tail and everything else—”

“Are you saying that where you are from there’s… not humans?” the shinobi asked, clearly finding the concept odd.

“Yes, many types,” Conrad nodded, turning to Naruto. “And the word for Ta’Sava’s kind is ‘Khajiit’.”

"Ka-ji-to?" Naruto tried to repeat.

"No, it's 'Khajiit',” he repeated.

"Kah-iit?" the boy tried again. Conrad couldn’t help but be amused to not being the only one butchering a word’s pronunciation.

"Khajiit,” he repeated again. “Kah-Jheet."

"Kah—” Naruto started again, only to stop when a steaming bowl was placed in front of him. All his attention was stolen from the food. “Oh! Thank you, old man!”

Conrad observed as his nephew picked the two small sticks that all Akaviri seemed to think were the best eating instrument ever and, after what looked like a quick prayer, tried to eat a soup with them. Much to his surprise, the sticks were used to fish the long snake-things from the soup. Then, much to his shock, Naruto started slurping them with a very, very loud noise.

“What are you doing?” he asked, wondering who had taught the boy table manners.

“Wat’chu mean?” the boy asked, his words muffled by the food in his mouth.

“Naruto, don’t talk while you eat,” the pink-haired girl admonished him.

“Sorry, Sakura-chan,” Naruto muttered as he bit through another mouthful. “What do you mean, uncle?”

“That noise,” Conrad said, wondering how eating with a full mouth was bad manners but making sounds with the food apparently wasn’t.

“But that’s normal, I have—Oh, right. You don’t have ramen where you are from.”

“Slurping the noodles is good manners, Harissen-san,” Kakashi offered as an explanation. “It’s to show that you’re enjoying the food.”

Conrad pondered about this for all one second before deciding that it was yet another example of Akavir being just plain weird.

“Here you go, Kakashi,” the cook called, offering an odd bag to the shinobi. “Enjoy your food!”

Kakashi thanked the older man, paid not only for the food he had bought but also for the genin and Conrad’s as well. He would’ve protested, but quickly realized that he had no money with him, especially not the kind that the Akaviri seemed to prefer. Seriously, who used paper as money anyway?

“See you tomorrow for practice,” Kakashi said to the children before turning to Conrad. “I hope we’ll be able to talk soon, Harissen-san.”

Conrad watched as the man left, apparently without a care in the world. He didn't like him. There was something off in the way he acted, but the Nord wasn't able to figure it out yet. He couldn't help but wonder if he was involved in whatever ninja politics were undergoing around the city.

That wasn't all, though. Conrad still didn't know many details about how shinobi worked and did things, they were a secretive and strange folk like that. But either Kakashi or someone else above him had decided to send Naruto and the other two kids he didn't particularly care for to risk their lives in a battle.

"Harissen-san? Sorry if I ask, but you said that you're from a very far away land?" the girl asked before he could make up his mind if he wanted to torch this place down or not.

"Yes, I am."

"What kind of shinobi live there? Are they different from us?"

"Are they strong?" the other boy asked, almost eagerly.

"There are no shinobi in Tamriel," he answered as patiently as he could.

The two children gaped at him as he had suddenly grown a pair of wings.

"No shinobi?" the pink haired one muttered.

"Odd, right?" Naruto said after a quick slurp of his food.

"But he used jutsu, we saw him," the other boy protested.

"That was magic, boy," he clarified. The two children looked at him for a moment, before glancing at Naruto.

"It's true," Naruto said with a shrug. "Hey, why don't you tell us about the place you come from?"

And so Conrad started explaining about Tamriel and Skyrim, butchering the subject in question once again thanks to his limited knowledge of Akaviri language. It was frustrating as expected, mostly because he had just gone through something similar with Inoichi. These kids knew nothing of the continent so he had to explain a few things from the ground up.

As if that wasn't enough they didn't seem convinced when he told them about the creatures and monsters that infested the land: they were probably too used to the idea of giant creatures to believe him.

The cook offered him a short break from all the questioning in the form of a steaming bowl of this "ramen" soup, but he failed miserably when he tried to eat it the way they did. In the end he settled on drinking all the broth and chewing the things inside later, much to his nephew's horror.

"That's not how you eat ramen!" he cried.

"And yet it works," Conrad shrugged, trying to savor the taste. Strong, but a bit too salty for his liking.

Naruto shuddered before going back to his own meal. There was an awkward silence before the pink haired one popped another question.

“What is your home like, Harrissen-san?”

“I told you about Skyrim,” Conrad replied. Sure, it had been a broken and brief explanation, but had they even listened? Or was his homeland so boring?

“No, I meant yourhome-home. Where you live,” the girl explained.

“I have a house in Whiterun, but I do not stay there a lot of time.”

“Why not?” Naruto piped up. “Don’t you have a family there or something?” His eyes went wide all of sudden and he began to nearly vibrate in his seat with excitement.

“Hey, Sasuke, we have to go,” the girl said a bit too loudly before Conrad could answer. “We’ll be late to give our reports, remember?”

“What are you—Oh, right, the reports,” the boy said, changing his tune at the last moment. “I guess we’ll leave.”

“Wait, if you have to give a report, I have to come too,” Naruto said, sounding disappointed about having to leave.

“We’ll take care of it! You hang out with your uncle!” the girl called, waving him back into his chair. And just like that, they were gone. Even the cook had suddenly found something important to do. The Nord felt a pang of gratefulness for being left alone with his nephew to talk about such a personal thing.

Naruto looked at the still-swaying curtain for a little before returning his attention to Conrad, grinning in expectation. “So, do I have an aunt too?! Or…” Naruto gasped, a look of utter delight on his face. “Cousins?

“No,” Conrad said, wincing when he saw the hope die in his nephew’s eyes. “I never married, or had children.” Or at least he thought so. Sure, he had a bit of a reputation, but he had always been careful.

“Oh,” Naruto said softly, staring at his half-empty bowl. He looked up suddenly with a wavering smile. “At least I have you!”

Conrad blinked in surprise at the child, before giving a smile mirroring his nephew’s. “I guess you are right, boy.”

Chapter 17: Unpleasant and Uncomfortable Truths

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

“Are you even listening to me, Shikaku?” Inoichi asked.

The Nara rubbed his temples before looking up from a pile of reports that were cluttering the desk in his home office. When the Hokage had delegated the less important ones to him, he hadn’t expected so many. He should’ve known better.

“Yes Inoichi, I was listening to you. But I think you’re overreacting,” he said, looking at his longtime friend and teammate. “Harissen-san was probably just explaining his people’s beliefs to you.”

“No, he was very adamant that they weren’t just—Look, he believed what he was saying!”

“Just because he believes it, doesn’t mean it’s true,” Shikaku said, trying to reason with the man.

“I know, I know. But you don’t—I’ve been studying that man for months now. While he could give Kakashi a run for his money when it comes to being a wreck, and almost certainly an alcoholic, he’s not crazy, and he’s not a liar.”

“I’m not saying that he is one, Inoichi. But you’re not thinking clearly—”

“Do you know what he asked for when he showed how those concoctions of his work?” Inoichi asked all of sudden.

“I didn’t know he asked for anything,” he wondered out loud.

“That’s right, he asked for nothing . He didn’t think that such a thing should be a secret, because it’s not where he is from. The same for that ‘magic’ of his… they teach it to anyone interested into it. Anyone , can you believe it?”

“I understand how odd that sounds, but it is a different culture,” Shikaku reasoned, wondering just how that would work. There were probably some restrictions the stranger had not mentioned, otherwise you would have an entire country overrun by impulsive idiots able to throw lightning from their hands with no hand signs or blow up multiple shinobi teams with a simple gesture. “I don’t see how that has anything to do with his claims about these… ‘Daedric’ people.”

“My point, Shikaku, is that he was talking about them like they were just another fact of life,” Inoichi said, putting his hands on the table and leaning forward. “Sure, he fears them, but he was talking about them like they were common knowledge. They are just normal for him, like the tides or the sun or the moon.”

“Are you sure you’re not letting your emotions cloud your judgement?” Shikaku asked, hating that he had to. “He has his face, after all.”

Inoichi stepped back, narrowing his eyes. “I know he isn’t Minato!”

“You say that, but I’m not sure that you truly mean it. Do you realize that you invited a stranger into your home? Where your family lives?”

“Do you know how many of our wounded are still alive thanks to him? Because of the ‘alchemy’ he shared with us?” the Yamanaka countered. “I think that he deserves the benefit of the doubt by now, Minato’s brother or not.”

Shikaku sighed. “Look, I understand why you’re worried. I am too.” The idea of capricious, powerful beings able to influence the world with no fear of retaliation was a chilling concept, to say the least. “But what do you expect me to do without proof?”

At the end, that was the heart of the problem. There was no evidence aside from a bitter man’s word.

“I want to interrogate the prisoner. The summon,” Inoichi said before Shikaku could ask which one. There had been plenty of prisoners left behind by the retreating Suna and Oto forces.

“The one that can’t even dispel itself?” he asked. This ‘Tamriel’ place was really odd.

Inoichi nodded. “According to Harissen-san, the… daedra, dromora, dremora, or whatever they’re called, they serve the ‘Daedric Princes’. If anyone can give us evidence, it’s him.”


“Then why aren’t you already at the T&I department?”

“Because I need the authorization of the Jonin Commander.”

Shikaku raised his hands with loud sigh, giving up. He picked a permit from his desk and quickly compiled it before passing it to his friend. “Don’t make me regret this.”

Inoichi nodded and left, a grim determination in his eyes.The door clicked shut behind him, leaving Shikaku alone once again.

Sitting back at the desk, he went back to studying the reports. After a few detailing the ongoing reparations on the village, he stumbled upon an unusual one. A smuggling ring had shown up out of the blue on the northern coasts of the Elemental Nations, possibly having operated for a longer time before the local authorities had become aware of their presence. So far the the criminals had not been caught, and since the ring was hitting the local economy instead of the Land of Fire’s, it hadn’t been deemed urgent, but that didn’t mean that Konoha’s informants wouldn’t keep their eyes on how the situation changed.

Looking at the date, Shikaku noticed something odd. It roughly coincided with the first sightings of Harrissen-san’s arrival in the Elemental Nations.

“Your brother is a very troublesome person, Minato,” he sighed.

Conrad looked around and, sure enough, he spotted the masked guard still tailing them from the rooftops. After eating all the ramen he could hold, which was a surprising amount given the boy’s size, Naruto had grabbed his sleeve and had began to pull him all over Konoha while spouting something about wanting to show him his place.

Naruto was explaining what the shops and places and stuff around them were, pointing excitedly as Conrad tried to keep up. He spoke so quickly that he could barely understand half of the words. The crowd around the streets kept giving them odd glances, which given how loud Naruto was being, wasn’t that surprising.

“So, boy,” Conrad said, speaking while his nephew had finally stopped to take a breath. “How do you become a genin?"

“Oh, I went to the Academy for a few years—that's like, ninja school. Sooo boring—and then we had a test, but I, uh… I kind of failed that,” Naruto explained, looking a bit embarrassed by the last part.

“Failed?” he asked, frowning in confusion. “But you are a genin.”

“Yeah, I am. See, after I failed the test, Mizuki-sensei said that I could still graduate if I learned a jutsu from this scroll that the Old Man has...” Naruto trailed off after mentioning the old Kage. “I hope he’s okay.”


“Who is Mizuki? I thought your teacher was Kakashi?”

“No, Kakashi-sensei is my jonin-sensei, Uncle. Mizuki-sensei was a teacher at the Academy,” Naruto started explaining, noticing the confused expression on Conrad’s face. “At the Academy, they teach kids. You know, until they graduate. Then, a jonin, who are super-cool ninja with tons of experience, start teaching you and your team.”

“Just teaching?”

“Well, no. You also go on missions.”

“Like D-ranks?” he asked, remembering how Inoichi’s daughter and Naruto’s friends were complaining about them.

“Yeah, like those,” Naruto grumbled, pulling a face. “But sometimes you get other missions, too.”

“Like what?”

“Like C-ranks!” Naruto stated like it was the most obvious thing in the world.

“What are C-ranks, Naruto?” Conrad asked patiently.

“More important missions, like fighting bandits or protecting people!”

Conrad found himself missing a step, his hands clenched to fists. “I see,” he said darkly. So the siege hadn’t been an exception because of dire necessities. Nor had the tournament been ceremonial. While he’d had his suspicions, it did nothing to quell the anger pooling in his gut. Children were not fighters . Not at this age.

Next to him, Naruto happily chirped on, oblivious to his inner turmoil.

“But anyway, I got the scroll and it was super cool! I learned a really strong jutsu from it! Iruka-sensei caught me, though...”


“Another teacher at the Academy?” he asked, before realizing what the boy had said. “What do you mean, he caught you?”

“Mizuki-sensei… he lied, so that I would steal the scroll for him,” Naruto bit his lip for a moment, before speaking again. “Then… he attacked me.”

“WHAT?!” Conrad exclaimed loudly as he came to a stop, gaining the attention of everyone around the two of them, crappy disguise or not. It wasn’t the first time he’d made a scene in front of a crowd, so he didn’t care much for their glances at first, until he realized that they weren’t looking at him anymore. Instead, their eyes had quickly moved on to Naruto, looks turning into glares as harsh whispers started buzzing and the crowd around them became thicker.

Why were they reacting to Naruto like that, and not to the suspicious looking stranger walking next to him?

Naruto was standing beside him, his demeanour completely changed from exuberant to worried, and Conrad didn't miss the anxious glance he stole at him. What in Oblivion was going on here?

“Hey, brat!” someone shouted. Turning around, Conrad saw that one of the people in the crowd was pointing at Naruto. “Leave that man alone!”

Seriously, what in Oblivion was going on? He glanced at Naruto, who was looking back and forth between him and the rowdy passerby, obviously concerned.

"Didn't you hear me?" the man said, taking a few steps towards the boy. "I told you to—"

Conrad stepped in as soon as he saw the stranger moving towards Naruto, putting himself between the man and the boy. The citizen pulled back in surprise, clearly not expecting the Nord to get in the way.


“What do you want?” Conrad asked, straightening himself and glaring down at the man, tensing his body for good measure.

The man blinked at him for a moment, clearly not expecting this development. "Hold on, stranger! That kid—"

"Leave the boy alone," Conrad said between gritted teeth. The man took a step back in shock and the crowd started whispering, their glares replaced by confusion. Conrad gave them a glare of his own. "What are you looking at?!"

The man backed off and the crowd slowly dispersed, still whispering and glancing at the pair. Only then did Conrad look back at Naruto. The boy met his eyes, trying—and failing—to hide the confusion and surprise in his eyes. What could he even be surprised about? It couldn't possibly have been Conrad jumping to his defence, could it?

He put a hand on the boy’s shoulder and led him away, looking for a less crowded street.


“You well, boy?” he asked as soon as they weren’t surrounded by gawking or whispering people.

“Yeah, I am,” Naruto said, with a flicker of emotions the Nord couldn't really place.

“What happened there?”

“The villagers, they… they don’t like me.”

“... why?”

Naruto tensed for a moment before answering him. “I guess... it’s because I pulled a few too many pranks before becoming a ninja.”

“Pranks,” Conrad said flatly, deciding that his nephew was, among other things, a terrible liar.

“Y-yeah. You know, stuff like flooding the Academy. Or covering the teachers in glitter. Or drawing graffiti on the monument," he said, pointing at the faces on the mountain in the distance.

Conrad arched an eyebrow at the short list. “You did that?”

“Yeah! More than once!” the boy said, sounding a little better.

“... even your father’s face?” Conrad asked, trying to not smile and failing miserably.


“I didn’t know he was my dad back then…” Naruto said, pouting a bit.

Conrad snorted at that, while being pensive. If Naruto didn’t want to tell him the truth about why people disliked him, he wouldn’t pressure him. He could always find out later. Who knows, maybe normal citizens were uncomfortable with the idea of children fighting, killing, and…

No, he didn’t want to think about that .

“Come on, let’s go,” he said, patting his nephew’s shoulder.

“This way.”

“So, this… Mizuki. Where is he?” Conrad asked.

“I… dunno,” Naruto shrugged. “I think he was arrested as a traitor.”

The Nord nodded, thinking that this Mizuki was lucky that the ninja of Konoha had gotten their hands on him already.

His nephew led him through a few other streets and back alleys until they reached an odd-looking building. It seemed to have seen better days, but it looked sturdy. Naruto guided him to the top floor, where he dug in his jacket for a key.

As they got inside, the boy reminded him to take off his boots, to which he begrudgingly obliged, taking off the hat and cloak as well.

With that out of the way, Conrad took a look around the rather small apartment. It seemed nice enough to live in, if you looked past the mess inside.

Clothes were strewn over the floor all over, and as he followed Naruto inside the kitchen he saw dirty dishes in the sink and empty packages of food piling on the counter. An odd smell lingered, like trash that had not been thrown away in time.

“Ah, sorry… I didn’t plan to bring any guests, so I didn’t clean up,” the boy said said, slightly embarrassed as he picked up the clothes and tried and failed to make the small kitchen look better. As he was distracted, Conrad passed a finger on a shelf and frowned at seeing so much dust. Why did the boy’s guardians, whoever they were, let the house be reduced to such a state?

Although, Naruto had not called to anyone once they had arrived, not even to see if anyone was home...

“Would you like some tea? I’ll make some tea,” Naruto said, starting to put water in a kettle before Conrad could say anything. The Nord stared, fascinated by how advanced the internal plumbing in Akavir was, even more than the ones in the Imperials’ thermae. The boy then put the kettle on some odd contraption and lo and behold, fire appeared. Without wood to feed it.

Sure, they didn’t know about alchemy, at least the way Tamriel did. But they had packaged food that could last for months, stick-like “quills” with their ink inside them, those not-magical lights that made the city shine at night, advanced plumbing and now a cooking fire without wood. Who knew what else he had not seen yet? Conrad idly speculated how all of these things could work, but he was no engineer. He couldn’t help but wondered how such an advanced civilization could be so barbaric to send children to the slaughter.

“I have only green tea… is that okay?” Naruto asked, as he produced a small package from a shelf.

“It’s okay,” Conrad nodded, still finding the word odd. There probably wasn’t any booze in the house, so he didn’t even bother to ask. As his nephew started humming a tune, looking around for a couple of cups, he took a look at the rest of the house.

The untidiness wasn’t normal, like the fact that no one would be home a little after lunch time. Picking up an odd-looking shirt, he noticed that all of them were children-sized clothes, not a single piece of adult garments in sight.

He opened another door, hoping to find some answers. Instead, the unsettling feeling in his gut rose to new heights.

Walking back to the kitchen, he saw that Naruto was setting the table for the two of them, with cups and a small bowl of sweet-looking dumplings.

“I think these are still good! I didn’t have time to get groceries, between the tournament and the invasion and the D-ranks and…” Naruto’s voice trailed off as he noticed how Conrad was staring at him from the kitchen’s door, silent. “Are you alright, Uncle?”

“Why there is only one bed?” he asked, almost dreading the answer.

"Uhm... because there's only one person sleeping here?” Naruto asked with a confused frown, missing what he meant. “Oh, did you want to stay here? Maybe we could ask jiji to bring another bed!"

Conrad felt ice forming in his belly as he fully realized what his discovery meant. He slowly walked closer to Naruto and, much to the boy’s confusion, knelt down to look him in the eyes. After hesitating for a moment, he placed his hands on his shoulders. "Boy, how long have you been living on your own?"

Ishina was not having a good day. Surviving an invasion was supposed to be good news, but being kept in a room somewhere for days after it wasn’t. She should have expected it, honestly.

Being imprisoned in all but name wasn’t what frustrated her the most, though.

“I’m back!” Hatake Kakashi called cheerfully as he entered the room where her team had been confined to. He seemed to ignore their unamused glares as he placed a bag on the small table and dramatically revealed its content. “I brought you lunch.”

“Ramen?” she asked, arching an eyebrow at the jonin.

“From the best ramen stand in Konoha.”

“It’s lukewarm,” Kurotsuchi grumbled as she picked up a bowl for herself.

“I’m sorry, but on the way I met someone that reminded me of an old friend,” Kakashi explained in an almost bored tone.

All her ‘students’ looked at her, as if to ask if they should eat. She took a look at the ramen that was given to them by one of Konoha’s best jonin, sniffing. She didn’t smell anything odd and, after looking him in the eye, she picked up the chopsticks. If they wanted to kill them they would’ve used something less elaborate than offering them poisoned food. Probably.

"So, why aren't we in a cell?" she asked as her ‘genin’ started eating.

"Because you’re not prisoners, obviously. You're guests."

"I didn't know that guests were forbidden to leave the village," Yano snarked, gaining a scowl from Ishina. As much as she didn’t like their situation, they didn’t need to antagonize Konoha-nin. For now.

"True, but most guests are not from a rival village. Or happened to show up for an invasion."

"Then why didn't you throw us into your T&I?"

"Well, you were attacked by both Suna and Oto shinobi during the battle. Especially her," the jonin said, pointing at Kurotsuchi. Ishina kept an emotionless façade, but she couldn’t say the same for her ‘students’. "If I have to take a guess, though, my Kage would like to know why you lied about being a genin team."

"What are you talking about?" Ishina asked, feigning ignorance. Before Kakashi could answer, though, the door opened to reveal a large man with white hair.


“Oh, Jiraiya-sama. Welcome. I was entertaining our guests,” Hatake greeted the newcomer. Ishina clenched her jaw at seeing both the Yellow Flash's mentor and pupil standing in front of her. She had to grasp her ramen bowl firmly to remember to not do anything stupid.

“Really? I didn’t know we were having the Tsuchikage’s granddaughter as a guest in the village,” the Sannin said with a probably fake smile. She heard Mizu nervously hold his breath. Even Hatake looked surprised when he heard that.

“No, you’re wrong,” Kurotsuchi tried to protest, her ramen all but forgotten. ”I’m not—”

“I run a Hidden Village’s spy and intelligence network, girl. Don’t insult me,” the older shinobi said, taking a seat beside them.

“You already knew…?” Ishina asked, unable to remain silent. The Sannin shook his head.

“I didn’t notice at first, because I was busy training an apprentice of mine,” Jiraiya said, seemingly not noticing or caring about Ishina’s shocked reaction. Another apprentice? The man that had created the Yellow Flash was training another apprentice? “But after I was told that during the battle at the stadium some enemies had targeted her specifically , well, I got curious.”

A moment of tense silence followed, none of the Iwa shinobi being interested in their food anymore.

“You don’t like ramen? That’s too bad, now it’s getting cold,” Kakashi said, looking her in the eye. Ishina glared at him as hard as she could, but sadly that wasn’t enough to make him drop dead on the ground.

“We already know who you are, Gareki-san and Kurotsuchi-chan,” the Toad Sage started. “So why don’t you boys introduce yourself as well?”

All her teammates looked at her, as if to ask what to do since she was the commanding officer. She thought over it for a long moment before nodding: their cover was blown anyway.


“My name is Toride Daiki,” ‘Mizu’ said begrudgingly.

“Kyoda Sota,” ‘Yano’ proclaimed defiantly.

Jiraiya looked skeptically at both of them for a short moment. “Never heard of you two. I guess you’re not that well known.” Both boys looked a bit miffed that a living legend of the shinobi world had not heard of them, for some reason. “I take it that Kurotsuchi-chan was chosen because there were no other recently-promoted chunin with enough skill for your assignment?”

“What do you want?” Ishina asked bitterly. There was obviously a reason why they were telling them this instead of throwing them into four isolation cells.

“I’m just having a polite conversation with some important guests,” Jiraiya said with a too-wide grin to be fully genuine. “Although I would like to know why you decided to take the chunin exams again , unless there was a valid reason to risk an international accident...?”

"You know why," Ishina said after pondering their options. If Iwa had heard about the Yellow Flash's sightings, so had Konoha. The two not-Iwa shinobi in the room had been involved in Namikaze Minato's life and if he was alive, they knew. Her answer was vague enough that it would allow her to gain time if they kept interrogating her.


She held the man’s gazes for a few seconds, feeling like his eyes were piercing her. “I see,” the Toad sage finally said and she couldn’t help but feel like he had not bought it in the least.


“What will happen to us, now?” Ishina asked, half-ready to jump over the table at this point. It would’ve been a suicidal move, especially with Kakashi of the Sharingan in the same room. Maybe she would be able to create an opening for her teammates, to give them a few seconds for—

“Nothing. Why would anything happen to you?” the Sannin asked, making a face like he didn’t know what she was talking about. “The chunin exams were interrupted by an invasion from a third party and you were caught in the middle of it. I'm sure that the Tsuchikage would be pleased to know that Konoha protected his candidates during such a troubling event, especially since one of them is his own granddaughter."

Ishina could only gape at the older man. She had expected some form of interrogation about their mission, or why they had went undercover. Something. Not being asked anything wasn’t what a ninja expected when imprisoned in a foreign village.

“I’m sorry, but… what ?” Kurotsuchi asked for all of them.

“If you would like, we could send a messenger hawk to Iwa, so that you can contact your Kage. Of course, we would also want to send a letter of our own to assure him that you not only helped fighting the invaders but that our jonin guaranteed your survival as well.”

“And tell him what?” Kurotsuchi asked bitterly. “That you intend to use me as a hostage?”

“No, to tell him to send someone to bring you home.”

Inoichi was starting to wonder if this had been a good idea.

He had expected an unusual experience since the mind he had entered was a summon’s and not a human’s, but he had not imagined it would be like this. The psyche was difficult to navigate, the scenery around him constantly shifting and twisting around him in a mess of labyrinthine halls, hallways, and the occasional odd structure that didn’t seem to follow traditional geometry. He couldn’t help but wonder if the daedra was able to unconsciously block him.

Or endanger him.

Inoichi found himself stopping every now and then to throw a glance over his shoulder. He could swear that he had seen something moving in the corner of his eyes, but everytime he looked back he saw just the twisting mindscape. The ninja kept saying to himself that he was just seeing things, but that didn’t stop the hair on his neck from standing.

Shaking his head, he took a step only for the stone floor to collapse all of sudden, turning into a cold sludge. The ceiling and walls crumbled to dust and Inoichi found himself staring at a cold, desolate landscape littered with ruins. It was colder than anything Inoichi ever felt, yet the sky itself was burning.

As the dust hit the sludge, creatures sprung up and began fighting all around him. Some were the not-quite human-looking dremora, like the summon he was mind-walking into, while others had significantly more monstrous appearances.

Small things that scampered around, overwhelming their opponents—or prey?—with sheer numbers. Mighty reptilian beasts that tore their enemies with claws and powerful jaws. Huge abominations that looked like an horrible fusion of human and spider blast whoever stood in front of them.

The battle wasn’t limited to the land, but raged in the sky as well. Winged creatures of different kinds fought among the blazing sky and a few of them fell into the sludgy ground every now and then.

He found himself charging into the fray, a wicked-looking sword in his gauntleted hand. The weapon clashed with another daedra’s weapon, and Inoichi yelled in a cruel-sounding language with a voice that wasn’t his, feeling only contempt and hate for this enemy. The worm snarled and replied by trying to cleave him. Inoichi stepped back, having no control of his body.

A memory. He had fallen into a memory without even noticing and was now witnessing the events from the daedra’s eyes, his conscience drowning into the dremora’s.

Definitely not a good idea.

He watched helplessly as his… no, the dremora’s body twisted to avoid the strike. He felt the gauntleted fingers gripping the sword’s hilt tighter before the whole arm went for a killing blow. The other dremora’s head was cut off from his neck, and tumbled down on the ground. As soon as it touched the foul-looking sludge that covered the surface of this strange land, it started to melt, as if it was made of a dark liquid. Everything else around Inoichi began to liquify as well, fighters and landscape alike.

A dark tide enveloped him, flushing him away. Inoichi found himself swimming against it, once again able to control his actions. He tried to focus, ignoring his instinct to breathe since he didn’t really need to here. Had the dremora’s mind thrown him out of a memory?

He felt himself being pulled away, like if he was trapped in a current or a whirlpool. No matter how hard he tried to swim against it, he ended being sucked into it. It was like falling and drowning at the same time.

The shinobi was half-expecting to crash on the bottom of some abyss when he suddenly found himself slamming against a chair, ending up in a sitting position. The cold numbness and the sensation of watery darkness on his body was gone.

It was a different memory, but he couldn’t tell if it had happened before or after the battle he had witnessed. He found himself sitting at what looked like a banquet table, chewing on something, once again unable to control his motions. Inoichi couldn’t place the taste but he could tell that the dremora was really enjoying it. He tried to take a look around and saw a plethora of other dremora partaking in the feast, drinking and eating and laughing.

He tried to get a good look at the room but he was forced to look at what the dremora was looking at, while one of the other patrons tried to involve him in some sort of conversation he couldn’t understand. Inoichi could tell that this individual bored him and he found what he said to be tedious and pointless. He was able to glance besides his seatmate, noticing how the vast room was decorated by a plethora of tapestries, most of them sporting a snake coiled around a fist.

He—no, not him dammit, the dremora—gulped and he felt the food slip down his throat and he found himself craving for more. He lazily turned around and grabbed something from a large bowl on the table.

Inoichi couldn’t help but stare. There was a bowl of human hearts in the middle of the freaking table, and he was holding one in his hand. He couldn’t do anything to stop the hand from getting closer to his mouth, a dawning horror taking hold of his mind.

He felt his… the dremora’s teeth bite into the organ’s flesh like if it was a ripe fruit. As expected, it was delicious—

Inoichi found himself wishing to be able to puke, as the dremora enjoyed his snack and made him savor every moment of it.

When the daedra stopped eating he was too relieved to immediately register the hushes falling over the feast. Daedra started turning in the same direction, whispering and getting up from their seats, only to fall to their knees. The dremora followed suit and Inoichi found himself staring at the floor as silence fell on the hall. The only sound belonged to some steps, getting closer and closer.


The dremora whose eyes he was looking through, having felt its horrid meal, felt… humble? No, not humble. It was more like being aware that he was in the presence of someone, or something, that stood at the top of the food chain. Something incredibly beyond his reach, to which he and his clan had sworn to serve.


As Inoichi was intrigued at the discovery that dremora had clans and loyalties, someone passed right in front of him. He saw two heavy boots, followed by something like a cape, or a robe, that slithered behind them in an almost serpentine way.

For a moment, the sounds of step grew more distant, echoing in the silent chamber. Then they stopped and, after a moment of hesitation, began getting closer again, until Inoichi saw the boots again stopping in front of him.

He heard a command addressed to the dremora, and he obeyed, looking up. The being in front of him that put awe and fear in the daedra around him looked like a caped warrior with grey skin, but for some reason Inoichi wondered if it was a male or a female.

The warrior was giving him— the dremora , this was just a memory—a scrutinizing gaze, co*cking his, or her, head.

The creature said something, but no answer came from the dremora. Inoichi kept staring at the being’s eyes, starting to feel uncomfortable under their gaze. The robed warrior repeated the question, sounding impatient, and the shinobi realized that it wasn’t addressing the dremora.

It was talking to him .

“Uncle, please slow down!” Naruto called, to little to no effect. He tagged along helplessly as his uncle stormed down the street. They got more than a few strange looks. "Where are you going?!"

"To talk with the Hokage," the older man snapped.

"The Old Man is not at the tower, he's at the hospital," Naruto reminded him, noticing the direction they were going. His uncle seemed to hesitate for a moment, then he took a look around and changed direction. Naruto followed suit, his heart pounding in his chest. His uncle was furious, he could tell. Was he going to leave or something?

“Wait, stop!” Naruto yelped as he grabbed his uncle’s old coat. Instead of stopping, though, the man just kept walking, dragging Naruto behind him. The genin decided to change his approach and rushed in front of the man, pushing against him in an effort to get him to stop. He managed to get some results only when he started to stick to the ground with his chakra. "I don't know why you're angry, but I'm sorry! Please stop!"

At that, his uncle finally stopped pushing, and looked down at him in confusion. “I am not angry at you , boy.”

Naruto looked up in surprise, and noticed how worried his uncle looked. "You're... you're not?"

"I am not."

"Why are you angry, then? I don't understand," he asked, and his uncle scowled again.

"I'm angry because they left you alone for no reason," the older man explained. Naruto opened his mouth, almost saying that there was a reason, but bit his lips before he said anything. What if his uncle got mad at that ? What if he reacted like the villagers had?

"So I am going to talk to the Hokage and ask why you were not..." Conrad continued, not noticing Naruto’s almost slip up, only to trail off as he searched for the right word.

"... adopted?" Naruto offered. He hoped his uncle would learn more words soon.

"Does it mean have someone take care of you?"

"Yes? Mostly?"


“Then yes, I want to ask him that,” Conrad nodded. “Now, stop blocking me.”

Before Naruto could decide if he wanted to comply or protest, though, someone coughed loudly to be noticed. Both blondes turned to see an ANBU standing beside them.

“What do you want?” his uncle asked with a deeper scowl.

“Forgive me for interrupting your bonding moment, Harissen-san, Uzumaki-san, but I just got a message on my radio, and—”

“Your what?”

“Radio, it’s a device that—nevermind that, listen. There’ve been some problems with the prisoner that you helped capture, Harissen-san. They’re asking for your help.”

Naruto remained silent as his uncle looked down to him. The boy had no idea what was going on, but he seemed really worried all of sudden. With a sigh, the man turned to the masked shinobi. “What kind of problems?”

The walls were unassuming and dull but kept giving Conrad a sense of déjà vù. It took him a moment or two to realize that he had been in this place roughly a month ago.

This was where he’d been taken when he and his students were captured. A pair of tense-looking shinobi directed him through a door, and brought him face-to-face with Inoichi.

The blond was sitting in a chair with a blanket draped over him, a steaming mug ignored in his hands. He wore a shell-shocked expression on his face like he’d just taken a walk through the Soul Cairn. Conrad looked at the other ninja present in the room, as if to ask an explanation, only to remember what Inoichi had done to him the last time he had been in this place.

"You... moron !" he hissed, walking close to the shaken man and grabbing him by the shoulders. "What did you do?!"

Inoichi blinked as if he was coming out of a trance and blandly stared at him.

“I… met one. He was in those memories. He talked to me. Conrad, he saw me and talked to me. He knew I was there. He knew.”

"You mean, the daedra knew--"

"No. It was... one of them. One of the others."

Inoichi's words hit their mark like a warhammer. Conred wanted to protest, to say that what Inoichi was trying to tell him was impossible, but he couldn't. If a daedric prince was involved, normality and plausibility had already been thrown out of the window. His chest felt tight, his throat dry and suffocating. How bad was it?

"I saw things…” Inoichi continued before the Nord could recover. “The sky was fire, and I drowned. And... the hearts. I ate one, and I—" The shinobi paused, taking a deep breath and trying to compose himself. Mumbling an apology, he sipped the tea before opening his eyes again. "What have I done?"

Conrad opened his mouth as if to speak, not really knowing what he wanted to say. Before he could make a sound, a hand landed on his shoulder, making him flinch. He had almost forgotten that other people were in the room as well.

"Harissen-san," a man with spiky hair that looked somehow familiar said. "May I speak to you?"

Conrad gave a troubled look at Inoichi before following the other man out of the room.

"Will he be alright?" the man asked after a few moments of silence.

"I don't know," Conrad answered, realizing why the man had looked familiar. He had met him along with Inoichi and a big fellow during the battle. "I don't even know why he would even try such a foolish thing."

The man’s eyes narrowed. “He did that to confirm your story.”

Conrad grimaced, realizing he had just put his foot in his mouth, boot and sock included.

The two of them stood in silence in the empty hallway before Inoichi's friend—whatever his name was—spoke again. "I need to know if we can contain this."

"I would have to speak with the daedra first. And they're not prone to collaborating with people."

"Can you persuade him?" the shinobi asked, his expression making it clear that he meant one way or another.

Conrad hummed, wondering about it. Forcing an unbound daedra to give some answers to a bunch of mortals he didn't like?

"I think I can try, but I'll need help," he finally said.

“Why am I here?!” Sven asked. Less than ten minutes ago he had been trying to avoid being interrogated by a twelve-year-old girl and then, after being pretty much kidnapped without any explanation, he was being pushed by his own teacher through a hallway full of cell doors.

“Because you caused this mess and you’re going to do your best to fix it,” master Conrad explained in their native tongue as their shinobi escort stopped in front of a massive metal door. Sven was confused until he realized who could be behind that slab of iron.

“Can’t we just banish him back to Oblivion? That would solve the problem, right?” he asked hopefully. That only gained him a serious look from the older Nord.

“If he was telling the truth when we captured him, then no daedra had shown up on this continent for a millennia. Given that the shinobi don’t seem to know about them, he probably told us the truth. Or part of it,” he explained as the ninja started to work on the door. “Whatever reason for why this happened, I would rather find a way to salvage it.”

“Why?” Sven asked, almost automatically.

Master Conrad gestured to the people beside them. "No matter how formidable their warriors are, they aren't equipped to deal with daedra. Tamriel has been used to that kind of trouble long before the Oblivion Crisis. Akavir, on the other hand, is utterly unprepared."

At that, Sven felt his throat become dry. "But then, if anything bad happens... it's because I—”

"Yes," the older wizard told him bluntly, not even sugar-coating it a little bit. Sven started feeling dizzy as he realized how badly he had screwed up. The Dovahkiin didn’t give him time to dwell on it, though. "Don’t think about it now. Remember, be careful about what you say in there, for daedra are known to twist a mortal’s words to get what they want. He wants to get free and be sent back to Oblivion, and we can’t allow that until we know more, understood?”

Gulping down whatever words he had wanted to say, Sven nodded, and his teacher Conrad nodded as well at the shinobi. With a loud creak, the metal door was slid open, and the two wizards walked inside.

The dremora looked unfazed by their presence, even after being encased from the neck down in a stone pillar covered in paper tags. Sven couldn’t say the same, feeling sweat starting to drench his skin at the sight of those unnatural eyes. The only reason he didn’t get rooted on the spot was the callous hand pushing him through the door.

He flinched as the door was slammed shut behind them, trapping him in the room. He was hit by a sense of vertigo as master Conrad let go of him and started to walk around the pillar, examining the paper filled with runes.

Was he panicking? That couldn’t be right, Beta was the one used to panicking. He was the one that liked books and cooking.


“Aah, the young mage that summoned me came to visit,” the dremora said, looking straight at him. “Dismiss me, and I promise you that you will not suff—”


There was a slapping sound and Sven felt his fear... not disappear, but mostly replaced by confusion, which seemed to peek from the daedra's face as well. He must have been seeing things. Obviously Master Conrad had not just slapped a dremora's head as if it was a petulant child.

Said dremora seemed to be thinking the same thing before his puzzled expression quickly morphed into anger. “You—”

“Sven here is not going to do such a thing, unless I tell him to,” the Nord said as he ignored the promise of pain and death and more pain and walked back to the front of the pillar, facing the dremora again. “And I won’t tell him until I’m satisfied. You see, I have questions—”

“I don’t have to answer to you, mortal ,” the dremora said as he tried to look back at Master Conrad, albeit it was rendered a tad difficult by the pillar. “I am not bound to your service, nor to your apprentice’s.”

“You will answer our questions, though,” the man said, in the coldest way than Sven had ever heard him. “Because if you don’t… I’ll rip your soul from your body with my bare hands.”


Sven could’ve sworn that the dremora had stiffened for just a second, but he seemed to regain his composure as he spoke smugly. “You wouldn't dare... you don't want my master as an enemy."

"As if!” Master Conrad snorted, but there was no mirth behind it. “I doubt that whichever bastard you serve would care for losing one among numberless servants.”

"You dare?! ” the dremora bellowed, causing Sven to take a step back. Mostly in surprise for the sudden shout. Yes. That was the reason. “I serve Boethiah, the Dark Warrior, Deceiver of Nations, Queen—”

"You think I care?” the Nord told the daedra, shrugging off the nasty glare he was receiving.

“Err, master?” Sven said nervously. “You might not care about being the enemy of a Prince, but I’m not—”

He found himself silenced by a raised finger, as if to warn him to shut it. He wondered again why in the name of the Eight he had been forced to come if his opinion didn’t matter.

"I WILL FEAST UPON YOUR HEARTS AND INNARDS AS—"

"I am the damn Dragonborn , you would never get the chance," Master Conrad said, his words stopping the daedra's angry tirade almost instantly. "You will either accept to be bound to my apprentice, or spend the rest of eternity in a soul gem."

Sven glanced at his teacher, surprised to hear those words. He had never heard Master Conrad talk about Enchanting. Besides, wouldn’t they need a black soul gem? The dremora remained silent, looking at the older wizard as if to peer into his soul.

"I could throw it in a well. Or use it to enchant something," the man kept going. "Not a weapon or an armor, mind you. Probably something stupid, like a kettle that warms your water faster.”

The dremora looked genuinely panicked at that.

"Actually, that doesn't sound that stupid—" Sven said, only to stop as two pairs of eyes turned to glare at him simultaneously. After a few seconds, the dremora turned back to the Nord.

“If I accept…”

“Then you won’t be doomed for eternity to the Soul Cairn, and I won’t commit the greatest waste of an enchanting that the world has ever seen,” Master Conrad said.


“Very well... I accept your terms,” the daedra said with a resigned tone after a long silence.

“Sven, come here,” he was told. The Imperial boy obeyed, still looking warily at the dremora for a moment, before wondering what was he supposed to do. The scroll he had learned the spell hadn’t exactly explained what came next.

“What should I do? Is there a ritual, a ceremonial phrase, or…?”

“Just ask him if he submits.”

Sven nodded and turned to the dremora, who was studying him intently. “Do you submit to my will?”

“Yes, Master ,” the dremora said with gritted teeth. “I submit.”

Sven waited for a few seconds, wondering if he was supposed to feel something. A tug, some connection between him and the daedra, anything. Could it really be that simple?

“Now that the formalities are done, tell us why daedra haven’t shown up in Akavir for a millennia,” Master Conrad ordered, to which the dremora promptly… didn’t answer, opting for a smug, silent smile instead.


Sven started wondering what could’ve gone wrong, if the dremora was actually bound, only to be snapped out of it by his mentor coughing. Was he getting sick or—Oh.


“Tell us why the daedra didn’t appear in Akavir for a millennia,” Sven ordered with the most commanding voice he could muster.


“And the Princes, too,” Conrad added as an afterthought.

“And the Princes as well,” Sven repeated dutifully. At least the day was going to be interesting.

Notes:

I posted this months ago on other sites but I forgot to post it here... whoops.

Chapter 18: Of Gods, Men and Booze

Chapter Text


“Master Conrad did what?!” Beta gasped, looking almost scandalized.

“He slapped the dremora over the head,” Sven repeated as he rinsed off another dish. “I saw it and I still can’t believe it.”

“Ta’Sava wonders… does that mean that Sven now has a dremora servant?” the young Khajiit asked as he dried a plate of his own.

“Technically… yes,” Sven slowly admitted.

“Then why isn’t the dremora washing the dishes?” Ta’Sava asked as he placed the now dried dish on a nearby stack. It had been a large dinner with themselves, Master Conrad, Naruto, Inoichi-san and his family as well as a couple of Inoichi’s friends that had been very worried. Once the dinner had finished, they had been put in charge of washing the dishes as a way to thank the Yamanaka for their hospitality and, as Master Conrad had put it, as collective punishment for dabbling in magic they should not even have known existed yet.

No magic allowed, obviously. At least being alone in the kitchen allowed them to speak in their native language.

“Because it’s still locked in a cell,” Sven replied before smirking. “He protested, but Master Conrad told him that our deal didn’t say anything about letting him out of the cell.”

“So… what did he say?” Beta asked.

“I… I’m not sure I can talk about it. The ninja had seemed very worried after we told them—”


“Sven, the ninja have left, that Ino girl is pestering Naruto with questions, Inoichi-san is trying to talk with his wife who was angry at him for some reason—”


“Angry?” Ta’Sava asked with a raised eyebrow.

“Trust me, she was. My point is, we’re alone in the kitchen and we’re not talking in Akaviri, nobody will know what we’re saying.”

“Fine, I guess Master Conrad will eventually tell you guys anyway,” Sven sighed. “How to explain this… do you remember reading about Mannimarco and Vanus Galerion?”

“Sure we do,” Beta nodded. “Mannimarco is only the most notorious necromancer that ever lived and Galerion founded the Mages Guild. Of course we know who you're talking about!”

“Right. So, turns out that something around a thousand years ago, there was a mage of similar skill and power here in Akavir, if not stronger.”


“Stronger?” Ta’Sava asked incredulously.

“This wizard, he… he concealed all of Akavir from the eyes of the daedric princes. Since then, they haven’t been able to directly influence the continent.”

For a moment his fellow students didn’t say anything, seemingly stunned at the concept of someone being powerful enough to even contemplate doing such a thing. Then, Beta finally asked what they were all wondering.

“How?”

Conrad stared at the single moon in the sky as the crickets sang their song in the night.

He took a large sip of his drink. It wasn’t mead, and his soul cried out at the taste of the rice wine, but it would just have to do for now. There seemed to be nothing else on this Divines-forsaken continent.

A cloud passed over the moon, briefly obsuring the light. Conrad wondered at it. The dremora had thankfully bought his bluff and revealed what he had known, which hadn’t been much. But it had shed new light on the strangeness of this land.

Such a feat of magic was way beyond a mortal’s reach. To create a celestial body and then use it as the focal point of your magic to wholly veil an entire realm from the sight of all the Princes… it was enough to make his head spin, and not because of the swill he was drinking.

He wondered if it was also related to the lack, or at least reduced number of monsters that roamed around.

“Just who in Oblivion were you?” he asked to nobody. He was a bit grateful that whoever the mage of old had been, he wasn’t around anymore. Otherwise he would probably rule Akavir as a god-king, making Vivec look like a child playing with blocks in comparison. Tamriel would’ve never stood a chance against such power.

In the end, Conrad just shrugged. He didn’t care much about the life of wizards of old, only about how to fix the current problem. He took an instinctive swig of his bottle only to find that it was empty.

Deciding he was not even close to drunk enough, he left the empty bottle on the porch and stumbled back into the house. There was bound to be some more of this sake stuff in there.


He heard voices as he walked towards the living room, and for a moment he wondered if Inoichi’s daughter was still tormenting Naruto with questions, but instead he came upon the scene of Inoichi, who still looked worse to wear, being quietly hissed at by his wife. What was her name, again?

The man was practically stumbling back as he tried to ward off her anger but as soon as they noticed him they separated and mumbled some weak excuse to cover up their fight, but Conrad just strolled to the cabinet where their host stored what passed for liquor around here.

“Harissen-san, I hope you’ll find your accommodations to your liking, it was the best we could do on such a short notice,” the woman said politely, looking pointedly at her husband at the last part.

Conrad simply nodded, taking a sniff from a bottle.

“Now if you excuse me, I think I better send the children to bed,” she said before turning to leave. Conrad guessed that Naruto would be spending the night here.

“Sure, sure. Inoichi, when you’re feeling better there are things we should talk about,” Conrad said, looking at the mind-walker.

That immediately stopped the woman on the door’s frame. “Better? What does he mean with ‘when you feel better’?” she asked, turning towards her husband. Conrad winced. “Is this related to why you came home looking like something the cat dragged in?”

Inoichi briefly shot Conrad a glare, but the Nord just shrugged. He wasn’t the one who’d delved into a daedra’s mind, and he wasn’t the one who’d apparently thought hiding it from his wife was a good idea.

“I’m…” Inoichi hesitated, and his wife’s lips grew distinctly pursed as she grew more and more displeased. “I can’t tell you, it’s classified.”

The woman’s eyes only narrowed more. “I see.” Then she turned towards Conrad with an unchanged expression. “Would you please excuse us, Harissen-san?”

Conrad decided that discretion was the better part of valour, especially when a woman scorned was involved. He quickly grabbed a couple of bottles per hand and went back to the garden.


He had barely drank half of one when Inoichi showed up with a similar look to that of a whipped dog.


“I’m going to be sleeping on the couch tonight. Thank you for that,” the shinobi said as he sat beside him.

Conrad snorted. That was one of the reasons he had never married. That, and the fact that the last woman he had considered marrying had stabbed him in his left lung.

“How are you feeling?” he asked, taking another sip to bury the unpleasant memory.

“I’m fine, the potion you gave me helped calm my nerves,” Inoichi answered.

“That’s not what I mean,” Conrad said. Of course the potion had helped; he had made it. He still couldn’t believe he had had to insist so much before Shikaku had allowed him to, though.

“Look, I know it was a stupid decision, but it had had to be done!” the mind-walker tried to justify.

“People don’t just… go inside a dremora’s mind and leave unhurt,” he countered. Not that there were a lot of documented cases like this one, but Inoichi would be incredibly lucky if there were no side-effects. Especially if a Prince was involved.

“How bad do you think it is?” Inoichi asked after a moment of silence. Conrad hummed a little at that.

“Nightmares, for sure. You may also feel like you’re going through it again every now and then.”

“Flashbacks, great. I figured as much. Anything else?”

“Well… if you ever feel like you want to eat a heart or hear voices in your head, I want you to tell someone immediately.”

“Heh,” Inoichi snorted before looking at him with a frown. “... that was a joke, right?”

Conrad’s only answer was finishing what was left in the bottle. “Then, there’s the matter of Boethiah…”

"That is the... Prince, right?"

"He... she... whatever, reigns over killing, combat, lying... stabbing people in the back, breaking their trust. Makes people go against their leaders," Conrad tried to explain, stopping to find the right words.

"What do you mean, she reigns?"

"I mean that she has power over that domain and everything in it. Princes can influence people with whispers, dreams, promises of power... Boethiah is not even the worst one. If they find a way back here, people will have dreams. Visions. They'll hear things... and cults will start to appear."

Inoichi was silent for a long while, turning very pale. "And I'm one of the worst people to have under her influence."

Conrad nodded bluntly, softening the truth wouldn't help. "You met the Prince through a memory, that's... unusual. Maybe you will be fine, but maybe... As I said, tell someone if you start hearing voices."

Inoichi turned to Conrad. "Is there any way to resist their influence...? If they find a way here?"

"Well..." Conrad frowned in thought. "Back at home, people usually ask counsel to the local priest, or to a group that follows Stendarr... I'm not sure how to translate their name though, but—"

"... are you seriously suggesting religion?" Inoichi asked in disbelief.

"Religion is not just words and hollow priests asking for tribute. The gods are real, Inoichi, I should know. So are Daedric Princes. You met one, is it so hard to believe in the opposite?"

"It's just... shinobi aren't exactly spiritual types, given the life we chose."

"Neither I am. I'm not exactly very faithful."

"Wait, you argue that gods are real, but you don't pray to them?"

Conrad gave an irreverent shrug. "Never did me any good. But who knows. It may help."

"And to which god should I pray?"

"I don't know your gods, but you could always try Stendarr. He doesn't like daedra. I could even carve you a necklace with his icon if you want," Conrad proposed. For all he knew, the third moon was keeping the Aedra away from Akavir as well, but trying wouldn’t harm Inoichi.

Inoichi breathed out a relieved sigh. "Thank you… It’s happened to you too, right? Catching a Daedric Prince’s interest?"

He just shrugged and took a sip from his new bottle before answering. "Tamriel has been dealing with them for a long, long time. I’ve had to deal with my own share."

"Conrad," Inoichi said, calling him by his name for the first time. The Nord stopped mid-sip. "Assuming they’re able to come here because of my meeting with Boethiah, is there any way we can stop them from breaking through?"

Conrad slowly put the bottle down and sighed before looking the ninja in the eyes. "... I don't know. Maybe that wizard of old knew, but he's not around to tell us about it."

Inoichi adopted a thoughtful look. "You know, I think that there are some monks that preach the teachings of a so-called Sage, one who is believed to have created the moon and performed miracles... I'm pretty sure they don't say anything about the daedra or the Princes, but we could be talking about the same person."

"Are there any monks in Konoha?" Conrad asked without much hope since he had yet to see any so far. Not that he had been able to fully explore the city yet.

"Unfortunately no, I don't think that religion is very widespread in Fire Country. More than that, this is a shinobi village, they aren't exactly eager to start preaching to the masses here. But there's someone in the village who would know."

"Who?" Conrad perked up. A lead was something he could work with.

"Jiraiya of the Sannin. I could ask if he can speak with you, but..."

"What? What's wrong with meeting me?" He should have known. The shinobi probably didn't want him to be seen around the village after the last few close calls.

"He was Minato's teacher," Inoichi said. That wasn't what Conrad had expected. Doubt crept into his mind.

"He was close to Minato?" he asked, his voice level. He hadn’t had the chance to learn much about this brother, not nearly as much as he would've liked anyway.

"Oh, yes. Jounin sensei tend to have a special relationship with their genin. They train them, teach them, protect them and even later in life they still remain close to their students."

"So, this Jiraya—"

"Jiraiya, Conrad," the Yamanaka corrected.

"Right, right. So, this Jiraiya... was like a father to Minato?" he asked slowly.

"Very likely Minato grew up as an orphan, so—"

"Then why isn’t he taking care of Naruto?" the Nord asked, narrowing his eyes.

"I... I don't—"

"Why haven’t any of my brother's friends taken care of Naruto?" Conrad demanded, genuine anger leaking into his voice.

"We didn't know that Naruto was his son, I swear!"

"... whatever. I'll talk to Jiraiya. And the Hokage," he said, deflating a bit as he reigned himself in. The old monkey had to have always known the truth, and if this Jiraiya had been so close to Minato, there was no way he hadn't known. Conrad would be expressing his displeasure shortly.

"Yeah, probably a good idea. I think Hokage-sama should hear about the Princes too," Inoichi nodded, seeminging to not realize Conrad’s plans. Maybe it was from the shock of being an idiot that jumped into daedric minds?

"Didn't your friend tell him already?"

"Oh, I'm sure Shikaku left a good report. But you should probably give one in person. Your language skills are getting better, after all."

The two of them stared at the moon for a few minutes, the only sounds being the crickets and Conrad drinking a sip every now and then. He wondered how the Akaviri would react when he told them that Nirn had two other moons already.

“How do you deal with it?” Inoichi asked, still staring at the moon.

“What do you mean?”

“How do you just… live, knowing that there are these Princes, these… entities that can influence our world without us having a say in it?” the ninja asked. The Nord was aware that while a single moon may have been very odd to him and his students, the revelation of its purpose had probably put into question everything Inoichi had known about the world.

After a few seconds of thinking, Conrad sheepishly raised his bottle.

"... I'll go get some more booze."

“Uncle?” someone called in the language he had been more or less forced to learn. He answered with an undignified grunt, trying to fall back to sleep.

“Come on Uncle, wake up.” They kept talking, even shaking him, which made him roll over and burrow under the sheet. Why were they calling him uncle any—Oh, right.

Conrad tried to open his eyes and immediately regret it. He couldn’t help but moan in pain as he wondered why the light was so bright.

“What’s wrong with him? Is he sick?” Naruto asked someone Conrad couldn’t see. He was too busy covering his eyes with his arm.

“Here, give him this,” a voice he didn’t know replied.

Conrad didn't get the chance to take a look at the newcomer before somebody thrust a glass against his lips. He almost choked and didn't have any choice but to swallow the liquid inside. Water with... something in it? He opened his eyes, fearing that someone had poisoned him but relaxed when he saw Naruto holding the empty glass.

"Are you alright, Uncle?" the boy asked with a worried face.

"He will be," the voice from before reassured. Conrad turned slightly to see a huge red-clad man with an impressive white mane for hair towering above him. "The headache should disappear in a few minutes."

He sat up on the mat he had been given for the night. "Hello, boy... Why did you wake me?"

"It's morning, you missed breakfast," Naruto explained.

"I did?" he groggily asked, realizing that he was feeling a little hungry. He turned to the tall man, studying him for a few seconds as he did the same to Conrad. "Jiraiya of the Sannin?"

"In the flesh," the man said with a tinge of a smile.

“Minato’s teacher, yes?” Conrad queried, hauling himself to his feet and shaking his head to clear it.

Naruto turned towards the older man at that. “What?! You taught my dad?! I thought you were just a pervert that knew a few good jutsu!”

Jiraya scowled. “Brat, of course you wouldn’t appreciate my genius!”

“Like when I caught you peeping at the baths?” Naruto asked with an unimpressed expression. Conrad wondered if he had understood that right.

“I was conducting important research and you know it!” Jiraiya harrumphed in response before continuing. “But yes, I was the one who taught Minato everything he knew.”

“That’s so cool… wait, does that mean that you knew Kakashi-sensei when he was my dad’s student?”

“You know about that, too?” the tall shinobi wondered. “I wish he had told me, I would have brought pictures.”

“Is there something to eat in the house?” Conrad interrupted the two of them as he stretched a bit.

“Sorry uncle, we already finished before Ero-Sennin arrived.”


“Who?” he asked in confusion.

“Him,” Naruto said, pointing at Jiraiya.

“I told you to stop calling me that,” the man grumbled. Conrad decided to ask what that meant later. “If you want, I could accompany you somewhere you’ll be able to eat, Harissen-san. As well as speak without raising too many questions.”

Conrad knew an invitation when he saw one. “Let me get ready first,“ he said as he massaged his temples. He had asked to talk with the man, sure, but not when he was nursing a hangover. At least the headache was indeed passing, he idly wondered what kind of potion that had been, but Akaviri didn’t seem to have the same alchemy he knew.

“Can I come, too?” Naruto asked eagerly.


“Aren’t you going to be late for your team meeting, kid?” Jiraiya asked with a smirk.

Naruto’s eyes widened and he practically shot out of the room, calling to his uncle about seeing him later for dinner.

“So, about that food…” Conrad said after an awkward moment of silence between the two men.

"Don't worry, Harrisen-san, I know just the place,” Jiraiya said.

Meat. Glorious, glorious, juicy meat with an odd but tasty bitter-sweet sauce and some spices that he wasn’t able to identify all over it. There was not a single grain of rice in sight, thank Talos and Akatosh for that.

Not even in the form of booze. He didn’t know the name for it yet, but he had been introduced to a sweet wine made with plums.

Mead was still better, of course.

He had been allowed only one glass though, even if his hangover was pretty much gone. How could these Akaviri be so surprised by alchemy if they were able to produce something that could kill a hangover better than any traditional remedy? It baffled him.

Maybe Jiraiya just wanted to be sure he was sober enough to talk with him after all the hassle he went through to bring him somewhere very few citizens passed by. Even if Conrad had pointed out that he had his disguise. The older man had just glanced at the cloak and funny hat he had borrowed from Inoichi and asked him to follow him.

“So,” Conrad started, gulping down a bite. “I was told you know about the wizard.”

“The wizard?” Jiraiya asked with a perplexed expression.


“Yes, the wizard,” Conrad repeated, putting down his chopsticks. Damn things. He missed forks. “The one that made the moon?”

“Oh, you mean the Sage.”

“Yes. What do you know about him?”

“Not much, I’m afraid,” Jiraiya shrugged. “There are various legends, like the one about him creating the moon, and some documents that prove he existed. What we know for sure is that he preached his word throughout the lands.”

“His word?” Conrad asked, this time it was his turn to be confused.

“Encouraging people to come together, struggling for peace, spirituality, that sort of thing. His followers did the same, obviously. Sadly, in the last few centuries, the Elemental Nations have been torn by many wars, so—”

“What about the moon? How did he create it?” he interrupted. While philosophy was a fascinating topic, he had more pressing matters to think of.

If Jiraiya was upset about being cut off, he didn’t show it. Maybe he was trying to hide how weird it was to speak with someone that looked like Minato. “Nobody really knows.”

“What do you mean? Didn’t he leave... something? An explanation?” he questioned. What he wouldn’t give for being able to say grimoire or spellbook in Akaviri.

“No, the whole story is part of a series of apocryphal legends—”

“Apowhat?”

“His stories were written by other people,” Jiraiya clarified. “No one knows how he did it.”

Conrad stared at Jiraiya for a few seconds, trying to process what he had just been told.

This ancient all-powerful wizard had sent a metaphysical middle finger to all the Daedric Princes at once, concealing a whole continent from their eyes and influence and who knows what else, then left no explanation about how he had accomplished it whatsoever in case something went wrong?

What an asshole.

Conrad let his shoulders sag as he groaned in disappointment. He tried to make a grab for the wine bottle, but Jiraiya snatched it away and then served himself a glass.

"You look upset," the shinobi observed before sipping the wine. Jerk.

"My brother is dead, my nephew was left on his own his whole life, I’ve been kept here against my will for months, and I don't know how to keep you bastards safe!” Conrad started to say slowly, gaining momentum and feeling more pissed off with every single word he said. “I have every right to look upset!"

Jiraiya looked a bit stunned for a moment, and the Nord took advantage of it. A small application of telekinesis and the bottle soared towards his hand. He quickly downed as much as he could before slamming the now significantly less full bottle onto the table.

A moment of silence followed as Jiraiya regarded him with a completely blank expression waiting for him to continue. “I understand that being a sensei is very important, almost like being part of the family… and for an orphan like Minato that would’ve been very important,” he muttered, holding the bottle tight. “So, where in the name of the gods and f*ck were you after he died?”


Jiraiya held his gaze in silence for a few moments before deeply sighing and looking down on the table. “I was wondering when you would bring that up,” he said. Conrad couldn’t tell whether the other man was ashamed or pained from seeing Minato’s face accusing him him. “Inoichi had warned me that you were a very blunt person.”

“Answer the question.”

"If Sarutobi-sensei were here—that's the Hokage, in case you don’t recall—"

"I know who the Hokage is,” Conrad told him, narrowing his eyes. “Quit stalling."

"If he were here, he would give you many reasons,” Jiraiya continued. “That I’d had duties to attend to. That I’d had to leave the village to handle our affairs across the land. That my presence would've revealed Naruto's parentage... and who knows what else he would come up with to justify it. But the truth, Harissen-san... the truth is that I am a coward."

Conrad felt his eyebrows shoot up in confusion. His grip on the wine lessened. “What?”

“Minato… your brother, wasn’t just my student, but my apprentice as well. I had spent almost all of his life training him, seeing him surpass me and become a man I would’ve been proud to call…” Jiraiya’s words died in his mouth, but he quickly got himself together. “I just knew that he had a brilliant future ahead of him. The village, his family… when he and his wife died, it was devastating.”

The Nord waited a few seconds before gesturing for the man to continue.

“Not just to me or the people close to them, though. Konoha had lost many people that night. We were wounded. We were weak, our enemies were about to smell blood and try to take advantage of it. Sarutobi-sensei would be right to say that I’d had duties, but the truth is that I hid in them to forget my pain.”


“Did it work?”


“No.”


“That doesn’t explain why Naruto was left alone.”

Jiraiya stared in his glass for a moment before speaking. “I lied to myself… he was a newborn, surely I could spy on our enemies and defend our home while he was so little, right? I was always terrible with babies. When my teammates and I found your brother… The point is, I thought I could make it up to him later in his life.”


“But that didn’t happen.”


“No, it didn’t… two or three years old is still pretty young, after all. Or at least I’d thought so, and there was so much going on… we’d barely avoided a war back then,” Jiraiya said sternly. “After that… after that it just got easier to find excuses to stay away.”

“And now…”


“Now, I’m back. Because Naruto needed my help. For the exams and… for a few other things. Although, I have to confess that, had it not been for you, I would never have told him—”


“Are you about to say that you would have waited until he was older to tell him the truth about his parents?”

“... yes,” Jiraiya admitted, having the decency to look ashamed. “If it helps, I’m sorry.”

They sat in silence for a few minutes until Conrad sat up, the wine bottle all but forgotten.

"I'm not the one you should be making these excuses to," he said as he started walking away. "If you want to make up to the boy, fine. But don't you dare let him down again, or I will take him away from here."

Then he left, leaving Jiraiya to face the ghost of another blond-haired and blue-eyed man with a mask of disappointment.

The Nord wandered for a while through Konoha's back streets, fuming. The more he thought about what Jiraiya had believed could pass as valid excuses, the angrier he got.

Conrad wasn't sure what was worse. Jiraiya, for leaving the child of the man he’d dared to consider his son in all but name alone for nearly his whole life, the Hokage, for doing nothing about it, or Naruto's teacher, Kaka-whatever, for being pretty much the same. Then there was the fact that the entire village seemed to not like Naruto for some reason. He would've asked about it but he had decided that he’d had to leave before doing something he would regret.

And to let Jiraiya stew in his guilt. He deserved it.

He walked to calm down. At least once, he vented his pent-up rage and frustration on some of the metal containers the Akaviri used to store trash. Then yelled at whoever had protested from the windows around him. Just a little bit. Enough so that he wouldn't kick someone in the balls as soon as he saw them.

Then he found himself wondering where he could go, since he wasn't really used to the layout of the city yet. Which way was Inoichi's house, anyway? He could've asked one of the masked guards that were surely following him, but he decided to just pick a street and search for the first landmark instead. Maybe Minato's mountain-sized face would help him in that regard.

He ignored the occasional passersby as he wondered what he should do next. He felt like he didn't have the full picture, but at the same time he didn't like what he was already seeing. Maybe taking Naruto away with him wasn’t such a bad idea, but he wasn't sure if he could pull it off without risking the magelings' lives. Besides, kidnapping the boy wouldn't leave a good impression. Probably.

As soon as he sighted Minato's sissy chin, along with those of three other people he didn't care for, he stopped to figure out which way he was supposed to go.

"Harissen-san?" a voice asked from behind him. Conrad turned, almost ready to explain to the masked guards that the trash had provoked him by simply existing, just to stop when he realized that it wasn't one of those mask-wearing ninja.

It was an old man wearing a simple robe. Half of his face was covered in bandages and he was missing an arm. He also seemed to have a lame leg, given the way he was putting most of his weight on his cane as he walked closer.

"My name is Shimura Danzo. I believe we should talk."

Chapter 19: Family Matters and Cultural Differences

Chapter Text

Conrad had tried to get an answer from this old man that had shown up out of nowhere, to ask where he was taking him. The man stayed silent, and Conrad was left in the dark until he saw the first stone marker. They were in a graveyard. It was shiny and well-maintained, with polished, square pillars instead of tombstones and neatly-clipped grass, but still a graveyard.

The graveyard was large, which was expected for city like Konoha. Danzo guided him through an odd-looking wooden gate-like structure to a secluded part without sparing a word.

There were fewer graves, spread further apart and more elaborate. Some had multiple columns grouped closely together, along with ornamental things Conrad couldn’t really understand the meaning for.

Danzo led him past several sets before stopping in front of a monument with only two columns. Both were blank aside from the row of Akaviri lettering that Conrad still struggled with. He didn’t need to read them. He knew whose grave this was.

Already knowing that his brother was dead should've made staring at it easier. It didn't.

"The Uzumaki woman's ashes are buried besides his," Danzo said, gesturing to the gravestone on the right. This one had a small spiral engraved intoit for some reason. "A breach of protocol, given the delicate nature of their relationship, but one Sarutobi permitted."

"The nature of their relationship?" Conrad repeated, confused. Weren't they married?

"That is something only the Hokage can tell you," Danzo answered in a reprimanding tone, as if he hadn't brought the topic up. Conrad frowned, but did add it to the growing list of things he should talk to the old Kage about.

"Why did you take me here?" he asked, looking back at the name on the grave marker. The name his brother was given by these people.

"It was brought to my attention that nobody had shown you your brother's final resting place. I understand it was because of the exams and the invasion, but I decided to correct this mistake," Danzo explained. Conrad couldn't help but feel like something in his voice wasn't right, but couldn't really place it.


"I hope that the fact that your brother was cremated doesn't disturb you, Harissen-san," the old man kept talking. "It is customary for shinobi, since our bodies may reveal our village's secrets even in death."

Conrad turned to look into the man's single eye, trying to see if he was pulling his leg. As far as he could tell, he was being completely serious. He had figured that ninja were obsessively paranoid, but this was a new peak.

"Civilians, on the other hand, either entomb or cremate their dead based on their family's traditions or beliefs," Danzo continued. “And I believe that other nations have their own funeral rites… what are your people’s customs, Harissen-san?”

The question surprised the Nord, but he answered nonetheless. “Most Nords are put in the Hall of the Dead, or in a graveyard if their city is too small to have one. Sometimes, though, they ask for their bodies to be burned.” It was rare, but it happened. Old Kodiak Whitemane’s funeral had been the only one he had taken part in.

"I suppose that in death our people are similar," Danzo seemed to wonder as he looked at Minato's grave. "Although, I wonder how different they are in life."

"What do you mean?" Conrad asked, maybe a bit too sharply. He wasn't in the mood to philosophise and debate cultural differences while visiting his brother's grave.

"I cannot say that I have ever heard of a man without shinobi training being able to perform feats like the ones you displayed a few days ago during the invasion."

"What do you want, exactly?" Conrad asked with a frustrated tone. "Why do you care?"

"I am one of the Hokage's advisors. Occasionally, anyway. I'm mostly retired from service. Still, when I heard about how you fought the invaders, it required my attention," Danzo told him. "Are warriors like you common in your homeland?"

Conrad paused for a moment at the question. Was this old geezer worried that he was a spy for another invasion or something?

"No," he said, shaking his head. The idea of an army of magic-using, Thu'um-wielding, mead-drinking Nords was amusing. Sadly magic was a cultural taboo amongst his people and there were no Tongues left, as far as he knew. The Greybeards had been wary of teaching the Way of the Voice to anyone else after Ulfric Stormcloak's tantrum.

Maybe it was for the best, the last time that such an army had existed, back in the First Era, it had been a bloodbath.

If Danzo wasn't satisfied by the short answer, he didn't show it. "No?" he repeated. "I suppose you just happened to learn your abilities, then?"

"I had many teachers, I learned something from all of them," Conrad said curtly. From them, and a long time spent on the roads of Tamriel.

"I see. You must be an exceptional individual among your people," the old man said. It didn't sound like praise. "I imagine you have a lot of responsibilities back at home, just like your brother had here during his life."

At that, Conrad felt like he wanted to laugh, but he was in front of a tomb. So he just snorted. Loudly.

"Did I say something amusing?" Danzo asked with a small frown.

"No," Conrad answered. "But I don't think I'm like my brother at all."

"How so?"

"You mentioned responsibilities. From what I was told so far, he had many," Conrad said with a sad smile. "I don't like having them. I got on a ship and came here hoping to avoid them for some time."

Danzo seemed to weigh his words for a moment, but Conrad couldn't tell how he had judged his words. "Doesn't your leader disapprove?"

Conrad resisted the urge to snort again. "Not really," he said. He had refused to lead the Companions and the College multiple times, they were in better hands than his anyway. Delphine was still leading the reborn Blades even at her age and Conrad minded his own business while she did that. The only one that had any authority over him was Jarl Balgruuf, but the two of them had made a deal. If the Jarl wanted a more present Thane, he could nominate one, but Conrad would keep Breezehome. And kick whoever tried to while he was away right in the balls. Which had actually happened once.

"And why is that?" Danzo asked. He sounded almost confused, and Conrad had the idea that he wasn't used to that.

"I'm an..." Conrad told him before pausing to find a word for 'adventurer' in Akaviri, and found that he knew none.

So he tried to explain the concept of adventurers the best he could. It took some time because he didn't know all the words he would've liked, but he was pretty sure that in the end he was able to convey the idea of people roaming the lands, either alone or in groups, exploring forgotten places or deciding to enter filthy holes in the ground and kill monsters or bandits for a usually measy reward. And that they would probably loot everything that wasn't nailed on the walls if they had the chance.

Danzo was mostly silent for most of his explanation, but voiced some questions every now and then which Conrad tried to answer the best he could.

"These individuals... who trains them?" the old man asked.

"It depends. Some get training from groups or skilled people. Others just learn it on their travels."

"Who regulates them? Who gives them these missions?"

"Either the Jarl... well, the Jarl's mens most of the time, or people in need of their skills. Or they just look for fortune on their own."

"... And who are they loyal to?" Danzo asked in a forcefully neutral tone.

"To whoever they give their loyalty, I suppose?" Conrad wondered out loud. “But most are just in it for themselves."

Danzo remained silent for a while after that, as he seemed to study Conrad with his only eye. “So, you go wherever you want to and either accept missions or do whatever you please, while avoiding any responsibility?” he asked finally.

“That would be correct, yes,” Conrad said, his attention back on his brother’s grave. Maybe now this old man would let him figure how he wanted to mourn Minato.

“But you do have responsibilities, Harissen-san. Even here,” Danzo continued. “Didn’t you bring your students with you?”

At the mention of the magelings, Conrad turned back to Danzo. “I didn’t bring them, they hid on the ship we came in on,” he said, feeling the need to correct the old man. Sure, he felt begrudgingly responsible for their continued survival but why would the old man bring them up out of the blue?

“I see. They do whatever they want, like their teacher,” Danzo said with his usual tone, but Conrad wondered if the half-bandaged man was subtly mocking him somehow.

“They think with their heads, yes,” he couldn’t help but answer. He didn’t want to have the last word, not at all. He was better than that. The Nord couldn’t help but wonder what Danzo was trying to get at, though.

“And if that wasn’t enough, you found something else to be responsible for,” Danzo continued, seemingly unperturbed by Conrad’s comment.

The Nord blinked for a second before realizing what, or actually, who the man meant. “You mean Naruto,” he frowned. Did this man just refer to his nephew as if the boy was a thing?

“Indeed,” Danzo slightly nodded. “Although I can’t help but wonder what your intentions are, Harissen-san.”

"What kind of question is that?" Conrad asked, eyes narrowing.

"I would assume that sooner or later you will desire to go back to your homeland. Maybe bringing the genin with you."

"Of course, he's my—"

"And then what?” Danzo immediately asked, interrupting him. “Let him live in your homeland?"

"I see how he is treated, old man,” Conrad told him with a hard stare. “If you think I'm going to leave him here—"

"I take it that Yamanaka-san never mentioned to you what happens to shinobi that decide to leave the village and never return?"

"... No, he didn't,” Conrad admitted, having been caught by surprise by the sudden shift in topic.

"They're declared missing-nin. Deserters. Traitors,” Danzo said, adding the last two words as he saw Conrad’s puzzled expression. “They're tracked and hunted down by specially trained ninja, known as hunter-nin, who will either bring them to the village or dispose of them."

"... Dispose?" Conrad asked. He didn’t like the sound of that word.

"Execute. Kill. Slay,” Danzo said slowly, almost if he were talking to a child. “Many are executed after being brought back to the village, as a traitor deserves."

Conrad remained silent for a long moment, staring at the almost expressionless man. “You're serious."

“A shinobi’s loyalty to the village must be absolute,” Danzo said, his voice filled with the unshakable conviction of a man who could order death as easily as breathing. The dogmatic tone used was enough to stop Conrad from correcting the man about the fact that Konoha was a city, not a village. “Unlike you and your people, ninja aren’t free to do whatever they want. Our lives are meant for a greater purpose than exploring and treasure-hunting. Even the civilians, who enjoy more freedom than us, aren’t able to do so.”

"That sounds awful," Conrad said, trying to imagine what it would mean living under such an alien mentality. A lot of things he had heard in the past few days suddenly took on a much more sinister meaning. "How can you expect people to agree to that?"

"There are larger stakes than personal glory in a hidden village, Harissen-san. And I'm afraid an outsider like you could disrupt that, especially one so close to one of our genin."

"'Close'? He's family, Danzo. And I don't like your tone."

"And I do not care for yours, Harissen-san," the old man said, pointing his cane at Conrad to make a point. "Besides, didn't you just admit you dislike responsibilities?"

"Family is different," Conrad declared. Family was important for every Nord. How dare this old man twist his own words against him?

“Yes, family is surely different,” Danzo acknowledged. “At least, for someone who is not a ninja. But nonetheless, the village always comes first. It must, or the petty rivalries of dozens of clans would weaken us, and our enemies are always watching, always looking for weakness.”

That sounded far too heavy-handed for Conrad’s liking, almost reminiscent of the Thalmor’s methods. Was moving away even possible? Were the citizens really just glorified prisoners who would be killed if they tried to leave?

"As... fascinating as this talk has been, I would like some time to properly mourn my brother. Alone.”

"Of course, Harrissen-san," Danzo said, once again polite after giving him a measuring look. "We will simply need to continue our discussion later."

“I can’t wait,” Conrad said through gritted teeth. The old man hobbled away, heavily favoring his cane. Conrad stared after him with narrow eyes, for the first time realizing just how ruthless these people here were.

Once he was alone, at least as far as he could tell, he knelt by the grave. Minato had grown up here? Led these people?

Why hadn’t Inoichi, the Hokage, or Jiraiya said anything about these barbaric customs? Was it because they were afraid of how he would react, or because they thought that it was perfectly normal? How things should be?

He tried to ease his mind by putting some offerings on the grave, but quickly realized he had nothing on him. So he just stared at the grave in silence for a few minutes.

"Sorry, it's not like I planned to come by," he apologized. He wasn't sure why he even bothered. After all, Minato's soul was trapped in the Soul Cairn. "If we ever see each other again, we'll have words, you know."

And punches, he mentally added. There would be punches. He had punched a ghost before, he could do it again.

"Come on, Naruto. Tell me," Ino asked for the third time.

"No. You know I can't, Ino," Naruto answered once again in a bored tone as he tried to follow the spar between Shikamaru and Sasuke, but it had gotten boring after the Nara had caught Sasuke with his shadow. Funny, sure, but boring.

"The guy lives at my house, I'll find out sooner or later. I just want to know how he’s related to you."

"He's my uncle," Naruto said as if it were common knowledge, which it technically was for all present. The details, on the other hand, were something he was pretty sure he couldn't tell anyone outside of his team. For now.

"Yes, but how?! Look, tell me and I'll buy you ramen for a whole week," Ino said solemnly. Everyone paused to look at the two blondes. They all knew how much ramen Naruto could consume in a meal, nevermind in seven days. For a genin, it was a pricey bribe and it was obvious that Naruto was tempted.

"Ino, he said no," Sakura said before Naruto could answer.

"Uh, yeah, right. I did," the young Uzumaki conceded, clearly reluctant. He had to stand by his decision and be strong. Even in front of the promise of ramen.

After that, the six genin continued their practice, albeit half-heartedly because of the lack of adult supervision. Both Kakashi and Asuma had been called away for a mission and had left saying something about every jonin having to fill the gaps in the roster left by the invasion.

Naruto and Sasuke ended up refusing to rotate in the sparring matches, which slowly forced the others to stand by and watch the two teammates try to punch the crap out of each other until Shikamaru had to shadow-bind the two of them to a stop.

“We should go back,” the Nara said. “It’s lunch time anyway.”

Everyone agreed that it was time to put something in their stomach, especially Chouji, so the six genin started walking back to the village and ended up gravitating towards Ino’s house, much to her annoyance.

And, judging by the looks she gave them, Ino’s mother wasn’t really amused by that either, but that was probably related to the fact that she was already housing a stranger in her house, along with his team of not-genin.

She gave them all snacks as they waited for lunch, though. Maybe she didn’t like having so many strangers in the house, but she wouldn’t let them starve. Speaking of which…

“Where are the cat-man and the other two?” Naruto asked.

"In the kitchen," Ino's mom replied, actually smiling a bit. "They asked if they could cook something for us as thanks for letting them stay here.”

“What are they preparing?” Ino asked.

“Something called… ‘soufflé’, I believe,” she said. ”Why don’t you help me set the table, Ino?”

Ino huffed a bit, but followed her and started working together on the task at hand.

Naruto lost interest in the small talk between his other fellow genin and ended up watching as mother and daughter worked around the dining room. He had always known that most of his classmates had a family at home, but seeing such a completely familial scene in person really made him realize it. He couldn't help but wonder what it would be like to live together with a family. It wasn't just a silly fantasy now. He, Naruto, had a family and he was still trying to wrap his head around it.

His uncle didn't seem like the domestic type, though. Naruto couldn't imagine him neatly preparing the table for a meal.

“Naruto, did you hear me?” someone asked.

“Uh-huh,” he mumbled, not really listening and still lost in thought. Of course his uncle couldn’t set a table, he didn’t even know how to use chopsticks to eat ramen. Naruto was snapped back to reality when a hand waved in front of his eyes. Startled, he turned around to see Sakura looking at him. “Uh, sorry. Did you ask me something, Sakura-chan?” he asked sheepishly.

“You were spacing out.”

“Yeah… sorry. I was just thinking, that’s all.”

“About what?”

“Family,” he admitted.

There was a pause as everyone seemed surprised by his answer. Sasuke even went noticeably still, for some reason.


“Do you want to talk about it?” Sakura asked hesitantly.

“I don’t know,” he said, biting his lip. “I mean, what are people even supposed to do with their uncles, anyway?”

“You mean like, what do people do with their families?"

"Uh, yeah! Yeah that."

“Uhh…” Ino said as she kept working on the table. “What about gardening? My parents and I always garden together.”

Naruto wrinkled his nose. “I don’t think Uncle Conrad is much of a gardener...”

Ino harrumphed and went back to setting the table with her mother as Shikamaru took over. “You could always play Shogi with him. It’s a great way to figure out how he thinks.”

“But that just sounds boring,” Naruto complained.

“Then you’re not going to like cloud-watching either.”

“I want to do something fun with Uncle Conrad, not lie still for hours.”

“Suit yourself,” Shikamaru shrugged, not bothered in the slightest by his suggestions being turned down.

“You should take him out for barbeque!” Chouji cheered. “No activity is greater for family bonding!”

“Maybe,” Naruto allowed after a moment’s thought. “I’m not sure if he’s ever had barbeque, though.”

“Never had barbeque?!” Chouji demanded, scandalized. “Who’s never had barbeque?!”

“I don’t know, but… he didn’t even know what ramen was. Who knows what they eat in his country?”

“I think you’re overthinking this,” Sakura cut in, turning to her teammate. “All you need to do is spend time with him and get to know him. You’ve known your uncle for what, a few days now?”

Naruto nodded, and she continued, “Right. That’s not enough. If you want to bond with him you just need to spend time with him. It doesn’t really matter what you do.”

Naruto looked dubious. “So we could do anything?”

Sakura shrugged. “Yeah, that’s what I said. Try to think of something you could do to break the ice and get to know each other.”

Naruto thought about it for a moment, trying to remember everything he knew about his uncle. He was, well, his uncle. He came from a very far away place, spoke a different language, kept saying that things back home were different, and he was some sort of fighter but not a shinobi because they didn’t have those in his country. The last one just sounded crazy.

Even if he wasn’t a ninja he must have gotten some kind of training… not-ninja did that, right? He must have. Naruto was pretty sure that you needed it in order to learn how to throw jutsu at your enemies. Even if you didn’t call them jutsu.

Studying, learning, sparring… just like at the Academy. Naruto would bet that his uncle had done all of that, too. Maybe…

“I got it!” he exclaimed. “I’ll ask uncle to spar with me!”

“What? Naruto, that’s not what I meant—”

“We’ll spend time together and get to know each other!” he continued enthusiastically.

“Are you even listening to me?” Sakura asked, mildly annoyed. Before Naruto could answer or continue expanding upon his plans for a fight with his uncle, Sasuke suddenly got up and walked towards the door.

“Hey, where are you going?” Naruto asked. “Lunch is almost ready.”

“I have stuff to do,” the Uchiha replied, closing the door after him.

"What's with him?" Naruto looked after his teammate, puzzled.

"Let him go," Shikamaru said, an odd look on his face.

"But what—"

"Just let it go," Sakura said, looking at the door longingly as if she was barely holding herself back from running after their teammate as well.


That was when Ino came back carrying the last things for the table and noticed the somber mood. “Where’s Sasuke-kun?”

“He left,” Naruto said.

“He left? Oh, I bet it’s your fault, Forehead!”

“It’s not!” Sakura protested. “He—”

“Girls, don’t fight,” Ino’s mom called from the other room. “After all these years, it’s so nice seeing you be friends again.”

At that, both kunoichi looked at each other, before deciding to sit on the opposite sides of the room and grumble about having to spend time in each other’s company.

They didn’t deny being friends again, though.


Conrad had taken his sweet time before going back to Inoichi’s house. Not because he particularly liked standing in front of a couple of graves, mostly because he wanted time to think.

The talk with Danzo had been… worrying. For all he knew the old, bandaged man was the local crazy guy, but what was he supposed to do? Ask a random shinobi on the street if they actually had such a rigid and dogmatic loyalty that nobody had mentioned before?

He snorted to himself. Yeah, that would go over wonderfully.

Finally opening the door, he was greeted by the sight of an abandoned table and Inoichi’s daughter collecting empty dishes. What was her name, again?

“You missed lunch,” she said, her surprise turning into annoyance.

So that was why he was feeling a bit peevish. He had not realized he had been outside for so long. As Conrad hung the hat and old coat he had borrowed, the little girl spoke again. “I’ll go call Naruto, you kept him waiting too long as it is.”

Well then. Someone had a sharp tongue. Conrad doubted that she got it from her father, though.

Almost immediately after the girl had closed the sliding door to the kitchen, it slammed open to reveal a breathless Inoichi. “Finally!” he exclaimed as he shot towards Conrad. "Where were you?!"

“Outside?” Conrad asked rhetorically, trying to move towards the kitchen to get something to eat. Maybe there were leftovers. Before he could move, though, Inoichi seized him by the shoulders so suddenly that Conrad didn’t even have the time to step away.

"You vanished for two hours!” the Yamanaka nearly shouted. “Not even your ANBU guards knew where you were!"

"I… what?" Conrad stammered. They didn’t know where he had been?

“Do you have any idea how serious this is, Conrad?” Inoichi asked solemnly, visibly calming himself down. “We lost track of you in our own village. Please, tell me where you were."

Conrad didn’t know how that was possible, but he had not exactly checked to see if the guards were still following him. He’d almost gotten so used to their constant shadowing that he didn’t even try to locate them with magic anymore.

“To the graveyard,” he said as he looked Inoichi right in the eyes.

“The graveyard? Why would you—Oh,” Inoichi said in realization.

“Yes. ‘Oh’,” Conrad grunted, shooing the man’s hands away.

“I… I’m sorry. I really am, for not showing you, but between your presence being a secret and the invasion—”

“Whatever. I know now.”

Inoichi seemed to deflate at that, with guilt or frustration or some combination of both Conrad didn't know. At this moment he didn't care too much, either. “Could you tell me who showed you the grave, though? Was it Jiraiya-sama?”

“No, I left Jiraiya this morning. Some old guy called Danzo showed up,” Conrad told him, and Inoichi went noticeably paler at that.


“Sandaime-sama’s… advisor?” he asked.


“Cripple old guy with only one eye and a cane,” Conrad described, not mentioning the impressions Danzo had left him. “Why? Is there a problem?”


Inoichi stared at him in silence for a few seconds before getting, if it was possible, even more serious than usual. “I have to go. Do not lose your ANBU guard again.”

After that, he hastily moved to get a pair of those unholy union between sandal and boots that shinobi seemed to prefer for some reason and walked out of the door without even looking at Conrad, who was left to wonder what that had been about.

Was he not supposed to meet this Danzo, for some reason? That didn’t make sense, it had been the loyal-beyond-stupidity old guy that had approached him… and had gotten him away from his guards, somehow.

Had he just stumbled into… ninja politics? Because half of the reason he had embarked on this crazy journey was that he wanted a respite from all the intrigue and crap.

The loud sound of racing footsteps announced the arrival of his nephew, so Conrad wasn’t completely caught by surprise when Naruto showed up. He wasn’t ready for his enthusiasm though.

“There you are! You missed lunch!”

“Yes, I was told that already,” Conrad sighed.

“Beta saved you a piece of… uh… soup-flea?”

Conrad blinked for a moment. “You mean soufflé?”

“Yeah, that!” Naruto nodded. “It was very good.”

“Better eat it before Ta’Sava steals it, then,” he chuckled, walking towards the dinner table. Before Conrad had time to sit down, Naruto had run over the kitchen and came back with a serving of the dessert and placed it in front of his uncle. Conrad was about to eat a spoonful, when he paused and glanced at the boy questioningly. “Do you want some?”

“Uh?”

“The soufflé. Do you want half?” Conrad asked again.

“But you didn’t have lunch.”

“I’m not that hungry,” he told him. The boy needed to eat a bit more in his opinion. Conrad had not been that short when he was his age.

Naruto seemed surprised by the offer and some other emotions Conrad couldn’t place briefly flashed in the boy’s eyes. He pushed the dish towards the boy, and that seemed to snap him out of his reverie. “Thanks! But, uh, after eating it, do you want to spar with me?”

“Sure, sure…” Conrad answered absentmindedly. He doubted Naruto knew about his parents’ graves, having being unaware of their identities for his whole life, and so Conrad was trying to imagine a way to bring it up. Possibly one that didn’t involve too many tears. “Wait, what does ‘spar’ mean?”

“A fight?” Conrad asked incredulously. “You want to fight me?”

"Well, yeah. That's what sparring is. Fighting for, you know... practice."

"I know what a practice fight is," Conrad made a curt hand gesture. "Why do you want to... 'spar' against me?"

“I just… thought you may like it,” Naruto admitted, eyes downcast.

Conrad glanced at the empty grass field. The masked guards posted around Inoichi’s house had all agreed, almost eagerly, to accompany them to the middle of nowhere without being seen. They must have been on edge because of Conrad’s earlier ‘disappearance’.

He didn't want to fight the boy, even if it was for practice. He wasn't a fencing instructor or much of an instructor at all. He fought by hacking people or blowing them up with spells, for the gods' sake! What if he hurt him?! Children were fragile. They shouldn't ask a battlemage to fight with them.

"I don't have my armor," he said, trying to find a way out of this.

“Armor?”

“Yes. I’m more used to fighting with it.”

"But you didn't have it during the invasion," the boy countered.

Conrad grunted, making a note to tell Inoichi he wanted his stuff back. Especially his axe. "Nords practice fighting with their weapons," he tried again. The boy didn't seem to have any on him.

"I have my kunai," Naruto told him, unsheathing one of those puny kitchen knives shinobi used from the holster on his leg. Right. His twelve years old nephew was armed and acted like it was normal. Fantastic. "I have some shuriken, too. We can share if you want."

"No," Conrad refused.

"Can't you create a weapon with magic, then?"

Summoning a daedric weapon able to cut through steel, skin, muscle, and bone with ease for a practice fight. What could go wrong? "No," he repeated, crossing his arms.

"Then... we could just use taijutsu?" Naruto asked, pouting.

"What's that?" Conrad asked back.

"Fists. And kicks."

The Nord thought about it for a moment. He could do fists and kicks. Be the target of them, that is. The boy had a pretty good punch, he had experienced it when they had met, but he was still twelve years old. Conrad was pretty sure he could handle some roughhousing with a child who’s voice had not even changed yet, and there was no risk of the boy getting hurt.

"Alright, fine," he conceded, dropping his bag by the side of the field as the boy loudly expressed his enthusiasm. "Do your best."

“My best…?" Naruto hesitated, stopping his celebration. "Are you sure?”

“Yes, I’m sure,” Conrad said, raising his fists in a defensive position. “Do not worry, I can take it.”

“Okay then…” Naruto said, moving his hands together to form some sort of cross-like sign. “Kage Bunshin no Jutsu!”

A cloud of smoke appeared out of nowhere and once it dispersed, Conrad could see only his nephew. A horde of nephews. Everywhere. All around him, covering the whole field.

"What the—"

"CHARGE!" one Naruto yelled, sprinting towards him. All the others followed suit. Conrad managed to side-step the first one that lunged at him, then someone slammed into his back, causing him to lose his balance.

Before he knew it, he was tackled by half-a-dozen kids and fell to the ground under their combined weight. Then they started hitting him as he was on the ground, which he kind of approved of but didn’t really appreciate.

Thankfully they stopped once they realized that he wasn't doing much aside from covering his face.

“Uncle… ? Are you okay?” a Naruto asked. Conrad spat a few grass leaves and slowly got back on his feet as the mob gave him some space.

“What is… this?” Conrad asked, looking at the multitude of blond and orange-wearing kids.

“It’s a secret technique I learned! I can create clones of myself with my chakra. It’s awesome!”

“Huh,” Conrad said, mostly just to say something. They weren’t illusions, that was for sure. The pain in his back could testify about it. And there were so many… “How long does it work?”

“You mean, how long I can keep them around? Uh… I never tried, I usually just create them for fights. And chores.”

“What happens when they… get hurt?” he asked to his nephew. Wait, was that his nephew or one of the copies? He was feeling a bit lost in the sea of orange.

“Oh, they just disappear, Look,” Naruto said, forming a fist and rearing back to punch the closest one in the gut. The clone made a pained expression that lasted for less than a second before exploding in a puff of smoke. “See?”

Conrad tried to not show how disturbing it was to see Naruto, even if it was just a magical copy, cease to exist in such a manner. “How long did it take you to learn this?”

“Just an hour or two,” one of the kids surrounding Conrad said, puffing his chest in pride. “It was easy.”

Easy, Conrad contemplated as he looked at the multitude of clones. The boy had just created an instant army of copies of himself, and he called it easy. Thankfully it was some sort of secret magic, at least according to the boy. If it had been common, killing those shinobi during the invasion could’ve been… problematic.

How did it exactly work? Was the boy controlling them like they were conjured creatures or were they an independent entity? They all seemed to share his personality and not just his looks… maybe he could casts a few spells to see if they were actually ‘alive’, with a soul, or—

“Can we keep going, Uncle?” a Naruto close by, presumably the real one, asked.

Right. He could always go all academical on the strange ninja magic at a later date. “You want to continue?”

“Of course, we barely started!”

“Fine.”

“This time, give it your best shot, Uncle!"

Conrad chuckled. Was that confidence, or co*ckiness? He didn't want to hurt the boy, so his 'best' was not an option. But if his nephew wanted a fight, he could provide one. "Ready?" he asked. Naruto and the clones gave a determined nod and dropped into a fighting stance. Conrad didn't let them have the initiative this time.

"Fus Ro Dah!" Conrad shouted, hurling the Unrelenting Force in a direction that he assumed didn’t contain his nephew. Dozens of clones went send flying before disappearing in a blast of smoke. The fight was on.

Conrad didn't know how long the spar had lasted, but he did know one thing: he wasn't supposed to feel this old after a brawl with a brat with no facial hair. Yet the boy barely looked winded. Conrad wondered what the boy could be able to do in a few years. Or if he learned how to swing a couple of axes.

He had to step up his game if he wanted to do this again. Maybe design some new spells that didn’t blow the target to smithereens.

"That was cheating," Naruto grumbled. Uncle and nephew had been sitting on the edge of the field since Conrad had called for a pause.

"What?" he asked.

"That yelling thing you did."

"How?" Conrad couldn't help but ask.

"It was supposed to be a taijutsu spar, but you kept blasting the place with that yelling jutsu of yours!"

"It was hundreds against one. That's cheating, too."

“... it’s not.”

“It is, too,” Conrad countered as he rummaged through his bag. “And you had fun, I can tell.”

“Well… yeah that was pretty awesome,” the boy admitted. “Can we do it again?”

“Another time,” he said, handing Naruto a vial of healing potion. “Here, drink this.”


“What? Why?”


“Drink it. It will heal you.”

“But I wasn’t hurt that bad,” Naruto protested. And true, he had been barely touched by Conrad’s Thu’um or his fists. That didn’t mean that Conrad had not felt his heart stop when the boy had jumped in front of him just as he was about to unleash a shout.

“Drink. It,” he ordered. The boy finally obeyed.

“It tastes terrible,” Naruto protested, handing the empty vial back to Conrad.

“I know. Sven is terrible at making them.”

“Can you teach me how to make them?”

“I think I can, if you want. It requires patience,” Conrad added. The boy didn’t seem to be patient enough to work in an alchemic lab though, but he could always try.

“What about the yelling jutsu?”

“You mean the Thu’um?” Conrad asked, slightly surprised.

“Thu'um... “ Naruto repeated, weighting the word. “Can I learn that?”

“No.”

“What? Why not?” Naruto asked, clearly disappointed. “I swear, I won’t tell anyone. It could be like a family technique, and—”

“Naruto,” Conrad said again, trying to put some warmth into his tone. “I can’t teach you how to use the Thu’um because I don’t know how.”

“That doesn’t make sense, Uncle. How did you learn it?”


“It takes years, even decades for someone to learn how to use it. But... I’m a special case.”

“A special case?” Naruto repeated.

“I have a power. Something that no one else has.”

Conrad waited for Naruto to press him with more questions, but instead the boy grew quiet, his hand drifting to his stomach.

The Nord hoped that potion wasn’t giving him any stomach troubles. Getting up, Conrad slung his bag back on before making a gesture to the guards he knew were still hidden around.

After looking thoughtful for a few moments, Naruto got up as well and walked towards a small rock beside the clearing and observed it with a resolved expression.

“FUZ DO RA!” the boy shouted hard enough to make his face turn red. Opening his eyes, Naruto noticed that nothing had happened and let out one of the most frustrated groaning sound Conrad had ever heard in his life.

The dragonborn couldn't help himself as he barked out a guffaw. Soon he was laughing too hard to remain standing and had to take a seat. The loudest most genuine laugh he'd had in years. As if that wasn’t enough, Naruto gave him the tiniest, most adorable scowl ever, which just made him laugh even more.

“Are you making fun of me?”

“No, no… sorry boy,” Conrad said, finally calming down. “I just didn’t expect that, whatever that was.”

“I just thought that I would try…”

"A good attempt," Conrad answered, his smile more warm than amused now. They sat in silence for a moment, until the Nord made a decision. “Come on, there’s something I need to show you.”

Naruto didn’t pay much attention as he followed his Uncle. He had spent some time wondering what he wanted to show him, and asked about it only to be met with short answers about being patient.


So his mind had started to wonder about other things. He had followed Sakura’s advice and had a hearty spar with family, and of course they were going to spend more time together from now on. He wondered how long it would take for his Uncle to start living at his place. He couldn’t stay at Ino’s house forever, right?

Maybe once the Old Man Hokage got out of the hospital he could smooth things over. If Naruto’s apartment was too small, his uncle could take missions, or get a job… civilians had jobs, not missions. They could pool the money together and rent or buy a new place.

It would be difficult to find a place big enough for his Uncle’s students too… maybe they could find jobs as well? That or live at his old place or something. Maybe he was being selfish, but Naruto would like to live with his Uncle on their own for a bit. Having someone who would say “welcome home” to him would be great, but more than anything he was just grateful he wasn’t alone anymore.

Then he noticed they’d stopped in their walk, right in front of the village’s graveyard. Naruto didn’t come here often. Actually, he didn’t come here at all. Graveyards were spooky.

“What’re we doing here?” he asked, looking up at his uncle. He saw the man hesitate for a moment, only to sigh and gesture for Naruto to follow him.

Uncle Conrad lead him deeper and deeper into the graveyard, pausing a few of times as if he were trying to remember the right way to go, and Naruto couldn’t help but feel an odd sense of foreboding.

“Here,” his said after coming to a stop, pointing at two graves. Naruto’s eyes widened as he read the names on them, his eyes darting between the stones.

“Are… are they…”

“Yes,” Uncle Conrad admitted. “I found out this morning.”

Something in Naruto crumpled, then. Maybe it was because of all the revelations and surprises he’d had to deal in the last few weeks, or maybe it was because he was right in front of an actual, tangible evidence of his parents’ existence and passing. His eyes burned, and he furiously swiped at them.

“Naruto…” Uncle Conrad said as he put a hand on his shoulder. “These are your parents. It’s okay to cry.”

Naruto hiccupped as he gave up on the attempt to hold back. Tears started spilling over his cheeks and he almost fell to his knees.

His uncle's hand was heavy on his shoulder, but somehow it felt comforting. They stood like that for a long time, until the sun went down and the lights of Konoha flickered to life one by one.

Chapter 20: Of Armor and Rubber Balls

Notes:

Many, many thanks to my beta-readers PyrothTenka, fishebake, GwendolynStacy, To Mockingbird and Duesal Bladesinger.

Chapter Text

“I believe you wished to discuss certain matters,” Sarutobi said, breaking the silence between them.

Conrad had donned his terrible but effective disguise as soon as Inoichi had told him that the old Hokage wanted to talk to him. Which Conrad had been asking to do for the last few days. Repeatedly.

He had spent his walk towards the tower remembering everything that had happened since he had been ambushed in the middle of a forest by the masked ninja. Each memory annoyed or irritated him and he felt like he was psyching himself up for a fight. Verbal or otherwise.

By the time he had entered Sarutobi's office, he had been ready to yell his heart out at the man or set something on fire. The piles of paper on the desk had been tempting. He had been stopped in his tracks by the sight of the old man reading a scroll, sitting at an angle in an odd chair with wheels that clearly showed the bandaged stump of where one of his legs had been.

The old jerk had done that on purpose, Conrad knew. How dare he make Conrad feel sorry for him?

"Well? Feel free to be blunt, Harissen-san," the Hokage asked in a tone that reminded Conrad of his teachers back at the College.

He lowered the half-raised accusing finger and took a moment to collect his thoughts. There were many things he wanted to talk about, but first he wanted to address some of the issues that concerned him the most. He had uncovered quite a few in the last days. "You make children fight. Like warriors," he said slowly, deciding to go straight to one of the first things he disliked about Konoha.

"Ah," Sarutobi said, closing the scroll and putting it on the desk. "I had guessed you would have an issue with that."

"You guessed?"

Sarutobi nodded sharply, then gestured for Conrad to take a seat. “Let us be very clear, Harissen-san... You are an outsider. Our ways are not your ways, and you do not get to spend a scant few months in my village and judge us.”

“City,” Conrad said just for the sake of correcting the man. “I can judge the facts. Sending children to fight and die is一”

“Necessary,” Sarutobi finished for him. “Not because I enjoy it, let me be clear about that… How old are cities in your homeland, Harissen-san?”

Conrad stared at the man for a moment and wondered if the sudden change of topic meant that he had gone senile on him. “How is that important?”



“Humor me,” the Hokage simply said. Conrad frowned, quickly did the math, realized that he didn’t know how to say numbers above one-hundred in Akavirian and suppressed the tinge of annoyance he felt. He was pretty sure that nobody here could count in Nedic, though.



“The youngest cities… a few hundred. The oldest, more,” he said with a shrug. Technically the oldest city in Skyrim had been built before mankind had shown up on its shores, but Conrad supposed that the Hokage hadn’t meant the dead, ruined ones full of giant spiders and mechanical monstrosities.

“Really, now?” Sarutobi said, and for a moment there was something different in the tone of his voice. “There are places that old in the Elemental Nations, but not many… Konoha itself is not even one hundred years old.”



Conrad frowned at that. “Young age for a big city.”



“Village,” the Hokage stubbornly and incorrectly corrected him. “But yes. Shinobi have existed for a long time before the founding of the Hidden Villages. Back then, children were sent to fight at an even younger age. Most of them never lived to see their tenth birthday.”

“Why?” he asked. That just seemed like… a waste. Not just of lives, but of potential warriors for years to come.



“Ninja clans warring with each other and the desperate need to bring more soldiers to the field as soon as possible. Doing otherwise would’ve meant an entire clan being wiped out by enemy clans… We’re not here to give you a history lesson, though.”

“Fair,” Conrad nodded. He could always ask Inoichi later.

“Today, genin are placed into teams with a jonin, a more experienced ninja, that acts as their teacher and protector,” Sarutobi explained, stressing out the last word. “They’re not thrown into battle as quickly as possible, they’re assigned to missions they can handle. There used to be exceptions, mind you, but… that stopped a few years ago.”

“Are trying to say… that things got better?” he asked slowly. That wasn’t exactly how Conrad would’ve put it.



“In a way. As a society, we shinobi resist the idea of change, but the current age was ushered by the greatest change in centuries. Change happens all the same, but not as much as it could or should have.”

“What do you mean by that?”

“Have you ever made a mistake, Harissen-san?” Sarutobi asked him, taking a long drag from his pipe. “A mistake that you regret years, or even decades, later?"

Oh, this was just playing dirty, and the old geezer knew it. “Everyone makes mistakes. Such is life.”

Sarutobi nodded at that, apparently satisfied with his answer. "I admit that I could have done better. I’ve made some good choices, but I’ve also made mistakes. Those with consequences that are still felt today. Especially regarding your real concern一Naruto.”

Conrad nodded, remaining silent. Sarutobi may have been changing the topic, but if the Nord was being honest with himself, he cared about this one more.



“I understand that you’re upset, but as I’ve told you before, it was for his safety,” the Hokage tried to reassure him. “Minato’s enemies一”



“Minato? Don’t bring Minato into this! He was dead. This one is on you.”

“That may be,” Sarutobi continued without so much as a flinch, “but it doesn’t change that we were stretched thin when Minato died. Far too thin. A war had just ended, and I dare say we couldn’t have stopped another one from happening if it turned out that the son of the Yellow Flash existed. Had I not taken measures to keep his identity a secret, he probably wouldn’t have survived to meet you.”

“You’re hiding behind excuses,” Conrad growled. “No matter how you say it, in the end you abandoned Naruto to live alone as a child.”

“Yes,” Sarutobi admitted, a shadow of sadness briefly showing on his face. “You may not believe me, but I care deeply for Naruto. He is like a grandson to me, and I’ve tried to be as involved as my position allowed me. But I did what I could. He was fed. He was given a roof over his head. He was kept safe. Nobody ever tried to hurt him… But not even a Kage can order people to love someone."

“Love?! The whole street was glaring at him. And don’t you tell me that it’s because he likes pranks,” he pointed out, remembering Naruto’s pathetically obvious lie.



“To be honest, he did prank a lot of people around Konoha. For the attention, you see,” Sarutobi’s half-smiled as he said that. “As for the real reason…”



“Yes?” Conrad asked eagerly, leaning towards the shinobi.



“I think it’s best for Naruto to tell you that, when he’s ready,” the Hokage said, as though it were a great revelation. Conrad fell back on his chair, inwardly cursing cryptic, teasing old men everywhere. “I was told that he has informed his teammates already, so I think you should just be patient.”



“Really, now?” he wondered. Kakashi probably wouldn’t tell him anything, but if he asked the girl with pink hair or the kid with the blue shirt, maybe…

“Please don’t harass my genin to tell you S-Rank secrets. Just be patient and Naruto may tell you on his own,” Sarutobi repeated, apparently having read Conrad’s face like an open book. “He seems to care about you a lot.”


“He does?” Conrad couldn’t help but ask.



“Yes. May I ask what do you plan to do, Harissen-san? In the long-run?”

Conrad reflected for a moment. It wasn’t like he’d planned on finding a long-lost relative, but that didn’t mean there weren’t things to take care of back home. “I’ll need to return to Tamriel sooner or later,” he admits. “I have… business there.”



“I see.”



“I would like to take Naruto with me,” he added.



Sarutobi met Conrad’s eyes calmly. “If you think I would allow one of my genin to leave the village to unknown lands and possibly never return, then you’re mistaken.”



Conrad sighed, knowing he should’ve seen it coming. “He’s family,” he argued with a frown.



“He’s a shinobi.” Sarutobi pieced Conrad with a firm gaze, his mouth set stubbornly. It was clear that the two men disagreed on what came first.



“Does he have to be?” Conrad asked in a softer tone.



“It’s what he wants… and the village needs him.”



“For that reason you won’t tell me,” he pointed out.


“Yes.”


“You’re the Hokage. Can’t you change that?”



“I won’t be Hokage for long,” Sarutobi told him, glancing at his stump. “I’m old, way past retirement. I did retire before. Konoha can’t afford to have an old cripple as its leader. I’m already looking for a successor to take my place.”

"Letting the younger people deal with your mess, I see," Conrad said dryly.

"Isn't that what old people are supposed to do?" the Hokage asked with some mirth, which made Conrad snort. Some truths, apparently, were universal.

"Very well, then... I'll wait,” he said. The implied ‘for now’ was obvious to both of them. “How long do you think it will take?"

"Depending on how quickly we can find one of the possible candidates, I would say a few months."

"Months?" Conrad asked, eyes widening. He hadn’t expected to wait for so long. He’d probably have to find another ship for the trip back home.

"If you're worried about losing your ship back home, don't be,” Sarutobi reassured him. Was he being that obvious? “From what I've read, the people you arrived with have established quite a… business, so to speak. They've not left the shores of the Elemental Nations, and they’ve been quite well off."

"How so?"

"It was brought to my attention that there's been an influx of goods that didn't pass through the usual markets in some coastal regions," the Hokage said as the only explanation. Conrad blinked for a moment, smirking when it clicked. Smugglers will be smugglers no matter where they were, it seemed. "Speaking of goods, I had a request for you, Harissen-san.”

"Really? After saying ‘no’ to everything I asked?" Conrad asked, raising an eyebrow.

"Let’s say it’s a business proposal,” Sarutobi amended. “It’s about your potions. They were quite a boon after the invasion... I dare say that they saved my life, and that of a few others. From my understanding, the process isn't complex, but time-consuming. And we一"

“You’re stretched thin, yes,” Conrad said. He almost told the Hokage ‘no’ out of spite, but Alchemy was freely available knowledge in Tamriel. Everyone who had the time or resources to study it could learn. The ninja and, by extension, Akavir seemed to have forgotten such skills, or maybe they had never possessed them. How many people had died because there was not even a third-grade, barely-working healing potion available?



“We would compensate you, of course,” Sarutobi added, attempting to sweeten the deal.



“Fine. We can talk terms later,” Conrad agreed, quickly grabbing the chance to make it seem like his decision was based on greed. Besides, he had been kept as an ‘honorable guest’ for way too long for his liking. If there was a chance of making Konoha pay him back for it, he would exploit it.



“I’m sure we will.”



“I want my things back, too. All of them,” he added. He had started to forget how it felt to wear armor. Not feeling a thick sheet of plate between him and the world for this long felt weird.

“As you said, we can talk about terms later,” the Hokage said, making no commitments. “Were there other things you wanted to speak about, Harissen-san?”


Well, since he was here… “I’m sure Inoichi told you already, but gods are real...”

Conrad had expected a strong reaction, considering that Konoha and Akavir had apparently forgot about the dangers posed by daedra and their masters.



He had had to cram four Eras of cultural context in the explanation, which had been longer and deeper than the one he had given to Inoichi. Sure, having to use a language he was just getting familiar with wasn’t the best way to give an improvised lecture but thankfully Sarutobi’s office was full of sheets of parchment to give useful visual aids.



Still, he couldn’t help but think that the reaction was a bit extreme. Not unjustified, but extreme.



The shinobi had moved the dremora from the cell, without removing the stone pillar containing him, to a room with a massive round door made of metal with an odd round handle that had to be twisted to open it. It didn’t look like a cell but it sure could keep anything that were put in it inside. Then they started to put even more of those glowing paper tags everywhere. He added a few spells of his own, after asking permission of course. Better not startle the masked guys with a sudden show of light. Just a few runes here and there, nothing lethal to avoid wounding the dremora to the point it would be sent back to the pit it had come from.


Conrad was pretty sure he was allowed to watch this only because he was the closest thing to a dremora expert in the city. He was even asked if he thought this was going to be enough to keep the prisoner secured, and he had to admit, the dremora looked secure enough. Pissed off, glaring at them and unable to yell and curse because they had put one of those papers full of runes on his mouth, but unable to move or return to Oblivion.


It was probably wishing he could kill them all by hating them enough, or maybe just imagining all the kinds of torture it would submit them to if it could.


Conrad was tempted to reveal his little bluff when, a few days earlier, he had threatened to harvest the creature’s soul and turn it into a magical kettle, but decided against it. The threat of a black soul gem, one that Conrad didn’t have, had been the only thing making it somewhat collaborative so far. That and the fact that it had submitted to Sven’s authority and, more importantly, because it couldn’t move. Better keep it that way, just in case.


As the door slammed closed, sealing the dremora inside, one of the masked guards made a few hand signs and slammed his hands on the floor. The tiles in front of the door broke, and a thick wooden wall covered the metal door.


Conrad gave a good look at the masked shinobi that had just made in a few seconds what a carpenter would take days to. He was pretty sure that this was one of the guys that had captured him back in the forest, which he was still pretty annoyed about.


Sure, he had met Naruto as a happy consequence of that incident but he was going towards Konoha anyway. He refused to feel grateful for it.

“Do you think it will be enough?” Inoichi asked as some shinobi started painting the wooden wall to make it look like a normal part of the hallway.

“To stop the dremora? Yes. To stop its masters? No,” he said.


“What do you mean?”



“I have dealt with many sealed evils and such things in my life. Creatures that had broken free from their imprisonment, artifacts that could cause wars and suffering and other things that had been put away for one reason or another,” he explained, remembering a few of the instances he’d had to deal with over the years. Like that time that Jarl Balgruuf’s kid had started acting oddly. Or Morokei. Or that other Dragon Priest in that ruin, what was it called. Or Miraak.


Oh, and of course, Alduin.


Thanks a lot, ancient Nords.

“And?”



“Those that sealed them away, well… it was always only a delay. Someone was going to have to deal with them in the end,” he finished.


“But you won, right?” Inoichi asked with a smirk.



“Yeah, I did,” Conrad admitted. Being the one, or at least one of the people locking up something because it couldn’t be dealt with at the moment still didn’t feel right, though.

“See, if you managed to defeat those sealed evils, as you called them, then I’m sure that we’ll come up with something.”

Conrad wondered if the blond ninja was trying to lighten the mood or to just sound more confident. Some things were stopped by the whims of the daedric princes, not by mortals. Still, he managed to offer the man the ghost of a smile.

“Now come on, Harissen-san,” Inoichi said, putting a hand on his shoulder and guiding him away. “We don’t have much time to prepare for your presentation.”



“My what?”

"Are you sure, kid?"

"Yeah, I'm sure. I'd rather do missions with my team or spend time with my uncle than search for some old lady."

Jiraiya sighed. Of course, Naruto had latched onto Minato's brother and followed him around like a duckling whenever he could. This would make his errand for the Old Man a bit more difficult, he had hoped to bring Naruto to get a bit of an edge.

Well, he had taken this possibility into account. He would just have to make a little adjustment to the plan. He had to pick up a few things first, though.

"Alright, brat. I'm not letting you rest idle while I'm away. Do you think you can blow up a ball with your chakra?"

"Blow up a what?"

Conrad was regretting not agreeing to something simpler, like writing down some recipes for basic potions and handing them to Sarutobi and Inoichi to figure out. Or he could have just said no, that would’ve meant even less work.

Since he wasn’t planning on sticking around, the Hokage had gotten the idea of having him give some lessons to off-duty shinobi, so that they would be able to produce some basic magical brews even after he was back in Tamriel drinking mead and stealing shiny things from ancient tombs.

After putting down some notes with Inoichi and making some preparations, Conrad had found himself being taken to a large room somewhere in what the Yamanaka called the ‘Research Department’, with high ceilings and lots of rows of tables and chairs. Seated in each and every chair was a shinobi or someone in a white coat, which Conrad had not seen before. By the walls were the masked guards, An-something. He didn’t recognize any of the ones here, but he supposed that they were sent to ensure the security of the meeting and to keep an eye on him since he was such an important guest who would be speaking with people that were apparently very important to the well-being of the city.

They were all staring at him intently as he stood at the front of the room in front of a chalkboard. Somewhere in the back of his head Conrad thought wryly that he hadn’t expected to be back in a classroom again but dismissed it. It was a good place to learn, after all.

“My name is Conrad, and I’ll be teaching you alchemy,” he started, ignoring the odd looks he got. His accent was probably funny to them. “Alchemy is the discipline that allows you to mix, boil, and distill various ingredients to obtain their magical properties and create powerful and useful potions.” Or poisons, but he was going to explain that later, while he was explaining how to not poison yourself by accident in your own laboratory.

A hand immediately shot up, belonging to a glasses-wearing woman in a white coat sitting right at the front.

“Yes?” Conrad gestured.

“Thank you, Harrisen-san. Forgive me, but you said magic and not chakra. We’ve been briefed, of course, but if we could simply see an example with our own eyes...”

Conrad glanced at Inoichi, who nodded. Of course they would’ve been told about him, but he couldn’t help but wonder how much they had been told given how much ninja liked secrets. He suppressed a sigh and raised his hand. With a flick of the wrist and a little push of his will, a little ball of fire was now fluctuating a few inches from his palm. “This is magic, and it does not run off of chakra,” he explained. “We use an energy called magicka instead.”


Many hands shot up immediately, just as he had expected it. Questions were asked or even shouted out loudly, and there were some murmurs about calling a sensor which Conrad didn’t really catch the meaning for. Of course, they weren’t surprised by the fire. Conrad had seen the shinobi use much more impressive flames during the invasion of Konoha. He had not used those elaborate hand signs to do it though, confusing people that had probably spent their lives studying how ninja did things.


One of the researchers closer to Conrad asked what magicka was and where it came from, or at least that was the gist of it from what Conrad could hear as Inoichi and a few other cooler heads calmed down everyone.


“If I were to explain magicka, I would have to speak for hours, and it would not help with what we’re supposed to learn here,” he said, gesturing towards the table where he had set up his alchemical lab and a few potions prepared beforehand. It didn’t help that while there were a lot of theories about magicka’s origin, none had been proven as the absolute truth yet. And possibly never would.


“Can you at least tell us how this magicka is different from chakra?” the woman that had spoken first asked.


“As far as I can tell, I don’t get tired to the point of fainting if I use too many spells. That’s our name for jutsu, by the way,” Conrad answered after recalling what he had been told about chakra. Shinobi used part of their body to fuel their magic, or jutsu or whatever. No wonder they got tired. He briefly wondered how much chakra influenced a shinobi’s innate physical abilities but since he didn’t want to start a whole conjecture on the subject in his mind during an impromptu lesson, he picked a highly academically incorrect ‘a lot’ and figured he could always study that another time. “Magic does not use chakra, for it’s unknown back in Tamriel. Anyone can learn alchemy, though.”

Another hand shot up, and Conrad gestured for the man to speak. “Forgive me, Harrisen-san, but anyone? That seems a bit hard to believe, especially if this magic is a key part of it.”

“All the magic is given by the ingredients,” he replied, closing his fist and snuffling the flames. “The alchemist just has to brew the potion correctly. Anyone can do alchemy, as long as they know what they’re doing.”


“We already saw your healing concoctions, they’re… they’re amazing, really. But what else can alchemy do? Surely there's more or we wouldn't be here.”


Conrad remained silent for a moment, knowing that everyone’s attention was on him. Then he picked up a vial he had prepared just for the occasion. Thankfully Inoichi’s family garden had a good variety of plants and flowers, some of which he had started to familiarize himself with thanks to the Yamanaka’s sort-of-gracious hospitality.

He wordlessly drank a sip from the liquid and waited for his spectator’s reactions. There was a beat of disbelief, before every single researcher and raised their hands or started asking questions once again. A few jaws dropped. The shinobis’ reaction was far less loud but still noticeable, from widened eyes and raised eyebrows to shifts in stance and briefly reaching for their weapons. Probably a reflex reaction.

“As you can see,” Conrad said loudly, so that they could be sure to know that he was still there. “I’m invisible. And all I had to do was to take a drink. I just had to pick a few specific ingredients, and each of those ingredients could be used to obtain a different effect with the right formula.”

The scholars and shinobi in the room stared at Conrad, or at least at the seemingly empty spot where he was standing. Then they suddenly wanted to know everything he could teach them.



By the time he finished answering their questions, the potion had long worn off.

Naruto stared at the ball. So far it had failed to explode no matter how much chakra he pushed into it from his hand.

He stared harder. Pushed harder, focusing to release chakra from both of his hands to get it into the ball. The ball still didn’t explode.

This was getting him nowhere.

He was distracted from his frustrated thoughts by the sudden arrival of his uncle, who dropped a burlap sack on the table.



“What are you doing, boy?” he asked, looking at the ball in Naruto’s hand and the others scattered around the room.



“Training.”

“What training requires you to use toys?”



“Something that Dad made up.”

His uncle stared at him for a few seconds and Naruto almost added that they weren’t toys, they were training equipment, but then the Nord shrugged, seemingly accepting the explanation. He went on to open the sack and spill its contents. The dull clang of metal, a lot of metal actually, broke what little concentration Naruto had left.


It was a bunch of large metal shapes. They looked worn and weathered but each piece was engraved with strange patterns. Along with them came a bundle of buckles, pieces of leather, an odd padded vest and some furs.



Conrad inspected each one carefully, occasionally squinting and rubbing at a spot on the leather, or lightly flicking the metal. Naruto sat in awed silence at the mass of… whatever it was.

“Uncle, what’s that?” he asked. Conrad glanced down at him and dropped the large plate on the table with a clang.

“My armor.”



Naruto blinked. “You actually wear all of this? In a fight?” he asked as he looked at the pile on the table.



“That’s what armor is for,” his uncle told him as he started to fiddle with a gauntlet. Well, sure, it was kinda obvious now that Naruto knew it was armor, but compared to what shinobi or ANBU wore...

“Isn’t it heavy?” he wondered out loud.



“The weight is distributed all over the body. When you wear it you barely feel it.”

Naruto ran his fingers over the edges of the decorations and the scratches on the otherwise smooth metal. He wasn’t so sure how someone could not feel it while wearing it, nevermind after adding all the other parts. Maybe it was like Rock Lee’s weights. Bushy Brows didn’t seem to mind having to carry them the whole time.

Of course, his uncle probably wouldn’t remove his armor during a fight to gain an advantage in speed.



He then realized that Bushy Brows would probably not be able to do that anymore. The last time he had visited him at the hospital, Naruto was told that it would be impossible for Lee to make a full recovery.

“Pass me that, boy,” his uncle gestured to a bundle of buckles and leather, unaware of his thoughts.



“What are those for?” Naruto couldn’t help but ask as he handled them.



“They are straps to keep some of the pieces together when I wear it.”



Naruto watched as Conrad started to untangle some, then his attention moved to some of the other items. “And the furs?”



“Skyrim is cold,” his uncle told him, looking him straight in the eye. Something in the man’s voice convinced Naruto that he was putting it mildly.

After that, his Uncle went back to work and Naruto looked at the thick, dark pelts. If that Sky-Rim place was cold, did it mean that they always wore hides and thick clothes? Naruto took a guess about how to wear them and threw the furs on his shoulders. “How do I look?”


“Like a werewolf pup,” Conrad answered with an amused snort.



“What’s a werewolf?”



“Given what we’ve learned so far about the beasts that infest your uncle’s land, I’m not sure I want to know,” a voice suddenly said. Turning around, Naruto saw Jiraiya, his newest sort-of-teacher, perched on his windowsill.


“Ero-Sennin? What are you doing here?”



“I was looking for your uncle,” Jiraiya told him before turning towards the man. “I thought you were at the Yamanaka place.”



“The boy’s place was closer,” Conrad shrugged. “The guards didn’t stop me.”

Jiraiya seemed to accept that explanation and let out a low whistle at the sight of Conrad’s gear. “Do all Nords go around that armored?”



“No, I travel light,” Conrad replied. “Why were you looking for me?”

Naruto glanced at the armor and weapons laying on his kitchen table. This was ‘traveling light’?!


“I just wanted to ask a few questions,” Jiraiya answered before his eyes fell on the ball in Naruto’s hands. “Oh, you were training already, kid?”



“Of course I am!” Naruto answered proudly. He was no slacker.

“Any progress?”



“... No,” he admitted, deflating a little. “I can’t complete the first part yet.”



“Keep going then, you know what to do,” the Toad Sage told him as he resumed his conversation with Uncle.

Naruto stared at the ball for a moment before going back to try to make it explode. Of course, it refused to.



He didn’t know what annoyed him the most, the stubborn ball or the way his chakra refused to do what he wanted it to. It was his chakra, so it should do what he said!. He decided to try to squeeze the ball while pushing the chakra out this time. Nothing.

Stupid ball. Blow up!



“Are you serious?!” Conrad suddenly exclaimed, sounding exasperated. Naruto looked up, forgetting the ball. “I just gave a long lesson about it, if you have questions about it you could’ve shown up to the class!”

“I was busy with the kid, it takes time to buy all these balls,” Jiraiya said, pointing at the various balls with colorful patterns that were littering the room. “I’m asking because I think the potions are very useful. Especially the red ones…”

“You mean these?” His uncle produced a couple of red vials that caught Naruto’s attention.



“Yes, exactly, “Jiraiya nodded. “See, I have a little trip ahead of me and I thought that having something like that in case of an emergency could be helpful...”



The two adults’ words faded as Naruto kept staring at the two red vials. They seemed to gleam a bit thanks to the sunlight coming from the window.



He could’ve sworn that at times he still felt the aftertaste of those things in his mouth. Sure, his uncle blamed his student for it, the not-cat one, but he couldn’t help but scrunch his face a little.



Although a very bad taste for something able to heal your injuries in a moment didn’t seem like a bad deal.



He perked up as his thoughts came to a stop. An idea slowly started to form in his head.



Those potions could heal injuries quickly. Like, very, very quickly. From deathbed to being well, or at least better, just by drinking them. Because they were potions and you were supposed to drink them.

Well, most kinds of injuries: they had saved the Old Man Hokage’s life but not his leg… he had already lost it. Unlike Lee, whose arm and leg had been badly injured.


And there were two potions right there, in his Uncle’s hand. And you had just to drink them.


Before Naruto knew what he was doing, he had snatched the two red vials and was dashing towards the door.

“SorryUncleIneedtheseI’llexplainlater!” he shouted in a hurry, leaving the two confused grown-ups and a completely forgotten rubber ball behind. Uncle would understand. Naruto knew he would.

Chapter 21: Deepening Bonds and Consequences

Chapter Text

“Months?” Beta whined.

Conrad sighed. After the boy had left with his potions and Jiraiya had departed for a mission or whatever, he had decided to go give the news to his students. It was going about as well as he thought it would. “Yes, Beta. We’ll be here for quite a while.”

“But Master… why?” Sven asked.

“Yes, Master!” Beta said. “Can’t we just go home?”

Conrad raised an eyebrow. “Might I remind you I wasn’t the one who smuggled all three of you onto that ship?”

Beta and Sven flushed and Ta’Sava’s ears flicked as he looked away. “Months without seeing the moons…” the Khajiit whispered to himself.

“Is your ninja friend alright with the idea of having us live in his house for months?” Sven asked, ignoring Ta’Sava’s distress. It took Conrad a moment to realize he meant Inoichi.

“I’m going to speak with him about it later,” he said curtly. Inoichi wasn’t a friend. He was an acquaintance at best, one that had allowed them to crash at his house. And occasionally, a drinking buddy. “I wanted to get you used to the idea that we’ll have to stay here for a while.”


“What about the ship? What would Captain Edyval say?”

“Oh, I’m sure he’s fine, probably better than us.” Conrad would bet that the old smuggler was putting those formerly-gold coins he had been left with to good use.

“Still, what are we supposed to do here until we can leave?” Sven asked. “We’ll have been absent from the Winterhold College for nearly two semesters by then.”


"We're the first people from Tamriel to reach Akavir in centuries, and you worry about some lost lessons?"

"Actually, Master Conrad... your brother was the first person to get here from Tamriel in centuries," Beta pointed out.

“Doesn’t count. He was raised as an Akaviri,” Conrad quickly replied, because that was the way things worked and Minato wasn’t going to one-up him from the grave on this.

“As fascinating as this is, our lack of academic exposure is taking its toll,” Sven cut in. “I understand that you wanted to show the locals alchemy, but we need to learn something else.”

“Ta’Sava doesn’t want to help with another alchemy lecture,” the Khajiit declared, crossing his arms. At that, the three students voiced their agreement, doing their best to be respectful but at the same time not hiding the fact that Conrad had been slacking.


He had been very busy between being captured by shinobi, killing other shinobi and teaching the shinobi that had captured him how people on Tamriel survived being stabbed to death.

Oh, and there was the fact that he had found out about the boy. Which was a big deal.


So he had all the excuses in the world to counter any expectations of a trio of stowaways that had thought that following the freaking Dovahkiin for an adventure would be a great learning experience.

He had done his best to keep them safe anyway. And failed at it.

“You’re right,” he admitted.

“But Master, we—” Sven wound himself up, ready to argue for the sake of his fellow students, before blinking. “What?”

“You’re right,” Conrad repeated. Teaching them could always be good practice for dealing with the boy in the long run. “There hasn't been much time to spend on giving you actual lessons, but that stops today.”


“For real?” Beta asked, in a tone that expressed her and her fellow students’ incredulity.

“You’re my responsibility,” he said, even if he had never asked to be responsible for anyone. “I believe that includes teaching you. Let’s start with some theory... By tomorrow I expect a detailed list of all the spells you’re able to cast, along with a summary of your knowledge and a list of classes you took at the Winterhold College before you joined mine.”

There was a brief moment of silence as the trio registered this. “Are you giving us homework ?” Sven finally asked for all of them.


“You’re the ones asking me to teach you,” Conrad replied with a thin smile. Besides, it gave him time to figure out what to actually teach them and how. And where.

He was wondering if he could ask Inoichi where he could have a small class when the door to the room exploded inward. Conrad only saw a green blur before he was hit by a figure that latched onto him. Instead of being grappled to the ground as he was expecting, Conrad found himself in the most bone-crushing hug he had ever experienced.

"YOU’VE RESTORED MY STUDENT'S SPRINGTIME OF YOUTH!" the man crushing him shouted, almost deafening Conrad. It was the crazy ninja that had attacked him in the hospital, covering his shirt with tears and babbling something about youth and friends helping each other. It was too fast for Conrad to really understand.

Unsure what to do, the Nord patted the shinobi's back. He seemed to need it.

There had been much celebration, at least from the man and his apprentice, who had apparently been hurt badly during that tournament Konoha had hosted. Conrad had mostly witnessed said celebration and boasting, a lot of it actually, that had ensued after he was half-guided, half-dragged by the green-clad ninja to the hospital.

There were talks about training, thankful hugs to Naruto, swearing to do what sounded like impractical feats of strength or skill and a lot of emphasis on someone’s young age for some reason.

Said boisterous celebrations were put to a halt when they were all gently kicked out by the healers: kicked out because they didn’t seem to like the noise but gently because they seemed to be happy that the lad wasn’t hurt anymore.

As soon as they were all out of the main door, though, the enthusiasm was back stronger than before. After expressing their infinite gratitude once again, the duo declared that they had a lot of time to make up for and sprinted into a full-speed run.

Conrad and the boy remained there for a bit, the Nord still a bit confused by the man’s antics while Naruto looked like someone had gifted him a bunch of puppies and kittens. Only after the two running ninja disappeared at the end of the street Conrad slowly started to walk back towards Inoichi’s place.

"Boy?" he asked while glancing down.

"Yes, Uncle?"

"It's good that you wanted to help your friend."

"Yeah, I'm glad it worked out, too!"

"The next time, though, ask before just getting some potions and forcing someone to drink them," Conrad reprimanded him. Sure, it had been one of his most powerful healing potions, but what if it hadn’t been?

"I didn't force Lee to drink them..." Naruto mumbled while turning down the wrong street.

"Boy, where are you going?" Conrad asked, stopping.

Naruto turned around to look at him, then took a look at the street. "I'm, uh... my house is that way."

Conrad stared for a moment, before speaking up. “I thought we were going to have dinner at Inoichi’s place.”

“Yeah, uh… about that… I have to wake up early for a mission.”

“A mission?” Conrad wondered.

“Nothing fancy, just a D-Rank… but we have to be there very early. I’ll just eat some ramen and then go to sleep.”

“I see.”

“Hey, what if we go eat ramen at Ichiraku’s after my mission?” Naruto asked, his mood brightening at the idea.

“Sure,” Conrad said softly. He didn’t care much for that soup, but the boy seemed to like the idea of spending time together.

“Awesome! See you tomorrow!” Naruto told him, waving farewell.

Conrad watched him go before walking down the way to the Yamanaka house again. He felt relief that the boy didn’t have to take any risks, at least for now, but he couldn’t help to feel disappointed.

What was the point of having a family if you couldn’t have dinner together?

“You want a what ?!” Inoichi asked after he had finished choking on his rice.

“I said that I want a place to stay,” Conrad repeated after checking his ever-expanding inner dictionary. “For me, for them… and the boy.”

“But the security concerns! This is a terrible—”

“I think that’s a lovely idea!” the Yamanaka lady said enthusiastically. Conrad smiled at the unexpected ally. Even if it was just to not have him squatting in her living room anymore.

“But honey—” Inoichi objected, only to be interrupted by a glare from his wife. The ninja groaned. “... I’ll speak to the Hokage about it.”

“Good,” Conrad nodded before turning his attention back to his meal.

“Well, here we are,” Inoichi said, holding the door open. Conrad stood by the entrance while Naruto went exploring.

Not that there was much to explore. The place was… not small, but smaller than Breezehome back in Whiterun. Definitely dustier for sure, and almost bare of furniture from what he could see.

It was also underground, with an entrance on the side of the mountain. It was a bit out of the city proper, but not as isolated as the shack on the top had been. The clearing that served as a yard out front was nice, though. Plenty of space to let the magelings throw spells around. No fireballs though, that would be bad with all those trees.

And a nice, sturdy door that could be closed from the inside, Conrad noted.

“There’s a little bathroom in the back, and a study over there,” Inoichi helpfully told them. “With Tenzo’s help we could add a couple extra rooms.”

Ah, yes. The woodmancer. Conrad was pretty sure he and some of his masked friends were hiding in the trees outside.

“How come nobody lives here?” he asked.

“Because it belonged to Minato.”

“What?!” Naruto cried out, running back into the room. “My parents lived here?!”

“No, this place was just a safehouse he used. We found it and a few others thanks to that jutsu—”

“Spell,” Conrad corrected. Or at least he hoped he did. He and the only other three wizards in the immediate area were mostly guessing that was the right translation.

“Thanks to that spell your uncle used to find his way here,” Inoichi finished, nonplussed by the correction. “Your parents had a place back in the village—”


“City,” Conrad said automatically.


“Village,” the ninja said with a glare, before turning to the boy once again, his eyes softening. “I’m afraid that their house was destroyed by the Kyuubi.”

Naruto looked down and nodded. Conrad could tell it hurt, but it was an old hurt. He knew the feeling.


“You said that there are other safehouses?” he asked.


“Yes, but this is the only one we could move you into.”

“Why?”

“It’s the only one with a bathroom.”

“Fair,” Conrad admitted. Those paper rolls were lifechangers, he didn’t know how he could survive without it once he was back in Tamriel. He’d bring back a lifetime’s supply with him if he had to.

He went to check the studio. It was a little room, almost bare. Only a desk, a chair, some empty shelves and a small bed in a corner. All he needed for himself. The idea of sleeping in the same room his brother had used was strange, though.

“The place is cool,” said Naruto, appearing at his side. “I mean, there are no windows and it’s underground, but it’s cool.”

“I’m used to staying underground.”

“Really? Are cities in Skyrim underground?”

“Not exactly, I just don’t mind it,” Conrad said without elaborating. Years and years of spelunking into tombs and lost cities had pretty much killed any trace of claustrophobia he may have ever had. “Did you find a room you like?”

“A room I like?”

“You’re moving here, boy.”

“Moving—you mean with you ?!” Naruto asked, mouth agape.

“If you want to. I know that there are no windows, but if you need some fresh air you can just go outside—”

“No! I mean, yes—I don’t need windows!” the boy quickly said in rapid succession, before calming down for a second. “Yes, sure. I’d like to.”

“Then go call the ninja carpenter. After he’s done, pick a room for yourself.”

The woodmancer had, in the end, added four rooms in total and had thrown in a few chairs and tables to furnish the place. It had taken just a few moments. Honestly, that man was wasted as a ninja. He had missed his calling.

Some of the other masked shinobi had installed those lights the Akaviri used and the safe house had been deemed ready for them to move in.

Not that there were many things that needed moving in. The boy honestly owned more than Conrad and his apprentices combined.

Which was why Conrad had no idea why he had even agreed to put up with this.

"Where should we put these, Harissen-san?" one of Naruto's little friends asked way too cheerfully for someone carrying his alchemy equipment.

Conrad pointed towards the study with a grunt, watching her go on her merry way. He turned around to make sure nothing was being mishandled only to be nearly smacked in the face by a mattress his nephew and the other boy were carrying.

"Sorry Uncle," Naruto said without missing a beat, still moving to one of the bedrooms. "Watch where you're turning, Sasuke!"

"You're the one that has to turn, idiot," the other genin grumbled as the mattress slammed against a chair, making it fall over.

Clearly the smartest among the three was dealing with the fragile things. That was reassuring.

"I can't believe that I have to pay the boy to help to move his own things," he grumbled as he went to check the rest of the stuff outside.

"You're paying all of us, Harissen-san. But don’t worry, we gave you a family discount," the girl told him as she came back to the common room. “You could’ve asked your genin, you know.”

“They’re not genin,” he muttered. “And they’re busy buying a few things back in town—”


“Wait, on their own?”

“Inoichi’s daughter offered to take them,” Conrad shrugged, going outside to pick more things from the boxes the boy had brought from his old apartment.


Many of which, at a close examination, seemed to contain ramen cups.

“Where’s Kakashi-sensei?” Naruto asked as he came out of the entrance along with his friend.

“Maybe he got lost on the road of life again,” the girl, Sakura, muttered. “I swear he was just behind us.”

Were all the teachers in Konoha this absent? Sometimes Conrad wondered how Naruto learned anything at all.

He grabbed the boxes that didn't have pre-packaged food and looked at the sun, squinting his eyes. Almost noon. As soon as his apprentices returned they would all have lunch together.


Sasuke was trying to enjoy a lunch break during the most useless D-Rank mission Team 7 had ever been assigned.

The rest of the foreigners had come back from their shopping trip, bringing with them a armfuls of purchases that they'd have to move in later. Strangely enough, there were several barrels of honey among the things they had bought. Which their teacher, Naruto’s uncle, seemed to be very happy with. Sasuke didn’t even know that honey was sold in barrels too.

He probably liked sweet things, Sasuke decided.

It wasn't as strange as what had happened when they had come back, Ino in tow for who knows why. Sasuke had been sure he would have to spend lunch being bothered by both Sakura and Ino, but for some reason, the Yamanaka girl had marched straight up to his teammate, babbling something about the foreigner girl knowing nothing about... something. Sasuke wasn't sure. Which seemed to confuse and shock Sakura, who asked if it was true.

It apparently was true, and this had prompted Sakura and Ino to join forces and all but kidnap the slightly-older girl to do some "emergency shopping" and saying something about needing Hinata and Tenten's help too.

Girls, Sasuke decided, were weird.

He had hoped that with their departure he would've been able to eat in peace, but his other teammate had decided otherwise.

"But why not? I like orange!” Naruto protested.

“You can have all the orange you want, in your room ,” Naruto's uncle said with a frown. Sasuke understood. Orange wouldn't look good in an underground room anyway.

“Maybe I will!”

“Fine, but you’ll have to paint it yourself,” the older blond declared with a final tone.

Naruto said something about having plenty of experience when it came to painting things, but Sasuke wasn't listening anymore. He found he was no longer hungry for some reason.

When the boy had left their new home in the morning, Conrad had been digging a hole in the ground right by the door. He had things to do that required a dark place to reach full maturation.

Naruto had asked why they even needed to dig a basem*nt when they could ask that AN—something that held power over wood. He had briefly lectured the boy about the necessity of doing the important things yourself, or making your apprentices do them with supervision. He had even allowed them to use magic. Wizards should be able to be creative with the spells at their disposal.

The boy must have thought that he was about to ask for his help too because he suddenly remembered that he had to do something back in the city. Too bad, a dozen or two of those clones of his would've helped a lot.

By the middle of the afternoon they were finished, the foundations were stable enough. It just needed a better entrance but he could work on it later.

He prepared a fire in the clearing out front and began making calculations in his mind. They had all the clean water they needed (Akaviri bathrooms were truly a marvel of engineering), large pots, empty or soon to be empty jars and barrels, and plenty of alchemical tools that could be temporarily repurposed for the cause. Not to mention a multitude of fruit and spices if he decided to be creative and experiment a little.

Maybe he would even share some. Maybe. Only time and his mood would tell.

"Bring me all the honey," he ordered his apprentices. It was time to brew some mead.


Jiraiya had been disappointed by Naruto’s decision to remain in Konoha instead of following him on his important mission that may or may not have had a bit of sightseeing mixed in.


It had been a week since he’d left Konoha and he still couldn’t believe it.


He had planned to take the genin on a trip, teach him a jutsu or two, maybe help him control the Kyuubi when he was a bit older. Jiraiya still planned to make him his apprentice, just like Minato had been!


Conrad’s presence might make it difficult, though. Naruto had gotten attached to him like a freshly hatched duckling, and the older man had grown fiercely protective of him just as quickly. Thankfully, when Jiraiya had departed, the Nord had at least seemed t o be willing to give Jiraiya a chance. The Toad Sage wasn’t going to let it go to waste if he had anything to say about it.


Still, as dismayed as he was at having to search for Tsunade-hime on his own, he had to admit that it allowed him to move faster. That, and to check on shadier sources than he had planned to, some of which he’d not have taken a kid into.

“So, where were we?” he asked the terrified loan shark as he tossed the last goon onto the pile of groaning bodies. “I think you were saying just how much money Senju Tsunade borrowed from you before skipping town…”

After a whole day of D-ranks and other overly-glorified chores, Naruto had walked half the way to his apartment, only to remember too late that he lived on the other side of the village now.

Mortified, he had quickly doubled back, but he couldn’t help but stop to look at his old apartment from the end of the street. Sure, it had been small and it was lonely and kinda crappy, but it had been his . It felt weird not living there anymore.


Shaking his head, he kept going. The road to his dad's safehouse was a bit longer and he had wasted so much time by going the wrong direction that he was sure to be late for dinner.

He opened the door, only to be overwhelmed by an onslaught of smells. Naruto froze on the threshold. For some reason, his legs refused to move. The table was set, his uncle was standing in the middle of the kitchen by the entrance, stirring something in a pan while mumbling what sounded like a song. The scene just looked so… foreign, to him.


He forced himself to step inside, his uncle’s humming stopped as he heard Naruto closing the door.

"Welcome back," Conrad greeted him.

Naruto felt a lump in his throat when he heard that. He had honestly forgotten for how long he had daydreamed about someone saying those words to him. Day after day, he had come home to an empty apartment. But now...

He must have been staring for a while because his uncle turned towards him with a concerned expression. "Boy, are you alright?"

"Yeah," Naruto forced himself to speak. "You didn't eat yet?"

"We were waiting for you," his uncle answered. Naruto felt the lump turn into warmth, and a smile formed on his face.

They had waited for him! The only person who had waited for him for dinner in his life had been Iruka-sensei, and almost always at the Ichiraku ramen stand.

How could he have missed his old, empty apartment?

"Don't just stand there, go wash your hands and come help me," Conrad told him, interrupting his thoughts. Nothing could ruin Naruto's mood now, though. Not even his uncle's grumpiness!

"Where are the others?" Naruto asked, taking off his sandals and noticing that the three apprentices' shoes were not by the door.

"I sent them to buy something for dessert."

Dessert?! Naruto wouldn't say no to that.


He didn’t know how long this living situation would last, but he was definitely going to make the most of it.

It had been a few days since Naruto had moved in with his uncle and it had been odd at first, living with other people, but he was slowly adjusting. To the new bedroom, to waking up hearing other people in the house, being woken up by the other people in the house... he also had to admit that he missed his window.


Naruto still wasn’t sure how he felt about living with his uncle’s students under the same roof. He enjoyed the constant company and the stories about the place they were from, but they took a lot of his uncle’s attention and time.


Not that he was jealous! He knew that his uncle had to train them, being their teacher… he didn’t really get how their team really worked, though. They didn’t seem to have ranks, but he had been told, multiple times, that there were no shinobi in Tamriel.


They seemed to train differently, too. For example, today his uncle made them sit outside and they seem to mostly be… talking and listening. Mostly listening. As if it were a class. There was even a blackboard.


That was just odd. He knew that things worked differently where they were from, but why would they need classes? They were older than him.


He couldn’t help but watch them though. It was the language, mostly. It sounded completely different from what he was used to… not that he could understand anything except their names, of course. But it had a different… flow. A strange mixture of musical-like sounds with the occasional grunting or harsh one, although Naruto couldn’t tell if that was normal or if it was his uncle speaking like that because he was a huge grump. It explained their accents though, he had spent a few days thinking that they were mispronouncing his name on purpose.

He wondered if he could learn it, but his uncle didn’t sound like a patient teacher. At least, based on all the arguing—or at least what sounded like arguing—he was doing with his students.

With that thought in mind, Naruto turned and headed towards his training. He was late, of course, but no later than Kakashi-sensei would be.

After one hour of theory—he didn’t care if they already knew it, he was going to explain it again until he was sure they wouldn’t blow off their hands—Conrad had allowed the three novice wizards to practice using large rocks as targets.


Lighting bolt after lighting bolt was shot from the teenagers’ hands while he supervised. Every once in a while one of them would stop, clearly out of magicka. Then, after recuperating, they would start again. If one of them made any mistakes Conrad would correct them, but they learned quickly.


“Master, we’ve been at this for hours… do we have to keep going?”


“It has only been two hours, Beta. If you feel tired, there are some magicka potions in the basket,” he said, gesturing to the vials full of blue liquid.


“Yes, but... can’t you teach us something more advanced?” she asked after blasting the rock at the end of the clearing one more time.


“More advanced?” Conrad wondered. He was teaching them how to throw lightning bolts, wasn’t that advanced enough?

“I mean, yes, we didn’t know this spell but it’s not exactly more difficult than what a beginner would learn and… we want to get better,” she said, fidgeting a little. Her two friends were listening, having stopped their own casting.

Get better, Conrad wondered. They were throwing more magic around than what he would’ve dreamed of doing back when he was their age, and they wanted more. Sure, maybe they could even handle more complex spells, but he didn’t like the idea of teaching those to someone that hadn’t proved they could handle it safely . It was probably another sign that he was getting older.

He needed to figure out a way to hammer that particular lesson into their heads. Still, he needed to give them a goal to strive for.

Another lightning bolt struck the rocks, this time starting from Conrad’s own hand. Instead of leaving a faint burn trace on the stone, though, there was a crackling noise for a couple of seconds before it detonated in a massive ball of electricity.


When the magelings stopped covering their eyes, he spoke. “You want to learn spells like that one? Then you have to improve. A lot. Keep casting the one I taught you at the rocks.”


“... there are no rocks left,” Ta’sava pointed out.

Conrad turned. It was true. There was a smoking, still sizzling crater at the end of the clearing. He groaned. That was the reason why he didn’t cast those spells lightly.

“You know what?” he spoke, clapping his hands. “Let’s take a break so I can explain to you the concept of collateral damage and how to avoid it.” And how to use it when necessary, but maybe they weren’t ready for that.

Naruto felt his chakra spinning, faster and faster. Gaining momentum while more and more chakra was added.

Was it working?! Was he actually—

The balloon blew up with a loud pop, the chakra quickly dissipating into the air. Naruto let out a groan. That was one more balloon he had to pick up all the pieces of later after the training was over.

He was about to pick up another one when he heard his uncle's mutterings from inside the house. Well, the safehouse turned into a house. It sounded like angry noises in his mother tongue.

Curious, he went to take a look inside. His uncle was hitting a blender while grunting what Naruto believed, based only on the tone, were a series of unkind words against the domestic appliance.

"Uncle, what's wrong?" he asked, which made Conrad stop to look at him.

"It's not working!" the Nord said, his frustration summed up in just a few words.

Naruto walked closer to the kitchen counter and looked around, quickly finding the problem. He plugged the blender in before looking up at his uncle. "Try it now!"

His uncle looked at the blender with suspicion, before turning it on. The machine whirred and it was quickly turned off.

Naruto looked as his uncle started putting a few things—-ingredients for his potions, Naruto recognized—in the blender, while muttering something about not getting how half of these things worked. Naruto knew that Nords didn't have a lot of the things he took for granted, but still... what kind of life did they live, compared to the people of Konoha? How did his uncle live?

"Uncle, what’s your home like?" he asked, which made his uncle turn off the blender.

"You mean Skyrim?"

"Well... sure, but I meant your home. Where do you live in Skyrim?"

"A city called Whiterun," his uncle answered as he carefully poured the now pulverized herbs in a small glass jar.

"And where is it?" Naruto asked, hoping that the answer wouldn't be 'in Skyrim'.

"In the middle of... wait, I can show you," Conrad said, putting the jar by the blender and walking into his dad—now uncle's, he supposed—study. Naruto waited, hearing his uncle rummage among his things and making noises in Nordic. Finally, the man reemerged with a large, yellowed parchment in his hands.

He placed it on the table, inviting Naruto to come closer. It was a map, but it didn't look like any map Naruto had ever seen at the Academy. It looked like it had been drawn by hand instead of being printed. There seemed to be lots of notes on it, added with different colors. The paper itself looked like it had been folded and unfolded so many times that it was a wonder it hadn’t fallen to pieces yet.

"This is Whiterun," the Nord told him, pointing at a symbol that looked like a horse's head, with some strange symbols Naruto didn't know written beside it. The city's name, he realized. "Ruled by Jarl Balgruuf the Great, an honorable warrior. I have a house there, Breezehome."

"Breezehome?" Naruto asked, confused.

"It's the name of the house."

"... you guys give names to your houses?"

"Only some of them."

"Well... why was yours given a name?" Naruto asked, still thinking it was an odd thing. He had heard of castles and temples being given names but that didn't mean he had ever thought of giving a name to his apartment. But then again, a lot of things about his uncle were odd.

"Because it's the house usually given to the Thane of Whiterun," his uncle said with a tone that made it sound like Naruto was supposed to be impressed.

"Oh, I see," Naruto said. "What's a Thane?" he asked, after a few seconds of silence.

Uncle Conrad looked at him surprised for a moment before he seemed to realize that he was the first Nord he had spoken to. "Right. Let's see... how to explain this. Maybe I should talk to you about the various, er... regions? I think the right translation is regions..."

Oh no. Naruto had come to recognize that tone. It was Uncle's lesson voice .

It had taken days, but Danzo's agents had managed to find a way inside of the creature's cell.

Danzo had located the being with much more difficulty than he had expected. Sarutobi had been very careful in hiding it, even to the point of sealing the entrance with the Mokuton.

At first, he had just wondered why Sarutobi had not just eliminated the huge security risk when his people had reported that the being imprisoned in there had somehow influenced the mind of the leader of the Yamanaka clan, he had ordered to keep that household under observation. There was no saying what kind of threat Yamanaka Inoichi could be to the village now that his mind had been tampered with, and he seemed to have become associated with the foreigner that had caused all of this.

Danzo wouldn't have dared to get anywhere close to something that could pose a threat to his mind, but the claims of both Inoichi and Harissen-san... they were outlandishly ridiculous.

Still, Danzo knew better than to deny them outright. They were surely exaggerated, but he knew one thing for certain: there was a threat to the village and it was laying on the other side of the passage his ROOT had created to let him inside the cell. Many shinobi had died being too arrogant to investigate their enemies, and Danzo intended to investigate personally.

He entered the dark cell holding a lantern high while his agents remained outside, ready to intervene. Slowly, he moved around the form almost completely encased in stone. The being those foreigners had brought to Konoha with their magic.

Such an odd creature. Had he not read the report, Danzo would've been prone to believe that it was just a man with an odd bloodline that manifested physically. He had heard about such things before, it wouldn't have been an odd assumption. Until he saw its eyes.

Inhuman eyes, like embers in a black sea, with an alien sentience behind them. It made Danzo remember the bedtime stories with oni and kappa that he had forgotten half a lifetime ago.

The creature seemed to size Danzo up before dismissing his presence. The leader of ROOT wasn't going to let it take him lightly. He made a seal with his hand, taking off the binding around its mouth. It revealed a scowling expression full of contempt.

“So the little fleshbag wants to chat, does he?” the creature sneered, somehow acting like it wasn’t locked tight in solid stone.

"I will be doing the questioning here," Danzo said. "Are you some kind of summon? What is your allegiance?"

The creature just laughed in his face. “Oh, the mortal doesn't even know what he’s dealing with. What I am. You doubt.”

And with that the atmosphere abruptly changed. The air grew heavy and cold. Danzo felt the hair stand up on the back of his neck as the creature’s eyes seemed to glow. It was probably just the reflection from the lantern.

"I never have doubts," Danzo claimed. "You are simply an unknown entity, and as such, a threat to my home. What. Are. You?"

"Ask the Dovahkiin," it said, chuckling like he had said something funny. "But you don't trust him, right?"

"Who is the... Dovahkiin?" he couldn't help but ask, saying the unknown word slowly.

"The man that captured me. The man that forced me to submit to... this," the creature spat.

So, Harissen-san was this Dovahkiin. It sounded like some kind of title. What kind of meaning could it have?

“He is important to you,” Danzo noted.

“He is a Dovahkiin. The Dovahkiin. All of them are ‘important’. But in the end it matters not.”

“And how is that?”

“Because I am but a pawn. It is my Prince you contend with, mortal.”

"Prince?" he asked. Finally, a way to make it tell about its master. "Not a king or queen? Who is he?"

Another laugh. "You truly are a fool."

Danzo felt his irritation rising. The creature was dodging his questions, surely as a way to gain time. But to what end, imprisoned as it was? What worried him though was how easily it could read him. Of course he didn't trust Harissen-san. He was a foreigner, with no ties of loyalty to Konoha, and worse, he was gaining influence over their jinchuuriki.

"Your prince is not here," he said slowly. "He can't help you. You're out of his reach."

The creature just snorted at the threat, closing his yes for a moment. When it opened them again, they had changed. Both darker and yet brighter. Worried that it could be some kind of doujutsu, Danzo's hand went for the cane, ready to unsheathe the sword hidden in it.

"Out of my reach?" it said, but its voice sounded like a chorus of multiple speakers. Danzo couldn't help but take a step back. "Never."

A genjutsu, it had to be. A trick to make him believeー

"This is no trick, Shimura Danzo," it said. Danzo felt his eye go wide. How did it know his name? "You wished to ask questions, did you? Then ask them to me , not my servant."

"Who... what are you?" Danzo asked, using as much control he had to keep his voice even.

"My name is Boethiah," the voice proclaimed. "The Dark Warrior, Deceiver of Nations, Queen of Shadows, and many, many other titles. And you, Shimura Danzo, are the first of your people to hear my voice in over a millennia."

As the thing finished speaking, one of the seals covering the stone pillar caught fire, fizzling as its power collapsed. That, Danzo had to admit, was worrying. The others kept holding, though.

"I care not for these titles. I asked what you are," he said. He was almost convinced this was just a bizarre summon, but there was something. Something uneasy that crept into his heart, just by looking at it.

"I will indulge you, for you speak out of ignorance," the being said, keeping a stoic face. "Myself and my fellow Princes... we are beyond your comprehension, akin to gods."

Akin to gods, Danzo wondered. Did that mean they weren't gods?

"Our powers rival the Aedra's, and many of you mortals worship us. After all, our influence touches everyone in this world."

A chill crept up Danzo's spine. Was this creature reading his mind?

No, he couldn't think like that. The thing was trapped. It was probably just playing games with him.

Danzo glared at the creature. Was it toying with him? "If you're as powerful as you claim, why haven’t you spoken with anyone from this country for over a thousand years?"

The smile turned into a snarl, but it was gone in the blink of an eye. It was obvious to Danzo that whatever was talking to him right now, it wanted to keep the appearance of being in control. "Yes, it's true. A mortal, a very powerful one, had shrouded these lands from our sights. Only through my servant am I able to talk with you now. But do not be mistaken, Shimura Danzo: our eyes may be clouded, but what you mortals do still falls under a Prince's domain."

"And what may those be, Boethiah?" Danzo asked. "You attempt to sound formidable, and maybe you are. But what you're doing could be explained by a jutsu or seal that lets you puppet your servant."

Yes, everything else had to be just smoke and mirrors. A shinobi would know.

"You'd know about putting magical seals on your slaves, wouldn't you, Danzo?"

Only decades of practice allowed him to keep his composure, but inside Danzo was recoiling in shock. Nobody should know about the seals on the tongues of his ROOT shinobi. How was this possible?

"Deceit, treason, conspiracies, and many other things I believe are dear to you shinobi fall under my domain. I know you committed many of those," Boethiah said with a small smirk. "I compliment you."

"You know nothing," Danzo seethed. "You don't know what I’ve done for my village!"

"Conspiring with a tyrant to squash a group of rebels. Keeping an army loyal to yourself, and only yourself, behind your friend and leader's back. Ensuring that one of the founding families of your home was isolated and seen with suspicion. Coercing their heir into killing them all. And what you did with their eyes..." the being kept talking, and with each pause, one more seal started to burn. Cracks started to show in the stone pillar, like Danzo's resolution. "You amuse me, mortal."

Danzo had gone into this meeting filled with skepticism. Surely the foreigner's claims were just outlandish fantasies, and Inoichi's mind must have just been tampered with by the prisoner. But as the creature, no... the being behind the creature spoke, a hole dropped in his stomach. No one should know all of those things. It was as though it was reaching into his soul and plucking out his darkest secrets.

“That is why I'd like to make a proposition for you," Boethiah continued. “You are a man with many enemies, with fingers in many plots. You could accomplish much, much more, though...”

Danzo didn’t like where this was going, but he remained in silence as the creature continued.

“You desire to be Hokage, do you not? With my patronage, you could easily obtain that, and so much more. Your enemies would tremble. Your rule would be the highest peak this little 'village' of yours has ever seen. Many would respect Konoha, and everyone would fear it.”

Danzo had always dreamed of being Hokage. He still remembered the disappointment when the Nidaime had declared Sarutobi his successor, but it wasn’t just that. He knew that he could lead Konoha to a prosperous age where they would be respected and feared.


Sarutobi would have to step down soon, and Konoha needed a new leader.


He could already see it, his own face beside Sarutobi’s on the monument, but everyone would know that it was under him, and not his predecessor, that Konoha had obtained what was its right. ROOT absorbing the rest of ANBU into its ranks, his agents being able to strike everywhere throughout the Elemental Nations. The Daimyo himself wouldn't dare to oppose him.

All of this, if he accepted Boethiah's offer.


“So, do you accept?” Boethiah asked. Danzo’s fingers clenched around his cane


“No,” he said, barely able to hear his own voice.


“What did you say?” Boethiah asked. For the first time, the creature and its vessel seemed confused.


“No,” Danzo repeated, a bit louder. “If you truly are what you claim to be… then agreeing would only mean that I’d become your servant, or worse, a puppet. It would mean putting the whole village in your hands, it would mean betraying Konoha.”


Boethiah sounded almost amused. “Are you not a traitor already?” it asked mockingly.

“You have misread me, Boethiah. Everything I’ve done, everything , was for the village’s sake. And I would do it again, because I’ve always been loyal to the Hidden Leaf.”

"You... dare? You’ve made a grave mistake, mortal," Boethiah hissed. There was a sudden change in the room, and Danzo's lantern flickered as if struck by a strong current. "You wasted a prime opportunity, but if it won't be you, someone else will accept my patronage."

The stone pillar started trembling, cracks quickly forming on its surface. Danzo shifted his stance to be able to fight or flee.

"Maybe it will be one of your enemies. Maybe it will be a nobody that will rise to power thanks to me. Maybe it will be a tormented soul that will lead a revolution against the status-quo so dear to you shinobi and your masters," Boethiah continued, its voice like an outraged chorus. More of the seals burst to flames. "But you won't be there to see it!"

For a moment, Danzo saw a tall, caped figure instead of the dremora, wearing a dark armor of foreign design. He couldn't tell if it was a man or a woman. Then every single remaining seal flashed white-hot before disintegrating in a shower of embers and ashes. One of the figure's limbs broke out of the pillar aiming for his throat.

Before the creature’s clutches could close on him, Danzo’s sword was in his normally concealed arm. One single strike to the neck and the enraged screams ceased, replaced by a surprised look. A savage smile formed on the being’s face, then its body was engulfed by dark, purple flames.

When they dissolved, Danzo was briefly the only one in the cell. His ROOT shinobi entered barely a second later, weapons raised and searching for a threat.

“Danzo-sama, are you alright?!” the youngest of the two asked. Danzo looked at the half-destroyed pillar, empty and covered by what remained of the seals.

Sooner or later Sarutobi would find out about this intrusion, but that didn’t matter.

What mattered was that Konoha had new enemies, ones they had not suspected could even exist. He didn’t know how much time they had, but Boethiah and its kind would try to gain influence over the Elemental Nations. Someone, sooner or later, would agree to make a deal with them, or even to worship them.

ROOT would be ready to fight them, no matter the cost.


"Sven? Are you alright?" Beta asked when she noticed how the older boy had frozen all of sudden.

"I... yes, I'm fine," he said, pinching the bridge of his nose. "I thought I had felt something, for a moment. I'm probably just tired."

"Maybe because Sven has read so much lately," Ta'Sava offered. Yes, it was probably that. That morning Master Conrad had retired to the basem*nt that they had been forced to build. He’d carried along an armful of things and asked not be disturbed unless someone was trying to kill them. He still hadn’t emerged.

So they had been left mostly to their own devices, and after some simple experiments with new spells they had opted to study and compare notes. They didn't have many books from Tamriel, either in Nordic or Cyrodilic, and between the three of them they had read all of them by now. There were also the books in Akaviri, of course. Mostly about history, geography and a few other subjects that Inoichi had declared 'not classified'.

They weren't sure what was more tiring, reading all these volumes in multiple languages or Master Conrad's 'practical lessons'.

The silence in the clearing was broken by the sound of yet another balloon being torn apart. The trio looked up to see Naruto, Conrad's nephew, sitting on a charred piece of rock and loudly voicing his dismay.

Strangely, the sounds of the small toys blowing up weren't that disturbing. It was like having a clock: the kid would destroy a balloon just every few minutes. They had even timed the brewing of their tea based on them.


The boy looked up, as if he was sensing being observed. Sven met his eyes but quickly went back to his tome. He didn’t want to make the kid feel bad for having an audience witness his failures, and Sven still had a few chapters to go and notes to take.


He had barely read a page when he heard Master Conrad’s nephew sit beside him.

"Uh, hey," the younger boy told them. "What are you guys doing?"

"Studying," Sven said, pointing at the small pile of books.

"Sounds boring."

"It's fascinating, actually," Beta countered, picking up some of the notes she had written down so far. "Especially since there is so much Tamriel doesn't know or had forgotten about Akavir."

“Akavir?” Naruto asked, looking genuinely confused.


“That’s… wait, you guys call it the Elemental Nations, right?” Beta quickly asked. Naruto nodded and she continued. “See, Akavir is what these lands were called by your people a long time ago, and how Tamriel still calls them.”

“Maybe the Akaviri changed the name after all this time,” Ta’Sava suggested.

“But why would they have to change it?” Sven asked.

“Ta’Sava doesn’t know, Ta’sava is just guessing.”

“Anyway, we have known about this continent for a long time but most of what was written in the books, it turns out were… err…”


“Wrong,” Sven offered. “I can’t wait to see what the teachers at Winterhold will say when we’ll tell them.”

“Hey, at least you knew that we existed,” Naruto said. “We didn’t know about you guys at all.”

“Very strange, that,” Beta said. “We were invaded by your people a few times, you know.”

“Really? We did?”

“Yes. But that was thousands of years ago.”

“How do you know all that stuff?”

“Books,” Ta’Sava answered for everyone. “The three of us are students at this… school, back in Skyrim.”

“And we have to read a lot,” Beta added.

“How long do people have to study in school where you are from?” the kid asked.

“Arch-Mage Ervine always says that a wizard never stops studying,” Beta explained with a smile. “That’s, uh, the leader of our school.”

“Oh, like the Hokage?” Naruto asked, being suddenly very interested.

“I wouldn’t put it like that, the Hokage is the leader of Konoha, right?” Sven asked.

“You bet,” Naruto nodded. “And one day, I’m going to be Hokage too!”

Sven looked at his friends, who didn’t seem to know how to react to that statement. “Anyway, the Arch-Mage is the leader of the school, not the city around it.”

“Oh,” the kid said, almost sounding disappointed. Didn’t he realize how powerful an Arch-Mage could be?! “So, about all the stuff you’re learning…”

“Yes?” Sven asked, wondering when he could go back to his studies.

“Can you tell me about it?”

One more day, one more time Kakashi-sensei was late. Team 7, minus their lazy teacher, was waiting near the bridge they used as a meeting place, trying to distract themselves with various things to not be utterly bored.


Sasuke was practicing shuriken. Sakura was checking the explosive tag she had prepared. She had taken a bit of an interest in them after the fight with Gaara and had asked Kakashi-sensei to teach her. It was a dud, obviously, just for training purposes. Otherwise Naruto and Sasuke would’ve been standing a bit further away.


Naruto could’ve practiced creating a Rasengan, not that he was getting anywhere yet. Instead, he was moping. But he had a good reason!

“I can’t believe he made me clean my room.”


“Quit whining, Naruto,” Sakura said while making a few corrections to her tag. “That’s what parents do.”


“First of all, he’s my uncle,” Naruto pointed out. “But still, it’s my room. I’m the only person living there! Why does it matter if it’s messy?”


“A tidy room is a good thing,” she replied without looking up. The thump of Sasuke’s shuriken against the target got a bit louder.


“But he threatened to ban ramen for a week if I didn’t clean it!” he said, still not able to believe that had actually happened. That made her look up at him.


“Wait, you’ve never… you haven’t done chores before? Never been punished for misbehaving?”


Naruto thought about it. “I’ve been punished for my pranks?”


“That’s not... “ she sighed, putting down the equipment and turning towards him. “Look, that’s normal, you see? That’s what parents, or family, do! They make you clean your room, do chores and eat healthier food.”

“Again, he’s my uncle! And I’m not sure his food is that healthy…” he mumbled remembering the assortment of odd dishes his uncle and Sven had prepared. Lots of meat, lots of cheese—which had led to a lot of comments about the village not having the right kind of cheese—, lots of spices, lots of butter, almost no rice, a lot of bread... oh dang, he was hungry now. It was all tasty, even the ones that had more vegetables than Naruto cared for. But it wasn't ramen!

"I mean, your uncle is pretty much your parent, isn't he? I know my mom always makes me eat her weird cooking too. Sounds like the same thing to me."

“They don’t use chopsticks either, Sakura-chan!” Naruto continued. “My uncle saidー”

"Would you keep it down? You’re distracting me," Sasuke interrupted, biting out the words through clenched teeth. Much to Naruto and Sakura’s surprise, quite a few of the Uchiha’s weapons had missed their mark.

For a few moments nobody said anything. Sakura returned her attention to the paper tag, Sasuke started pulling his shuriken out of the tree he had been using as a target and Naruto considered taking out the equipment for the Rasengan. Then an idea came to him.

“Hey, Sasuke, what do you think about it?”

Sasuke stood straighter before turning around to glare coldly at him. For a moment, Naruto was sure that he had said something wrong for some reason, then Sasuke just looked away. “I think you should learn that jutsu you’ve been trying to use for weeks.”


Puzzled, Naruto looked at his teammate. “Yeah, but I still don’t know what to do about my weird uncle who won’t stop telling me what to do!”

“I’m going for a walk,” Sasuke said sharply before leaving the two of them by the bridge.

“Hey, come on! What should I do?!”


“Sasuke-kun, remember that Kakashi-sensei was supposed to be here one hour ago, so be sure to come back in two, tops!” Sakura yelled at their teammate’s retreating form before turning towards Naruto. “Honestly, just do what your uncle asks you so you won’t be grounded.”

“Grounded?” Naruto repeated the alien word he had never used before. “But he can’t do that! … can he?”

“Can I sit?” Jiraiya asked the woman that had tried to pretend he didn’t exist since he had entered the bar.

“Might as well,” Tsunade muttered, pointing at the cushioned bench on the other side of the small table. “How did you find me?”

“I asked some casino owners, then I followed the trail of debt,” he said smugly after getting himself comfortable. “I figured that sooner or later you would stop for a drink before going to gamble.”

“Running away from debtors makes me thirsty,” she grumbled, stirring her half-empty glass. “What do you want?”

“What, an old friend can’t catch up?” Jiraiya asked, opening his arms theatrically. Tsunade’s glare stopped him before he could make a joke about the good old times.

"Jiraiya, the only thing keeping me here is the booze left in this bottle. Quit being stupid and tell me what you want."

Jiraiya hesitated. A bit of booze in a bottle wasn’t much to keep Tsunade in one place. “Where’s Shizune, by the way?” he asked, scanning the crowded bar. If memory served him right, Dan’s niece had a talent for soothing Tsunade’s more reckless and hostile character traits. At least for long enough to allow him to make his move.

Besides, he wasn’t keen on the idea of having to explain everything he was about to tell Tsunade twice.

“She’s finding us some money to gamble away later when we skip town,” Tsunade said curtly. “I’ll ask one last time. What do you want?”

“Konoha was attacked.”

“So I heard,” the former medic told him before finishing her glass.

“You have?” he asked as she poured herself another one.

“It was the Chunin Exams, Jiraiya," Tsunade said tiredly. "There were diplomats from all over the Elemental Nations. People talk."

"Rumors started by people that were knocked out and woke up after the battle should not be trusted, Hime.”

"I’m not a genin fresh out of the academy, Jiraiya. I’m not going to trust the word of someone who claims that they’ve seen a giant winged lizard appear out of nowhere," she snorted.

"Oh, you mean the dragon? That one is true."

Tsunade stared at him incredulously. "What?"

"I was there; there was an actual dragon," he said. And if the mere fact wasn’t already incredible enough, Jiraiya would bet his entire spy network that countless instances of retellings and embellishments had warped the story into something far more bizarre than it already was.

"You're serious."

"You don't see a creature from legend soar over a Hidden Village every day."

Tsunade shook her head at the absurdity of the situation. "Whatever,” She took one more sip. “It’s none of my business. Nothing that’s happening in Konoha is, this included."

"You do realize that nobody has seen a dragon for centuries, right? Maybe even millennia."

"I know you didn't track me down to talk about dragons," Tsunade told him, pouring the rest of the liquor in the glass, holding the bottle a little longer to let every last drop fall down. "This is the last glass. You better get to the point."

"I could always pay for more."

"The day I accept a drink from you is the day I become Hokage," Tsunade snorted before sending him a glare. "That's why you're here, isn't it?"

"Sensei was hurt," Jiraiya said simply.

"Orochimaru's doing?" she asked. Jiraiya nodded, if she had heard about the dragon, she had heard about the three-headed snake summon, too. "Some say that he lost an arm, some say that he's dead..."

"He lost a leg, but he's very much alive. He sent me to invite you back, and to show you something."

Tsunade scoffed, taking one more sip. The glass was almost empty now. "What is it? His hat? Is he that desperate?"

"How he survived," Jiraiya reached inside of the backpack and retrieved a small vial full of a scarlet liquid. "Take a look, Tsunade-hime."

The last Senju had briefly recoiled at the sight of the potion, probably mistaking it for blood. Thankfully, as Jiraiya had hoped, she realized that it was a different substance.

"What is this?" she asked, examining the vial against the light.

"It's a recent addition to Konoha's tools. Soon it may become a standard issue for all of our shinobi."

"So, is it some kind of drug? A stimulant?"

"It's a powerful healing draught able to close and fix the most grievous wounds in a matter of seconds," Jiraiya explained. Tsunade's gaze moved from the glass vial to him.

"... that's not possible," she said flatly.

"It is, I saw it working myself," he told her. "It may not have saved Sensei's leg, but it stopped him from dying. It was used on other shinobi after the battle, too."

Tsunade remained silent for a few heartbeats, the last drops of booze in her glass all but forgotten. Jiraiya could almost see the gears turning into her head as she tried to make sense of what he had just said. "Who came up with this?" she asked finally.

"Oh, Minato's brother gave it to me. I don't think he invented them, though."

"... Minato's what ?"

Chapter 22: Learning the Family Business

Notes:

A huge thanks to my beta-readers, GwendolynStacy, Duesal Bladesinger, fishebake, To Mockingbird and PyrothTenka.

Chapter Text

“Hokage-sama, the Iwa delegation is at the village gates,” the chunin told Sarutobi.

“Good,” Sarutobi said, taking a drag from his pipe. Sitting in his office was getting more tiring by the day. He reminded himself that it was just for a little longer. “What about our honorable guests?”

“They’re being taken to the tower as we speak.”

“Escort the delegation here, ensure that there are no accidents on the way,” he ordered. Konoha really didn’t need any issues during this meeting. He would relax only when the Iwa-nin,allof them, had been escorted to the border. “One more thing, where is Harissen-san?”

“Still at the safehouse, according to the ANBU team shadowing him.”

“Ensure that he goes nowhere near the delegation.”

“Yes, sir,” the shinobi said before leaving the office. Sarutobi had been wrong. The last thing Konoha needed was Iwa believing that the Yellow Flash was still alive because someone saw his long-lost twin.

Hopefully his little plan would distract the Nord long enough.

Conrad sighed, checking himself in the mirror.

His facial hair was still too short. It was more akin to glorified stubble than a proper beard. It would take many more months before it was back to an acceptable length again.

He finished washing his face before going back to the kitchen area, ignoring the loud sound of feet running as Naruto and Ta’Sava fought to be first into the bathroom. Ninja skills proved to be the decisive factor this morning.

“Hahahaha! I win!” Naruto crowed ungraciously, as Ta’Sava grumbled outside.

“Not fair! Ta’Sava is not as fast as Naruto!”

“Too bad, the bathroom is mine now!”

Back in the kitchen, Conrad was welcomed by the sight of Sven making a steaming teapot float across the room with his magic. With great concentration, the young wizard poured the hot liquid into five cups before letting it land on the table.

Sure, it wasn’tperfect, the teapot had come close to falling from the telekinetic grasp a couple of times, but that was still better than what Conrad could do when he had been studying magic at the Winterhold College, at a much later age. Still...

“Sven, don’t practice that with something that contains hot liquids,” he reprimanded. “You could hurt someone.”

“Nobody was in the kitchen, Master.”

Youwere in the kitchen,” Conrad pointed out. The young Imperial just rolled his eyes, in perfect teen fashion. Was this what he’d have to look forward to with Naruto one day? Eyerolls and being ignored?

That would require Naruto staying a part of his life by the time he turned into a moody young man, though. Which seemed to depend on what Sarutobi’s successor, whoever that may be, would say on the matter. Either that or ask the boy if he wanted to run away with him. That was an option, too.

The temptation to simply whisk him away without asking was stronger than Conrad wanted to admit.

Before Conrad could start mulling through a few possible plans for benevolent and totally justified kidnapping, he was distracted by someone knocking at the door. He went to answer and there was Inoichi, who stepped inside at the unspoken invitation.

“What are you doing here?” Conrad asked.

“Good morning, Conrad, what a warm welcome,” Inoichi deadpanned.

“Hello, Inoichi,” he said in a matching tone of his voice. “What are you doing here so early?”

The last time Conrad had showed up with some bottles of sake at the man’s house, he had been told that the Yamanaka clan leader was very busy. If that was because he was supposedly the head of the entire Interrogation department or because his wife wasn’t happy with the two of them having a few drinks he wasn’t sure. In his defense, Conrad wasn’t willing to talk about daedric lore without some drinks in his body, and the booze they had here was not very satisfying for his taste.

He couldn’t wait for his mead to be ready.

“I’m afraid I’m here just for a delivery,” Inoichi said, putting a scroll in Conrad’s hands. “Straight from the Hokage. He would have delivered it himself, but he’s busy today.”

“Thanks…?” Conrad said, looking at the scroll uncertainly. “Why did he send me a letter?”

“It’s not a letter, it’s a sealing scroll.”

Conrad looked to the scroll, then back at Inoichi. “A what?”

“Wait, you don’t… of course you don’t know, sorry. I should’ve realized. It’s a sealing scroll, it’s used to store things.”

“What kinds of things?” Conrad asked, turning the scroll over in his hands. It didn’t look capable of holding much inside of it, being a literal roll of paper and whatnot.

“Whatever you might need to keep somewhere safe,” Inoichi answered. “In this specific one, things that apparently belong to you. The Hokage wished to deliver them.”

Conrad stopped inspecting the scroll and opened it, revealing a complex array of runes and symbols. Given the way Inoichi was looking at him, he decided this was probably an example of weird ninja magic. He could always examine it later.

“Just ask Naruto to push a bit of chakra in the seal to activate it,” Inoichi explained before Conrad could ask. "By the way, you and Naruto are invited to dinner tonight, at Chouza's place."

"Who?"

"Ah, you met us both during the invasion, I guess you weren't properly introduced. He was a friend of Minato's too, so..."

"I see, very well," Conrad agreed.

"Come to my place a little before dinner, the Akimichi clan is not far from there," Inoichi told him, before opening the door again and facing him. "I’m afraid I really have to go now.”

“Already? Are you that eager to get inside someone’s head?”

“My job isn’t justpoking around in peoples’ brains, Conrad. See you soon.” And with that, Inoichi nodded farewell and left, leaving Conrad to stare at the scroll. He wasn’t sure what Inoichi meant about it containinghisthings. He’d already gotten his weapons, armor and other belongings back. Even his staff.

After the kids had showered and everyone had eaten, Conrad took Naruto off to the side while his apprentices practiced their spellcasting outside. He asked Naruto about these scrolls with seals in them.

“Oh, yeah! Kakashi-sensei showed one to us once,” Naruto said. “Never had to use one before, though. Why’d the Old Man give it to you?”

“Apparently it has something that belongs to me inside it,” Conrad responded, trying to bite back a groan. This was probably the Hokage trying to be mysterious by proxy. “Inoichi told me something about you having to push some chakra into it to open it.”

In his opinion it didn’t seem like a very helpful way to give instructions to use an unknown shinobi thing. Still, they put the scroll on the table and after unrolling it Naruto touched it, closing his eyes. There was a puff of smoke which made him cough a little bit. Before he could ask if that was what was supposed to happen, he saw how the scroll was now covered by a pile of objects. A heap of loot, clearly from Tamriel, was strewn all over the table, spilling over into the floor.

Conrad’s mind nearly went into overdrive trying to figure out how this was possible. Magic, of course. But what kind? How did it work? Did the scroll contain the items through some sort of… shrinking spell? No, that didn’t make sense. Maybe the items were turned into a scroll, and… no, the scroll was clearly still on the table, underneath all the other things.

Reluctantly, he decided that he’d have to figure it out later, his attention moving to said items from Tamriel laying in front of them. Valuable things.

Steel armor, slightly rusted and well worn, but forged splendidly nonetheless. A ring with a bright gem. A few books, some of which were on the floor now. A coin purse that, given the size, probably held a dozen golden septims tops. And a single ebony blade, lovingly engraved with traditional Nordic designs.

“Whoa,” Naruto said. “You didn’t tell me you had all this.”

“It isn’t mine,” Conrad said, his voice thickening with sudden realization. “These are my mother’s things.”

Grandma’sthings?!” Naruto shouted, in shock or excitement Conrad didn’t know, but the boy was loud as usual. “Wait, how do you know that?”

“It’s the only explanation that makes sense. I didn’t arrive with these items, and I doubt the Hokage would give them to me without a reason,” he explained, his eyes not moving from the gaping gashes and broken mail rings in the armor. “I guess that your Hokage thought I’d appreciate the gesture.”

“Yeah, of course we do… right?” Naruto slowly asked, sounding uncertain after looking at Conrad's expression.

Conrad tried to think about how he, a grown man old enough that some of the other adults he knew had been children when he had killed his first dragon, could explain to a young orphan that had been starving for affection his whole lifewhyhe didn’t appreciate being given some mementos of his dead mother whom he’d never met. He couldn’t see any way to do this successfully or with the proper tact such a discussion would require, and opted to mumble something vaguely affirmative while picking up the books.

Even if they were his mother’s, it didn’t mean they deserved to stay on the kitchen floor. Urag gro-Shub had taught him better than that.

Just as he finished placing them on a small pile on the table, he saw the boy’s hand drifting closer to the ebony blade, and lightly slapped it.

“Don’t touch anything until I tell you it’s safe,” Conrad ordered after Naruto retracted his hand.

“But... they’reGrandma’sthings. Why wouldn’t they be safe?”

Conrad suppressed a sigh. It was a reasonable assumption for a child to have. But still one that could get him killed or maimed if he ever found himself to deal with magic in Tamriel. “Look… This stuff is from my homeland, it may be magical,” he explained. Actually, Conrad was ready to bet on it. “Some magic items can be downright nasty.”

Naruto scrunched up his eyes in confusion. “Nasty? What’s that supposed to mean?”

“Some items have magic that can be dangerous if you don’t know how to use it,” he started explaining. “Others may be cursed.”

“Cursed?” Naruto asked disbelievingly.

“It means that bad stuff may happen if you use them, or touch them, or…”

“I know what cursed means!” Naruto exclaimed. “Just, what kind of bad stuff?”

“It depends. Some may just be annoying… Once, I found a quill that would write on its own, but that only wrote down swear words.”

“That doesn’t sound so ba―”

“And another time, I found a guy who had been killed by the ring he was wearing: it had sucked out all of his blood.”

At that, Naruto leaned as far from the table as his chair allowed him to. “Ew. So... no poking the things.”

“No poking the things untilIpoke them,” Conrad corrected.

“But Uncle, why do you think that Grandma might have had some cursed things with her when…?” Naruto trailed off, uncertainly.

“When she died?” Conrad completed the question. “I’ll admit that it’s… improbable. But not impossible.”

Maybe it was petty of him, but if he had to deal with his mother’s belongings, he was going to treat them the same way he treated any loot gained during his trips around Skyrim and beyond.

“So… why is that sword black?” Naruto asked, pointing at the nordic blade.

“Ebony. Very rare,verystrong.” He picked it up carefully, using a rag to avoid touching it directly and hefted it, testing the balance.

“What’s ebony?”

“The strongest natural metal in existence. It’s hard to forge and even harder to find, since the biggest veins in Tamriel are unreachable thanks to a volcano.”

Naruto looked at the sword appraisingly. “And Grandma had something like that?”

Conrad shrugged. “Looks like it. I don’t know much about who she was or what she did, but she must have been pretty good if she had a blade this rare.”

“Yeah, Grandma must have been the strongest!” the boy cheered.

Conrad carefully ignored that. He had just said that the woman had probably been skilled, after all… and it wasn’t like he didn’t know already. One of the very few things his father told him was that his mother had been a very skilled warrior. He just had not seen proof of it until now.

Conrad moved his hand along the blade, being careful not to touch it. He felt... yes, there was something in this blade. Something that had been mostly spent by now, the soul trapped in the blade was almost gone. It probably had a good fight or two left. Still, what kind of enchantment was it…? Conrad tried to remember the lesson that he had not been that interested in.

Closing his eyes, he tried to reach the magic inside of the blade. He felt a disconcerting warmth that contrasted to how cool the blade was supposed to be. There was a drive to consume... no, not consume, damage,destroy, in the magic. Destruction magic, then.

If his mother had been a swordswoman, and given the almost-spent charge inside of the saber, Conrad was fairly sure that the weapon wasn't cursed. He carefully grasped the hilt in his right hand and held it tight. He felt as the blade stirred under his magic, unnatural embers sparking to life across its surface, glowing bright in the runes carved into it.

"Flame enchantment," he said to Naruto as fire spread along the blade. "Anything cut with this will burn."

"Whoa!" Naruto exclaimed, mouth hanging open.

"First time seeing a magic weapon, boy?"

"Well, yeah! Can I have it?” Naruto asked, briefly surprising Conrad. He should’ve expected such a question. He had been a kid too once, and spent quite a few afternoons pretending that a stick was an enchanted sword out of some legend. Except Naruto didn’t want to pretend.

“Do you even know how to use a sword?” he asked with a raised eyebrow. He had still not seen many shinobi using blades, with the exception of those masked guards and some of the invaders he had killed. He wondered why. Going around without a proper weapon just seemed… odd. Those overly small knives the ninja seemed oddly fond of didn’t count.

“Well… no,” the boy admitted. “But Kakashi-sensei could teach me?”

“Not with this weapon,” Conrad shook his head, putting the sabre back in its sheath, smothering the glowing runes and flames.

“Aww, come on…” Naruto whined.

“It’s not forpractice, boy,” Conrad scolded. “You do not learn to use a weapon with a magical one.”

“But isn’t your axe magical?" Naruto asked, looking at it. “Does it fly back in your hand or something?

"No, it's not," Conrad answered, picking up the axe and freeing it from its leather sheath so that Naruto could inspect the weapon for himself.

"But…” Naruto hesitated, clearly confused when no magic appeared on the axe’s edge . “Aren't you a wizard?"

"I am," he nodded, in a tone that made it clear the boy was just stating the obvious as he re-sheathed his axe.

"Then why isn't your weapon en... ench... ?" Naruto tried, struggling with the word.

"Enchanted," Conrad helped him. He just hoped he didn’t mess up the translation, it would’ve been embarrassing if a scholar found out.

"Yeah, that."

"Because everyone remembers someone going around with a weapon that spews fire or lightning or pure evil energy or whatever was available when the weapon was enchanted. Nobody bats an eye when they see someone with a completely normal weapon. Do you understand?"

"Not really, Uncle,” Naruto admitted. “Wouldn't it be better having an axe like Grandma's sword?"

"It's... it's a bit like when you shinobi go around, being sneaky and unseen," he said, picking up the rag again and trying to figure which item to take a look at next… the ring would do.

"Oh," Naruto said, realization dawning on his face.

"Besides, I’m not very good at enchanting things," Conrad told the boy as he examined the ring. Sure, there was also the fact that seeing the Soul Cairn had squashed whatever remote interest he’d had in experimenting in the field until he managed to get it out of sheer stubbornness, but that place was something Naruto didn’t need to know about until Conrad figured out if it was possible to get Minato’s soul out of it. Or if it was impossible.

The ring was a simple band of gold, with a square-cut ruby in the middle. Absolutely unremarkable, similar to many rings Conrad had used as a more portable substitute for a heavier sum of Septims. He didn’t care for the ruby or the gold though, he was more interested in the specks of magic he could feel even through the rag.

Whatever had been used to enchant the ring had been a powerful creature once, that was sure. He slowly moved his fingers closer to the ring, trying to listen through them to the sorceries bound to it. A soothing sensation that only he could feel reached his senses, singing in the language of the Restoration school. A soothing choir of healing and good vitality.

He grinned when he realized exactly what the ring did. "Here, boy. Put this on andkeepit on."

"What? Why?" Naruto eyed the ring dubiously. "Aren't rings girly?"

“Girly?” Conrad asked, bewildered.

“You know, for girls!”

"Don't be stupid. Rings aren't girly.” Honestly, where did that logic even come from?

“They are!” Naruto insisted childishly.

“Look, it belonged to your grandmother, and I’m giving it to you now. It’s yours,” Conrad said pointedly, looking Naruto in the eyes. If he had to use his mother’s memory to let the boy keep something that would make him less keen to die, so be it. “Now, wear it."

"Alright, alright! But why do I have to?” Naruto whined, putting the ring on his finger and grimacing all the while.

"This ring has a very strong magic that makes you heal faster, and given how much you wind up getting hurt, clearly you need it."

Maybe with this Conrad wouldn’t have to worry about rushing to his bruised and battered nephew’s side with all the potions he could carry. Of course, it’d be best if his nephew simply never got hurt at all, but something told him that was a tall order.

"But I already―" Naruto paused and very deliberately stopped himself from saying whatever he was about to say.

Conrad eyed him suspiciously. "What, boy? Spit it out."

"Nothing," Naruto muttered, taking the ring and slipping it onto his finger, taking a moment to inspect it. "It still looks girly." He got a curious look on his face. "How much faster can I heal now?"

“I’d rather not testthatany time soon, but if I’m right, enough to allow you to get back on your feet after very little time. Like a troll.”

“And a troll… heals quickly?” asked the boy.

“Yes, very quickly. That’s why you need to kill them with fire, or by chopping them apart. Even then, just to be sure, you should set them on fire. Understand?”

“Uh… yeah... I don’t think I’ll ever see one, though.”

“Who knows? Life is unpredictable,” Conrad snorted, thinking back at what had happened in the last few months. At least the boy seemed to be receptive when it came to good old Nord wisdom. He glanced at the pile of books. Just a few volumes that would easily fit in a traveller’s bag… a large one, at least. They didn’t look magical, or at least they didn’t look anything like the evil tomes from the Apocrypha. Granted, Hermaeus Mora didn’t have the exclusive on evil tomes.

“Ugh, books…” Naruto lamented as Conrad checked the first on the pile. It seemed to be a simple herbarium. Nothing too fancy or concerning exoting plants, just what someone would find in most of Tamriel.

“What’s wrong with books?” he couldn’t help but ask as he noticed some corrections and notes presumably added by his mother, who seemed to have a strong opinion on authors that didn’t do their research correctly or were lazy and didn’t write all the potential uses for a mushroom.

“They’re boring, and… hard to read,” the boy explained, deflating on the table.

“They can be, yes,” Conrad conceded, guessing that for a little kid a book wasn’t as exciting as… running on rooftops? Sparring? What did ninja children do for fun anyway? “But how’re you going to learn if you don’t read?”

“But I’m not in the Academy anymore, Uncle,” Naruto said.

“The Academy?” Conrad asked, glancing up from a particularly scathing cluster of notes. “Isn’t that your ninja school?” He remembered Inoichi explaining something about it in passing.

“Yeah, I’m a genin now. I don’t go to classes anymore, so I don’t need to study.”

Conrad paused and looked up from the book, staring at his now squirming nephew.

“Are you telling me you haven’t read a book since leaving this school?”

Naruto squirmed even more, realizing he may have just doomed himself. “I… I just don’t like books?”

Conrad closed his eyes, pinched the bridge of his nose with a sigh, then closed his book. Children, honestly. “Next time we’re going to buy groceries, we’ll pick something up for you to read.”

Naruto immediately started whining. “Do we have to?”

“It’s important,” Conrad tried to think of a way to put it so that Naruto wouldn’t just get bored and rebellious. “You want to become Hokage, right?”

“Yeah, of course!” Naruto exclaimed. “And I need to be strong for it! How’s abookgonna help me become the strongest?”

“You don’t seriously think that Sarutobi, or your father, got their… hat, I guess, just by being strong?”

The look on Naruto’s face was not encouraging.

“... kinda? I mean, the Hokage is the strongest and most respected ninja in the village! If I became Hokage, everyone would have no choice but to respect me!”

How had the child made it this far with nobody setting him straight?

"A ruler isn't just the strongest person, they're also in charge of keeping everything running. And that requiresstudying," Conrad pointed at the book for emphasis.

"But that soundsboring," Naruto complained, his face scrunching up even more at the unfairness of it all.

"Yes. Work is boring, and being a ruler is alotof work," Conrad nodded. "Still, you should read and learn as much as you can, regardless.”

“Why?” Naruto demanded, voice filled with childish petulance. Was Conrad ever this stubborn with his own father? He must have been. This had to be his own punishment for being a difficult child.

“Because it’s good for you! You may never know when you may need some knowledge about herbs,” Conrad explained, pointing at the book in his hand.

“I don’t know, I mean, I guess that Haku knew about herbs, but―”

“Or history, or geography, or legends,” he continued, opening a book after another. “Or spells!”

“Spells? But I’m a ninja!”

Instead of answering, Conrad rigidly looked down and realized he had opened a honest-to-Julianosspellbookwithout checking if it was safe first. He was briefly grateful that the author had not inscribed some explosive runes or something nastier in it, then he noticed the now familiar calligraphy.

“Huh,” he said eloquently. “My mother was a wizard.”

That was... unexpected. Especially since Conrad remembered way too well his father's stance against magic. Which actually explained a lot, now that he thought about it. Not a proper Nord thing indeed.

"Is that weird?" Naruto asked, unaware of the sudden turmoil in Conrad’s mind, peering down at the spellbook but thankfully not poking at it like he clearly wanted to do. Well, at least he was taking an interest in books.

"It is for Nords, yes,” Conrad replied, his fingers tracing over the arcane patterns.

"Why?"

"It's... complicated. Mostly because it's not seen as something warriors should use," Conrad told Naruto. He didn’t really feel like giving the boy a whole lecture about the cultural reasons behind the legendary dislike his people had for magic.

“I don’t get it,” Naruto said after a moment of silence, sounding very confused.

“Yeah, me neither,” Conrad nodded, flipping through a few pages of his mother’s spellbook before closing its cover. Maybe he had more in common with his mother than he wanted to admit.

He’d dwell on it later, after he had checked the rest of her things. Conrad grabbed the pouch and shook it, hearing the sound of metal clinking. Aah, septims, always a welcome addition to his belongings. As he emptied the coin purse, he briefly thought that maybe he’d reconsider his opinion regarding his mother.

Then he saw the black soul gem rolling out along with the various coins.

“Boy?” he said, breaking a silence that may have lasted just a few seconds or minutes.

“Yes, Uncle?”

“I’m going out for a walk,” he said, putting the gem back in the pouch and securing it to his belt. “I need air.”

“Can I come too?”

“Sure, why not.”

“Can we go eat ramen for lunch later?”

“Maybe,” he quickly said, as he put on the large hat and cape he used to go out.

Entering Konoha had been strangely easy, especially given how tight the security was supposed to be after the events of the last Chunin Exams. Or the arrival of a delegation from Iwa, of all places.

Most people would’ve waited for a different day to try to sneak into a Hidden Village.

Kisame wasn’t most people. Neither was his silent companion.

"How does it feel coming back home?" he asked, sipping his warm tea. It wasn't as good as the drinks in Tea Country, but not as bad as the ones in Amegakure.

Uchiha Itachi ignored his question, opting to subtly scan the street outside of the teashop and its rooftops.

They spent some time like that, drinking tea and waiting for the diplomatic meeting to begin so that everyone's attention would be on the Hokage tower. Kisame felt Samehada's hunger. It was getting impatient.

"So, how do we find a little genin in a ninja village?" he asked.

Itachi finished his tea and got up. “Naruto-kun was never subtle. We’ll find him.”

Sasuke had finally found Naruto.

It had taken a bit longer than he had planned, but for once his teammate’s choice of clothes was helpful. Now Sasuke could just shadow him from the rooftops while Naruto kept following his uncle like a lost puppy.

What was so special about that man anyway? He wasn’t a shinobi. He wasn’t even from Konoha! It just irked him how Naruto would keep going on and on and on about his uncle for no reason.

So, Sasuke had decided to find out what was so special about said uncle. That was the only reason he was wasting his time doing this. He didn’t care about the fact that the former dead-last had found a long-lost relative, why would he?

“Come on, Uncle, just pay. We’ve been here for forever,” he heard Naruto arguing. Sasuke rolled his eyes. They’d been in front of a second-hand book stand for only ten minutes, of course the blond idiot would be bored already.

“Boy, when you buy something youhaveto haggle,” the man explained, pausing the verbal spar he was having with the book vendor for just for a moment.

“But why? There’s a price tag right there!”

“Yes, I saw it. I still want to teach you something.”

“About what?”

“About haggling,” Naruto’s uncle declared, before meeting the book seller’s eyes. As if in a mutual agreement, the battle over a very low price started again.

In the end, they were able to buy an extra book for just five more coins. So the man wasn’t just a civilian, he was a penny pitcher, too. It didn’t seemthatimpressive to Sasuke.

Much to Sasuke's surprise, the various shopkeepers seemed to indulge the man's poor shopping etiquette rather than shooing Naruto and his uncle away. With each stop the two made, the more he wondered why he was still following them. He was obviously wasting his time here.

He wasn't jealous of Naruto and that was final.

His musings were interrupted when he caught a brief glimmer of movement in a nearby tree. Before he could turn around, it was gone, but he was able to notice the flash of a white porcelain mask. ANBU.

Were they following Naruto and his uncle? That... kinda made sense, considering that Naruto was Konoha's jinchuuriki and how they were both related to the Yondaime. Sasuke wasn't really sure how he felt about that yet.

He couldn't help but wonder if Naruto had had ANBU bodyguards before. Next thing he knew, an ANBU had landed beside him, his faceless mask staring at Sasuke a bit too close for his comfort.

"Uchiha-san," the ANBU closest to him asked, almost a whisper. "Why are you following your teammate and one of Konoha's honored guests?"

Sasuke tried to come up with an answer but hesitated. He didn't know why he was on that rooftop in the first place. Or he didn't want to admit it.

"Hey Sasuke!" Startled by being called all of sudden, Sasuke looked down. Naruto was right underneath him, looking up, while his uncle was busy browsing some merchandise at a nearby stand. "What are you doing up there?"

Sasuke glanced towards the ANBU. Gone, of course. Naruto called him again. "Nothing," he said. No time to hesitate. "I was just... practicing my wall-running."

That was a terrible lie. No way Naruto would fall for it.

"Oh, alright!" Naruto nodded. Sasuke really wanted to sigh. Of course Naruto would believe that. "Hey, do you want to come with me and my uncle for lunch? We were about to go to Ichiraku's."

"... Okay."

Conrad barely registered that Naruto had invited a friend to eat ramen. Not because he didn’t care, but because his mind was a bit busy processing his latest discovery.

Even aggressive haggling for the few things he had bought alongside the books for the boy hadn’t helped distract him from the discovery of the black soul gem. More importantly, from wondering why his mother had a black soul gem on her.

None of the scenarios that kept forming in his mind were of his liking.

“Here you go, Harissen-san!” The serving girl placed a big bowl of ramen with some extra toppings and meat in front of him. She did the same with the two boys and Naruto started digging with gusto, his serving of noodles, vegetables, and pork, all simmering in steaming delicious-smelling broth. All while exchanging enthusiastic words with the old cook and his daughter. Conrad could understand why his nephew was so fond of this place.

“So, your name is… Sasaki, right?” he asked, trying to start a conversation with the other kid.

“UchihaSasuke. I’m in the same team as Naruto. This is the third time we’ve met,” Sasuke reminded him after swallowing his food. Clearly the kid had more table manners than Naruto, but for some reason the Nord could swear that he was being judged by the moody twelve-year-old.

“Don’t take it personally, Sasuke,” Naruto told his friend, his speech miraculously unimpaired while he inhaled his bowl of noodles. “Uncle’s just terrible with remembering names.”

Conrad frowned. It wasn’t like he had trouble remembering names. He just didn’tcare. He avoided saying that out loud though, not wanting to spoil the meal’s oddly mixed mood.

His thoughts went back to the gem currently hanging from his belt. Sure, he had found a large number of black soul gems back in the day. It came with the territory of exploring ancient places, ruins, killing necromancers or vampires that happened to be necromancers. And sure, he had kept those… under a floorboard back at home, to be sure that they would not be used to trap a person’s soul. Selling them was out of the question, they were too dangerous.

So why would a woman bring one when she was planning a long trip by ship with her baby?

He doubted that it was because it was a memento or a gift from a loved one. Who would pick a black soul gem as a gift? Did she keep it on herself because she was willing to soul-trap a person? Did she even know what happened to them, or the dangers of using a black soul gem? Was she a cultist or something?!

“Uncle, are you not hungry?”

Conrad looked up, realizing that he had been staring at his bowl for some time. Even the cook was giving him an odd look. Picking up his chopsticks, he ate some of the toppings before trying to go for the noodles. He almost managed to put them in his mouth before they fell into the broth with a splash, sending drops of broth everywhere.

Well, at least he had given the proper way to eat this dish a try. He picked up the bowl and started drinking the broth, so that he could finish the rest of the damn thing without making a mess. He had to admit it, though, that it was pretty good.

He couldn't really enjoy the taste, though. The thoughts about his mother kept coming back, haunting him like a ghost. She was dead and gone, the black gem was just one of the things she had when she died. Did it really matter why she had it? After all, torturing himself like this wouldn’t get him any answers, especially from a dead woman.

Memories of the souls trapped in the Soul Cairn flashed through his mind.

It mattered tohim, though.

“Iruka-sensei!” Naruto yelled all of a sudden, startling Conrad. His nephew was waving eagerly at a ninja that had just entered through the ramen stand’s curtains. A man with a tan, a spiky ponytail and a large scar through his face who immediately gave the boy a warm smile.

“Hello Naruto, Sasuke,” the scarred ninja greeted before turning towards Conrad with a slight bow. “You must be Harissen-san, Hokage-sama told me about you.”

“Uncle, this is Iruka-sensei! He taught our class at the Academy!”

“Oh, I see,” Conrad said. So this was the man that taughtchildrenhow tokill… why was Naruto so glad to see him?

“He taught us stuff like how to read, how to do taijutsu, math, how to use chakra and ninjutsu…”

“Not that you learned much,” Sasuke commented dryly from his stool.

"Screw you, jerk!” Naruto rounded on him in what was clearly an old argument. “I passed that test fair and square!"

Sasuke only scoffed before slurping up more noodles. Iruka smiled at their antics and sat besides them before ordering some ramen for himself.

“So… how old are children when they start at this Academy of yours?” Conrad asked carefully.

“Oh, it’s not mine, I’m just a teacher there,” Iruka explained, most likely mistaking his reasons for asking, smiled at the apparent interest. “But to answer your question, most of the students I had started when they were five years old.”

Five years old. Conrad wondered what he’d been doing when he’d been at that age. He thought of vague memories of throwing rocks at mudcrabs and then running away, or learning how to read. Or had he been six?

“It took forever to graduate,” Naruto grumbled grumpily. His friend gave a brief nod, seemingly agreeing with the sentiment.

“Doesn’t it only take seven years?” Conrad wondered.

“Yeah, that’s a lot.” It sure was from the point of view of the boy. It was more than half of his life, after all.

“It takes a long time to teach someone how to mold chakra properly,” Iruka said. “And that’s not considering that they also have to learn how to read and write, math, geography, basics of ninjutsu…”

“And how to fight,” Conrad added, giving a side eye to Iruka.

“Well, yes. Genin have to be able to fight once they’re assigned to their teams,” the teacher explained, as if it was the most natural thing in the world.

“Your Hokage told me that such a thing is considered…necessary,” Conrad said, his distaste for such a practice dripping from the word. “Why’s that?”

Iruka seemed to think about the question for a few more seconds before answering, at least. "Well, our genin need to be able to deal with possible threats, Harissen-san. Like people attacking their clients. So they need to know how to defend themselves. How to fight, survival skills, anything and everything they could possibly need as shinobi." It was obvious from his tone that the man took genuine pride in his work, but worse still was the smile Naruto sent his way.
The shinobi kept talking, saying something about fire having a will that Conrad didn’t really get. Still, he had met enough zealots in his life to recognise how this Iruka character was using circular logic to justify himself, probably without even realising that.

Still, he bit his tongue for once. He knew that Naruto would speak in defense of his teacher, as much as the man didn't deserve it.

“Don’t worry, Harissen-san,” Iruka continued in a reassuring tone. “I realise that parents would worry about their children―”

Conrad almost swallowed on a noodle. “What?” he managed to ask.

“Well, you’re Naruto’s legal guardian after all,” the teacher continued. “I realise you’d be worried about his safety. But genin are not supposed to fight against other shinobi. Simple bandits aren’t much of a threat for one of them, and a team will be protected by a jonin. You saw what a jonin can do, right? A team led by a jounin-sensei is not supposed to fight other shinobi either.”

Conrad simmered over the twisted logic. He had to very reluctantly admit, no matter how much he disliked it, that there was a little of truth in the man’s words. These shinobi were faster and more agile than most people, and able to use weird magic. Naruto was pretty much able to create a little army of himself. He had no idea if it was exceptional or not by ninja standards, but if such skills were normal… maybe fighting against bandits posed little danger, no matter how he disapproved of it.

“Except that on our first C-rank mission the client lied. We had to fight some shinobi,” Sasu-something said after observing the scene in silence.

“Hey, he had a good reason for it and you know it!” Naruto protested.

Conrad slowly turned towards his nephew, in a silent question so loud that the boy actually stopped eating his ramen.

“It turned out okay!” Naruto said defensively, ignoring the pointed look Sasuke was shooting at him. “Well… Haku and Zabuza died, but old man Tazuna and Inari and Tsunami made it out okay! And thanks to us Wave is doing great!”

"Wave?" Conrad asked distractedly. He didn’t know who any of those people were and he didn’t really want to know, he was mostly wondering how any of that could count as ‘okay’, especially now that he knew what 'okay' meant. But figured he was supposed to say something.

"A little island by the Land of Fire's coast," Sasuke took over. "A rogue businessman turned warlord took over, forcing the locals to comply thanks to armed thugs. Our client, Tazuna, had a plan to break their monopoly and hired Konoha shinobi for protection."

"And we kicked their butts!" Naruto loudly proclaimed.

Sasuke crossed his arms and grunted, a frown on his face.

"What? We did!"

"And almost died," Sasuke muttered.

"Well, yeah, but we also kicked their butts!"

While the kids started arguing about how an enemy had apparently not been that willing to kill them in the first place, Conrad decided he needed help to process the information that these two kids were trivializing the fact that they could've died in battle. How many times had his nephew been thrust into pointless danger, all for money?

"Do you serve anything to drink?" he asked the ramen girl.

"Sure thing, Harissen-san! We have some tea, or―"

"I'll have the strongest thing you have," he interrupted, not being interested in tea or any other not-alcoholic related things right now.

"Are you sure?" she asked hesitantly. "It's quite early."

"So?"

That gained him a slight frown from Iruka. After briefly glancing towards Naruto for some reason, the waitress produced a sake bottle and a cup. Conrad just drank from the bottle, finding comfort in the familiar warmth that followed. He immediately ordered another one.

"Anyway, they even named a bridge after me!" Naruto proclaimed, and Conrad realized the boy was still talking to him. "We should go visit one day!"

"A bridge?" Conrad wondered. Twelve years old and the boy had a landmark named after him? Talk about starting young. "I'd like to see it." Especially if it meant meeting the guy that had lied and put Naruto―and, he guessed, Naruto’s teammates―in danger. Just to have a few choice words when Naruto wasn't looking.

"Both of you handled yourselves well, succeeding in your mission despite the circ*mstances," Iruka smiled fondly. “Seeing his students succeed is the best thing a teacher can ask for.”

Sasuke nodded politely, but Naruto beamed. It was a bit odd seeing how utterly opposite the two were. Without saying a word, the Uchiha stood up and pushed his empty bowl towards the serving girl, fishing out some money to pay.

Conrad stopped him immediately. "Don't worry about it. Naruto invited you, so you're our guest here." He took his new wallet out and paid before Sasuke could protest. Paper money was admittedly more convenient than coinage… even if it wasn’t as satisfying as shiny coins.

The kid seemed to wonder if he should accept or not, before settling for a small bow of gratitude. "Thank you, Harissen-san. Naruto. Iruka-sensei."

"Hey, where are you going?" Naruto asked before Sasuke even turned around.

"I want to train a bit, since we didn't have a team meeting today."

"Do you want me to come? We could train together," Naruto offered casually, but Conrad could hear the careful hope in his voice.

Again, Sasuke seemed to think about how to answer for a bit longer than necessary. "Sure, whatever," he shrugged, before leaving.

"Alright!” Naruto cheered, leaping from his stool. “See you later Uncle! Bye Iruka-sensei! Bye Ayame, Old Man Teuchi! Thanks for the ramen!"

Once the kids had left, Conrad found himself alone with Naruto's former teacher. And the two owners, he guessed, but mostly with Iruka.

"You know, it’s none of my business but drinking is not a good habit, especially in front of kids."

Oh, great. So not only did Iruka train children to fight, but he was also a teetotaller that drew the line at drinking in front of them.

“You’re right, it’s none of your business” he said, taking a swig out of spite.

“The Hokage warned me you weren’t easy to talk to,” Iruka sighed, shaking his head. Where was he trying to go with this?

“I would like to see howyoupeople would talk to me after spending a couple months in a cell in Skyrim,” Conrad grumbled after savoring the taste of the sake. It wasn’t mead but it was growing on him. “We don’t have toilets, though.”

“You… what?” Iruka asked, visibly confused. In his defense, Conrad would’ve been too.

“Our plumbing is not as common or advanced as yours,” he explained. “We don’t have many of the things you take for granted. Our lands are full of monsters too, and even worse things lurking around. You people don’t know howluckyyou are, and you ruin it by taking children, who still think they’reinvincibleand never going to die, and throw them at your enemies.”

There was a moment of silence in which the Nord could feel that both Iruka and the owners of the stand were trying to process what he had just said. Or maybe they were wondering how people could survive without running water. Or both.

Then he heard a scream of pain.

After leaving the ramen stand, Sasuke had figured he could spar for a while with Naruto and call it a day. He needed time to think.

Then, not even after they had crossed the road,that manhad shown up out of nowhere. He was wearing a black cloak decorated by red clouds, and a large straw hat that obscured his features, but Sasuke would recognize those glowing red eyes anywhere. He saw them every night in his nightmares.

Sasuke’s mind went blank, his Sharingan was spinning. He didn’t remember activating it, just as he didn’t remember sprinting forwards. He couldn’t hear what Itachi was saying to Naruto of all people, or his own scream of rage. He had just coated his hand with a chidori and burst into a sprint.

The next thing he knew, he was being slammed against a wall, his jutsu carving a large chunk of the brick and mortar. Then something snapped, and Sasuke cried out as pain exploded through his limb.

“Foolish little brother,” he heardthat mansay as his iron grip tightened around his mangled arm. Pain lanced through the limb and paralyzed his mind.

He heard Naruto yelling something as his clones were dispelled by the other ninja wearing the black and red cape with his bare hands. He had not even needed to hit them, just waving his weapon at them seemed to be enough to make them poof out of existence.

“Well, that was easy,” the large, blue-skinned shinobi laughed, holding the real Naruto by the throat. The slash on his forehead protector marked him as a missing-nin just like Itachi. One from Mist. “Finish whatever family business you have here and let’s go, Itachi.”

Naruto was clearly struggling to breathe, his eyes bulging as his face turned red, but Sasuke felt a hand forcing him to look up, to look into his brother’s eyes. Memories of that night flashed in his mind and he immediately closed his eyes shut, trying to get free. That only made Itachi tighten the pressure on his head, and he knew it was just a question of time. He had failed.

“Step away from the boys,” someone commanded, catching everyone’s attention. Feeling Itachi’s posture shifting, Sasuke risked taking a look. Naruto’s uncle was marching towards them, looking absolutely livid. Actually, he was all but snarling.

“Is that… ?” the other shinobi wondered, putting a hand against the handle of his sword.

“It can’t be,” Itachi whispered, eyes fixed on the newcomer. “I saw his body the night he died.”

“Step. Away. From the boys,” Harissen-san repeated, energy briefly coating his hands. There was a flash of purple and a smell of ozone filled the street. Heralded by an otherworldly hum, the purple light died away, and two creatures like nothing Sasuke had ever seen before appeared between the two shinobi and the still advancing man. One was a womanlike figure of nothing but molten rock and flames, who hovered a foot above the ground and moved with a strange alien grace. The other one looked like a bunch of floating rocks of various sizes, with thunder and lightning trapped between them, yet Sasuke recognized a rocky formation that resembled a face.

That was when the ANBU that Sasuke had seen earlier chose to leap out of the shadows. Three rushed towards Itachi, and two more jumped at the blue-skinned ninja. The two creatures that Harissen-san had summoned, because theyhadto be some kind of summon, joined the fray as well.

Itachi, no doubt deciding that Sasuke was not worthy of his attention anymore, threw him to the ground like a sack of garbage. Being dismissed like this from the man that had ruined his life made Sasuke’s blood boil. He wanted to get up, despite the broken arm, and try to go straight at his brother again, to hell with the consequences. But Itachi was already a distant blur, effortlessly dodging ANBU on the rooftops on the other side of the street.

Sasuke saw him grab a kunai that was thrown at him and send it back to the clavicle of the shinobi it belonged to, before having to avoid a barrage of fire and lightning from Harrisen-san’s summons. Despite their efforts to pin him, he was always a step ahead.

Nearby, Naruto was still being choked by the former Kirigakure shinobi. He formed his usual hand seal, but before any clones could be formed an ANBU lunged at the missing-nin from above. The former Kiri shinobi had to let Naruto go to grab his weapon with both hands, and thenswung. The clones immediately exploded in a cloud of smoke before even being able to yell as loudly as their creator, but the Konoha-nin had just the time to scream. It wasn’t a clean cut, it was like the bandaged weapon had shredded the ANBU, tearing him apart while still mid-air. Pieces fell everywhere as the swordsman laughed like a maniac, readying to strike again.

That was when Sasuke felt someone grab him and drag him away, and his good hand went for his kunai pouch before he realized it was Iruka-sensei. Fortunately, even as stupid as Naruto was, he was smart enough to run towards Sasuke and give Iruka a hand while the enemy was distracted.

“Sasuke, can you walk?” Iruka asked, after he had brought the two genin behind the first corner. The battle still raged on and scared civilians were running away from the busy street.

“I think so,” Sasuke nodded as he tried to get up without wincing. He failed the latter as he leaned against the wall.

“Hold on, Sasuke, I think I have a potion for that!” Naruto said as he quickly rummaged through his equipment bag.

“A potion?” Iruka asked in confusion. Apparently the Academy had not been informed of the newest piece of equipment available to Konoha shinobi.

“Uncle always makes me leave home with one! Can’t believe he was actually right about me needing it inside the village―”

“Naruto, I don’t know what you’re talking about, but you need to get Sasuke and get away from here as fast as you can,” Iruka interrupted.

“No way! I’m not leaving Uncle in trouble!” Naruto exclaimed, fishing out a vial containing a red liquid and pointing it accusingly towards Iruka. “Family should stick together!”

“And I’m not lettingthat manget away,” Sasuke seethed, grabbing the vial and downing it. It was terrible, but he forced himself to swallow every drop. He immediately felt a pricky, but not unpleasant sensation around his wounds. His arm was still sore, but he was able to actually move it.

“Wait, ‘that man’?” Naruto repeated the two words. “What man? The blue guy?”

“No, you idiot! My brother!” Sasuke snapped.

Naruto’s eyes bugged out at that. “Your own brotherbroke your arm?!”

“Hey!” Iruka yelled, using the same tone he used with students at the Academy to gain their attention. It worked, probably because it hadn’t been that long since they’d graduated. “Are you even listening to yourselves? I know you’ve both become much stronger, but this is way over your heads!”

As if to emphasize Iruka’s point, a shark made of water and one of the fire creatures summoned by Naruto’s uncle came barreling down the road, trying to kill each other and leaving a few embers and puddles in their wake.

The trio couldn’t help but stare at the odd spectacle for a few seconds, as the two creatures kept fighting, seemingly unaware of their presence. Then the shark managed to savagely bite off the fire-creature’s head. The ensuing explosion consumed the shark as well, all but vaporizing it in the blast.

Naruto immediately went to take a peek from the corner. Sasuke followed suit, and he was pretty sure that Iruka would, too.

The street was absolute chaos. There was water and mud everywhere. Sharks made of water as well as actual flesh and blood prowled around thanks to what looked like a mix of various water-based jutsu, biting and charging recklessly at the other summoned creatures on the battlefield.

The other side of the localized battle was… Sasuke really didn’t even know how to begin describing it. Alongside the fire creatures and the floating storm, there were bipedal colossi made of ice that seemed to freeze each water jutsu directed at them or their master. That made some sense to Sasuke, because he had figured that Harissen-san had forged a contract with such vaguely humanoid, elemental-wielding beings.

But there were other kinds of creatures, too. There was a small pack of ghostly wolves that were chasing and killing sharks using pack tactics that would have made the Inuzuka proud. There wereotherghostly wolves, but these were alsoon fire, and they didn’t employ any tactics at all. They just charged towards the sharks and blew up like an explosive tag, taking as many of the ravenous beasts as possible.

And at the center of everything was Naruto’s uncle, currently busy wrestling a shark that had tried to bite his arm off, only to find out that his teeth broke at the contact with the man’s skin. How on earth was that possible?

“My uncle is so cool,” Naruto whispered. Sasuke was so entranced by the odd sight that he didn’t register the figures of Itachi fighting with Kakashi and Lee’s sensei until they crashed through the abandoned stalls nearby.

Then something bright flew from Harrissen-san’s free hand.

Sasuke couldn’t help but look, and saw the whole thing being repeated, deconstructed and examined by his Sharingan in the blink of an eye. If he wanted, he could’ve done the same movements with the fingers, so different from shinobi hand seals. The doujutsu was also telling him that he would accomplish nothing by doing it, because it wasn’t a jutsuat all. There was no chakra, and yet lightning formed and fried the upper part of the shark’s head, leaving a horrible smell of burnt fish.

The lightning bolt didn’t stop there though, it flew across the battlefield and hit the summon that looked like a bunch of floating rocks. The continuous blast was absorbed by the creature, who seemed to not be in pain at all. Actually, its features seemed to shine brighter and brighter as the space between its stone chunks filled more and more with raw energy.

There was a high-pitched whine for a moment, before whatever seemed to keep the rocks that made the body of the creature together vanished in an eruption. A wave of lightning storms and red-hot shards of electrified rocks exploded from where it had stood. Everything in its wake, sharks or bizarre summons alike, couldn’t escape its fury. A chain reaction started as some of the creatures summoned by Harissen-san blew up as well. A couple of stores caught fire. The water jutsu raging on the street lost cohesion, having been consumed as well.

The swordsman intercepted the lightning bolts with his weapon, as if he was parrying an annoying strike. The sound made by the sword almost reminded Sasuke of a scream, as if it was alive and in pain. That seemed to surprise the swordsman as much as it surprised Sasuke.

“Zun Haal Viik,”Harrisen-san shouted, running towards Itachi’s companion. The bandaged sword flew out of the missing-nin’s hands. Sasuke blinked, but his eyes didn’t lie. The sword had just thrown itself away of its own accord. Harrisen-san’s axe took advantage and fell downwards with a brute power behind the swing, but it was slow, slow enough that Sasuke wouldn’t have needed the Sharingan to follow it.

Unsurprisingly the missing-nin caught its haft with ease, stopping it with a single hand. Sasuke could see the eyes of Naruto’s uncle widen in surprise as he was pushed back. “Nobody hurts Samehada,” the missing nin growled. “Nobody.”

As if summoned by its owner, the huge sword actually moved through the street, almost slithering on the ground. The handle quickly found its master’s hand, who raised it one-handed in the air to strike down the man who had dared to disarm him.

Naruto’s uncle did something with his free hand and a hot, roaring jet of flames exploded towards his opponent at point-blank range. The sword slammed between them, shielding the shinobi from the fire. Again there was that peculiar scream of pain, and the sword very noticeably writhed in its bandages. A brutal kick sent Harrisen-san away, though he managed to halt his momentum by slamming his axe into the dirt.

The flames had singed the shinobi and all but burned the bandages wrapping his massive weapon, revealing not a blade, but a mass of sharp scales. Sasuke wasn’t sure if the thing even was a sword. “What type of jutsu is that?!” the missing nin demanded, freeing his weapon from the remaining bandages. “How can Samehada not eat its chakra?!”

He never got an answer. Harrisen-san straightened and breathed in deep.“Mul Qah Diiv!”he shouted, and again there was that moment that Sasuke’s eyes couldn’t make sense of.

Little wisps of smoke came out of Harrisen-san’s mouth and wrapped around his body. The mist solidified into a spectral armor, one with a blue and orange blaze. Every edge was covered with wicked sharp spikes, and horns crowned his skull, while a powerful tail swayed behind his back. Most of all, though, Sasuke noticed Harrisen-san’s eyes. They were cold as ice, with slit pupils. Not snake eyes like Orochimaru’s, but something that felt even worse.

“Since when does Konoha havetwoJinchuuriki?” the swordsman asked nobody in particular as the phantom tail swung back and forth from his opponent’s back, though he did take a wary step back. Harrisen-san regarded him with an unnerving silence, completely at odds with the somewhat loud, grumpy man Sasuke had stalked the whole morning.

“Uncle is…?” Naruto whispered, eyes wide.

“Hey, Itachi, did you know about this?” the missing-nin asked his partner, who was still observing everything regardless of Kakashi-sensei and Maito Gai’s attempts to get his full attention.

“That’s not a Jinchuuriki, Kisame,” Itachi stated, before going back to his own fight.

“But he has a tail, right? So―”

Wuld Nah Kest!”and in a heartbeat Naruto’s uncle moved faster than someone that hadn’t received shinobi training had any right to, colliding head-on with the missing-nin with a crunch, so unexpectedly fast that the ninja actually stumbled back. It was just for a moment, for he immediately regained his footing, but it was enough for three other words echoing through the street.“Su Grah Dun.”

Harrisen-san’s weapon was enveloped in what looked like a localized tornado. The axe swung again, so fast it was nothing but a blur. And again, and again and again, as the man moved almost fast enough to keep up with it. If he hadn’t had his Sharingan, Sasuke wouldn’t have been able to keep up at all, but still the former Kiri-nin managed to deflect the axe and keep the warrior at bay.

Another one of those fire creatures materialized, appearing right behind the shinobi as he and Harrisen-san fought. She pointed her hand at Kisame and a spray of fire was shot at his back. The swordsman ducked, avoiding the flames and using his momentum to swing at the creature.

Fire exploded outwards as the scaled sword rended the creature’s armor, almost as if the dark metal had been the only thing keeping the flames inside it. The ninja used his own cloak to shield himself from the worst of it. The creature’s summoner, seeing an opening, aimed his axe straight for the ninja’s neck.

There was no finesse in the blow that followed, it had been rushed, from a position with odd footing. Still, it was a brutal show of force that sent Naruto’s uncle flying into one of the now-abandoned shops by the sides of the street and, from the sounds of it, breaking a lot of fragile stuff too.

“Already done?” the shinobi wondered out loud, resting his sword against his shoulder. “A pity, it was just starting to get interesting…”

“Uncle!” Naruto screamed at the top of his lungs, already starting to sprint towards the Kiri missing-nin. Only Iruka’s arms stopped him, and that was only because the teacher actually lifted his former student to hold him back. That didn’t stop Naruto from sending a wave of yelling clones with very little self-preservation even by their usual standards. They would’ve been no threat to him even if the ninja hadn’t had that strange weapon of his. It just ate the clones, literally. Sasuke could see it now: the damn thing was consuming the chakra they were made of before they even came close enough to try to stab Kisame.

As the last of the clones were destroyed, the missing-nin started walking towards the two genin and the chunin with an amused smile that showed all of his sharp teeth. “Is that the only jutsu you know, brat?”

“Run,” Iruka ordered as he put himself between the enemy and his former students, kunai at the ready. “Run away, now!”

“It’s cute that you think you can actually protect them,” Kisame snorted, circling around them like one of his summons. Between his peculiar appearance and his predatory gaze, he looked like a shark in human form. “I only need the Jinchuuriki, and my partner would get cross if I hurt his little brother… that’s something he’d rather do himself. You, though? You, I can squash like the bug you are.”

“You won’t hurt Iruka-sensei!” Naruto roared, trying to move past Iruka to snarl at the former Kiri ninja. Sasuke could swear the blond’s teeth were sharper, almost fangs, and his eyes…

Oh. He had seen it before, but now that he knew the reason behind it... Sasuke wasn’t sure how much channeling the Kyuubi’s chakra in the middle of Konoha would help.

Something moved, and then Iruka was laying on the ground groaning in pain, his vest, the shirt underneath and a good bit of the skin underneath was shredded. Hoshigaki Kisame and his terrible sword were towering over them. Blood was dripping from it.

“Well, would you look at that,” Kisame mocked. “Turns out Icanhurt your sensei after all.”

Naruto looked ready to lunge at the missing-nin’s throat, and Sasuke could swear that a faint red aura had started forming around his teammate. The Uchiha grit his teeth and braced himself for his own lunge, prepared to follow along even if he knew they were utterly screwed. At least they would go down fighting.

Then, everyone in Konoha felt it.

The air became much thicker, and Sasuke felt his throat dry and choked on his breath. It reminded him of what had happened in the Forest of Death, but worse. Almost as bad as with Gaara. It made Sasuke feel more akin to prey than a ninja and he just knew that whatever was causing it was out for blood. At first Sasuke thought that it was Kisame’s doing, but the missing-nin had stepped back, clearly feeling it as well and searching for the source.

Then, a long growl echoed from the inside of the shop Harissen-san had been sent careeining to. It almost sounded like words, but there was something bestial about it.

Slowly, Naruto’s uncle walked out. Visibly wounded, bloodied, unarmed and stumbling a bit, but alive… and flanking him were three spectral figures. One was the ghost of a giant of a man, oddly armored and wielding a two-handed battleaxe. The other two, though similarly armed, looked like empty floating suits of armor, made by a spiky and scaled aura, not very different from the one coating Harissen-san. How many strange summons did he have?

Kisame just stared, meeting the man’s eyes, before glancing at Naruto. “Don’t get too far, Nine Tails. I’ll be back.” Then he slowly walked towards the opponent he was sure he had killed earlier.

The only thing that stopped Naruto from attacking was that Iruka had picked that moment to try to stand up and fail miserably amid a mix of pained groans.

“Come on!” Sasuke told him. Naruto seemed to finally snap out of it and hurried with him at Iruka’s side. “Do you have any more of those potions?”

“No, I only had one!” Naruto nearly screamed in frustration, before his eyes widened and he took off a gaudy ring he was wearing, one with a large cut ruby on a thick gold band, and shoved it onto Iruka-sensei’s finger. “Please work, please work, please work…”

"What are you―" Sasuke started to protest, but his words stopped as he noticed that Iruka's body visibly twitched. Their teacher's breathing also felt less like the deathly rattle fitting of his current state. "Uh."

"Is it working?" Naruto asked, sounding a bit desperate.

"I... I think the bleeding has slowed," Sasuke observed. It was still a lot of blood. He opened his equipment satchel. "Do you have any bandages?"

Naruto quickly checked his own bag. “Yeah! Come on, help me!"

They rushed to drag their injured teacher to the side, doing their best to dress the wound and apply pressure to his injuries, while down the road the former Kiri-nin laughed out loud at Naruto’s uncle. Naruto’s very, very angry uncle.

"I have to admit, you know some interesting tricks," Itachi’s companion grinned, with teeth as friendly as a shark's. "My name is Hoshigaki Kisame. Who are you?"

Not moving his eyes from his opponent, Harissen-san held out a hand to one of the ghostly summons. The figure seemed to co*ck his head in confusion before giving its master the two-handed axe it had been wielding.

"I am Dovahkiin. I am Ysmir, Dragon of the North," he declared, hefting the large weapon with clear practiced ease. His voice was deeper, commanding, and proud. The titles were strange and foreign, but the way Harrisen-san spoke them heldweight. “I am the One They Fear.”

Kisame sneered at that, assuming a better stance and holding his sword with both hands. “Is that supposed to mean something to me?”

“It will,” Naruto’s uncle promised before he tensed, as did the ghostly summons flanking him, and when they shouted, the sky shattered.

FUS ROH DAH!”From four mouths came the same devastating jutsu. Sasuke’s eyes couldn’t comprehend any of it, even as they committed each and every detail to memory. The ripples of pureforceas they tore through the air towards Kisame. The way the street, the buildings, everything succumbed to the pure unrelentingpower. The missing nin barely managed to jump out of the way, but not completely, as the attack somehow clipped him and he was sent careening through the wall of a building.

The old shops on the other side of the street were hit by the full brunt of the strange jutsu. Wall after wall crumbled as the unrelenting shockwave ripped them to shreds, bricks flying everywhere while the most fragile buildings were torn right off their foundations.

A moment passed, then Kisame resurfaced with an erruptiont of pieces of rubble and mortar, his cloak half-torn to shreds and murder in his eyes. He lunged at Harissen-san, leaving a trail of chalk as he ran.

“Fus Ro―” the summoned ghost warrior started to shout, after putting himself in harm’s way. He wasn’t able to finish before Samehada crashed down on him. There was no blood, but his ethereal form fell just like he had been killed before simply disappearing, as if he’d never been there in the first place.

“Yol Toor Shuul!”one of the floating suits of armor boomed, and a stream of fire spewed out of where the figure’s mouth would’ve been. Kisame easily dodged, the jet of flames carving through the rubble behind him and setting it alight, and swung Sadehama at the summon… only for the sword to pass through it with no effect.

“What?!” Kisame cried in confusion. He swung again, and once more Samehada just went through the spectral armor. That gave enough time to the other summon to flank Kisame and throw a jutsu of its own.

“Fo Krah Diin!”A wave of chill air enveloped the whole street but Kisame got the worst of it, being enveloped by temperatures so low his body was covered in frost. The thermal shock was settling in when he found himself face to face with Harissen-san.

Their eyes met again, and three words echoed through the street.

“Krii Lun Aus.”

Maybe it had been on purpose, maybe it was because Kisame was trying to tear the man apart even if he was being slowed down. Maybe Harissen-san missed. Whatever the reason, the strange energy of a jutsu that wasn’t a jutsu hit Samehada instead of Kisame.

The sword startedscreaming. It wasn’t like before, when it had stopped lightning. Samehada was howling in pain and anguish, a visceral, primal sound. Its sharp scales vibrated as it rebelled against the hold of its owner as if trying to get away.

“What did you do?!” Kisame demanded in panic and rage as some scales fell off from his weapon. “WHAT DID YOU DO?!”

The only answer he got was a battle axe aimed straight at his head. Kisame intercepted it with Samehada and one more scale went flying from its frame. Undeterred, Harissen-san swung again and again, getting faster with each swing as if regaining his strength. Even his wounds weren’t bleeding anymore.

Samehada screamed anew with every strike, and Sasuke finally realized: whatever Naruto’s uncle had done, it wasn’t just hurting the living sword. It was killing it, and somehow it was also healing him, like he was stealing the weapon’s vitality.

Kisame was starting to look desperate and, after trying to put some distance between himself and his opponent, slashed his own arm against his weapon. A grunt turned into a painful roar as the missing-nin fell on one of his knees. Samehada seemed to calm down a little, as it consumed its owner’s chakra.

The Dragonborn advanced, slowly readying his axe as an executioner would. Kisame faced him with bared blood-stained teeth, unable to stand but undaunted nonetheless.

He silently lifted his axe, then swung down, the weapon arcing straight for Kisame’s head.

Then Uchiha Itachi was right in front of him, looking straight in his eyes.

Everything was black.

Conrad couldn’t move, he felt his limbs wrapped by some kind of manacles holding him upright on a cross.

What happened? He remembered the man that had been strangling Naruto. He was about to split his head open like a rotten melon. Then… then he woke up in whatever this place was.

“You’re not Namikaze Minato,” someone said. Conrad looked up, and found himself staring at two red eyes glowing like embers in the darkness. The ones he saw just before blacking out. They belonged to a young man that didn’t even look twenty winters old yet. “Who are you?”

“Fus Ro Dah!” was Conrad’s concise answer, because if someone was stupid enough to capture him and not gag him deserved to be broken apart by his shouts.

When nothing happened, Conrad couldn’t help but stare awkwardly. That just wasn’t something that happened. Or didn’t happen.

“I see that your strange jutsu only requires you to shout those words,“ the man said, stepping closer. “I ask you again, who are you?”

Conrad stared at the man, whose whole figure seemed to be made of the darkness, except for those strange eyes and their ever-spinning pattern. Utterly unnatural. “This is an illusion,” he finally said.

His captor didn’t bother to deny it. “Everything here is under my control. Your powers won’t work here.”

Conrad frowned. That explained the unnatural darkness and why the Thu’um didn’t work, but illusions were created for a reason. “What do you want?”

“Are you a Namikaze?” the illusionist asked. Conrad suppressed a snort at that.

“Are you an enemy of Minato? Is that why you attacked the boy?!” he asked, feeling his anger rise.

“You care for Naruto-kun. That’s why you intervened. If you are related to Minato, where were you all these years?”

Had he not been held in place by the illusion, Could would’ve recoiled as if the words had stung him. “If I had known, I would’ve―” he immediately started, before biting his own tongue.

“You didn’t know about him.”

“Enough with this. I’m not going to play your games.”

“This is no game,” the man said, almost scolding. “Do you realize how much your presence changes things?”

There was something odd about the tone used for that question, almost of there was a layer of hope deep in it somewhere. Still, Conrad couldn’t find enough empathy to care. "Let me guess, me being here disrupts your master plan? Something like that?"

His captor didn't answer. Those eyes of his pierced Conrad unblinkingly, intent as though he was a puzzle to be solved.

Conrad resisted the urge to squirm in his bonds. "You attacked those children," he said, hoping to prompt a reaction other than that soulless stare.

It worked. "Do you know why we attacked Uzumaki Naruto?"

Conrad thought about it for a moment. "It's not because he's MInato's son, is it?"

His lack of a reply was answer enough. Had this guy even blinked since they’d started talking? "You're now a piece on the board," he said slowly, almost as though to himself. "One who is unknown, and one who doesn't know all the answers himself."

Conrad thought about what he knew. Naruto had a secret, one the Hokage didn’t want to tell him and the boy had seemed to be on the verge of spilling a couple of times. Could this be about that? It didn’t make sense, though. What kind of secret could that be?

“You’ll be disappointed if you want answers. I don’t like answering questions, especially from someone that attacks my kin. Or children.”

For a moment, the young man remained silent. “You wouldn’t understand.”

“Oh, sure. The twelve-year-old child was the real threat there, I bet your parents are proud of you.”

A spark of irritation flashed through his captor's eyes, enhanced by their crimson red color. It was gone almost immediately, but it showed Conrad he was taking it personally. He felt a bit of satisfaction.

“You will answer my questions. I have seventy-two hours to make you.”

So there was some kind of time limit to the illusion? Excellent.

"Let me tell you something, young man. I have faced the worst filth in Tamriel, killed monsters, vampires, dragons, stared down daedric princes and refused to bargain with them. I'll be damned if I'll answer the questions of a troll-bait, basket-wearing, milk-drinking, red-eyed skeever-scat son of a horker who barely looks old enough toshave," Conrad spat the last word like if it was the worse insult in existence. "Idareyou to do your worst."

And so, Uchiha Itachi did.

Chapter 23: All the S-Rank Secrets

Notes:

I don’t own Naruto or The Elder Scrolls. If I did, I doubt they’d have been as successful.

A huge thanks to my beta-readers, GwendolynStacy, Duesal Bladesinger, fishebake, To Mockingbird and baurus.

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

It was a beautiful day in Whiterun. Skyrim had not seen even one bit of snow in over a hundred years and ninja didn’t exist.

Two figures were entering the gates, aching from pain in their muscles. It wasn’t the kind of pain caused by wounds, but from the strain of all the loot they were carrying. In their last expedition, they had looted everything that wasn’t bolted to the floor. And part of the floor as well, since it was made of dwemer metal.

“Look! It’s the Dragonborn!” one of the children playing along the main street cried. There was much cheering. “And his brother, too!”

“Oh, I feel soooo important,” said brother muttered from under his very long and neatly-trimmed beard.

“Aw come on, it’s not their fault if you don’t have a cool title to be known by,” Conrad chuckled.

“Nevermind the fact that I’ve been there with you all the way,” his brother muttered. “I killed half of those dragons, you know?”

“I know, I was there,” he nodded. It wasn’t fair, and it happened everywhere they went. “I’m sorry.”

“It’s not your fault, Conrad. I’m just saying that it would be nice if people didn’t call us ‘the Dragonborn and the other guy’.”

“Don’t worry, we’ll figure out something the people can remember,” he said, hoping to cheer up his brother.

“Like what?”

Curses. Conrad had not planned this far ahead. “I don’t know, something like… Trollbane? What do you think about Trollbane?”

“I’ll pass, thanks.”

“It could be the Trollbane,” Conrad continued, while a shopkeeper bought all the loot even if it was mostly stuff they would never be able to sell to their usual customers. “Or maybe something about vampires? We killed a lot of vampires together after all.”

“Like… the Vampirebane?”

“I was thinking more along the lines of Leech Slayer,” Conrad admitted, which finally made his brother laugh a little. Just as planned!

“Somehow, I doubt that would sound impressive as Dragonborn,” his brother said while picking up half of the many gold pouches. Conrad picked the other half.

“You never know, though. It may grow on you,” he said, before waving farewell to the shopkeeper. “Thanks for buying our valuable junk, see you next week!”

“I’m pretty sure that we can’t really choose titles like that, anyway,” his brother said as they went back outside. “I mean, you didn’t choose to be the Dragonborn, but the bards still spread your name in their songs.”

“You’re right… we’ll bribe a bard to spread the tales of your adventures, then!” Conrad exclaimed, holding up the newly-acquired sacks of coins. “And drink mead while we’re at it, maybe get a wench or two andー”

“Er, I’ll pass on that too, sorry.”

That made Conrad pause. “You’re passing over the chance of getting mead?!”

“No, no,” his brother reassured him. “We have to celebrate the last quest we completed, mead is completely necessary. I’ll just pass on the last thing.”

“... why?”

“I’m… seeing someone,” his twin finally admitted.

There was a long pause before Conrad let out a heartfelt laugh.

“Hey, don’t laugh! I’m serious!”

“If you say so. So, who’s the lucky woman?” Conrad asked after he finally calmed down.

“You don’t know her, but we’ve known each other for a while.”

“I see… Does it mean that my little brother is getting hitched?”

“Conrad, we don’t know which one of us is the older twin. Mom and Dad forgot, remember?”

“Come on, I’m just teasing you a little,” he said with a smile, patting his brother’s shoulder. “Don’t worry, whatever your intentions are, I’ve got your back. Like always.”

“Yeah… too bad that didn’t happen, right?”

Something about how those words were said made Conrad look up. His brother didn’t have a beard anymore. They weren’t in Whiterun anymore either. They were in a clearing, surrounded by tall trees. The sunny sky was gone, replaced by the cold night.

He turned back to his brother, only to see that they weren’t alone anymore. A woman with long red hair was standing by him.

They both gave him a smile. Conrad didn’t know why. He was just standing there like a fool, not understanding what was going on.

Then a giant claw skewered them both, like they were pieces of meat on a kebab.

Conrad yelled something, but he didn’t hear any sound coming from his mouth. He couldn’t move to help. He couldn’t move at all. He couldn’t look away as he saw the colossal hand covered in orange fur with claws that could dwarf a troll, and the massive creature it belonged to.

How they weren’t dead yet, Conrad didn’t know. The wound was so massive that it should’ve killed them on the spot. For some reason, they were clinging to life a bit longer.

“I’m sorry, brother,” Minato said with a sad smile as he started making some signs with his hands. “It would’ve been a good life. But it’s not what happened.”

The woman, Kushina, looked Conrad in the eyes. “Take care of him for us, okay?”

As if knowing his parents were talking about him, a baby started crying at their feet. A baby with a wisp of blond hair and whisker-like birthmarks on his face. The giant claw had stopped barely a few inches from him.

When Minato’s hands stopped, a spectral figure with a grotesque aspect appeared, and the being that had killed Conrad’s brother and his wife roared in rage.

Conrad opened his eyes, feeling cold sweat all over his body. He took a few breaths to calm himself down, staring at the ceiling. What in the name of Oblivion had he just seen?

He checked the strange yet familiar surroundings, still confused. The room had an odd smell. There was a lot of strange machinery all around the bed he was laying on, emitting sounds and beeps. The place was too well-lit to be a Dwemer ruin, though. And the bed wasn’t a slab of rock. Then it hit him.

Konoha. He wasn’t in Skyrim, he had just dreamt that. He was in Konoha, in their big fancy hospital. He felt some dread forming, and immediately went to check his face. Thankfully, his fingers revealed that the healers had not shaved him this time.

His relief was very brief though, for his beard was clearly longer to the touch.

“How long have I been asleep?” he croaked to the empty room despite his painfully dry throat. Why was he here in the first place? Something had happened, something important.

Then his eyes fell on the ring around his left middle finger. His mother’s ring.

“The boy!” Conrad exclaimed, trying to get up as quickly as he could. He immediately regretted it. Everything felt like he had been put through a dozen tavern brawls at once and the mother of all hangovers. He decided to compromise with just sitting for now.

As he sat, Conrad felt something tugging at his nose and arms. A series of strings was connected to his arms and chest. Something rubbery was partially inserted into his nostrils. And a sack full of a transparent liquid was suspended a bit above his bed, connected to his right arm with a transparent tube.

Conrad started pulling at them, grumbling about shinobi and his personal opinion about things being stuffed all over his body without asking for permission. The beeping noises around him suddenly became a single, louder shriek. He had just the time to wonder if that was a bad thing when the door slammed open, revealing a dark-haired woman that by the looks of it had just ran as if her life depended on it.

“You… you’re awake! What are you doing?!” she exclaimed, getting over the surprise of seeing him up. “Lie down!”

“Where’s the boy? Is he alright?!” he asked. The woman gently pushed him back on the bed with little effort. Why was he so weak?

“You’ve been in a coma for two weeks, Harissen-san. Your muscles are slightly atrophied,” she explained, seeing his bewildered expression. Then she started reconnecting the things that Conrad had taken off his arms. The unholy shrieking ceased, turning back to its usual beeping noises. “Naruto-kun is fine, he’s been visiting you every day. I’m sure he’ll come see you as soon as he hears you’re awake.”

The boy was fine. That was good. “What happened?” he managed to croak.

“I wasn’t in the village two weeks ago一”

“City,” Conrad pointed out.

“I’m sorry?”

“It’s too large for being a village or a town, so it’s a city.”

The look on the woman’s face said she clearly didn’t care, but was too polite to say so. “I wasn’t in Konoha two weeks ago, but I’ve read the reports. Two missing-nin attacked Naruto-kun and his teammate, Uchiha Sasuke. You intervened and, well… here you are.”

"But the boys are alright?" he asked again.

"Yes, they're fine,” she replied as she busied herself with some of the strange medical equipment, which she reattached to his chest. She looked like she knew what she was doing, so he let her. “A bit distressed because of what happened to you, but they're fine. It was very brave of you."

Conrad blinked in confusion. Brave of him? He was just protecting his kin, his blood. And the boy’s little friend too, he guessed. This wasn’t exactly something to be praised over.

He had lost the fight, anyway.

Before he could ask something else, the door burst open once again.

“Uncle, don’t die! Don’t一!” Naruto wailed, before stopping and gaping at what he saw. “You’re alive?!”

His teammates filed in after him, similarly amazed. That annoyed him.

“Of course I’m alive!” Conrad grumbled indignantly. Honestly, these little brats. Thinking one little street fight was enough to do him in. “I’ll have you know I一”

He never finished that sentence, as an orange projectile knocked the wind right out of him in a desperate hug. Conrad felt his body aching in protest, but didn’t say anything as he realised that the boy was shaking, trying to hold back his hiccups.

Not really sure what to do, Conrad patted him on the head, hoping it would feel comforting. After a moment Naruto seemed to calm down, so Conrad guessed that he was doing it correctly.

“Naruto-kun, be careful. You’re crushing him,” the healer gently told the boy. Naruto seemed to realise only then the discomfort he was causing his uncle and, after drying off his tears on his sleeve, got off from him. “You can all stay, but try to not tire him, alright? He needs rest.”

“I’ve slept for two weeks, I don’t need ‘rest’!” Conrad scoffed. Just a few potions and he’d manage.

“I can see you’ll be a difficult patient,” the woman sighed. “Well, you’re not going into cardiac arrest and I still have to finish my rounds.” And with that, she strode out of the door, stopping only to greet the man that was hovering by the exit. “Hatake-san.”

“Shizune,” the jonin greeted back, his single eye not leaving Conrad.

“Did you finally decide to stop avoiding me?” Conrad asked him once the healer was gone.

Kakashi answered with a shrug. “I guess I did.”

Conrad almost shot a snide remark at that, but refrained himself. If some stranger had shown up with Tolfdir or Esbern’s face and got accepted by all his acquaintances, he was sure that he’d would’ve avoided them as well. Or attacked them and demanded an explanation. That was an option too, and he was surprised Kakashi had not taken that route.

He probably had asked the Hokage.

“So, what happened two weeks ago?” he asked, turning back towards Naruto. Instead of giving him a direct answer, the boy started recounting the whole fight from the beginning, as if Conrad had not taken part in it. He also used a lot of sound effects and what sounded like a very bad impression of the blue-skinned ninja.

Conrad had to suppress a grimace when he was reminded about what happened to the shops, realising he had lost control of the Dragon Aspect during the fight. The boy reassured him that nobody was hurt.

Still, he made a mental note to ask Inoichi about that shark guy. From what the Yamanaka had told him, there were only humans in Akavir, despite what the chronicles back at home said. But there was no way that ninja was a man.

“And then I used Grandma’s ring to save Iruka-sensei!” Naruto exclaimed, pointing at the ring on Conrad’s finger. He nodded, satisfied that the boy had been quick on his feet. Maybe he could thank Iruka for protecting Naruto and his friend, even if he trained child soldiers for a living. “After he got better, I asked for it back, I thought it could help you, but一”

“Boy, I meant how did I pass out,” Conrad patiently clarified.

“Oh. Well, er, you were about to chop the shark guy’s head off, then Itachi, you know, the other guy, Sasuke’s brother一”

“Naruto!” the girl hissed as she elbowed the boy.

“What? He is!” he protested.

“Yes, he is, but…” she trailed off, giving a worried glance at Sasuke.

“Whatever,” the other boy said sullenly. “He’s right.”

“Your brother attacked you both?”

“... Yes,” Sasuke admitted, seething. There was a story there, but Conrad felt like it wasn’t the time or place to ask about it. Maybe later, after he had his bearings.

“I hope you’ll make him pay for that, then,” he said, which seemed to surprise the young Uchiha. “How did he knock me out, though? I remember his eyes, and then…”

“He sorta… jumped in front of you and looked you in the eyes for a couple of seconds. Then you fell down.”

Conrad couldn’t help but feel a bit embarrassed by that. From his point of view, he had been stabbed a lot, without a moment of respite, for three days. It hadn’t been real, but it still stung a bit.

“I see,” he finally said. At least he could take satisfaction in the fact that he didn’t talk, no matter how much the other Uchiha had stabbed him. “So, why were those two after you?”

Naruto looked him straight in the eyes for a few seconds before chuckling nervously. “Wha-what do you mean? They weren’t after me, that’s ridiculous一”

“Boy,” Conrad said sternly. “I know you didn’t tell me something. I don’t know what it is, but I’m not stupid.”

For a good half minute, the room remained silent with the exception of the hospital machinery. Naruto shifted his weight uncomfortably, before looking at his teammates again. “Can I… can we be left alone? I’d like to tell him on my own.”

“Are you sure?” the pink-haired girl asked, voice full of worry. “Because if you need support...”

“Yeah, it’s fine. Don’t worry, Sakura-chan.”

“You know, Sakura, Sasuke... it’s almost lunchtime,” Kakashi observed. “Why don’t we go buy some ramen for Naruto?”

“Ramen? Really?” Conrad snided. But his heart wasn’t really into it. And he was kind of hungry anyway.

“Don’t worry, we’ll bring something for you too, Harissen-san!” Kakashi said in a way-too-chipper voice to be genuine. “Of course, it will mostly just be broth. I don’t think you’re ready for solid food yet.”

The girl gave Naruto an encouraging pat on the shoulder, while Sasuke just offered a nod as they walked out of the room, followed by their sensei. Conrad and his nephew were now alone.

“So…” he said, crossing his arms expectantly after a few moments of being silent.

“So,” Naruto repeated, crossing his own arms in a way that almost mirrored Conrad’s gesture. A quiet, awkward silence followed again as the boy was clearly not sure where to start from.

He sighed. “Boy, I’m not going to be angry. I just think you should tell me what that was all about. I know it’s not because you’re your father’s son.”

“Oh, I’m not worried about you being mad!” Naruto grinned at him, which surprised Conrad. “I just… I just can’t believe it!”

Wait, what? “Believe what?” Conrad asked. It was as if the worry he had seen on the boy’s face earlier had all but evaporated.

“I think that I’m like you!” he declared, sounding relieved for having said it and looking at him with a huge grin and hopeful eyes.

Never so few words had caused the instant dread Conrad was feeling at the moment. It must have shown a little, because the boy’s smile faltered just for a second. Like him? What did the boy mean? He couldn’t possibly mean that he was Dragonborn as well… did the shinobi even remember about the Dragonborns or the dragonslayers of old?

“What… what do you mean, Naruto?” he finally asked, stalling for time as he tried to recall the lore about himself and his predecessors.

“Well, we’re both Jinchuuriki of course!” the boy said as if it was the most obvious thing ever.

“Boy, I have no idea what that is,” he said honestly. Although the word stirred something in a corner of his memory.

“W-what?!” the boy sputtered, the hope in his eyes replaced by confusion. “But I saw you! You had this… tail of chakra swishing behind you and everything! That means you have a tailed beast inside you, too! How many tails does it have?!”

Conrad opened his mouth, then closed it and considered. “Boy, I don’t use chakra. And that wasn’t a beast. That was me.” Naruto just looked at him with wide eyes.

“What do you mean, that was you? Tell me一”

“Oh no you don’t!” Conrad interrupted, pointing a finger at the boy’s face. “We’re not talking about me, we’re talking about you and your secret that almost got us both killed. What does that word, Jin…?”

“Jinchuuriki,” Naruto mumbled, looking down.

Jinchuuriki. ‘Human sacrifice’. But that couldn’t be literal, the boy was still alive and kicking after all. “Right. What does it mean?” he asked. Naruto seemed to hesitate. “Boy, you already said enough to make me worry. Spit it out already.”

The boy looked at him with wide, almost fearful eyes before taking a deep breath. “It means I have a monster sealed inside of me,” he said in a hurry.

Conrad remained silent for a moment. Maybe he had not understood what the boy meant. Yeah, that was probably it. “Explain.”

“Remember when the Old Man told you how Dad died? Well… he… lied,” Naruto hesitantly admitted, almost as if he was uncomfortable at the idea that the Hokage he admired could do such a thing. “Dad did die to stop the Kyuubi, the Nine-Tailed Fox that attacked Konoha, but he didn’t kill it. You can’t kill them. He had to seal it away instead, and… he sealed it in me.”

“Sealed. In you,” Conrad repeated. He must have misunderstood. Surely he misunderstood… there was no way the creature was actually inside of the boy.

“Yeah,” Naruto nodded. “It’s like, uh… remember how grandma’s sword is magical? Well, it’s like that. The magic is inside the sword. Right?”

It was very much not like that, but Conrad didn’t voice his reasoning. Mostly because he didn’t want to worry the boy. Enchanting an item and sealing an entity somewhere were two very different yet equally ugly beasts. Conrad had read a lot of tomes in his travels and in his time spent in the Arcanaeum.

While rare, it was known for the ghosts of the dead, spirits, Deadra and even the Aedra to be sealed inside a vessel of some kind. Or to possess a mortal for a reason or another. The accounts varied, but it was usually not a good deal for the mortal in question.

And Minato had sealed a powerful… thing, whatever it was, in his newborn baby.

“This… Kyuubi. Can you describe it to me?” Conrad slowly asked.

“Describe him? I mean, uh, I think he’s a he,” Naruto wondered

“I don’t care what he has between his legs, boy. Just tell me what he looks like,” he pressed on, hoping that Naruto could dispel the foreboding sensation that he already knew the answer.

“Alright, alright. He’s as tall as the Hokage Monument, maybe even taller,” Naruto started, but Conrad already understood. He remembered a roar fit to shake the roots of mountains, and a presence so vile it burned at the soul, and he knew the memory was not his. “He has orange fur, angry red eyes… And he has, like, nine tails. That’s why he’s called the Nine Tails, ya know?”

“And giant hands and claws as long as trees?” he couldn’t help but ask.

“Yeah! How did you know?”

“Nevermind that, I must have read it somewhere,” Conrad dismissed the question, pinching his nose. He could see his brother and sister-in-law’s demise in his mind as clear as if he’d been there that night. “Alright… how did he seal it in you?”

“Hang on,” Naruto got up to unzip his orange and blue jacket, then pulled up his shirt to reveal his belly button. Despite Conrad’s puzzlement, the boy closed his eyes and focused for a few seconds. An inky black spiral motif appeared on Naruto’s belly, surrounded by an array of symbols. “See? That’s the seal Dad used.”

Conrad inspected the seal, being mindful to not touch it. It reminded him of what he had learned about magical runes and ritualistic magic. The latter wasn’t something he was very well-versed in, but academic interest had to wait.

“Laas Yah Nir,” he whispered, the power of the Thu’um enhancing his sight and giving him the ability to see the boy’s very soul as a luminous aura around his body. Much to Conrad’s shock, it was eclipsed by the bright, fiery aura surrounding the seal. It was like staring at an angry sun. He could swear that something was glaring back at him through the seal, like an animal from behind a cage’s bars.

He snarled back, refusing to blink for it would’ve been an admission of weakness. The aura contorted itself, giving him a sensation akin to gleaming fangs, and for a second Conrad could swear he was hearing the deep, low growl of one predator warning away another. He felt a growl escape from his throat as well, his dragon soul answering the challenge.

A heartbeat later, the effect of the shout was over, and Conrad’s vision returned to normal.

“Uncle?” the boy asked nervously, making Conrad snap out of it.

“Sorry, I was just thinking,” he lied, his mind a storm of activity. He could get angry later. Conrad had never witnessed an exorcism on a living being, and he wasn’t a priest. Still, he knew enough about magic that he was sure he could come up with something after a few weeks of research. “So, this creature is the reason two powerful shinobi would attack you in broad daylight?”

“More than two,” Naruto corrected.

“What,” Conrad flatly said.

“Ero-Sennin said that Itachi and the shark-guy are part of a group called Akatsuki,” Naruto continued, either oblivious to or willfully ignoring his uncle’s rising stress.

Akatsuki. ‘Dawn’, an odd name for a group. Some kind of cult, maybe? Like the Mythic Dawn? No, that didn’t make any sense. The daedric influence on this continent was abysmal, at least for now. “Who are they?”

“Some powerful shinobi that did a lot of bad stuff. Ero-Sennin said that they’re tracking down the Jinchuuriki to capture them, but he doesn’t know why yet.”

So his nephew was being hunted by a group of extremely dangerous people for the monster sealed inside him when he was a baby. Damn it, Minato...

“Alright, alright…” Conrad took a few deep breaths. “How do we get it out of you?”

“What?!” Naruto squeaked in a panic, covering the seal with his shirt as if to stop Conrad from trying then and there. There was genuine fear in the boy’s eyes, much to Conrad’s shock. “Uncle, no! We can’t!”

“Why?” he demanded. “Because the Hokage doesn’t want to? Who cares about一”

“Uncle, I’ll die if you take it away! That’s what Akatsuki wants to do!” Naruto yelled in a panic.

Conrad chewed on this last piece of information in silence. Of course. Nothing could ever be easy for him. He wasn’t even sure why he was surprised. “Are you… sure about that?” he asked. Surely there was a way to help the boy with this. To stop such dangerous people from hunting him down.

“Yes! Ero-Sennin told me, and he’s like an expert on seals and stuff.”

“Fine, nevermind that,” he said. Conrad had to admit that he didn’t know enough about ninja magical seals to decide if Jiraiya was an expert or not, but if the boy’s life was on the line he didn’t want to risk it. Not until he had checked if the magic of Tamriel could help. Maybe he could ask Serana’s opinion. “What does it mean to be a Jinchuuriki?”

“Well, it means that I heal faster,” Naruto explained. “Not as quickly as grandma’s ring, but it helps! And I convinced the damn Fox to give me his chakra too!” … Was it just him or did the boy seem proud of that?

Wait a minute.

“You talk to that thing?!” Conrad demanded, firmly grabbing his nephew’s shoulders. “What does it say to you?!” Nothing good could come out of speaking with something like that. Far too many times had he seen men and women driven mad by insidious whispers, dark urgings beyond mortal ken. A voice like that in his nephew's head scared him more than the idea of facing a Daedric Prince in its own realm.

“Once!” Naruto protested, getting himself free. “I talked to him only once!”

“What did it say to you?!” Conrad repeated, more urgently this time.

“Nothing much, really,” the boy said once he’d wriggled away, scratching the back of his head nervously. “I found myself inside of the seal, and一”

“Inside of the seal?” Conrad interrupted, alarmed all over again. This conversation was not good for his stress, and the hospital’s machine seemed to agree with that assessment, the beeps picking up speed and volume. “You can go inside of it?!”

He grabbed at Naruto again, but the boy dodged with a startled squeak. “Gah! Uncle, quit it!”

Conrad stopped, then leaned back in his bed, suddenly feeling nauseous from the movement. That, and Naruto wasn’t going to give him answers if he was panicking. Damn it all. One breath, two breaths…

“So,” Conrad said. “You can go inside the seal.”

“Not literally, it was like… a vision, or something like that! Let me finish, okay?” Naruto said with an annoyed look. “Anyway, yeah. I found this big cage with the Kyuubi inside of it. He was all, like, er... angry, and he wanted to kill me. But I forced him to give me his chakra, since he owed me rent for living in my body for free all this time and making my life hell!”

Conrad relaxed slightly as he heard that Naruto was able to command the beast. Maybe it was like a bound daedra, but sealed away. Forced to obey its host, somehow. Then he registered the rest of his nephew’s words. “Back in the market… when people were glaring at you. They know?”

“Huh... yeah. Everyone in Konoha knows. Well, all the grown-ups. Except for Sasuke and Sakura-chan, I kinda had to tell them,” Naruto explained. He didn’t know how to feel about the fact that the boy had told his little friends before telling him. “Oh and Gaara, I guess.”

“Who’s Gaara?”

“Another Jinchuuriki, from another village. I fought him during the invasion. He... wasn’t well. Ero-Sennin said that it may be because his seal was a sloppy job,” Naruto looked sad for a moment. “But I think he will be in the future.”

The reminder that Naruto was a soldier of this cursed place left a bit of a bad taste in the Nord’s mouth, especially since he had found the boy gravely injured after that battle. But it was not the time or the place to talk about that. “I’m sorry to hear that you had to endure such a life, boy. I wish… I wish I could’ve come sooner,” he admitted, looking away in shame.

“Hey, it’s not your fault!” Naruto said loudly. “Sure, it sucked, especially since I didn’t know why they hated me for so long, but一”

“What do you mean, you didn’t know?” Conrad's head snapped immediately to face the boy, doing his best to try to keep his voice even.

Naruto stammered, caught off guard by the sudden focus. “I… I didn’t find out until I graduated.”

Conrad looked at the boy as he was trying to make things make sense in his head. “Do you mean that you weren’t told this secret until you became a… what’s your rank again?”

“Genin, but I'll be a chunin for sure, you'll see! Shikamaru won't be able to beat me for long. And one day, I will一"

"You'll become Hokage, yes," Conrad finished for him, rolling his eyes. The boy said that all the time. And given he had read and learned from Inoichi, Naruto actually had a good chance of getting the title one day. After all, pretty much all Kages so far had been either related to each other or had been the students of the previous one. "How did you learn about the Kyuubi?"

"Remember when I told you about Mizuki-sensei?"

"I remember that he's lucky I couldn't get my hands on him," Conrad nodded with a scowl. He recalled how Naruto had told him that this old teacher had tricked him into stealing something and then had attacked him, months before they met.

"Well, he did that because of, well... because of the Fox," Naruto continued, his voice trembling slightly. "He... he hated me. He told me that... that I was the Fox, and that it was my fault so many people died back then!"

"But, that's not your fault!" Conrad snapped, indignation and shock mixed in.

"I know it now, but I didn't then, and the villagers一" Naruto started, but was stopped when Conrad gently stroke one of his cheeks.

"Boy," Conrad said seriously, looking his nephew right in the eyes. "Screw those people."

Naruto's mouth was agape in shock. "But they一"

"They hurt you for something you had no control over. You didn't ask to have a monster sealed inside of you, yet they treated you like dirt for it. Screw those people," he repeated firmly. “Your friends don’t care about that. I don’t care about that.”

The boy looked at him in a mix of shock and wonder before tackling him in another crushing hug. Conrad hugged the boy back, almost as energetically. It was settled. No matter what the Hokage or his successor would decide or say, he was going to take his nephew out of this cesspool of a city. No matter the cost.

“Uncle?” the boy asked, without letting go of him. Conrad grunted, wordlessly telling his nephew to ask his question. “If you’re not a Jinchuuriki, what are you?”

Jiraiya had been perched above the window of Harissen-san’s room for a while by now.

Enough to hear that Naruto had spilled the beans, at least. While not ideal, both he and Sarutobi-sensei had agreed that it was pretty much inevitable. He couldn’t help but smile at hearing how the kid’s uncle didn’t care about the bijuu.

He could’ve reported immediately to Sarutob-sensei, but he figured that the old man still needed some time to smooth things with the Iwa ambassadors, the latest addition to Konoha’s honored guests. An S-rank battle in the middle of the merchant district of Konoha was bound to get some kind of attention, especially with visiting shinobi in the village.

Jiraiya didn’t envy the Hokage, he'd rather fight Orochimaru with only one hand than deal with that kind of mess.

So he remained out there, eavesdropping on a tale about dragon gods, evil dragons that wanted to destroy the world and the ultimate means to stop them. The only thing a dragon would ever fear, a Dovahkiin. Dragonborn.

Jiraiya considered himself a pretty spiritual person. It was buried under his perviness and other things Minato had never approved of, but it came with the territory of being a Sage, visiting Mount Myoboku, talking with a giant prophet toad, studying the forgotten lore about the Sage of the Six Paths and other spiritual stuff that most modern shinobi considered mumbo-jumbo.

Still, Harissen-san’s tale would’ve sounded like a bit of a stretch even for him, at least until a few months ago. But after all the unexpected abilities the foreigners had shown and the intel he had been given about the threat posed by these Daedric Princes, who was he to doubt the beliefs of another culture or to say that their gods didn’t exist? Whether or not Harissen Conrad really had the soul of a dragon or if that was just an embellishment to some Nord legend, he had the power to back up that claim.

After all, when was the last time that someone not trained in the ninja ways was able to fight a missing-nin like Hoshigaki Kisame and almost kill him? If the accident had not been contained, Minato’s brother would’ve already become the first S-rank civilian in the Bingo Book.

The story continued, of course, as Harissen-san moved on, explaining all about how he had faced elves, vampires, werewolves and giants. Jiraiya could tell that Naruto was listening in awe, because the kid had barely asked any questions.

That didn’t stop him from asking after the story was over, though. “Can you really breathe fire? Are there others like you? Wait, can you turn into a dragon?!” It was like a dam had been broken, as Naruto overwhelmed his uncle with other questions.

That was the state the rest of Team 7 found them, and the sight and scent of ramen was enough to distract Naruto and give his uncle some respite. As promised, they had brought a large bowl of soup for the still recovering Harissen-san. They ate mostly in silence, albeit there was the occasional question between the two parties.

Rather than trying to understand what Naruto had been blabbing about, though, everyone seemed to be trying to figure out if Harissen-san had taken the news well. Mostly the girl and Kakashi. From what Jiraiya could tell, the Uchiha was still shaken from the meeting with his brother, and talked only if involved in the discussion. Maybe he should keep an eye on him; Orochimaru had put his cursed seal on him, after all, and being attacked by Itachi could have weakened the dampener that had been placed on it.

Still, Jiraiya was sure that the last Uchiha loyal to the village wanted to ask a lot of questions of his own, but seemed to refrain because of his teammates. That was curious.

In the end, the polite attempts to ask if Harissen-san was really fine with knowing that his nephew was a Jinchuuriki seemed to erode whatever patience he had left. “Yes, I already told you, I don’t care. I just can’t believe I was being kept in the dark for so long!”

“That wasn’t our secret to tell, Harissen-san,” Kakashi countered, to which the foreigner had nothing to say.

A little after that, Shizune returned to check on her patient and politely shoo the others out. Everyone said goodbyes and assured that they would visit again, bringing Harissen-san’s students as well.

A few minutes later there was a shrill, unmanly shriek as Minato’s brother discovered the existence of catheters. Jiraiya winced in sympathy. Then tried to not laugh as Shizune explained that it was nothing to be ashamed of and that she had pretty much seen everything already when she had to take care of him when he was unconscious.

“I can go to the bathroom by myself now!” the man protested loudly, sounding a bit desperate. Jiraiya could hear him mutter something in his native language long after Shizune had left.

While hearing his embarrassment was amusing, Jiraiya knew that he should probably report to the Hokage.

“Are you coming inside or not?” Harissen-san called from the room, just as he was about to jump away. Busted.

Opening the window he sled inside easily despite his large frame. “How did you know I was there?”

“You have a soul just like everyone else,” Minato’s brother explained, as if detecting souls was a mundane skill. The man was a sensor, too?! And from the sound of it, not a normal one either. “I figured that it was either an ANBU or you.”

“So… you know, now,” Jiraiya stated, knowing that the man was the kind of person that despised dancing in circles.

“Now I know,” he nodded, looking Jiraiya in the eyes. He did not look pleased. Not at all.

“Is there anything you want to ask me?” he asked, pretty sure he could answer any questions Naruto’s uncle may have.

“Yes. Take me to see the Hokage,” the man said with a determined, cold expression.

Jiraiya hesitated. That wasn’t what he had meant, and found himself facing a tough choice. On one hand, he knew that his sensei was busy. On the other hand, he was pretty sure that if he didn’t help Harissen Conrad, the man would probably steal a pair of crutches and march all the way to the Hokage tower still wearing the hospital gown and dare anyone to stop him, causing a scene.

And Jiraiya still wanted to be involved in his godson’s life when this was over. He guessed that he could always make him wait until the Iwa-nin had left the tower. “Let me find you some clothes first,” Jiraiya sighed.

“You wish to remain in Konoha until my successor is nominated?” Sarutobi leaned back on his chair, ensuring that the Iwa ambassador would get to see his missing leg. As a reminder that he had been crippled in a battle where Konoha had rescued the Tsuchikage’s granddaughter. Was it petty? Yes. But it was pettiness that served a purpose.

“Indeed,” the diplomat nodded. He was a ninja old enough to be a veteran of the second shinobi war, and didn’t even glance at Hiruzen's menomation. Right behind him, the Iwa team that had infiltrated the Chunin Exams were doing their best to either appear grateful or ignore the ambassador’s bodyguards standing by either side of them. “After all, we were forced to remain here for the last two weeks, to, shall we say, smooth out the details. I don’t see why remaining in Konoha for a few more days would be a problem.”

“I wouldn’t say ‘forced’,” Sarutobi said, unblinking. “After all, there was a serious incident the day of your arrival. We had to ensure that whoever was responsible wouldn’t make another attempt at your life. And, I may add, you were left able to contact your village to inform them of this unpleasant business.”

The attack of course had nothing to do with the foreigner shinobi, but they didn’t need to know that.

“Quite generous of you, Hokage-sama,” the Iwa-nin said in a way that hid how little he believed his own words. “But wouldn’t you agree that having a representation from Iwa at the nomination of your successor will help the troubled relationship between our two villages?”

At that, Sarutobi gave a calculated glance to his current candidates. It wasn’t exactly a secret who they would be. Tsunade was sitting nearby, utterly unamused by having to play the part of a living prop for this diplomatic meeting. It had been one of the conditions he imposed on her to stay if she wanted access to the new alchemical research.

As for Jiraiya… well, Jiraiya had sent a shadow clone in his place, who was just posturing by standing tall at his side with his arms crossed. That said a lot about how eager the two of them were to fulfill his seat.

He had been suggested to summon Danzo as well, just to show more possible successors. But Sarutobi figured that his old friend didn’t need any strokes to his ego, especially after what he had tried to pull off during the invasion.

“It’s a very unusual request, I don’t think there’s a precedent for shinobi from outside of the village to be present at the inauguration of a new Kage from another one.”

“Given the circ*mstances of your imminent retirement, it seems fitting. After all, Iwa and Konoha shinobi fought on the same side for the first time since the founding of our villages,” the ambassador smiled politely.

“I see what you mean,” Sarutobi admitted. Iwa obviously wanted to gauge the personality of the next Hokage and how the village reacted to their nomination. Trust Onoki to try to get an advantage when he should’ve been thanking the fact that Konoha didn’t want to use his granddaughter as leverage… at least, not to the extent Sarutobi could have. “But I think we could discuss it after we finish going over the other matters.”

“Of course, Hokage-sama. Now, I believe we were supposed to discuss a potential liaison position一” the ambassador stopped as someone started arguing outside.

“You promised that you’d wait!” someone yelled. He recognised it as Jiraiya’s voice despite the door muffling the sounds. Tsunade gave a look to the man’s shadow clone, who just shrugged.

“I lied. Deal with it, you old toad. Your kind does it all the time!” another voice sneered. Hiruzen realised with dread that he knew that voice. But it couldn’t be. He was in a coma.

“I’m not letting you go through this door!” Jiraiya said.

“You can try,” the other voice scoffed.

Sarutobi stiffened. He wouldn't dare.

“Feim Zii Gron!”

He dared.

Harissen Conrad, the Yondaime’s brother and the latest headache Konoha had to deal with, just passed through the door like a ghost straight out of Sarutobi’s nightmares, in full view of a bunch of Iwa shinobi. At least he had not demolished the walls outright.

“So,” the man slammed an equally ethereal crutch to the ground, looking straight at Sarutobi and ignoring everyone else. “Did you think I would just smile when I found out, Old Man?”

“Excuse me, ambassador, but it seems I have to deal with an urgent matter,” Sarutobi said quickly, in a last ditch effort to distract the ninja from Iwa as the real Jiraiya opened the door and tried to grab Minato’s brother to take him away. Sadly, the man seemed to be intangible. “Maybe we should reschedule in a few一”

“The Yondaime Hokage’s ghost,” one of the Iwa-nin choked. For a heartbeat, nobody said anything. Then chaos exploded in his office.

“It’s a trap!” Kurotsuchi, Onoki’s granddaughter, cried out in alarm, her hands going for weapons she wasn’t wearing. One of her teammates seemed to be on the point of soiling his pants, the other one was trying to find an exit without taking his eyes away from the foreigner and the jonin that commanded their little spying mission started having visible tremors as she slowly got on her feet.

As for the ambassador, he seemed to have frozen in place, half turned towards the door and with an expression resembling a drowning fish.

Sarutobi felt his blood pressure skyrocket. This couldn’t be happening. This was a disaster. If a fight started in his office during a diplomatic meeting, one that had been arranged by Konoha, there was only one outcome. War. The Hyuuga Affair would look tame in comparison.

Didn’t Harissen-san realize that these people were Minato’s enemies? Did he know that they would harm Naruto if given a chance? Did he even care?

“Please, honored guests, I assure you that一”

“DIE!” the jonin yelled, catapulting herself at the ethereal Nord, aiming a roundhouse kick at his neck. Her leg passed straight through him, and he looked at her in confusion, even as she kept striking vital points with what would’ve been crippling taijutsu strikes.

“Ambassador一!”

“You killed my brother!” the jonin screamed, drowning Sarutobi’s protest. “You killed my friends! You killed一”

Hiruzen didn’t hear who else the woman was accusing Minato of having killed, because he saw that, much to his horror, Harrisen-san’s mouth was opening. Which meant that either he was about to say something highly inappropriate or use another one of his Shouts, one of the more violent ones, and there was no coming back from that.

He made a quick sign and all the ANBU assigned to protect his office converged on the Iwa-nin, to put an end to this madness. To Sarutobi’s surprise, though, it wasn’t one of his ninja that restrained the Iwa jonin in the blink of an eye, but the ambassador from her village.

The ninja diplomat whispered something to her, so silently that Sarutobi wasn’t able to catch any of it. She didn’t try to attack or lash out, but she was clearly spent, her shaky figure all but being held upright by her superior.

The ANBU didn’t attack their guests, but the message their presence meant was received loud and clear as the remaining Iwa-nin stood down.

"Honored guests. I accept your proposal to have a representative present for the coronation of the new Hokage. For now, please enjoy your accommodations," Sarutobi gestured towards the door, as if nothing had happened.

"We are grateful, Hokage-sama,” the ambassador said in a dead voice, giving a bow that was perfectly polite. He spoke to Hiruzen, but his eyes never left Harrisen-san. “I can assure you that Iwa and the Tsuchikage will take your other requests into consideration to thank you for the return of his granddaughter."

With that, all the foreigner ninja were escorted out of the room. The Nord didn’t even look at the Iwa-nin as they left, dismissing the situation as unimportant as he continued to glare at him.

One of the ANBU closed the door behind them and in that precise instant, Minato’s brother lost his ghostly appearance. Hiruzen had to repress his desire of throwing a hail of shuriken towards him.

Jiraiya dispelled the clone with a sigh, as Tsunade seemed to barely be able to not giggle out loud.

“Did you see their faces?” she asked as Harissen-san did a double take as he noticed her for the first time. Sarutobi wondered how this man had survived until adulthood if his rash decisions caused him to not notice his surroundings.

“Tsunade-hime, that’s not laughing matter,” Jiraiya reminded her.

“Says you,” she said, as she gave a proper look at Conrad, who just stared back. “So, this is the mysterious brother… I have a few questions for you.”

Instead of asking what kind of questions, though, Harissen Conrad just kept staring at her. In any other circ*mstances, Hizunen could’ve been amused.

“Your questions will have to wait, Tsunade,” he told her, before turning towards the man and doing his best to not raise his voice. “Do you even realise what you just almost did?”

That seemed to gain the Nord's attention once again. “Do I look like I care?” he shot back, attempting to look menacing despite obviously needing a crutch to stand.

“You very much should, since you could have put Naruto in danger,” Hiruzen snapped.

That gave a pause to the barbarian. “What are you talking about?”

“You just barged in my office during a diplomatic meeting with another village一and don’t you dare say that it’s not a village一that lost thousands of shinobi in the last war. At Minato’s hand,” Sarutobi quickly clarified, not letting the other man speak before looking at Jiraiya. “Why did you even bring him here?!”

“Oh,” Conrad just said, while Jiraiya tried to justify himself. He was still clearly angry, but also angry at himself as the possible consequences of his actions sunk in. Then he just shrugged. “No matter. I’ll take care of it if they come.”

“Take care of it?” Tsunade couldn’t help but speak.

“I kill dragons. I can kill armies by yelling three words very, very loud. I can deal with some ninja who are scared of my face,” he boasted. Sarutobi couldn’t believe what he was hearing.

“How can you be so arrogant?! A war with Iwa wouldn’t be only about you and them, it would bring suffering on all of us! Civilians and shinobi alike. On your nephew’s generation!”

“Right, let’s talk about the boy!” Conrad snarled. “I have no idea what my oh so great and perfect brother was thinking when he decided to seal a monster inside his own newborn child. I don’t understand why everyone in this place, forgotten by Aedra and Daedra alike一”

“Aedra and Daedra?” Tsunade asked Jiraiya, who answered with a quiet ‘later’.

“一knows that the boy is a Jinchuuriki. I don’t know why no one took care of him for his whole life. But I’m sure it’s your fault!”

Sarutobi was well aware of the fact, he even considered it one of his greatest failures. It still stung to have it thrown in his face by Conrad of all people.

“I see that Naruto-kun told you everything,” he sighed, lowering his voice hoping that the man’s anger would flare out now that he had lashed out against him. “It was a terrible burden to bear, I’m sure you understand.”

“A burden that could've easily remained a secret! What in the name of Oblivion is wrong with you?! Are you evil, incompetent, naive, or just senile?!”

Something cold and angry woke up in Sarutobi. “Harrisen-san,” he asked, his voice resembling a grinding stone. “Are you here only to rage like the savage you so love to present yourself as? Yes, I made mistakes. I admitted that to you before. But I kept Naruto alive when the world wanted him dead, gone or worse.”

Conrad, of course, was as dismissive as ever. “Aye, you kept him alive! And that’s it. Don’t expect my gratitude for doing the bare minimum.”

“I don’t expect or want it. Now, if you don't have any other reasons to be here aside from creating a diplomatic incident and insulting me, I will throw you personally in a cell,” the Hokage promised.

“Fine,” Conrad snarled, glaring at Sarutobi. “Akatsuki. Tell me about them.”

Ah. He should’ve expected that. “They’re a mercenary group that has been making waves in the shinobi world. They have very few members, but each of them is a very powerful shinobi as you were able to witness yourself.”

“Where are they from?”

“Jiraiya,” Sarutobi said, inviting his former student to speak.

“They’re very secretive, and good at covering their tracks,” the Toad Sage explained, which was an understatement. After all, even his spy network had barely heard of them until recently despite the group being active for years. “Each of them is a missing nin, a desertor, or a traitor of their old village. We have confirmed the identity of some of their members, but we don’t know their exact number, or the location of their headquarters… if such a place even exists. What we know is that recently they’ve started hunting down the Jinchuuriki.”

“Why?” Conrad asked. Hiruzen felt like he already knew the answer to that question, though.

“A bijuu一that’s what we call creatures like the Kyuubi一is dangerous, but it can be a powerful asset once contained. That’s why Jinchuuriki are created,” Tsunade offered as an explanation. “Once it was done just to stop the beasts from wandering around unchecked, but…”

“If properly trained, a Jinchuuriki could channel the power of the tailed beast and be almost unstoppable,” Sarutobi finished.

At that, the man’s rage seemed to flare up. “Is Naruto trained that way?!”

“No. Not yet,” Jiraiya replied. Sarutobi knew that his student had plans to help Naruto control the Fox, which he agreed on given how the boy had shown to be able to access its chakra.

“... why not?” the Nord asked, not having expected that. The man clearly thought the worst of them.

“Because I never wanted your nephew to be treated like a weapon. And neither did his father,” Sarutobi said, to which Conrad replied with a slow nod of acceptance. Finally, something they both agreed on.

“You said not yet, though,” Conrad observed, eyes narrowing.

“Akatsuki will always hunt him for what he is,” Jiraiya countered the accusation with a scowl. “Better that we teach him how to use the tools he has at his disposal, including the Kyuubi’s chakra.”

“... Fine,” Conrad acknowledged after a moment. “What about the two that attacked Naruto? Did you find anything from them?”

“No. After you passed out, Uchiha Itachi was able to rescue his partner and flee.” And injure quite a few pursuing ANBU to boot, while he was at it.

“They escaped?” Conrad asked, frustrated. “Even if one of them was wounded?”

“Uchiha Itachi is not a normal shinobi, as I’m sure you figured out.”

“He’s from Konoha, isn’t he?”

“Not anymore.” Sarutobi rubbed his temple. “He abandoned the village five years ago after wiping out his entire clan, with the exception of young Sasuke, for reasons unknown.”

“He’s a kinslayer?” The last word was uttered in absolute disgust. “And nobody else survived?”

“None that we knew of… until...” Sarutobi trailed off, glancing at Jiraiya who was shaking his head. His student had figured where he was going with this, and didn’t think it was a great idea. Hiruzen found himself agreeing, but the alternative was to have Harissen-san burst through his office doors once again in the future. If the man knew about Naruto’s status as Konoha’s Jinchuuriki, it was bound to come out sooner or later. Better to just go with it, like when ripping a band-aid. A very serious, S-Rank band-aid.

“Until what?”

“Until your arrival.”

“What are you talking about? How’s my arrival related to something that happened in Konoha five years ago?”

“I’m sure you remember how Inoichi entered your mind to find out who you are.”

“Yes,” Conrad grounded out, upset at being reminded that he had been subjected to a mind probe.

“What we never told you is that Inoichi was able to find a message from Minato, hidden inside of your mind,” Hiruzen explained.

“My brother put a message in my mind and you didn’t tell me?” Conrad asked, sounding strangely neutral.

“You could consider it one last secret we kept from you,” the Sandaime started. “The night Naruto was born, the Kyuubi got free and attacked Konoha. But it wasn’t an accident as we believed. An individual possessing the Sharingan… the same eyes Itachi has, whose identity was unknown to Minato, attacked them after the birth and released the Kyuubi.”

At that, Harissen-san just kept looking at him for a few seconds, before closing his eyes and taking a deep breath. The creak of his knuckles echoed through the office.

“Old man… are you serious?” he asked, almost whispering. Sarutobi felt Tsunade tensing as Conrad slowly walked closer to the desk. “Did you just tell me that you kept from me the fact that someone is behind my brother’s death? That you knew for months that Naruto’s parents were killed by someone? Why did you think there was any reason for me to not know this?!!”

“I lost my wife that night, Harissen-san,” Sarutobi icily told him. At that, the barbarian seemed to hesitate, justly chastised. “She was Kushina’s midwife. Everyone who was present at Naruto’s birth was murdered that night. To say nothing of all the innocent lives lost when the bijuu reached the village.”

“That still doesn’t answer my questions,” Conrad snapped.

“Ah, but you see, Harissen-san… I had two good reasons to not tell you. The first one is that we have no leads yet. Only what Minato’s ghost had left for Inoichi inside of your head. Making you aware of it would’ve served no purpose, aside from making you stomp around like you own the place and ruining our chances to find the truth.”

“And the second one?” Conrad demanded.

“I neither trust nor like you,” Sarutobi admitted. It wasn’t like it was a secret, but oh did it feel good to say it to the man’s face.

“That’s good, I don’t like you either,” his current headache admitted.

“I was already aware of that,” Sarutobi told him.

“Good, we know where we stand with each other. So, the person that caused all those deaths was an Uchiha,” the Nord spoke, a calculating spark in his eyes. “But if this Itachi killed his whole clan…”

“I doubt that the man that caused the Kyuubi’s attack died that night. He was able to go toe to toe with your brother, after all.”

“Maybe Itachi had an accomplice,” Jiraiya suggested. “But all the members of the clan were accounted for.”

“I have no horses in this race, but there’s no guarantee it was an Uchiha, either,” Tsunade told them. ”It could’ve been someone with a stolen Sharingan.”

That made Conrad pause and blink. “Wait. Your people steal eyes?” he asked her.

“Oh, it’s a rare occurrence, but it can be done,” Tsunade nodded, not mentioning that the rarity had more to do with how the clans lucky enough to have a doujutsu would defend it. Sarutobi had to recognise that the act itself would be quite bizarre already for a civilian. “Some, like the Sharingan, are quite prized objects.”

After staring at her for a few seconds, he just shook his head, muttering something in his language that was probably not very polite towards shinobi. “What did Minato tell you about this man?”

“He wore a mask, and his Sharingan was quite powerful, allowing him to move through things. Like a ghost.”

“Man or ghost… it doesn’t matter,” he muttered darkly. “Can you find him?”

“Jiraiya already sent words through our spies,” Sarutobi offered as an explanation. At that, the Toad Sage took the word.

“We’ll listen. We’ll wait. And when we hear anything about such a shinobi, we’ll find answers.”

“Let me know when you do,” Conrad asked, but his tone wasn’t a request. It felt like he had already made up his mind of what he would do once he heard about the masked man. “What do you plan to do about Akatsuki, then? If they attacked the boy…”

“There was a plan to keep Naruto safe for at least a few more years,” Hiruzen explained, while remaining vague. Technically speaking, it was Jiraiya’s plan, not his. But Minato’s twin didn’t need to know the details yet. Just in case. “Recent events, though, are making us wonder what other options we have.”

“Like what?” Conrad scoffed. “Bury the boy under a rock?”

That question was all but dripping sarcasm, and yet the man was very close to the truth. After all, there were a few places Akatsuki and the other Hidden Villages knew nothing about. Like Mount Myōboku. Or Tamriel. Hiruzen didn’t speak a word of it, though. A decision had not been taken yet, and he felt that admitting that there was a chance of sending Naruto there would’ve been akin to rewarding the Nord for his bad behaviour.

Tsunade spoke up in his place, probably realising why he was just glaring silently at the man. “We’re still considering our options here, Harissen-san. Nothing is set in stone, only that our previous plans may need to be reevaluated.”

The Nord shook his head, clearly not pleased by the fact that they were trying to buy more time before letting him know their intentions. But at least he had calmed down, or at least he was calm enough to realise that they were all on the same side. At least when it came to keeping Naruto safe and finding the person responsible for unleashing the Kyuubi. “What happens now, then?”

“Now? Well, I have to administer a Hidden Village一”

“City,” the man said automatically, which made Sarutobi give him an unamused look. He could swear he did it just to get under his skin by now.

“What? No, it’s a Hidden Village,” Tsunade corrected him, clearly unaware of the man’s annoying habit.

“一at least until I’ll announce my successor. As for you, Harissen-san,” Hiruzen continued, before turning towards her recently returned apprentice. “Tsunade, isn’t a patient that just woke up from a coma supposed to go through a proper physical examination?”

“Indeed, sensei,” she nodded. “That’s the standard procedure.”

“Jiraiya, would you be so kind as to accompany Harissen-san back to his hospital room?” he asked. It only felt fair, since it was his student that had brought the man here.

“Of course not, sensei,” Jiraiya answered. And with that, he picked up Minato’s brother like a ragdoll despite the man’s protests. Or insults. Or promises of retribution.

Once the office’s doors closed behind them, Tsunade spoke. “So, Minato’s long-lost twin, huh?”

“I’m afraid so, but from his point of view, Minato was the long-lost one... What do you think?”

“Honestly? He looks like how I always imagined Minato would’ve reduced himself if he had ever been dumped by Kushina.”

At that, Sarutobi gave her a look. “Don’t be absurd. Those two were made for each other.”

She shrugged. “You’re insane if you think I will accept this job to deal with that mess, by the way.”

“Tsunade…” he chided.

“Now, if you excuse me, I have to interrogate that man who may have made medicine as a whole redundant.”

And with that, she left as well. Sarutobi found himself alone in his office, allowing himself a chance to think. And smoke more tobacco than he should. This day almost turned into a disaster, but Tsunade was still curious enough to remain in Konoha for now and the Iwa delegation seemed to think that his office was haunted by his first successor’s ghost.

Maybe, just maybe, he could leverage something out of it.

Still, he took the time to send a special order, one he took great delight in writing down.

As soon as he was back on his own feet, Conrad threw the crutch he had borrowed from the hospital at Jiraiya. Who just disappeared in a swirl of leaves, while Conrad had to get a hold of the wall to not fall on the now leaves-covered floor. The confrontation with the Hokage had drained him, and he half-climbed, half-let himself fall on the bed.

Once again, Conrad found himself alone in the hospital room. But this time the beeping machines were gone. Which was a welcome change, because he had a lot to think about.

So, Minato and his wife were murdered. This changed things. Such a wrong done to his own kin wasn’t something he could just ignore... but Naruto’s safety came first and foremost.

Still, how would he even go about finding the one responsible for it in the first place? Maybe divination could help. Some of the other teachers at the Winterhold College might be willing to help with their expertise if he bribed them with artifacts from Akavir. Like books far better printed than anything they had in Tamriel, scrolls of poems and literature from another culture… or just bring them a lot of ballpoint pens, toilet paper and chocolate that didn’t cost its weight in gold.

What then, though? He had been defeated just by locking eyes with Uchiha Itachi. How long would he last against someone that had the same eyes as him?

He had killed shinobi by the dozens during the invasion. It had not been an easy feat, because of how stupidly fast the buggers were, but he had done it and he could do it again. But people like these ‘Akatsuki’ shinobi… they were something else. He had not expected anything like that.

Conrad knew that he had to step up his game. The problem was how.

Maybe he had grown complacent, too used to throwing enough fireballs or Shouts at a problem to make said problem go away. Forever.

Still, he could still work out something with the arsenal of spells he had learned through the years. Or just create new ones. Or maybe, reverse-engineer some一

Conrad’s train of thought was interrupted by Naruto coming in from the door, carrying a small basket. “Hey, Uncle!”

“Boy… what’s in there?” he wondered. Naruto placed it on the bed, revealing that it was full of bottles. Did Naruto sneak booze into the hospital for him? What a good nephew he was!

“It’s some potions for you! Your students said that they should help with your recovery.”

Oh, that made more sense. Conrad couldn’t help but feel a bit disappointed, after all he had not drank anything in weeks. He felt really thirsty. “How thoughtful of them,” he sighed. His nephew didn’t even seem to notice his disappointment.

“They visited when you were asleep, you know?” Naruto rambled. “They kinda wanted to come to give them to you in person, but… they’re kinda busy with the store.”

“I’m sorry, the what?”

“Khajiit has wares, if you have coin.”

“It's a little place behind the Yamanaka flower shop. But Ino’s dad said that only shinobi can buy their potions, for some reason.”

“Let me guess. ‘Security reasons’,” Conrad reasoned. Because that was what shinobi seemed to use to justify everything.

“Oh yeah, those are the words that Ino’s dad used! Still, it’s pretty popular. The ninja that buy them started calling the healing potions ‘medic-nin in a bottle’!”

“How much are they making out of these…?” Conrad asked. And more importantly, did he get a cut?

“Oh, they gave them to me for free, because you need them, you see. But they sell them for一”

The door opened again, revealing the blonde bombshell that distracted him earlier in the Hokage’s office. “Where is that guy一Ha-ha! Found you!” she exclaimed as she saw Conrad, before noticing Naruto. “Oh, and the brat is here, too.”

“Old Hag?! What are you doing here?!” Naruto demanded, strangely harsh.

“I have something to ask this uncle of yours,” the woman gestured towards Conrad. “Got a problem with that?”

“You two know each other?” he asked.

Naruto frowned, crossing his arms. “She’s Senju Tsunade. An old hag that says stupid things.”

That confused Conrad. Old? Well, for a child every grown-up is old. But hag? Was the boy blind?

“Brat,” the woman said dismissively. “I only spoke the truth.”

“Boy? What is this about?” Conrad asked, wondering why there seemed to be bad blood between the two.

“She said that the past Hokage were fools that wasted their lives for the village!”

Tsunade snorted loudly. “My grandfather and great uncle were two of those, brat! I have every right to call them names if I want to!”

“And my dad was one of them!“ Naruto said, raising his voice. Ah, so that was the reason.

“What do you want from me, anyway?” Conrad asked her. “I thought I was finished speaking with the Hokage.”

“Is that what your people call being manhandled out of a room?” she mocked.

“Wait, you went to Jiji’s office? When? Why?” Naruto asked, but Tsunade spoke up before Conrad could answer him.

“I'm not here for the old fart, I'm here for me."

"I knew that my rugged good looks would get you,” Conrad snickered, combing his fingers through his beard. Naruto shot him an utterly scandalised look. “But you could’ve waited until I got back in shape.”

Tsunade didn’t look impressed. “I can’t believe I’m saying this, but Jiraiya has better pick up lines than you.” Conrad’s offense was short-lived, since she picked one of the potions from the basket and held it in front of his face. “Tell me about these.”

"Ah,” he sighed in disappointment. “Look, lady. I already gave a lecture. I wrote a guidebook in your language with Inoichi’s help. Ask your researchers about this."

"No, you look," she said, grabbing his arm. Conrad tried to snatch his arm back, but much to his bafflement he couldn’t get free. He could swear he had not become that weak after his two weeks-long nap, but did his best to suppress a wince when her grip tightened. "You've shown up out of nowhere with a potion that can heal a dying man in seconds. You're telling me everything I want to know."

Conrad briefly considered using a shout to either get free or force the woman to let him go, but as he met Tsunade’s eyes he could see her determination, something driving her to learn directly from him and not second-handed. And the promise that if he even tried to speak at something that wasn't an in-door voice, she would break his jaw before he could utter a single word.

“Why?” he finally asked.

“I have my reasons,” she answered stubbornly.

“And I have mine to refuse,” he replied.

After a few seconds of their verbal stalemate, Tsunade smirked. “How about a bet, then?”

“A bet?” he asked, raising an eyebrow.

Everything was suffering and regret.

Suffering, regret, humiliation and pain.

“A drinking contest? With a patient?!” a familiar voice shouted, which made the pain spike for a moment. “Tsunade-shishou, what were you thinking?”

“About how he’d have to help me do all the research I could think of over this ‘Alchemy’ of his,” the cruel, cruel woman that had tricked him said triumphantly. “Ain’t that right, you lightweight?”

Conrad turned around on the bed, wishing that someone would come to put an end to his suffering. Mostly because of how horrible his body was feeling, but also so that he wouldn’t feel the shame of defeat.

“He was in a coma for two weeks. You knew this!” the voice protested. Loudly. “We had to pump his stomach!”

A part of Conrad’s mind admitted that he should’ve known better. But the other half, who had thought it would be worth it, had won. Now the latter part was entirely responsible for all of his suffering.

“So what? From the files I got from the old man, his people are supposed to hold their liquor.”

There was a heavy sigh. “Just, just please, leave him alone before you do any more damage.”

“See you soon, lightweight. You too, brat,” Tsunade said as farewell while she was dragged outside of the hospital room.

Conrad heard someone moving near him and slowly opened his eyes. The room was too bright, he blamed the lightbulbs right above him. But he could see Naruto next to his bed, with a glass of water and some kind of pill in one hand.

“Here, Uncle, put this in your mouth and drink to gulp it down,” Naruto offered, his voice sounding strangely detached. Conrad accepted the pill and the glass of water and did as the boy had explained.

“Pass me one of the potions, boy,” he asked. A healing potion would really help whatever the pill was supposed to do.

“Sorry Uncle, Shizune-nee-chan said that the doctors don’t know how potions interact with aspirin yet.”

Conrad inwardly cursed. A logical argument about not mixing substances. He could not protest against that. “What happened?” he asked, massaging his temples.

“Well… the Old Hag challenged you and you kinda lost,” Naruto slowly said, lost in thought. “Ero-Sennin stopped by, you know. He said you're a bad influence, but then he muttered something about you drinking with that old lady instead of him, so I think he's just jealous."

Conrad weakly snorted. If Jiraiya wanted to have drinks together, he had to find the balls to ask him. “I could’ve won if I was feeling better.”

Naruto looked at him in silence for a few seconds. “Do you always… drink that much?”

“Oh, gods, no,” Conrad reassured him. “I can usually drink much more.”

More silence followed that. “Why?”

“What do you mean, why?”

“I mean…” Naruto started, sounding like he was at a loss of words. “You passed out and they had to… and now you look… you look terrible. How is that fun?”

“... I’ll tell you when you’re older,” Conrad could only answer. Because honestly, how was he supposed to explain the need he felt every day for a heavy drink to a twelve-year-old?

“That’s what Ero-Sennin said!” Naruto protested.

“Huh,” Conrad was surprised that both he and Jiraiya had the same idea. “Don’t worry about it, I’ll be fine after a few hours of rest.”

Naruto didn’t answer for a moment, thinking. “I guess… I better go now, though.”

“Why? What time is it?”

“Kinda late in the afternoon, but I want to train a bit with the Rasengan before dinner.”

Ah yes, the thing Minato created and that required whoever wanted to learn it to play with water balloons and rubber balls. “You figured it out?”

“No, not yet,” Naruto shook his head. “But… I have a bet of my own to win, now.”

“A bet?” Conrad asked. “What bet? With who?”

Someone opened the door, and for a moment Conrad thought that Tsunade had come back to mock him some more. The new arrival’s greeting proved otherwise. “Yosh! Good evening, Naruto and his youthful uncle! I would’ve passed tomorrow but I just couldn’t contain my excitement!”

Great, it was Konoha’s green wonder. As if Conrad’s headache needed more help to torment him.

“Bushy-brow-sensei?” the boy exclaimed. “What are you doing here?”

“Oh, young, youthful Naruto! I was of course more than ready to repay my debt somehow一”

“Debt? What debt?” Naruto wondered out loud.

“For it was you and your uncle’s magnificent potions that restored my student’s Springtime of Youth!” the man proclaimed, before taking a critical look at Conrad. “And from what I see, you need my assistance more than I thought!”

Conrad could swear that his headache was flaring up with each word the man uttered. “What are you talking about? You don’t owe me anything.”

“On that, I disagree!” Gai proclaimed theatrically, before looking at him in confusion. “But I thought you knew already… didn’t Hokage-sama tell you?”

“Tell me what?” he asked, exasperated.

At that, Gai grinned brightly and assumed an odd pose, giving him a thumbs up. “Hokage-sama handpicked me to be your physical therapist and trainer!”

“My what?”

Kisame suppressed a groan as he forced himself to stand up, using Samehada as a glorified crutch to get himself upright.

The rogue medic-nin they had ‘hired’ had done a pretty good job, but his healing had been slowed down by Samehada’s need for chakra. He had given the sword what he could afford, and then the medic-nin’s, but it had been just enough to replace only most of the scales it had lost in the fight.

“You should rest,” Itachi told him from the other side of their little camp.

“f*ck resting,” Kisame snapped, in a foul mood for having been bed-ridden for so long. “I’m good enough to travel and we wasted enough time.”

“You can’t handle the next assignment yet,” Itachi countered.

“Where is our great leader sending us?” Kisame asked with a low laugh, pretending to joke.

He was pretty sure that Itachi had reported to their leader as the medic-nin tended to his wounds. Which leader, though, that was something he kept wondering. There was no way Itachi didn’t know the truth, but he couldn’t tell if Itachi knew that he knew.

And of course, Madara was keeping Kisame in the dark. Not that it was his place to criticise, but knowing if Itachi was being kept in the loop would make his job easier.

“Lightning Country,” Itachi answered as he started packing their few supplies in a sealing scroll.

“Are we going after the Two-Tails already? Or is it the Eight-Tails?” he asked, calculating their chances. He probably wasn’t in the right shape to face a Jinchuuriki yet.

“No. Someone hired Akatsuki to deal with a minor noble. I’ll give you the details as we get there,” Itachi explained without even looking up at him, putting the sealing scroll under his cloak.

“That’s it?! We just have to kill a little lordling? Hah!” Kisame couldn’t help but laugh. And to think that he had actually felt worried for a moment. “I will by the time we get there.”

“There may be shinobi as bodyguards. The target is a noble after all.”

“Good, Samehada needs more chakra,” he boasted, looking at his sword, his eyes falling on the discolored, newly grown scales. “Hey, Itachi, when you used your eyes on that man… what did you see?”

No answer came, as Itachi simply kept breaking up their camp in silence.

“Fine then, don’t tell me,” he scoffed. Sometimes, speaking with Itachi was like talking to a brick wall. But that wasn’t fair, a brick wall would show more emotions.

Kisame didn’t mind though. They weren’t friends, they were just assigned to the same missions. Besides, hearing second-hand descriptions of someone suffering wasn’t the same, anyway. Especially if it had happened inside of an illusion.

The man that had hurt Samehada and wounded him was close to the Nine-Tails. Kisame would get his chance to hurt him back. With interests.

Notes:

The last year has been… tiring. I hope you are all safe out there.

On another note, I still can’t believe that we’re getting another release of Skyrim… maybe I’ll write Naruto and Conrad fishing in the future, to make fun of that.

Chapter 24: The Joys of Teaching and Learning.

Notes:

AN: So, funny story. I thought it would take me two years tops to reach this part of the plot.

Many thanks to my beta-readers: GwendolynStacy, Duesal Bladesinger, fishebake, To Mockingbird.

Be safe out there, everyone.

Chapter Text

“Yosh! Harissen-san, you won’t get back in shape by laying on the ground!”

“Just let me die here,” Conrad groaned, as every muscle in his body felt like it was on fire and his hair seemed to be made of sweat and sticking everywhere.

“Such unyouthful words! You shouldn’t speak like that, Harissen-san!” Gai reprimanded him.

“... you do know that I’m older than you, right?” he asked, opening one of his eyes to glare at his personal trainer.

“Age is but a number! All that matters is maintaining a youthful attitude! Just look at your students!”

Ah, yes. Looking at someone really young for evidence on how to feel young. Conrad couldn’t fault that logic. Except for one little detail.

“Ta’Sava can’t feel his legs,” Ta’Sava moaned in pain. Beta and Sven were in similar conditions, sprawled on the ground and looking like they too wished for the sweet, sweet release of death.

“Master Conrad, why are we here?” Beta asked, heaving. “It’s your physical therapy, not ours!”

“Thankfully for your youthful, generous teacher一”

“Generous!?” Sven protested, getting slightly up to look at the shinobi. “He wants twenty percent of everything we sell at the store!”

“一the doctors at the hospital were able to shorten the long, harrowing and painful physical therapy thanks to the magnificent potions he brewed and their use of skillful medical ninjutsu!” Gai continued, apparently ignoring Sven’s words. “This is not physical therapy anymore, it’s physical training! Something that I felt was necessary to share with you, his youthful students. And he agreed.”

“I don’t want to be his student anymore, can I quit?” Sven asked, actually raising a hand.

“No quitting until we’re back in Skyrim, Sven,” Conrad answered. The young Imperial was probably just joking. Probably. Besides, the exercise would be good for them.

And if he had to suffer, he wouldn’t do so alone.

“But if you really feel tired, I suppose we could take a short break,” Gai suggested, raising everyone’s hope… before producing a few green vials from his flak jacket. “To drink these stamina potions you made! They are an amazing training tool, removing fatigue and allowing us to train again and again! And they’re green, the best color of all!”

Everyone but Gai groaned.

“Ta’Sava can’t believe he sold those with a bulk discount,” the young Khajiit moaned.


Conrad didn’t hate mornings, he loathed them. Especially since he had to wake up earlier than usual to meet with Maito Gai.

By the Nine, he needed some coffee. The Akaviri were lucky. Before coming here, he had drunk it only a handful of times in his life. Now he could drink it every day, possibly spiked with some stamina potion.
He wasn’t surprised to see a still drowsy Naruto having breakfast in the kitchen. After all, he had to wake up early too to meet with his teammates and their sensei. What caused him to do a double take though, was seeing said teammates sitting at the kitchen table in a similar state, still wearing pajamas.

“‘Morning, ‘ncle,” Naruto mumbled, to which the other children looked up and greeted him as well, albeit in a much more coherent way.
He gave them a nod and proceeded to make himself some coffee, pretending everything was normal. It was only when he went to fetch the potion to put in his coffee, away from their sight, that he stared in the direction of the kitchen.
“They had a sleepover,” someone said. Turning around, he saw Sven emerging from his and Ta’Sava’s room. It looked like his apprentice didn’t appreciate mornings as well. “They had a few while you were… indisposed.”

“Sleepovers?” he asked as he took a sip. Nothing like a stamina potion that tasted like coffee to start a new day.

Sven looked towards the kitchen, where, judging by the noises, the children were arguing about something, before lowering his voice. “After the attack, Naruto was a mess. The other boy, too. Their friends just… refused to leave them alone. So, you know… sleepovers.”

“Friends?”

“Sometimes it’s just the three of them, sometimes there’s others. Either here or at someone’s else’s place. If I’m right, the next time should be at the girl’s place.”

Conrad glanced back at the children again, kind of wishing he had one of those ‘camera’ things to capture the moment in time. Then he finished his drink and went to take a shower, to get ready for the meeting with Gai.

Today was leg day.


"What did you say this is called?" Conrad asked, looking at his plate skeptically.

"Katsudon. Here, take some more," Chouza said, serving the Nord some extra food. Inoichi had to suppress a smirk at how the man's eyes widened at seeing the Akimichi-sized serving now sitting on his plate.

"Thanks," Conrad said politely, looking around the table before frowning. "Where's the booze?"

"Sorry, Conrad. No alcohol, at least not until the kids have finished," Inoichi told him, gesturing to the table where all the children were eating.

They had wanted to organize a dinner like this for weeks, but then Minato’s brother had got himself tangled with a S-Rank shinobi and got hospitalized as a result.

Once they had heard that he had awakened, Shikaku had muttered something about ‘troublesome blonds getting everyone worried’ and Chouza had started to ask how quickly they could start preparing the food.

Obviously, Naruto had been invited as well, and Conrad’s apprentices too, who didn’t seem that displeased with having to sit at a table filled with children younger than them.

"Don't worry," Inoichi continued. "Their team has a mission tomorrow. If you want, we can have a drink after they go to bed."

"Do they? Nothing dangerous, I hope?" the man asked, after glancing at the children for a moment.

"No, just a C-rank. The most they could have to deal with are some bandits, and Asuma, their sensei, is a very skilled shinobi. They'll be fine."

"From what Inoichi told us, banditry is a large problem in your homeland, isn't that right Harissen-san?” Shikaku asked.

“It was worse during the war, and the years immediately after it,” he conceded. “But the remaining bandit warlords are… persistent.”

“And your daimyos won’t do anything to stop them?”

“Jarls, Shikaku,” Inoichi corrected, making a mental note that the way-too-thin dossiers about Skyrim and Tamriel needed to be expanded. Maybe he could try to ambush Conrad after Gai had rendered him too tired to make excuses.

“They try… well, most of them try,” Conrad trailed off before continuing, and Inoichi figured that there was a story there. “But they’re not the only problem in the Holds.”

“Such as?” Shikaku asks nonchalantly. Inoichi shot his friend a look, knowing exactly what he was doing. They had not invited the man to dinner to grill him for intel, after all. But Conrad didn’t seem to notice or care.

“Where to begin?” The Nord let out a humorless bark at that, putting down the food he was about to eat. “The peace after the civil war was… messy. The Stormcloaks that didn’t surrender harassed the Empire for years after. Even today, people can’t or won’t address the rampant corruption throughout the Holds. Daedric cults hide in cities and countryside, but that’s kind of the norm for Tamriel I’m afraid. The Princes are always meddling, one way or the other. Not to mention the Thalmor.”

“The Thalmor?” Shikaku wondered out loud, and Inoichi had to admit that he was a bit curious. He had heard the name before, after Conrad had drunk a few too many bottles of sake. Usually along what had to be a few creative swear words.

“They’re a faction that rose to power in the Summerset Isles after a crisis had weakened the Empire. They managed to either annex or convince other provinces to secede from the Empire, further crippling it. If that wasn’t enough, they tried to make the civil war in Skyrim last as long as possible, to make both sides easy pickings for later,” Conrad quickly explained, his hands tightening around his glass as if he wanted to strangle it.

Inoichi and the others nodded in understanding, even if they were still clearly missing way too much context. Coups or playing two sides against each other were hardly something they had not heard of before, in fact, shinobi were often hired to help through them.

“Are they your enemies, then?” Inoichi asked. The Nord immediately turned towards him, his eyes as cold as ice.

“They’ve been killing my people for the past four decades,” he said, voice low. "Damn right they're my enemies."

"Yes, I got that. I meant to ask if you're actively at war with them," he clarified.

"Me? Yes. The Empire? No."

That... didn't really make sense to Inoichi. And he wasn't the only one. "These Thalmor kill your people but the Empire you come from, that you're part of, won't protect them?" Chouza asked for all of them.

"The Thalmor are targeting any who worship Talos, a god of my people. Worshipping Talos has become illegal after the end of the Great War. Don't ask. That's a very long story," Conrad quickly added, seeing as they were about to ask a question.

"Maybe we'd like to hear a long story, Chouza pointed out.

"Did you lose this war and your leaders had to accept such terms?" Shikaku asked him. At that, Conrad shook his head sadly.

"No, we didn't lose, but it does feel that way. We didn't win, either."

Inoichi figured he could always ask for more details about this Great War at a later date. "Alright, but why are these Thalmor so bent on forbidding people to worship their god?"

"Because they have long memories," Conrad said after remaining silent for a moment.

"What do you mean?"

"They're elves," he continued, clearly realizing that they didn't have any idea what he was talking about. "Look, imagine... imagine someone that ages so slowly that they may as well be immortal from our perspective. Imagine an entire nation of people like that, and how arrogant they could be. One day, though, here comes a human, who unleashes something terrible against them... all in order to conquer them. Then, they have to see this man become the Emperor of Tamriel, become a god, and all the terrible things he did were forgotten over time."

Shikaku sent Inoichi a meaningful look. Inoichi gave one of his own, inviting him to keep an open mind. In a world where the Daedric Princes existed, what was the existence of immortals or people becoming gods?

Wait.

"Your emperor is a god?" Inoichi had to ask. He had thought nothing about Tamriel would surprise him at this point. He was wrong.

"No, the founder of the Empire became a god, and since he was a Nord, he's very important to us."

"What's the 'terrible' thing he did?" Chouza asked.

Conrad sighed. "We're gonna need some drinks for this... let me tell you about Tiber Septim, and about Numidium, the Walk-Brass..."


The alchemical lab his apprentices had set up while he had been indisposed was… adequate.

It was little more than a shed which he could have sworn Inoichi’s extended family had used to put some gardening supplies in the past. Still, they had managed to set up multiple working stations with tools, both finely crafted or improvised using Akaviri utensils or other equipment. And of course, the hose outside was very useful when it came to cleaning up or stopping any fires.

“We’re almost out of fire salts, Master Conrad,” Sven told him, continuing to check their inventory as Shizune and Tsunade chatted with his fellow magelings.

“I’ll take care of it tonight,” he assured, writing down on his notepad to summon and harvest a few fire atronachs later. Away from the lab. While he was at it, he made another one about trying to find a surrogate or alternative ingredient that didn’t require him to kill something that threw fire when pissed off.

He went back to look at the rest of his notes. Which were messier than usual, but right now he was mostly making conjectures. Would it even work if he used it as a spell? He doubted he could pull it off as it was intended.

Maybe an array of runes between two points, one for arrival and one for一

“So, how do they work?” Tsunade asked as she looked at the many different types of potions arranged on the shelves, ready to be taken to the front of the store.

“Magic,” he answered without looking up.

“Come on, lightweight. That’s not a good answer and you know it,” Tsunade said, turning towards him. Conrad grit his teeth. He really hated that nickname.

“How about I explain it to you while you create some yourself?” he offered, pointing at the tools on one of the tables.

“That’s fine by me, but I get to keep them,” she decided. “I want to examine them in a proper lab.”

Oh, so she was insulting his alchemical lab now. Sure, technically it was the magelings’, but his students' actions and decisions reflected on him.
“That would mean that you’ll manage to prepare one on your first try,” Conrad ground out, handing her a bundle of recipes from the small bookshelf.

“I think I’ll manage,” Tsunade assured him, snatching the pieces of paper before throwing a look at the workstation. “What’s the blender for?”

“It’s faster than grinding everything with mortar and pestle,” Beta explained as she kept working on her own project.

“Wait, this recipe says that it needs… wheat and butterfly wings? Seriously?” she asked, incredulous.

“Yes. Some of the plants, bugs and other ingredients we normally use in Skyrim aren’t available here, but we found a species of butterfly whose wings have similar properties to one back home. You’ll also need… Shizune?” Conrad called, which seemed to surprise the woman for some reason. Ah, right, she had not been around for long so she didn’t know he didn’t use their honorifics. Well, that was her problem, not his. “Can you fetch that jar right above you? No, the other one.”
“It just sounds… too easy,” Tsunade grumbled as she picked up a bundle of dry wheat.

“It’s not. The properties of the ingredients must be properly extracted, mixed and processed. Otherwise everyone would be able to heal from their wounds by eating bread or heal most sicknesses by munching on garlic,” Conrad told her, gesturing to all the equipment and the various vials.

“Still, these ingredients aren’t either rare or pricey,” she reasoned. “You’d think that someone would’ve found out about such applications before.”

“Maybe someone did,” Conrad said, giving up writing down more notes. He couldn’t work on them if he kept being interrupted. “Then it was forgotten.”

“What do you mean, Harissen-san?” Shizune asked as she started preparing the ingredients. It was refreshing to see how precise she was, a far cry from the sloppiness of his students back at the college. Not that he was in charge of Alchemy over there, but still.
“How to explain this… ?” he wondered out loud. “Konoha is less than one hundred years old, yes?”

“Yes, my grandfather and Madara Uchiha founded it,” Tsunade replied. “What does that have to do with my question?”

“Humor me. How old is the oldest city on the continent? The still inhabited ones, I mean,” Conrad specified. Not that he wouldn’t have liked to explore some ruins in Akavir. He was just trying to make a point unrelated to that.

She didn’t seem convinced but answered none the less. “I’m not sure about the rest of the Elemental Nations, but I think that the capital of Fire Country is six hundred years old.”

“... six hundred years old? Really?” he asked, utterly unimpressed.

“It wasn’t always the capital, obviously,” she continued. “And there was a short period in which it wasn’t even part of Fire Country, but then一”

“The city I live in was founded over four millennia ago,” Conrad interrupted. It was actually closer to five but he wasn’t trying to boast or give a lesson of Skyrim’s history. “And it’s not even the oldest city in Tamriel. Do you see what I mean?”

Tsunade gave him an impatient look. “How is that related to the fact that we lacked what is considered basic knowledge in your homeland?”

“I wouldn’t call alchemy ‘basic knowledge’,” Conrad argued. “Although it’s easier to learn compared to other magical一”

“The point, lightweight,” she interrupted him.

“The last time our people met, Tamriel and Akavir… or the Elemental Nations, if you prefer… it was at war. You conquered us, and then centuries later when Tamriel tried to invade, it was a disaster. There’s no way that your ancestors didn’t learn something from occupying our land or by kicking us back into the sea.”

“But then…” Tsunade started, understanding where he was going with this.

“Yes, something must have happened. Some kind of disaster or war, which caused the loss of this knowledge, and who knows what else,” he explained his theory. “It would also explain the young age of your oldest settlements.”

The scholar in him wept at how few historical sources were in these lands that went back further than one hundred years. They didn’t seem to even have much of an oral tradition. Because keeping secrets was part of it. Maybe he should go ask a not-shinobi city一

“Yeah, yeah, this is all very fascinating but that’s not why I am here,” Tsunade said dismissively. How come he was the barbarian? “Let’s talk about the healing ones.”

“And about how they work,” he finished for her, knowing where she was going with this.

“How does the potion heal the body? Does it speed up the natural healing process? Does it just create new cells and tissue? How does it know what to do without a guiding force?”

Conrad purposefully took a moment before answering. “Magic,” he repeated. “And before you tell me again that’s not a good answer, that’s all there is. Imagine it like a spell, or a jutsu, fueled by its components: a solution and reagents. The more pure the solution, and how many reagents share the same properties, the better.”

“That still doesn’t really answer my questions, and many more I may have. Like any side effects these draughts may cause,” Tsunade kept working, clearly unsatisfied.

“Feel free to visit some wounded at that hospital of yours,” Conrad told her. “Give them some healing potions, watch how they work. I’m sure that seeing a wound close itself would make you understand.”

He expected some more questions, or at least a remark or some snark. Instead, she kept working on her potion, checking the various recipes in silence.

"Harissen-san, forgive me if I ask, but... isn't your next physical examination scheduled for tomorrow?" Shizune asked, catching their attention.

"Yes, why?" he asked, not seeing why she had brought it up.

"Tsunade-shishou... if you wish to examine the long-term effects of the potions on a human body, why not visit Harissen-san? He used his potions for decades, after all," she suggested, meeting her teacher's eyes. For a few seconds, they looked at each other in silence, like they were having a silent conversation just between the two of them. One which Conrad lacked any context for.

"Fine, I'll give the lightweight a physical myself then," Tsunade conceded. "But I'm sure it won't hold many surprises for us."


“That’s… that can’t be right.”

“I told you,” Shizune said, sounding just a little bit smug.

“I don’t think that’s medically possible,” Tsunade shook her head in disbelief, unable to tear her eyes away from his body.

“You know, I always thought that I’d enjoy being half-naked in front of two women,” he grumbled. “You’re ruining that for me. Thank you.”

“Oh, you’re welcome, Harissen-san,” Shizune smiled. These two had spent the last few minutes prodding him with a few tools and mumbling about his pulse and his blood pressure. Whatever that meant. Then they asked him to take off his shirt and the older one, Tsunade, had started gawking at him.

He thought that around these parts they were used to seeing scars.

“How are you even alive?!” Tsunade asked, reaching for some of the ones on his chest. “Those should’ve killed you on the spot!”

“Ah, well, that’s a bit of a long story,” He remembered how he got those. He’d been young and co*cky, and then he was seeing the stinking maw of a dragon. From the inside. “Let’s just say that it’s good to always have a very strong healing potion at hand and a healer in your party just to be sure.”

“... party?” she questioned, confused.

Right. Some things didn’t translate literally. “Not a feast, a group of people that travel together.”
“... let's just get this over with," the medic sighed before reaching for him with her palms. They started shimmering green. "I'll now examine you with a medical ninjutsu一"

"Oh, you can examine me anytime you want," he immediately said, unable to resist. Given how speechless she was, it was worth it.

"That can't be right," she whispered, moving her hands over his shoulders.

"No, it is. It's an open offer, by the way," he cleared up, glancing at Shizune. The younger woman turned bright red and looked away. Heh. He still had it.

“That’s not what I’m talking about,” Tsunade said, shooting him an unamused look. “Shizune? Come here. Do you see it, too?”

The younger medic stepped closer, her hands glowing a pale green as well. She moved them over his chest before a confused expression settled on her face. “I… I’m not sensing anything?”

“Exactly,” Tsunade said gravely. Shizune’s eyes widened a bit as she seemed to realise something. Conrad started to feel a bit worried.

“Is something wrong…?” he asked. After all, worried, confused expressions were not a good sign when being examined by a healer.

“Are there any Hyuuga working in the hospital?” Tsunade asked, ignoring him.

“I believe one of our nurses is? She’s assigned to the emergency room一”

“Then go to call her!” she ordered, pointing at the door. Her student hurried out of the room.

Conrad remained silent for a few seconds. That didn’t sound good. Was he dying? He didn’t feel like he was dying. He knew what dying felt like. No, it was something else.
“Is something wrong?” he repeated. Tsunade turned to glare at him.

“Damn right, something’s wrong. You don’t have chakra pathways!”

Conrad just stared at her for a moment. “And that’s… bad?”


"I hate hospitals," Conrad said to the room. He had spent way too long there, and more importantly, he could still feel all the ways they had prodded and examined him like he was some rare and exotic bug under their lens.

Which he guessed he kinda was, from their point of view.

"We know. You said that. Multiple times," Beta grumbled from the couch. Right. Because the shinobi had remembered that they had multiple specimens from Tamriel at hand and figured they should give them a look, too. And now his students were annoyed. With him.

Life wasn't fair.

"Now you know how Ta'Sava felt," the Khajiit told them.

"What was that all about anyway?" Sven asked. "That lady seemed very angry."

“She was pissed that the other doctors didn’t notice first,” Beta offered solemnly.

“Reassuring,” Sven snorted. ”Shouldn’t we be worried about the fact that the Akaviri have a completely extra organ system?”

Beta frowned for a moment. “I’m not sure if it’s actually an organ一”

“Ta’Sava is more worried about the lack of not-humans,” the only Khajiit on the continent interrupted.

“How about why the Akaviri have that?” Sven argued, being a young wizard in front of an enigma.

“Who cares?” Conrad countered, trying to suppress his scholarly curiosity. “It’s not like we need it.”

“Yeah, but they do!” Beta pointed out. “They told us that shinobi can die if they exhaust their chakra reserves! That’s crazy!”

Not that crazy at all, Conrad thought. If chakra was the byproduct of the body energy united with the spiritual one, it wasn’t a surprise that shinobi would drop like flies if they overdid it. The poor bastards were literally casting spells with their own lifeforce on the line. He’d stick to magicka, thank you very much.

But still… where in Oblivion did it even come from?

“Also… your brother had one, Master. How did that even happen? What if it happens to us?!”

“Minato arrived here as an infant, his body was still developing. And he also lived here for over twenty years, I think we’ll be fine by the time we leave.”

Nevermind the fact that the chakra system needed to be trained from childhood, with constant practice just to be able to use it, according to Tsunade’s ranting.

Maybe there was something in the water. Or in the rice. Or maybe it was connected to that seemingly all-powerful wizard from a millennia ago. Most things seemed to be, in Akavir.

"Master Conrad?" Beta's voice put a stop on his train of thoughts. Seeing he was giving her his full attention, she continued. "There's a thing... we had a request to make."

“What is it?” he couldn’t help but ask.

The three of them looked at each other, exchanging meaningful glances and nodding before turning to look at him at the same time, making an united front.

"Master, lately we've been feeling like we don't really have enough time to focus on our studies... the magical ones, I mean. Between the store, and your.... 'physical therapy'."

“Which Ta-Sava and his friends are forced to be part of…” the Khajiit added. Which wasn’t really fair in Conrad’s opinion, that hadn’t been his call. It was Gai’s. He had just allowed it to happen, and these youngsters really needed it anyway.

“Simply put, Master, we ask that you cover part of our shifts at the potion store, during which we’ll be able to focus on our studies,” Beta continued, not looking away from Conrad’s eyes even once. Which meant that she had prepared for this.

“That sounds like a reasonable request,” he nodded. “What do I get in return?”

"The satisfaction of being a good teacher that wishes to see his pupils flourish and grow," she deadpanned. He gave her an unimpressed look before she kept talking. "Also, we'll give you the less busy shifts of the week, which will give you time to devise those experiments of yours. And a further two percent cut from the store."

Conrad had to admit… he was slightly impressed. “Five,” he said.

“Three,” Ta’Sava countered. Conrad smiled. Apparently, the little magelings knew how to haggle.

“Deal.”


Conrad had to concede one thing. When the shinobi listened to him, they were actually good learners. The laboratory Tsunade Senju had assembled in the last few days was one of the best he had ever seen, with some tools that had apparently been converted or designed just for this particular use.

The two of them, master and apprentice, were smart. Really smart, and they never asked the same question twice. He was… reluctantly impressed.
“The more I learn about this alchemy… the more I notice how inefficient it is,” Tsunade suddenly said as she put away the latest batch of samples.

“What?” Conrad asked. He wasn’t used to such casual insults to his work.

“Don’t get me wrong, some of the things you can do with it are downright revolutionary, and not just in the medical field.”

“Some?” he repeated, feeling personally affronted.

“But you have to drink a large vial of liquid, which tastes fouler than any medicine I know of. And I know many,” she pointed out. “You also have to carry a bunch of large vials with you.”

“Of course I carry them, how am I supposed to use them during a一”

“During a battle?” she interrupted him. Rude. “Yes, that’s the other point I wanted to make. Drinking a large vial of liquid during a fight seems very risky. Your opponent is not going to just stand still while you take a drink.”

“I am aware of that, thank you for pointing out something that was obvious to me for the last twenty years of my life.” Conrad couldn’t see where she was going with this. Every adventurer worth their salt learned quickly when was the right time to drink a potion without being stabbed or worse.

“And in those twenty years, you didn’t try to figure out a better way to do it?” she had the gall to ask him. Despite Conrad’s obvious annoyance at that question, she kept talking. “There must be a way to obtain the same results by refining the potion further.”

“Like what?”

“Pills, for example. Smaller, easier to consume and to carry. We already have something similar. A stimulant we call ‘soldier pills’ but they’re used only in dire situations because they cause a lot of strain on the body,” she explained. Conrad actually started wondering about that… despite the fact that the only pills he had had any experience so far had been aspirins.
“I can see how it could be helpful, but I doubt you’ll be able to adapt alchemy that way. Not without years of research.”

“Bold of you to assume it will take me that long, lightweight” Tsunade boasted. Conrad’s eyes narrowed. Now she was just trying to piss him off.

“Considering you didn’t even know of alchemy until一”

“What about a syringe?” Shizune spoke up, gaining the attention of both. "We'd have to test if it has the same effects administered in the bloodstream as when digested, but if we assume it does..."

Tsunade hummed, considering her apprentice’s words. “If it does, we could ask the R&D department to figure out some kind of portable syringe, ready to use on the field.”

“And if we could begin to reduce the amount of potion required to obtain the desired effects...” Shizune continued, but Conrad toned the rest out. He was starting to feel like he wasn’t needed for this conversation anymore.

That was when he heard the unmistakable sound of his nephew rushing inside. He had become almost accustomed to it, but it was still a memorable sound. What surprised him, along with the other two adults in the room, was the swirling ball of energy he was holding in his hand.

“Old Hag!” the boy shouted, holding the glowing sphere high. “I’ve done it! I’ve一Oh, hey Uncle.”

“Boy, indoor voice,” Conrad said in greeting. His eyes, though, were locked on the spinning blue globe in the child’s hands. It felt… familiar, somehow. But he couldn’t place it.

“Sorry,” Naruto said bashfully, before looking at Tsunade with a determined expression. “I did it, Old Hag. I completed the Rasengan, which means I won the bet!”

Tsunade stared at him for a long moment, before letting out a snort. "I can see that, brat. I'm not blind."

"Which means that you'll have to一"

She held up a hand to stop him. "But please, tell me why you rushed inside here with a destructive A-Rank jutsu in your hand."

"Huuuuh... to show you that I won the bet?"

"What bet?" Conrad wondered out loud. Nobody answered him.

"Yes, yes, you won the bet. Now cut it out before you damage something."

"But一"

"You can show it off to your uncle later. Outside of my lab," she said in a very fed up voice. Naruto kinda pouted at that, but obeyed, letting the sphere die off and dissipate into nothing.

"What bet?" Conrad repeated.

"Let's just say that I'll have to stay in Konoha for a while," Tsunade had the decency to answer. Conrad could’ve sworn that she was sounding almost resigned, and… amused, for some reason.

"You decide something like that through a bet with a twelve-year-old?” he couldn’t help but ask.

"I think we're done for today, lightweight,” Tsunade said, ignoring his question. “I probably have to go speak with Sarutobi-sensei soon, anyway."

After saying their farewells and Naruto basking in the compliments Shizune gave him, for some reason, the two of them started walking home.

"That was the thing you've been practicing in the last month, right?" Conrad asked the boy. "The one that Minato came up with."

"Yeah! It's called Rasengan!” Naruto exclaimed enthusiastically. “It's... it's super hard. I had to complete the last step using a clone."

"You can't just keep throwing clones at the problem, Naruto," he sighed.

"It’s worked so far," the boy reasoned. The worst part was that he wasn’t wrong. An argument for another time, then.

"So... you start spinning your chakra in your hand, form the ball and then... you throw it?" he asked.

"Huuh, no? I have to slam it against my target," Naruto explained, mimicking the gesture.

Conrad felt his respect for Minato die a little, right there. What kind of self-respecting spellcaster would come up with a glowing ball of destruction and then run at their enemy with it?

Ninja, not spellcaster, he reminded himself. And maybe he had a bias caused by an overreliance on fireballs and lightning bolts to blow up things. But the idea of not being able to see the logical advantage in a long-range sphere of destruction didn’t make sense to him.
"I see," he said, avoiding to voice out loud his thoughts.

"... can we have ramen?” Naruto ventured. “To celebrate?"

“Alright… I suppose we can have dinner at Ichiraku’s,” Conrad conceded. It obviously meant a lot for Naruto, which was understandable given how his father had indirectly passed it to him. Not celebrating such a thing would’ve been a very sh*tty thing.

He still preferred fireballs and lightning bolts, though.


“You know what? The store needs a name,” Beta said all of sudden as they were checking the store's inventory.

“What?” Conrad couldn't help but ask. Where had that even come from?

“The store needs a name,” she repeated. “Every good store has a name. And a sign.”

“Why would we need a sign? We’re the only alchemy shop in Konoha,” he pointed out, leaving out the fact that maybe they were the only one in all of Akavir.

“It’s a matter of principle, Master Conrad. Most customers still think that we're an extension of the Yamanaka's flower shop."

"Well... Inoichi owns the building," he observed. Thankfully, the man had not asked him to pay rent. Yet.

"That makes it even more important, we need to stand out on our own," she insisted. "How about ‘Tamriel’s Remedies’?”

“We don’t really sell remedies, though,” Conrad pointed out as he finished rearranging the vials on a shelf. He made a note about telling the magelings to produce less magicka potions; the ninja didn’t need those anyway.

“Healing potions are remedies, and so are the ones that heal sickness,” Beta argued.

"Yes, but we sell all kinds of potions, here."

"Alright, how about Tamriel's Concoctions?" she continued.

"I'd still avoid mentioning Tamriel. I'd have to answer questions from every shinobi that comes through that door."

“Why don’t you pick a name, then?” Beta, huffed. Conrad thought about it for a moment.

"Potions."

His fellow Nord looked utterly disappointed. "... just 'Potions'?"

Conrad shrugged. "We don't need to stand out if there's no competition."


“Master, these experiments and plans of yours, well…” Beta trailed off, as she kept reading the notes Conrad had written in the last few days.

“What about them? It’s not dark magic,” he told her, seeing no problem with them since he had devised them in the first place.

“We’re just concerned,” Sven said. “I mean… some of these things are jealously guarded by the Synod and the College of Whispers. And others are… illegal.”

“Sure, I’ll admit that they’re illegal in the Empire,” Conrad nodded.

“Yes, I mean, the Levitation Act of 3E 421一”

“But we’re not in the Empire right now, right?” he asked, interrupting the young wizard-to-be. Besides, the Act had not stopped the damned Telvanni from being able to do whatever they wanted in their towers for centuries anyway, so why should he?

The three magelings looked at each other, unsure. Although some looked more unsure than others.

“Look, I won’t tell if you won’t.”

“We won’t tell… if you agree to get a smaller cut from the store,” Sven said slowly. “And teach us more spells.”

At that, Ta’Sava and Beta nodded their approval. Conrad sighed, knowing when he was beaten.


Inhale, exhale. Ignore the burning sensation in his lungs. Inhale, exhale again.

People kept turning to stare at him as he ran past them. But he wasn’t that surprised. After all, he was making as much noise as a cart full of pans and pots.

He needed to get used to wearing armor for a long time again, though. So here he was, running around the outskirts of Konoha wearing it.

“Yosh!” Gai exclaimed. Because of course Maito Gai had shown up as soon as Conrad had started to jog down the street. He had not left yet. “Hello, Harissen-san! I approve of your choice to train by yourself!”

“Thanks,” Conrad answered without stopping, looking ahead. He had learned that it was best to just humor the man. Despite his… eccentricities… he was a very good trainer. A harsh and demanding one, too. Conrad would have dealt with that with no problem, had it not been for the nauseating cheerfulness on top of it.

“SO INSPIRING!” he exploded. Conrad wished he could say he was used to it by now, but that would make a liar of him. “YOU TOOK THE MATTER INTO YOUR OWN HANDS! SUCH PASSION! WITH WEIGHTS, EVEN! I ONLY WISH I WAS THERE TO HELP WHEN YOU MADE THIS YOUTHFUL DECISION!”

“Help?” Conrad had to ask, ignoring the ways some children were pointing at him.

“Of course!” Gai exclaimed at a slightly more normal volume, keeping up with Conrad with ease. Way too much ease. Damn shinobi. “I’d have gladly provided you with some starter weights for you to train with!”

“Starter weights?” he repeated, appalled. Sure, he wasn’t wearing all the rest of his usual adventuring gear, but running around in heavy armor wasn’t something to dismiss. Especially given his quick recovery.

“Do not worry, Harissen-san! This is a suitable beginning!” Gai smiled brightly. “I’m sure after more training you’ll be able to carry much heavier weights! For longer and with much ease! That way you’ll be faster once you don’t wear them!”

“That’s… that’s not what I’m trying to do,” he panted slightly. Running and talking wasn’t as easy as Gai made it look.

“Oh, don’t worry, Harissen-san! Even if you’ll not be able to match a ninja in speed any time soon, you’ll be able to train even harder than ever! That’s the power of Youth!”

“Again with the youth thing,” he grumbled. Conrad decided to ignore the part regarding him being inferior to shinobi. It was true, sure, but he felt like it was kinda rude to say it like that.

“Attuning yourself to the power of Youth starts with the right attitude, Harissen-san!” Gai half-yelled in a way that was probably meant to sound encouraging and helpful but that just rubbed Conrad the wrong way.

So he started running faster to not listen to Gai approving yet sort of insulting comments. Conrad knew that he couldn’t shake off the shinobi if Gai decided to just follow him the whole morning, but he didn’t care.

“YOSH! That’s it, Harissen-san! That’s the power of Youth!”

No, Conrad decided. This was the power of spite. And spite was one of the most powerful driving forces on Nirn.


The shop was bigger than Sasuke had expected. What he had not expected was finding Harissen-san sitting behind the counter, scribbling furiously and checking through multiple notebooks and scrolls, while occasionally muttering in his native tongue. He was so lost in whatever he was doing that he had not even heard the chime when Sasuke had opened the door.

After waiting for him to acknowledge his presence, Sasuke decided to clear his throat. That finally made him look up.

“Mmh? Oh, hello Sasuke. How can I help you?” he greeted him, and Sasuke felt his eyes twitch a little at being addressed so informally. But he had slept at the man’s house as a guest, so he let it go. And at least Naruto’s uncle remembered his name this time.

He greeted him curtly, and went straight to the point. “I’d like to purchase some potions.”

Harissen-san gave him an odd look at that, and Sasuke realised that he probably said something very obvious since he had entered a shop. “Anything particular in mind?”

“Some of the healing ones… I’d say three,” Sasuke said, having a look around as he walked closer to the counter. “And the same amount for the ones that make you feel not tired anymore.”
“Three healing and stamina potions, alright,” Harissen-san nodded, grabbing the vials from the counter. Then he grabbed another one, which had a yellow-orange liquid in it. “How about this one, too? It will make your muscles stronger... temporarily, that is."

Sasuke’s eyes glanced at the price tag attached to it. He could afford it, but including the other six, it was getting too pricey for his taste. "Thanks, but no. It's too expensive."

"Oh, it's for free,” the older man said, waving a hand away. “This once."

Sasuke’s eyes narrowed. That didn’t make sense, he had seen this man haggle for the price of a second-hand book. "Why?”

“Purely selfish reasons, I assure you,” Harissen-san answered. “If you have that potion, it means that Naruto’s team has that potion. And after what happened the other day, I’d rather stack the deck to favor the boy’s survival.”

Sasuke had to admit, that made sense. He just nodded and paid for his other potions, thanking the man.
“Take care, Sasuke,” Harissen-san said casually, going back to his notebook, not noticing Sasuke’s dislike at being treated so informally.


Inoichi closed the notebook and put it with the others, which had all been filled to the brim. His head throbbed.

"What kind of land do you live in?" he groaned.

"The Arena. That's what Tamriel is called, by some. Anyway一"

"No!" Inoichi interrupted before Conrad could start talking. "I've had enough with Tamriel history for today, thank you. Let's talk about something else. Anything else."

"Alright. What about our cultures, then?" the man had the gall to ask.

Inoichi huffed and got another notebook.


Conrad frowned at the scroll, frustrated. Maybe, if the Mages Guild of old and the Empire had not spent so much time regulating and then forbidding perfectly good spells that had nothing to do with necromancy, he wouldn’t have to try to figure this out from scratch.

It would’ve been useful during his travels around Skyrim and beyond. To shorten them.

“How are you taller again?” a voice from the nearby room shouted. Conrad got up, to check what the commotion was about, while muttering that he should’ve known better than to try to do anything with young, easily distracted apprentices around.

“Ta’Sava can’t control how much he’ll grow up,” the Khajiit protested. From the looks of it, the latest distraction was the increasing height difference between the two of them. Again. Ta’Sava looked somewhat embarrassed, though if it was because of how tall he was becoming一and as a result, how many clothes he was outgrowing一or because this was for some other issue.

He was young enough to have multiple growth spurts, yes, but now he almost reached Conrad’s chin already. There was only one logical conclusion. “You’re a Cathay-raht, aren’t you?”

Ta’Sava’s ears twitched in surprise. “Yes,” he said, “how does Master Conrad know?”

“You’re not bulky enough to be a Pahmar-raht. Your fur is different too,” he simply explained. Which just made Ta’Sava look even more surprised. “Just so you know, I’ll hold you responsible for any pains to my neck I’ll have when I’ll have to look up to speak with you.”

“Ta’Sava will crouch, if that will help?”

“Wait, what’s a Pahmar…?” Sven asked, unfamiliar with the word.

“A furstock of Khajiit. There’s, well… many.”

At that, there was a soft, amused grunting noise that caught everyone’s attention.

“Seventeen legally recognized by the Empire,” Beta said casually, too focused on her exercise to float a pot to notice how they were all looking at her. “If Ta’Sava is a Cathay-raht, he’ll become the tallest among us.”

Of course she would know, she had probably read every possible tome about the biology of the various races of Tamriel she could get her hands on.

“This is not the time to have a full lesson about Khajiit furstocks, but I’m sure that Ta’Sava will explain… while you keep working on your telekinesis,” he ordered. As far as he was concerned, if they wanted to help him figure out levitation, these three had to prove to him that they would be able to catch each other should the experimental and untested spell end prematurely.

“Why didn’t you tell us, anyway?” Sven asked as he sat back near his own pot.

The young Khajiit didn’t answer immediately, silently focusing on levitating his own cooking equipment. But when he did he avoided everyone’s eyes. "Ta'Sava didn't tell anyone because people here look at him funny already. He didn't want to look weirder."

Sven huffed a little, but didn’t seem genuinely upset. “Don’t worry about it, if anyone gives you trouble about who you are you can just growl at them. That should scare them away.”

Ta’Sava looked up at his friend, unamused and ears flat… for two seconds. Then he couldn’t help but snicker.

It had been a joke, but Sven wasn’t totally wrong, Conrad reasoned. Cathay-raht were the size of a frigging werewolf. And almost as fast and strong.

“Back to work, you two,” he told them.


“So the guy now can’t see sh*t, he’s stumbling around promising bloody murder and that’s when he’s trips on his friend’s corpse, falling with his ass right on the一”
“Conrad, you said that this was a funny story,” Inoichi groaned.

“You had to be there, I guess,” Conrad shrugged, his attention back to his meal.

“I don’t know, I think it was a bit funny,” Chouza snickered. Shikaku didn’t say anything, and slowly shook his head… but he was smirking. The traitor.

“So, do you have any good ones on Minato? Funny stories, I mean,” the Nord asked.


“This should do,” Conrad nodded, examining the two identical arrays his magic had traced on the ground.

“‘Should’?” Sven asked skeptically. “Master, that doesn’t sound safe.”

“That’s why I am the one activating this and you get to stand back and take notes while I speak,” Conrad pointed out, picking up an apple from the basket. He pretended to not notice how his student took a few steps back. "Alright, attempt number sixteen. I changed the space between the glyphs, hopefully that will allow the damn runes that Minato stuck in my head and got me into this mess一"

"That doesn't really sound very scholarly, Master Conrad," the younger mage pointed out.

"It's not a thesis, Sven. I can speak however I want," Conrad grumbled for a moment. "Anyway. Hopefully it will allow them to interact with my own... arrangement. The runes are positioned to work as a starting and delivery point. To further stabilize the array, they contain a matrix aimed to pump as much magicka as possible through the runes, while distributing it equally一"

"By Julianos, how are you a teacher?" Sven muttered as he kept scribbling. Conrad didn't reply though, since his Imperial apprentice had voiced his frustrations during the attempts from one to fifteen. He had pretty much tuned him out by now.

Conrad placed the apple in the middle of the first array and touched the external ring of runes, focusing his magic to activate it. There was a blue-ish glow, and the fruit disappeared with a fizzle, reappearing in the second array just beside the first.

Then it exploded in a fiery death, splattering flaming apple pieces all over Conrad’s clothes and the clearing. Sadly, it did not smell delicious.

Master and apprentice stared at the blackened soil where the apple had teleported to. Conrad sighed, it would take forever to take the smell of charred fruit from his tunic.

"Take a note, Sven... must reduce the amount of magicka. And fix a rune or two. And not use chickens in the experiments. Yet."


They warily looked at him, holding their weapons tightly. It had taken a long time for them to grasp how to wield them in a somewhat acceptable way, and he was sure the shinobi that tailed them every day were judging him for it.
“I’m waiting,” Conrad told his students, looking at them expectantly. They still hesitated, despite insisting on being taught how to not get stabbed, or at least to put a good effort in avoiding such a thing.

He guessed they didn’t realize it would involve training in melee combat.
Conrad sighed, deciding he had had enough. “If you don’t come at me, I will.”

At that, Beta, of all people, rushed at him. “Ysgramor!” she yelled out loud, her weapon high. Too high.

He raised his own training stick just enough to let her crash into its tip, stomach first. She crumpled down, coughing and moaning in pain, but at least she was still holding on her own wooden sword. Bok-something, the shinobi called them.

“Good enthusiasm, terrible form. You’re dead,” he stated out loud. At that, Beta groaned a bit more. He looked at his two other magelings, who were still rooted on the spot. “What did she do wrong?”

“Beta charged the Dragonborn with a stick?” Ta’Sava offered.

“This isn’t a stick,” Conrad pointed out, raising high his own glorified stick. “This is a weapon, and your companion just impaled herself on it, while you were gawking at me.”

“At least I’m going to Sovngarde,” Beta croaked from the ground.

Conrad stared at her for a moment after hearing that. Was that why all those idiots kept throwing themselves in droves at him? The Nord ones, at least?

“Beta, you’re dead,” he told her. “Dead people don’t talk.”

“Ghosts do,” Sven said. And despite the fact that he was technically correct, Conrad took a step in his direction, reading a low sweeping strike to his legs. He wondered how long it would take the three of them to figure out that he had not explicitly forbidden them from using magic.

Unbeknownst to them, the ANBU hiding in the nearby trees shook their heads. This was sad to watch.


“So, any interesting stories about some enemies of yours?” Shikaku asked as he dealt the cards. Inoichi knew that the Nara would’ve rather played something like shogi, but there were four of them. So Koi-Koi it was. The first couple of games had been surprisingly easy because Minato’s brother kept forgetting the cards’ values.

“Well一” Conrad started, looking at the cards in his hand. Inoichi interrupted him immediately.

“Not the dragons!” He had heard it before, multiple times, especially after the Nord had drank a bit too much.

“Fine, not the dragons,” Conrad conceded, looking pensive. “Let’s see… There’s vampires, necromancers, ancient half-forgotten evils… way too many of those, though. There’s the Dark Brotherhood too, I suppose.”

“Ooh, their name is interesting already,” Chouza brightened up as he refilled everyone’s glasses, smelling a good story already. “Who are they?”

“An ancient group, cultists of Sithis and servants of the Night Mother,” Conrad said gravely, ending in what was probably meant to be a dramatic pause.

“Conrad, we don’t know who those two are,” Inoichi reminded him, playing a couple of his cards.

“... right. Well, Sithis is… change, chaos. He’s… a bit difficult to define, given how he’s either part of the Void or the Void itself. That’s a plane beyond Oblivion, by the way.”

“Is he a Daedric Prince, too?” Inoichi asked. There seemed to be way too many of those.

“No, he’s not. He’s not an Aedra either. From what I’ve read, the Brotherhood believed him to be the husband of Night Mother. Who is either an aspect of Mephala, a Daedric Prince, or something else. Depending on who you ask.”

“Something else,” Inoichi repeated.

“There are many things out there worse than a Daedric Prince, Inoichi.” The Yamanaka didn’t find that comforting.

“So, they were cultists?” Shikaku asked. Inoichi had briefly explained the concept of Daedric cults to his friend, mostly as part of a briefing he had been part of. While skeptical, Shikaku had agreed on one thing: they needed to know more about this threat.

“Yes, they believed that the souls of those they killed were sent to Sithis, or at least to his domain. That’s one of the reasons they were feared. There’s a ritual, see… a ritual known all over Tamriel, which would let you summon them.”

“What for?” Inoichi wondered. “To join them?”

“Oh, no. See, by summoning them you could hire them to kill someone… in… exchange for gold…” Conrad kept explaining, each word drawing out slower than the meaning of those words sank in.

There was a bit of an awkward silence at that, to say the least.

“You’re talking about assassinations,” Shikaku said, putting down his drink. Conrad obviously didn’t know the details, but Inoichi could expect that by now he at least had the idea that each of them could’ve been assigned on such missions before.

Which they had, obviously.

“I suppose so, yes,” Conrad nodded, not even apologising for having accidentally compared them to a bunch of crazy cultists.

“I, ah, have the feeling that those are frowned upon where you are from?”

“... depends on who you ask,” Conrad said drily. Inoichi nodded, knowing well how the Nord felt about some aspects of the shinobi life. “But for most people, yes, they are. A violent death is way too common in Tamriel, but the Dark Brotherhood made people afraid.”

“Because they were a cult of assassins?” Shikaku asked. Which, to be honest, was kinda freaky. Inoichi had heard the story of a ninja belonging to a cult, once. It would be enough to freak out most people.

“Because they would kill anyone they were paid for, as long as the pay was good enough. Nosy neighbours, unfaithful lovers, business rivals… even an emperor.”

Inoichi exchanged a glance with the others. Missions against nobility were highly regulated, and the daimyos were untouchable. Even the foreign ones. Suna had opted for invading Konoha rather than moving against their own daimyo, despite the damage to their economy. “They killed the leader of the Empire?” he found himself asking.

“Yeah,” Conrad told him grimly, before taking a long drink from his glass. “If you ever decide to visit Tamriel, I’d recommend you don’t advertise your profession openly.”

The Yamanaka noticed how his two old teammates had become somber all of sudden. Not for what Conrad had just said, shinobi working on delicate assignments knew better than to tell people what they were about to do. Or being spotted.

They were probably imagining what it would be like, being sent to murder people regardless of their status, in service of a malicious power from a different plane of existence. Flashes of what he had seen when mind-walking the dremora came to mind, and he couldn’t help but feel a shiver down his spine.

“You know,” he forced himself to say, to break the silence. To not think about that. “You’re lucky that there’s no shinobi in Tamriel.”

“What?” Conrad asked, clearly dumbfounded by the sudden change of topic.

“Imagine if you had to face some ninja, instead of some crazy assassins.”

“If I had to face shinobi back then, I’d be dead,” Conrad grumbled, as his surprise faded.

“Oh, so you admit that shinobi are stronger?” the Yamanaka asked with a smirk.

“What the一I didn’t say that! I was nineteen when they tried to kill me the first time! I knew one shout! One!”

“I don’t know, most shinobi are pretty strong by the time they’re nineteen…” Inoichi wondered out loud teasingly, stroking his chin. “Your brother, for example…”

“Why, you一”

“So, how did you defeat this… Dark Brotherhood, Harissen-san?” Chouza asked, serving everyone some more sake.

“Oh, that’s simple, I found their secret lair, and I killed them all.”

“Wait, that’s it?”

“It’s what happened.”

“Come on, Conrad, you’re a better storyteller than that. The last time I asked you about your homeland’s history you quoted a saga to me. You can surely tell us something more about a fight of yours.”

“Alright, fine… there was one of them, I remember him because he was dressed like a… do you guys even know what a jester is?”


“Come on, Uncle! It’s about to start!” Naruto yelled, pulling Conrad into the large crowd.

He hated crowds. There was always someone that tried to steal his coin purse in them. And this was one of the largest he’d ever seen… It looked like the whole city had gathered around the tower.

“Hey, Naruto! Over here!” someone called, and Conrad noticed the boy’s teammates nearby, waving at him. Well, one of them was. Sasuke just nodded in acknowledgment.

He found himself having to push through the people to keep up with the way Naruto was pulling his arm, but they didn’t seem to mind. They were all staring at the top of the tower, waiting for something. Given how eager and happy everyone seemed to be, he had expected some kind of big celebration or some kind of festival... but he couldn’t see any food stalls or banners anywhere. He couldn’t help but feel a bit disappointed.

“Hey guys!” Naruto greeted them, finally letting go of Conrad’s poor arm. He tuned out their chatting, trying to figure out what this was all about.

He focused on the excited buzz of conversation around them. Wishful hopes for the future, that the city would thrive under their leader… overall, about par for the course of every city he had ever visited.

“Look, it’s about to start!” someone shouted, pointing up. Hushed whispers passed through the crowd, and the people started quieting down.

Conrad looked up, and froze. On the top of the damn tower was Sarutobi, giving a speech. Something about fire having a will. Conrad wasn’t really listening… because right on Sarutobi’s side was Tsunade Senju.

Then she started a short speech of her own, which Conrad wasn’t really interested in either. Mostly because he was realising that the woman that belittled his research methods, skills, and ability to hold his liquor was now the person he had to deal with regarding the boy. And if he could bring him back to Tamriel with him.

How he had not seen this coming, he had no idea.


Conrad entered Sarutobi’s office一Tsunade’s office now, he guessed一 wearing his best tunic, axe strapped to his belt and carrying his staff. He had decided against wearing armor, for it may have been considered a poor diplomatic choice.

His eyes immediately fell on the newly instated Hokage, who was sitting at her desk while having the gall to look smug at him.

“That hat looks stupid,” Conrad told her, ignoring Sarutobi and Jiraiya.

“It kinda does, doesn’t it?” she wondered out loud, taking the hat off to give it a look. Sarutobi didn’t look amused by that, not at all. But after all, he had worn the hat for a few decades, he was obviously fine with the way it looked. “But what can I say, my grandfather picked it. No doubt you’re wondering why I summoned you, though. Obviously not to talk about my new hat.”

“If I can hazard a guess, it has to do with something I said to your predecessor,” he nodded in said predecessor’s direction.

“And you’d be right… we talked a lot about it,” Tsunade informed him, gesturing to Jiraiya and Sarutobi. “Akatsuki has shown that they can get to Naruto in the heart of the village. Which should be the safest place for him. They let us know that it is not. So... we would like you to take Naruto with you to Skyrim."

Conrad must have stared at her incredulously, but in all fairness, he had every right to. Because that felt a bit too easy.

"It's not something we've decided lightly," Sarutobi informed him. "We discussed it at length."

"Still, may I ask what made you decide to agree to my request?" Conrad questioned, against every instinct screaming at him to keep his mouth shut and just take the good offer. Because there had to be a catch.

"To put it bluntly, nobody in the Elemental Nations knows about your homeland. Akatsuki may be a dangerous threat, but even they'll have trouble finding you two in an unknown continent." Jiraiya answered. "That, and, a few other factors that we'll have to talk about with you."

Aaah. So they wanted something out of this. That made sense. Conrad felt somehow relieved from having been right about how things were looking too easy all of sudden.

“Before we get to those, though, lightweight... there are some conditions,” Tsunade spoke again.

"Obviously," Conrad acknowledged, his eye twitching at the name.

“First of all, a selected group of shinobi will come with you two. Both to ensure Naruto’s safety and to allow him to keep training,” she told him.

“That makes sense,” he nodded, knowing that these shinobi would also have the task of keeping an eye on him, so he didn’t disappear with the boy in some remote corner of Tamriel. Which he would have done without hesitating if he could.

“That won’t be their only mission, though," Sarutobi added. Tsunade seemed to take it as her cue.

"We believe that there is a lot we can learn from Tamriel, Harissen-san. The ninja that will accompany you will have to gather as much intel as possible, and we’d like you to assist them.”

“Depends on what they want to learn,” Conrad not quite nodded.

"For starters, we're very interested in the enchanted items of your people," Jiraiya informed him. Conrad tried to keep a neutral expression, but he was sure that the shinobi had noticed his slight wince. Of course they wanted to know about enchanting too. "Like the ring that belonged to your mother, which Naruto used to save Umino Iruka's life."

"An admirable deed," Sarutobi praised.

"Interesting jewelry, I examined it briefly while you were unconscious," Jiraiya continued. "It has no seals, but its properties are undeniable."

"We were wondering why you didn't offer knowledge about the creation of such items to Konoha, since you so easily offered to teach us about alchemy." Tsunade gave him an expectant look.

"It would be very difficult for me to teach you something I'm not well versed in," Conrad explained in the most wizardly fashion he could muster. Mostly because he didn't want to admit just how bad he was at enchanting, his squeamish bias against it notwithstanding. "But I feel like I need to warn you about what this practice requires.”

At that the three shinobi paused, glancing at each other. “And what would that be?” Jiraiya asked, speaking for all of them.

“To infuse an item with magical properties, it’s necessary to use a soul,” he said gravely. Which went well with the wizardly attitude. It seemed to have the desired effect, for Jiraiya visibly winced, Tsunade’s eyes slightly widened and… Sarutobi kept a stony face.

Two out of three. He counted it as a victory.

“A soul. A human… I mean, a person’s soul?” Tsunade asked, correcting herself as she remembered that humans weren’t the only race in the world. Thankfully Conrad had Ta’Sava as proof, because the people of Konoha seemed really confused by that concept at times.

“Such practice is considered abhorrent by most mages, and illegal under the Imperial Law,” Conrad explained, privately ignoring the fact that he was breaking many laws regarding magic lately. But it wasn’t the same thing. “Animal or monster souls, who have what we know as white souls, are acceptable. That won’t stop some, though, who dabble in dark arts, from using people for their more potent black souls for such practice.”

“A forbidden jutsu,” Sarutobi muttered, and Conrad didn’t feel like correcting him about the fact that it wasn’t, in fact, a jutsu.

“It is not as widespread as alchemy, but I hope you can see the terrible ways it could be abused.” Conrad's hold on his staff tightened, memories of hundreds of atrocities he’d faced over the years flashing through his head.

“Is there any other way to enchant items?” Jiraiya asked, sounding almost hopeful.

“Yes, I know of two ways,” Conrad nodded, pausing for dramatic effect. “The first is binding a daedra to an item, which is a complex and dangerous process. The other is using a Sigil Stone, a very rare and dangerous artifact.”

“Dangerous how?” Tsunade asked.

“They’re tied to the planes of Oblivion, and they can be used to open a portal between it and Mundus. And unless you’re lucky enough to find one that had been left in Tamriel in the past, the only way to gain one is to struck a deal with a Daedric Prince,” Conrad explained, and given the woman’s lack of confusion he supposed that Sarutobi and Jiraiya had told their new leader what he had told them about the Princes and their planes of origin, which saved him time. He didn’t feel like giving a lecture now.

“Right. Let’s not do that,” Tsunade decided. Everyone nodded in agreement.

"If you really wish to learn about enchanting, I could introduce your shinobi to masters of the craft, where they could purchase enchanted items. I can't guarantee that your people will be able to learn it, or to replicate it here."

That was a bit of a lie. The fact that Minato was rotting in the Soul Cairn meant that it was possible for shinobi to mess with souls. If he could try to adapt his brother’s seals to magic, what could stop shinobi from figuring out enchanting by themselves if they really wanted to?

Still, if enchanting would give them one more reason to send the boy with him to Tamriel, he’d use the Winterhold College as bait. He had given them a warning without going into the details, he didn’t think that talking about the Soul Cairn would be constructive at this point.

At that, a silent exchange passed through the three ninja once again. "That would be acceptable. Of course, we’d be willing to trade a fair price for either or both.”

“Your money won’t be good in Tamriel, but I know some people that would gladly pay to get their hands on some scrolls written in your language,” Conrad observed. And of course, there were also all the marvels of the Elemental Nations. From books about the local geography and traditions to ball point pens and typewriters. He’d probably have to make a list.

“Speaking of money…” Sarutobi said, in a way that clearly meant that it was time to move on with the negotiation. If they could even call it that.

“Right,” Tsunade nodded. “The shinobi that will accompany you and Naruto will not be available to Konoha for months… or even years.”

“You can keep them, if you want,” he suggested. She immediately raised an eyebrow.

“I think we both know that’s not possible, and why.”

Conrad hated that she was right. “You force me to take some ninja with me, but you worry about not being able to use them for your contracts?”

“Missions,” Sarutobi corrected. “It would be a hit on our manpower, yes. And as a consequence, to our finances.”

“I see,” Conrad said, as he gathered his thoughts. Part of him just wanted to tell them that he could just send their shinobi back whenever they needed them.

But the damn spell wasn’t ready yet, and they wouldn’t really accept a means of transportation that was controlled only by him. And even if Conrad figured out some way to allow them to activate it without him being present… they could use it to get Naruto whenever they felt like it. No need to involve him in that decision at all.

No, he needed to give them what they wanted. They just didn’t want to ask for it, so that it would feel like it was his idea.

He stepped closer to the desk and prepped his staff against it so that it wouldn’t fall, which would’ve been embarrassing. He took his axe from his belt, and much to his annoyance, the shinobi didn’t even react in the slightest. Showoffs.

Then, he slowly unscrewed the steel knob by the end of its aft. Not breaking eye contact with Tsunade, Conrad poured the contents of the secret compartment on the desk.

“Would these suffice as an account for hiring your shinobi for some missions in Tamriel, then?” he asked once the last of the handful of gems had fallen on the desk. After all, these people were mercenaries, no matter how much Inoichi got offended when he described them as such.

And, at the risk of sounding like a hypocrite, there were some Altmer that deserved a kunai through their skulls.


“I may not have become Godaime, but I’ll become Rokudaime for sure! You’ll see!” Naruto boasted loudly. Sasuke and Sakura had gotten used to it.

The three of them had been left to their own devices after the ceremony was over. Which soon ended with them gravitating towards Ichiraku. They had gotten used to that very quickly, as well.

In fact, even the owners had gotten used to it. Ayame had even learned their favorite orders.

"I better get going," Sakura told the others, having finished her bowl. "I promised my Mom I'd help her."

"We'll see you at Sasuke's place later, right?" Naruto asked immediately. "For the sleepover?"

“It’s not a sleepover,” Sasuke protested. “It’s a team-building exercise.”

“I’m pretty sure that hanging out, eating snacks, playing games, and sleeping in the same room counts more as a sleepover,” the boy said smugly, earning a glare from Sasuke.

“Ah, no, not today. Sorry,” Sakura apologized.

“What? Why?” Naruto asked, confused. Even Sasuke seemed a bit surprised.

“It’s just… look, it’s stupid. But my parents are a bit... protective, and… " she stopped, finding it a bit difficult to admit the last part.

“... is this because of me?” Naruto asked, obviously worried. "Because of...?"

“No, no!" Sakura quickly answered. Her parents may have been surprised when they’d had the first, almost accidental sleepover, but had not tried to persuade her from not being supportive of her teammate. Both of them. "It’s just… ugh, this is so embarrassing... they didn’t feel comfortable with the idea of me being alone with two boys… and no adult supervision.”

Naruto's worry morphed in confusion, and he titled the head like he did when he didn't quite understand what Iruka-sensei was saying back at the Academy. “Why?”

Sakura was a smart girl, everyone had always said so. So she quickly came to the decision that she would not be the one to explain the bees and the birds to her teammate. Especially since said teammate had a crush on her.

Besides, Naruto had an uncle now. If anyone had to explain the facts of life to him, it was him.

So, she quickly paid and decided to say farewell to the two boys. "I'll see you two tomorrow. Just because Kakashi-sensei is out on a mission doesn't mean we get to skip training."

The two genin watched her going with a mutual look of bewilderment.

"What was that about?" Naruto asked, after a while.

"No idea," Sasuke answered honestly. "Girls are weird."


After Minato’s brother had shown off his hidden wealth, Tsunade had made a brief note to reprimand whoever had inspected the equipment of the foreigners when they had been captured months ago.

Secret compartments inside of a prisoner’s weapon shouldn’t escape the attentions of a hidden village.

Then, there had been a lot of contracts to sign, which the man decided to do with his full signature. Possibly out of spite, to dwarf Tsunade’s. When asked about it, he had just grumbled that he had gained ‘way too many titles’ during his life but didn’t elaborate further.

Too bad she couldn’t read his language, she would’ve liked to try to call out on some of them.

Finally, she was left alone with her old teammate and sensei.

“That went well,” Jiraiya offered.

“We gained a place where to hide Naruto until he’ll be strong enough, secured possible trade routes for the village and maybe even the Land of Fire a few years down the line, and gained a new market for missions that no other village knows about,” Sarutobi nodded, putting some tobacco in his pipe. “That would sound like a successful meeting, yes.”

“Except that we’re gambling over the fact that Naruto will want to come back,” Jiraiya observed. They remained silent for a moment.

“We’ll cross that bridge when we get there,” Tsunade offered. She was sure the kid would pick the right decision, in the end. She opened a drawer of her desk, retrieved some money from it and offered it to Sarutobi. “Here, you won. The first thing he did entering the office was throwing an insult.”

“Don’t take it too hard,” her sensei told her, counting the money. “I asked Yamanaka Inoichi about that habit of his. According to him, that’s either a defense mechanism or possibly a Nord tradition.”


Conrad woke up by the sound of someone knocking at the door. His eyes drifted to the clock, and he decided that it was way too early. Especially considering that he had fallen asleep at his desk, making plans, consulting maps and writing lists.

Mostly lists of stuff he would need to buy and bring back to Skyrim with him, possibly in bulk. There was also the matter of teaching the boy Cyrodillic, at least. And maybe Nordic, later. Along with as many lessons about Tamriel he could cram in that little head.

Sadly Naruto had gone to spend the night with his little friends. He had not even had the time to talk to him about their trip. He could always do it when the boy came back home for lunch, he reasoned.

The knocking continued, so Conrad decided to go check what they wanted so badly, whoever 'they' were.

"This better be quick," he said as he opened the door. "The Green Menace will be here soon, and一"

"Good morning, Harissen-san," one of Naruto's little friends greeted him. The one with pink hair, named after strawberries. Or cherries. One of the two. "Is Naruto here? We were supposed to meet earlier in the morning, and he didn't show up."

“I thought he was at your friend’s house?" Conrad asked, as he registered what the girl had said. "The broody one, Sasuke?”

At that, Sakura一right, that was her name一bit her lip, eyes full of worry. “Sasuke didn’t come to the meeting, either.”

Chapter 25: Conrad Harissen Does Something Rash

Notes:

This one took a while to write. In the end it got so long I had to split it in two parts. Hopefully I'll be able to edit and post the second part soon.

Chapter Text

"We found signs of struggle at Uchiha Sasuke's apartment, but if there was a fight it was a brief one. Nobody heard or saw the intruders. They're both gone," Shikaku finished his report. Tsunade would've liked to voice how much she needed a drink, but she just nodded. The Hokage couldn't do that in front of her shinobi, after all. Or at least, most of them.

She had all too many reasons for wanting to drink, in her opinion. The last loyal Uchiha and the Nine-Tails Jinchuuriki had disappeared at the same time. But she'd wait until later.

"Any signs that may point to whoever is responsible?" she asked. A lead, any kind, even something ruling out a potential suspect would be beyond useful.

Shikaku gave a shrug. "I doubt it was Iwa, at least. They've been on their best behavior since the exams, and they even offered to lend a hand in the search."

Tsunade hoped so, because she didn't want to deal with a diplomatic fiasco like the Hyuuga Affair anytime soon.

"I believe we can also rule Akatsuki out. Based on Jiraiya-sama's intel, they wouldn't have a reason to target Uchiha Sasuke," Shikaku continued. And Tsunade found herself agreeing… even if Uchiha Itachi decided to pay another visit to his little brother, nothing pointed to him wishing to abduct his sibling.

"How many teams can we spare for tracking the kidnappers?" she asked.

"I'd say two four-men teams, at least. Maybe more, but we'll have to recall some teams that already left for their missions."

Which would take time… she hoped the two teams would be able to manage until then.

If not Iwa, and not Akatsuki, then who?

… Orochimaru. He had put his seal on Sasuke during the exams. The power of the Sharingan would grant him the ability to control a bijuu. Did it mean that he wanted the Kyuubi for himself? Turn it into a good little minion of his? Use it as a bargaining chip against Akatsuki? All of the above?

Maybe some idiot ninja went overzealous, saw the blond kid and figured 'let's bring him to Orochimaru-sama as well, I'm sure he'll give us a treat and praise and call us good boys.'

She needed a drink.

"Hokage-sama, it's not my place to ask, but一"

"Just ask away, Shikaku. And then go organize those teams."

"Did anyone ask Harissen Conrad to not do anything rash?"

Food and water for a few days, along with cooking supplies. Easier to carry than what he'd use in Tamriel. A sleeping mat, again, more compact and comfier than he was used to. A map and a compass, to help orient himself. A rope, because you always end up needing a rope and not having it. Potions too, of course. Along with his armor, his axe, his staff and his knife as well.

The kidnappers had a head start of half a day by now. He had to move quickly.

"Master Conrad," Beta called, offering him a satchel bag, which upon inspection was revealed to be full of a vast assortment of vials.

"One can never have enough potions, Master Conrad said that," Ta'Sava explained.

Conrad nodded in gratitude, slinging the bag over his shoulder. "No summoning more dremora while I'm gone, you three… got that?" he asked, looking at one of his students specifically.

"You make a mistake while under mortal peril once…" Sven groaned, trying and failing to hide his smile.

He hesitated for a moment before picking up his mother's ebony sword as well. "Well, I'm off to save the boy."

"And his friend, right?" Beta asked.

"Obviously," he answered on the doorstep. He hoped it didn't come down to having to pick between the boy and Sasuke. He stopped outside of the house as he found himself face to face with a certain Toad Sage, who was leaning against his non-existing porch, trying to look cooler than he actually was.

"Conrad," Jiraiya greeted him. No formalities? Fine by him. He was tired of hearing honorifics the whole day.

"Jiraiya," he acknowledged, closing the door.

"Going somewhere?" Jiraiya asked, eyes on his get up.

"Mh-mh. Planning to stop me?"

"Actually, I was planning to come with you," the shinobi replied. Conrad had not expected that.

"Say again?"

"I figured you wouldn't wait and that trying to reason with you would be a waste of time," Jiraiya shrugged. "Besides, it's Minato's son. Of course I'll help."

He might not like the man all that much, but Conrad wasn't too proud to see he could use the help. Especially since ninja were tricky bastards. Having a tricky bastard on his side too seemed prudent.

"Suit yourself," Conrad said. "Let's just go."

"Just one moment, I'll summon a toad to ride."

"A toad," Conrad repeated flatly.

"But of course! You're not as fast as a shinobi, so we're gonna need some means of transportation. Unless you want me to carry you."

Conrad looked at Jiraiya for a moment, trying to figure out if he was joking or not, before deciding he didn't care. "Dur Neh Viir!" he shouted in the air, before looking at Jiraiya and completely ignoring the cursed dragon that had just appeared above them. Or the smell.

"Fine, no toads then…" Jiraiya huffed as the dragon landed nearby. Conrad turned to greet his old ally.

"Qahnaarin," Durnehviir's voice echoed through the clearing, speaking in Cyrodilic with the odd cadence dragons had. "It has not been long since the last time we spoke. Your brother sends his regards, he's eager to know how his offspring fares under your care."

Conrad winced. "Yeah… about that…"

"... you lost the Minatokiin?" the dragon asked, incredulous. Conrad was a bit offended that Durnehviir immediately assumed the worst, and frustrated that he couldn't argue otherwise.

"Hey, what's he saying? That was Minato's name, right?" Jiraiya demanded, looking torn between being in awe of being so close to a dragon and repelled by the stench. As if toads smelled better! Conrad ignored him.

"Someone took the boy. I'm going after them, along with this man who taught my brother," he gestured towards Jiraiya, who just kept staring between them. At least someone else was suffering because of the language barrier, for once.

"I'm not a carriage, Qahnaarin. I am not Odahviing to ferry you as you please," the dragon grumbled, clearly not liking the implications that he'd have to carry them. But Conrad had figured he'd say something like that.

"I know, Durnehviir, but I'm out of options," he said. Because toads or being carried like a baby weren't options, as far as he was concerned. "Do this for me, and once the boy is safe I'll owe you a duel."

The ancient dragon looked at him in silence for a moment, before speaking. "Only if you will refrain from using the Shout that undid Alduin."

"Deal," he said immediately. Having to fight a dragon without using Dragonrend? He'd slain dozens before he'd even learned the Shout existed. He'd been a wisp of a man, then, with barely a hint of a beard.

Durnehviir immediately turned, lowering his body as an offer to hop on his back.

"Get on, Jiraiya," he ordered as he found his place at the base of the dragon's neck.

"Why did he mention Minato?" Jiraiya asked as he climbed between Durnehviir's shoulders, apparently having decided that the smell wasn't that bad if it meant getting a ride on the cursed dragon.

"Because Minato wants to know if I'm taking care of Naruto," Conrad deadpanned, before turning around as he felt the man's stare on him. "What?"

"You… can communicate with Minato, who is eternally trapped in the Shinigami's stomach," Jiraiya said, clearly processing a lot of emotions along with those words. "And you never mentioned it. Why?"

Well, when you looked at it from his point of view, someone that had pretty much raised his brother… Not to mention he hadn't told Naruto either. In fairness, the Soul Cairn was the absolute last place he wanted to bring his nephew. Hopefully even an affection-starved stubborn orphan would see the logic in that.

"He's a dragon, Jiraiya, not a courier. Can we focus on the fate of my brother's soul later? After we assure his living son is still, in fact, alive?" he demanded. There was too much going on at that very moment to deal with this. Jiraiya didn't protest, thankfully, but Conrad was painfully aware there would be an argument about it later.

He quickly cast his clairvoyance spell. The blue orb of light sped through the sky, showing the way.

"Follow that," Conrad ordered. Durnehviir started moving his massive wings. Someone was shouting at them, probably the masked guards that were 'hiding' around the house. He felt Jiraiya trying to get a better grip on the dragon's scales, and then they were soaring above Konoha.

He had missed this. Being in the air, the sensation of freedom, focusing on a clear objective instead of loitering around all day… anticipating being able to make someone that wronged him pay… Vengeance, it seemed, was something both the Nord and the dragon in him were in staunch agreement of.

"Er… Conrad?" Jiraiya tapped his shoulders, distracting him from pleasant thoughts.

"What?" he asked, and the only answer he got was Jiraiya pointing towards Durnehviir's tail. Or, more accurately, to the girl holding onto Dunrnehviir's tail for dear life.

"Please, make this thing land!" Sakura shrieked at the top of her lungs. She regretted everything, forever.

Somewhere under the fear she was feeling, she was pretty sure that the overgrown flying lizard was trying to shake her off its tail, given how it moved. Why hadn't they stopped when she had called them, asking to wait for her? And why had she thought that this was a good idea?!

Just as she was about to try to pump some chakra through her hands to get a better hold, she felt as if she was being pulled away. She lost her grip.

This was it, she thought, as panic spiked through her brain. She was dead. She was gonna plummet on someone's house and… and… she wasn't falling?

Sakura opened her eyes and saw that Jiraiya of the Sannin had grabbed her by her backpack and was pulling her towards the relative safety of the dragon's back. Before she knew it, she found herself sitting between a shinobi legend and the brother of another one. Who could summon dragons and was turning around as much as he could to glare at her.

"Girl. What were you thinking?" Naruto's uncle bit out furiously.

Sakura stared at him for a moment. The man was dressed for war, clad in heavy steel plate, battered and well-worn in a style utterly foreign to the Elemental Nations. Just a few months ago she would have been nervous about upsetting a scary man like him, but Sakura's team had faced Orochimaru in the Forest of Death, the Jinchuuriki of Sunagakure during the invasion and dealt with the fact that their teammate was a walking bundle of S-Rank secrets. Which, in any other circ*mstance, would've led her to ask herself how was this her life now.

"I knew you'd do something to save Naruto and Sasuke. I want to help, too! They're my teammates!" she told him. After all, those who abandoned their teammates were worse than trash.

He looked like he was about to argue, but much to her surprise he turned to look forward. Then a bag was thrust in her lap. "Take care of that for me," he said without looking back. "You'll do as you're told, when you're told, and you won't protest. Understood?"

"Yes, sir," she answered, holding the bag against her chest. At that, the Nord did that tracking jutsu of his again, and barked another order at the dragon.

Sakura felt the Toad Sage's hand landing firmly on her shoulder. She wondered if it was to praise her for having successfully joined their rescue mission, or to ensure that she didn't slip and fall as the dragon suddenly veered and changed direction.

Owl and his fellow ANBU watched as the dragon flew away.

"Sir, I want to quit," one of them said. "Maybe I'll get a job at the Academy. It will be less stressful."

Owl didn't disagree. But they still had a job to do. At his signal, the team started to chase the dragon.

They had been following Harissen-san's spell for hours now, and it was getting colder than Sakura had expected. Must have been because of the altitude, she reasoned. She wondered if she could get warmer using chakra somehow, but she wouldn't know where to start with it despite her advanced chakra control.

Truth be told, despite her initial bravado she wasn't sure what help she could be, aside from carrying a bag full of potions. She knew she was weak, but she wanted to help. She had to.

Even if she didn't necessarily know how.

Naruto's uncle repeated that jutsu of his once again, and the blue light split in two, surprising them all. One kept moving through the sky, the other fell into the forest below them. Sakura didn't know the man's language, but she could tell he had swore something nasty. She also knew why he sounded so worried.

If he had been using the jutsu to track Naruto and it suddenly pointed in two different directions…

Before her mind could conjure a series of worrying scenarios to explain that, the man yelled something to the dragon and before Sakura could register it they were diving into the forest, breaking through the canopy and shattering tree branches like they were twigs. A heartbeat later, the dragon had landed in the forest. Just in front of an understandably startled genin wearing orange clothes.

Naruto, because of course it was Naruto, stared slack-jawed at the dragon looming over him, a mix of awe and fear on his face. Until he saw the trio perched on the dragon's shoulders.

"Uncle? Ero-Sennin? What are you doing here?!"

"That's our question, boy," Harrisen-san told him, sliding off the dragon and walking towards his nephew. He didn't look happy now that he'd found Naruto, Sakura noticed. She was, obviously, but she would express that later.

She jumped off the dragon, landing right in front of Naruto. "You absolute jerk!"

"Wha一Sakura-chan?! You're here too?!" he had the gall to ask.

"Of course I'm here! My teammates got kidnapped, what was I supposed to do?!" she demanded, trying to grab him and shake him until he told her what happened and where Sasuke was.

"Woah woah, hang on! Don't!" Naruto exclaimed, taking a few steps back and raising his hands. "I'll poof away!"

Sakura's eyes widened in realization. "You're a clone."

"Well, duh! The real me is still chasing the jerks that got Sasuke!" the shadow clone told her, gesturing wildly to the forest behind him.

At that, Naruto's uncle stepped forward, and Sakura felt the need to take a couple of steps sideways. "Explain," he ordered.

"So, yesterday the real me was having the sleepover at Sasuke's place, and Sakura couldn't come because her parents don't like boys or something like that一"

"Boy!" Harrisen-san exclaimed, making it clear that his patience had grown thin.

"Some weirdos attacked us and got Sasuke, they knocked the real me out, but then he got up and chased after them," Naruto's clone said quickly.

"... alone? Without telling anyone?" Jiraiya asked, having joined the group. His exasperation was oddly comforting to Sakura.

"That's why I'm here!" the clone explained. "The real me created me to go back to Konoha and tell everyone!"

There was a loud, disappointed sigh at that. "Do you… does he realize how long he's been missing?!" Conrad asked loudly.

"Yeah, but they got Sasuke! He'd do the same!" Naruto's clone protested even louder, and Sakura nodded in agreement.

"Why didn't he use clones to raise the alarm? He uses them for everything!" his uncle countered. To which Sakura had to agree as well. "I swear, if he was here, I'd一"

"Hang on, Conrad," Jiraiya interrupted, putting a hand on the man's shoulder before looking at the clone. "Naruto, I need you to tell me everything, as much as you can. I'll send a messenger toad to Konoha, it would be faster than you anyway."

"Hey!" the clone exclaimed, crossing his arms indignantly. Sakura wondered how fast a toad summon could be.

"Then you can dispel yourself... after Conrad will have some words with you," the Toad Sage continued, ready to write down a message.

"Why would I want to berate a shadow clone?" Naruto's uncle asked, clearly confused.

"Because Naruto will get the clone's memories."

Naruto froze mid-jump, almost missing the tree branch he had been aiming for. He still managed to land on it, and looked back where he had come from. Where his clone had gone a few hours ago.

All of his uncle's stories about dragons were true. A tiny part of him had suspected that not everything he'd heard was real, it was all right out of a fairy tale! And yet, now, for some reason… Also, he had the sudden sensation that if he didn't stop where he was and waited, his uncle would be very, very mad at him.

But he couldn't stop! Those guys got Sasuke, and they had kept saying stuff about Orochimaru this and Orochimaru that whenever Naruto had gotten close enough to hear them. And everything involving that creepy snake guy was bad news, in Naruto's opinion.

"I'm gonna be grounded forever," he whined to himself, before continuing.

They kept flying through the night, passing over the Valley of the End and then further north.

During that time, Jiraiya had explained about Orochimaru and the past of the Sannin, which Naruto's uncle didn't seem to be very interested in.

"So, this Orochimaru used to be your friend and then turned evil?" he had asked in a way that sounded like he had heard a similar story way too many times. But Sakura had not heard such a story before. Had the situation been different, she'd have gladly asked questions. Instead, she had huddled herself in the blanket she had put in her backpack along with some other supplies, and listened.

She listened to the tale of when the three of them were just genin, under the tutelage of the Sandaime. She listened to how they faced Hanzo the Salamander, and how they drifted apart later.

Dawn came, and Sakura saw how different the land below them was compared to the Land of Fire. Large valleys between tall mountains had given way to rice paddies. There was some woodland, especially far from the occasional village, but nothing like the sea of trees around Konoha she was familiar with.

It was beautiful.

"The Land of Rice," Jiraiya commented. "Although some people started to call it the Land of Sound."

"Both of those names are terrible," Naruto's uncle said. "Just like your 'Land of Fire'."

"Says the man that comes from a place called 'the Rim of the Sky'."

"It's 'Skyrim' and you know it," Harrisen-san retorted, turning around to glare at the Sannin.

Sakura yawned, having stayed up the whole night. Maybe a bit louder than she had to, but if it stopped two grown men from arguing about the name of countries, where was the harm in it?

"Girl, open the bag. Drink one of the green potions, and then give one to the Old Toad too," Naruto's uncle told her, as he drank one of the vials he had on his belt.

Sakura did as instructed, grateful that she could distinguish them by the color of their contents, since she couldn't read the labels. She immediately felt the instinct to spit the foul mixture, but somehow managed to hold it down. The aftertaste was somehow worse, lingering for what felt like forever. Then the fatigue from the lack of sleep started disappearing, and Sakura felt as if she was ready to take on a whole training session with Gai-sensei of all people.

"Say, Harissen-san… what are the other potions like?" she asked as she put the empty vial back. After all, if she had to carry them around, she'd need to know what they were for.

Naruto's uncle seemed to agree with that, since he started explaining. "The red ones will heal you. The blue ones are for fueling my spells, don't drink those."

"So, are they like chakra?" she asked.

"No, it's magicka. Very different. Just don't drink it, Divines know what will happen," he said.

"My money is on an imbalance between the spiritual and physical energies of whoever drinks it," Jiraiya said behind her. "But Tsunade-hime decided to not test it yet."

"Alright… what about these?" Sakura asked, looking at other vials that were neither green, blue or red. The mage turned around to glance at the bag's contents.

"Those will magnify your strength," he pointed.

"Like a soldier pill?" They certainly tasted bad enough to qualify… someone should figure out how to make these concoctions more appealing.

"Yeah, sure," he said dismissively as he sent out his tracking spell once again. Did he even know what a soldier pill was? "The other ones instead will一hang on…"

His voice drifted off as the blue light changed direction, the three of them and the dragon following it with their eyes.

"There," the mage told them, pointing towards a low mountain his spell was moving towards.

He yelled something at the Dragon, and the beast flew higher, keeping the rising sun on its back to hide from any onlookers and giving them a good vantage point to look at their objective. Sakura had to squint her eyes, but she could make out some buildings built on the side of a cliff.

"Otogakure," Jiraiya said, having produced a spyglass. After observing through it for a while, he offered it to Naruto's uncle. "Here, just put it near one of your eyes, like this, and一"

"We have these in Tamriel, too!" the man hissed, demonstrating that he knew how to use one. Sakura would've felt upset that she had not been offered the spyglass, had she not been told by Naruto what the Sannin used it for.

"What do you see?" Jiraiya asked, sounding just like Kakashi-sensei when he asked something he already knew.

"A few entrances… easy to defend. The complex goes deep in the mountain… it's probably full of chokepoints and traps."

"How do you know that, Harissen-san?" Sakura asked.

"I spent more time underground than you've been alive, girl," he answered, making Sakura briefly wonder if Naruto's uncle literally lived under a rock. "The stone formations down there look weird, though."

"They must have used some earth jutsu during its construction," Jiraiya explained.

"How in the names of Aedra and Deadra did the boy manage to get in there?"

"The kid is more resourceful than he looks," Jiraiya sighed, sounding both proud and irritated. Sakura wasn't sure if she was supposed to defend Naruto or not. The Sannin sort of had a point. "But we better get there and save him and Uchiha Sasuke."

"Right," Conrad nodded, offering back the spyglass. Then he started to cast some other spells, different from the one he'd used the whole night. Blue light swam into existence around her in whisps, before making Sakura feel all tingly as it washed over her and sank into her skin.

"What was that?" she asked.

"Your skin is now as hard as iron," the man told her, as he kept going through other motions. Other spells, Sakura figured, for himself. "It should last long enough, but should it end you have a potion for that. Make sure you don't rely too much on this. You're harder to hurt, not invulnerable."

Sakura looked at her hands. She didn't feel any different, but experimentally poked one of her fingers on a kunai's tip. It barely hurt at all, and she was sure it would probably come in handy.

"So, time to start a rescue mission," Jiraiya exclaimed. "Luckily for you, I have a cunning plan一"

Sakura felt a shiver go down her spine, as something echoed from the mountain. It wasn't a sound, it was more a change in the air pressure. It was probably pretty far away from them, but she recognised it.

She had felt something like that when her team had fought with Gaara, during the invasion. An intense bloodlust, a promise of violence.

"What in Oblivion was that?" Harrisen-san asked them.

"... nevermind the plan," Jiraiya said quickly. "We have to go. We have to go right now."

At that, Naruto's uncle said something to the dragon, before turning back to them with a grin. It was a grin that Sakura knew would give little kids nightmares.

"Hold tight," he ordered. And then the dragon flexed its big wings, starting to fly as fast as it could towards the mountain. The summoned creature roared. Sakura's blanket was lost in the wind, and by looking at how close the entrance was getting, she realized that the dragon wasn't going to slow down.

"W-wait… is it gonna stop, or一"

"Get ready to jump," he told her.

"What do you mean 'jump'?!" Sakura yelped. She could see the gate's planks by now.

Then, in unison, the dragon and rider yelled the same three words. For a heartbeat, there was no sound at all. Sakura felt Jiraiya grabbing her. Next thing she knew, the world exploded in a cacophony of splintered wood and the groaning of shattered stone as the two of them landed in front of the entrance in a blur of motion.

"Kakashi should make you work on your landings," the Sannin joked. Sakura wanted to glare at him, but her eyes stopped as she looked inside the now destroyed gate. Pulverized was a better word. It was like a giant fist had smashed right through it, leaving nothing but rubble and debris and the less than intact remains of the ninja that had been unlucky enough to be standing too close.

Before the surviving shinobi that had been guarding the gate could react they were hit by a gale of ice, straight from the dragon's mouth. Then the beast descended on them. There was an audible sound of bones being crushed, and swallowing noises that made Sakura sick.

And standing tall among the rubble, was Harissen Conrad.

"Mul Qah Diiv!" he shouted, and a fiery aura wrapped around him, similar to multicolored flames that went to form a long tail. It settled into an ethereal mantle of plated scales with jagged edges, crowned with menacing horns.

The draconic resemblance was undeniable, and unnerving. Sakura had not seen it before, but she recognized it from the story Naruto and Sasuke had told her. It had been so outlandish, even if Sasuke confirmed every word despite Naruto's habit of exaggerating everything. But seeing is believing, and Sakura was seeing a lot today.

Then, he walked into Otogakure, slowing down only to deal with whoever tried to stop him, either shooting magic from his staff or cutting them down with that axe of his.

Not all of them died immediately. Some were burned to twitching, charred figures. Others wailed, losing blood from their missing chunks or limbs. All of them screamed.

Sakura had seen people die before. But this… not even during the invasion she had witnessed such brutality.

Part of her expected Jiraiya to comfort her somehow. Tell her that they were enemies, or not to look.

So, when the Sannin let her go, walking into the gaping maw that led to the depths of the mountain, she could only stare at his back as he threw some kunai to finish off some particularly loud wounded.

She could only look, fighting back tears.

She had chosen to be here. Just like she had chosen to be a kunoichi. Had she really thought that she could be one without seeing such things?

Somehow, asking herself that helped taking a step, and then another, and another and then fall in formation.

It didn't stop her from hurling when she smelled the scent of burnt flesh.

Orochimaru was upset.

His Sound Four had successfully grabbed Sasuke, who was unfortunately an unwilling participant, but they'd failed to shake off the Kyuubi Jinchuuriki in the process.

Under normal circ*mstances, Naruto-kun wasn't skilled enough to pose much of a threat, all wild attacks and no true skill. Except the tailed beast inside him made it near impossible for his minions to put him down. He wasn't quite rampaging, not yet, but they could barely keep him contained. Not to mention the continuous waves of malicious Bijuu chakra were somewhat distracting. He was beginning to think that he'd have to step in and deal with it himself when the world thundered.

As the shockwaves ceased, he couldn't help but look up as dust fell from the ceiling, eyes narrowing. Something was wrong. Even with the Kyuubi sealed inside him, the Uzumaki brat shouldn't be able to do the kind of damage that would be felt all the way in the lower levels.

"Were the seals damaged?" he quickly asked.

"No, Orochimaru-sama," Kabuto answered as he checked the coffin. "They're still intact."

Orochimaru felt a quick shadow of relief. Had they been damaged, Sasuke could've died as his cursed seal reached the second level. And that would've been an incredible waste. A dead host would serve no purpose, Sharingan or not.

"Go help the others in containing the Jinchuuriki," he ordered. "Try to do a better job than you did with the one from Suna."

Kabuto was too skilled a shinobi to openly frown at the reminder of that failure, but he needed to be reminded of what it had cost him. Namely, weeks slowly and painfully growing back some limbs. Still, he obeyed like the good servant he was.

"Send Kimimaro," Orochimaru added as Kabuto walked by, almost as an afterthought.

"Kimimaro, sir?"

"He's dying… let this be his final service to me," he explained. Kabuto nodded, and left the room.

Orochimaru was now alone… alone with the prize he had desired for years. The next stage of the cursed seal would make Sasuke more agreeable, he thought. A taste of power, and the promise of much more.

He could train Sasuke for a while, dangling a path to reach his revenge against Itachi in front of his eyes to make him stronger. And even if he refused… Well, Orochimaru would have to choose between keeping him in a cell for a few years and strengthening his body through some experiments, or make the sacrifice of living as a twelve-year old for a little while.

"Soon…" he told himself. Soon the Sharingan would be his.

Despite being overall annoying and having a twisted culture and priorities, shinobi weren't stupid. They had adapted quickly, so instead of aiming for the thickest parts of his armor, they were trying to stab him between the relatively unprotected joints and gaps. Or straight at his head.

Sadly for them, his skin was made of sterner stuff. At least, as long as the Shout and his magical wards held.

A trio of kunai pinged off uselessly on his ethereal scales, and Conrad spat fire in the direction of the source. He parried a blade with the flat of his axe, unleashing a lightning bolt at the fool that thought it would've been enough to aim for his head as they forged ahead.

The dungeon was built deep into the earth, with concrete and stone and strange pipes humming and hissing all around them. The corridors were built tall and wide enough for two Dwemer Centurions to walk comfortably side by side, just big enough for Durnehviir to be at their backs.

"It has been too long since I've done battle below the earth," he rumbled, which made the girl look back nervously.

Conrad paid them no mind, whispering to himself instead. "Laas Yah Niir."

He opened his eyes. There was a veritable firmament of souls beyond the walls around them. Mostly below them, but a few were even above. They swarmed in a manic frenzy like a beehive that someone had foolishly tossed a stone at. Others seemed to remain still, as if to guard their positions. He ignored them all, his eyes homing in on the soul he could not mistake for anyone else's.

Naruto's soul was like a beacon among a swarm of torchbugs, thanks to the creature in him. A creature that, in some way, rivaled a dragon. And it was angry, he could tell even from this distance. Naruto was fighting, and the beast was rattling against the cage that was the boy's body.

A soul winked into being nearby in a way that was all too similar to a conjurer summoning a dremora. It was shaped strangely, elongated and clearly inhuman. Before he could blink, a long serpentine body emerged from the darkness, charging at them with large fangs dripping sickly green venom. More followed.

Giant snakes. He scoffed. What was a snake, to a dragon?

Durnehviir must have thought something along those lines, because his jaws closed on the first reptile's head, crushing it to a pulp and ripping apart its flesh.

"Orochimaru's summons," Jiraiya said, forming hand-seals as the beasts circled around them. "He must have assigned them to protect the一"

"Just kill them already!" Conrad roared, firing a ray of lightning from his staff, which cracked and burned the scales of his target and made its body convulse and spasm as it died. Then the other beasts lunged, and it was the time for the steel and fangs.

As he introduced his axe to the skull of a particularly nasty-looking viper, there was a puff of smoke that briefly covered the battlefield. From it, of all things, emerged a bunch of toads armed with an array of wicked-looking weapons, all clad in ornate battle armor as well. And guiding them, of course, was Jiraiya.

Conrad felt insulted from the deepest parts of his soul at the suggestion that he needed help to deal with such worms. But they needed to get to the boy as quickly as possible. He took advantage of the distraction provided by the toads and summoned his own reinforcements. Fire atronachs, who immediately rushed towards a new wave of snakes in a haze of fire and flame. A purple snake was thrown at his feet in the ensuing chaos, and he ruthlessly crushed it under his boot.

He caught sight of a flash of pink on his left, as the girl dodged the serpents' bites by jumping the way shinobi did, sending a hail of kunai at them. That didn't deter the reptiles, at least until the small scrolls attached to their hilt detonated, killing the smaller ones. The largest, which was as wide as a cart, only got enraged and slithered towards the girl at an alarming speed, ignoring the toads that were fighting its brethren in its path.

Conrad finished off a particularly annoying and slippery one, hastily starting to cast a spell to throw at the bigger snake, but then Durnehviir pounced on it, like a cat would pounce on some vermin to toy with them before going for the kill. Except that the dragon wasn't playing with its food.

Feeling a tinge of satisfaction, he adjusted his aim to the next foe, unleashed another lightning bolt and went back to hacking. Much to his surprise and disappointment, he missed his mark. Not by lack of skill, but because the intended target disappeared in a puff of smoke, which his axe passed through.

He scanned for another target, only to realize that the surviving snakes were retreating. Either by slithering away in the dark, or by retreating to whatever place they had been summoning from. Especially the ones closer to Durnehviir or him.

There was some rejoicing from the toads, and taunting that made Conrad wonder if there was bad blood between the two groups.

Whatever. He wasn't going to question it. He sent the atronachs after the snakes, just in case, then they kept marching. The amphibians and Durnehviir formed a rearguard while Conrad walked ahead of everyone else, checking which direction to go with his spell.

It didn't take long until they reached a new passage. Namely one that had a variety of smaller tunnels and stairways branching off from the area they were in. They would take one to move further down the ninja base, and closer to the boy. Boys. Whatever.

Conrad had walked down for less than ten steps when he and his companions were stopped by a snarl and the sound of something grinding against stone and concrete. He turned and stared for a few seconds, as he processed what he was seeing.

Durnehviir, the great necromancer dragon of the Merethic era, was doing his best to fit through a passage that wasn't large enough for his form. And looked as cross as a cat that couldn't catch a mouse.

One of the toad summons snickered but quickly shut it when Durnehviir's head turned towards him. Then he started to push against the tunnel's frame, the stone groaning as he tried to go further in.

"Durnehviir, stop!" Conrad ordered, speaking above the sounds of protests of the nearby architecture. Tiny bits of debris ominously came loose from the ceiling and the walls.

"I should just Shout my way through this wretched vipers' nest," the dragon hissed.

"You could, but then you'd bring the whole place on our heads," Conrad said sternly. "We'll keep going from here, you stay here to keep our escape route open."

The dragon didn't look amused at the order.

"You can always pick off whoever will try to cut us off," Conrad added. Durnehviir grumbled, but after a reminder that he was already promised a battle he reluctantly stood guard and watched as they went further.

Jiraiya ordered the summoned toads to split and check the rest of the complex, just to be sure. Then, down they went, a trail of death marking their progress behind them. He was closer than ever to Naruto. He could only hope he made it in time.

At first, Sakura had thought that the room they had found on the way deeper in the mountain was a clinic or hospital. There were beds and medical equipment all over the place, along with some machines Sakura didn't recognise.

Then she noticed the restraints on the beds' frames, which were bolted to the floor.

A prison, then? She could see various doors in a nearby hallway, and they all looked sturdy. But that didn't fit either, why would there be so much machinery in a prison?

Her current teammates were taking in the room as well. The Toad Sage's mouth was a thin line, as he picked some papers from a nearby desk, while Naruto's uncle seemed… wary, as he approached some of the machines.

She moved to get a closer look. Inside a large glass container filled with a strange liquid there was a… thing. A small blob of flesh almost completely covered in bone plates, which had calcified the joints of the limbs she could still see. In another there was a girl, whose arms had been replaced or turned into tree branches.

They appeared to be dead, and Sakura couldn't decide if that was a tragedy or a mercy.

"Your… friend… did this?" Harissen-san asked, his eyes never leaving the floating bodies.

"He's not been a friend for a long time," Jiraiya answered, putting down the papers. "We should keep going."

Naruto's uncle seemed to agree with the sentiment, since he was staring at the room as if he wanted to set it on fire.

"Leaving already? But you just got here," a voice echoed oddly in the room. Sakura turned around and took a step back from the glass container she was standing next to. A heartbeat ago she'd have sworn it was only a canister full of liquid. Now, though, a boy was trapped inside it, with light blue hair and a smirk that revealed pointy teeth like a shark. The lower part of his body dissolved seamlessly into the water inside the tank, but he didn't seem to be bothered by this.

"A Hozuki from Kirigakure?" Jiraiya-sama guessed as he examined the boy. Sakura didn't recognise the name, but she guessed it was associated with whatever the boy's bloodline limit was. "Orochimaru really is collecting all the strays he can get."

"Hey, screw you, old man! It's not like I had a choice in being stuck here," the boy snapped.

"Are you a prisoner here?" Sakura asked.

"Duh," he answered, tapping his fingers against the thick glass. "I get why those two are here—they look pretty strong—but why did you tag along?"

Sakura shot him an annoyed look. He may have been right, but he didn't have to say it.

"What do you want from us?" Harissen-san asked, having come closer to get a look.

"Dang, I don't know. What could a guy trapped in a giant glass jar want?"

"Keep up the sass and we'll leave you here," Sakura pointed out.

"Aw, come on... that wouldn't be very nice. If you were crazy enough to attack Orochimaru's base, you must know what he does to his prisoners," the boy said, and despite the sarcastic tone, something in the last words made Sakura pause. She remembered the Sound team in the exams, and the modifications done to their bodies.

At that, Harissen-san grunted and started to walk away. "We're not here to save you." The cold logic in his voice gave Sakura the abrupt realization that he wasn't acting normal. At least, not when he was wreathed in a spectral dragon-like aura and his eyes didn't even look human anymore.

"Oi, oi! Don't be like that! I can be useful, you know!" the boy said in a hurry, looking between the three of them. "You said that you're not here to save me, but you're here to save someone else, right? I can help with that!"

Those words made Naruto's uncle stop. "How?"

"I can help you find whoever it is."

"I can find them by myself," Harrisen-san countered, looking unimpressed.

"Oh, so you're a sensor?" the boy asked. "Sure, whatever, but I know my way around the place!"

Instead of replying to the boy, Harissen-san looked at Jiraiya as if to ask his opinion.

The Sage made an odd noise with his mouth, as if he didn't like what he was going to say. "In normal circ*mstances, freeing a prisoner of unknown allegiance would not be a good idea. Ignoring that we'd be idiots to trust you. Why should we believe you even know your way around if you were locked up here like a glorified lab specimen?"

Sakura couldn't help but imagine some Sound-nin carrying the boy's container around the underground base. Like a human-sized goldfish in a matching bowl.

"It wasn't always like this, I was lured here with the offer of a refuge from the bloodline purges back in Kirigakure. Didn't take long for them to reveal that they wanted to figure out how mine works, but I had plenty of time to walk around the place."

The Nord's head turned towards the containers with the bodies of Orochimaru's victims. "So, you want revenge?"

"I want to get out of here! I'll help if you free me, but I just want to leave. Please…" the boy begged.

As the silence grew longer, Sakura decided to speak up. "Naruto would help him."

That made the two men look at each other. "We can always deal with him if he betrays us," Jiraiya of the Sannin pointed out.

"If he betrays us, I'll boil him," Harissen-san promised, as lightning coursed over his fingertips.

"Wow, way to gain my loyalty, old man."

Without warning, Naruto's uncle took a few steps back towards the container, grabbed an important-looking tube and ripped it off. Water started to gush out and with a startled yelp the boy tumbled out of the broken pipe, reforming face-down on the floor. Naked.

Of course he was naked, Sakura realized as she looked away, embarrassed. There weren't clothes floating in the tank, after all.

"A little warning next time?!" the boy snapped as he stumbled to his feet. "Man, I hate passing through ducts, but it feels good to be out… er… I don't suppose you guys have any spare clothes?"

There was a rustling of fabric at that. Sakura waited a few more seconds before risking a glance. The boy was now wearing Jiraiya's red haori, which looked almost like a dress given the difference in height between him and the Sannin.

"Much better. The name's Suigetsu. Nice to meet you!"

"Yeah, yeah," Naruto's uncle hurried him along, as the group went back to moving. "Now, do you know where Orochimaru may keep Sasuke?"

"Who?" Suigetsu asked, puzzled.

"Ah, yes. I can see how freeing you paid off," the man muttered without looking back.

"Hey, it's not like I'm introduced to all the new prisoners! But I happen to know that if your friend is one of the new arrivals, he was probably taken to the lower levels deep down the mountain. That's where the prison is, but there are a few traps and some nasty guards there."

"We wasted enough time as it is. We'll take care of them, after we rescue the boy. He's closer," the Harrisen-san declared.

"Huh… sure, whatever you say," Suigetsu said, before whispering to Sakura. "What's this guy's problem?"

"Normally he's nicer than this, just… a bit rough around the edges. It's that aura of his, I think," Sakura whispered back, but she wasn't sure if she was trying to reassure their temporary ally or herself. After all, this was Naruto's only family. The idea that this was what Naruto would have to deal with for the foreseeable future made her uneasy.

"If you say so一wait… are we walking towards the evil, scary chakra?" he asked, having noticed the turn they were taking. "We can avoid that, you know."

Sakura shook her head. "We can't. That's one of my teammates we came for."

One of Jiraiya's hands landed gently but firmly on Suigetsu's shoulder, to reassure him and probably to ensure the flabbergasted missing-nin wouldn't try to run away.

"Welcome to our rescue mission, Hozuki Suigetsu."

Conrad had barely listened to the protests of the reluctant new member of their little party. As they kept advancing through halls and stairways, they found no more resistance, but plenty of signs of a struggle.

The boy had passed through here. By now, Conrad didn't even need the clairvoyance spell to figure out in which direction he had to go. Every step they took in the right direction felt like they were walking towards their graves. A vile malevolent pressure choked at the air.

If Jiraiya felt dread for the malice and hatred emanating from Naruto, Conrad found solace in it. As long as the monster trapped inside of him kept doing that, it meant that the boy was still alive.

"There! Done!" a voice echoed from further ahead. "Why did that take so long?"

"It's your fault, fat*ss! You're too slow!" another voice snapped.

"Oh, here we go again…" a third one groaned. "We could've contained this thing much more quickly if you two weren't bickering during the fight!"

There were some protests at that, but Conrad couldn't hear them as he broke into a sprint towards the chamber.

The first thing he saw was a magical barrier shaped roughly like a cube in the middle of the room, which looked like it was made of purple flames. He had seen it before, during the invasion of Konoha. Four figures were sitting in the corners of the cube, protected by another barrier that made it impossible to reach them.

And trapped inside, was the boy. Who was throwing himself against the barrier repeatedly, roaring like a caged animal.

No, that wasn't Naruto. Naruto's eyes didn't have a burning glow like a dremora's. Naruto was fast, but he didn't move on all fours with speed that belonged to beasts, and not men.

When the thing trapped inside of his nephew sensed his presence and locked eyes with him, Conrad knew that this was the monster that murdered his brother.

Conrad heard Jiraiya saying something about a number and tails, but he got distracted by someone trying to chop off his head.

A quick ward focused on his staff blocked the sword. As part of him noticed that it looked like it had been fashioned out of a human spine, he prepared to blow the pale, haggard figure wielding it straight to Sithis... only for Jiraiya to show up out of nowhere, a glowing sphere rotating in his hand.

He guessed that Minato had liked sharing his secrets a bit, unlike most shinobi.

"I had him," he said, as the enemy's body crashed down on the other side of the room in a twisted, undignified heap.

"Sure you did," Jiraiya snorted. Whatever retort Conrad could come up with was silenced by the roar echoing through the chamber.

The people holding the barrier in place exclaimed in panic, some yelling about the swordsman dying and others ordering their teammates to not move, to not disrupt the seals.

Conrad didn't care about them, he had eyes only for the boy. The boy, whose eyes resembled two pieces of burning coal. Whose nails had become like claws. Covered by that accursed cloak of chakra that formed a single tail. And that seemed to be less reasonable than some berserkers Conrad met during his travels, as he tried to break down the barrier with his bare hands, searing and splitting his skin and gaining only deep burn marks in the process. He had the inkling that had it not been for the monster inside of him, the barrier would've done much more damage to Naruto. The boy's wounds were already healing between the ring and whatever that aura was doing but it was still a jarring sight.

He had to stop him.

"The longer he remains like this, the higher the chances the seal will break," Jiraiya said, as he produced a stack of paper tags and a paintbrush. "I can dispel the barrier, but after that一"

"Feim," Conrad murmured, his body turning ghostly and ethereal just before walking through the barrier, much to the shock of the ninja maintaining it.

"Or you could just do whatever you want without consulting me, that works too," Jiraiya muttered as Naruto lunged for Conrad. He harmlessly passed through his intangible body, slamming face-first against the exact spot in the barrier where Conrad had passed through. Conrad couldn't help but wince at the sight of his nephew hissing in pain, even if his new injuries were already healing.

Then, the magic of the Thu'um ended, and Conrad felt once again solid. But instead of attacking again, the possessed boy started circling around him, growling warily and probably confused by what had happened. Or maybe the Kyuubi was the confused one, Conrad couldn't tell. Part of him knew that trapping himself in an enclosed space with a Jinchuuriki was a bad idea, even if he had never fought one. But it didn't matter right now. What mattered was that he had found Naruto. Now it was just a matter of not being killed by him.

At least he could trust that Jiraiya would take care of things if his plan didn't work.

"Are you in there, boy? I don't suppose you could calm down by yourself?" he asked. "I can stop you, Naruto. But please don't make me. You would not like it."

Naruto's only response was to growl louder and bull-rush at Conrad before he could blink. Next thing he knew the world blurred around him and he hit the ground with the back of his head, the sounds his armor made echoing into the chamber.

His mind was protesting about how Naruto shouldn't be able to make a fully grown man in heavy armor fall down. Not if he expected the genin's strength, at least. Then he stopped when he realized that this wasn't Naruto's strength, and the boy was looming over him. The chakra around his body seemed to move and bubble, forming a large clawed hand that mimicked the boy's movements.

Eyes widening, Conrad realized that the Kyuubi had decided to skewer the surviving twin. He raised his staff between them, which felt a bit awkward given the position he was in, and conjured the strongest ward he could sustain just in time to stop the strike. Barely, for it seemed that the Kyuubi wasn't interested in stopping.

Conrad told himself that he had tried. Then, he shouted. "Gol Hah Dov!"

Every Shout felt different. Become Ethereal was total freedom, like you could fly away with the wind. Unrelenting Force was immovable strength, where the world would crumble away before you budged an inch. Bend Will was total domination, the hunger for power in every dragon's soul. Domination over their weaker brethren and lesser creatures. Over everything that wasn't a dragon. Even over other dragons.

If Paarthurnax had gone against the nature of what it meant to be a dragon, against the lust for power and destruction, had worked all those years against the evil he once was, Bend Will was embracing all of it and more.

The boy's body froze, his eyes widening in confusion, as if neither Naruto or the beast could understand what was happening.

"Go back in your seal," Conrad snarled, his voice brimming with command despite struggling up from the floor. After effects of the shout, or perhaps because his dragon soul was cloaked around him like ghostly armor. Naruto's eyes, still ember-red, met his.

The Dovah and the Bijuu, both monsters of myth and legend, stared at each other. Unlike the time at the hospital, both were closer to the surface. One, with looser reins on his own nature, the other pushing against the seal that imprisoned it.

Bend Will could stop a raging dragon, forcing it to do the unthinkable and submit against every instinct of their soul. Conrad could see, feel the way it had halted the beast in its tracks, its hold over his nephew shaken but not cut. The Kyuubi was confused, but that wasn't all.

Fear. The Nine-Tailed Fox was afraid of not being able to control his own actions.

Good.

"Crawl back to your cell, beast," Conrad snarled again. It gave one last, defiant growl, then it had no choice as it was forced back into the depths of its prison. Suddenly all that was left was a bewildered boy. His body was still surrounded by the deep orange aura, but his eyes were once again blue. The oppressive malice in his chakra was absent.

"Uncle?" he asked, clearly confused by his surroundings. "What are you一oh no. I… did I…"

"Boy, please get off me. You're heavier than you look," he grunted.

"Oh, er, sorry," the boy quickly moved out of the way and apologized even further. Something about not being able to control himself and that he was sorry. Well, he better be, but that's not what he needed right now.

"Boy, calm down. It's alright. Some of my best friends are werewolves, and they do get a bit rough every now and then," he tried to reassure him, noticing that Kyuubi's aura was still there. "How're you feeling?"

Naruto looked at his hands, or, more specifically, at his nails, before poking his enlarged canines. Conrad hoped that wasn't permanent. It would be difficult to explain to the people of Whiterun. "I dunno… kinda weird. Uncle, listen…"

Conrad interrupted Naruto by putting a hand on his shoulder. The Kyuubi's chakra clashed oddly against the Dragon Aspect aura, but the kid still needed a bit of a pep talk.

"Later, boy. Later, we will talk," Conrad promised. "But right now, we need to get you out of here."

"Right… we also need to find Sasuke!"

"Of course," Conrad conceded. And as he finished talking, the barrier broke apart. Before Conrad could blink, there was the sound of a body falling on the ground and by the time he looked Jiraiya was already on one of the other shinobi. There was another blur as the two last ones tried to run for it, and at least one of them got a kunai in their back before they could escape.

"Are we done here, then?" Jiraiya asked, his eyes piercing Conrad. The Nord just knew that the old shinobi would ask him a lot of questions later, about what he had just done. Great.

Naruto startled before brightening up. It was an interesting contrast to the coat of chakra still surrounding him. "Ero-Sennin? And Sakura-chan!"

Sakura began to rush forward, as if to hug him, but Jiraiya's hand shot out and grabbed her by the back of her shirt. "Careful, kiddo. That chakra is incredibly caustic."

At that, Sakura visibly paled. "Hey, Naruto. Are you… alright?"

"I think so? I don't know how to turn this off," he admitted, looking at his hands. Then he looked up with a bright smile, but whatever he wanted to say was forgotten the moment he spotted the blue-haired boy. "Wait, who are you?"

"The name's Suigetsu. Who are you?"

"He's Naruto, one of my teammates," Sakura explained, making introductions. "He's Harissen-san's nephew."

At that, Suigetsu looked between Naruto and Conrad, and more importantly, the auras surrounding their bodies. "Yeah, I can see the family resemblance."

"Just show us the way to the prison level," Conrad ordered.

"Right! Sasuke!" Naruto yelped, having remembered his personal priorities.

Conrad rolled his eyes. "Yes, we're rescuing him too." And one by one the group left the room. Conrad was the last one, having stopped to glance at the bodies laying down where Jiraiya had struck them down.

He couldn't help but wonder how old they had been. Probably not much more than the boy or the other children... who had barely reacted at the sight. Conrad couldn't decide what disturbed him the most.

Tightening the hold on his staff, he steeled himself. He could feel sorry about people that had tried to hurt the boy later, once he was safe and away from this accursed continent.

Chapter 26: The Toad, the Snake and the Dragon

Chapter Text

Asaru heard more shinobi run in the corridor outside of his cell. Normally you wouldn’t hear ninja moving if they didn’t want you to, but they seemed to be in a hurry. Maybe because their hidden village was under siege.

The first explosion had been very far, even if it had probably been felt by the whole complex. The last one though, it had to be much closer, judging by the way the cell's walls trembled.

"Maybe they came to rescue us?" his cellmate wondered, hopeful.

Asaru smiled grimly. He doubted this was a rescue mission, at least not for them. He was a simple retainer for his lady, and the young man he shared a cell with was the grand-nephew of a noble from Cloud Country. Good for being kept for ransom or pressuring people to comply with requests, rather than being used in whatever horrific experiments happened in the bowels of Orochimaru’s labs but not important enough to warrant a dangerous, expensive rescue mission.

Especially not one that required what sounded like a frontal assault against a hidden village, even if a recently-established one.

He kept his conclusions for himself, though. No reason to break the young man's hopes.

The most probable explanation was that Konoha was retaliating for Orochimaru's attack at the chunin exams. Oh, shinobi liked to act like nobody knew their secrets, but even ninja guards got bored and gossiped like fishmongers.

They probably had a specific objective that had nothing to do with prisoners like them. As the sound of battle grew closer, he wanted to hope, but realistically speaking the chances of shinobi not sticking to their mission parameters to help them were pretty slim.

"They're coming this way," Tatsuo said, and if Asaru strained his ears he could hear some voices getting nearer and nearer.

"一your friend should be here," a voice said, followed immediately by someone running from one cell to another, shouting quite loudly.

"Sasuke? Sasuke? Sasuke, are you in there?!" someone called, and each time someone screamed in terror. Then a young ninja peeked through the bars of the cell's door. An aura, like orange flames, cloaked the child's body. And his eyes were blood red and slit like a cat, and his teeth were akin to a monster's. "Hey, Old Man, have you seen Uchiha Sasuke around here?"

It was asked like they were talking in the middle of a town's market square instead of a dark prison inside one of Orochimaru's lair. It was so unexpected that Asaru didn't immediately react. His cellmate, though, had no such problems and let out a loud, startled shriek before begging to not be hurt and promising that his family would reward the young boy if he didn't.

"Hey, I'm not that scary," the boy who looked like he was possessed by a demon complained.

Other prisoners said otherwise, and between the requests for mercy and begging for help, Asaru heard someone mutter the word 'Jinchuuriki'. One of the imprisoned shinobi in the next cell, he figured.

"Wait, 'Uchiha'? As in the clan with the Sharingan?!" the first voice asked incredulously amid the chaos of pleas for help.

"Yeah, why?"

"Because everyone here knows how Orochimaru is obsessed with that!"

"So?"

"So Orochimaru is probably plucking your friend's eyes out right now, to use them himself, or clone them, or whatever!"

Silence fell at that. Asaru felt sympathy for the child, to find out that his friend was probably put through some kind of sick experiment by their jailer.

"Do you know where he'd keep him?" the boy-monster asked.

"Yeah, I guess? It's on the other side of the一"

That was enough for the possessed shinobi. "Great! Bring us there!"

"I'd rather not," the other said reluctantly. And Asaru couldn't blame him, for who would want to go into the lion's den? Or snake's, in this case. The boy with the orange aura seemed to be about to protest, but Asaru spoke up.

"Excuse me. If you are about to leave, could you at least open the doors of our cells?"

He may not have turned in a nervous mess like his cellmate, but he wasn't going to waste an opportunity for freedom.

The boy blinked. "Oh. Sure!"

"Boy, what are you doing? We're wasting time," a gruff voice clearly belonging to a man said, in an accent Asaru couldn't place.

"But it's the right thing to do! Right?"

The pause after that wasn't very long, but it was long enough to make the prisoners hold their breaths. Including Asaru.

"Just get on with it," the man ordered, and from the sound of it, the group started to work on the locks. A man stepped in front of the cell door, probably the owner of the gruff and accented voice. He, too, seemed to be covered by a strange aura, ethereal scaled armor with a crown of horns. His eyes were golden and glowing and just as monstrous as the boy’s. Like father, like son, Asaru supposed. He pointed a simple wooden staff at the door, around the spot where the lock was located. A moment later, it started turning bright with heat, then it melted. Asaru took a step back at the sight of the droplets of white-hot metal falling near his feet.

Once the door was open, Asaru stepped outside to see that the other cells were being opened, either by lockpicking or jutsu, by their other companions. Asaru was surprised to see how they were younger than his own niece back home. Wouldn’t a hidden village send their best for a rescue mission in enemy territory?

Once the locks were dealt with, the prisoners, civilians and shinobi alike, emerged from them. Two of the latter, Asaru thought they were from Kumogakure, just stared at the man, muttering something. Asaru caught a single word, ‘Yondaime’.The man must have heard it too, judging by his reaction. It wasn’t quite a sigh. More like a low growl.

“Fine, you’re all free now,” he said, sounding very annoyed, before gesturing towards the entrance to the prison. “Get out of here, and watch out for the dragon near the exit.”

“Dragon?” someone asked. They didn’t receive an answer, as the man ignored them.

“Let’s move, now,” he ordered as he turned to leave.

“Wait, we can’t just leave them like this!” the boy protested, following in his father’s footsteps.

“Yes, we can,” the man said, harshly. “We can’t waste more time, and you can’t bring them all the way to the exit and get to your friend in time!”

At that, the boy stopped. “Yes, I can.” He made a gesture Asaru couldn’t see and before the man could reply, there was a bunch of smoke flooding the cell block. It went away just as quickly, revealing that there were now at least a dozen identical copies of the boy. The only difference was the lack of the ominous aura around their bodies.

“Follow us!” one exclaimed, starting to guide some of the closest prisoners. The liberated shinobi glanced at each other uncertainly, but in the end they followed as well. The boy advocated for them being free, after all, and that seemed to trump the usual ninja paranoia.

A couple of them stopped to thank the older ninja with a white mane, saying something about their villages being thankful towards Konoha for their freedom. Asaru couldn't say which village they were from. But maybe he could try to hire them, to escort him to his Lady's remote castle or at least as close as possible. Maybe he could involve his cellmate in this, so that his family would cover some of the expenses.

He had a story to tell his Lady, and he looked towards the adventure it would be to get there.

“You won’t be able to always use clones to get what you want. I told you that before," the gruff man told his son as they took a turn towards their destination, Orochimaru’s inner sanctum.

“It still works, though,” the boy pointed out.

As they left the former prisoners under the care of the shadow clones, Conrad urged his companions to hurry despite knowing way too well that he was the one slowing the group down.

During his career, he had arrived far too late to save anyone way too many times for his liking.

The prisoners would've been fine if they had rescued them later. Probably. Supposedly. If they didn't have to leave in a hurry, that is.

He really hoped the boy would not have to live with the consequences of making the call that sealed his friend's fate.

“Why are there no guards?” Conrad whispered.

“He doesn’t need them,” Jiraiya answered. After all, who would dare to disturb Orochimaru in his inner sanctum? Conrad had been inside enough dark wizard lairs to know that these kinds of people always kept a surprise or two for the inevitable last stand.

They were advancing warily, the children following closely. The shinobi’s steps were completely silent. Conrad was sure that Jiraiya didn’t like how much noise his armored boots made in comparison.

The room was full of strange paraphernalia and artifacts. Tomes and scrolls, tablets with carvings and idols. Snake symbology seemed to be the most common, which didn’t surprise Conrad given the man’s obsession with them, but reminded him of something he couldn’t really recall at that moment. In other circ*mstances he’d have gleefully examined and studied them. Or put them all in a big burlap sack. But the perspective of leading the boy towards danger put a damper on those thoughts.

He was also distracted by the chanting that seemed to come just around the corner. Because of course there was ominous chanting.

Conrad reached for a potion on his belt. One to empower his magicka. After drinking it, he decided to drink another, just to be on the safe side. And then another, to boost his stamina.

Naruto and Sakura looked at each other nervously. They wanted to save their friend, but did they realize how in over their heads they were? He doubted it. Jiraiya's face instead was a solemn mask. After all, he was about to face his former friend. Both him and the genin walked beside Conrad with purpose.

The water boy, Suigewhatever, instead, looked like he wanted to be anywhere but there. And Conrad couldn't blame him. But he had not fled, yet.

" Laas ," he whispered as they got closer to a sturdy-looking door. The source of the chanting. Two auras appeared in front of his eyes, on the other side. A sphere of fire started forming on his staff's tip as he pointed it at the door.

They were rushing inside before the debris fell down.

Sasuke was there, laying unconscious on a stone slab that reminded Conrad of a sacrificial altar. There were glowing seals all over the place, reminiscent of snakes slithering around the boy's body. And looming over him was a man so pale that for a moment Conrad thought he was a vampire, moving his hands the way shinobi did when they were about to use a spell.

As soon as he saw Conrad, he stopped, as if he was hesitating. Jiraiya did not, however, and after a few handsigns, there was a puff of smoke... and then a log was laying between the glowing symbols. A few things happened all at once.

Naruto and Sakura rushed to help their friend, who had appeared behind Jiraiya. Orochimaru's face was contorting in disbelief and rage. And Conrad unleashed a small storm in his general direction.

Orochimaru dodged it. Because of course he did. Jiraiya had expected it though, because he jumped at the man, kunai in hand, while Conrad's spell tore apart what little furniture the room had.

He was about to follow the older shinobi, when he saw an orange and blond blur pass beside him and it was only thanks to concern-fueled reflexes that he was able to grab Naruto's jacket and pull him back. The auras surrounding their bodies buzzed as they clashed against each other.

"Boy, what do you think you're doing?!" he almost yelled, dragging Naruto away from the duel between two fighters moving so fast that Conrad could barely follow them at times.

"He hurt Sasuke!" Naruto snarled, brandishing his own puny weapon. "He一"

"Don't be an idiot!" Conrad hissed. There was no time to be tactful. "Grab your friend and get out of here. Don't stop until you're outside, you understand?"

"But一"

"Naruto, help me carry Sasuke!" Sakura nervously called, and that seemed to finally be enough to convince the boy. Naruto created a couple of shadow clones that, unlike him, were not coated in a toxic chakra shroud.

"I'll see you outside, Uncle," he said, as the copies helped Sakura carry their friend. Conrad nodded.

"Yeah, yeah! Can we just hurry?!" Suigetsu urged them, sounding like he wanted to get away as soon as he could. Honestly, Conrad didn't blame him.

Without even looking back at the retreating children, Conrad started casting a spell before joining the fray.

Orochimaru was upset.

Actually, Orochimaru was livid. He had been on the verge of finally getting the Sharingan. The key to learning every jutsu in existence, and an important stepping stone in his goal to reach immortality.

In hindsight, it was his own fault. He should've known that Jiraiya would've been right behind the Yondaime's brat. But this was just a minor setback. He'd get young Sasuke again, he just had to win this fight, and Orochimaru knew how Jiraiya fought.

It came with having been the man's teammate for years during their youth. As he avoided a jutsu, it became clear that it had been just a distraction for a different one: the real attack. He almost felt nostalgic, feeling reminiscent of the countless sparring matches they’d had under the watchful gaze of Sarutobi. Usually with Tsunade either spectating or taking part in it.

Of course, they were not sparring. They were trying to murder each other.

Then there was the other opponent in the room. The one that looked like Namikaze Minato. But, Orochimaru had decided, it was impossible for him to be a clone like he had believed at first, before the failed invasion.

He didn't move like a shinobi, and certainly didn't fight like one. He wore heavy armor that hindered him, used none of the Yondaime's signature techniques and it was clear as day that the two men had no idea how to fight along with each other. They even impaired each other a few times, giving chances to Orochimaru to either dodge, counter or attack himself.

No, that was no clone. Even if Konoha had managed to replicate a whole individual using Namikaze's DNA, Orochimaru just knew that Jiraiya would've been involved in training it since the beginning. Mostly out of misplaced loyalty for his old student, the fool.

Minato clone or not, he'd die. Jiraiya too, so he'd not bother him anymore in the future.

The fight had moved to the rest of Orochimaru's chambers, where he'd have more space to move around the slower opponent and put him between himself and Jiraiya to further hinder them. That was the plan, along with a certain indecision between making them suffer or just strike them down quickly.

That was when the Minato lookalike yelled unfamiliar words at Orochimaru, and the next thing he knew, the Sannin was caught by what felt like a localized blastwave from an explosion, which sent him flying and tore apart various stone tablets and other artifacts he had collected over the years.

Despite the annoyance at seeing those priceless items broken, Orochimaru was suddenly intrigued. That had not been a jutsu. There had been no chakra, no hand signs. Interesting.

Very interesting.

After Orochimaru was done with this current nuisance and got Sasuke back, he'd take great care in figuring out what the man had just done. And in case he couldn't capture him alive, he could always find answers by examining his carcass.

“I think we took the wrong turn,” Suigetsu admitted. Everyone came to a stop, and the two shadow clones that were carrying Sasuke between them almost slammed against the original.

“Seriously?! You’re supposed to be our guide!” Naruto protested, the chakra around his body flaring for the blink of an eye.

“I never saw this level, I told you guys! It’s not like you two noticed that we were going the wrong way, either!” Suigetsu protested. Naruto and Sakura were about to say something about that, but the echoes of the battle were still audible.

“We should keep going,” she said, and the boys quickly agreed as they heard again the echoes of the battle. Sakura adjusted the satchel’s strap before stopping in her tracks and stared down at it.

She had forgotten to give the bag to Naruto’s uncle. In the hurry to take Sasuke and drag him away from Orochimaru, who still conjured unpleasant memories from the Forest of Death, she’d forgotten. How could she have forgotten? There had been no time to give it to him, but she could’ve dropped it, or something! How could she be so stupid?!

Sakura sighed, re-adjusting the strap once more before keeping up with the group. She really hoped the man didn’t need these.

Conrad swore loudly as he realized that the girl still had his damn potion bag. He'd have to make do with the few ones still on his belt.

They were both to blame. Conrad would admit that he had been anxious to make the children get out of there. But he'd still blame the girl, if he survived this.

Conrad's inner grumblings about the girl with pink hair getting away with his potions were interrupted by Orochimaru suddenly barfing out a sword. Actually, a snake had gotten out of Orochimaru's throat, and a sword had come out of the snake, handle-first. It was easily the third grossest thing Conrad had ever seen in his life.

Jiraiya didn't seem to be surprised in the least though, and tried to turn the floor where Orochimaru was standing into a swamp, for some reason. Orochimaru jumped away, and Conrad followed him with a hopefully well-timed Whirlwind Sprint shout, swinging his axe.

With a flicker of his wrist, Orochimaru struck. A few moments later, when his brain would catch up on what had happened, Conrad would realize that had it not been for his spell that had hardened his skin and flesh, he'd have lost his hand. Instead, the blade had cut through his armored gauntlet like it had not been there, but had then slid over his hand. Which had still left a gash that hurt like a bitch. But at least the hand was intact.

What had been cut apart was his axe. The axe that he had commissioned just a few years ago, which had been forged in the Skyforge by Eorlund Gray-Mane. Not just the handle, but the head too. They had both been cut roughly down their length.

Instead of dwelling on it, though, Conrad showed his annoyance by shoving his staff towards Orochimaru and blasting him with a stream of flames point-blank to his face. The pale face of the man turned into a chair that fell on the ground burning.

Right. Kamawasomething, the substitution thing. The whor*son wasn't even singed.

Jiraiya, unperturbed by the sudden change in their opponent's position, threw a bunch of kunai before using some kind of jutsu. Conrad didn't really care which kind. He just let his ruined axe fall to the ground and unsheathed his mother's sword. The blade caught fire, and in Orochimaru's eyes he saw a sign of recognition.

"Where did you find this man?" Orochimaru asked Jiraiya.

"As if I'd tell you," the Toad Sage answered, which caused Orochimaru to make a sound that may have been a snort.

Conrad, never having been one to believe in mid-fight banter, went for a lunge feint, moving the blade in a slashing motion at the very last moment.

It was stopped effortlessly by Orochimaru's blade. "His kenjutsu form is terrible," the snake-obsessed ninja observed.

Conrad would've been the first to admit that his swordsmanship skills were rusty, but the ebony blade had not been cut apart like the steel axe had.

"I think we should go this way," Naruto told the others. They had stopped at a fork between a hallway and a staircase. The clones had put Sasuke down, and Sakura was trying to figure out why he wasn't waking up.

"What? No!" Suigetsu shook his head, pointing at the stairs. "We're underground, and that's a way up! Up is good!"

"But it's not the same direction we came from," Naruto pointed out.

"So what? It still goes up," Suigetsu told her, gesturing towards the ceiling. "This place should have multiple exits, anyway!"

"You said you’ve been in a fish tank the entire time!" one of Naruto's clones argued.

"Yeah!" the other agreed as he pumped a fist in the air. "And that they wouldn’t let you see anything!"

"Boys, is this the right time?" Sakura asked before an argument could start.

"How's Sasuke?" Naruto asked after staring for a moment. The Uchiha had barely stirred at all while the clones carried him like a piece of furniture.

"Feels like he has a fever," she said, taking a healing potion out of the bag she had before looking up to a shadow clone. "Help me make him drink it."

"Huh? Oh, right!" the clone nodded as he held the Uchiha's head for her. "It helped Lee, so it can help Sasuke!"

Sakura was about to ask what Lee had to do with this when Sasuke sprung up, slapping away the small bottle from Sakura's hands while choking and spitting out the potion. Well, at least he was awake.

He looked around in confusion, doing his best to get back to his feet and ready to fight. And, most worryingly, the cursed seal was spreading all over his skin. It reminded Sakura of that time in the Forest of Death.

"Easy, Sasuke-kun! Easy," she said, showing him her empty hands.

"Sakura...?" he managed to cough out. She nodded, and he kept looking around the room, his eyes briefly stopping on Suigetsu before focusing on Naruto. "What happened to you , dead last?"

Naruto stared back at Sasuke, his chakra tail swishing from side to side. "You should look in the mirror, jerk." Sakura had to resist the urge to mention pots and kettles.

"Who's this?" Sasuke asked, pointing at the only person he didn't know.

"Suigetsu, nice to meet you. Can we go now?! We're still inside of Orochimaru's base!" Suigetsu answered, looking like he was starting to wonder why he was still sticking around at that point.

"Wait, what...? You followed me here?!" Sasuke exclaimed, wincing as the seal flared again.

"Damn right we did! What were we supposed to do? Leave you here?!" Naruto asked. "No way! You're our teammate!"

"Guys, Suigetsu has a point," Sakura told them. Is that what she was now? The one that had to keep her teammates and allies in check so they wouldn’t fight with each other? Because it sucked. "Naruto, why don't you send some clones both ways? You know... scouting?"

Naruto was about to go on a tirade about teammates that abandon their teammates and probably something about his own ninja way too, but Sakura's suggestion sounded the perfect solution to figure out who was right about which way to go. He formed the usual hand sign and with a poof of smoke a few more clones were created. As soon as they came into existence, they went in the two opposite directions. Now the group just had to wait to find out which way they'd have to go. At least, that was the plan.

Next thing Naruto knew, he felt a kunai go through his throat, his left eye and his stomach. All of those sensations rushing into his mind at once, yet happening only one at a time. As he一as they were running up the staircase.

And then... nothing.

Naruto shook his head, getting ready for a fight. Before the others could ask him what was going on, a familiar voice came from the staircase.

"I had figured I'd have to deal with some strays," Kabuto said as he became visible to them, twirling a kunai between his fingers as he kept going down the steps. "I didn't imagine I'd have to deal with so many at once..."

Orochimaru was toying with him, that was clear as day. In fact, Conrad would even say that he was targeting him the most, perceiving him as the weakest between him and Jiraya. How f*cking dare he?! If that wasn't enough, he was starting to feel numb where the ninja had managed to scratch him. Poison, for sure. But what kind? Given the track record of the last few months, probably one he didn't know.

That was a problem for later, though. If he managed to win this.

Jiraiya came to his help, keeping Orochimaru busy long enough for Conrad to summon a storm atronach, which immediately unleashed its namesake against the snake summoner. And tore apart a few scrolls and stone tablets and other antiquities. Conrad felt a pang of guilt at the sight, but his neck and ensuring the children would not be chased down by this pale faced freak was more important.

Orochimaru's reaction, a mix of sneering in rage and annoyance as he avoided the lightning bolts, kinda felt good though. More importantly, it distracted him so that Jiraiya could gain the upper hand.

Seeing Orochimaru distracted, Conrad rushed in, his mother's sword high and aiming for the bastard's head. He saw it coming, but it didn't matter: either Conrad killed Orochimaru by slicing his skull open, or Jiraiya would when Orochimaru tried to parry Conrad's slash.

Conrad had not expected Orochimaru to be able to just dodge by stretching his neck unnaturally, bending it sideways to let the sword pass harmlessly over his head. Almost like a snake's body would move.

Jiraiya's attempt to use the Rasengan didn't work much better either, but Conrad was too surprised to follow that. The obsession with snakes, the ancient tablets with the serpentine figure, what the bastard had just done...

"Tsaesci," he muttered. It had been barely more than a whisper, yet it was heard perfectly by the two shinobi.

"You... know about them?" Orochimaru asked, keeping his sword pointed towards Jiraiya but slowly turning towards Conrad. "I may have a use for you, after all."

Conrad didn't like the way he was being stared at. It made him feel like a butterfly about to be pinned to a cork board by someone that enjoyed doing such things for fun. Conrad had not read much about the Tsaesci, because there wasn't much in Tamriel about them in the first place except some conjectures, legends and few accounts from the time of the Akaviri Potentate. But Orochimaru seemed to be very interested in collecting artifacts relating to them. And Akavir, or the Elemental Nations as its inhabitants called it now, seemed to have forgotten a lot about its past.

If Orochimaru was a Tsaesci, he was trying to find out more about his own people.

"You wish," Conrad scoffed as he raised his sword with one hand and started channeling an ice storm through his staff. It didn't matter if Orochimaru probably knew more about the Tsaesci than he did, the important thing was that he believed otherwise. People that saw what they wanted right in front of them tended to commit mistakes. And a mistake could end this fight, one way or another.

Sakura was doing her best to not die. Which was a good summary of her whole day.

But until a few minutes ago she had been accompanying two experienced fighters, and even if one of them was not a shinobi, she had not felt like she was in real danger. That safety blanket was gone now, though. Jiraiya the Toad Sage and Naruto's uncle had remained behind to deal with Orochimaru, and they were on their own.

Seeing Kabuto had sent Sasuke over the edge. The cursed seal briefly flared red before covering his skin, turning it into an unnatural grey color. Even his hair changed, getting paler and longer. Sakura got a glimpse of some kind of dark mark forming on Sasuke's face, before he jumped against the traitor.

Naruto followed suit, and Sakura took a quick stock of her current ninja tools and joined the fight, followed by Suigetsu despite his initial reluctance. Because, really, what could they do? Not fighting wasn't an option. Besides, they were four against one. Sakura and Suigetsu could act as a distraction, and Naruto and Sasuke could deal the final blow. Then they would get the hell out of there. That was the vague plan in Sakura's head.

Nothing went according to plan. Kabuto was no Orochimaru, but he may as well have been given that he was able to deal with all of them with ease. They knew since after the invasion that he couldn't have been a genin, but Sakura was sure that Kabuto was no chunin either. She guessed that he was at least a special jonin. At least. So far she

had only managed to survive whenever Kabuto got too close to her thanks to Naruto or Sasuke. And a lot of lucky dodging on Sakura's part. And at least once when Suigetsu took a hit that had been aimed at her, but she wasn't sure if that had been an accident or if he was trying to help her.

She had dragged their wounded ally away from the fight, and had immediately looked for one more healing potion to give him. It felt like the only thing she was good for, today!

Suigetsu looked in awe as his wound closed itself, leaving no sign it had been there in the first place. Sakura forced him to get up.

“Don’t just stand there, let’s go help them!” she told him, ready to join the fight again. Even if it was just to be a distraction… maybe they could make it. Give enough time to Sasuke or Naruto to figure out how to win this.

For a moment, he looked like he was about to follow her into the fray. But then, just for a moment, his eyes met Kabuto’s. And in that fraction of a second the traitorous shinobi made a silent promise of what would happen to Suigetsu later, once he had been brought back to the labs.

“I-I’m sorry,” he stammered, taking a step back. Before she could say anything, his body crashed down in a puddle of water that flowed away, into the dark corridors.

Sakura couldn’t believe it. He had left. She wasn’t even sure if she could blame him, but she was going to be very mad about this. Later.

Right now her teammates needed her.

She had to do something, anything to help before they'd get overwhelmed, or... or worse. But she was too weak , she had no bijuu in her gut or a doujutsu or a seal that would give her anger issues. She only had some standard kunai, some shuriken, a few explosive tags and smoke bombs... and the stupid, heavy bag that she had forgotten to ditch at the start of the fight, which was slowing her down with all the一

With all the potions inside of it. Sure, many were healing potions. But some could help in a fight. Harissen-san had said so, right?

Naruto yelled in pain as Kabuto pierced his left arm with his chakra scalpel. Sakura didn't hesitate. Grabbing the first bottle she found, she popped it open and started to drink.

Conrad and Jiraiya were being pushed back, bit by bit.

If earlier they had been fighting through Orochimaru's ceremonial chamber and his collection of Tsaesci artifacts, they were now moving through some kind of laboratory. It reminded Conrad of the one they found earlier, but bigger. He couldn't really examine the room though because Orochimaru was coming at them while standing on the head of a giant snake that was sliding towards him at full speed.

The snake itself wouldn't have been a problem. In fact, a simple shout of Unrelenting Force as the beast opened its mouth was enough to tear it apart, before its body disappeared in a gust of smoke. Orochimaru, though, just jumped above the shockwave of the shout and tried to skewer him with that sword of his. Conrad raised his staff and erected a ward, as strong as he could, right above his head. The sword was stopped in a clash of steel against magic, and for a moment Orochimaru remained suspended in the air, in perfect balance upside-down over his ward. Smiling in an almost ecstatic way.

Conrad could swear that the man seemed to be more interested in him with each new spell or shout he used against him. He heard Jiraiya yell something and next thing he knew, Orochimaru and his blade disappeared behind what looked like a pink-colored wall. Except it wasn't a wall. It was made of flesh, which seemed to have appeared out of thin air around the room's ceiling and most of the walls too, covering most of the lights in the room. Conrad lowered his staff, staring at the pulsating, contracting spectacle.

"... what did you do?" he asked, unable to look away. The stench was almost as bad as Durnehviir's.

"That is a technique of mine. Instead of summoning a whole toad, it summons the esophagus of a giant one," Jiraiya explained as the thing contracted in oddly paced spasms. It was, for certain, the second grossest thing Conrad had ever seen. "No one was ever able to escape from it."

That seemed like a horrible way to die, to be honest. Which Conrad would've been fine with if it meant that they didn't have to deal with Orochimaru anymore. He’d seen people die in arguably worse ways, after all, and barely lost sleep about them anymore. Yet...

"Did you ever use it on someone with a blade like his?" he asked. The way Jiraiya did not answer his question was the only answer he needed. Conrad had a sinking feeling in his gut as he heard several meaty muffled cuts.

The blade tore apart the walls of the esophagus like a knife cut through an overripe fruit, and Orochimaru fell down towards them as the ruined organ disappeared with the usual smoke cloud. Part of Conrad's mind wondered if that meant that somewhere a giant toad just had its throat sliced open. The rest, though, was busy preparing to unleash a spell to reduce Orochimaru to a crisp while he was still in freefall. Because he had expected that.

What he had not expected was for Orochimaru to throw his sword towards them. Or for the blade to start spinning at breakneck speed. Or to swing and change direction through the air, as if possessing a mind of its own. First, the blade cut through his staff, breaking his spell before it could be complete. It kept going, passing just next to his ear and moving over the floor around them, sawing it like the blade of a sawmill would make quick work of a large log.

Then Conrad felt the floor collapse under his own feet.

He immediately let go of his staff, now useless. He didn't really need it to cast spells, though: it was just a tool to better focus his power. He chanted a spell, and broke at least one or two Imperial Laws. But he wasn't in the Empire, so who cared, really?

Conrad's fall stopped, and he started ascending, his body sustained by a telekinetic push.

That was when Jiraiya was thrown at him, and collided with him midair, hitting him square in the face with that forehead protector of his. Being hit in the nose by a metal plaque worn around the head of a freakishly tall man was not a pleasant experience, even when your body was infused with spells that were meant to harden the skin and flesh.

This time, Conrad fell all the way down to the lower floor, losing his mother's sword in the impact. It landed somewhere nearby with a clanging sound. He tried to get up, still disoriented by the blow.

That was when he got struck in his lower abdomen.

For a barely perceptible moment, his skin and flesh resisted thanks to the spells he had infused them with. Then, the very tip of the sword broke through, followed by the rest. It did not stop until it struck itself into some rubble behind him, impaling him. Conrad had been stabbed before, it was a well-known fact of life for him.

He would have screamed if he could have, feeling sharp pain as he tried to breathe. His hands instinctively grasped the blade, but he glanced down at the wound, which didn't seem to lose as much blood as he expected, and looked up at the blade. And up. And up.

Orochimaru was standing at the edge of the ruined floor, which was now the ceiling, holding the sword's hilt pointed towards him. Because apparently, that weapon could also become as long as its owner wanted to.

He gasped, forcing himself to take a deep breath despite the way each breath brought painful spasms in his belly as he stared at his opponent. "Ven Gaar Nos!"

As the last word was shouted, a gust of wind started to pick up. A breeze at first, before quickly rising into a gale so strong that it started picking up dust and small debris as it shot towards Orochimaru like a hurricane. It was not Orochimaru that was invested by his shout though, but a chair, like the ones he had seen in the laboratory above. The sword was still there though, pinning him and swaying a bit

because of the wind. Where did he一

He turned as much as he could despite being pinned at a rock, his left arm raised and already shooting a lightning bolt. Orochimaru just grabbed his wrist and twisted the arm upwards, making the spell hit the ceiling.

"FUS一" he started, but before he could yell the second word Orochimaru slammed his free hand against his mouth, stopping him from completing the shout.

"A jutsu activated with your voice. Intriguing. Can't have you do that, though," Orochimaru observed, as a cold sensation spread over his lips. Then, for some reason, the ninja let go of his face. Conrad immediately tried to shout at him, point blank range.

Nothing happened, because much to Conrad's confusion and horror, the man had sealed his mouth shut. “This is going to make interrogating you difficult, but I'll find a way."

A groan from nearby distracted Orochimaru, not that he expected Conrad to reply to his little monologue. It sounded like Jiraiya was finally getting up. Or trying to.

"Mmh. Excuse me, I have to finish a reunion with an old friend. I’m fairly certain I didn’t puncture anything vital. Don't go anywhere, alright?" Orochimaru had the gall to ask Conrad before circling around the rubble, probably to avoid having to kneel under his own sword.

Conrad tried to twist a bit so he could shoot Orochimaru in his overconfident back with a blast of fire. The only fire he got though was the pain he felt as his muscles contracted against the blade pinning him.

He choked back a cry of pain, his hands instinctively closing around the blade. He briefly tried to pull it out, despite the way his fingers were getting cut on the edge, but that just made the pain worse. He'd probably start to bleed out as soon as he pulled it out anyway. Conrad wondered if this was how Minato had felt before he’d died.

They were losing. He hated to admit it, but they were losing against this bastard. He couldn't even help with the fight he could clearly hear going on behind him, and only listened to the occasional declarations born from a friendship turned into hatred, because he was stuck.

He fumbled to reach a healing potion, mostly to deal with the pain but also because he'd rather not trust Orochimaru's word about the current state of his innards. And because he was pretty sure his body was close to going into shock. The potion would help with that, but it would make pulling the sword out more difficult. Maybe he could become ethereal with the Thu’um, and一no. He's 'holding' the sword, technically. So it would be affected by the shout.

But what if he... summoned some atronachs to pull it off? Of course! It was so obvious! And they'd help Jiraiya too. Who, based on the sounds he was hearing, was being hit more often than Orochimaru was.

Letting go of the empty bottle, he moved his hands closer to better focus on the conjuration. That was when, between the light coming from the hole in the ceiling and his spell, he noticed the many tables in the room.

And the corpses on them.

Conrad had spent many, many years going into the dark ruins scattered in the wilds of Skyrim and beyond. During those times, he’d seen many prisons, torture chambers, vampire hideouts, lairs of dark sorcerers and cultists. In short, he had seen many disturbing things. The sight in front of him managed to be more horrible than the banquet he’d witnessed in Castle Volkihar.

The worst part wasn't how neatly organized the tables were, but how clean the room was. There was effort put into this, effort for a reason... and Conrad had no idea what may justify or explain this. Or everything else he had witnessed since he’d broken down the gate to this pit of suffering.

They would lose. Jiraiya would die, and then Orochimaru would keep Conrad alive to ask him about obscure, half-remembered and very possibly wrong Akavir lore. And then... then Orochimaru would go after the children.

After the children. After the boy .

Unless Conrad did something.

He kept channeling the magic between his hands, but the will behind it shifted, aiming for a different purpose. He’d never done something like this before. But he had read the lore and the tomes found in the caves and the ruined forts scattered all over Skyrim, albeit briefly. To understand what he spent many years fighting. He had never thought that he'd end up using such a spell.

The boy's safety was on the line though. What would he do to ensure his safety, Conrad asked himself?

Everything.

Conrad released the spell, unleashing a wave of otherworldly energies all over the room.

The corpses, who had been laying on the tables in various sorry states, started twitching.

The fight was raging on through the corridors carved inside the mountain.

As she drank an orange, slightly glowing potion in one go, Sakura couldn't help but wonder if Kabuto was herding the boys somewhere. Pushing them in the direction he wanted them to go.

She threw the bottle away as she kept moving to stay out of reach, ignoring the feeling of her muscles burning up. In a good way, if that was possible. The empty bottle clattered on the ground, and she picked another one from the satchel.

It barely slowed her down now, it was as if it didn't weigh anything at all.

While she drank again, Kabuto stopped Sasuke's attack and manhandled him straight against Naruto, so that the Kyuubi's caustic chakra would hurt him.

Sakura's fingers left large cracks in the bottle, but she ignored the traitor's taunting words to the boys and quickly drank one more potion. Kabuto had ignored her since she had dragged Suigetsu away from the fight, only aiming at her if she tried to get closer so that Sasuke or Naruto would expose themselves by coming to her rescue.

Why would Kabuto have to worry about her, anyway? He knew the strengths and weaknesses of Konoha's genin very well. Compared to her classmates back at the Academy, Sakura had only her smarts. She didn't have a bloodline limit or a clan tradition or a big angry monster stuck inside of her. She had somehow been put in a team that included all of that. After the exams, she’d been very aware of the differences between her and her teammates.

But now? She had left a trail of emptied bottles with labels she couldn't read behind her. She felt the way the foreign magic was surging through her body. And for the first time in her life, Sakura felt strong.

Letting go of the bottle she rushed in, faster than she'd ever been. Faster than Lee had been. The expression on Kabuto's face before her fist broke his jaw was incredibly cathartic.

A pale purple light had washed over the mortuary, or whatever this room was used for, and the dead had stirred in its wake.

For a very brief moment, Jiraiya had thought that Orochimaru had used the Edo Tensei. But everything about them was wrong. They were not moving like a person would. Instead they lurched, moving in an unnatural way, still sporting the injuries that had killed them. Their eyes were the worst part. There didn't seem to have any traces of sentience or personality in there. Just looking at them made Jiraiya’s hair stand on end.

He almost struck one by reflex, when he realized that they weren’t interested in him at all. They were focusing all of their attention towards Orochimaru, who looked as surprised as he was.

Both of their eyes moved to the point of origin of the unearthly energies: the pile of rubble on which Conrad Harissen had been skewered against. The man was barely visible, but his hands were both raised and wrapped in the strange light that had reanimated the bodies.

Orochimaru jumped in that direction, either to finish off the man or ask him how he’d done it. Jiraiya couldn’t tell, but still he crashed against Orochimaru with both of his feet and sent him towards a group of the dead. Of course, Orochimaru managed to land graciously and snarl at Jiraiya.

That was when the closest walking corpse grabbed his shoulder. Orochimaru immediately reacted, snapping the offending wrist like a twig. The corpse didn’t even react, and more joined in an attempt to swarm him. Punches, savage kicks, some even attempted to bite him. Orochimaru blocked each strike and retaliated with his own, which should’ve killed them.

The dead attacked with a mindless fervor, heedless of devastating, crippling wounds. Yet for all that they couldn’t even touch Orochimaru. They were nothing to him, too slow and too weak.

But more kept coming, each one giving them time by distracting their foe.

Jiraiya knew that this was a good chance to strike and finish off his former friend once and for all. He doubted that he’d have another chance.

Then he heard the pained rattle of Minato’s brother from the other side of the rubble.

Taking advantage of the fact that Orochimaru was distracted, he rushed to help Conrad, quickly taking in his condition. Sword stuck in his abdomen and a strange seal on his mouth.

Jiraiya grabbed one of the potions hanging at the man's belt, knowing that he'd need it soon. Then he held the sword and pulled. The man's cries of pain were muffled by the sealed lips. Once the blade was out, Jiraiya felt it escape from his grip. Orochimaru had recalled it to him, and started to rend the dead with it. Jiraiya didn't miss a beat and uncorked the bottle, pouring the contents directly on the wound.

It seemed to work, because Conrad's flesh knitted itself back together and the man's face looked slightly less pale.

And then Conrad's hands moved in an elaborate manner, a spell, Jiraiya realized. Part of the old Sage's mind wondered how those movements worked in comparison to the hand signs used in ninjutsu.

Two of those flaming creatures the Nord used to summon in battle appeared, twirling mid-air and immediately unleashing bolts of fire against Orochimaru. One, he dodged. The other, he used one of the shambling corpses as a shield.

Jiraiya knew they didn't have much time. The best course of action would've been to take Conrad, regroup with the genin and keep moving until they were all back in Konoha. And then ask Conrad what the hell he’d done because it honestly disturbed him.

So he held the man and tried to pick him up. Much to his surprise, Conrad actually slapped his hands away, silently glaring as he steadied himself on his feet.

The crazy bastard wanted to stay and fight? After an injury like that?!

"I hope you have a plan," Jiraiya said. It was useless to waste time arguing. He figured it was best to use it by writing a seal on a tag.

With a grim expression, Conrad pulled something out of a small pouch hanging from his belt. A rough-looking crystal or gem. Very dark in color, with some purple reflections. Jiraiya didn't know what it meant, but it felt like an answer to his unspoken question.

Jiraiya nodded. He'd distract Orochimaru, and then Conrad would do whatever that thing meant. As long as they got away alive and found the kids again, it was good in Jiraiya's book. He slapped the tag with the counter seal he had just finished on Conrad’s mouth, and then jumped into the fray before the Nord could protest. He went low to avoid a slash from Orochimaru's sword, a Rasengan already forming in his right hand.

Kabuto slashed at Sakura, cutting deep. It did hurt, but it was more like... a hollow pain. More manageable.

Probably because the cut was closing so fast that it made Kabuto's own regeneration look like a parlor trick. Sakura laughed, not really sure why. She felt like that time Ino had dared her to drink a caffeine energy drink. But stronger, coming from her very core.

She caught Kabuto's hand with her own, and squeezed . Something popped in there, breaking like breadsticks. Behind her, she heard the sound of birds chirping as a blueish glow illuminated the hall.

Kabuto's eyes widened, and immediately tried to free himself by striking Sakura. But she was faster, and hit him in the solar plexus with her free hand. Twice. Then, for good measure, she threw him over her shoulder as he had the wind knocked out of him.

"Now!" she yelled as Kabuto slammed heavily on the ground.

The last things he saw were a chidori going straight for his heart, and a small, blue sphere of destruction being aimed at his face.

Orochimaru swatted his hand away, as if he was shooing away an annoying bug, and the spinning sphere of destruction bore a hole into a nearby corpse's torso. To Jiraiya's amazement, instead of just collapsing, it broke apart into a smoking pile of ash.

There was a bright flash, and a lightning bolt struck, moving through the animated bodies as if they were linked through a chain to strike at Orochimaru. He dodged, Conrad's spell crashed against the walls. Jiraiya used his momentum from his failed charge to twist his body and kick as hard as he could. It impacted against Orochimaru's wrist, and the sword clanged against the floor.

Orochimaru engaged him with taijutsu. Parry, parry, deflection and strike back. A well-known rhythm, Orochimaru's style so familiar and yet so alien after all these years.

In the corner of his eye Jiraiya could see Conrad holding that stone in his hand, looking like he was trying to figure out what to do next. There was something in his expression that Jiraiya couldn't really read.

Orochimaru feinted then, exploiting an opening to once again recall his sword. The sudden lunge forced the Toad Sage to gain some distance, and he got ready for the next cleaving strike. But instead of pressing his attack, Orochimaru rushed towards Conrad. Jiraiya silently cursed, already forming a jutsu to hinder or stop him. Orochimaru's sword rose.

A sickly purple light suddenly shot from Conrad's extended hand. The light faintly coated Orochimaru's body, shimmering as he stopped on his tracks.

Jiraiya hesitated. He couldn't see Orochimaru's face, but he could plainly see the way he trembled. The way the blade was shaking in his hand. Orochimaru was scared. He couldn't remember the last time he’d seen Orochimaru expressing fear.

Neither Conrad or Jiraiya let that moment of hesitation go to waste. A kunai thrown by Jiraiya went through Orochimaru’s neck just a scant beat before a spike of ice buried itself in the ninja’s stomach.

There were no cries of pain or choked gurgles. A strange sound came from Orochimaru's throat, and then his body seemed to twist and bloat. A snake fell from the folds of his clothes. Followed by another. And another. Snakes as white as milk, slithering on the floor. Finally, a figurative torrent of reptiles erupted from Orochimaru, his body slowly deflating and collapsing.

Both Jiraiya and Conrad were taken by surprise, but they weren't attacking. They were fleeing, moving towards the cracks in the pavement and walls that had been created by the fight. Realizing this, the Nord started blasting waves of flames from his free hand, trying to burn as many as possible. Jiraiya followed suit, with a fire jutsu of his own.

For a moment, all that could be heard in the chamber was the raging of flames and the sizzling of the snakes contorting at their passing.

Orochimaru's body had been reduced to an empty husk, like the skin shed from a snake, covered in the clothes he was still wearing. Conrad set fire to those, too.

Was it over, then? Did they win? Was Orochimaru... dead?

Conrad was staring at the gem in his hand, a hard look in his eyes. Then he made a sharp gesture and all the remaining corpses collapsed like puppets from Suna that got their wires cut, dissolving into piles of ash.

Conrad ignored them, drinking a potion while still gazing at the stone.

Jiraiya wondered what he had just done. What had that spell been? What could scare Orochimaru like that?

He wasn’t sure he wanted to know. But he could always ask later. After they were far away from this place, and nobody’s life was on the line.

"Conrad, we need to move," Jiraiya reminded him. Minato's brother nodded, putting the stone back where he’d taken it from.

As they went to look for the kids, he spoke up. “Did you really have to burn off my beard?”

As soon as they had managed to get out of the base and got over being blinded by the sun, Naruto and his teammates had collapsed on the ground.

They weren't worried about any ambushes from stragglers because the dragon had apparently decided to keep an eye on them. Like a very big hen around tired chicks. A big hen that could tear apart anyone that tried anything.

Which was why the Konoha-nin that had arrived shortly after they had laid down had not dared approach yet. So the newcomers had got themselves busy by talking with the groups of former prisoners that every now and then got out of the mountain. Every now and then they also captured some Sound-nin that seemed very eager to surrender as soon as they saw daylight. And the ninja surrounding them. And the dragon.

"We made it," Naruto said after a while.

"Yeah," Sakura said, looking pale. Sasuke nodded, hissing as he massaged the spot where the cursed seal was.

"Maybe you shouldn't touch that."

"It hurts," the Uchiha admitted. Naruto just knew that Jiraiya would want to check on that. And his own seal while he was at it, even if the Kyuubi's chakra had pretty much subsided by now. Naruto felt like he had burned it all at once with that last attack down there.

"So... good teamwork, guys," he said.

"We sucked," Sasuke countered.

"No we didn't!"

"We won, didn't we?" Sakura asked, sounding very tired.

"Yeah, what Sakura-chan said!" Naruto nodded.

"If we had been stronger I wouldn’t have been taken in the first place!" Sasuke protested.

"What? That's dumb!"

"Can we not fight until we get home?" Sakura pleaded, massaging her temples.

"Are you alright, Sakura-chan?" Naruto asked.

"I've got a headache. It's nothing."

There was another moment of silence.

"Thank you," Sasuke said. "Both of you."

Before Sakura or Naruto could answer, the dragon craned its large head, staring at something. They all followed its gaze and saw Jiraiya of the Sannin and Naruto's uncle walking towards them.

It wasn't an impressive or heroic looking walk. Conrad was limping and one of his arms was wrapped around Jiraiya's shoulders. The fact that Conrad seemed to also be carrying a large, heavy sack probably didn't help.

The dragon rumbled something that Naruto realized were words, and his uncle answered in his own mother tongue. He couldn't understand a word, but he recognized one very clearly. His father's name.

Then the dragon gave a deep nod with its head and vanished in a swirl of purple energies. Conrad slowly sat beside him, letting the sack fall down. Some of the contents fell out. A sword hilt was sticking out of the pile of scrolls, books and various items that the man had claimed for himself.

He seemed to notice where their eyes had fallen on. "We'll split the loot later, once we're back in Konoha," Conrad told them as he uncorked one of his potions.

"Split it?"

"Of course. Best way to deal with it: everyone that took part in the expedition gets an equal share," he explained, pausing to drink. "... where's water boy?"

"He left," Sakura explained.

"Oh. Well, that's one share less then," Conrad shrugged.

"We lost a lot of time collecting that," Jiraiya said disapprovingly.

"I told you they were safe near Durnehviir, I could sense that."

"That's not the point, Conrad," the Sannin sighed.

"So... did you win, Uncle? Ero-Sennin?" Naruto spoke up. Conrad gave him a look.

"Boy, if we had lost we'd not be here."

"What happened to your beard?" he asked, noticing how it had got burnt in a very odd pattern that reminded Naruto of a starfish. At that, his uncle glared at Jiraiya for some reason, but they were interrupted by a Konoha shinobi approaching.

It was Ino's father, the Yamanaka clan head. "Conrad. Jiraiya-sama," he greeted them.

"Inoichi. Aren't you T&I these days?" Jiraiya asked.

"I volunteered," he said, before looking at the genin. "Are you three alright?"

"Yeah! We kicked butt!" Naruto nodded. Sasuke and Sakura didn't seem to share his energy though.

"I'll send one of our medics once they're done checking the prisoners," Inoichi told them. Then he looked at Naruto's uncle. "Has anyone ever told you that you're a very stressful person to be around?"

"I do my best," Conrad deadpanned. "Look, it's nice that you came to help, thank you. But you’re late. Do you mind letting me speak with my nephew for a bit?"

Inoichi looked around, both at the prisoners Naruto and the others had freed from the prison level and to some shinobi from Sound that had surrendered. Food was being given to the former prisoners. Some were basking in the sun. Others were protesting about not being able to leave immediately. And one was being restrained, having apparently tried to kick one of the shinobi that had surrendered.

He sighed. "Sure, I'll clean up your mess, I guess. Just so you know, the Hokage will want a report of this. A detailed one."

"Sure, whatever her Hokage-ness desires," Conrad grumbled.

"If you need it, I have a razor in my field kit," Inoichi said as he went to give some orders to the other Leaf shinobi. Naruto could've sworn he was smirking.

His uncle muttered some words at the man's back, which he had the weird feeling would've been very offensive if anyone could understand them.

Sakura unslung the big satchel that was still around her shoulders, and handed it to Conrad. "I drank a few. Sorry."

Conrad accepted the satchel with a nod. "A 'few'?" he asked slowly after having checked inside.

"It was an emergency," Sakura explained. “I didn’t drink the blue ones, like you said.” Conrad gave her a good look.

"Do you feel any aches? Tiredness? Pains?"

"I feel like I'm a bit feverish. And tired."

Conrad stared for a moment. Then he turned towards Jiraiya. "Can you get her some water to drink?"

"I don't think I can drink anything else," she protested. Conrad ignored her.

Jiraiya's eyes briefly moved between Naruto and Conrad. "Sure. Anything else?"

"If she pukes, it's fine. Actually, it's probably for the best," he added. Sakura wanted to protest.

"I don't want to一" she objected, but Jiraiya interrupted her.

"Come on, Sakura. Let's get you some water. Sasuke, come with me too. I have to check your seal."

Sasuke nodded, stepping up, letting himself be guided away. Sakura followed.

Naruto sat by his uncle, waiting for him to speak up.

"Boy. You're grounded."

He nodded, having expected this. Naruto wondered what it would be like, being grounded? Surely he’d still be able to train and go on missions, right?

"I'd do it again," he said defiantly. Saving his friend was worth being grounded, in his opinion.

"Next time you better ask for help. Tell an adult you trust."

"There was no time! If I told Granny Tsunade, she'd have had to call a team and stuff!" he protested. By then, the jerks that had kidnapped Sasuke would’ve been too far!

"You should have made a clone right away. You could've left a note, at least."

"Well, I didn't think about that back then!"

"I guess I'll have to hammer some good sense in that head of yours, somehow," his uncle said, ruffling his hair.

"Hey! I'm not dumb!" he protested.

"I know you're not, Naruto. But you'll have plenty of things to learn already. Like how to speak Cyrodillic. And Nordic too, while we're at it. Good thing you'll have a lot of free time."

Naruto would’ve liked to point out that being grounded and free time weren’t the same thing. But a question popped in his mind. "Wait, aren't those the languages you and your students speak?"

"Yes."

"Why do I have to learn them?" Naruto asked. “You already speak mine.”

"Because you're coming home with me, boy."

Blood Ties - Igornerd - Elder Scrolls V: Skyrim [Archive of Our Own] (2024)

References

Top Articles
Latest Posts
Article information

Author: Rueben Jacobs

Last Updated:

Views: 5658

Rating: 4.7 / 5 (57 voted)

Reviews: 80% of readers found this page helpful

Author information

Name: Rueben Jacobs

Birthday: 1999-03-14

Address: 951 Caterina Walk, Schambergerside, CA 67667-0896

Phone: +6881806848632

Job: Internal Education Planner

Hobby: Candle making, Cabaret, Poi, Gambling, Rock climbing, Wood carving, Computer programming

Introduction: My name is Rueben Jacobs, I am a cooperative, beautiful, kind, comfortable, glamorous, open, magnificent person who loves writing and wants to share my knowledge and understanding with you.